MiCOM P437
Distance Protection Device
Version P437 –308 –408/409 –612
Technical Manual
P437/EN M/Ac8
(AFSV.12.10100 EN)
!
Warning
When electrical equipment is in operation dangerous voltage will be present in certain parts of the equipment.
Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment
and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the device must be isolated. Where stranded conductors are used,
wire end ferrules must be employed.
The signals 'M a i n : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y ' and 'S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) ' (permanently assigned to the LEDs
labeled 'OUT OF SERVICE' and 'ALARM') can be assigned to output relays to indicate the health of the
device. AREVA T&D strongly recommends that these output relays are hardwired into the substation's
automation system, for alarm purposes.
Any modifications to this device must be in accordance with the manual. If any other modification is made
without the express permission of AREVA T&D, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product
unsafe.
Proper and safe operation of this device depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage,
installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing.
For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this device.
The User should be familiar with the warnings in the Safety Guide (SFTY/4LM/F11 or later version), with the
warnings in Chapters 5, 9, 10 and 11 and with the content of Chapter 13, before working on the equipment. If
the warnings are disregarded, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
Qualified Personnel
are individuals who
† are familiar with the installation, commissioning and operation of the device and of the system to which it is being connected;
† are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety engineering standards and are authorized to energize and deenergize equipment and to isolate, ground and label it;
† are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering standards;
† are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Note
The operating manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning and operation. However, the manual
cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific
problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales office and request the
necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of AREVA, including settlement of warranties,
result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the operating manual.
Stückprüfbescheinigung P437
Routine Test Certificate P437
AREVA Energietechnik GmbH ist ein DNV zertifiziertes Unternehmen.
Fertigung und Prüfung der Schutzeinrichtungen erfüllen die Anforderungen von EN ISO 9001.
AREVA Energietechnik GmbH has been awarded the DNV certificate by the internationally recognized, independent and impartial
association for the certification of quality assurance systems, DNV (DET NORSKE VERITAS CERTIFICATION FRANCE), thereby
certifying that AREVA has introduced and uses a state-of-the-art quality assurance system that complies with all requirements stated
in EN ISO 9001 that apply to its products and services.
Stückprüfung
Routine Test
Alle Prüfungen nach IEC 255-6 und DIN EN 60255-6.
All tests according to IEC 255-6 and EN 60255-6.
Die folgenden Überprüfungen waren Gegenstand der Stückprüfung bei Referenzbedingungen:
The following tests have been carried out as part of the routine test under reference conditions:
1 Übereinstimmung der Schutzeinrichtung mit Bestückungs- und Anschlussplan
Conformity of the protection device with components list, location diagram and terminal connection diagram
2 Isolationsprüfung
Insulation test
3 Stromversorgung im Bereich 0,8 UH,nom ≤ UH,nom ≤ 1,1 UH,nom
Power supply within the range 0.8 VA,nom ≤ VA,nom ≤ 1.1 VA,nom
4 Prüfung der Genauigkeit der Einstellwerte
Accuracy of the setting values
5 Ansprech- und Kommandozeiten für alle wesentlichen Funktionen
Operate and command times for all essential functions
6 Funktionsprüfung aller binären Signaleingänge und Kontakte
Functional testing of all binary signal inputs and contacts
7 100 % kontrollierter Wärmedauerlauf
100 % controlled thermal endurance test
Changes after going to press
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7
8
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Contents
1
Application and Scope
1-1
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.10
2.11
2.12
Technical Data
Conformity
General Data
Tests
Type Tests
Routine Tests
Environmental Conditions
Inputs and Outputs
Interfaces
Information Output
Settings
Deviations
Deviations of the Operate Values
Deviations of the Timer Stages
Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
Recording Function
Power supply
Current Transformer Specifications
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-3
2-3
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-9
2-12
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-18
2-19
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
Operation
Modular Structure
Operator-Machine Communication
Configuration of the Measured
Value Panels
Serial Interfaces
PC interface
Rear port communication
interface 1
Rear port communication
interface 2
Rear port communication
interface 3
IEC 61850 Communication
interface
Time Synchronization via the
IRIG-B Interface
Configurable Function Keys
Configuration and Operating Mode
of the Binary Inputs
Measured data input
Direct Current Input on the Analog
(I/O) Module Y
Connecting a Resistance
Thermometer to the "PT 100
Analog Input" on the Analog (I/O)
Module Y
Configuration, Operating Mode,
and Blocking of the Output Relays
Measured data output
BCD measured data output
Analog measured data output
Output of ‘External’ Measured
Data
Configuration and Operating Mode
of the LED Indicators
(Function Group LOC)
3-1
3-1
3-3
3-4
(Function Group PC)
(Function Group COMM1)
3-7
3-7
3-9
(Function Group COMM2)
3-18
(Function Group COMM3)
3-21
(Function groups IEC,
GOOSE, and GSSE)
(Function Group IRIGB)
3-26
3-33
(Function Group F_KEY)
(Function Group INP)
3-34
3-36
(Function Group MEASI)
3-37
3-38
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.9
3.10
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.11
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-42
(Function Group OUTP)
3-43
(Function Group MEASO)
3-46
3-49
3-54
3-60
(Function Group LED)
3-61
9
Contents
(continued)
3.12
3.12.1
3.12.2
3.12.3
3.12.4
3.12.5
3.12.6
3.12.7
3.12.8
3.12.9
3.12.10
3.12.11
3.12.12
3.12.13
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.21.1
3.21.2
3.21.3
3.21.4
3.21.5
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.25
3.26
3.27
3.27.1
3.27.2
3.27.3
3.27.4
3.27.5
3.27.6
3.27.7
3.27.8
3.27.9
3.28
3.29
10
Main Functions of the P437
Conditioning of the Measured
Variables
Operating Data Measurement
Configuring and Enabling the
Protection Functions
Inrush stabilization (harmonic
restraint)
Multiple blocking
Blocked/faulty
Monitoring and processing of CB
status signals
Close command
Starting Signals and Tripping
Logic
Time Tagging and Clock
Synchronization
Resetting Actions
Assigning Communications
Interfaces to Physical
Communications Channels
Test mode
Parameter subset selection
Self-monitoring
Operating data recording
Monitoring signal recording
Overload data acquisition
Overload recording
Fault data acquisition
Fault recording
Distance protection
Starting
Selection of Measured Variables
Distance and Directional
Measurement
Impedance-time characteristics
Selection of Trip Mode for Zone 1
Power swing blocking
Measuring-circuit monitoring
Backup overcurrent-time
protection
Switch on to fault protection
Protective signaling
Auto-reclosing control
High-Speed Reclosure (HSR)
Time-Delay Reclosure (TDR)
Rapid Reclosure (RRC)
Secondary Fault Treatment
Parallel Blocking
Zone Extension
Control Using External AutoReclosing Control (ARC)
General control functions
Counters
Automatic synchronism check
Ground fault (short-circuit)
protection
(Function Group MAIN)
3-64
3-64
3-66
3-84
3-86
3-88
3-89
3-90
3-92
3-94
3-105
3-107
3-110
(Function Group PSS)
(Function Group SFMON)
(Function Group OP_RC)
(Function Group MT_RC)
(Function Group OL_DA)
(Function Group OL_RC)
(Function Group FT_DA)
(Function Group FT_RC)
(Function Group DIST)
(Function group PSB)
(Function Group MCMON)
(Function Group BUOC)
(Function Group SOTF)
(Function Group PSIG)
(Function Group ARC)
(Function Group ASC)
(Function Group GFSC)
3-111
3-112
3-114
3-117
3-118
3-119
3-120
3-123
3-134
3-140
3-140
3-158
3-164
3-186
3-195
3-197
3-212
3-221
3-223
3-227
3-259
3-266
3-278
3-280
3-283
3-284
3-287
3-289
3-290
3-293
3-294
3-311
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Contents
(continued)
3.30
3.33
3.34
3.35
3.36
3.37
3.38
3.39
Ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling
Definite-time overcurrent
protection
Inverse-time overcurrent
protection
Thermal overload protection
Time-voltage protection
Over-/underfrequency protection
Directional Power Protection
Circuit breaker failure protection
Limit value monitoring
Programmable logic
4
4.1
4.2
Design
Designs
Modules
4-1
4-2
4-7
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
Installation and Connection
Unpacking and Packing
Checking Nominal Data and Design Type
Location Requirements
Installation
Protective and Operational Grounding
Connection
Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
Connecting the IRIG-B interface.
Connecting the Serial Interfaces
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-11
5-12
5-12
5-15
5-15
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.4
6.5.5
6.5.6
6.5.7
6.5.8
6.5.9
Local Control Panel
Display and Keypad
Changing between Display Levels
Display Illumination
Control at Panel Level
Control at the Menu Tree Level
Navigation in the Menu Tree
Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode
Change-enabling function
Changing Parameters
Setting a List Parameter
Memory Readout
Reset
Password-Protected Control Actions
Changing the Password
6-1
6-2
6-6
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-19
6-20
6-21
7
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.3.1
7.1.3.2
7.1.3.3
Settings
Parameter
Device Identification
Configuration parameters
Function Parameters
Global
General Functions
Parameter Subsets
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-6
7-54
7-54
7-59
7-75
3.31
3.32
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
(Function Group GSCSG)
3-332
(Function Groups DTOC)
3-347
(Function Groups IDMT)
3-361
(Function Group THERM)
(Function Group V<>)
(Function Group f<>)
(Function Group P<>)
(Function Group CBF)
(Function Group LIMIT)
(Function Group LOGIC)
3-378
3-382
3-393
3-400
3-413
3-425
3-431
11
Contents
(continued)
8
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.1.1
8.1.1.2
8.1.1.3
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
Information and Control Functions
Operation
Cyclic Values
Measured Operating Data
Physical State Signals
Logic state signals
Control and testing
Operating data recording
Events
Event counters
Measured event data
Event recording
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-8
8-14
8-37
8-43
8-44
8-44
8-46
8-48
9
9.1
9.2
Commissioning
Safety Instructions
Commissioning Tests
9-1
9-1
9-3
10
Troubleshooting
10-1
11
Maintenance
11-1
12
Storage
12-1
13
Accessories and Spare Parts
13-1
14
Order Information
14-1
Appendix
Address list:
See chapters 7, 8 and 10 and the settings
in the operating program MiCOM S1 / S&R-103.
12
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
1 Application and Scope
1
Application and Scope
The MiCOM P437 distance protection device is designed for selective short circuit
protection and overload protection with 1-/3-pole high-speed reclosure (HSR) in
effectively grounded high-voltage and extra-high voltage (E.H.V.) power systems.
The multitude of protection functions incorporated into the device enable the user to
cover a wide range of applications in the protection of cable and line sections.
Moreover there are numerous backup protection and automatic control functions
available.
The relevant protection parameters can be stored in four independent parameter subsets
in order to adapt the device to different operating and power system management states.
General Functions
General Functions are complete function groups, which may be individually configured or
cancelled, depending on the application (e.g. included in or excluded from the device’s
configuration).
(An exception is the function MA IN , which is always visible.)
A function is selected by a mouse click in the operating program:
Unused or de-configured function groups are hidden to the user, thus simplifying the
menu.
Communication functions and measured value functions may also be configured or
excluded.
This concept provides a wide choice of functions and makes wide-ranging application of
the protection device possible, with just one model version. On the other hand simple
and clear parameter settings and adaptations to each protection scheme can be made.
The powerful programmable logic provided by the device also makes it possible to
accommodate special applications.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
1-1
1 Application and Scope
(continued)
General Functions
21
DIST
P437
Distance protection
> Six distance stages, including one that can be used as a special stage
> Overcurrent starting, undervoltage starting and underimpedance
starting with load blinding
> Polygonal (quadrilateral) or circular tripping characteristics
> Eight time stages, two of which are final time stages
> Directional voltage memory
> Optional parallel line compensation
68
PSB
Power swing blocking and power swing starting
MCMON
Measuring-circuit monitoring
BUOC
Backup overcurrent-time protection (Backup DTOC)
50/27
SOTF
Switch on to fault protection
85-21
PSIG
Protective signaling
79
ARC
25
67N
ASC
GFSC
Auto-reclosing control
High-speed reclosure (HSR), time-delayed reclosure (TDR), rapid
reclosure (RRC)
Automatic synchronism check
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection
85-67N
GSCSG
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
50/51 P,Q,N
DTOC
51/67 P,Q,N
IDMT
49
THERM
Definite-time overcurrent protection
4 stages, phase, negative-sequence and residual current measuring
systems
Inverse-time overcurrent protection
one stage, directional, phase, negative-sequence and residual current
measuring systems
Thermal overload protection
27/59 P,Q,N
V<>
81 O/U
f<>
50BF/62
P<>
Time-voltage protection
2 stages each, phase, positive-sequence, negative-sequence and neutraldisplacement voltages
Frequency protection
4 stages, may be combined with (df/dt) and (Δf/Δt)
Power directional protection
CBF
Circuit breaker failure protection
LIMIT
Limit value monitoring
LOGIC
Programmable logic
Communication Functions
COMM1, COMM2
2 information interfaces
IRIGB
IRIG-B
COMM3
InterMiCOM protective interface
1/3p
Optional
P437
Optional
IEC, GOOSE, GSSE IEC 61850 communications protocol
Input/output functions
INP / OUTP
MEASI / MEASO
1-2
P437
Binary signal inputs / Output relays (maximum number)
28 / 46
Measured Value Functions
P437
Analog input / output
(2 x 20 mA output, 20 mA and resistance thermometer inputs)
Optional
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
1 Application and Scope
(continued)
Global functions
In addition to the listed features, and extensive self-monitoring, the P437 offers the
following global functions:
Global functions
PSS
OP_RC
OL_DA
OL_RC
FT_DA
FT_RC
Parameter subset selection
System measurements to support the user during commissioning, testing and operation
Operating data recording (time-tagged event logging)
Overload data acquisition
Overload recording (time-tagged event logging)
Fault data acquisition for a particular, settable point in time during a fault
Fault recording (time-tagged event logging together with fault value recording of the three
phase currents, the residual currents, the three phase-to-ground voltages, the neutralpoint displacement voltage and the reference voltage before, during and after a fault).
Further functions
Further functions
MAIN
DVICE
Main function
Device
F_KEY
LED
LOC
PC
Function keys
LED indicators
Local control panel
PC link
SFMON
MT_RC
Comprehensive self-monitoring
Monitoring signal recording
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
1-3
1 Application and Scope
(continued)
Functional diagram
Communication
COMM1
Self
Monitoring
IRIGB
COMM2
to SCADA / substation control / RTU / modem ...
via RS485 or Fibre Optics
using IEC60870-5-101, -103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier,
UCA2, IEC61850
Recording and
Data
Acquisition
LIMIT
Metering
Overload rec.
Ground flt. rec.
Fault rec.
Vref
21
DIST
50/27
SOTF
85-21
PSIG
68
PSB
VTS/CTS
MCMON
51 P,N
BUOC
50/51 P,Q,N
DTOC
51/67 P,Q,N
IDMT
67N
GFSC
49
THERM
25
ASC
79
ARC
I
V
IN,par
conventional
signalling
85-67N
GSCSG
27/59 P,Q,N
V<>
81 O/U
f<>
protection
communication
InterMiCOM
MEASI/MEASO
always available
optional
1-4
LOGIC
Distance Protection P437
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
1 Application and Scope
(continued)
Design
The P437 is modular in design. The plug-in modules are housed in a robust aluminum
case and electrically interconnected via one analog module and one digital module.
Inputs and outputs
The P437 has the following inputs and outputs:
Current-measuring inputs
4 or 5 voltage-measuring inputs (ordering option)
Up to 32 binary signal inputs (opto couplers) with user-definable function assignment
Up to 46 output relays with user-definable function assignment
1 PT 100 input (optional)
1 input, 0 to 20 mA (optional)
2 outputs, 0 to 20 mA (optional)
The nominal current and voltage values of the measuring inputs on the P437 can be set
with the function parameters.
The nominal voltage range of the optical coupler inputs is 24 to 250 V DC. As an option
binary signal input modules with a higher operate threshold are available.
The auxiliary voltage input for the power supply is also designed for an extended range.
The nominal voltage ranges are 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. A 24 V DC
version is also available.
All output relays can be utilized for signaling and command purposes.
The optional PT 100 input is lead-compensated, balanced and linearized for PT 100
resistance thermometers as per IEC 751.
The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring, zero
suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input variable via 20
adjustable interpolation points.
Two selectable measured variables (cyclically updated measured operating data and
stored measured fault data) can be output as a burden-independent direct current via the
two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined via 3 adjustable
interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA, for example) for slave-side
open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine scaling, and a limitation to lower
nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where sufficient output relays are available, a
selectable measured variable can be output in BCD-coded form by contacts.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
1-5
1 Application and Scope
(continued)
Local control and display
Local control panel
17 LED indicators, 12 with user-definable functional assignment
PC interface
Communication interfaces (optional)
Information interfaces
Information is exchanged through the local control panel, the PC interface, or two
optional communication interfaces (channel 1 and channel 2).
Using the first communication interface, the numerical protection device can be wired
either to the substation control system or to a telecontrol system.
The first communication interface is optionally available with a switcheable protocol (per
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, DNP 3.0, Modbus or Courier) or as an IEC 61850
interface.
The second communication interface (communication protocol per IEC 60870-5-103
only) is designed for remote control.
External clock synchronization can be accomplished by using the optional IRIG-B input.
A direct link to other MiCOM protection devices can be set up by applying the optional
InterMiCOM protective interface (channel 3).
1-6
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2 Technical Data
2
2.1
Technical Data
Conformity
Notice
Applicable to P437, version -308-408/409-612.
Declaration of conformity
(As per Article 10 of EC Directive 72/73/EC.)
The product designated ‘P437 Distance Protection Device’ has been designed and
manufactured in conformance with the European standards EN 60255-6 and
EN 60010-1 and with the ‘EMC Directive’ and the ‘Low Voltage Directive’ issued by the
Council of the European Community.
2.2
General Data
General device data
Design
Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation or flush-mounted case for
19" cabinets and for control panels.
Installation Position
Vertical ± 30°
Degree of Protection
Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529.
IP 52; IP 20 for rear connection space with flush-mounted case
(IP 10 for ring-terminal connection)
Weight
Approx. 11.7 kg
Dimensions and Connections
See dimensional drawings (Chapter 4) and terminal connection diagrams (Chapter 5).
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2-1
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Terminals
PC interface (X6):
EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin
Communication Interface:
Optical fibers
(X7, X8 and X31, X32):
F-SMA optical fiber connection
per IEC 874-2 and DIN 47258 (for plastic fibers)
or
optical fiber connection BFOC-ST® connector 2.5
per IEC 874-10 and DIN 47254-1 (for glass fibers)
(ST® is a registered trademark of AT&T
Lightguide Cable Connectors)
or connection of wire leads
(X9, X10 and X33):
M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections
up to 1.5 mm²
or RS 232 for InterMiCOM only
(X34):
EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin.
or (for IEC 61850 only via
100 Mbit/s Ethernet board) (X13):
Glass fiber SC and wire RJ45
IRIG-B Interface (X11): BNC plug
Current Measuring Inputs:
Threaded terminal ends for pin-type cable lugs: M5,
self-centering with cage clamp to protect conductor cross-sections ≤ 4 mm2
or:
Threaded terminal ends for ring-type cable lugs: M4
Other Inputs and Outputs:
Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M3,
self-centering with cage clamp to protect conductor cross-sections 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
or:
Threaded terminal ends, ring-type cable lugs: M4.
Creepage Distances and Clearances
Per EN 61010-1§ and IEC 664-1.
Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V,
overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV.
2-2
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.3
Tests
2.3.1
Type Tests
Type tests
All tests per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6.
Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
Interference Suppression
Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22, Class A.
1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test
Per IEC 255 Part 22-1 or IEC 60255-22-1, Class III
Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV
Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV
Test duration: > 2 s, Source impedance: 200 Ω
Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge
Per EN 60255-22-2 or IEC 60255-22-2, severity level 3.
Contact discharge, single discharges: > 10
Holding time: > 5 s
Test voltage: 6 kV
Test generator: 50 to 100 MΩ, 150 pF / 330 Ω
Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy
Per EN 61000-4-3 and ENV 50204, severity level 3.
Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sides
Test field strength, frequency band 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V / m
Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80 %
Single test at 900 MHz AM 200 Hz / 100 %
Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements
Per EN 61000-4-4 and IEC 60255-22-4, severity levels 3 and 4
Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns
Impulse duration (50% value): 50 ns
Amplitude: 2 kV / 1 kV or 4 kV / 2 kV
Burst duration: 15 ms
Burst period: 300 ms,
Burst frequency: 5 kHz or 2.5 kHz
Source impedance: 50 Ω
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2-3
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Current/Voltage Surge Immunity Test
Per EN 61000-4-5 or IEC 61000-4-5, insulation class 4
Testing of circuits for power supply
and asymmetrical or symmetrical lines.
Open-circuit voltage, front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 µs
Short-circuit current, front time / time to half-value: 8 / 20 µs
Amplitude: 4 / 2 kV
Pulse frequency: > 5 / min,
Source impedance: 12 / 42 Ω
Immunity to Conducted Disturbances
Induced by Radio Frequency Fields
Per EN 61000-4-6§ or IEC 61000-4-6, severity level 3.
Test voltage: 10 V
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity
Per EN 61000-4-8§ or IEC 61000-4-8, severity level 4.
Frequency: 50 Hz
Test field strength: 30 A / m
Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity
Per IEC 255-11.
12 %
Insulation
Voltage Test
Per DIN EN 61010-1 and IEC 255-5
2 kV AC, 60 s.
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply
inputs. The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Impulse Voltage Withstand Test
Per IEC 255-5.
Front time: 1.2 µs
Time to half-value: 50 µs
Peak value: 5 kV
Source impedance: 500 Ω
2-4
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Mechanical robustness
1(**)
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 1
Frequency range in operation:
10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 1 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test
Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2,
acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation), test
severity class 1 ,
5 g for 11 ms,
Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport), test
severity class 1 ,
15 g for 11 ms
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 1
Frequency range:
5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle.
Mechanical robustness
2(**)
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 2
Frequency range in operation:
10 to 60 Hz, 0.075 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 1.0 g
Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 2 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test
Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2,
acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation), test
severity class 2,
10 g for 11 ms;
Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport), test
severity class 1,
15 g for 11 ms
Shock bump tests are carried out to verify permanent shock (during transport), test
severity class 1,
10 g for 16 ms
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 2
Frequency range:
5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 7.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 20 / 10 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle.
(**)
Mechanical robustness 2:
Valid for P437, if one of the following case variants is used:
̌
Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 2 (with angle brackets and frame)
̌
Surface-mounted case
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2-5
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.3.2
Routine Tests
All tests per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6
and DIN 57435 Part 303.
Voltage Test
Per IEC 255-5.
2.2 kV AC, 1 s.
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply
inputs.
The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Additional Thermal Test
100% controlled thermal endurance test, inputs loaded.
2.4
Environmental Conditions
Environment
Temperatures
Recommended temperature range: -5°C to +55°C (23°F to 131°F)
Storage and transit: -25°C to +70°C [+23 °F to +131 °F]
Ambient Humidity Range
≤ 75 % relative humidity (annual mean),
56 days at ≤ 95 % relative humidity and 40°C (104°F), condensation not permissible.
Solar Radiation
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.
2.5
Inputs and Outputs
Measuring inputs
Current
Rated current: 1 and 5 A AC (settable).
Nominal burden per phase: < 0.13 VA at Inom
Load rating:
continuous: 4 Inom
for 10 s: 30 Inom
for 1 s: 100 Inom
Nominal surge current: 250 Inom
Voltage
Nominal voltage Vnom: 50 to 130 V AC (settable)
Nominal burden per phase: < 0.3 VA at Vnom = 130 V AC
Load rating: continuous 150 V AC
Frequency
Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz and 60 Hz (adjustable)
Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom
Frequency protection: 40 to 70 Hz
2-6
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Binary signal inputs
Threshold Pickup and Drop-off Points as per Ordering Option
18V standard variant (VA,nom: = 24 to 250 V DC):
Switching threshold in the range 14 V ... 19 V
Special variant with switching thresholds from 58 to 72 % of the nominal supply voltage
(i.e. definitively ,low’ for VA < 58 % of the nominal supply voltage,
definitively ,high’ for VA > 72 % of the nominal supply voltage)
"Special variant 73 V": Nominal supply voltage 110 V DC
"Special variant 90 V": Nominal supply voltage 127 V DC
"Special variant 146 V": Nominal supply voltage 220 V DC
"Special variant 155 V": Nominal supply voltage 250 V DC
Power consumption per input
Standard variant:
VA = 19 ... 110 V DC: 0.5 W ± 30 %,
VA > 110 V DC: VA • 5 mA ± 30 %.
Special variant:
Vin > Switching threshold: VA • 5 mA ± 30 %.
Notes
The standard variant of binary signal inputs (opto couplers) is recommended in most
applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 19V. Special versions with
higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds are provided for applications where a higher switching
threshold is expressly required.
The maximum voltage permitted for all binary signal inputs is 300V DC.
IRIG-B interface
Minimum / maximum input voltage level (peak-peak): 100 mVpp / 20 Vpp.
Input impedance: 33 kΩ at 1 kHz.
Electrical isolation: 2 kV
Direct current input
Input current: 0 to 26 mA
Value range: 0.00 to 1.20 IDC,nom (IDC,nom = 20 mA)
Maximum permissible continuous current: 50 mA
Maximum permissible input voltage: 17 V
Input load: 100 Ω
Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (adjustable)
Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA
Zero suppression: 0.000 to 0.200 IDC,nom (adjustable)
Resistance thermometer
inputs
Resistance thermometer: only PT 100 permitted,
Mapping curve as per IEC 751.§
Value range: -40.0 ... +215.0 °C
3-wire configuration: max. 20 Ω per conductor.
Open and short-circuited input permitted
Open-circuit monitoring: Θ > +215 °C and Θ < -40 °C
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2-7
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Output relays
Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC
Continuous current: 5 A
Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s
Making capacity:
1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms
Breaking capacity:
0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms
4 A at 230 V AC and cosϕ = 0.4
BCD measured data output
Maximum numerical value that can be displayed: 399
Analog measured data
output (DC current output)
Value range:
0 to 20 mA
Permissible load:
0 ... 500 Ω
Maximum output voltage: 15 V
2-8
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.6
Interfaces
Local control panel
Input or output:
via 7 keys and a 4 x 20 character-LCD display
State and fault signals:
23 LED indicators (4 permanently assigned, 19 freely configurable)
PC interface
Transmission rate: 300 to 115,200 baud (adjustable)
Communication interfaces
1 to 3
The communication module can be provided with up to three communication channels,
depending on the module variant. Channel 1 and 3 may either be equipped to connect
wire leads or optical fibers and channel 2 is only available to connect wire leads.
For communication interface 1, communication protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103,
IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS or DNP 3.0 (as of version P437 -610 Courier) can be set.
Communication interface 2 can only be operated with the interface protocol based on
IEC 60870-5-103.
Communication interface 3 permits end-end channel-aided digital communication
schemes to be configured for real time protective signaling between two protection
devices (InterMiCOM protective interface).
For Wire Leads
Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation
Distance to be bridged:
Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m
Multipoint connection: max. 100 m
Transmission rate
Communication
Protocol
BA-no. -910
(one channel)
300 to 19,200 baud (adjustable)
IEC 60870-5-103
BA-no. -921
(two channels)
300 to 64 000 baud
(adjustable for COMM1)
300 to 57 600 baud
(adjustable for COMM2)
Can be set by user for
one channel
BA-no. -951
(InterMiCOM)
600 to 19 200 baud (adjustable)
1)
Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a
system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2-9
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Plastic Fiber Connection
Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm
Optical output: min. -7.5 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -20 dBm
Optical input: max. -5 dBm
Distance to be bridged:1) max. 45 m
Transmission rate
Communication
Protocol
BA-no. -910
(one channel)
300 to 38,400 baud (adjustable)
IEC 60870-5-103
BA-no. -922
(two channels)
300 to 64 000 baud
(adjustable for COMM1)
300 to 57 600 baud
(adjustable for COMM2)
Can be set by user for
one channel
BA-no. -952
(InterMiCOM)
600 to 19 200 baud (adjustable)
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125
Optical wavelength: typically 820 nm
Optical output: min. -19.8 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -24 dBm
Optical input: max. -10 dBm
Distance to be bridged:1) max. 400 m
Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125
Optical wavelength: typically 820 nm
Optical output: min. -16 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -24 dBm
Optical input: max. -10 dBm
Distance to be bridged:1) max. 1400 m
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125 or G 62.5/125
Transmission rate
Communication
Protocol
BA-no. -910
(one channel)
300 to 38,400 baud (adjustable)
IEC 60870-5-103
BA-no. -924
(two channels)
300 to 64 000 baud
(adjustable for COMM1)
300 to 57 600 baud
(adjustable for COMM2)
Can be set by user for
one channel
BA-no. -954
(InterMiCOM)
600 to 19 200 baud (adjustable)
1)
Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a
system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation.
2-10
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2 Technical Data
(continued)
IRIG-B interface
B122 format
Amplitude modulated signal
Carrier frequency: 1 kHz
BCD-coded variation data (daily)
Data transmission using
the IEC 61850 protocol
Order ext. No. -936:
Interface to connect a 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber-SC and wire RJ45
For Wire Leads
per RJ45, 1.5 kV isolation
Distance to be bridged: max. 100 m
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125
Optical wavelength: typically 1300 nm
Optical output: min. -23.5 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -31 dBm
Optical input: max. -14 dBm
Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125
Optical wavelength: typically 1300 nm
Optical output: min. -20 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -31 dBm
Optical input: max. -14 dBm
The second communication interface (RS 485 connection, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol) is
also available.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2-11
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.7
Information Output
Counters, measured data, signals and LED indications: see Chapter 8.
2.8
Settings
Typical characteristic data
Main function
Minimum output pulse duration for trip command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
Output pulse duration for a close command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
Distance protection
Minimum starting time: 12 ms
Starting reset time: 30 ms ± 10 ms
Directional sensitivity
up to 2 s after fault detection: ∞
up to 2 s after fault detection and for switching on to fault: 200 mV ± 20 %
Shortest tripping time: approx. 199 ms
Starting and measurement resetting ratio (hysteresis): 0.95
Definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection
Operate time inclusive of output relay
(measured variable from 0 to 2-fold operate value):
≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Reset time (measured variable from 2-fold operate value to 0): ≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Starting resetting ratio: approx. 0.95
Time-voltage protection
Operate time including output relay (measured variable from nominal value to 1.2-fold
operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.8-fold operate value):
≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Reset time (measured variable from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal value or measured
variable from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value):
≤ 45 ms, approx. 30 ms
Resetting ratio for V<>: 1 to 10 % (adjustable)
for operate values > 0.6 Vnom and Vnom/√3: approx. 0,95
for operate values < 0.6 Vnom and Vnom/√3: approx. 1.05
2-12
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9
Deviations
2.9.1
Deviations of the Operate Values
Definitions
‘Reference Conditions’
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %, ambient
temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom
‘Deviation’
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Distance protection
Starting V<, VNG>, VNG>>
Deviation: ± 3 %
Starting I>, I>>, IN>
with setting range 0.1 to 0.25 Inom: ± 5 %
with setting range > 0.25 Inom: ± 3 %
Starting Z< at ϕk = 0°, 30°, 60°, 90°
Deviation: ± 5 %
Impedance Measurement Z<
Deviation at ϕk = 0°, 90°: ± 3 %
Deviation at ϕk = 30°, 60°: ± 5 %
Direction Determination
Deviation: ± 3°
Measuring-circuit
monitoring
Operate values Ineg, Vneg
Deviation: ± 3 %
Backup overcurrent-time
protection (Backup DTOC)
Operate value I>
Deviation: ± 3 %
Time-overcurrent
protection
Operate Values
Deviation: ± 5 %
Time-voltage protection
Operate Values
V<>, Vpos<>: Deviation ± 1 % (in the range 0.6 to 1.4 Vnom)
VNG>, Vneg>: Deviation ± 1 % % (in the range > 0.3 Vnom)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2-13
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Frequency protection
Operate Values
fnom = 50 Hz: Deviation: ± 30 mHz
fnom = 60 Hz: Deviation: ± 40 mHz
df/dt protection
Operate Values
fnom = 50 Hz: Deviation: ± 0.1 Hz/s
fnom = 60 Hz: Deviation: ± 0.1 Hz/s
Thermal overload
protection (reaction time)
Operate value
Deviation ± 7.5 % when I/Iref = 6
Direct current input
Deviation: ± 1 %
Resistance thermometer
Deviation: ± 2 ° or ± 1 %
Analog measured data
output
Deviation: ± 1 %
Output residual ripple with max. load: ± 1 %
2.9.2
Deviations of the Timer Stages
Definitions
‘Reference Conditions’
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %,
ambient temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
‘Deviation’
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Definite-time stages
Deviation 1 % + 20 ms to 40 ms
Inverse-time stages
Deviation when I ≥ 2 Iref:
± 5 % + 10 to 25 ms
For IEC characteristic 'extremely inverse' and for thermal overload protection:
± 7.5 % + 10 to 20 ms
Delays with the
frequency protection
Deviation ± 1 % + max. 80 ms (depending on gate time)
2-14
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9.3
Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
Definitions
‘Reference Conditions’
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %,
ambient temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
‘Deviation’
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Operating Data
Measurement
Measuring Input Currents
Deviation: ± 1 %
Measuring Input Voltages
Deviation: ± 0.5 %
Internally Formed Resultant Current and Negative-Sequence System Current
Deviation: ± 2 %
Internally Formed Neutral-point Displacement Voltage and Voltages of Positive- and
Negative-Sequence Systems
Deviation: ± 21 %
Active and Reactive Power / Active and Reactive Energy
Deviation: ± 2 % when cos ϕ = ± 0.7
Deviation: ± 5 % when cos ϕ = ± 0.3
Load Angle
Deviation: ± 1°
Frequency
Deviation: ± 10 mHz
Direct Current of Measured Data Input and Output
Deviation: ± 1 %
Temperature
Deviation: ± 2 °C
Fault data acquisition
Short-Circuit Current and Voltage
Deviation: ± 3 %
Short-Circuit Impedance
Deviation: ± 5 %
Fault Location
Deviation: ± 5 %
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2-15
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Internal clock
With free running internal clock:
Deviation: < 1 min/month
With external synchronization (with a synchronization interval ≤ 1 min):
Deviation: < 10 ms
With synchronization via IRIG-B interface: ± 1 ms
2.10 Recording Functions
Organization of the Recording Memories:
Operating data memory
Scope for signals:
All operation-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different logic
state signals (see Address List: "Operating Data Memory")
Depth for signals
The 100 most recent signals
Scope for signals:
All signals relevant for self-monitoring from a total of 1024 different
logic state signals (see Address List: "Monitoring Signal Memory")
Depth for signals
Up to 30 signals
Number:
The 8 most recent overload events
Scope for signals:
All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of 1024
different (see Address List: "Overload Memory")
Depth for signals
200 entries per overload event
Number:
The 8 most recent ground fault events
Scope for signals:
All signals relevant for a ground fault event from a total of 1024
different (see Address List: "Ground fault memory")
Depth for signals
200 entries per ground fault event
Monitoring signal memory
Overload memory
Ground fault memory
2-16
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Fault memory
Number:
The 8 most recent faults
Scope for signals:
Signals:
All fault-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different logic state
signals (see Address List: "Fault Memory")
Depth for fault values:
Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages
Depth for signals
Signals:
200 entries per fault event
Depth for fault values:
max. number of cycles per fault can be set by user;
820 periods in total for all faults, that is 16.4 s (for fnom = 50 Hz) or
13.7 s (for fnom = 60 Hz)
Resolution of the Recorded Data
Signals
Time resolution:
1 ms
Time resolution:
20 sampled values per period
Dynamic range:
100 Inom / 25 Inom (adjustable)
Fault values
Phase currents system
Amplitude resolution:
6.1 mA r.m.s / 1.5 mA r.m.s for Inom = 1 A
30.5 mA r.m.s / 7.6 mA r.m.s for Inom = 5 A
Residual current
Dynamic range:
16 Inom
Amplitude resolution:
0.98 mA r.m.s. for Inom = 1 A
4.9 mA r.m.s. for Inom = 5 A
Voltages
Dynamic range:
150 V AC
Amplitude resolution:
9.2 mV r.m.s.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2-17
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.11 Power supply
Power supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom:
24 V DC or 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC (ordering option)
Operating range for direct voltage:
0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
Operating range for alternating voltage: 0.9 to 1.1 VA,nom
Nominal burden where VA = 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration
(relays de-energized/energized):
approx. 13 W / 37 W
Start-up peak current:
< 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms
Permitted supply interruption:
≥50 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 220 V DC
2-18
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.12 Current Transformer Specifications
The following equation is used to calculate the specifications of a current transformer for
the offset maximum primary current:
Vsat = (Rnom + Ri ) ⋅ n ⋅ Inom ≥ (R op + Ri ) ⋅ k ⋅ I1' ,max
where:
Vsat:
I'1,max:
Inom:
n:
k:
Rnom:
Rop
Ri
saturation voltage (IEC knee point)
non-offset maximum primary current, converted to the secondary side
rated secondary current
rated overcurrent factor
over-dimensioning factor
rated burden
actual connected operating burden
internal burden
The specifications of a current transformer can then be calculated for the minimum
required saturation voltage Vsat as follows:
Vsat ≥ (R op + Ri ) ⋅ k ⋅ I1' ,max
As an alternative, the specifications of a current transformer can also be calculated for
the minimum required rated overcurrent factor n by specifying a rated power Pnom as
follows:
(R
(
+ Ri )
Pop + Pi )
I1' ,max
'
n≥
⋅k ⋅I =
⋅k ⋅
(Rnom + Ri ) nom (Pnom + Pi ) Inom
op
where:
2
Pnom = Rnom ⋅ Inom
2
Pop = R op ⋅ Inom
2
Pi = Ri ⋅ Inom
Theoretically, the specifications of the current transformer could be calculated for lack of
saturation by inserting instead of the required over-dimensioning factor k its maximum
value:
k max ≈ 1 + ωT1
where:
ω:
T1:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
system angular frequency
system time constant
2-19
2 Technical Data
(continued)
However, this is not necessary. Instead, it is sufficient to calculate the overdimensioning factor k such that the normal behavior of the analyzed protective function is
guaranteed under the given conditions.
The over-dimensioning factor 'k' necessary for the distance protection may be read from
figure 2-1. The dotted line depicts the theoretical characteristic k(T1) = 1 + ωT1.
Current transformers should observe the error limit values for class 5P. CTs class TPY
per IEC 44-6 Part 6 ("Current Transformers with Anti-remanence Cores") should
preferably be used in case a HSR is applied.
2-1
2-20
Required over-dimensioning factor for distance protection with fnom = 50 Hz
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
3
3.1
Operation
Modular Structure
The P437, a numeric device, is part of the MiCOM P 30 family of devices. The device
types included in this family are built from identical uniform hardware modules.
Figure 3-1 shows the basic hardware structure of the P437.
3-1
Basic hardware structure
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-1
3 Operation
(continued)
The external analog and binary quantities – electrically isolated – are converted to the
internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y, and X. Commands and
signals generated by the device internally are connected to external plant via contacts
through the binary I/O modules X. The external auxiliary voltage is applied to the power
supply module V, which supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required internally.
Analog data is transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus module B to
the processor module P. The processor module contains all the elements necessary for
the conversion of measured analog variables, including multiplexers and analog/digital
converters. The analog data conditioned by the analog I/O module Y is transferred to
the processor module P via the digital bus module. Binary signals are fed to the
processor module by the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The processor
handles the processing of digitized analog variables and of binary signals, generates the
protective trip and signals, and transfers them to the binary I/O modules X via the digital
bus module. The processor module also handles overall device communication. As an
option, communication module A can be mounted on the processor module to provide
serial communication with substation control systems.
The control and display elements of the integrated local control panel and the integrated
PC interface are housed on control module L.
3-2
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.2
Operator-Machine Communication
The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between the user
and the device:
Integrated local control panel (LOC)
PC interface
Communication interface
All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are arranged
within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is uniform throughout the
device family. The main branches are:
‘Parameters’ branch
All settings are contained in this branch. This branch carries all settings, including the
device identification data, the configuration parameters for adapting the device interfaces
to the system, and the function parameters for adapting the device functions to the
process. All values in this group are stored in non-volatile memory, which means that
the values will be preserved even if the power supply fails.
‘Operation’ branch
This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured operating
data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically and consequently
is not stored. In addition, various controls are grouped here, for example those for
resetting counters, memories and displays.
‘Events’ branch
The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. All information in this group is
therefore stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the measured fault
data, and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can be read out when
required.
Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in accordance
with the user’s choice. Chapters 7,8 and 10 describe the settings, signals and measured
values available with the P437. The possible setting values can be found in the P437's
data model file associated with the PC operating program (MiCOM S1).
The configuration of the local control panel also permits the installation of Measured
Value 'Panels’ on the LCD display. Different Panels are automatically displayed for
specific system operating conditions. Priority increases from normal operation to
operation under overload conditions and finally to operation following a short circuit in the
system. Thus the P437 provides the measured data relevant for the prevailing
conditions.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-3
3 Operation
(continued)
3.3
Configuration of the Measured Value Panels (Function Group LOC)
The P437 offers Measured Value Panels, which display the measured values relevant at
a given time.
During normal power system operation, the Operation Panel is displayed. As an event
occurs, the display switches to the appropriate Event Panel - provided that measured
values have been selected for the Event Panels. In the event of overload event, the
display will automatically switch to the Operation Panel at the end of the event. In the
event of a fault, the Fault Panel remains active until the LED indicators or the fault
memories are reset.
Operation Panel
The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided that at
least one measured value has been configured.
The user can select which of the measured operating values will be displayed on the
Operation Panel by means of an ‘m out of n’ parameter. If more measured values are
selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to
the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e f o r
P a n e l s or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
LOC:Fct.
Operation Panel
[ 053 007 ]
Measured value 1
m out of n
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Select. meas. values
FT RC: Record.
in progress
[ 035 000 ]
S1 1
LOC: Autom.
return time
[ 003 014 ]
LOC: Autom.
Return time
LOC: Hold-time
for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
LOC: Hold-time
for Panels
C
R1
OL RC: Record. in
progress
[ 035 003 ]
Operation Panel
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
3-2
3-4
Operation Panel
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault panel
The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault,
provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel
remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are cleared.
The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault Panel
by setting an 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display
than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of
values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e f o r P a n e l s or
when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
LOC: Fct. Fault
Panel
[ 053 003 ]
Measured value 1
m out of n
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Select. meas. values
LOC: Hold-time
for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
R
Fault Panel
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
3-3
Fault panel
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-5
3 Operation
(continued)
Overload Panel
The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when there
is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The
Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends, unless a fault occurs. In this
case the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload Panel by
setting a 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display than
the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of values at
intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e f o r P a n e l s or when the
appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
LOC: Fct.
Overload Panel
[ 053 005 ]
Measured value 1
m out of n
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Select. meas. values
LOC: Hold-time
for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
Overload Panel
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
OL RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
3-4
Overload Panel
Reset Key
The P437 includes a reset key, the CLEAR key, to which one of several possible reset
functions may be assigned by selecting the required function at
L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e s e t k e y . See section „Resetting Actions“ in chapter 3 for
details about resetting counters.
3-6
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4
Serial Interfaces
The P437 has a PC interface as a standard component. Communication module A is
optional and can be provided with one or two communication channels, depending on
the design version. Communication between the P437 and the control station’s
computer is through the communication module A. Setting and interrogation is possible
through all the P437's interfaces.
If the communication module A with two communication channels is installed, settings for
two communication interfaces will be available. The setting of communication interface 1
(COMM1) may be assigned to the physical communication channels 1 or 2 (see section
"Main Functions"). If the COMM1 settings have been assigned to communication
channel 2, then the settings of communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be
active for communication channel 1. Communications channel 2 can only be used to
transmit data to and from the P437 if its PC interface has been de-activated. As soon as
the PC interface is used to transmit data, communications channel 2 becomes "dead".
It will only be enabled again after the PC interface “Time-out” has elapsed.
If tests are run on the P437, the user is advised to activate the test mode. In this way the
PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals accordingly (see section
"Main Functions").
3.4.1
PC Interface (Function Group PC)
Communication between the device and a PC is through the PC interface. In order for
data transfer between the P437 and the PC to function, several settings must be made in
the P437.
There is an operating program available as an accessory for P437 control (see
Chapter 13).
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-7
3 Operation
(continued)
3-5
3-8
PC interface settings
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.2
Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1)
Communication between the P437 and the control station’s computer is done through
the communication interface. Depending on the design version of communications
module A (see "Technical Data") there are several interface protocols available.
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is always supported. The following user-selected
interface protocols are available for use with the P437:
IEC 60870-5-103, "Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the informative
interface of protection equipment, first edition, 1997-12 (corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI
Recommendation, "Protection communication companion standard 1, compatibility
level 2", February 1995 edition) with additions covering control and monitoring
IEC 870-5-101, "Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: Transmission
protocols - Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks," first edition
1995-11
ILS-C, internal protocol of AREVA Energietechnik GmbH
MODBUS
DNP 3.0
COURIER
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P437.
Communication interface 1 can be blocked through a binary signal input. In addition,
a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary signal input.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-9
3 Operation
(continued)
3-6
3-10
Communication interface 1, selecting the interface protocol
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
COMM1: Line idle
state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1: Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1: Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1: Dead time
monitoring
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1: Mon. time
polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1: Octet
comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1: Test
monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1: Name of
manufacturer
[ 003 161 ]
COMM1: Octet
address ASDU
[ 003 073 ]
COMM1: Spontan.
sig. enable
[ 003 177 ]
COMM1: Selected
protocol
304 415
COMM1: IEC
870-5-103
[ 003 219 ]
COMM1: Select.
spontan.sig.
[ 003 179 ]
COMM1: Transm.
enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 074 ]
COMM1: Cycl. data
ILS tel.
[ 003 175 ]
COMM1: Delta V
[ 003 050 ]
COMM1: Delta I
[ 003 051 ]
COMM1: Delta P
[ 003 054 ]
COMM1: Delta f
[ 003 052 ]
COMM1: Delta
meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 150 ]
COMM1: Delta t
[ 003 053 ]
COMM1: Delta t
(energy)
[ 003 151 ]
COMM1: Contin.
general scan
[ 003 077 ]
COMM1: General
enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1: Command
blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN: Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
Communication interface
COMM1: Sig./meas.
block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1: Sig./meas.
val.block.
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1: Sig./meas.
block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN: Prot. ext.
disabled
[ 038 046 ]
47Z11FFA_EN
3-7
Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-11
3 Operation
(continued)
COMM1: Line idle
state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1: Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1: Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1: Dead time
monitoring
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1: Mon. time
polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1: Octet
comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1: Test
monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1: Name of
manufacturer
[ 003 161 ]
COMM1: Octet
address ASDU
[ 003 073 ]
COMM1: Spontan.
sig. enable
[ 003 177 ]
COMM1: Select.
spontan.sig.
[ 003 179 ]
COMM1: Transm.
enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 074 ]
COMM1: Max.
recording time
[ 003 075 ]
COMM1: Delta V
[ 003 050 ]
COMM1: Delta I
[ 003 051 ]
COMM1: Delta P
[ 003 054 ]
COMM1: Selected
protocol
304 415
COMM1: Delta f
[ 003 052 ]
COMM1: Delta
meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 150 ]
COMM1: IEC
870-5-101
[ 003 218 ]
COMM1: Delta t
[ 003 153 ]
COMM1: Delta t
(energy)
[ 003 151 ]
COMM1: Contin.
general scan
[ 003 077 ]
COMM1: Comm.
address length
[ 003 201 ]
COMM1: Octet 2
comm. addr.
[ 003 200 ]
COMM1: Cause
transm. length
[ 003 192 ]
COMM1: Länge
Adresse ASDU
[ 003 193 ]
COMM1: Octet 2
addr. ASDU
[ 003 194 ]
COMM1: Addr.
length inf.obj.
[ 003 196 ]
COMM1: Oct.3
addr. inf.obj.
[ 003 197 ]
COMM1: Inf.No.
<->funct.type
[ 003 195 ]
COMM1: Time tag
length
[ 003 198 ]
COMM1: ASDU1 /
ASDU20 conv.
[ 003 190 ]
COMM1: ASDU2
conversion
[ 003 191 ]
COMM1: Initializ.
signal
[ 003 199 ]
COMM1: Balanced
operation
[ 003 226 ]
COMM1: Direction
bit
[ 003 227 ]
COMM1: Time-out
interval
[ 003 228 ]
COMM1: General
enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1: Command
blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN: Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1: Sig./meas.
block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
0
1
Communication interface
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1: Sig./meas.
val.block.
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1: Sig./meas.
block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN: Prot. ext.
disabled
[ 038 046 ]
47Z11FGA_EN
3-8
3-12
Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
COMM1: Line idle
state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1: Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1: Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1: Dead time
monitoring
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1: Mon. time
polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1: Octet
comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1: Test
monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1: Name of
manufacturer
[ 003 161 ]
COMM1: Octet
address ASDU
[ 003 073 ]
COMM1: Spontan.
sig. enable
[ 003 177 ]
COMM1: Select.
spontan.sig.
[ 003 179 ]
COMM1: Transm.
enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 074 ]
COMM1: Cycl. data
ILS tel.
[ 003 175 ]
COMM1: Delta V
[ 003 050 ]
COMM1: Delta I
[ 003 051 ]
COMM1: Delta P
[ 003 054 ]
COMM1: Delta f
[ 003 052 ]
COMM1: Delta
meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 150 ]
COMM1: Delta t
[ 003 053 ]
COMM1: Delta t
(energy)
[ 003 151 ]
COMM1: Contin.
general scan
[ 003 077 ]
COMM1: Selected
protocol
304 415
COMM1: IEC 870-5,
ILS
[ 003 221 ]
COMM1: General
enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1: Command
blocking
[ 003 174 ]
Communication interface
MAIN: Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1: Sig./meas.
block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1: Sig./meas.
val.block.
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1: Sig./meas.
block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN: Prot. ext.
disabled
[ 038 046 ]
47Z11FHA_EN
3-9
Communication interface 1, settings for the ILS_C interface protocol
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-13
3 Operation
(continued)
3-10
3-14
Communication interface 1, settings for the MODBUS protocol
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-11
Communication interface 1, settings for the DNP 3.0 protocol
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-15
3 Operation
(continued)
3-12 Communication interface 1, settings for the COURIER protocol
3-16
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous
signals
For interface protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, or ILS_C it is
possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the control
station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered via setting parameters.
COMM1: Sel.
spontan.sig.test
[ 003 180 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal
COMM1: Test
spont.sig.start
[ 003 184 ]
0
COMM1: Spont.
signal start
[ --- --- ]
1
0: don’t execute
1: execute
COMM1: Test
spont.sig. end
[ 003 186 ]
0
COMM1: Spont.
signal end
[ --- --- ]
1
0: don’t execute
1: execute
3-13
Checking spontaneous signals
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-17
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.3
Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2)
Communication interface 2 supports the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol.
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P437.
3-18
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
COMM2: Line idle
state
[ 103 165 ]
COMM2: Baud rate
[ 103 071 ]
COMM2: Parity bit
[ 103 171 ]
COMM2: Dead time
monitoring
[ 103 176 ]
COMM2: Mon. time
polling
[ 103 202 ]
COMM2: Positive
ackn. fault
[ 103 203 ]
COMM2: Octet comm.
address
[ 103 072 ]
COMM2: Name of
manufacturer
[ 103 161 ]
COMM2: Octet
address ASDU
[ 103 073 ]
COMM2: General
enable USER
[ 103 170 ]
0
1
COMM2: Spontan.
sig. enable
[ 103 177 ]
COMM2: Select.
spontan.sig.
[ 103 179 ]
COMM2: Transm.
enab.cycl.dat
[ 103 074 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM2: Cycl. data
ILS tel.
[ 103 175 ]
COMM2: Delta V
[ 103 050 ]
COMM2: Sig./meas.
block.USER
[ 103 076 ]
COMM2: Delta I
[ 103 051 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM2: Delta P
[ 103 054 ]
COMM2: Delta f
[ 103 052 ]
COMM2: Delta
meas.v.ILS tel
[ 103 150 ]
COMM2: Delta t
[ 103 053 ]
MAIN: Prot. ext.
disabled
[ 038 046 ]
COMM2:Command
block. USER
[ 103 172 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
Communication
interface
47Z11FNA_EN
3-14
Settings for communication interface 2
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-19
3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous
signals
It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the
control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered via setting parameters.
3-15
3-20
Checking spontaneous signals
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.4
Communication Interface 3 (Function Group COMM3)
Application
Communication interface 3 is designed to establish a digital communication link between
two MiCOM devices over which up to 8 binary protection signals may be transmitted.
Whereas communication interfaces 1 and 2 are designed as information interfaces to
connect to data acquisition subsystems and for remote access, communication
interface 3 is designed as a protection signaling interface that will transmit real time
signals (InterMiCOM protection signaling interface). Its main application is to transmit
signals from protective signaling (function group PSIG). In addition, any other internal or
external binary signals may also be transmitted.
Physical medium
COMM3 is provided as an asynchronous, full-duplex communication interface.
To transmit data the following physical media are available:
Direct link without use of external supplementary equipment:
Glass fiber (e.g. via 2 x G62.5/125 up to max. 1.4 km)
Twisted pair (RS 422 up to max. 1.2 km)
Use of external transmission equipment:
FO module (e.g. OZD 485 BFOC-1300 / Hirschmann up to max. 8/14/20 km)
Universal modem (e.g. PZ 511 via twisted pair 2x2x0.5 mm up to max. 10 km)
Voice frequency modem (e.g. TD-32 DC / Westermo up to max. 20 km)
Digital network:
Asynchronous data interface of primary multiplexing equipment
Activating and Enabling
In order to use InterMiCOM, the communication interface COMM3 has to be configured
using the parameter C O M M 3 : F u n c t i o n g r o u p C O M M 3 . This setting parameter is
only visible if the relevant optional communication module is fitted. After activation of
COMM3, all addresses associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary
state signals etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting
COMM3: General enable USER.
Telegram configuration
The communication baud rate is settable (C OM M 3 : B a u d r a t e ) to adapt to the
transmission channel requirements. Sending and receiving addresses
(C O M M 3 : S o u r c e a d d r e s s and C OM M 3 : R e c e i v i n g a d d r e s s can be set to
different values, thus avoiding that the device communicates with itself.
The InterMiCOM protection signaling interface provides independent transmission of
eight binary signals in each direction. For the send signals (C OM M 3: F c t. as s i gnm .
s e n d x , with x = 1 to 8) any signal from the selection table of the binary outputs (OUTP)
can be chosen. For the receive signals (C OM M 3: F c t. as s i gnm . r ec . x ,
with x = 1 to 8) any signal from the selection table of the binary inputs (INP) can be
chosen.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-21
3 Operation
(continued)
For each receive signal, an individual operating mode can be set
( C O M M 3 : O p e r . m o d e r e c e i v e x , with x = 1 to 8), thus defining the required
checks for accepting the received binary signal. In addition a specifically selected
telegram structure subdivides the 8 binary signals into two groups. The signal encoding
along with the set operating mode for the telegram check defines the actual balance of
"Speed", "Security" and "Dependability" for each signal:
Binary signals 1 to 4:
Operating mode settable to 'Blocking' or 'Direct intertrip'
Binary signals 5 to 8:
Operating mode settable to 'Permissive' or 'Direct intertrip'
EN 60834-1 classifies 3 categories of command-based teleprotection schemes
according to their specific requirements (see figure 3-16). By selection of a binary signal
and by setting its operating mode appropriately, these requirements can be fulfilled as
follows:
Direct transfer trip or intertripping:
Preference:
Security
Implication:
No spurious pickup in the presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting:
Select binary signal from groups 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 and
set operating mode 'Direct intertrip'
Permissive teleprotection scheme:
Preference:
Dependability.
Implication:
Maximizes probability of signal transmission in the
presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting:
Select binary signal from group 5 to 8 and
set operating mode 'Permissive'
Permissive teleprotection scheme:
Preference:
Dependability.
Implication:
Maximizes probability of signal transmission in the
presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting:
Select binary signal from group 1 to 8 and
set operating mode 'Permissive'
3-22
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Speed
fast
Blocking
Permissive
slow
low
high
Direct
Intertrip
Security
high
Dependability
47Z1030A_EN
3-16
Comparison of speed, security and dependability offered by the three operating modes.
Communication monitoring
C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t c o m m . f a u l t is used for monitoring the transmission channel
(this timer is re-triggered with each complete and correct received telegram). The wide
setting range allows adaptation to the actual channel transmission times and above all
this is needed for time-critical schemes such as the blocking scheme. After the timer has
elapsed, signals C OM M 3 : C o m m u n i c a ti o n s fa u l t and
S F M ON : C om m uni c .faul t C OM M 3 are issued and the received signals are
automatically set to their user-defined default values
(C OM M 3 : D e fa u l t v a l u e r e c . x , with x = 1 to 8). As the main application for this
protective signaling the fault signal may be mapped to the corresponding input signal in
function group PSIG with the C OM M 3 : S i g .a s g . c o m m .fa u l t setting.
C OM M 3 : T i m e - o u t l i n k fa i l . is used to determine a persistent failure of the data
transmission channel. After the timer has elapsed, signals C OM M 3 : C o m m . l i n k
fa i l u r e and S F M ON : C o m m .l i n k fa i l .C OM M 3 are issued.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-23
3 Operation
(continued)
Telegramm
received
Character frame &
Source address check
Blocking
signals accepted
Telegram receive check
Permissive signals
accepted
Telegram CRC check
Direct Trip signals
accepted
(Re-)Trigger of the
monitoring timer
COMM3: Time-out
comm.fault
[120 033]
1
COMM3:
Communications
fault
[120 043]
COMM3: Time-out
link fail.
[120 035]
1
COMM3:
Comm. link failure
[120 044]
47Z1031B_EN
3-17
3-24
Message processing and communication monitoring
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Supervision of
communication
link quality
After a syntax check of each received message, InterMiCOM updates the ratio of
incorrectly received messages, based on a total of the last 1000 received messages.
The result is provided as an updating measurand C OM M 3 : N o . te l . e r r o r s p .u .
and the overall maximum ratio can be read from
COMM3: No.t.err.,max,stored.
If the set threshold C OM M 3 : L i m i t te l e g r . e r r o r s is exceeded the corresponding
signals C OMM3 : L i m . e x c e e d . , t e l . e r r .
and S F M ON : L i m .e x c e e d . , t e l . e r r . will be issued. All corrupted telegrams are
counted (C OM M 3 : N o . te l e g r a m e r r o r s ) . This counter as well as the stored
maximum ratio of corrupted messages can be reset via
C O M M 3 : R s e t . N o . t l g . e r r . U S E R (or via binary C O M M 3 : R e s e t . N o . t l g . e r r . E X T
signal , see section “Resetting Actions”) .
Commissioning tools
The actual values of send and receive signals can be read from the device as physical
state signals (C OM M 3: S tate s e n d x and C OM M 3: S tate r ec ei v e x , with x = 1
to 8). In addition, InterMiCOM provides 2 test facilities for commissioning of the
protection interface.
For a loop-back test, the send output is directly linked back to the receive input.
After setting the bit pattern wanted (as an equivalent decimal number at
C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k s e n d ) the test can be triggered via
C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k t e s t . This bit pattern is sent for the duration of the hold time set
at C OM M 3 : H o l d ti m e fo r te s t. For this test only, the source address is set to '0';
this value is not used for regular end-to-end communication. The test result can be
checked as long as the hold-time is running by reading the measured operating data
C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k r e s u l t and C OM M 3 : L o o p b a c k r e c e i v e . As soon as the
hold-time has expired, the loopback test is terminated and InterMiCOM reverts to the
normal sending mode (e.g. sending the actual values of the configured send signals,
using the set source address).
Thus, in case of problems with the InterMiCOM protection signaling interface,
the loopback test can be used to verify or to exclude a defective device.
The transmission channel including the receiving device can be checked manually by
setting individual binary signals
(C O M M 3 : S e n d s i g n a l f o r t e s t ) to user-defined test values
(C O M M 3 : L o g . s t a t e f o r t e s t ). After triggering the test by
C O M M 3 : S e n d s i g n a l , t e s t , the preset binary signal is sent with the preset value for
the set hold time C OM M 3: H ol d ti m e for tes t. The 7 remaining binary signals are
not affected by this test procedure and remain to be sent with their actual values. During
the hold time, a received signal can be checked at the receiving device, e.g. by reading
the physical state signal. After the hold time has expired, the test mode is reset
automatically and the actual values of all 8 signals are transmitted again.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-25
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.5
Communication interface IEC 61850
(Function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE)
The IEC 61850 communication protocol is implemented by these function groups and the
Ethernet module.
Note:
Function group IEC is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1
(hardware ordering option!).
3.4.5.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)
IEC 61850
The IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international
standard. The main target of the IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This includes
the capability of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED), manufactured by the
same company or different companies, to exchange data for combined operation.
Now this new communication standard IEC 61850 has created an open and common
basis for communication from the process control level down to the network control level,
for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands.
For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device a
data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data model, specifically
created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of data between the devices
and all process control installations interested in such information. In order to facilitate
engineering at the process control level a standardized description file of the device,
based on XML, is created with the help of the data model. This file can be imported and
processed further by the relevant configuration program used by the process control
device. This makes possible an automated creation of process variables, substations
and signal images.
The following documentation with the description of the IEC 61850 data model, used with
the P437, is available:
IDC file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language)
with a description of data, properties and services, available from the device, that are
to be imported into the system configurator.
PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of
available services.
MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of
available object types.
ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of parameter
addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used by the device with
the device data model as per IEC 61850.
3-26
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Ethernet Module
The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface
where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection which of the two interfaces
is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the parameter
IEC : E the r ne t m ed ia. There are two ordering variants available for the fiber optic
interface: the ST connector for 10 Mbit/s and 850 nm and the SC connector for
100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm. The RJ45 connector supports 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.
The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RJ485 interface for remote access
with the operating program MiCOM S1 (function group COMM2).
Notes:
The P437 may only be equipped with the optional Ethernet module as an
alternative to the optional standard communication module. Therefore the
Ethernet based communication protocol IEC 61850 is only available as an
alternative to function group COMM1.
Activating and Enabling
The function group IEC can be activated by setting the parameter IE C : Fun c ti on
g r ou p IEC . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication
module is fitted to the device. After activation of IEC, all data points associated with this
function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting
IEC: General enable USER.
The parameter settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not
automatically activated. An activation occurs either when the command IEC : E na ble
c on fig u ra tio n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online with
MAIN: Device on-line.
Client Log-on
Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system, as is
common with other protocols. Instead server or client functionalities, as defined in the
'Abstract Communication Service Interface' (ACSI, IEC 61870-7-2), are assigned to the
devices. A 'server' is always that device which provides information to other devices. A
client may log-on to this server so as to receive information, for instance 'reports'. In a
network a server can supply any number of clients with spontaneous or cyclic
information.
In its function as server the P437 can supply up to 16 clients with information.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-27
3 Operation
(continued)
Clock Synchronization
With IEC 61850 clock synchronization occurs via the SNTP protocol, defined as standard
for Ethernet. Here the P437 functions as an SNTP client.
For clock synchronization one can select between the operating modes Broadcast from
SNTP Server or Request from Server. In the first operating mode synchronization
occurs when a broadcast message is sent from the SNTP server to all devices in the
network. In the second operating mode the P437 requests the device specific time
signal during a settable cycle.
Fault Transmission
Transmission of fault files is supported per "File Transfer".
Transmission of "Goose
Messages"
The so-called "Goose Message" is a particular form of data transmission. Whereas
normal server-client-services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level, the "Goose
Message" is transmitted directly at the Ethernet level with a high transmission priority.
Furthermore these "Goose Messages" can be received by all participants in the
respective sub-network, independent of their server or client function. In IEC 61850
"Goose Messages" are applied for the accelerated transmission of information between
two or more devices. Application fields are, for example, a reverse interlocking, a transfer
trip or a decentralized substation interlock. In future the "Goose Message" will therefore
replace a wired or serial protective interface.
According to IEC 61850 there are two types of "Goose Messages", the GSSE and the
IEC-GOOSE. The GSSE is used to transmit binary information with a simple
configuration by 'bit pairs', and it is compatible with UCA2. However the IEC-GOOSE
enables transmission of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary
information, integer values or even analog measured values. But this will require more
extensive configuration with the help of the data model from the field unit situated on the
opposite side. With the IEC-GOOSE the P437 at this time supports sending and
receiving of binary information or two-pole external device states.
Communication with the
Operating Program MiCOM
S1 via the Ethernet
Interface
Direct access by the operating program MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet interface on the
device may occur according to the "tunneling principle". Transmission is carried out by
an Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is only supported by the associated operating
program MiCOM S1 (specific manufacturer solution). Such transmission is
accomplished over the same hardware for the network, which is used for server-client
communication and "Goose Messages".
Available are all the familiar functions offered by the operating program MiCOM S1 such
as reading/writing of setting parameters or retrieving stored data.
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group IEC are described
in chapters 7 and 8.
3-28
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.5.2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE)
For high-speed information exchange between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic
devices) in a local network, the P437 provides function group GOOSE as defined in the
IEC 61850 standard. GOOSE features high-speed and secure transmission for trip
commands, blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals.
"Goose Messages" are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. "Goose
Messages" therefore remain in the local network to which the device is logged-on.
Activating and Enabling
The function group GOOSE can be activated by setting the parameter
GOOSE : Fun c ti on g ro up GOOSE . This parameter is only visible if the optional
Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GOOSE, all
data points associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals
etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting
GOOSE: General enable USER.
The parameter settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not
automatically activated. An activation occurs either when the command IEC : E na ble
c on fig u ra tio n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online with
MAIN : Devic e on-line. In addition the function group IEC must be configured and
enabled.
Sending GOOSE
With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent from the P437. Selection of
binary state signals is made by setting GOOSE : Outp ut n fc t.a ssi g. (n = 1 to 32).
The assignment of data object indexes to logic state signals is made in the range from 1
to 32 according to the assignment to GOOSE outputs.
GOOSE is automatically sent with each new state change of a configured binary state
signal or an external device. There are numerous send repetitions in fixed ascending
time periods (10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms). If after 2
seconds there is no further state change apparent, GOOSE is then sent cyclically at 2second intervals.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-29
3 Operation
(continued)
In order to have unambiguous identification of GOOSE sent, characteristics such as the
Goose ID number, MAC address, application ID and VLAN identifier must be entered
through parameter settings. Further characteristics are the 'Dataset Configuration
Revision' with the fixed value "100" as well as the 'Dataset Reference', which is made up
of the IED name (setting in function group IEC) and the fixed string
"System/LLNO$GooseST".
GOOSE-DataSet: LLN0$GooseST
Identification:
Multicast MAC address: 01-0C-CD-01-00-00
VLAN Identifier: 0
VLAN Priority: 4
Application ID: 12288
Goose ID: "Local IED"
DataSet Ref. : "Local IEDSystem/LLNO"
DataSet Cfg. Revision: 100
Data range:
Server nameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out1/stVal
GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig.
Server nameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out2/stVal
…
GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig.
…
Server nameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out32/stVal
GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig.
64Z6090B_EN
3-18
3-30
Basic structure of sent GOOSE
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
With GOOSE up to 16 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the
logic state signals received
(GOOSE: Input n fct.assig. (n = 1 to 16))
is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs).
For each state signal to be received from an external device the "Goose Message" must
be selected that includes the information wanted by setting the Goose ID, the Application
ID and the 'Dataset Reference'. With the further setting of the data object index and the
data attribute index through parameters, the selection of the information wanted from the
chosen GOOSE will occur. The device will not evaluate the identification features VLAN
identifier and ‘Dataset Configuration Revision’ that are also included in the GOOSE
received.
Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information. This
corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition. If the duration of
validity has elapsed without having received this GOOSE again (i.e. because of a
communications fault), the received signals will automatically be set to their respective
default values GOOSE: Inp u t n d e fa ult (n = 1 to 16).
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are
described in chapters 7 and 8.
3.4.5.3 Generic Substation State Event (Function Group GSSE)
For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic
devices) in a local network, the P437 provides, as an additional functionality, the function
group GSSE (UCA2.0-GOOSE) as defined in the IEC 61850 standard. GSSE features
high-speed and secure transmission of logic binary state signals such as trip commands,
blocking, enabling and other signals.
Activating and Enabling
The Function Group GSSE can be activated by setting the parameter
GSSE: Function group GSSE. This parameter is only visible if the optional
Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GSSE, all data
points associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.)
become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting
GSSE: General enable USER.
The parameter settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not
automatically activated. An activation occurs either when the command IEC : E na ble
c on fig u ra tio n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online with
MAIN : Devic e on-line. In addition the function group IEC must be configured and
enabled.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-31
3 Operation
(continued)
Sending GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of binary state
signals is made by setting
GSSE: Output n fct.assig. (n = 1 to 32). Each state signal selected is to be
assigned to a bit pair in GSSE (G SSE: Output n bit pair (n = 1 to 32)), which will
transmit this state signal.
GSSE is automatically sent with each state change of a selected state signal. There will
be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send repetition occurs
at the given cycle time set with the parameter G SSE: Min. cycle . The cycles for the
following send repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with
the parameter GSSE : In cr em en t. Should no further state changes occur up to the
time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed (G SSE: Max. cycle), then GSSE will
be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the max. cycle time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GSSE sent, the IED name is used which
was set in function group IEC.
Receiving GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the logic
binary state signals received
(GSSE: Input n fct.assig. (n = 1 to 32))
is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs).
For each state signal to be received, the GSSE message, which will include the
information wanted, must be selected by setting the IED name (GSSE : IED n am e) .
Selection of information wanted from the selected GSSE will occur by setting the bit pair
(GSSE: bit pair).
Each GSSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GSSE repetition. If the duration
of validity has elapsed without having received this GSSE again (i.e. because of a fault in
communication), the signals received will automatically be set to their respective default
value (GSSE: Input n default (n = 1 to 32)).
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GSSE are
described in chapters 7 and 8.
3-32
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.5
IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB)
If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal clock of
the P437 can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional IRIG-B interface.
It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on the day only (day of the
current year). Using this information and the year set at the P437, the P437 calculates
the current date (DD.MM.YY).
Disabling or enabling the
IRIG-B interface
The IRIG-B interface can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter.
Synchronization readiness
If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P437 checks the received
signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P437. If the P437 does not
receive a correct signal in the long run, synchronization will not be ready any longer.
3-19
IRIG-B interface
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-33
3 Operation
(continued)
3.6
Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)
The P437 includes six additional function keys that are freely configurable. As an
example the operation of function key F1 is shown in figure 2-1. Function key F1 is only
enabled after the associated password, as defined at
F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d f u n c t . k e y 1 , has been entered. After the password has
been entered the function key will remain active for the time period set at
F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the
password is entered again. The same is valid for function keys F2 to F6.
Configuration of function
keys with a single function
Each function key may be configured with a single function by selecting a logic state
signal at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6), but with the exception:
L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). This function is triggered by pressing
the respective function key on the P437.
Configuration of function
keys with menu jump lists
Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two menu jump lists
assigned at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6) by selecting the listing at
L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). The functions of the selected menu
jump list are triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the assigned function key.
Both menu jump lists are assembled at L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x (x: 1 or 2).
Up to 16 functions such as setting parameters, event counters and/or event logs may be
selected.
Note: LED indicators including the six positioned directly next to the function keys are
configured independently and in this respect there is no relationship to the respective
function key configuration.
Configuration of the
READ key
As with L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x up to 16 functions may also be selected from
the same menu jump list at L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e a d k e y . They are triggered in
sequence by repeated pressing of the "READ" key.
Operating mode of the
function keys
For each function key the operating mode may be selected at
F _ K E Y : O p e r a t i n g m o d e F x (Fx: F1 to F6). Here it is possible to select whether
the function key operates as a key or as a switch. In the operating mode "Key" the
selected function is active while the function key is pressed. In the operating mode
"Switch" the selected function is switched on or off every time the function key is
pressed. The state of the function keys can be displayed.
3-34
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Handling keys
If backlighting for the LCD display is switched off it will automatically light up when a
function key or the "READ" key is pressed. The assigned function will only be triggered
when the respective key is pressed a second time. This is also valid for the other keys.
3-20
Configuration and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function or a menu jump list.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-35
3 Operation
(continued)
3.7
Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP)
The P437 has opto coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the substation. The
functions that will be activated in the P437 by triggering these binary signal inputs are
defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs.
The typical response time is < 10ms, although for reliability it is recommended that the
initiating signal is maintained for at least 30ms.
Configuring the binary
inputs
One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The same
function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated
from several control points having different signal voltages.
In this manual, we assume that the required functions (marked 'EXT' in the address
description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by configuration.
It should be noted that time-critical applications such as time synchronization commands
are not mapped to the binary signal inputs of the analog module as these have an
increased reaction time due to internal elaboration.
Operating mode of the
binary inputs
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (active 'high' mode) or the absence (active 'low' mode) of a voltage
should be interpreted as the logic '1' signal. The display of the state of a binary signal
input – 'low' or 'high' – is independent of the setting for the operating mode of the signal
input.
3-21
3-36
Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.8
Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)
When the P437 is equipped with the analog (I/O) module Y it has two analog inputs
available for measured data input. Direct current is fed to the P437 through the 20 mA
analog input (input channel 1). The other input is designed for connection of a PT 100
resistance thermometer.
The input current IDC present at the analog (I/O) module Y is displayed as a measured
operating value. The current that is conditioned for monitoring purposes (IDC,lin) is also
displayed as a measured operating value. In addition, it is monitored by the Limit Value
Monitoring function to detect whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds (see "Limit
Value Monitoring").
The measured temperature is also displayed as a measured operating value and
monitored by the limit value monitoring function to determine whether it exceeds or falls
below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring").
Disabling or enabling the
measured data input
function
The measured data input can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter.
3-22
Disabling or enabling the measured data input function
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-37
3 Operation
(continued)
3.8.1
Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y
External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA that is
directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured – the temperature, for
example.
If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the measured
quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged, provided that the
measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, for certain applications it may be
necessary to limit the range being monitored or to monitor certain parts of the range with
a higher or lower sensitivity.
By setting the value pair M E A S I: ID C x and M E A S I: ID C ,l i n x , the user specifies
which input current IDC will correspond to the current that is monitored by the Limit Value
Monitoring function, i.e., IDC,lin. The resulting points, called "interpolation points", are
connected by straight lines in an IDC-IDC,lin diagram. In order to implement a simple
characteristic, it is sufficient to specify two interpolation points, which are also used as
limiting values (see figure 3-23). Up to 20 interpolation points are available to implement
a complex characteristic.
When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a rising/rising or
falling/falling curve sense is allowed (no peak or vee-shapes). If the setting differs, the
signal S F MON : Inv al i d s c al i ng ID C will be generated.
3-23
3-38
Example of the conversion of 4 to 10 mA input current to 0 to 20 mA monitored current, IDC,lin
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
IDClin / IDC,nom
0,8
Interpolation points
IDC,lin20
0,7
0,6
IDC,lin4
0,5
0,4
IDC,lin3
0,3
IDC,lin2
0,2
IDC,lin1
0,1
0
0
0,1
0,2
IDC1
0,3
0,4
0,5
IDC2
0,6
IDC3
0,7
0,8
0,9
IDC4
1
IDC20
1,1
1,2
IDC / IDC,no
Enable IDC p.u.
D5Z52KEB
3-24
Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of 0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a broken line)
Zero suppression
Zero suppression is defined by setting M E A S I : E n a b l e I D C p . u . If the direct current
does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current IDC p.u. and the current
IDC,lin will be displayed as having a value of ‘0’.
Open-circuit and overload
monitoring
The device is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls below
the set threshold M E A S I : I D C < o p e n c i r c u i t , the signal M E A S I : O p e n c i r c .
2 0 m A i n p . is issued.
The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA analog input against
overloading. If it exceeds the set threshold of 24.8 mA, the signal M E A S I : O v e r l o a d
2 0 m A i n p u t is issued.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-39
3 Operation
(continued)
3-25
3-40
Analog direct current input
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the
linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well and
are available for further processing by protection functions.
3-26
Scaling of the linearized measured value
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-41
3 Operation
(continued)
3.8.2
Connecting a Resistance Thermometer to the "PT 100 Analog Input" on the
Analog (I/O) Module Y
This analog input on the analog (I/O) module Y is designed to connect a PT 100
resistance thermometer. The mapping curve R = f(T) of PT 100 resistance
thermometers is defined in standard IEC 751. If the PT 100 resistance thermometer is
connected using the 3-wire method, then no further calibration is required.
Open-circuit monitoring
If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire, the signal M E A S I : O p e n
c i r c . P T 1 0 0 is issued.
3-27
3-42
Temperature measurement using a PT 100 resistance thermometer connected to the analog (I/O) module
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.9
Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays
(Function Group OUTP)
The P437 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signal
assignment is freely configured by the user.
Configuration of the output
relays
One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal can be
assigned to several output relays by configuration.
Operating mode of the
output relays
The user can set an operating mode for each output relay that determines whether the
output relay operates in a normally open arrangement (NO) or normally closed
arrangement (NC) and whether it operates in latching mode. Latching can be disabled
either manually via a setting parameter, or by an appropriately configured binary signal
input, at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance, depending on the
selected operating mode.
Blocking the output relays
The P437 offers the option of blocking all output relays via a setting parameter or by way
of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are likewise blocked
if the device is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs.
In these cases the relays are treated according to their set operating mode, i.e. relays in
a normally open arrangement (NO) are not triggered, whereas relays in a normally
closed arrangement (NC) are triggered.
This does not apply to the relays associated with the signals
S F M ON : W a r n i n g ( r e l a y ) or M A IN : B l o c k e d /fa u l ty . Self-monitoring alarms are
thus correctly indicated.
If the self-monitoring detects a serious hardware fault (see error messages in chapter 10,
which will lead to a blocking of the protection), all output relays are reset regardless of
the set operating mode or signal configuration.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-43
3 Operation
(continued)
OUTP: Outp.rel.
block USER
[ 021 014 ]
0
OUTP: Outp.
relays blocked
[ 021 015 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
OUTP: Block outp.
rel. EXT
[ 040 014 ]
MAIN: Prot. ext.
disabled
[ 038 046 ]
SFMON: Hardware
fault
304 950
OUTP: Oper. mode
K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
1
-K xxx
2
3
4
5
6
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
ES
ES
ES
ES
NE
NE
updating
manual reset
reset (fault)
reset (syst.dist)
updating
manual reset
OUTP: State
K xxx
[ zzz zzz ]
S1 1
R1
OUTP: Fct.
Assignm. K xxx
[ yyy yyy ]
Signal
Signal
Signal
Signal
1
2
3
n
m out of n
1
Selected signal
OUTP: Latching
reset
[ 040 088 ]
FT RC: Record.
in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT RC: System
disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
OUTP: Reset
latch. USER
[ 021 009 ]
0
1
1
100 ms
0: don't execute
1: execute
OUTP: Reset
latch. EXT
[ 040 015 ]
3-28
3-44
Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the output relays
For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it via a setting
parameter. Therefore protection must be disabled. Triggering persists for the duration
of the set hold time.
MAIN: Protection
enabled
No (off)
47Z1050A_EN
3-29
Testing the output relays
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-45
3 Operation
(continued)
3.10 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO)
Measurands made available by the P437 can be provided in BCD (binary coded decimal)
form through output relays or in analog form as direct current output. Output as direct
current can only occur if the device is equipped with analog module Y. BCD output is
always possible, whether the device is equipped with analog module Y or not.
Disabling or enabling the
measured data output
function
The measured data output can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter.
3-30
3-46
Disabling or enabling the measured data output function
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling measured data
output
The measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input, provided that
the function M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has been configured. If the function
M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has not been configured to a binary signal input, then
the measured data output is always enabled.
3-31
Enabling measured data output
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-47
3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting the measured
data output function
BCD or analog output of measurands is terminated for the duration of the hold time if one
of the following conditions is met:
The measured data output is reset either via a setting parameter or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
There is a general reset.
LED indicators reset
MEASO: Reset
output USER
[ 037 116 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MEASO: Output
reset
[ 037 117 ]
MEASO: Reset
output EXT
[ 036 087 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: Reset
indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
3-32
MEASO: Reset
meas.val.outp.
304 601
Resetting the measured data output function
Scaling
Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the device inherent setting
range.
Scaling of analog output is also suited for directional-signed output of some fault
measurands, in particular fault location in percent.
3-48
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.1 BCD measured data output
The user can select a measurand for output in BCD form by assigning output relays.
The selected measurand is available in BCD form for the duration of the set hold time
M E A S O: H o l d T i m e Ou tp u t B C D . If the selected variable was not measured, then
there is no output of a measurand value.
Output of measured event
values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand output
memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate availability
at the output of the updated value.
Output of measured
operating values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time.
After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is restarted. If the hold time has been set to "blocked", the measured operating value that
has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-49
3 Operation
(continued)
Scaling of BCD output
In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range
(Mx,min ... Mx,max) in scaled form (as Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max) and the associated
BCD display range (BCD,min ... BCD,max) have to be set.
MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD
MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD
MEASO: BCD-Out min. value
MEASO: BCD-Out max. value
The BCD display range should be set so that the value 399 is never exceeded. If this
should occur or if the measurand is outside the acceptable measuring range, then the
value for "Overflow" (all relays triggered) is transmitted.
Measurands
Range
Measurands of the variable Mx
Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measurands
0 ... 1
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end values
Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating program S&R-103
- PC Access Software MiCOM S1 - under "minimum" and "maximum".)
Measurands to be output
Range
Measurands to be output
Mx,min ... Mx,max
Scaled measurands to be
output
Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
3-50
Designation of the set values in
the data model
"Scaled min. val. BCD" ..."Scaled max. val. BCD"
Measurands
BCD display values
Measurands in the range
"Measurands to be output"
BCD-Out min. value ... BCD-Out max. value
(Valid BCD value)
Measurands:
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
BCD-Out min. value (BCD value not valid)
Measurands Mx:
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
BCD-Out max. value (BCD value not valid)
Measurands Mx:
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
BCD-Out max. value (Overflow)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Example for scaling of
BCD output
The value range for the fault measurand is set from –320.00% to +320.00%.
The PU fault location is given in the range from 0% to 200%.
Measurands
Range
Fault measurand:
FT_DA: Fault locat. percent
-320.00% ... +320.00%
Associated scaled measurands
0 ... 1
Measurands to be output
Range
Measurands to be output
0% ... 200%
Scaled measurands to be
output
0.5 ... 0.813
with:
0.500 = 320/640
0.813 = 520/640
Measurands
BCD display values
Measurands in the range
"Measurands to be output"
0 ... 200
In this example the following device settings are selected:
/Parameter/Config.parameters/
Address
Description
056 020
031 074
053 002
010 010
037 140
037 141
037 142
037 143
MEASO:
MEASO:
MEASO:
MEASO:
MEASO:
MEASO:
MEASO:
MEASO:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Current value
Function group MEASO
General enable USER
Fct. assignm. BCD
Hold time output BCD
Scaled min. val. BCD
Scaled max. val. BCD
BCD-Out min. value
BCD-Out max. value
'With'
'Yes'
FT_DA: Fault locat. percent
1.00 s
0.500
0.813
0
200
3-51
3 Operation
(continued)
The following figure displays the values output as a function of the fault location. The
BCD value and the signal M E A S O : V a l i d B C D v a l u e = 'Yes' are only issued in the
value range 0% to 200%.
[004.027] FT_DA:
Fault locat. percent = Not measured
[037.050] MEASO:
Valid BCD value = Yes
[004.027] FT_DA:
Fault locat. percent = Not measured
200
BCD value
0
-320%
0%
200%
320%
[004.027] FT_DA:
Fault locat. percent
47Z1040A_EN
3-33
]
Example of BCD output of fault location
Note:
Except from radial, single circuit lines the fault location value gives a reasonable value
only for faults up to the line end. For any fault on a subsequent line the fault location is
more or less incorrect due to unknown fault current infeed in the remote substation.
It is recommended to limit the calculation of a fault location to a practical and sensible
range on the line by setting F T _ D A : Ou tp u t fa u l t l o c a t. = 'Only aft.tr.t1/t1,ze'.
3-52
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
MEASO: Hold time
output BCD
[ 010 010 ]
MEASO: Enabled
[ 037 102 ]
MEASO: 1-digit
bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 051 ]
MEASO: 1-digit
bit 1 (BCD)
[ 037 052 ]
Setting blocked
MEASO: 1-digit
bit 2 (BCD)
[ 037 053 ]
MEASO: 1-digit
bit 3 (BCD)
[ 037 054 ]
MEASO: 10-digit
bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 055 ]
MEASO: Enable
304 600
MEASO: 10-digit
bit 1 (BCD)
[ 037 056 ]
MEASO: Reset
meas.val.outp.
MEASO: 10-digit
bit 2 (BCD)
[ 037 057 ]
MEASO: 10-digit
bit 3 (BCD)
[ 037 058 ]
MEASO: 100-digit
bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 059 ]
304 601
selected measured
MEASO: 100-digit
bit 1 (BCD)
[ 037 060 ]
operating value
Selected
measured event value
is updated
selected measured
value
not activated
MEASO: Valid
BCD value
[ 037 050 ]
selected measured
value
Overflow
MEASO: Fct.
assignm. BCD
[ 053 002 ]
Measured value > 399
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Scaling of the
BCD output
++
Selected meas. val.
1
2
1...2
MEASO: Output
value x
[
*
]
0 ... 100 %
3-34
MEASO: Output
value x
Address
x: 1
037 120
x: 2
037 121
x: 3
037 122
Scaling of the BCD output
MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD
037 140
MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD
037 141
MEASO: BCD-Out min. value
037 142
MEASO: BCD-Out max. value
037 143
BCD measured data output. Overflow behavior is displayed in BCD example (see previous figure)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-53
3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.2 Analog measured data output
Analogue output of measured data is two-channel.
The user can select two of the measurands available in the P437 for output in the form of
load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel can be defined
for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a measuring instrument.
The direct current that is output is displayed as a measured operating value.
The selected measurand is output as direct current for the duration of the set hold time
M E A S O: H o l d T i m e Ou tp u t A - x . If the selected variable was not measured, then
there is no output of a measurand value.
Output of measured event
values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand output
memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate availability
at the output of the updated value.
Output of measured
operating values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time.
After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is restarted. If the hold time has been set to "blocked", the measured operating value that
has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
Configuration of output
relays assigned to the
output channels
The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the output relays
assigned to the output channels are configured for M E A S O : V a l u e A - x O u t p u t ,
since the output channels would otherwise remain short-circuited (see terminal
connection diagrams).
3-54
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Scaling the analog display
In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range in scaled
form and the associated display range have to be set. One additional value for the knee
point must also be defined. In this way the user can obtain an analog output
characteristic similar to the characteristic shown in Figure 3-32.
Measurand range to be
output
The measurand range to be output is (Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max),
with:
Mx,min: minimum value to be output
Mx,knee: Knee point value for the measurand range to be output
Mx,max: maximum value to be output
This measurand range to be output is defined by setting the following parameters:
MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-x
MEASO: Scaled Knee val. A-x
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-x
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end values
Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating program S&R-103
- PC Access Software MiCOM S1 - under "minimum" and "maximum".)
Measurands
Range
Measurands of the variable Mx
Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measurands
0 ... 1
Measurands to be output
Range
Measurands with knee-point to
be output
Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max
Scaled measurands with a scaled
knee-point to be output
Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,knee ... Mx,scal,max
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 Mx,RL1
Designation of the set values in
the data model
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
"Scal. min. value Ax" ...
... "Scal. knee-point Ax" ...
... "Scal. max. value Ax"
3-55
3 Operation
(continued)
Associated display range
The associated display range is defined by setting the following parameters:
MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-x
MEASO: AnOut Knee Point A-x
MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-x
3-56
Measurands
Analog display values
Measurands in the range
"Measurands to be output"
"AnOut min. val. A-x" ...... "AnOut knee point A-x" ...
... "AnOut max. val. A-x"
(Value A-x valid)
Measurands:
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
"AnOut min. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Measurands Mx:
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
"AnOut max. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Measurands Mx:
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
"AnOut max. val." (Overflow)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Example for scaling of
analog display ranges
Voltage A-B is selected as the measurand to be transmitted by channel A-1.
The measuring range is from 0 to 1.5 Vnom with Vnom = 100 V.
The range to be transmitted is from 0.02 to 1 Vnom
with the associated display range from 4 mA to 18 mA.
The knee-point of the characteristic is 0.1 Vnom with an associated display of 16 mA.
Measurands
Range
Measurands of the
variable Mx
0 V ... 150 V
Associated scaled
measurands
0 ... 1
Measurands to be output
Range
Measurands with knee-point
to be output
2 V ...10 V... 100 V
Associated scaled
measurands
0.013 ... 0.067 ... 0.67
with:
Mx,scal,min = (2 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.013
Mx,scal,knee = (10 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.067
Mx,scal,max = (100 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.67
Measurands
Analog display values
Measurands in the range
"Measurands to be output"
0.02 ... 0.1 Vnom ... 1 Vnom
4 mA ... 16 mA ... 18 mA
In this example the following device settings are selected:
/Parameter/Config. parameters/
Address
Description
Current value
056 020
031 074
053 000
MEASO: Function group MEASO
MEASO: General enable USER
MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1
010 114
037 104
MEASO: Hold time output A-1
MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1
037 105
MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1
037 106
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1
037 107
037 108
037 109
MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1
MEASO: AnOut knee point A-1
MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1
'With'
'Yes'
MAIN:
Voltage A-B p.u.
1.00 s
0.013 (corresponds with
0.02 Vnom)
0.067 (corresponds with
0.10 Vnom)
0.667 (corresponds with
1.00 Vnom)
4 mA
16 mA
18 mA
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-57
3 Operation
(continued)
By setting M E A S O: A n Ou t M i n . v a l . A - x , the user can specify the output current
that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set minimum measured
value to be transmitted. The setting at M E A S O: A n Ou t m a x . v a l . A - x defines the
output current that is output for the maximum measured value to be transmitted. By
defining the knee-point, the user can obtain two characteristic curve sections with
different slopes. When entering this setting the user must keep in mind that only a
rising/rising or falling/falling curve sense is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not allowed).
If the setting was not properly entered, the signal S F M ON : In v a l i d s c a l i n g A - x will
be issued.
Note:
A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the device, if the setting was
properly entered, will only occur after the device, with the setting M A IN : D ev i c e onl i ne, is again switched on-line.
3-35
3-58
Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output . In this example the range starting value is = 0; also possible is
directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data Output).
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-36
Analog measured data output
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-59
3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.3 Output of ‘External’ Measured Data
Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled to 0 ... 100%, can be written
to the following parameters of the P437 via the communications interface.
MEASO: Output value 1
MEASO: Output value 2
MEASO: Output value 3
These "external" measured values are output by the P437 either in BCD data form or as
load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD measured data output function or
the channels of the analogue measured data output function are configured accordingly.
3-60
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators
(Function Group LED)
LED indicators
The P437 has 23 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals.
Figure 6-1 in chapter 6 shows the layout of the LED indicators situated on the local
control panel.
Four of the LED indicators (H1 to H3, H17) are permanently assigned to fixed functions.
The other LED indicators are freely configurable. These freely configurable LEDs will
emit either red or green or amber light (amber is made up of red and green light and may
not be configured independently).
Configuring the LED
indicators
One binary signal can be assigned to each of the red and green LED color indications.
For LED H 5, for example, this is done by assigning the required binary signal to
F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g . H 5 r e d , or F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g . H 5 g r e e n . The same
binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators (or colors), if required.
LED indicators
Label
Configuration
H1
'HEALTHY'
Not configurable. H 1 indicates the operational readiness of the device
(supply voltage is present).
H 17
'EDIT MODE'
Not configurable. H 17 indicates the input mode. Only when the device
is in this mode, can parameter settings be changed by pressing the “up”
and “down” keys. (See Chapter 6, section 'Display and Keypad')
H2
'OUT OF SERVICE'
Permanently configured with function M A IN : B l oc k ed/faul ty .
H3
'ALARM'
Permanently configured with function S F M ON : W ar ni ng ( LE D ) .
H4
'TRIP'
With the P437 this LED indicator is customarily configured with function
M A I N : G e n . T r i p c o m m a n d – the configuration may be modified.
The factory setting for this LED indicator is shown in the terminal
connection drawings included in the documentation or the appendix.
H 5 to H 16
H 18 to H 23
----
These 18 LED indicators are freely configurable.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-61
3 Operation
(continued)
Operating mode of the
LED indicators
For each of the freely configurable LED indicators, the operating mode can be selected
separately. This setting will determine whether the LED indicator will operate either in
energize-on-signal (ES) or normally-energized (NE) mode, whether it will be flashing and
whether it will be in latching mode. Depending on the operating mode selected latching
is disabled either manually from the local control panel or by an appropriately configured
binary signal input (see "Main Functions of the P437 (Function Group MAIN)"), at the
onset of a new fault or a new system disturbance.
Therefore the operating modes turn out to be the 23=8 possible combinations of the
following components:
•
•
•
flashing / continuous,
energize-on-signal (ES) / normally-energized (NE),
updating / latching with manual reset,
in addition to these there are the following 4 operating modes
•
•
energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new fault (flashing / continuous) and
energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new system disturbance (flashing /
continuous),
so that there are 12 possible operating modes in total.
3-62
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
LED: Operating
mode Hxx
[ xxx xxx ]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
ES
ES
ES
ES
NE
NE
ES
ES
ES
ES
NE
NE
updating
manual reset
reset (fault)
reset (syst.dist)
updating
manual reset
updating bl
manual reset bl
reset (fault) bl
rst (syst.dst) bl
updating bl
manual reset bl
! G !
-Hxx
(red
color)
LED: State Hxx
red
[ zzz zzz ]
S1 1
LED: Fct.assig.
Hxx red
[ yyy yyy ]
Signal
Signal
Signal
Signal
1
2
3
n
R1
LED: State Hxx
green
[ zzz zzz ]
m out of n
Selected signal
S1 1
R1
LED: Fct.assig.
Hxx green
[ yyy yyy ]
Signal
Signal
Signal
Signal
1
2
3
n
m out of n
-Hxx
(green
color)
Selected signal
FT RC: Record.
in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT RC: System
disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
3-37
Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-63
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12 Main Functions of the P437 (Function Group MAIN)
3.12.1 Conditioning of the Measured Variables
The secondary phase currents and voltages of the system transformers are fed into the
P437 and are – electrically isolated – converted to standardized electronics levels. Airgap transformers are used in the phase current path to suppress low frequency (DC
decays and offsets) signal components. The analog quantities are digitized and are thus
available for further processing.
Settings that do not refer to nominal quantities are converted by the P437 to nominal
quantities. The user must therefore set the secondary nominal currents and voltages of
the system transformers.
The connection direction of the measuring circuits on the P437 must also be set.
Figure 3-38 shows the standard connection. By this setting the phase of the digitized
currents is rotated by 180°.
3-64
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
------
3-38
Connecting the measuring circuits of the P437.
(Where markings P1 – P2 and S1 – S2 are used for CT polarity the dots shown here represent the P1 and S1 terminals.)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-65
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.2 Operating Data Measurement
The P437 has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents and
voltages measured as well as quantities derived from these measured values. For the
display of measured values, set lower thresholds need to be exceeded, to avoid
fluctuating small values from noise. If these lower thresholds are not exceeded, the
value "not measured" is displayed. The following measured variables are displayed:
Phase currents for all three phases
Maximum phase current
Minimum phase current
Positive-sequence current and negative-sequence current, taking into account the set
phase sequence.
Residual current measured by the P437 at the T 14 transformer
Residual current of the parallel line, which is measured by the P437 at the T 24
transformer
Phase-to-ground voltages
Sum of the three phase-to-ground voltages
Phase-to-phase voltages
Maximum phase-to-phase voltage
Minimum phase-to-phase voltage
Positive-sequence voltage and negative-sequence voltage, taking into account the
set phase sequence.
Neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P437 at the T 90 transformer
Reference voltage measured by the P437 at the T 15 transformer
Active and Reactive Power
Active power factor
Load angle ϕ in all three phases
Angle between measured residual current and measured neutral-point displacement
voltage
Phase relation between calculated and measured residual current
Angle between phase-to-ground voltage A and the residual currents
Frequency
The measured data are updated at approx. 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted if the
self-monitoring function detects a hardware fault or in case of a general starting (primary
system short-circuit) condition.
3-66
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Measured current values
The measured current values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the
nominal quantities of the P437 and as primary quantities. To allow display in primary
values, the primary nominal current of the system current transformer should be set in
the P437.
According to the following formulas the P437 will determine the negative-sequence
current and positive-sequence current, taking into account the set phase sequence:
Phase sequence A-B-C:
1
2
I neg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ I B + a ⋅ I C
3
I pos =
(
)
Phase sequence A-C-B:
1
2
I neg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ I B + a ⋅ I C
3
(
)
I pos =
1
2
⋅ I + a ⋅ I B + a ⋅ IC
3 A
(
)
(
)
1
2
⋅ I + a ⋅ I B + a ⋅ IC
3 A
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-67
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Hardware
fault
306 018
MAIN: Meas. Value
C rel. IP
[ 011 030 ]
IA
C1
IB
C2
IC
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
+
+
+
COMP
1
MAIN: Current A
p.u.
[ 005 041 ]
2
MAIN: Current B
p.u.
[ 006 041 ]
3
MAIN: Current C
p.u.
[ 007 041 ]
4
MAIN: Current C
(IP) p.u.
[ 005 011 ]
5
MAIN: Current
Imax p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
6
MAIN: Current
IP,min p.u.
[ 005 056 ]
7
MAIN: Current
Ineg p.u.
[ 009 015 ]
8
MAIN: Current
Ipos p.u.
[ 009 016 ]
Imax
Imin
MAIN: Inom C.T.
prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
Ineg
MAIN: Current A
prim
[ 005 040 ]
Ipos
MAIN: Current B
prim
[ 006 040 ]
MAIN: Current C
prim
[ 007 040 ]
MAIN: Current
(IP) prim.
[ 005 010 ]
MAIN: Settl. t.
IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN: Curr.
IP,max prim.
[ 005 050 ]
MAIN: Curr.
IP,min prim.
[ 005 055 ]
MAIN: Reset
IP,max,st.USER
[ 003 033 ]
MAIN: IP,max
prim.,delay
[ 005 036 ]
0
1
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: IP,max
prim.,stored
[ 005 034 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: IP,max
p.u.,delay
[ 005 037 ]
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: IP,max
p.u.,stored
[ 005 035 ]
MAIN: Reset
IP,max,st. EXT
[ 005 211 ]
3-39
3-68
Measured operating data – phase current, negativye-sequence current, and positive-sequence current
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-40
Measured operating data - residual current
3-41
Measured operating data – residual current of the parallel line
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-69
3 Operation
(continued)
Delayed maximum phase
current display
The P437 offers the option of a delayed display of the maximum value of the three phase
currents (thermal ammeter function). The delayed maximum phase current display is
an exponential function of the maximum phase current IP,max (see upper curve in
Figure 3-42). The time after which the delayed maximum phase current display will have
reached 95 % of maximum phase current IP,max is set at M A I N : S e t t l . t . I P , m a x , d e l .
Stored maximum phase
current display
The stored maximum phase current follows the delayed maximum phase current. If the
value of the delayed maximum phase current is declining, then the highest value of the
delayed maximum phase current remains stored. The display remains constant until the
actual delayed maximum phase current exceeds the value of the stored maximum phase
current (see middle curve in Figure 3-42). The stored maximum phase current to the
actual value of the delayed maximum phase current is set at
M A I N : R e s e t I P , m a x , s t o r e d (see lower curve in Figure 3-42).
3-70
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Current
IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN: IP,max
p.u.,delay
[ 005 037 ]
MAIN: Settl. t.
IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN: Settl. t.
IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN: Settl. t.
IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN: Settl. t.
IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN: Settl. t.
IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN: Settl. t.
IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN: Current
IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN: IP,max
p.u.,stored
[ 005 035 ]
MAIN: Current
IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN: IP,max
p.u.,stored
[ 005 035 ]
MAIN: Reset
IP,max,st.USER
[ 003 033 ]
MAIN: Reset
IP,max,st. EXT
[ 005 211 ]
3-42
Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-71
3 Operation
(continued)
Measured voltage values
The measured voltage values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the
nominal quantities of the P437 and as primary quantities. To allow a display in primary
values, the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer needs to be set in the
P437.
According to the following formulas the P437 will determine the negative-sequence
voltage and positive-sequence voltage, taking into account the set phase sequence:
Phase sequence A-B-C:
1
2
V neg = ⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B −G + a ⋅ V C −G
3
(
)
1
2
⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B −G + a ⋅ V C −G
3
(
)
Phase sequence A-C-B:
1
2
V neg = ⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B −G + a ⋅ V C −G
3
(
)
(
)
V pos =
V pos =
1
2
⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B −G + a ⋅ V C −G
3
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°
3-72
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase
sequence
1: A-B-C
2: A-C-B
47Z0106B_EN
3-43
Determining the minimum and maximum phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages as well as the negative-sequence and positivesequence voltages
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-73
3 Operation
(continued)
3-44
3-74
Measured operating data - phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-45
Measured operating data - neutral-point displacement voltage
3-46
Measured operating data – reference voltage
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-75
3 Operation
(continued)
Measured values for
power, active power factor,
and angle
The active power factor is determined when currents and voltages in all three phases
exceed minimum thresholds.
The load angle and the angle between the measured values for the residual current and
the neutral-point displacement voltage are only determined when associated current and
voltage exceed minimum thresholds.
Phase current:
Residual current:
Voltage:
3-76
0.1 % of dynamic range IP
0.1 % of dynamic range IN
> 1.5 V
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-47
Measured operating data - power, active power factor, and angle
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-77
3 Operation
(continued)
Phase relation IN
The P437 checks if the phase relations of calculated residual current and measured
residual current agree. If the phase displacement between the two currents is ≤ 45°,
then the indication ‘Equal phase’ is displayed.
3-48
3-78
Phase relation between calculated and measured residual current
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Angle between phase-toground voltage A and
residual currents
The P437 determines the phase displacement between the phase-to-ground voltage
VA-G and the residual currents measured by the P437 at transformers T 14 and T 24.
3-49
Phase relation between phase-to-ground voltage A and residual current
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-79
3 Operation
(continued)
Frequency
The P437 determines the frequency from the voltage VA-B. This voltage needs to exceed
a minimum threshold of 0.65 Vnom in order for frequency to be determined.
3-50
3-80
Frequency measurement
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Active and reactive energy
output and input
The P437 determines the active and reactive energy output and input based on the
primary active or reactive power.
Active and reactive energy are determined approximately every 2 s. Whenever the
maximum value of 655.35 MWh or 655.35 MVAr h is exceeded, a counter is incremented
and the determination of the energy output is restarted. The value that exceeded the
range is transferred to the new cycle.
The total energy is calculated as follows:
Total energy = number of overflows ∗ 655.35 + current count
Energy output and input can be reset jointly at M A IN : R e s e t m e a s .v . e n .U S E R (or
via external signal M A IN : R es et m eas .v . en. E X T , see section 3.12.11 “Resetting
Actions”).
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-81
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Active
power P prim.
[ 004 050 ]
MAIN: Act.energy
outp.prim
[ 005 061 ]
∫P(t) dt
R
-∫P(t) dt
MAIN: Act.energy
inp.prim
[ 005 062 ]
∫Q(t) dt
MAIN: React.en
outp.prim
[ 005 063 ]
-∫Q(t) dt
MAIN: React.en
inp.prim
[ 005 064 ]
R
MAIN: Reac.
power Q prim.
[ 004 052 ]
MAIN: Reset
meas.v.en.USER
[ 003 032 ]
R
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Reset
meas.v.en. EXT
[ 005 212 ]
R
Overflow
Transfer
Overflow
Transfer
Overflow
Transfer
Overflow
Transfer
3-51
3-82
MAIN: No.overfl.
act.en.out
[ 009 090 ]
MAIN: No.overfl.
act.en.inp
[ 009 091 ]
MAIN: No.ov/fl.
reac.en.out
[ 009 092 ]
MAIN: No.ov/fl.
reac.en.inp
[ 009 093 ]
Determining the active and reactive energy output and input
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Selecting the procedure to
determine energy output
Unlike other MV protection devices from the Px3x series, the P437 does not provide
parameter settings for the procedure to determine energy output. The features of the
selected procedure are equivalent to requirements typical in the EHV and HV range.
Characteristics
Applications
Determination of the active and reactive energy
every 2 s (approximately)
Constant load and slow load variations (no significant load
variations within 1 second).
Reduced system loading
Phase angles below 70° (cos ϕ > 0.3 ).
Fault
The maximum phase-angle error of the P437 of 1° leads to greater errors in
measurement when the phase angle increases, as shown in the following diagram.
5%
2%
45°
3-52
70° Phase angle ϕ
S8Z0401B
Error of measurement in the determination of energy output resulting from the phase angle error of the P437
Error of measurement:
Approx. ± 2 % of the measured value for cos ϕ = ≥ 0.7
Approx. ± 5 % of the measured value for cos ϕ = ≥ 0.3
For phase angles in excess of 70° or when the error of measurement resulting from the
maximum phase-angle error is not acceptable, external counters should be used to
determine the energy output.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-83
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.3 Configuring and Enabling the Protection Functions
The device can be adapted to the requirements of a specific high-voltage system by
configuring the available function range. By including the relevant protection functions in
the device configuration and canceling all other protection functions, the user creates an
individual device appropriate to the application. Parameters, signals, and measured
values of canceled protection functions are not displayed on the local control panel.
Functions of general applicability such as operating data recording (OP_RC) or main
functions (MAIN) cannot be canceled.
Canceling a protection
function
The following conditions must be met before a protection function can be canceled:
The protection function in question must be disabled.
None of the elements of the protection function to be canceled may be assigned to
a binary input.
None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or
an LED indicator.
None of the signals of the protection function may be linked to other signals.
No functions of the device function to be canceled may be selected in a list parameter
setting.
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the Configuration branch of the menu
tree to access the setting relevant for the protection function to be canceled. If, for
example, the "LIMIT" function group is to be canceled, the setting L IM IT : F u n c ti o n
g r o u p L I M I T is accessed and its value is set to "Without". To re-include the "LIMIT"
function in the device configuration, the same setting is accessed and its value is
changed to "With".
The protection function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is
defined by the function group designation (example: In the following description of the
protection functions, it is presumed that this protection function is included in the
configuration.
3-84
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling and enabling the
protection function
Protection functions that are included in the configuration may still be disabled via a
function setting or via binary signal inputs. Protection can only be disabled or enabled
through binary signal inputs if the M A IN : D i s a b l e P r o te c t. E X T and
M A I N : E n a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T functions are both configured. When neither or only
one of the two functions is configured, the condition is interpreted as "Protection
externally enabled". If the triggering signals of the binary signal inputs are implausible –
i.e. both are at logic level = "1" – then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
Note:
3-53
If the protection is disabled via a binary signal input that is configured for
M A IN : D i s a b l e P r o te c t. E X T , the signal M A IN : B l o c k e d /F a u l ty
is not issued.
Enabling or disabling protection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-85
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.4 Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint)
The inrush stabilization function detects high inrush current flows that occur when
transformers or machines are switched on, and, if detected, it will then block the
following functions:
Overcurrent and underimpedance fault detection logic of distance protection
Backup overcurrent-time protection (backup DTOC)
Definite-time overcurrent protection
Inverse-time overcurrent protection
The inrush stabilization function identifies an inrush current by evaluating the ratio of the
second harmonic current components to the fundamental. If this ratio exceeds the set
threshold, then the inrush stabilization function operates. Another settable current trigger
blocks inrush stabilization if the current exceeds this trigger. The setting of the operating
mode determines whether inrush stabilization will operate phase-selectively or across all
phases.
3-86
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Op. mode
rush r. PSx
[
*
]
MAIN: I> lift rush
r. PSx
[
*
]
MAIN: Rush I
(2fn)/I(fn)PSx
[
*
]
*
Parametre
set
set
set
set
3-54
1
2
3
4
MAIN: Op. mode
rush r. PSx
017 097
001 088
001 089
001 090
MAIN: I> lift
rush r. PSx
017 095
001 085
001 086
001 087
MAIN: Rush I
(2fn)/I(fn)PSx
017 098
001 091
001 092
001 093
47Z1144A_EN
Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-87
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.5 Multiple blocking
Two multiple blocking conditions can be defined via 'm out of n' parameters. The
functions defined by selection may be blocked via an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
3-55
3-88
Multiple blocking
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.6 Blocked/faulty
If the protective functions are blocked, the condition is signaled by continuous
illumination of the amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a signal
from an output relay configured M A IN : B l o c k e d /F a u l ty . In addition functions can be
selected that will issue the M A IN : B l oc k ed/F aul ty signal by setting a ‘m out of n’
parameter.
47Z11EHA_EN
3-56
"Blocked/Faulty" signal
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-89
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.7 Monitoring and processing of CB status signals
Within the main function group it is possible to select whether the multiple signals “CB
closed 3p” / “CB open 3p” or pole selective “Closed” status signals will be monitored.
Simultaneous monitoring of all status signals is not feasible and should therefore not be
undertaken.
Figure 3-57 shows the logical processing of the various input signals. The plausibility
logic will be triggered should one of the following discrepancies be detected:
A minimum of one 3-pole monitoring signal and one 1-pole monitoring signal are
configured at the same time.
Both input signals M A IN : C B c l o s e d 3 p E X T and
MAIN: C B o p e n 3 p E X T are present simultaneously.
There is no pole-selective status signal M A IN : C B c l o s e d x E X T present (i.e.
CB contact is open) but at the same time there is a current flow in this conductor
exceeding 0.05 Inom.
In order to suppress triggering during transient actions, the signal issued when a
discrepancy in plausibility is detected has a delayed pickup of 100 ms.
Besides monitoring for signaling purposes, status signals are also processed in these
functions:
‰ If the (re-)close command is to be terminated by the 'CB closed' signal (setting
M A I N : R C i n h i b i t b y C B c l o s e = “Yes”) then the resulting signal
M A IN : C B c l os ed 3p will now be read (instead of the previous input signal
M A IN : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T shown in figure 3-58 as “close command").
‰ ARC: Ready indication
If the ARC should only be available when the circuit breaker has already been closed
(setting A R C : C B c l os .pos .s i g. P S x = “with”) then the resulting signal
M A IN : C B c l os ed 3p will now be read (instead of the previous input signal
MA IN : C B c l os ed s i g. E X T shown in the figure as “ARC availability").
‰ ARC: Plausibility check on single-pole HSR
If pole selective status signals have been configured (see “Monitoring and
processing of CB status signals”, function group MAIN)) then the device will check
that just this CB contact will be opened during a single-pole HSR. The single-pole
HSR is terminated and a three-pole trip command is issued when at least one
further CB contact is opened. This trip command is either final (with
A R C : H S R o p e r . m o d e P S x = “1-pole” or “1-/3-pole” and with the timer stage
A R C : tD i s c r i m . P S x having elapsed ) or the dead time for the three-pole HSR is
triggered (with A R C : H S R o p e r . M o d e P S x = “1-/3-pole” and with the timer
stage A R C : tD i s c r i m . P S x still running).
The same procedure is carried out should the multiple signal
M A IN : C B c l o s e d 3 p E X T occur during the dead time of a single-pole HSR.
‰ PSIG and GSCSG: Undelayed echo if CB is open
If the CB is open, the echo signal (if enabled) is issued without additional delay. For
this feature, the signal M A IN : C B o p e n 3 p is now used (instead of the
previously inverted input signal M A IN : C B c l os ed s i g. E X T - see “Echo
functions” figures in the description of function groups PSIG and GSCSG).
‰ MCMON: Release of negative-sequence voltage protection using CB status
indication
With the operating mode set to Vneg w.CB cont.enab. the internally generated
signal M A IN : C B c l o s e d 3 p is now used instead of the input signal
M A IN : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T (see figure “Monitoring of the voltage-measuring
circuit”, function group MCMON).
3-90
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: CB open 3p
EXT
[031 028]
MAIN: CB open 3p
[ 031 040 ]
MAIN: CB open
>= 1p
[ 031 039 ]
[031 028]
configured
MAIN: CB closed
3p EXT
[036 051]
MAIN: CB closed
3p
[ 031 042 ]
MAIN: CB closed
>= 1p
[ 031 038 ]
[036 051]
configured
MAIN: CB closed
A EXT
[031 029]
MAIN: CB closed A
[ 031 035 ]
MAIN: CB open A
[ 031 032 ]
[031 029]
configured
MAIN: CB closed
B EXT
[031 030]
MAIN: CB closed B
[ 031 036 ]
MAIN: CB open B
[ 031 033 ]
[031 030]
configured
MAIN: CB closed
C EXT
[031 031]
MAIN: CB closed C
[ 031 037 ]
MAIN: CB open C
[ 031 034 ]
[031 031]
configured
10
100 ms
0
5
>0.05
Inom
t
MAIN: CB pos.sig.
unplaus.
[ 031 041 ]
Plausibility
check
IA
IB
IC
3-57
Monitoring of CB status signals
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-91
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.8 Close command
The circuit breaker can be closed by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC), by a
setting parameter or via an appropriately configured binary signal input on the P437.
The close command from the local control panel, a setting parameter or a binary signal
input is executed only if there is no trip command 1 present and no trip has been issued
by a protection device operating in parallel. Moreover, with the setting of
M A I N : R C i n h i b . b y C B c l o s e to “Yes”, the close command is not executed if there
is a "CB closed" position signal present.
The signal M A IN : C B c l o s e d 3 p is read for this purpose.
The duration of the close command can be set. The close command is reset when the
trip command is issued.
Close command counter.
The number of close commands are counted. The close command counter can be reset
either individually or together with other counters, see section 3.12.11 “Resetting
Actions”.
3-92
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Gen. trip
signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN: Parallel
trip EXT
[ 037 019 ]
MAIN: Parallel
trip A EXT
[ 036 052 ]
MAIN: Parallel
trip B EXT
[ 036 053 ]
MAIN: Parallel
trip C EXT
[ 036 054 ]
MAIN: CB closed
3p
[ 031 042 ]
MAIN: RC inhib.
by CB close
[ 015 042 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: Man. close
cmd. USER
[ 018 033 ]
0
1
MAIN: Man. close
command
[ 037 068 ]
500ms
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Man. close
cmd. EXT
[ 041 022 ]
MAIN: Man.cl.cmd.
enabl.EXT
[ 041 023 ]
MAIN: Close cmd.
C pulse time
[ 015 067 ]
MAIN: Close
command
[ 037 009 ]
1
t
ARC: Close
command
303 021
MAIN: Reset
c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
0
1
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
+
MAIN: No. close
commands
[ 009 055 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
c. cl/tr.c EXT
[ 005 210 ]
3-58
Close command
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-93
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.9 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic
Starting signals
The starting signals of the distance protection and backup overcurrent time protection
functions are linked to form common starting signals. The number of general starting
signals (GS) is counted.
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: No. general
start.
[ 004 000 ]
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
MAIN: General
starting
[ 036 000 ]
BUOC: Starting
[ 036 013 ]
DIST: Starting
A
303 529
MAIN: Starting A
[ 036 001 ]
BUOC: IA>
triggered
304 750
DIST: Starting
B
303 530
MAIN: Starting B
[ 036 002 ]
BUOC: IB>
triggered
304 751
DIST: Starting
C
303 531
MAIN: Starting C
[ 036 003 ]
BUOC: IC>
triggered
304 752
DIST: Signal
block start.G
303 594
DIST: Starting
N1
303 535
MAIN: Starting GF
[ 036 004 ]
BUOC: SN
304 757
3-59
Starting signals
For solidly grounded systems (setting M A IN : N eutr .pt. tr eat. P S x = Low-imped.
grounding), it can be selected whether a ground fault is determined by an 'OR'-linked or
an 'AND'-linked condition of the IN> and VNG> detectors in the distance protection. The
parameter setting M A I N : G r o u n d s t a r t i n g P S x may then be used.
3-94
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Phase selection logic
Various internal protection functions, such as distance protection, issue a phaseselective trip signal. Processing of such trip signals is shown in figure 3-61 below.
Other internal protection functions (e.g. overcurrent protection in the residual current
system in function groups DTOC-N and GFSC) and external protection devices
(MiCOM P547 for example) issue only a 3-pole trip signal. In order to allow phaseselective single-pole tripping in case of single-phase-to-ground short circuits the P437
now provides a faulted phase detection and trip selection logic.
This phase-selective trip is controlled by a new setting parameter and an existing binary
input function (see figure 3-60). The P437 now features an 'm out of n' selection of trip
signals in order to offer maximum flexibility.
Note: In order to obtain a single-pole trip the selected trip signals must not be
configured into the trip command 1!
(Setting M A I N : F c t . a s s i g . t r i p c m d . 1 )
In addition the function must be enabled by setting the four parameters
MAIN: Enable 1p trip PSx.
When setting M A IN : F c t.as s .1p tr i p c m d1 the following signals may be selected:
† All trip signals issued by functions DTOC, IDMT and GFSC
† All output signals issued by function group LOGIC
† MAIN: Par. Trip (1p) EXT
In addition the P437 now provides a time delayed 3-pole transfer trip feature. This is
issued if during the time period set at M A IN : 3 p tr a n s f 1 p tr p P S x no phase
starting takes place and therefore no phase-selection is possible.
The internal ARC is also controlled by this trip logic.
† If at least one phase starting takes place, then the ARC operative timer stages are
triggered, as usual, with general starting. The ARC dead time is started if the trip
signal is terminated within the set operative time. In this case it is assumed that the
operating mode HSR permits that the ARC dead time is not triggered if only a singlepole HSR has been set and the trip is multi-pole.
† In case no starting takes place and the 3-pole trip is issued, then the ARC operative
timer stages are triggered together with the general trip signal 1. The ARC dead time
is started if the trip signal is terminated within the set operative time. In this case it is
assumed that a 3-pole HSR (for a 3-pole trip) is permitted.
Phase-selective trip-logic
ARC: Operating mode HSR
Number of phases
selected
Trip decision
1-pole
0
1
3-pole
1-pole
No
Yes
Yes (3-pole) Yes (3-pole) Yes (3-pole)
Yes (1-pole) Yes (3-pole) Yes (3-pole)
>1
3-pole
No
Yes (3-pole) Yes (3-pole)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
1/3-pole
3-pole
3-pole for
1-pole
No
3-95
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Fct.ass.1p
trip cmdl
[ 002 060 ]
DTOC: tI> elapsed
[ 040 010 ]
DTOC: Trip signal
tIN>
[ 035 043 ]
MAIN: Par. trip
(1p) EXT
[ 002 066 ]
...
m out of n
Selected signals
MAIN: Enable 1p
trip PSx
[
*
]
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
0
1
2
3
4
MAIN: Enable 1p
trip PSx
002 061
002 062
002 063
002 064
MAIN: 3p transf
1p trp PSx
002 184
002 185
002 186
002 187
1
0: No
1: Yes
&
>1
MAIN: Trip 1,A
&
>1
MAIN: Trip 1,B
&
>1
MAIN: Trip 1,C
306 009
MAIN: Starting A
[ 036 001 ]
306 010
MAIN: Starting B
[ 036 002 ]
306 011
MAIN: Starting C
[ 036 003 ]
&
>1
>1
MAIN: Blocking 1p
trip EXT
[ 041 078 ]
MAIN: 3p transf
1p trp PSx
[
*
]
&
&
t
0
47Z1101A_EN
3-60
3-96
Phase selection for single-pole tripping
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Trip 1,A
310 003
MAIN: Trip 1,B
310 004
MAIN: Trip signal
1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
MAIN: Trip signal
1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
MAIN: Trip 1,C
310 005
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
*
Parametre
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
MAIN: 3p tr. if
HSR off PSx
015 065
024 034
024 094
025 054
47Z1123A_EN
3-61
Phase-selective trip
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-97
3 Operation
(continued)
Trip command
The P437 provides two trip commands. The functions required to trip can be selected by
setting an 'm out of n' parameter independently for each of the two trip commands.
The minimum trip command closure time may be set. The trip signals are present only
as long as the conditions for the signal are met.
3-98
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
47Z10AUA_EN
3-62
Forming the trip commands
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-99
3 Operation
(continued)
Direct transfer trip
These input signals allow a direct transfer trip without need of protective signaling
scheme logic (function group PSIG):
MAIN: Transfer trip EXT
MAIN: Transfer trip A EXT
MAIN: Transfer trip B EXT
MAIN: Transfer trip C EXT
This feature makes it possible to use direct transfer tripping and any classical scheme
logic (such as permissive or blocking schemes) at the same time.
Direct transfer trip
There are special send signals for the direct transfer trip of the switch at the other end:
MAIN: Send transfer trip
MAIN: Send transfer trip A
MAIN: Send transfer trip B
MAIN: Send transfer trip C
These send signals were designed for applications with a bi-directional transfer trip so as
to avoid that, for instance, a transfer trip signal is sent only because such a transfer trip
signal was received from the remote station.
With a 3-pole trip, the signal M A IN : s e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p is sent as soon as the signal
M A I N : G e n . T r i p c o m m a n d 1 has been issued, except when this trip command
was caused when the signal M A IN : tr ans fer tr i p. E X T was received (see
figure 3-63).
With a 1/3-pole trip the same applies to 1-pole send signals.
Note:
The P437 should either be used with a phase-selective transfer trip (1-pole) or a 3-pole
transfer trip, but never with both transfer trip types used simultaneously.
The reason for this is that with each 1-pole trip command a 3-pole general trip
command 1 is issued. If, for instance, the signal M A IN : T r a n s fe r tr i p . A E X T is
received without a local trip being present, then the P437 will issue a 1-pole
M A I N : T r i p c o m m a n d 1 , A as well as the 3-pole M A I N : G e n . t r i p c o m m a n d 1 .
Since no 3-pole transfer trip signal M A IN : T r a n s fe r tr i p . E X T was received, the
P437 will send the signal MA IN : S e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p (but not the signal
M A I N : S e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p . A ).
3-100
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Signal assignment Kxx:
001.207 MAIN:
Send transfer trip.
Signal assignment Uxx:
120.046 MAIN:
Transfer trip. EXT
Signal assignment Kxx:
[001.207] MAIN:
Send transfer trip.
Vin
Vin
Signal assignment Uxx:
[120.046] MAIN:
Transfer trip. EXT
[136.071] MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
P437
&
S
11
R
1
P437
47Z1020A_EN
3-63
3-pole transfer trip
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-101
3 Operation
(continued)
Manual trip command
Phase-selective as well as 3-pole manual trip commands may be issued via setting
parameters or appropriately configured binary signal inputs. However, a 3-pole manual
trip command will be executed only if it is included in the selection of possible functions
to cause a trip.
MAIN: Man.trip
cmd.Lx USER
[ 003 040 ]
MAIN: Man def.
trip A EXT
[ 038 030 ]
MAIN: Man def.
trip B EXT
[ 038 031 ]
MAIN: Man def.
trip C EXT
[ 038 032 ]
47Z11AVA_EN
3-64
3-102
Manual trip command
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Blocking of the trip
commands
The trip commands can be blocked via a setting parameter or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. This blocking is then effective for all trip commands. The
trip signals are not affected by this blocking. If the trip commands are both blocked, it is
indicated by the continuously illuminated amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control
panel and by a signal from an output relay configured to "Blocked/Faulty".
3-65
Blocking of the trip commands
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-103
3 Operation
(continued)
Counter of trip commands
The number of trip commands is counted. The counters can be reset either individually
or jointly with other counters, see section 3.12.11 “Resetting Actions”.
ARC: External trip A
+
303 016
ARC: External trip B
MAIN: No. final
trip cmds.
[ 004 005 ]
R
303 017
ARC: External trip C
303 018
DIST: Trip signal
[ 036 009 ]
BUOC: Trip signal
[ 036 014 ]
ARC: Cycle
running
[ 037 000 ]
MAIN: Final trip
[ 038 103 ]
MAIN: Close
command
[ 037 009]
MAIN: Manual trip
signal A
[ 034 047]
MAIN: Manual trip
signal B
[ 034 048]
MAIN: Manual trip
signal C
[ 034 049]
MAIN: Trip
signal 1
306 017
MAIN: Trip cmd
blocked
[ 021 013]
MAIN: Trip
command 1, A
[ 036 072]
+
MAIN: Trip
command 1, B
[ 036 073]
+
R
R
MAIN: Trip
command 1, C
[ 036 074]
+
R
MAIN: Gen. trip
command 1
[ 036 071]
+
R
MAIN: Gen. trip
command 2
[ 036 022]
+
MAIN: No. trip
cmds. 1, A
[ 005 006 ]
MAIN: No. trip
cmds. 1, B
[ 005 007 ]
MAIN: No. trip
cmds. 1, C
[ 005 008 ]
MAIN: No.
gen.trip cmds. 1
[ 004 006 ]
MAIN: No.
gen.trip cmds. 2
[ 009 050 ]
R
MAIN: Reset
c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
c. cl/tr.c EXT
[ 005 210 ]
3-66
3-104
0: don't execute
1: execute
Counter of trip commands
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.10 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization
The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory and the
event memories are date- and time-tagged. In order for time tagging to function properly
the date and time of day must be set at the P437 or synchronized through the IRIG-B
interface or the communication interface.
The time of different devices may be synchronized by a pulse given to an appropriately
configured binary signal input. The P437 evaluates the rising edge. This will set the
clock to the nearest full minute, rounding either up or down. If several start/end signals
occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is evaluated.
3-67
Date and time setting and clock synchronization
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-105
3 Operation
(continued)
Priority control of time
synchronization
The protection device provides numerous options to synchronize the internal clock:
o
Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM1/IEC (full time)
o
Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM2/PC (full time)
o
IRIG-B Signal (IRIGB; time of day only)
o
Pulse every minute presented at a binary signal input (MAIN), see figure 3-67 and
previous section.
With previous software versions these interfaces where equal ranking i.e. clock
synchronization was carried out regardless of which sub-function initiated triggering. No
conflicts have to be taken into account as long as synchronization sources
(communication master, IRIG-B and minute pulse source) operate at the same time of
day. Should the synchronization sources operate with a different time basis unwanted
step changes in the internal clock may occur. On the other hand a redundant time of day
synchronization is often used so as to sustain time synchronization via IRIG-B interface
even if and while the SCADA communication is out of service.
A primary and a backup source for time of day synchronization may now be set, where
both provide the four options listed in the above.
MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync
MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync
With this feature synchronization occurs continuously from the primary source as long as
time synchronization telegrams are received within a time-out period set at
MAIN: Time sync. time-out.
When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the device will expect
time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP2 after server SNTP 1 has become
defective, before it will switch over to the backup source.
Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out stage is
blocked.
3-106
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.11 Resetting Actions
Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in several ways.
The following types of resetting actions are possible:
Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given that the
LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event
data on the local control panel LCD whenever a new event occurs. In this case only
the displays on the local control panel LCD are cleared but not the internal memories
such as the fault memory.
Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the local control
panel LCD by pressing the "CLEAR" key C located on the local control panel.
Further memories may be assigned which will then also be cleared when the
"CLEAR" key is pressed. (See section 2.1 "Configurable Reset Key (Function Group
LOC)".)
Selective resetting, e.g. fault memories only, from the local control panel. (For this
example: Navigate to menu point F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . U S E R and set to
'Execute', see also the exact step-for-step description in section 4.4 "Reset".)
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) through
appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example: Assign parameter
F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T to the relevant binary signal input e.g.
I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 8 0 1 .)
Group resetting from the local control panel, by navigating to menu point
M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t x U S E R and setting it to 'Execute'. For this the relevant
memories (i.e. those to be reset) must be assigned to parameter
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset x.
Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (That is assign
parameter M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t . x E X T to the relevant binary signal input, e.g.
I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 8 0 1 after memories to be reset have been assigned to
parameter M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x .)
General resetting from the local control panel (menu point
M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t U S E R ). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset
without any special configuration options.
General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t E X T is assigned to the relevant binary signal input.)
All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special configuration
options.
Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory then
they all have equal priority.
In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and
substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-107
3 Operation
(continued)
Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make access
especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by configuring them
to a function key.
Function keys may be configured such that resetting of a specific memory is
assigned. Technically this is similar to resetting through an appropriately configured
binary signal input. When a function key is pressed a signal to a binary signal input is
simulated. (See section 2.1 "Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)".)
Similar to this, but one step less direct, is the possibility to assign one of the two
menu jump lists (L O C : T r i g . M e n u j m p x E X T ) to a function key and to include
the relevant menu point for a resetting action (e.g.
O U T P : R e s e t l a t c h . U S E R ) in the definition
(L O C : F c t . M e n u j m p l i s t x ) of the selected menu jump list.
The same may be achieved with the "READ" key by assigning it a menu point for a
resetting action through L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e a d k e y .
3-68
3-108
General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
LOC: Reset key
active
OP_RC: Reset record.
EXT
[ 005 213 ]
310 024
LOC: Fct.
reset key
[ 005 251 ]
m out of n
OP_RC: Reset record.
EXT [005 213]
MAIN: Group
reset x USER
[
*
]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Group
reset x EXT
[
*
]
MAIN: Fct.assign.
reset x
[
*
]
m out of n
x
OP_RC: Reset record.
EXT [005 213]
3-69
1
2
MAIN: Group
reset x USER
005 253
005 254
MAIN: Group
reset x EXT
005 209
005 252
005 248
005 249
"CLEAR" key on the local control panel and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data recording;
further examples for resetting signals generated in this way are:
†
(005 242) GF_RC: Reset record. EXT
†
(005 243) FT_RC: Reset record. EXT
†
(005 241) OL_RC: Reset record. EXT
†
(005 240) MT_RC: Reset record. EXT
†
(005 255) MAIN: General reset EXT
†
(005 211) MAIN: Reset IP,max,st.EXT
†
(005 210) MAIN: Reset.c.cl/tr.cEXT
†
(005 212) MAIN: Reset meas.v.en.EXT
†
(040 138) MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT
†
(040 015) OUTP: Reset latch. EXT
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-109
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.12 Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications
Channels
There are two communication channels available. These physical communications
channels may be assigned to communications interfaces COMM1 and COMM2.
If communications interface COMM1 is assigned to communications channel 2, then the
settings of communications interface COMM2 are automatically assigned to
communications channel 1. Communications channel 2 can only be used to transmit
data to and from the P437 if its PC interface has been de-activated. As soon as the PC
interface is used to transmit data, communications channel 2 becomes "dead".
3-70
3-110
Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications Channels
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.13 Test mode
If tests are run on the P437, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that all
incoming signals - only if they are supported by the protocol selected - via the serial
interfaces are labeled accordingly.
3-71
Setting the test mode
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-111
3 Operation
(continued)
3.13 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS)
With the P437, four independent parameter subsets may be pre-set. The user may
switch between parameter subsets during operation without interrupting the protection
function.
Selecting the parameter
subset
The control path determining the active parameter subset (function setting or binary
signal input) may be selected via the function setting P S S : C o n t r o l v i a U S E R
or via the external signal P S S : C o n t r o l V i a U s e r E X T . Correspondingly,
the parameter subset is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function setting
P S S : P a r a m . s u b s . s e l . U S E R or in accordance with external signals. The
parameter subset actually active at a particular time may be determined by scanning the
logic state signals P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m . s u b s e t or P S S : P S x a c t i v e .
Selecting the parameter
subset via binary inputs
If the binary signal inputs are to be used for parameter subset selection, then the P437
first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured for parameter
subset selection. If this is not the case, then the parameter subset selected via the
function setting will be active. The P437 also checks whether the signals present at the
binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous parameter subset selection. This is only true
when only one binary signal input is set to a logic level of "1". If more than one signal
input is set to a logic level of "1", then the parameter subset previously selected remains
active. Should a dead interval occur while switching between parameter subsets (this is
the case if all binary signal inputs have a logic level of "0"), then the stored hold time is
started. While this timer stage is running, the previously selected parameter subset
remains active. As soon as a signal input has a logic level of "1", the associated
parameter subset becomes active. If, after the stored time has elapsed, there is still no
signal input with a logic level of "1", the parameter subset selected via the function
parameter becomes active.
If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic level of "1" is present at any of the binary
signal inputs selected for the parameter subset selection, then the parameter subset
selected via the function parameter will become active once the stored time has
elapsed. The previous parameter subset remains active while the stored hold timer
stage is running.
Parameter subset selection may also occur during a general starting condition.
In this case, however, the settings for distance measurement and impedance-time
characteristics remain unchanged. They are not updated until the general starting
condition ends. When subset selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum
inherent delay of approximately 100 ms must be taken into account.
Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally
effective for all four parameter subsets.
3-112
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-72
Activating the parameter subsets
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-113
3 Operation
(continued)
3.14 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON)
Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P437 ensure that internal faults are detected
and do not lead to malfunctions.
Tests during start-up
After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to verify full
operability of the P437. If the P437 detects a fault in one of the tests, then start-up is
terminated. The display shows which test was running when termination occurred.
No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to start up the P437 can only be
initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then on again.
Cyclic tests
After start-up has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run
during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will
be issued and stored in a non-volatile memory – the monitoring signal memory – along
with the assigned date and time (see also Monitoring Signal Recording).
The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the minimum
acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is displayed, then the
battery should be replaced within a month, since otherwise there is the danger of data
loss if the supply voltage should fail. Chapter 11 gives further instructions on battery
replacement.
Signaling
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured
S F M ON : W a r n i n g . The output relay operates as long as an internal fault is detected.
3-73
3-114
Monitoring signals
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Device response
The response of the P437 is dependent on the type of monitoring signal. The following
responses are possible:
Signaling Only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a signal is
issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation exists, for example,
when internal data acquisition memories overflow.
Selective Blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective functions,
then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for example, to the
detection of a fault on the communication module or in the area of the PC interface.
Warm Restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a system
restart – such as a fault in the hardware –, then a procedure called a warm restart is
automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any start-up, the computer
system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that no
stored data and, in particular, no setting parameters are affected by the procedure. A
warm restart can also be triggered manually by control action. During a warm restart
sequence the protective functions and the communication through serial interfaces
will be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been triggered
by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions remain blocked but
communication through the serial interfaces will usually be possible again.
Cold Restart
If a corrupted parameter subset is diagnosed during the checksum test, which is part
of the self-monitoring procedure, then a cold restart is carried out. This is necessary
because the protection device cannot identify which parameter in the subset is
corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be reset to a defined state.
This means that all the protection device settings are also erased after a cold restart.
In order to establish a safe initial state, the default values have been selected so that
the protective functions are blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the
cold restart and the value indicating parameter loss are entered in the monitoring
signal memory.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-115
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring signal memory
Depending on the type of internal fault detected the device will respond by trying to
eliminate the problem with a warm restart. (See above; for further details read also about
device behavior with problems in Chapter 10 ,Troubleshooting’.) Whether or not this
measure will suffice can only be determined if the monitoring signal has not already been
stored in the monitoring signal memory because of a previous fault. If it was already
stored and a second fault is detected then, depending on the type of fault detected, the
device will be blocked after the second warm restart. Previously this occurred
independently of the time duration that had passed since the first monitoring signal was
issued.
The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the device
if the monitoring signal memory has not been reset in the interim, for example, because
the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or reading-out and clearing of the
monitoring signal memory via the communication interfaces was not enabled. A timer
stage "memory retention time" has been introduced to defuse this problem.
SFMON: Mon.sig. retention
Now device blocking only occurs, when the same internal device fault is detected twice
during this time duration. Otherwise, the device will continue to operate normally after a
warm restart. In the default setting this timer stage is blocked so that, when an internal
fault is detected, the device will operate in the same way as the previous versions.
Monitoring signal memory
time tag
Because of these changes the significance of the time tag for entries to the monitoring
signal memory has been re-defined. The time when the device fault occurred first was
previously recorded. The time when the device fault occurred last is recorded.
3-116
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.15 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC)
For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of events,
a non-volatile memory is provided (cyclic buffer). The "operationally relevant" signals,
each fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal end, are entered in
chronological order. The signals relevant for operation include control actions such as
function disabling and enabling and triggers for testing and resetting. The onset and end
of events in the system that represent a deviation from normal operation such as
overloads, ground faults or short circuits are also recorded. The operating data memory
can be cleared/reset.
Counter for signals
relevant to system
operation
The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
OP RC: Operat.
data record.
[ 003 024 ]
Operating memory
MAIN: Oper.relev. signal
306 024
R
OP RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 001 ]
+
0
OP RC: No. oper.
data sig.
[ 100 002 ]
R
1
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OP RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]
3-74
0: don't execute
1: execute
Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-117
3 Operation
(continued)
3.16 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC)
The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in the
monitoring signal memory. The memory buffer allows for a maximum of 30 entries.
If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory clearance, the
S F M ON : Ov e r fl o w M T _ R C signal is entered as the last entry. Monitoring signals
prompted by a hardware fault in the unit are always entered in the monitoring signal
memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral fault can be entered into the
monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can select this option by setting an
'm out of n' parameter (see 'Self-Monitoring').
If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is signaled by the
red LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry causes the LED to
flash (on/off/on....).
The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action. Entries
in the monitoring signal memory are not cleared automatically, even if the corresponding
test in a new test cycle now shows the device to be healthy. The contents of the
monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interface. The time and date information assigned to the individual
entries can be read out through the PC or communication interface or from the local
control panel or operating program.
Monitoring signal counter
The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on the
monitoring signal counter (M T _R C : N o. m oni t. s i g n a l s ).
3-75
3-118
Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.17 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA)
In the event of an overload, the P437 determines the overload duration. The overload
duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the OL_ R C : R e c o r d . i n
pr ogr es s signal.
3-76
Overload duration
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-119
3 Operation
(continued)
3.18 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC)
Start of overload recording
An overload exists – and consequently overload recording begins – if at least the signal
T H E R M : S tar ti ng k *Ir ef> is issued.
Counting overload events
Overload events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
3-77
3-120
Counting overload events
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
The date of each overload event is stored. The overload start or end signals are likewise
time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to an overload event
when the event begins can be read out from the overload memory on the local control
panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to
the onset of the overload) can be retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC
or one of the communication interfaces.
Overload logging
Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order with
reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each involving a
maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile overload
memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the oldest overload log will be
overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or
end signals have occurred during a single overload event, then OL_ R C : Ov e r l . m e m .
ov er fl ow will be entered as the last signal.
In addition to the signals, the measured overload data will also be entered in the
overload memory.
The overload logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interfaces.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-121
3 Operation
(continued)
OL RC: Record. in
progress
C
[ 035 003 ]
1
+
Signal 2
1
R
Signal 3
1
Signal n
1
Signal 1
OL RC: Overl.
mem. overflow
[ 035 007 ]
CT200
OL RC: Overload
recording n
[
*
]
1
n
Measured value 1
OL RC: Overload
recording n
1
033 020
2
033 021
Measured value n
3
033 022
MAIN: Time tag
4
033 023
5
033 024
6
033 025
7
033 026
8
033 027
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
306 021
FT RC: Record.
in progress
[ 035 000 ]
R
OL RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
0
1
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
3-78
3-122
0: don't execute
1: execute
Overload memory
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.19 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA)
When there is a primary system fault, the P437 collects the following measured fault
data:
Running time
Fault duration
Fault current
Fault voltage (short-circuit voltage)
Short-Circuit Impedance
Fault reactance (short-circuit reactance) in percent of line reactance and in Ω
Fault angle
Fault distance
Ground fault current
Ground fault angle
Ground fault current of parallel line
Fault location in km or percentage of the protected line
Load data at end of fault
Running time and fault
duration
The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general starting
signal, and the fault duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the
F T _R C : R ec or d. i n pr ogr es s signal.
3-79
Running time and fault duration
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-123
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data acquisition time
The setting at F T _ D A : S ta r t d a ta a c q u . determines the point during a fault at
which acquisition of fault data takes place. The following settings are possible:
End of fault
Acquisition at the end of the fault.
Trigger/Trip/End
Acquisition at the following points:
„
When an appropriately configured binary signal input is triggered during a general
starting state.
„
When a general trip signal is issued.
„
At the end of the fault.
Output of fault location occurs - depending on the setting – under one of the following
conditions:
Option 1: At the same time as the other short circuit data.
Option 2: Only if a ‘zone 1 trip’ is issued.
Option 3: Only if the short circuit occurs in zone 1 or in extended zone 1.
3-80
3-124
Enabling of measured fault data acquisition and fault location output
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Selection of the measuring
loop for determining fault
data
If the distance protection function detects a fault, one of the measuring loops that is used
by distance protection for measurement purposes is selected, and the data from this loop
are displayed as the fault data. Selection of the measuring loop is based on the
following criteria:
When there is a general starting condition for distance protection, calculation of
impedances is enabled as a function of ground starting (zero-sequence starting): either
phase-to-ground impedances (in the case of grounded starting) or phase-to-phase
impedances (in the case of ungrounded starting). If the distance protection function
decides in favor of a trip in none or in all phases, then the impedance loop having the
lowest impedance is selected. In the case of multi-pole ungrounded starting and a trip
decision in a phase-to-phase loop, the loop in which the trip decision is made is selected.
If there is multi-pole grounded starting and a trip decision is made in only one phase, the
corresponding phase-to-ground loop is selected.. If there is a trip decision in two
phases, then the ratio of the impedances of these two phase-to-ground loops is
determined according to the following formula:
Z loop1 − Z loop2
Z min
Z loop1 : Impedance of phase-to-ground loop 1
Z loop2 : Impedance of phase-to-ground loop 2
Z min :
Lowest impedance of the two phase-to-ground loops
If the ratio is smaller than 0.1, then the phase-to-phase loop is selected, and if the ratio is
≥ 0.1, then the phase-to-ground loop having the lowest impedance is selected.
The phase-to-ground impedances are determined – depending on the setting – based on
the residual current of the parallel line.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-125
3 Operation
(continued)
FT_DA: Mutual
comp.
PSx
[ * ]
1: depend. on
IN/IN ,par
FT_DA: Mutual
comp.
PSx
47Z01ANB_EN
3-81
3-126
Conditioning of the phase currents for determination of phase-to-ground impedances
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
1
DIST: Trip signal
A
DIST: Trip signal
B
DIST: Trip signal
C
2
3
>-1
4
5
6
7
>-1
303 664
303 665
303 666
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
=1
c 1
c 2
c 3
Z loop 1 − Z loop 2
Z min
< 0.1
&
Z loop 1 − Z loop 2
 0.1
Z min
DIST: Multipole
starting
303 534
&
&
=2
&
&
=1
&
&
&
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
ºC
>-1
->1
303 535
¼C-G
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
->1
&
&
&
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST: Starting
N1
¼A-G
¼B-G
ºA
ºB
>-1
Σ
Σ
Σ
Σ
Σ
Σ
2
1,2
3
4
5
6
7
8
¾PP,min
1
¾PG,min
2
c 1,2,3
c 4,5,6
A-B
1
B-C
2
C-A
3
A-G
4
B-G
5
B-G
6
3
4
5
6
FT_DA: ¼Meas
7
305 053
FT_DA: ºMeas
8
1
FT_DA: ºA,corr.
2
305 061
FT_DA: ºB,corr.
3
305 062
FT_DA: ºC,corr.
4
305 063
5
305 054
1 ... 8
1 ... 8
FT_DA: Select.
meas.loop A-B
FT_DA: Select.
meas.loop B-C
FT_DA: Select.
meas.loop C-A
FT_DA: Select.
meas.loop A-G
FT_DA: Select.
meas.loop B-G
FT_DA: Select.
meas.loop C-G
FT_DA: Select.
meas.loop PG
305 058
1,3
1,4
1,5
2,6
2,7
2,8
305 059
305 060
305 055
305 056
305 057
6
>-1
305 064
47Z11AMA_EN
3-82
Selection of the measuring loop for determining fault data
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-127
3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of short circuit
data
The fault must last for at least 60 ms in order for fault data (short-circuit data) to be
determined.
One phase current is selected as the fault current in accordance with the measuring loop
selected by the fault data acquisition function. If a phase-to-phase loop has been
selected, then the fault current will be the current of the leading phase in the cycle. The
primary fault reactance is calculated from the per-unit fault reactance using the nominal
data for the set primary current and voltage transformers.
The ground fault data are only determined if a phase-to-ground loop has been selected
for display. The geometric sums of the three phase currents of the line being protected
or of the parallel line are displayed as the ground fault current. The ground fault angle is
the phase displacement between ground fault current and measuring voltage as selected
by the fault data acquisition function.
If the fault is detected by the backup overcurrent-time protection function, then only the
fault current can be determined. The maximum phase current is displayed.
Fault current and voltage are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to Inom and Vnom.
If the measured or calculated values are outside of the acceptable measuring range,
‘overflow’ is displayed.
3-128
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
[ 036 240 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
3-83
Acquisition of short circuit data
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-129
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault location acquisition
In order to determine the fault location in percentage of the line length and in km, the
value of the line reactance, which corresponds to 100% of the line section, as well as the
corresponding line length in km, must be set.
FT DA: Line
length
PSx
[
*
]
FT DA: Line
reactance
PSx
[
*
]
FT DA: Outp.
Fault location
C
305 076
FT DA: Fault
reactance,sec.
[ 004 028 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
FT DA: Fault
location
[ 004 022 ]
R
FT DA: Fault
locat. percent
[ 004 027 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
Parameter
set
set
set
set
3-84
3-130
1
2
3
4
FT DA: Line
length
PSx
010 005
010 006
010 007
010 008
FT DA: Line
reactance
PSx
010 012
010 013
010 014
010 015
Fault location acquisition
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of load data
In addition to fault data and fault location, the following load data are determined when
the general starting signal of distance protection drops out:
Load impedance
Load Angle
Residual current
The same measuring loop used to determine fault impedance is used to determine load
impedance and load angle. The load current and the voltage must exceed the thresholds
0.1 Inom and 0.1 Vnom , respectively, in order for the load data to be determined. If the
thresholds are not reached or if the general starting signal of distance protection was
shorter than 60 ms, the display ‘Not measured’ will appear.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-131
3 Operation
(continued)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
60 ms
0
S1 1
R1
FT DA: Select.
meas.loop A-G
305 055
FT DA: Select.
meas.loop B-G
S
S
305 056
R
FT DA: Select.
meas.loop C-G
S
305 057
FT DA: Select.
meas.loop A-B
305 058
FT DA: Select.
meas.loop B-C
305 059
305 060
C2
C3
R
S
C4
R
S
C5
R
S
FT DA: Select.
meas.loop C-A
C1
R
C6
0.1 Inom
R
DIST: IA-kG
303 601
1
DIST: IB-kG
303 602
2
DIST: IC-kG
303 603
3
4
VA-G
0.1 Vnom
C
VB-G
5
FT DA: Load
imped.post-flt.
[ 004 037 ]
VC-G
6
R
FT DA: Load angle
post-flt.
[ 004 038 ]
1 ... 6
IA
R
IB
FT DA: Resid.
curr. post-flt
[ 004 039 ]
IC
R
IN
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
3-85
3-132
Acquisition of load data
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data reset
After pressing the reset key ‘C’ on the local control panel, the fault data value is
displayed as "Not measured". However, the values are not erased and can continue to
be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-133
3 Operation
(continued)
3.20 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC)
Start of fault recording
A fault exists and fault recording begins if at least one of the following signals is present:
MAIN: General starting
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 2
FT_RC: Trigger
In addition, the user can set a logical "OR" combination of logic signals ('m out of n'
parameter) whose appearance will trigger fault recording.
Fault counting
Faults are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
3-134
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
FT RC: Fct.
assig. trigger
[ 003 085 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
FT_RC:
Trigger EXT
[ 036 089
]
FT RC: Trigger
[ 037 076 ]
FT RC: Trigger
USER
[ 003 041 ]
FT RC: Record.
trig. active
[ 002 002 ]
0
1
0
0: don't execute
1: execute
1 min
FT RC: Record.
in progress
[ 035 000 ]
MAIN: General
starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip
signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip
signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
+
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
ARC: Cycle
running
[ 037 000 ]
FT RC: No. of
faults
[ 004 020 ]
R
+
FT RC: No. System
disturb.
[ 004 010 ]
R
FT RC: System
disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
S1 1
R1
3-86
Start of fault recording and fault counter
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-135
3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A fault’s individual
start or end signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time assigned to a fault
when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory on the local control panel or
through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to the
onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the fault memory
or through the PC or communication interfaces.
Fault recordings
Protection signals, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and post-fault
windows, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault.
Recording of binary events is limited to 60s – even if starting is still pending. A total of
eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the
non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been recorded, the oldest fault
recording will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more
than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single fault, then F T _ R C : F a u l t
m e m . o v e r fl o w will be entered as the last signal. If the time and date are changed
during the pre-fault time, the signal F T _ R C F a u l ty ti m e ta g is generated.
In addition to the fault signals, the RMS measured fault data will also be entered in the
fault memory.
The fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interfaces.
3-136
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-87
Fault memory
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-137
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault value recording
The following analog signals are recorded:
Phase currents
Phase-to-ground voltages
Residual current measured by the P437 at the T 14 transformer
Neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P437 at the T 90 transformer
Reference voltage measured by the P437 at the T 15 transformer
Residual current of the parallel line, measured by the P437 at the T 24 transformer
The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The window length for
oscillography (disturbance) recording before and after the fault can be set. A maximum
time period of 16.4 s is available for recording. This period can be divided among a
maximum of eight faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be set. If a fault,
including the set pre-fault and post-fault times, lasts longer than the set maximum
recording time, then recording will terminate when the set maximum recording time is
reached.
The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the maximum recording time.
Otherwise the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording time minus a sampling
increment, and the post-fault time is set to zero.
If the maximum recording time of 16.4 s is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest
fault are overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have occurred
since the last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten.
The analog oscillography data of the fault record can only be read out through the PC or
communication interfaces.
When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all faults
remain stored.
3-138
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
FT RC: Record.
in progress
[ 035 000 ]
C
FT RC: Max.
recording time
[ 003 075 ]
FT RC: Pre-fault
time
[ 003 078 ]
FT RC: Post-fault
time
[ 003 079 ]
IA
Analog channel 1
R
IB
Analog channel 2
R
IC
Analog channel 3
R
VA-G
Analog channel 4
R
VB-G
Analog channel 5
R
VC-G
Analog channel 6
R
IN
Analog channel 7
R
VN-G
Analog channel 8
R
Vref
Analog channel 9
R
IN,par
Analog channel 10
R
FT RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
3-88 Fault value recording
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-139
3 Operation
(continued)
3.21 Distance Protection (Function Group DIST)
Disabling or enabling
distance protection
Distance protection can be disabled or enabled via a parameter setting
(see figure 3-89).
3.21.1 Starting
The fault detection logic in distance protection serves to detect short-circuits phaseselectively. Fault detection logic is divided into the following areas:
Overcurrent detection
Ground fault detection
Undervoltage detection
Underimpedance detection
The fault detection decisions of the individual areas are linked by the fault detection
logic.
Short-circuit currents that are greater than the maximum operating load currents can be
detected by the overcurrent detection logic. Undervoltage detection logic is provided for
short circuits that cannot be identified by overcurrent detection. In order to control
difficult conditions for fault detection, the P437 is also equipped with a highly angledependent ‘true’ underimpedance detection logic function. Ground fault detection logic
distinguishes between grounded and ungrounded faults.
The measurement loops, in which fault impedances are to be determined, are selected
depending on the phase-selective fault detection decisions. The fault detection logic is
blocked if one of the following conditions is met:
The protection function is disabled via setting parameters or appropriately configured
binary signal inputs.
Monitoring (VT supervision) detects a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit.
If distance protection is blocked, the user may switch to backup overcurrent-time
protection provided that the appropriate setting has been selected.
3-140
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DIST: General
enable USER
[
031 073
]
0
DIST: Enabled
1
0: No
[ 036 104
]
1: Yes
>1
-
DIST: Starting
blocked
303 500
MCMON: Meas.
circ. V faulty
[ 038 023
]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
1
3-89
60
D5Z5029A_EN
Fault detection blocking
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-141
3 Operation
(continued)
Overcurrent detection
Overcurrent fault detection monitors the phase currents for values in excess of the
threshold values I>> and I>>>. I>>> is equal to 2 I>>. The thresholds are identical for all
three phases.
The output signals of the I>> trigger assume a logic value of ’ 1 ’ if the threshold is
exceeded in two consecutive half-waves. In the case of the I>>> trigger only one halfwave must exceed the threshold for the output signals to assume a logic value of ‘1’..
Triggering of the inrush stabilization prevents operation of the I>> trigger.
If I>> is exceeded in one phase, then it is sufficient for overcurrent detection if I>>> is
exceeded in the other phases. In this case the fault detection time is shortened since
there is no longer any need to wait for the second half-wave.
Evaluation of the trigger decisions is a function of the type of neutral-point treatment set
in the P437. If ‘isolated neutral/resonant grounding’ or ‘short-duration grounding’ is set,
then I>> overcurrent detection occurs in the phase(s) in which the I>> threshold is
exceeded. With the setting ‘low-impedance grounding’ the following condition must also
be satisfied:
I≥
3-142
2
⋅I
3 max
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
]
*
1: Low-imped.
grounding
[
2: Isol./res.w.
start.PG
>1
-
3: Isol./res.w/o
st. PG
4: Short-durat.
ground.
MAIN: Rush restr.
A trig.
[
041 027
]
041 028
]
041 029
]
MAIN: Rush restr.
B trig.
[
MAIN: Rush restr.
C trig.
[
DIST: Starting
blocked
c
DIST: I>>
PSx
[
303 500
*
]
IA
&
IB
&
IC
&
DIST: I>>
triggered
>
-1
303 597
I>>> = 2*I>>
DIST: I>>>
triggered
>1
-
303 501
&
c
COMP
(2/3)*Imax
Imax
>1
-
&
>
-1
>
-1
DIST: IA>>
triggered
303 511
&
&
&
>1
-
&
&
>
-1
>
-1
DIST: IB>>
triggered
303
&
512
&
&
>
-1
&
*
2
3-90
Parameter
MAIN: Neutr.pt. DIST: I>>
treat. PSx
PSx
set
set
set
set
010
001
001
001
1
2
3
4
048
076
077
078
205
010
010
010
011
054
074
094
014
&
>1
-
>1
-
DIST: IC>>
triggered
303
513
&
&
&
>
-1
&
47Z0155A_EN
47Z1155A_EN
Overcurrent detection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-143
3 Operation
(continued)
Ground fault detection
To detect grounded faults, the ground fault detection function monitors the average
magnitude of the residual current calculated from the phase currents and the neutraldisplacement voltage calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages for values exceeding
set thresholds. For the two possible dynamic ranges of current measurement, one
parameter each is available for setting the fault detection value for ground fault
monitoring.
5% of the current maximum phase current is added to the set threshold IN>, which
means that the operate value of the ground current function increases with an increasing
phase current level as a form of stabilization.
3-144
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MAIN: Dynamic
range I
[
031 082
]
2: Sensitive
range
1: Highest range
IA
COMP
c
DIST: IN>
sens. range PSx
c
DIST: IN> high
range PSx
IB
IC
[
I max
*
[
]
*
]
DIST: Start.
IN> triggered
303 502
|Ix|
0.05*|I max|
|Ix|+IN>
DIST: tIN>
PSx
[
DIST: Starting
blocked
*
]
t
c
0
DIST: tIN>
elapsed
>1
-
303 500
303 502
+
+
+
MAIN: Neutralpoint treat.
[
&
Σ
[ 036 105
0
]
*
DIST: tIN>
running
]
50ms
&
4: Short-durat.
ground.
&
c
DIST: VNG>
PSx
[
*
]
DIST: VNG>>
exceeded
303 596
V A-G
V B-G
V C-G
+
+
+
DIST: Start.
VNG> triggered
Σ
303 504
c
DIST: VNG>>
PSx
[
*
DIST: tVNG>>
PSx
]
[
*
]
t
0
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
[
]
*
1: Low-imped.
grounding
DIST: tVNG>>
elapsed
303 506
&
DIST: VNG>>
triggered
[ 036 015
&
[ 036 016
*
]
DIST: tVNG>>
elapsed
]
Parameter
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
DIST: IN> high
range PSx
DIST: IN>
sens. range PSx
DIST: tIN>
PSx
DIST: VNG>
PSx
DIST: VNG>>
PSx
DIST: tVNG>>
PSx
set
set
set
set
010
001
001
001
010
010
010
011
010
010
010
010
010
010
010
011
010
010
010
011
010
010
010
011
010
010
010
011
1
2
3
4
048
076
077
078
055
075
095
015
123
124
125
126
057
077
097
017
056
076
096
016
062
082
002
022
061
081
001
021
47Z1156A_EN
3-91
Monitoring the residual current and the neutral-displacement voltage
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-145
3 Operation
(continued)
The ground fault detection mode is a function of the neutral-point treatment set in the
P437.
M A I N : N e u t r . p t . t r e a t . = Low-impedance grounding
With this setting ground fault detection (D IS T : Z e r o - s e q u . s t a r t i n g ) w i l l occur
when the threshold of the stages IN> or/and VNG> is exceeded. (Selecting the link
for the trigger decisions is made by setting M A IN : Gr o u n d s t a r t i n g P S x ). In this
operating mode the timer stage tIN> should be set to zero delay. Furthermore,
triggering of stage VNG>> and the lapse of timer stage tVNG>> is signaled (see
Figure 3-91).
M A I N : N e u t r . p t . t r e a t . = Isolated neutral/resonant grounding
If the setting isolated neutral/resonant grounding is selected, instantaneous ground
fault detection (D I S T : Z e r o - s e q u . s t a r t i n g ) operates in the event of multiple
phase-to-ground fault detection when the thresholds of stages IN> and VNG> are
exceeded. Even in the case of a single-phase fault, that is, in the event that only one
base point is detected, ground fault detection will operate, but not until tIN> has
elapsed.
M A I N : N e u t r . p t . t r e a t . = Short-duration grounding
Operation here corresponds to operation with the setting isolated neutral/resonant
grounding except that in the case of a sustained ground fault the timer stage tIN>
remains activated due to the operating trigger VNG>> and therefore no longer has
any effect in the event of subsequent short-duration grounding.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
[
]
*
2: Isol./res.w.
start.PG
>1
-
3: Isol./res.w/o
st. PG
4: Short-durat.
ground.
1: Low-imped.
grounding
DIST: Starting
G
>
-1
&
&
DIST: Start.
IN> triggered
303 507
>1
-
303 502
DIST: Start.
switch. to PG
>
-1
DIST: Start.
VNG> triggered
&
[
&
303 504
DIST: tIN>
elapsed
>1
-
040 052
]
>1
-
303 503
DIST: IA>>
triggered
>
-2
303 511
DIST: IB>>
triggered
303 512
DIST: IC>>
triggered
303 513
DIST: VPP<
triggered
>
-1
303 509
DIST: Start.
ZPP< triggered
*
303 510
4
3-92
3-146
100
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
010 048
001 076
001 077
001 078
47Z1150A_EN
D5Z5007B_EN
Evaluation of trigger signals
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling undervoltage
and underimpedance
fault detection
The undervoltage and underimpedance fault detection functions are enabled by I>(Imin)
in the corresponding measuring systems. For the two possible dynamic ranges of
current measurement, one parameter each is available for setting the fault detection
value for I>(Imin). In order to control contention problems when current and voltage
appear at the same time (branch voltage transformers), measuring system enabling is
delayed by 10 ms.
For sensitive detection of double ground faults with isolated neutral/resonant grounding,
the P437 checks to determine whether the base point current I>(Imin) is exceeded in one
phase only and whether the measured value falls below the set threshold for
underimpedance fault detection in two phases. Enabling proceeds in the phases where
the voltage is below the set threshold.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-147
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: Starting
blocked
303 500
DIST: I> (Ibl)
sens. r. PSx
[
*
]
DIST: I> (Ibl)
high r. PSx
[
*
]
MAIN: Dymamic
range I
[ 031 082 ]
2: Sensitive
range
1: Highest
range
IA
IB
IC
DIST: IA>(Ibl)
trigg.
303 598
DIST: IB>(Ibl)
trigg.
303 599
DIST: IC>(Ibl)
trigg.
303 600
DIST: V<
PSx
[
*
]
Meas.val.>set value
DIST: Enable
V<, Z<, A
303 514
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
DIST: Enable
V<, Z<, B
303 515
DIST: Enable
V<, Z<, C
303 516
Meas.val.<set value
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
[
*
]
2: Isol./res.w.
start.PG
4: Short-durat.
ground.
DIST: Start.
IN> triggered
303 502
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
010 048
001 076
001 077
001 078
DIST: I> (Ibl)
high r. PSx
010 068
010 088
011 008
011 028
DIST: I> (Ibl)
sens. r. PSx
010 119
010 120
010 121
010 122
DIST: V<
PSx
010 069
010 089
011 009
011 029
47Z1151A_EN
3-93
3-148
Enabling undervoltage and underimpedance fault detection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Undervoltage detection
Undervoltage fault detection monitors the phase-to-ground voltages or the phase-tophase voltages to determine whether they fall below the set threshold V<.
Operation of undervoltage fault detection can be determined by selecting the operating
mode. The following operating modes are possible:
Undervoltage fault detection is deactivated.
The undervoltage fault detection function evaluates only the decisions of the phaseto-ground loops, once these functions have been enabled by ground fault detection.
Ground fault detection brings about a switch from phase-to-phase to phase-to-ground
loops.
3-94
Undervoltage detection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-149
3 Operation
(continued)
Underimpedance detection
Underimpedance fault detection determines the impedances of the phase-to-ground or
phase-to-phase loops.
The underimpedance fault detection mode can be determined by selecting the operating
mode. The following operating modes are possible:
Underimpedance fault detection is deactivated.
The underimpedance fault detection function evaluates only the decisions of the
phase-to-ground loops, once these functions have been enabled by ground fault
detection.
Ground fault detection brings about a switch from phase-to-phase to phase-to-ground
loops.
All underimpedance fault detection measuring loops are blocked when the trigger I>>>
operates (see ‘Overcurrent Fault Detection’). When overcurrent or undervoltage fault
detection operates, the corresponding measuring loops are blocked phase-selectively.
3-150
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-95
Enabling underimpedance fault detection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-151
3 Operation
(continued)
If measurement is enabled, the loop impedance is determined and compared to
ascertain that it is within the set impedance range. The loop impedance of the phase-toground loops is determined, depending on the setting, by using the ground current
corrected by the set ground factor kG or by using twice the phase current. The following
values must be set in order to determine the underimpedance fault detection
characteristic:
Reactance in the forward direction
Xfw
Load Angle
β
Ratio
(Impedance in backward/reverse direction: Zbw
Impedance in forward direction: Zfw)
Zbw/Zfw
Phase-to-ground impedance in forward direction
Zfw,PG
Phase-to-phase impedance in forward direction
Zfw,PP
Phase-to-ground resistance in forward direction
Rfw,PG
Phase-to-phase resistance in forward direction
Rfw,PP
If, on the basis of the settings, the reach in the backward (reverse) direction is greater
than 3 Znom, then the range is limited to 3 Znom (Znom = Vnom / Inom).
3-96
3-152
Fault detection characteristic of the underimpedance fault detection function
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-97
Formation of currents corrected by the ground factor
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-153
3 Operation
(continued)
3-98
3-154
Underimpedance detection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault detection logic
The fault detection logic links the phase-selective output signals from
Overcurrent detection (I>>)
Ground fault detection
Undervoltage detection (V<)
Underimpedance detection (Z<)
to form common phase-selective starting decisions (SA, SB, and SC) and SN1. The
phase-selective starting decisions are combined to form ‘general starting’ – and thus
produce the M A IN : Ge n e r a l s t a r t i n g signal. Ground fault detection alone does not
bring about general starting.
If fault detection operates via overcurrent fault detection, single-phase fault detection
may operate without ground fault detection. In order for the measuring loops for distance
and directional measurement to be properly selected even in this case, either SN1 or
starting in another phase must be triggered as well. It is possible to specify whether, in
the case of single-phase starting, SN1 will always be triggered or whether – depending
on the magnitude of the phase currents – SN1 or starting in one phase will be transfertriggered.
M A I N : T r a n s f e r f o r 1 p ‘Ground’
With single-phase overcurrent fault detection, SN1 is started and transferred after the
timer stage tIN> has elapsed (see ‘Ground Fault Detection’ for setting).
If there is a change from single-phase overcurrent fault detection without ground to
multi-phase fault detection or single-phase-to-ground fault detection, starting will
occur instantaneously.
MAIN: Transfer for 1p
‘P or G = f(Imed,Imax)’
For single-pole overcurrent fault detection, the decision as to whether starting in one
phase or SN1 starting will be transferred depends on the Imed / Imax ratio. The
magnitude of the medium phase current must be more than 2/3 the magnitude of the
maximum current for the phase to be transfer-triggered. If the current with the
medium-sized magnitude is smaller, SN1 will be triggered after timer stage tIN> has
elapsed.
If there is a change from single-phase overcurrent fault detection without ground to
multi-phase fault detection or single-phase-to-ground fault detection, starting will
occur instantaneously.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-155
3 Operation
(continued)
1
2
3
4
5
6
DIST: VA<
triggered
7
DIST: Starting
A
>1
-
303 517
303 529
DIST: ZA< start.
triggered
303 526
DIST: IA>>
triggered
&
303 511
&
DIST: VB<
triggered
DIST: Starting
B
>1
-
303 518
303 530
DIST: ZB< start.
triggered
303 527
DIST: IB>>
triggered
&
303 512
&
DIST: VC<
triggered
DIST: Starting
C
>1
-
303 519
303 531
DIST: ZC< start.
triggered
>
-1
303 528
DIST: IC>>
triggered
DIST: General
starting
&
303 513
[
036 240
]
DIST: 1-pole
starting
=1
&
303 533
DIST: Multipole
starting
303 534
DIST: Starting
G
&
303 507
=1
DIST: tIN>
PSx
[
&
]
*
DIST: Starting
N1
>1
-
DIST: Zero-sequ.
starting
303 535
]
[
MAIN: Transfer
for 1p PSx
[
*
&
>1
-
1: Ground
t
0
036 021
]
>1
-
>1
-
2: P or G =
f(Imed,Imax)
c
IA
COMP
|I medium|/|Imax|≥ 2/3
IB
IC
I max
|Imedium|/|I max|>2/3
I medium
COMP
COMP
COMP
BUOC: IN>
triggered
304 753
*
11
3-99
3-156
Parameter
DIST: tIN>
PSx
MAIN: Transfer
for 1p PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
011
010
001
001
001
1
2
3
4
220
057
077
097
017
040
079
080
081
47Z0160A_EN
47Z1152A_EN
Fault detection logic
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
If a general starting condition is present, then the fault detection decisions of the
following systems are signaled:
Overcurrent fault detection
Undervoltage fault detection
Underimpedance fault detection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DIST: General
starting
[
]
036 240
DIST: IA>>
triggered
303 511
DIST: IB>>
triggered
303 512
&
DIST: Starting
I>> A
[
&
[
&
]
040 065
]
DIST: Starting
I>> C
[
DIST: IC>>
triggered
040 064
DIST: Starting
I>> B
040 097
]
303 513
&
DIST: VA<
triggered
303 517
DIST: VB<
triggered
303 518
DIST: Starting
V< A
[
&
[
&
]
040 075
]
DIST: Starting
V< C
[
DIST: VC<
triggered
040 067
DIST: Starting
V< B
040 096
]
303 519
&
DIST: ZA< start.
triggered
303 526
DIST: ZB< start.
triggered
303 527
DIST: ZC< start.
triggered
303 528
DIST: Starting
Z< A
[
&
[
&
040 070
]
DIST: Starting
Z< B
040 071
]
DIST: Starting
Z< C
[
040 072
]
DIST: Starting Z<
[
036 241
]
D5Z5014B_EN
47Z1160A_EN
3-100
Fault detection signals of distance protection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-157
3 Operation
(continued)
3.21.2 Selection of Measured Variables
The P437 selects measuring loops based on the phase-selective fault detection decision.
The short-circuit impedances (fault impedances) and the fault direction are determined
from the voltage and current of these measuring loops.
For multi-phase-to-ground faults, the user can specify whether phase-to-ground or
phase-to-phase variables will be used for measurement. For single-phase faults, it is
possible to disable impedance and directional measurement.
Measurement PG Loops
with Phase-toGround Fault
Detection
PP Loops or
No Loops
PG Loops
PP Loops
PG Loops
PP Loops
Measuring Loop 1
Measuring Loop 2
Measuring Loop 3
Starting
Vmeas,1 Imeas,1
Vmeas,2 Imeas,2
Vmeas,3 Imeas,3
A, B, C, G
VA-G
IA,corr. VA-B
IA-B
VB-G
IB,corr. VB-C
IB-C
VC-G
IC,corr. VC-A
IC-A
A, B, C
VA-B
IA-B
VA-B
IA-B
VB-C
IB-C
IB-C
VC-A
IC-A
IC-A
A, B, G
VA-G
IA,corr. VA-B
IA-B
VB-G
IB,corr.
/
/
B, C, G
VB-G
IB,corr. VB-C
IB-C
VC-G
IC,corr.
/
/
A, C, G
VA-G
IA,corr. VC-A
IC-A
VC-G
IC,corr.
/
/
A, B
VA-B
IA-B
VA-B
IA-B
B, C
VB-C
IB-C
VB-C
IB-C
A, C
VC-A
IC-A
VC-A
IC-A
A, G
VA-G
IA,corr.
/
/
B, G
VB-G
IB,corr.
/
/
C, G
VC-G
IC,corr.
/
/
Vmeas,1 Imeas,1
Vmeas,2 Imeas,2
VB-C
Vmeas,3 Imeas,3
VC-A
Only one measuring loop is shown in the following block diagrams. If several
measurement loops are selected, the P437 links the measuring decisions with an OR
operator.
3-158
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-101
Selection of measuring loops
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-159
3 Operation
(continued)
Parallel line compensation
In the case of grounded faults, it is possible to activate parallel line compensation if the
proper setting has been made. If parallel line compensation has been enabled, then the
residual current of the parallel line will be included in distance and directional
measurement as a function of the decision of the 'zero current scale'. The 'zero current
scale' compares the magnitude of the residual currents in the line and the parallel line.
Compensation is only permitted if the ratio of the residual current in the parallel line to
the residual current in the line to be protected is lower than the value set at
M A IN : k P a r . P S x . . Otherwise there is the danger of incorrect compensation in the
healthy line with a residual current in the shorted parallel line. The ratio should be set to
a value smaller than 1, so as to prevent such incorrect compensation, even with faults at
the line’s end (with residual currents of differing magnitude caused by unbalanced lines).
3-160
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: Mutual
comp.
PSx
DIST: Mutual
comp.
PSx
47Z0162B_EN
3-102
Parallel line compensation
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-161
3 Operation
(continued)
CVT stabilization
Only the fundamental component of the selected measuring voltages is evaluated. If
stabilization for capacitive voltage transformers (CVT stabilization) has been enabled,
the device checks to determine whether the second harmonic exceeds the threshold of
0.01 Vnom. If so, a special filter designed specifically for CVTs is activated.
3-162
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-103
CVT stabilization and selection of measured variables
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-163
3 Operation
(continued)
3.21.3 Distance and Directional Measurement
The P437 determines the fault impedance and the fault direction in all measuring loops
on the basis of the selected measured variables. A voltage memory is available so that
measurement will function correctly, even with very low fault voltages.
Voltage memory
Voltage VA-B is the reference voltage for the voltage memory. If the voltage exceeds the
permanent value of 0.65 Vnom and there is no starting of the distance protection function,
then the voltage memory will be synchronized. Synchronization requires approximately
300 ms. Then a check is carried out to determine whether the frequency satisfies the
following condition:
0.99 ⋅ fnom < f < 101
. ⋅ fnom .
If the condition is satisfied, the voltage memory is enabled. The frequency condition is
checked cyclically. As soon as the frequency condition is no longer satisfied, the enable
is canceled and the voltage memory is blocked without delay.
If the magnitude of the reference voltage drops below the set threshold or if a starting of
the distance protection function occurs, synchronization of the voltage memory is
terminated. The voltage memory is then free-running and remains enabled for 2 s.
3-164
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: I>>
triggered
303 597
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
>0.65*Vnom
DIST: ϕcorr
corr
303 547
0.95fnom<f<1.05fnom
DIST: Voltage
mem. enabled
303 549
DIST: tVmemory
running
[ 040 034 ]
VA-G
VB-G
DIST: VA-B
(stored)
303 548
47Z1161A_EN
3-104
Storing the VAB reference voltage in memory
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-165
3 Operation
(continued)
Angle determination
When general starting of distance protection occurs, the angles ϕF and ϕS are
determined for each measuring loop. Angle ϕF is the fault angle that is determined using
the selected measuring voltage Vmeas and the selected measuring current Imeas. Angle ϕS
is determined on the basis of the voltage stored in memory and the selected measuring
current Imeas. Since the frequency of the stored voltage can differ from the nominal
frequency, a phase correction must be made. This correction is determined by the
frequency deviation and the time that has elapsed since synchronization was terminated.
Furthermore, an angle correction based on the measuring loop and the setting
M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e is required. The resulting angle ϕX is used for further
processing.
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
1: A-B-C
2: A-C-B
47Z0165B_EN
3-105
3-166
Angle determination
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
For distance and directional measurement, the following angles are used – as a function
of the magnitude of the selected measuring voltage and the fault duration:
Fault angle ϕF
Angle ϕX
Set angle α
Selecting the angle for
direction determination
If the selected measuring voltage Vmeas exceeds D IS T : Op e r .v a l .V m e m o r y P S x
when the fault occurs, the direction is determined with fault angle ϕF. If the measuring
voltage is below the threshold set at D IS T : Op e r .v a l .V m e m o r y P S x , angle ϕX is
used for directional measurement.
If the voltage memory is not enabled, angle ϕX cannot be determined. In this case the
measuring voltage Vmeas is checked. If it is within the range
0.002 Vnom < Vmeas < D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x ,
fault angle ϕX is used for directional measurement..
Direction determination using ϕX or ϕF is not possible if the voltage memory is not
enabled or if the measuring voltage is less than 0.002 Vnom. In these cases, set angle α
is used for directional measurement. This means that a decision is made in favor of the
forward direction.
Angle for Direction Determination with:
V memory
0.002 Vnom < Vmeas
< DIST: Oper.val.Vmemory PSx
Vmeas < 0.002 Vnom
Enabled
ϕX
ϕX
Not enabled
ϕF
α
A decision is made for the forward direction if the angle selected for direction
determination is in the range -45° < ϕ < +135°. In the case of angles outside this range,
a decision is made for the backward direction.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-167
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: Voltage
mem. enabled
303 549
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
< 0.002 Vnom
DIST: Forw. w/o
meas. y
[ 1* ]
DIST: Dir.using
Vmeas y
[ 1* ]
DIST: Vmeas
303 546
DIST: Oper.val.
Vmemory PSx
[
*
]
DIST: Dir.using
Vmem y
[ 1* ]
DIST: α
303 552
DIST: ϕ F
303 550
DIST: ϕ X
DIST: Fault
forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
DIST: Fault
backward/ BS
[ 036 019 ]
303 551
ϕN
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIST: Fault
forwd. / LS, x
[
2* ]
DIST: Oper.val.
Vmemory PSx
010 109
010 116
010 117
011 118
DIST: Fault
backwd / BS, x
[
2* ]
y: Sys1, Sys2, Sys3
DIST: Dir.using
Vmeas y
DIST: Dir.using
Vmem y
DIST: Forw. w/o
meas. y
Starting
Active measur. loop
1p, 2p, 3p
Measuring loop 1
038 045
038 047
038 044
2p, 3p
Measuring loop 2
038 105
038 106
038 104
3p
Measuring loop 3
038 108
038 109
038 107
Selected meas. variable
x: A, B, C
Vmeas
Imeas
VA-G
Possible signals
DIST: Fault
forwd. / LS, x
DIST: Fault
backwd / BS, x
IA,corr.
038 010
038 011
VB-G
IB,corr.
038 012
038 013
VC-G
IC,corr.
038 014
038 015
VA-B
IA-B
VB-C
IB-C
VC-A
IC-A
038
038
038
038
038
038
038
038
038
038
038
038
010
012
012
014
010
014
011
013
013
015
011
015
47Z1162A_EN
3-106
3-168
Directional measurement
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Selecting the angle for
impedance calculation
The angle that is used to calculate fault impedance is selected according to the following
criteria:
If the selected measuring voltage Vmeas exceeds D IS T : Op e r .v a l .V m e m o r y
P S x when the fault occurs, fault angle ϕF. is used to calculate the fault impedance.
If the fault voltages are below the threshold set at D IS T : Op e r .v a l .V m e m o r y
P S x and the enabled voltage memory, they are compared if angles ϕF and ϕX are
oriented in the forward direction (-45° < ϕ < +135°).
„
If both angles are in the same direction, either forward or backward, then fault
angle ϕF is selected for distance measurement.
„
If angle ϕF is in the forward direction and angle ϕX is in the backward direction,
then an angle of 180° + α is specified for the calculation.
„
If angle ϕX is in the forward direction and angle ϕF is in the backward direction,
then set angle α is used for distance measurement.
If voltage memory is not enabled, the measuring voltage is checked:
„
If the measuring voltage Vmeas is within the range
0.002 Vnom < Vmeas < D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x ,
fault angle ϕF. is used to calculate the fault impedance.
„
If the selected measuring voltage Vmeas < 0.002 Vnom, the set angle α is used for
the impedance calculation.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-169
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
< 0.002 Vnom
DIST: Vmeas
303 546
DIST: Oper.val.
Vmemory PSx
[
*
]
DIST: Voltage
mem. enabled
303 549
DIST: ϕ F
303 550
DIST: ϕ X
303 551
DIST: α
303 552
DIST: ϕ Z
303 553
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIST: Oper.val.
Vmemory PSx
010 109
010 116
010 117
011 118
47Z1163A_EN
3-107
3-170
Selecting the angle for impedance calculation
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Distance measurement
One of the following types of characteristics may be selected for distance measurement
by way of the setting at D IS T : C h a r a c te r i s ti c :
Circle characteristic
Polygon (quadrilateral) characteristic
3-108
Selecting the characteristic
Extending the measuring
range for single-phase fault
detection
The user has the option of specifying whether the measuring range of impedance zone 1
shall be extended by zone extension factor kze HSR in the case of single-phase fault
detection. If this is desired, the measuring range of impedance zone 1 is extended if the
following conditions are met:
There is an enable.
ARC (auto-reclosing control) was ready before general starting occurred.
The enable is issued from the local control panel or through an appropriately configured
binary signal input. If the enable signal is to be issued from the local control panel, it is
possible to define conditions that must be met so that the enable signal is issued.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-171
3 Operation
(continued)
3-109
3-172
Extending the measuring range for single-phase fault detection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Circle characteristic
The fault impedance value ZF is determined for each measuring loop using the selected
measuring quantities Vmeas and Imeas. If the setting ‘Arc compensation: yes’ has been
chosen, then a correction to the measured fault impedance is calculated for angles ϕZ in
the range of −45 ° < ϕ Z < α or 135 ° < ϕ Z < ( α + 180 ° ) as follows:
Z F ,corr =
ZF
1 + sin δ
The following relation applies in the range −45 ° < ϕ Z < α :
δ = α − ϕZ
The following relation applies in the range 135 ° < ϕ Z < ( α + 180 ° ) :
δ = α − ϕ Z + 180 °
3-110
Impedance measurement with the circle characteristic
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-173
3 Operation
(continued)
In the R-X diagram, the characteristic shown in Figure 3-111 is obtained. If the
characteristic were to be measured with sine variables for the setting
‘Arc compensation: yes’, the dot-dash line would be obtained.
3-111
3-174
P437 impedance and directional characteristics for the ‘Circle’ setting
n = 1 to 6
α = 60°
Dot-dash line:
with arc compensation
Dashed line:
kze = 1.2 (adjustable in zone 1 only)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
The calculated impedance |Zmeas| is compared with the set impedance in the six
impedance zones. If the measured impedance is smaller than or equal to the set
impedance, then a distance decision is made for the corresponding zone(s).
3-112
Setting impedance zones 2 to 6 and distance measurement
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-175
3 Operation
(continued)
In addition to the settings described above, the zone extension factors kze for high-speed
reclosure (HSR) and time-delay reclosure (TDR) can also be set separately for phase-toground (PG) and phase-to-phase (PP) loops for impedance zone 1. The impedances
modified by the zone extension factor kze are calculated as follows:
Z1,kze = k ze ⋅ Z1
The increase in reach by the zone extension factor kze HSR is controlled by the following:
Protective signaling (P S I G : Z 1 e x t e n d e d )
Internal auto-reclosing control, if protective signaling is not ready or – irrespective of
the readiness of protective signaling – during the reclose command.
Switch on to fault protection (S O T F : Z 1 e x t e n d e d )
An external signal (D IS T : Z o n e e x t e n s i o n E X T ).
The impedance characteristic is extended by the zone extension factor kze TDR if a timedelayed reclosure is carried out by internal auto-reclosing control.
3-176
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-113
Setting impedance zone 1 and distance measurement
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-177
3 Operation
(continued)
Polygon (quadrilateral)
characteristic
The fault impedance value ZF is determined for each measuring loop using the selected
measuring quantities Vmeas and Imeas. By multiplying this value by the cosine or sine of
the angle selected for distance measurement ϕZ, we then calculate the fault resistance
RF or fault reactance XF.
3-114
Impedance measurement with the polygon characteristic
The calculated quantities RF and XF are compared with the reference quantities Rref and
Xref of the six impedance zones. The reference quantities are determined using the
settings for determining the impedance zone(s). If both quantities lie within the set
impedance zone(s), then a distance decision is made for the corresponding zone(s)..
The impedance zones are determined by the following settings:
Reactance X
Resistance R, separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops
Angle α
Angle σ
Using these settings in the R-X diagram we obtain the characteristic shown in
Figure 3-115.
3-178
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-115
P437 impedance and directional characteristics for the ‘Polygon’ setting
Example for:
Xn = 6.5 Ω
Rn = 2.0 Ω
αn = 70°
σn = -20°
n = 1 to 6
Dashed line:
kze = 1.2 (adjustable in zone 1 only)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-179
3 Operation
(continued)
The resistances for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops can be set separately for
each zone. The different impedances are therefore compared with different impedance
characteristics.
3-116
3-180
Setting impedance zones 2 to 6 and distance measurement
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
In addition to the settings described above, the zone extension factors kze for high-speed
reclosure (HSR) and time-delay reclosure (TDR) can also be set separately for phase-toground (PG) and phase-to-phase (PP) loops for impedance zone 1.
As a result of these settings, impedance zone 1 is extended accordingly in the R and X
directions. The R and X values modified by the zone extension factor kze are calculated
according to the following formulas:
R1,kze = k ze ⋅ R1
X 1,kze = k ze ⋅ X 1
The increase in reach by the zone extension factor kze HSR is controlled by the following:
Protective signaling (P S I G : Z 1 e x t e n d e d )
Internal auto-reclosing control, if protective signaling is not ready or – irrespective of
the readiness of protective signaling – during the reclose command.
Switch on to fault protection (S O T F : Z 1 e x t e n d e d )
An external signal (D IS T : Z o n e e x t e n s i o n E X T ).
The impedance characteristic is extended by the zone extension factor kze TDR if a timedelay reclosure is carried out by internal auto-reclosing control.
Reactive reach settings
Xn,PP and Xn,PG
The reactive component of the distance zones may be set separately for the phase-tophase (PP) and phase-to-ground (PG) measuring loops.
DIST: Xn,PG (polygon) PSx
(n= 1 ... 6)
DIST: Xn,PP (polygon) PSx
(n= 1 ... 6)
This feature may be helpful with double-circuit lines without using mutual compensation.
In order to cope with effects of mutual coupling, the zone 1 reach for faults with
grounding can now be set to the smallest possible reactance value (depending on
possible switching states of the parallel circuit), while the phase-to-phase loop
measurement is set to a "normal" underreaching reach.
A further application is to selectively block the phase-to-ground measurement in
protection schemes where backup protection for ground fault short circuits is provided
with time-graded directional neutral overcurrent protection elements.
Note:
Zone 1 extension already provides various factors for phase-to-phase and phase-toground measuring loops. Further precaution measures are therefore not required here.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-181
3 Operation
(continued)
Increased reach settings
The maximum setting values for R and X zone reaches, including the underimpedance
starting zone, are 400 Ω at Inom = 1 A (and 80 Ω at Inom = 5 A). Therefore
exceptionally high secondary impedances in backup protection applications may now be
taken into account.
Note:
For such especially high reach settings the accuracy of an impedance measurement will
naturally be limited because of the then very low short circuit currents available, so that
the user will have to abide with tolerance deviations in the order of 10%.
3-182
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
1
2
PSIG: Ready
[
037 027
3
4
5
6
7
DIST: Zone
extension TDR
&
]
[
ARC: Zone
extension TDR
038 022
]
303 000
&
ARC: Zone
extension HSR
>
-1
303 001
ARC: Meas.r.
extd. ext.ARC
DIST: Zone
extension HSR
>1
-
[
303 025
PSIG: Z1
extended
[
035 075
>
-1
]
ARC: Zone
extension RC
[
DIST: X1,PG
(polygon)
303 002
SOTF: Z1 extended
[
035 076
]
036 046
]
039 029
]
[
[
[
PSx
PSx
]
*
DIST: σ 1
(polygon)
[
&
DIST: Select.
meas.loop P-G
DIST: kze,PG TDR
PSx
c
DIST: kze,PP TDR
PSx
c
DIST: kze,PG HSR
PSx
c
DIST: kze,PP HSR
PSx
c
DIST: R1,PG
(polygon) PSx
c
DIST: R1,PP
(polygon) PSx
[
&
DIST: Select.
meas.loop P-P
[
303 544
&
[
&
[
[
[
DIST: ϕZ
PSx
]
*
c
303 543
]
*
]
*
]
*
]
*
]
*
]
*
R1,ref1 =
f(R1, α1, σ1, ϕZ)
303 553
]
]
*
DIST: α 1
(polygon)
DIST: Zone
ext. HSR 1pG
[
036 065
PSx
]
*
DIST: X1,PP
(polygon)
DIST: Zone
extension EXT
[
]
036 103
DIST: Zone
extension
R1,ref1 > RF
DIST: Dist.
decision Z1, x
&
X1,ref1 =
f(X1, α1, σ1, ϕZ)
X1,ref1 > XF
R1,ref2 =
f(R1,α1,σ1,ϕZ,kze)
R1,ref2 > RF
X1,ref2 =
f(X1,α1,σ1,ϕZ,kze)
X1,ref2 > XF
303 629
DIST: Dist.
decision Z1ze,x
&
303 630
DIST: RF
DIST: Dist.
decis.Z1 stored
S1 1
303 554
303 565
R1
DIST: XF
303 555
MAIN: General
starting
[
036 000
>
-1
]
ASC: Manual
close request
x: A-N, B-N, C-N,
A-B, B-C, C-A
305 000
23
3-117
Parameter
DIST: X1,PG
(polygon)
012
012
013
013
*
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
Parameter
DIST: R1,PP
(polygon) PSx
DIST: kze,PG TDR
PSx
DIST: kze,PP TDR
PSx
DIST: σ 1
(polygon)
set
set
set
set
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
DIST: X1,PP
PSx (polygon)
DIST: α 1
PSx (polygon)
*
001
051
001
051
006
056
006
056
002
002
002
002
076
077
078
078
046
096
046
096
012
012
013
013
220
DIST: kze,PG HSR
PSx PSx
013
063
013
063
047
097
047
097
012
012
013
013
034
084
034
084
DIST: kze,PP HSR
PSx
DIST: R1,PG
(polygon) PSx
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
035
085
035
085
005
055
005
055
PSx
086
086
086
086
47Z0170A_EN
47Z1157A_EN
Setting impedance zone 1 and distance measurement
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-183
3 Operation
(continued)
Distance decision for
2pG-faults
To provide correct operation for cross-country faults or inter-system faults on double
circuit lines (2pGG faults), it is mandatory to evaluate only the both phase-ground loop
impedances. This is possible by setting, yet during tests this setting resulted in
staggered tripping for very close 2pG faults, because one PG loop impedance could
appear in backward direction. The reason for this is that the impedance is calculated by
using the ground factor kG of the line, yet as no line impedance is involved in the
measuring loop any more and as the source ground factor was significantly smaller than
the line factor, thus one PG loop impedance is “misleading”.
Therefore the following solution is implemented:
If starting identifies a 2pG fault condition, and “PG loops” evaluation is selected, than the
phase-phase voltage is used to determine whether it is a close fault, which is the case ir
VPP < 10% Vnom. In this case, the PG-loop impedances (for the distance and directional
measurement) are calculated with kG = 0; otherwise normal equation with set kG is used.
Additionally to the 2 PG impedances the PP impedance is calculated, too, to secure
simultaneous 3-pole tripping, because it could happen that the 2 PG impedances settle
in zone 1 (or Z1e) with different “speed” – just depending on the fault transients. Always
all 3 impedances (e.g. BN, CN and BC for a BCN fault) are calculated, and the zone
decisions are then compared:
1) If both PG impedances are in zone 1, P437 immediately trips 3-pole.
2) If one PG and the PP impedance are in zone 1 and the 2nd PG loop is in forward
direction, then P437 trips 3-pole, too.
Taking care for the directional decision acertains, that – just in case of cross-country
and intersystem faults (2pGG faults) – both PG faults are on the protected line. The
zone 1 decision of the PP loop then is sufficient to secure that both faults are in zone
1, too.
In applications with parallel lines, during intersystem faults one PG fault could be on
the parallel line, but then either its direction is backwards or the PP loop impedance is
outside zone 1.
3) If after the first calculation loop just one zone 1 decision is determined, than the DIST
processing task duration is prolonged and all 3 impedances are calculated again.
This is done to make shure that normal 2pG faults are immediately tripped 3-pole and
the risk of staggered tripping is minimized.
The disadvantage is that for parallel line applications in case of crosscountry/intersystem faults the correct 1pole trip could be delayed by up to ~7 ms.
So in order to get a proper balance of speed and correct 1p/3p trip decision, this
measuring repitition is only done once.
3-184
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
1pG starting during
2pG faults
In some cases a fast 1pG starting was observed during a 2pG fault. This incomplete
fault type determination also forced an initial 1-pole trip. During the 2nd processing cycle
the correct type of fault was identified and 3-pole trip was issued, thus a unfortunate
staggered tripping took place.
To solve this problem, the starting conditions are now checked again during the first
distance measuring cycle.
Settable directional
characteristic
In some cases with external phase-phase faults with a high intermediate infeed at the
remote busbar, the apparent directional angle (calculated from memorised voltage and
fault current) appeared at about –40°...-70°, i.e close to the directional line, sometimes
even in the forward section. This resulted from a severe phase shift of VAB voltage upon
fault inception.
The solution implemented for this condition is a settable directional characteristic angle
as figure below.
3-118
New settable distance directional characteristic
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-185
3 Operation
(continued)
3.21.4 Impedance-time characteristics
A maximum of six impedance zones and eight timer stages are available for impedance
time grading. All impedance zones can be operated in a forward direction, backward
(reverse) direction, or non-directionally. Distance-independent timer stage t7 can also
operate forward-directionally, backward-directionally, or non-directionally. Timer stage t8
operates independently of distance and direction. All zone timer stages are triggered by
the general starting of distance protection if an appropriate setting has been selected at
D I S T : Z o n e t i m e r s t a r t (otherwise see below "Separate zone timer start").
Timer stage logic for
extended zone 1
The measuring range of zone 1 can be extended by the set zone extension factors. If
neither protective signaling nor auto-reclosing control (ARC) is active or if zone extension
proceeds while the ARC close command is present, then tripping in the extended zone
takes place once the set time (D IS T : t1 ,z e ) has elapsed.
If protective signaling is ready, there is a trip in the extended zone after the protective
signaling tripping time has elapsed.
If protective signaling is not ready but ARC is active, then the following occurs in the
‘1-/3-pole’ ,‘3-pole’ and ‘3-pole (only for 1p)’ ARC modes: in extended zone 1 a trip is
issued once the ARC tripping time has elapsed, whereas with standard reach (nonextended zone) it is issued after timer stage t1 of distance protection has elapsed or after
the HSR tripping time of ARC has elapsed. (The shortest time setting is the controlling
setting.)
In the ‘1-pole’ ARC mode, a three-pole trip occurs in zone 1 after t1 has elapsed and in
extended zone 1 after timer stage t1,ze of distance protection has elapsed. A singlepole trip is issued in extended zone 1 once the ARC tripping time has elapsed, whereas
with standard reach (non-extended zone) it is issued after timer stage t1 of distance
protection has elapsed or after the HSR tripping time of ARC has elapsed. (The shortest
time setting prevails.)
Separate zone timer start
If at D I S T : Z o n e t i m e r s t a r t the mode with zone starting has been selected, then
only the timer stage of the specific distance protection zone Zn is triggered for which the
measured loop impedance is inside the zone.
The trigger is issued by the respective signal D IS T : Z o n e n s t a r t i n g
These signals are only supported if the mode with zone starting has been selected,
otherwise – as is mandatory in IEC 61850 modeling – all zone startings are still visible,
but will have no influence on the functional sequence.
Compensation of
starting time
The P437 automatically subtracts starting time from grading time.
3-186
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
ARC: Zone
extension RC
303 002
DIST: t1
PSx
[
*
SOTF: Z1
extended
[ 035 076 ]
]
DIST: t1,ze
PSx
[
*
]
DIST: Zone
extension EXT
[ 036 046 ]
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST: Zone timer
start
[ 001 236 ]
ze
DIST: t1 elapsed
[ 036 026 ]
DIST: t1,ze
elapsed
[ 035 079 ]
0
1
0: With DIST gen.
start.
1: With zone
starting
DIST: Zone 1
starting
[ 001 094 ]
DIST: Zone 1,ze
starting
[ 002 067 ]
ARC: HSR oper.
mode PSx
[
*
]
1: 1-pole
2: 1-/3-pole
3: 3-pole
4: 3-pole
(only for 1p)
DIST: Zone
extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]
DIST: Zone
extension TDR
[ 038 022 ]
DIST: Timer st.
1 elapsed
303 614
ARC: Trip time
elapsed
303 003
MAIN: Trip signal
1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
PSIG: Trip
time elapsed
305 150
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
ARC: HSR oper.
mode PSx
015 051
024 025
024 085
023 045
DIST: t1
PSx
012 028
012 078
013 028
013 078
DIST: t1,ze
PSx
026 025
027 025
028 025
029 025
47Z1153A_EN
3-119
Timer stage logic for impedance zone 1
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-187
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: General
starting
[036 240 ]
DIST: Zone timer
start
[ 001 236 ]
0
1
0: With DIST gen.
start.
1: With zone
starting
DIST: t2
PSx
[
*
]
DIST: t2 elapsed
[ 036 027 ]
DIST: Zone 2
starting
[ 001 095 ]
DIST: t3
PSx
[
*
]
DIST: t3 elapsed
[ 036 028 ]
DIST: Zone 3
starting
[ 001 096 ]
DIST: t4
PSx
[
*
]
DIST: t4 elapsed
[ 036 029 ]
DIST: Zone 4
starting
[ 001 097 ]
DIST: t5
PSx
[
*
]
DIST: t5 elapsed
[ 036 030 ]
DIST: Zone 5
starting
[ 001 098 ]
DIST: t6
PSx
[
*
]
DIST: t6 elapsed
[ 036 031 ]
DIST: Zone 6
starting
[ 001 099 ]
DIST: t7
PSx
[
*
]
DIST: t7 elapsed
[ 037 127 ]
DIST: Zone 7
starting
[ 001 100 ]
DIST: t8
PSx
[
*
]
DIST: t8 elapsed
[ 037 128 ]
DIST: Zone 8
starting
[ 001 101 ]
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIST: t2
PSx
012 029
012 079
013 029
013 079
DIST: t3
PSx
012 030
012 080
013 030
013 081
DIST: t4
PSx
012 031
012 081
013 031
013 081
DIST: t5
PSx
012 032
012 082
013 032
013 082
DIST: t6
PSx
012 033
012 083
013 033
013 083
DIST: t7
PSx
012 140
012 141
012 142
012 143
DIST: t8
PSx
012 144
012 145
012 146
012 147
47Z1154A_EN
3-120
3-188
Time settings for timer stages 2 to 8
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-121
Directional settings
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-189
3 Operation
(continued)
A trip signal is issued for each measuring loop in zones 1 to 6 if the following criteria are
satisfied simultaneously:
A distance decision exists for the zone.
The timer stage of this impedance zone has elapsed.
The measured direction agrees with the directional setting of this impedance zone.
If several timer stages and directions are set to the same values, a distance trip occurs in
the zone having the highest number.
A trip signal is issued in zone 7 if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
Timer stage t7 has elapsed.
The measured direction agrees with the directional setting for N7.
After timer stage t8 has elapsed, a trip signal for zone 8 is issued.
Trip signals from all zones may be blocked individually by the power swing blocking
function (P S B : B l o c k i n g i n i t i a t e d , see section "Power Swing Blocking").
3-122
3-190
Linking of loop-selective distance decisions for impedance zone 1
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
*
PSB: Block. sel. zone
304 862
DIST: Block.Z1 (1pHSR) PSx
[
*
]
DIST: Blocking Z1 EXT
[ 036 034 ]
DIST: Blocking Z1,ze EXT
[ 036 036 ]
DIST: Dist. decision Z1, A
set
set
set
set
303 631
DIST: N1,bw, A
303 634
DIST: Dist. decision Z1, B
S11
11
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
S21
21
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
303 632
DIST: N1,bw, B
303 635
DIST: Dist. decision Z1, C
S12
12
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
S22
22
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
303 633
DIST: N1,bw, C
303 636
DIST: Dist. decis. Z1ze, A
S13
13
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
S23
23
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
303 652
DIST: t1,ze elapsed
[ 035 079 ]
DIST: Dist. decision
Z1ze,B
S31
31
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
S41
41
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
S32
32
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
S42
42
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
DIST: Trip zone 1
303 584
DIST: Trip signal Zone 1
[ 035 072 ]
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, A
303 658
303 659
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, C
303 654
S33
33
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
S43
43
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
DIST: General starting
[ 036 240 ]
303 657
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, B
303 653
DIST: Dist. decision
Z1ze,C
303 656
DIST: Trip zone 1, C
303 651
DIST: N1,fw, C
303 655
DIST: Trip zone 1, B
303 650
DIST: N1,fw, B
1
2
3
4
DIST: Block.Z1
(1pHSR) PSx
002 068
002 069
002 070
002 071
DIST: Trip zone 1, A
303 649
DIST: Timer st. 1 elapsed
303 614
DIST: N1,fw, A
Parameter
303 660
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze
303 595
DIST: Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
R
47Z1158A_EN
3-123
Distance protection trip signals in zone 1
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-191
3 Operation
(continued)
PSB: Block. sel. zone
304 862
DIST: Block.Z2 (1pHSR) PSx
[
*
]
DIST: Blocking Z2 EXT
[ 036 037 ]
DIST: Blocking Z3 EXT
[ 036 039 ]
DIST: Blocking Z4 EXT
[ 036 041 ]
DIST: Blocking Z5 EXT
[ 036 044 ]
DIST: Blocking Z6 EXT
[ 036 061 ]
DIST: Blocking Z7 EXT
[ 036 067 ]
DIST: Blocking Z8 EXT
[ 036 068 ]
DIST: Dist.decision zone 2
*
set
set
set
set
303 581
DIST: t2 elapsed
[ 036 027 ]
DIST: N2,fw
303 574
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
[ 036
DIST:
N2,bw
303 573
Dist.decision zone 3
303 582
t3 elapsed
028 ]
N3,fw
303 576
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
[ 036
DIST:
N3,bw
303 575
Dist.decision zone 4
303 583
t4 elapsed
029 ]
N4,fw
303 578
DIST: N4,bw
303 577
DIST: Dist.decision zone 5
303 619
DIST: t5 elapsed
[ 036 030 ]
DIST: N5,bw
303 579
DIST:
DIST:
[ 036
DIST:
Dist.decision zone 6
303 620
t6 elapsed
031 ]
N6,fw
303 616
DIST: N6,bw
303 615
DIST: t7 elapsed
[ 037 127 ]
DIST: N7,fw
303 618
DIST: N7,bw
303 617
DIST: t8 elapsed
[ 037 128 ]
DIST:
[ 036
DIST:
[ 036
Fault forward / LS
018 ]
Fault backward/ BS
019 ]
DIST: General starting
[ 036 240 ]
Parameter
1
2
3
4
DIST: Block.Z2
(1pHSR) PSx
002 072
002 073
002 074
002 075
DIST: Trip zone 2
S50
50
R1x,3x,70,90,110,130,150,170
S60
60
R2x,4x,80,100,120,140,160,180
303 585
DIST: Trip signal zone 2
[ 041 084 ]
DIST: Trip zone 3
S70
70
R1x,3x,50,90,110,130,150,170
S80
80
R2x,4x,60,100,120,140,160,180
303 586
DIST: Trip signal zone 3
[ 040 056 ]
DIST: Trip zone 4
S90
90
R1x,3x,50,70,110,130,150,170
S100
100
R2x,4x,60,80,120,140,160,180
303 587
DIST: Trip signal zone 4
[ 040 057 ]
DIST: Trip zone 5
S110
110
R1x,3x,50,70,90,130,150,170
S120
120
R2x,4x,60,80,100,140,160,180
303 588
DIST: Trip signal zone 5
[ 040 058 ]
DIST: Trip zone 6
303 621
S130
130
R1x,3x,50,70,90,110,150,170
S140
140
R2x,4x,60,80,100,120,160,180
DIST: Trip signal zone 6
[ 040 059 ]
DIST: Trip zone 7
S150
150
R1x,3x,50,70,90,110,130,170
S160
160
R2x,4x,60,80,100,120,140,180
303 622
DIST: Trip signal zone 7
[ 037 129 ]
DIST: Trip zone 8
S170
170
R1x,3x,50,70,90,110,130,150
S180
180
R2x,4x,60,80,100,120,140,160
303 626
DIST: Trip signal zone 8
[ 037 130 ]
DIST: Trip sig. zone 2-8
[ 035 073 ]
R
DIST: Trip signal Z1, A
303 623
DIST: Trip signal Z1, B
303 624
DIST: Trip signal Z1, C
DIST: Trip signal
[036 009 ]
303 625
47Z1159A_EN
3-124
3-192
Distance protection trip signals in zones 2 to 8
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-125
Example of a feasible impedance-time characteristic
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-193
3 Operation
(continued)
For special applications (such as the application of the impedance dependent blocking
scheme - see function group PSIG), the P437 generates the signal D IS T : Im p e d a n c e
i n z o n e 6 , if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
A distance decision exists for zone 6.
The measured direction agrees with the directional setting of zone 6.
3-126
3-194
D I S T : I m p e d a n c e i n z o n e 6 signal
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.21.5 Selection of Trip Mode for Zone 1
For zone 1 (including the extended zone) the user can specify whether the distance trip
in zone 1 shall be single-pole or three-pole. This selection is possible independently for
single-pole ground faults (1pN) and two-phase ungrounded faults (2p). In the case of a
two-phase ungrounded fault, the P437 checks if there is a ground fault detection signal.
If this is the case, there is a three-pole trip transfer. If there is no ground fault detection
signal – and if a single-pole trip for a two-phase ungrounded fault has been selected –,
then a trip decision is issued in the leading or trailing phase, depending on the setting.
This is based on the M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e setting. A three-pole trip can be
forced via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
If the P437 carries out a single-pole trip when a two-phase ungrounded fault has
occurred, then a fault change is ignored for 100 ms if a trip decision is reached in the
phase, which has not been cleared. This takes differing fault clearing time periods at
both line ends into account that lead to a transient ground starting. If, after a fault
change, a trip decision is reached in the third phase, which was not involved previously,
then a three-pole transfer occurs instantaneously.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-195
3 Operation
(continued)
ARC: Zone
extension RC
303 002
SOTF: Z1 extended
[ 035 076 ]
DIST: Zone
extension EXT
[ 036 046 ]
PSIG: Not ready
[ 037 028 ]
DIST: Trip zone 1
PG
PSx
[
*
]
3
1
3: 3-pole
1: 1-pole
PSIG: Trip
enable
305 157
PSIG: Trip
enable, ch. 1
305 166
DIST: Trip
signal Z1, A
PSIG: Trip
enable, ch. 2
303 623
305 167
DIST: Trip
signal Z1, B
PSIG: Trip
enable, ch. 3
303 624
305 168
DIST: Trip
zone 1, A
303 655
DIST: Trip
zone 1,ze, A
303 658
DIST: Trip
zone 1, B
303 656
DIST: Trip
zone 1,ze, B
303 659
DIST: Trip
zone 1, C
303 657
DIST: Trip
zone 1,ze, C
DIST: Trip
signal Z1, C
303 625
DIST: Signal
block start.G
303 594
303 660
DIST: General
starting
[036 240 ]
DIST: Starting
N1
303 535
DIST: Trip zone 1
PP
PSx
[
*
]
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
1: A-B-C
3: 3-pole
1: 1-pole leading
phase
2: 1-pole trailing
phase
3
1
2
2: A-C-B
MAIN: Blocking
1p Trip EXT
[ 041 078 ]
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
3-127
3-196
1
2
3
4
DIST: Trip zone
1 PG
PSx
011 050
011 051
011 052
011 053
DIST: Trip zone 1
PP
PSx
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
47Z1164A_EN
Selection of zone 1 trip mode
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.22 Power Swing Blocking (Function Group PSB)
The power swing blocking (PSB) function offers these options should a power swing
occur in the power system:
The user can block distance trip signals in selected distance zones. This will prevent
unwanted tripping by apparent low impedances during a power swing.
AND / OR
A trip signal can be generated so as to end a power swing, by initiation of system
splitting (or islanding).
Disabling or enabling
power swing blocking
The power swing blocking function can be disabled or enabled individually in each
parameter subset via the setting parameter P S B : E n a b l e P S x .
When the monitoring of the voltage-measuring circuit is triggered the PSB function will
be blocked.
PSB: General
enable USER
[ 014 050 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
PSB: Enable
PSx
[
*
]
PSB: Enabled
[ 040 095 ]
0
1
PSB: Ready
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
MCMON: Meas.
circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
3-128
304 859
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
PSB: Enable
PSx
015 090
015 091
015 092
015 093
47Z11CBA_EN
Disabling or enabling power swing blocking
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-197
3 Operation
(continued)
Measurement
The P437 continuously measures the positive-sequence impedance and the apparent
power of the positive-sequence system. Because of this measurement in the positivesequence system, the protection is also available during a single-pole HSR.
Blocking of selected zones of the distance protection or a power swing starting occurs
only when the measured positive-sequence impedance lies within the settable power
swing polygon.
PSB: R
[ 014 060 ]
PSB: posX
[ 014 061 ]
PSB: negX
[ 006 185 ]
VA-G
PSB: α
[ 014 062 ]
Vpos
VB-G
VC-G
IA
IB
Ipos
Zpos
PSB: Z within
polygon
[ 036 024 ]
IC
PSB: Instable
power swing
304 860
Spos
PSB: Spos
304 861
3-129
3-198
Measurement
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
X
posX
2
Zpos(t)
1
α
-R(PSB)
R
+R(PSB)
negX
3-130
Trajectory of the positive-sequence impedance during a power swing
1 stable power swing
2 instable power swing
The quadrilateral shape is defined by the settings for R(PSB), posX, negX and α :
PSB: R
[014 060]
PSB: posX
[014 061]
PSB: negX
[006 185]
PSB: α
[014 062]
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-199
3 Operation
(continued)
Power swing blocking,
operating mode ΔS
Every 40 ms the P437 determines the apparent power change as referred to the actual
apparent power.
ΔSpos =
S pos,2 − S pos,1
S pos,2
Spos,1: apparent power of the positive-sequence system at time t1
Spos,2: apparent power of the positive-sequence system at time t1 + 40 ms
If the apparent impedance lies within the swing polygon and the deviation is greater than
the set value P S B : O p e r a t e v a l u e then a blocking of the selected distance zones
will be issued after an associated time delay (P S B : O p e r a t e d e l a y ) has elapsed.
This blocking signal will be prolonged by the set value P S P : R e l e a s e d e l a y .
In order to avoid problems arising from mutual interference the PSB function is blocked
when a starting signal is issued by zone Z1 or the overreach zone Z1,ze.
The maximum duration of this blocking has a time limit. This time limit can be set. The
PSB function is unblocked without time delay if the following current elements detect a
short circuit during a power swing:
†
Phase current element for measurement of symmetrical 3-phase faults:
IP ≥ (’ P S B : I P > ’ * Inom)
†
Negative-sequence current element for sensitive measurement of 2-phase faults:
Ineg ≥ (0.1 Inom + ’ P S B : I n e g > ’ * IP,max)
†
Residual current element for sensitive measurement of ground faults:
IN ≥ (0.1 Inom + ’ P S B : I N > ’ * IP,max)
The distance zones to be blocked are set at P S B : F c t . a s s i g n . b l o c k . These zones
may be selected for blocking: Zx (x=1 to 8) and Z1,ze.
3-200
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
PSB: Ready
304 859
PSB: Z within
polygon
[ 036 024 ]
DIST: Trip signal
zone 1
[ 035 072 ]
DIST: Trip signal
Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
PSB: Oper. value
Delta S
[ 014 054 ]
PSB: Spos
PSB: Operate
delay
[ 014 052 ]
PSB: Release
delay
[ 014 053 ]
|S1-S2|/|S2|
304 861
PSB: Operate
delay runn.
[ 036 058 ]
PSB: Max.
blocking time
[ 014 055 ]
PSB: IP>
[ 014 058 ]
PSB: IP>
triggered
[ 036 012 ]
IA
IB
PSB: Ineg>
IC
[ 014 057 ]
0.1 Inom
+ Ineg>*Imax
|Imax|
PSB: Ineg>
triggered
[ 036 011 ]
Ineg
PSB: IN>
[ 014 056 ]
0.1 Inom
+ IN>*Imax
PSB: IN>
triggered
[ 036 010 ]
PSB: Blocking
initiated
[ 036 032 ]
IN
PSB: Blocking
init. EXT
[ 036 069 ]
PSB: Fct. assign.
block.
[ 012 017 ]
Selected zone
3-131
PSB: Block
sel. zone
304 862
Power swing blocking, operating mode ΔS
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-201
3 Operation
(continued)
Power swing blocking,
operating mode ΔZ
The setting P S B : O p e r a t i n g m o d e defines that a power swing detection can be
based on impedance variation (Delta Z) as an alternative to apparent power change
(Delta S).
In operating mode ΔZ, the rate of change of the resistance component of positivesequence impedance Rpos, when entering the power swing polygon, is measured and
interpreted. The function decides on power swing only if the rate of change is smaller
than the set threshold ΔRx/ΔT and subsequently blocks all selected zones.
The threshold ΔRx has a fixed value:
ΔRx = 5 Ω for Inom = 1A
ΔRx = 1 Ω for Inom = 5A.
Timer stage ΔT can be set at P S B : O p e r . v a l u e D e l t a T.
A power swing decision once made is stored until one of the following conditions is met:
†
The positive-sequence impedance locus exits the power swing polygon.
†
The set maximum blocking time has elapsed.
†
One of the PSB current stages has started.
The available time delay of the blocking effect may be used to delay distance protection
blocking for a short time. This may become necessary with series-compensated lines on
which, in some cases, a relatively slow swing subsidence of the measured short circuit
impedance is observed.
With the operating mode ΔZ, general blocking of the power swing after the trip decision
by the overreach zone is no longer necessary. Only blocking by the trip decision from
zone 1 is available.
Note:
MiCOM P437 operates task oriented. The PSB task is processed approximately every
15 ms. The internal ΔRx threshold value will be adapted according to the measured
actual time delay between 2 consecutive measurings. With each task processing, the
impedance Zpos is determined and stored. Thus ΔRpos is calculated from 2 consecutive
processings:
ΔRpos = Rpos(N) - Rpos(N-1)
Where
Rpos(N)
: the first measurement inside the power swing detection polygon
Rpos(N-1) : the previous measurement outside the power swing detection polygon
3-202
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
x
3-132 Power swing detection zone.
The quadrilateral shape is defined by the settings for R(PSB), posX, negX and α :
PSB: R
[014 060]
PSB: posX
[014 061]
PSB: negX
[006 185]
PSB: α
[014 062]
Timer stage ΔT can be set at
PSB: Oper. value Delta T
[014 090]
The threshold ΔRx is fixed.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-203
3 Operation
(continued)
Out-of-Step Tripping
A power swing starting may become necessary when a power swing with low damping
has to be terminated by deliberately splitting system sections. For such a procedure the
device has three independent methods available:
□
1st criterion – for an early system split at high swing frequencies.
The apparent power change ΔSpos exceeds the threshold set to a high value at
P S B : O p e r . V a l u e d S , t r i p for the duration set at
P S B : O p e r . D e l a y d S , t r i p and the positive-sequence impedance lies within the
power swing polygon.
This criterion may be applied with high swing frequencies (and therefore large
changes in the apparent power). The system split will then occur very early so as to
avoid system loads from high currents during the first power swing cycle.
Every 40 ms the P437 determines the apparent power change as referred to the
actual apparent power.
ΔSpos =
S pos,2 − S pos,1
S pos,2
Spos,1: apparent power of the positive-sequence system at time t1
Spos,2: apparent power of the positive-sequence system at time t1 + 40 ms
Note: This feature is only operational, if operating mode ΔS is set.
□ 2nd criterion – for a safe system split at an instable power swing.
The positive-sequence impedance leaves the power swing polygon on the opposite
side (see impedance trajectory 2 in figure 3-130).
The sign for the positive-sequence impedance’s resistive component is stored when
the measured positive-sequence impedance locus enters the power swing polygon.
This stored sign is compared with the sign when exiting the power swing polygon (in
operating mode ΔS) or when crossing the R(OOS) boundary (in operating mode ΔZ,
description of R(OOS) below). Should the signs differ, a trip signal is issued
immediately.
When this criterion is applied an instable power swing will be determined, regardless
of swing frequencies.
Note: This feature is operational independent of the set operating mode, but - as
mentioned above - the resistive decision line is depending on the operating mode.
To achieve backward-compatible operation, the reach setting PSB: R(OOS) has to be
set equal to the power swing detection polygon reach (PSB: R)
□ 3rd criterion – Enhanced counting-based tripping.
Detailed description follows below.
Note: This feature is operational independent of the set operating mode.
The trip signals of the 1st and 2nd criterion are linked together to form the P S B : T r i p
signal.
The counting-based trip signals per 3rd criterion are available as individual signals,
described below. They are not linked into this PSB trip signal, but could be individually
linked into the general trip commands.
3-204
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
PSB: Ready
304 859
PSB: Instable
power swing
304 860
PSB: Z within
polygon
[ 036 024 ]
PSB: Oper.value
dS, trip
[ 014 059 ]
PSB: Spos
PSB: Oper.delay
dS, trip
[ 014 063 ]
t
|S1-S2|/|S2
0
PSB: Trip
signal
[ 036 025 ]
304 861
3-133
st
nd
Out-of-Step Tripping (only 1 and 2 trip criterion!)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-205
3 Operation
(continued)
Enhanced counting-based
trip logic
The basic considerations could be discussed on a simple (simplified) 2-machine power
system as shown in figure 3-134. Sources A and B represent power system equivalents,
impedance A-B represents (positive sequence) line impedance. The distance protection
to be discussed is located on the line at end A.
3-134 Power system equivalent circuit
Based on this equivalent circuit, the impedance plot per figure 3-135 could be drawn.
The origin of the complex plane is put at the location of the distance protection device,
that is at system bus A.
For this simplified description any apparent impedance Z measured from the distance
protection during a steady-state out-of-step condition moves along circles with its origin
in either AS or BS source, depending on the ratio of the absolute values of the 2 source
voltages. The rotation sense further depends on which source is leading.
This description of power swings is rather simplified but sufficient to describe the
functionality as implemented in the P437.
3-206
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-135 Power system equivalent impedances
The basic power swing detection zone of P437 is of quadrilateral shape. While resistive
reach in forward and backward direction is equal, the reactive reaches can be set
independently to provide coverage adjustable to the power system impedances
(essentially to cover differences in reverse source impedance and forward line plus
remote source impedances).
Power swing detection is done by measuring the rate of change of the resistance (real
part) of the positive sequence impedance. A power swing is detected, if a resistance
change of ΔRx = 5 Ω (at Inom = 1 A) takes more time than a settable timer ΔT (fig. 3132).
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-207
3 Operation
(continued)
Inside the power swing detection zone, 2 more lines are defined by a settable resistance
PSB: R (OOS) to determine an out-of-step condition. Thus this decision could be taken
before leaving the power swing detection zone.
The relay checks that settings are valid:
□ The resistive lines have to be inside the power swing detection zone:
R(OOS) ≤ R(PSB).
Otherwise the internal R(OOS) variable is limited to the R(PSB) value as per figure
3-137a and an alarm – S F M ON : S e tti n g e r r o r P S B – is raised.
□ The resistive lines must not cross the X-axis.
Otherwise the lines are limited to the X-axis as per figure 3-137b.
Counters
An out-of-step condition is determined if the apparent positive-sequence impedance
moves along its trajectory from the right side into the power swing detection zone and
then crosses the left side OOS detection line (trajectory c in figure 3-136 below), or vice
versa (trajectory d). In both cases the out-of-step counter nOOS is incremented by 1.
If the apparent positive-sequence impedance leaves the power swing detection zone on
the same side as it entered, a stable power swing is determined (e.g. trajectory e). In
this case the power swing counter nPSB is incremented by 1.
By this definition, the counter values are only available during a power swing or out-ofstep condition, respectively. As it is desirable to have the counter values available for
post-mortem analysis, the values are stored as event counters, too.
The following counters are implemented to count unstable and stable swings as
described above:
nOOS
PSB: No. OOS-Swing
nPSB
PSB: No. stab. PSwing
Counter reset
Upon each incrementing the counter, a dedicated timer stage is triggered. If this timer
elapses while no further incrementing of the same counter takes place, then it is
assumed that the power swing condition has stopped and this counter is reset to 0.
For this timer stage the setting P S B : M a x . b l o c k i n g t i m e is used, which is
recommended to be set to the anticipated maximum power swing cycle time.
A manual reset of the counters can be done by setting the parameter
P S B : R e s e t c o u n t e r s to Execute.
3-208
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-136
Out-of-step detection and counter incrementing conditions. R(OOS) is set at PSB: R(OOS) [006 184]
Counters:
nOOS : P S B : N o . O O S - S w i n g
[006 026]
nPSB : P S B : N o . s t a b . P S w i n g [006 025]
3-137 Automatic limiting for the position of the resistive lines
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-209
3 Operation
(continued)
Counter comparators
Out-of-step tripping is raised, if the number of counted out-of-step swings nOOS reaches a
settable limit.
In order to take into account the electrical center of the oscillation, the impedance area
between the OOS detection lines inside the power swing detection zone is split into 3
areas, divided by 2 settable reactances as per figure 3-138. The reactances are set at:
PSB: posX (OOS)
PSB: negX (OOS)
The inner main area is used to identify swings with electrical center on the line. The
back-up area is the remaining part of this corridor. Typically the back-up area counter is
set to a higher number of swings to provide only back-up tripping (system splitting) in
case the protection system closest to the electrical center of the oscillation failed to
operate.
As the OOS counter is incremented when the positive-sequence impedance trajectory
crosses the resistive detection lines, the decision which counter limit to compare with is
practically linked to the section on this resistive detection line rather than the area the
impedance moved through. The figure shows 2 cases:
c OOS tripping as nOOS reaches nOOS,trp,a
d OOS tripping as nOOS reaches nOOS,trp,b
In the same way, an additional power swing tripping is raised if the number of counted
power swings nPSB reaches a settable limit nPSB,trp (case e). This feature may be used
as back-up protection, if stable swings persist for too many power swing cycles.
These counter thresholds are also known as permissible number of unstable or stable
power swings, respectively.
nOOS,trp,a is set at P S B : P e r m . N o . O O S ( a ) .
nOOS,trp,b is set at P S B : P e r m . N o . O O S ( b ) .
nPSB,trp
is set at P S B : P e r m . N o . s t a b . P S .
Counting based
trip signals
The following individual tripping signals are issued:
PSB: Trip signal OOS (a)
PSB: Trip signal OOS (b)
PSB: Trip signal stab. PS
These binary signals remain active (value “Yes”) until their associated counter is reset.
All out-of-step and power swing trip signals are available in the selection list of the
general trip commands of the relay.
3-210
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-138
Out-of-step tripping conditions. Areas a and b are defined by the settings:
PSB: posX (OOS)
[006 186]
PSB: negX (OOS)
[006 187]
Counter comparators:
nOOS,trp,a : P S B : P e r m . N o . O O S ( a )
nOOS,trp,b : P S B : P e r m . N o . O O S ( b )
nPSB,trp :
PSB: Perm. No. stab. PS
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
[006 028]
[006 189]
[006 027]
3-211
3 Operation
(continued)
3.23 Measuring-circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON)
The P437 monitors the phase currents and voltages for balance during healthy system
operation. If either unbalance or the lack of measuring voltage is detected, action is
taken to prevent the unit from malfunctioning.
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
MCMON: Zerosequ. starting
[ 041 080 ]
DIST: Starting G
SFMON: Zero-sequ.
starting
[ 098 015 ]
303 507
MCMON: Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
SFMON: M.c.b.
trip V
[ 098 000 ]
MAIN: M.c.b. trip
V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
MCMON: Undervoltage
[ 038 038 ]
MCMON: Meas.
circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
SFMON: Meas.
circ. V faulty
[ 098 017 ]
MCMON: Vneg>
triggered
[ 041 079 ]
MCMON: FF, V
triggered
[ 035 081 ]
MCMON: M.circ.
V,Vref flty.
[ 040 078 ]
MCMON: FF,Vref
triggered
[ 038 100 ]
MAIN: M.c.b. trip
Vref EXT
[ 036 086 ]
MCMON: Meas.
circ. I faulty
[ 040 087 ]
SFMON: M.circ.
V,Vref flty.
[ 098 023 ]
300ms
0
SFMON: M.c.b.
trip Vref
[ 098 011 ]
MCMON: Meas.
circ.V,I faulty
[ 037 020 ]
SFMON:
Meas.circ.V,I
faulty
[ 098 016 ]
GFSC: Monitor.
triggered
[ 038 095 ]
MCMON:
Peripheral fault
[ 038 024 ]
PSIG: Telecom
faulty
[ 036 060 ]
3-139
SFMON: Peripheral
fault
[ 098 018 ]
Monitoring signals
Measuring-circuit monitoring can be deactivated by the appropriate setting. In the event
of a fault, measuring-circuit monitoring is blocked.
Monitoring the starting
conditions
If ground starting SG is present for more than 10 s without phase starting, the following
monitoring signal is issued: MCMON : Z ero-s e q u . s t a r t i n g (see Figure 3-139).
3-212
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the currentmeasuring circuits
The current-measuring circuit monitoring function is enabled when the current exceeds
the value 0.125 ⋅ Inom in at least one phase. Once monitoring is enabled, the absolute
value of the negative-sequence component of the current system is determined in
accordance with the definition of the symmetrical components. The result depends on
the phase sequence setting.
Phase sequence A-B-C:
1
2
I neg = I A + a ⋅ I B + a ⋅ I C
3
(
a = e j 120
)
Phase sequence A-C-B:
1
2
I neg = I A + a ⋅ I B + a ⋅ I C
3
(
)
0
a 2 = e j 240
0
This value is divided by the maximum phase current ⏐Imax⏐ and compared with the set
threshold operate value. If the set operate value is exceeded, a monitoring signal is
issued once the operate delay +300 ms have elapsed.
Current unbalance monitoring can, for instance, also be used for open-circuit monitoring.
For this the monitoring signal can be configured in the general trip command.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-213
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
47Z0122B_EN
3-140
3-214
Monitoring the current-measuring circuits
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the voltagemeasuring circuits
The voltages used by distance protection as measured variables are monitored for
plausibility by the voltage-measuring-circuit monitoring function.
Monitoring of voltage-measuring circuits is based on the following criteria:
Phase-to-phase voltages are monitored for voltages that fall below the default
threshold of 0.4 ⋅ Vnom . This monitoring function is enabled when the current exceeds
0.05 ⋅ Inom in one phase.
The negative-sequence component of phase-to-ground voltages is monitored in
accordance with the definition of symmetrical components. Monitoring is enabled
when a phase-to-ground voltage exceeds the default threshold of 0.7 ⋅ Vnom / 3 . In
addition to this criterion, either a minimum current having the default threshold setting
of I > 0.05 ⋅ I nom or the closed position of the circuit breaker (M A IN : C B c l o s e d
3 p )can be used as enabling criteria. If there is an enable, the absolute value of the
negative-sequence component of the voltage system is determined in accordance
with the definition of symmetrical components. The result depends on the phase
sequence setting.
Phase sequence A-B-C:
V neg =
(
1
2
⋅ 1V A −G + a ⋅ 1V B −G + a ⋅ 1V C −G
3
)
Phase sequence A-C-B:
V neg =
(
1
2
⋅ 1V A −G + a ⋅ 1V B −G + a ⋅ 1V C −G
3
a = e j 120
)
0
a 2 = e j 240
0
This value is compared with the default threshold operate value 0.2 ⋅ Vnom / 3 . If the
threshold operate value is exceeded, a monitoring signal is issued after the operate
delay has elapsed.
If one of the monitoring functions described above operates, then distance protection is
blocked, and the device switches to backup overcurrent time protection – provided the
appropriate setting has been selected.
In addition, the monitoring signal M C M ON : M e a s . V o l t a g e O K is issued if all
phase-to-phase voltages exceed the default threshold of 0.65 ⋅ Vnom and negativesequence monitoring has not operated.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-215
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
MCMON: Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
MAIN: Prot. ext.
disabled
[ 038 046 ]
0.7*Vnom/
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
Vneg
MCMON: Operate
delay
[ 017 011 ]
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
BUOC: Starting
[ 036 013 ]
MCMON: Op. mode
volt. mon.
[ 014 007 ]
MAIN: CB closed 3p
[ 031 042 ]
SFMON: Vneg>
triggered
[ 098 014 ]
MCMON: Vneg>
triggered
[ 041 079 ]
SFMON: Undervoltage
[ 098 009 ]
MCMON: Undervoltage
[ 038 038 ]
MCMON: Phase
sequ. V faulty
[ 038 049 ]
SFMON: Phase
sequ. V faulty
[ 098 001 ]
1: Vneg
2: Vneg w.
curr. enab
3: Vneg w. CB
cont.enab.
>0.05*Inom
IA
IB
IC
<0.4*Vnom
>0.65*Vnom
MCMON: Meas.
voltage o.k.
[ 038 048 ]
47Z1146A_EN
3-141
3-216
Monitoring the voltage-measuring circuit
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Fuse failure monitoring of
phase-to-ground voltages
In addition to monitoring the voltage-measuring circuits, as described above, the P437
also provides for fuse failure monitoring. This function is used in particular when there is
no voltage transformer m.c.b. auxiliary contact. If fuse failure monitoring is not desired it
can be disabled by setting parameters.
The fuse failure monitoring function must distinguish between a short circuit in the threephase current system and a lack of measuring voltage due to a short circuit or open
circuit (broken wire) in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer.
A short circuit exists in the three-phase current system being monitored, if one of the
following conditions is satisfied:
Distance protection has started. (This signal has a time delayed reset of 30 ms so as
to avoid startings by transients that may occur at the end of a short circuit.)
Major current variations occur:
„ The current increases by more than +5% in at least one phase.
„ The current decreases by more than -10% in at least two phases.
„ The current increases by more than +5% in the positive-sequence current system.
The P437 uses different criteria to detect single- or two-phase faults or three-phase
faults in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer.
A single- or two-phase fault is present in the secondary circuit of the voltage
transformer if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
„
The phase currents exceed the distance protection's I> thresholds either in none
or in all of the three phases (= symmetrical load condition).
„
A current increase ΔI/Δt > 10% occurs during 3 cycles (= 3 T) in not exactly one
phase.
„
The negative-sequence current does not exceed the set threshold I n e g > , F F .
„
The negative-sequence voltage has exceeded the set threshold Vneg>, FF.
A three-phase fault is present in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer if the
following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
„
At least one of the phase currents exceeds the distance protection's I> threshold.
„
The positive-sequence voltage has fallen below the set threshold Vpos<, FF.
„
The positive-sequence current may only vary less than -10% or +5% within
3 cycles after the positive-sequence voltage has fallen below the set threshold
Vpos<, FF.
Note: Fuse failure monitoring for 3-phase faults in the measuring circuit is only
active within a 50 ms time window after a positive sequence undervoltage
condition is detected.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-217
3 Operation
(continued)
If the above conditions are satisfied, a memory is set. The settable operate delay timer
should remain at 0 s to ensure that fuse failure monitoring is able to prevent false pick up
of distance protection.
The memory is reset, if the positive-sequence voltage exceeds the fixed threshold
0.5 Vnom and the negative-sequence voltage falls below the set threshold Vneg<, FF.
If the buffer memory has been set the P437 will decide that the secondary circuit of the
voltage transformer (VT) is faulty when the following conditions are met:
At least one of the phase currents exceeds the I> threshold.
or
The set threshold of the negative-sequence voltage has been exceeded
and three cycles previously at least one phase-to-ground voltage had been above
50% Vnom/√3.
In these cases distance protection is blocked, and the device switches to backup
overcurrent protection – provided that the appropriate setting has been selected.
Extend fuse failure
blocking condition
Fuse failure determination is prohibited under the following conditions, to avoid false
operation due to voltage transients during de-energized line conditions:
The dead time of the internal auto-reclosing control (ARC) is running.
At least one CB pole is open i.e. M A IN : C B o p e n > = 1 p 031 039 is set to 'Yes'.
This blocking prevents false operation based on discharge-transients of line reactors,
or if the line is energized from the remote end while the fault is still present. The
device at the open CB end then may determine a fuse failure condition due to a
sudden asymmetric change of voltage with no current. This operation of fuse failure
monitoring is basically non-critical (as the local CB is still open), but jeopardizes faster
fault clearance at the remote end, aided by protection signaling, because PSIG/Echo
logic is also blocked, if MCMON determines a voltage measuring circuit failure.
A fuse failure blocking input signal is activated (M C M ON : B l oc k i ng F F _V E X T ).
This signal is implemented to establish further flexible blocking conditions, e.g.
through the LOGIC function.
3-218
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: IA>(Ibl)
trigg.
303 598
DIST: IB>(Ibl)
trigg.
303 599
DIST: IC>(Ibl)
trigg.
>1
303 600
MCMON: Operate
delay FF, V
[ 031 058 ]
&
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
ARC: Dead time
running
[ 037 002 ]
MAIN: CB open
>=1p
[ 031 039 ]
MCMON: Blocking
FF,V EXT
[ 002 182 ]
>1 &
>1
0
t
30ms
S
1 1
R
1
MCMON: FF, V
triggered
[ 035 081 ]
SFMON: FF, V
triggered
[ 098 021 ]
0
>1
IA(t) < 0.9*IA(t-3*T)
>2
&
IB(t) < 0.9*IB(t-3*T)
>1
IC(t) < 0.9*IC(t-3*T)
IA(t) > 1.05*IA(t-3*T)
>1
IB(t) > 1.05*IB(t-3*T)
&
&
IC(t) > 1.05*IC(t-3*T)
IA
IA(t) < 1.1*IA(t-3*T)
IB
IB(t) < 1.1*IB(t-3*T)
IC
IC(t) < 1.1*IC(t-3*T)
=1
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
& >1
Ipos(t)>0.9*Ipos(t-3*T)
Ipos
Ipos(t)< Ipos(t-3*T)
&
Ipos(t)>1.05*Ipos(t-3*T)
MCMON: Ineg>, FF
[ 031 057 ]
&
Ineg
1
50 ms
MCMON: Vneg>,FF
[ 031 056 ]
VA-G
&
VB-G
Vneg
VC-G
MCMON: Vneg<,FF
[ 031 054 ]
&
VA-G(t-3*T)>0.5 Vnom/√3
>1
MCMON: Vpos<,FF
[ 031 053 ]
VB-G(t-3*T)>0.5 Vnom/√3
VC-G(t-3*T)>0.5 Vnom/√3
Vpos
Vpos > 0,5 Vnom
47Z1105A_EN
3-142
Fuse failure monitoring (after setting M C M O N : F F , V e n a b l e d U S E R to 'Yes’)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-219
3 Operation
(continued)
"Fuse Failure" monitoring
of the reference voltage
The P437 includes "Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference voltage function, which is
required by the 'Automatic Synchronism Check' (ASC). Fuse Failure monitoring of the
reference voltage is only possible if the ASC function has been configured. This is
specifically applied when no auxiliary contact is available on the voltage transformer
m.c.b. If fuse failure monitoring is not desired it can be disabled by setting parameters.
Fuse Failure monitoring must be able to discriminate between a short circuit in the threephase network being monitored and a reference voltage missing because of a short
circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference voltage.
A short circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference voltage is
present when the following conditions are met:
The circuit breaker is closed.
The difference in voltages on the line side and the busbar must exceed 0.1 Vnom.
3-143
3-220
"Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference voltage
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.24 Backup overcurrent-time protection (Function Group BUOC)
If there is a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection is blocked, since
accurate impedance measurement is not possible. Backup overcurrent-time protection
(BUOC) is automatically activated – if set accordingly.
Backup overcurrent-time protection (or backup DTOC) is enabled if there is a fault in the
voltage-measuring circuit. It monitors the phase currents for overcurrents exceeding the
set values I>. If a phase current exceeds the set value, timer stage tI> is started. After
the set time period has elapsed, a trip signal is issued. If inrush stabilization is triggered,
BUOC protection is blocked.
If the ‘Low impedance-grounding’ setting has been selected for the neutral point
treatment, ground current IN is also monitored by the settable trigger IN>, in addition to
the phase currents. If the ground current exceeds the set value, timer stage tIN> is
started. After the set time period has elapsed, a trip signal is issued. Inrush stabilization
blocks the ground starting of BUOC protection.
The setting for the operating mode controls whether the BUOC protection function will
trigger an auto-reclosure (ARC). If auto-reclosure is desired, timer stages tI> and tIN> will
be blocked when the ARC function is ready. With phase starting, the trip signal will then
be issued instantaneously; with ground starting, it will be issued after an 80 s delay.
Timer stage tIN> is also blocked by phase starting or while the ARC hold time is
elapsing.
If auto-reclosure is not required or if auto-reclosure with three-pole HSR is required, then
the trip signal is always three-pole.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-221
3 Operation
(continued)
MCMON: Meas. circ.
V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
BUOC: General
enable USER
[ 014 011 ]
SFMON: BUOC not
active
[ 098 002 ]
0
1
BUOC: Enabled
[ 040 093 ]
0: No
1: Yes
BUOC: Operating
mode
[ 014 000 ]
SFMON: BUOC active
w/o ARC
[ 098 003 ]
1
2
3
SFMON: BUOC active
with ARC
[ 098 004 ]
1: Without ARC
2: With ARC, 3p
HSR
3: With ARC, 1/3p
HSR
BUOC: Active
[ 037 021 ]
MAIN: Blocking 1p
trip EXT
[ 041 078 ]
ARC: Ready
[ 004 068 ]
BUOC: tI>
PSx
[
*
MAIN: Rush restr.
A trig.
[ 041 027 ]
MAIN: Rush restr.
B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
MAIN: Rush restr.
C trig.
[ 041 029 ]
]
BUOC: Trip A
304 754
BUOC: Trip B
304 755
BUOC: Trip C
BUOC: I>
PSx
[
*
MAIN: Protection
active
304 756
]
BUOC: IA>
triggered
306 001
304 750
IA
IB
IC
BUOC: IB>
triggered
304 751
BUOC: IC>
triggered
ARC: Dead time
running
[ 037 002 ]
304 752
BUOC: tIN>
PSx
[
*
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
[
*
]
1: Low-imped.
grounding
BUOC: IN>
PSx
[
*
]
BUOC: Trip signal
[ 036 014 ]
]
BUOC: Starting
[ 036 013 ]
BUOC: SN
304 757
BUOC: IN>
triggered
304 753
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
010 048
001 076
001 077
001 078
BUOC: I>
PSx
010 058
010 078
010 098
011 018
BUOC: tI>
PSx
010 059
010 079
010 099
011 019
BUOC: IN>
PSx
010 064
010 084
011 004
011 024
BUOC: tIN>
PSx
010 065
010 085
011 005
011 025
47Z1110A_EN
3-144
3-222
Backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.25 Switch on to Fault Protection (Function Group SOTF)
When the circuit breaker is closed manually, it is possible to switch on to an existing
fault. This is especially critical if a maintenance ground clamp were inadvertently left
connected at the remote end of the line, since the distance protection function would not
clear the fault until zone 2 delay t2 had elapsed. In this situation, however, the fastest
possible clearance is desired.
To ensure rapid clearing with manual closing, the manual close signal must be applied
not only to the circuit breaker but also to the P437. The manual close signal is converted
to an internal pulse, of settable duration. The pulse time can be set.
The user may specify whether the following shall occur during operation of this timer
stage:
The occurrence of a general start shall cause a trip
(S O T F : T r i p s i g n a l )
(See section 'Starting Signals and Tripping Logic' for a definition of general starting)
A zone extension of impedance zone 1 shall occur
(S O T F : Z 1 e x t e n d e d ) .
In addition a neutral overcurrent timer stage may now be enabled based either on the
measured residual current (T 4 transformer input with sensitive setting range) or the
residual current internally calculated from the three phase currents
(S O T F : t I N > e l a p s e d or S O T F : T r i p s i g n a l ).
Moreover, the overcurrent protection of SOTF features an additional phase overcurrent
element. This allows full, current based STOF protection even during a voltage
measuring failure. The featured settings are S O T F : I > P S x for the current threshold
and S O T F : t I > P S x for the timer stage. The signal S O T F : S t a r t i n g I > is set to
‘Yes’ in case of an overcurrent situation.
Switch on to fault protection can be blocked by external autoreclosing control (ARC)
(provided that a binary signal input has been configured accordingly).
Moreover, an external trigger S OT F : T r i g g e r E X T may now be applied as an
alternative to the external trigger M A IN : M a n u a l c l o s e E X T . In some applications,
SOTF triggering is required when line energizing is initiated from an external A/R device.
This is how the P437 provides the feature "Zone extension during reclosure". Although
this functionality can be achieved by using the existing binary input
M A I N : M a n u a l c l o s e E X T , the use of this signal might be confusing.
An additional option S O T F : A c t i v a t i o n m o d e P S x can be set to either “Trigger”
(which is the situation described above) or to “Line Dead State”. With the latter setting,
SOTF becomes permanently active during dead line condition, so that no external trigger
is necessary.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-223
3 Operation
(continued)
Decision 'Line dead'
The setting S O T F : W i t h V < e n a b l e P S x allows the function SOTF to be enabled
only when the phase voltage is low. If this is set to 'Yes', then a settable timer stage will
have to elapse before an undervoltage condition will lead to the decision 'Line dead'.
This will prevent timing problems between the line energizing control function and
triggering of the SOTF function.
On the other hand, in few cases CT failures occurred from picking up load current. For
such cases it is not desirable to inhibit SOTF, even if the line is already energized. To
take care for this condition, too, the dead line inhibit logic can be disabled by setting
S O T F : W i t h V < e n a b l e P S x to 'No'.
Moreover, the decision 'Line dead' is set only if also all 3 phase currents are below an
undercurrent threshold. This threshold is fixed to 0.05•Inom.
A settable timer S O T F : O p e r a t e d e l a y P S x makes the SOTF function active (in
permanent modes) or triggered (in trigger modes) only after the conditions for ‘Line dead’
are present for a sufficiently long time. This time delay should be set longer than the
slowest delayed auto-reclose dead time, but shorter than the time in which the system
operator might re-energize a circuit once it had opened/tripped. 110 seconds is the
default setting.
SOFT: With
V< enable
[
*
PS
]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
SOFT: Operate
delay
PSx
[
*
]
V < 0.7 Vnom √3
SOFT: Release
delay
PS
[
*
]
SOFT: Line dead
trig. en.
0
t
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
SOFT: Line
dead
[ 006 147 ]
I < 0.05 Inom
IA
Parameter
IB
set
set
set
set
IC
3-145
3-224
1
2
3
4
SOFT: With
V< enable
006 005
006 006
006 007
006 008
PS
SOFT: Operate
delay
PSx
006 138
006 139
006 140
006 141
SOFT: Release
delay
PS
002 128
002 129
002 133
002 134
Decision 'Line dead' in the 'Switch on to fault protection' function
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
SOTF: Active
[ 006 146 ]
SOTF: Evaluation
IN
PSx
[
*
]
SOTF: tIN>
PSx
[
*
1
t
]
0
2
1: Measured
2: Calculated
C
SOTF: tIN>
elapsed
[ 001 188 ]
SOTF: IN>(meas.)
PSx
[
*
]
SOTF: Starting
IN>
[ 001 187 ]
IN(measured)
C
SOTF: tI>
PSx
[
*
SOTF: IN>(calc.)
PSx
[
*
]
t
]
0
IN(calculated)
SOTF: I>
PSx
[
*
SOTF: tI>
elapsed
[ 001 129 ]
SOTF: Starting
I>
[ 006 128 ]
]
IA
IB
IC
Parameter
set
set
set
set
3-146
1
2
3
4
SOTF: Evaluation
IN
PSx
001 191
001 192
001 193
001 194
SOTF: IN>(meas.)
PSx
001 189
001 195
001 196
001 197
SOTF: IN>(calc.)
PSx
001
001
001
001
190
198
199
202
SOTF: I>
PSx
006 130
006 131
006 132
006 133
SOTF: tIN>
PSx
001
001
001
001
177
178
179
180
SOTF: tI>
PSx
006 134
006 135
006 136
006 137
'Switch on to fault protection' function, overcurrent stage in the residual current system
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-225
3 Operation
(continued)
SOTF: General
enable USER
[ 011 068 ]
0
SOTF: Enabled
[ 040 069 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
y
1
2
3
4
PSS: PS y
active
036 090
036 091
036 092
036 093
PSS: PS y
active
[
*
]
SOTF: Enable
PSx
[
*
]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
SOTF: tI>
elapsed
[ 006 129 ]
SOTF: tIN>
elapsed
[ 001 188 ]
MAIN: General
starting
[ 036 000 ]
SOTF: Trip signal
[ 036 064 ]
SOTF: Par. ARC
running EXT
[ 039 063 ]
SOTF: Man. close
PSx
C timer
[
*
]
MAIN: Protection
active
SOTF: Z1 extended
[ 035 076 ]
306 001
SOTF: Active
[ 006 146 ]
1
SOTF: Line dead
310 006
MAIN: Manual
close EXT
[ 036 047 ]
SOTF: tManualclose runn.
[ 036 063 ]
SOTF: Trigger EXT
[ 002 127 ]
SOTF: ARC blocked
305 650
ARC: Close command
303 021
SOTF: Activation
mode PSx
[
*
]
SOTF: Operating
mode
PSx
[
*
]
1
4
2
5
1: Trigger
4: Trip with starting
2: Line Dead State
5: Trip with overreach
SOTF: Line dead
[ 006 147 ]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
3-147
3-226
1
2
3
4
SOTF: Enable
PSx
001 203
001 204
001 205
001 206
SOTF: Man. close SOTF: Operating
timer PSx
mode
PSx
SOTF: Activation
mode
PSx
011
001
001
001
006
006
006
006
060
181
182
183
011
001
001
001
061
184
185
186
142
143
144
145
Switch on to fault protection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.26 Protective Signaling (Function group PSIG)
The reach of the first impedance zone of the distance protection function is normally set
for values less than 100%. Protective signaling is used to extend protection to 100% of
the line section. This is achieved by logical linking of the signals that are transmitted by
the remote station’s protection device.
Protective signaling enable
In order for protective signaling (PSIG) to function, the following requirements must be
satisfied:
It must be activated.
There is no external block.
There is no transmission fault.
Disabling or enabling
protective signaling
The function is enabled independently of parameter subsets via
P S I G : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset via
P S I G : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, PSIG can be
disabled or enabled via setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary
signal inputs. The local control panel or operating program and the binary signal inputs
have equal status in this regard. If only the P S I G : E n a b l e E X T function is assigned
to a binary signal input, then PSIG will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal
and disabled by a negative edge. If only the P S I G : D i s a b l e E X T function has been
assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-227
3 Operation
(continued)
3-148
3-228
Protective signaling enable
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
If protective signaling is ready, distance protection tripping takes place
in Zone 1 (with reach set): after timer stage t1 of distance protection has elapsed
in extended zone 1: after the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PSIG: Operating
mode PSx
[
]
*
2: PUTT
ARC: Zone
extension RC
>1
-
303 002
SOTF: Z1 extended
[
PSIG: Tripping
time
PSx
]
035 076
DIST: Zone
extension EXT
[
[
037 027
&
PSIG: Timer
stage elapsed
&
PSIG: Trip time
elapsed
]
305 164
]
036 046
t
PSIG: Ready
[
*
&
0
305 150
]
DIST: General
starting
[
036 240
]
*
Parameter
PSIG: Tripping
time
PSx
PSIG: Operating
mode PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
011
003
063
023
000
000
060
020
47Z1140A_EN
47Z0279A_EN
3-149
Protective signaling tripping time
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-229
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the
transmission section
A transmission fault leads to a blocking of the protective signaling function. The fault
signal of the signal transmission device should be connected to the P437. It will then
lead to a blocking of protective signaling.
COMM3: Sig.asg.
comm.fault
[ 120 034 ]
0
1
2
3
0: None
1: Telecom.
faulty/PSIG
2: Telecom.
faulty/GSCSG
3: Both signals
COMM3: Communications fault
[ 120 043 ]
PSIG: Telecom.
faulty EXT
[ 004 064 ]
PSIG: Telecom.
faulty
[ 036 060 ]
SFMON: Telecom.
faulty/PSIG
[ 098 006 ]
47Z1018A_EN
3-150
3-230
Transmission fault
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Frequency monitoring
Failure of frequency transmission using a high-voltage transmission line can be signaled
to the P437 via appropriately configured binary signal inputs. If frequency monitoring is
enabled, the P437 – once an operate delay of approximately 20 ms has elapsed – will
generate a receive signal for a duration of 150 ms. This application is based on the
presumption that failure of frequency transmission was caused by a short circuit on the
high-voltage transmission line.
3-151
Frequency monitoring
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-231
3 Operation
(continued)
Transient blocking
In the event of a directional change, protective signaling will generate a blocking signal
for the set time P S I G : t B l o c k .
PSIG: tBlock
PSx
[
*
]
DIST: Fault
forwd. / LS, A
[ 038 010 ]
PSIG: Ch. 1
transient bl.
DIST: Fault
backwd / BS, A
[ 038 011 ]
305 172
PSIG: Ch. 2
transient bl.
305 173
DIST: Fault
forwd. / LS, B
[ 038 012 ]
PSIG: Ch. 3
transient bl.
305 174
DIST: Fault
backwd / BS, B
[ 038 013 ]
PSIG: Transient
blocking
[ 037 255 ]
DIST: Fault
forwd. / LS, C
[ 038 014 ]
DIST: Fault
backwd / BS, C
[ 038 015 ]
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
*
Parameter- PSIG: tBlock
PSx
satz 1
015 024
satz 2
024 010
satz 3
024 070
satz 4
025 030
47Z1141A_EN
3-152
Transient blocking.
The decisions by all distance zones are blocked for 2 cycles when a directional change,
from backward (reverse) to forward, occurs.
3-232
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Protective signaling
operating modes
Protective signaling can be operated in five different modes.
Direct transfer trip
PUTT (permissive underreaching transfer tripping)
Zone Extension
Signal comparison release scheme
Signal comparison blocking scheme
3-153
Setting the protective signaling operating modes
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-233
3 Operation
(continued)
Checking the operating
mode setting
If the P437 is operating with protective signaling and ground fault protective signaling,
then the user has the option of specifying whether ground fault protective signaling will
use the same channel for signal transmission as protective signaling. If this is the case,
the operating modes for protective signaling and ground fault protective signaling must
be set identically. Otherwise a signal will be issued. This may be configured with the
function assignment parameter S F M ON : F c t. a s s i g n . W a r n i n g .
47Z0137C
3-154
3-234
Checking the operating mode setting
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Without
If only the weak infeed logic or the echo function will be used and no other functions of
protective signaling, then this can be implemented by setting the operating mode for
‘Without’.
Direct transfer trip
underreaching
When there is a distance protection trip in zone 1, a signal is sent to the remote station’s
protection device. Signals are transmitted through one or three channels, depending on
the setting.
Upon receipt of the signal by the remote station, the remote station’s circuit breaker is
tripped. The settings D IS T : T r i p zo n e 1 P G and D IS T : T r i p z o n e 1 P P are
taken into account.
3-155
Protective signaling transmission with operating mode 'Direct transfer trip underreaching'
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-235
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
2: A-C-B
1: A-B-C
47Z0189B_DE
3-156
3-236
Protective signaling trip with operating mode 'Direct transfer trip underreaching''
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
PUTT (permissive
underreaching transfer
tripping)
When there is a distance protection trip in zone 1, a signal is sent to the remote station’s
protection device. Signals are transmitted through one or three channels, depending on
the setting.
On receipt of the signal by the remote station, the remote station’s circuit breaker is
subject to permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT) once the protective
signaling tripping time has elapsed. The settings D I S T : T r i p z o n e 1 P G (with
starting in the zero-sequence system) and D IS T : T r i p z o n e 1 P P (without starting in
the zero-sequence system) are taken into account.
(Mode set at D IS T : T r i p z o n e 1 P G : '1-pole' or '3-pole'.
Mode set at D IS T : T r i p z o n e 1 P P : '1-pole with leading phase' or '1-pole with
trailing phase' or '3-pole'.)
3-157
Protective signaling transmission with operating mode 'PUTT' (permissive underreaching transfer tripping)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-237
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
2: A-C-B
1: A-B-C
47Z0191B_EN
3-158
3-238
Protective signaling trip with operating mode 'PUTT' (permissive underreaching transfer tripping)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Zone Extension
When there is a distance protection trip in zone 1, a signal is sent to the remote station’s
protection device. Upon receipt of the transmitted signal the measuring range of zone 1
in the remote station is increased by the zone extension factor kze HSR (see
Figure 3-168). Signals are transmitted through one or three channels, depending on the
setting.
The response of the protection device in the remote station is determined by the setting
at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e t r i p P S x .
'Direction-dependent'
After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs in the phase(s)
in which there is a receive signal and distance protection has decided in favor of
'forward direction'. The settings D I S T : T r i p z o n e 1 P G and
D I S T : T r i p z o n e 1 P P are taken into account. If transient blocking is operating,
then the receive signal will be ignored.
'Distance-dependent'
If the fault is located within the extended zone 1, then the protection device of the
remote station also decides in favor of a trip after the protective signaling tripping time
has elapsed. The receive signal is ignored during transient blocking.
3-159
Reaches with zone extension
(broken line: measuring range extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-239
3 Operation
(continued)
3-160
3-240
Protective signaling transmission with operating mode 'Zone extension'
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: Trip zone 1 PG
[
*
]
3: 3-pole
1: 1-pole
PSx
PSIG: Trip
channel 1
402 575
PSIG: Trip
channel 2
PSIG: Oper.
mode trip PSx
[
*
]
402 576
PSIG: Trip
channel 3
1
2
DIST: Trip zone 1
PP PSx
[
*
]
1: 1-pole leading phase
2: 1-pole trailing phase
3: 3-pole
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
1: A-B-C
2: A-C-B
PSIG: Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG: Operating mode PSx
[
*
]
3: Zone extension
PSIG: Timer stage elapsed
305 164
DIST: Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
PSIG: Receive EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG: Frequ. monit.trigg.
305 152
PSIG: Transient blocking
305 154
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze
402 577
PSIG: Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
1: Direct.dependent
2: Dist. dependent
PSIG: Trip
enable
305 157
303 595
DIST:
[ 038
PSIG:
[ 038
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, A
010 ]
Chann. 1 receive EXT
091 ]
Frequ. monit. ch. 1
305 169
Ch. 1 transient bl.
305 172
Trip zone 1,ze, A
DIST:
[ 038
PSIG:
[ 038
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, B
012 ]
Chann. 2 receive EXT
092 ]
Frequ. monit. ch. 2
305 170
Ch. 2 transient bl.
305 173
Trip zone 1,ze, B
DIST:
[ 038
PSIG:
[ 038
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, C
014 ]
Chann. 3 receive EXT
093 ]
Frequ. monit. ch. 3
305 171
Ch. 3 transient bl.
305 174
Trip zone 1,ze, C
PSIG: Trip
enable, ch. 1
305 166
303 658
PSIG: Trip
enable, ch. 2
305 167
303 659
PSIG: Trip
enable, ch. 3
305 168
303 660
PSIG: Receive
(signal)
[ 037 029 ]
*
MAIN: General starting
[ 036 000 ]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
PSIG: No.
telecom. ch.
PSx
[
*
]
3
1
3: 3 channels
1: 1 channel
*
1
2
3
4
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
PSIG: Operating
mode PSx
015 000
024 000
024 060
025 020
PSIG: No.
telecom. ch. PSx
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
PSIG: Oper. mode PSIG: Trip zone
trip PSx
1 PG PSx
015 107
011 050
015 108
011 051
015 113
011 052
015 114
011 053
DIST: Trip zone
1 PP PSx
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
47Z0293C_EN
3-161
Protective signaling trip and trip enable in operating mode 'Zone extension'
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-241
3 Operation
(continued)
Signal comparison release
scheme
Zone extension in zone 1 of distance protection is a function of the setting at
PSIG: Oper. mode send PSx.
'Direction-dependent'
The measuring range of zone 1 of distance protection is not extended.
'Distance-dependent'
In the idle state, the measuring range of zone 1 in both protection devices is extended
by the zone extension factor kze HSR (see figure 3-168). The distance protection trip
in extended zone 1 is blocked in both protection devices.
3-162
3-242
Zone reaches with signal comparison release scheme
(broken line: measuring range extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
The setting at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e s e n d P S x defines when the P437 sends a signal
to the remote station.
'Direction-dependent'
If the distance protection function detects a fault in the forward direction, the P437
sends a signal to the remote station.
'Distance-dependent'
If the distance protection function detects a fault within extended zone 1, the P437
sends a signal to the remote station.
Signals are transmitted through one or three channels, depending on the setting.
The response of the protection device in the remote station is determined by the setting
at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e t r i p P S x .
'Direction-dependent'
After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs in the phase(s)
in which there is a receive signal and distance protection has decided in favor of
'forward direction'.
Detected fault type phase – phase with ground will cause a 3-pole trip.
Detected fault type phase – phase without ground will cause a 1-pole or 3-pole
trip, depending on the setting at D IS T : T r i p z o n e 1 P P .
Detected fault type 1p phase – ground will cause a 1-pole or 3-pole trip,
depending on the setting at D IS T : T r i p z o n e 1 P G .
The receive signal is ignored during transient blocking.
'Distance-dependent'
If the fault is located within the extended zone 1, then the protection device of the
remote station also decides in favor of a trip after the protective signaling tripping time
has elapsed and a receive signal is present. The receive signal is ignored during
transient blocking.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-243
3 Operation
(continued)
3-163
3-244
Protective signaling transmission with operating mode 'Signal comparison release scheme
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: Trip zone 1 PG
[
*
]
3: 3-pole
1: 1-pole
PSx
PSIG: Trip
channel 1
402 575
PSIG: Trip
channel 2
PSIG: Oper.
mode trip PSx
[
*
]
402 576
PSIG: Trip
channel 3
1
2
DIST: Trip zone 1
PP PSx
[
*
]
1: 1-pole leading phase
2: 1-pole trailing phase
3: 3-pole
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
1: A-B-C
2: A-C-B
PSIG: Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG: Operating mode PSx
[
*
]
4: Release scheme
PSIG: Timer stage elapsed
305 164
DIST: Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
PSIG: Receive EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG: Frequ. monit.trigg.
305 152
PSIG: Transient blocking
305 154
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze
402 577
PSIG: Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
1: Direct.dependent
2: Dist. dependent
PSIG: Trip
enable
305 157
303 595
DIST:
[ 038
PSIG:
[ 038
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, A
010 ]
Chann. 1 receive EXT
091 ]
Frequ. monit. ch. 1
305 169
Ch. 1 transient bl.
305 172
Trip zone 1,ze, A
DIST:
[ 038
PSIG:
[ 038
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, B
012 ]
Chann. 2 receive EXT
092 ]
Frequ. monit. ch. 2
305 170
Ch. 2 transient bl.
305 173
Trip zone 1,ze, B
DIST:
[ 038
PSIG:
[ 038
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, C
014 ]
Chann. 3 receive EXT
093 ]
Frequ. monit. ch. 3
305 171
Ch. 3 transient bl.
305 174
Trip zone 1,ze, C
PSIG: Trip
enable, ch. 1
305 166
303 658
PSIG: Trip
enable, ch. 2
305 167
303 659
PSIG: Trip
enable, ch. 3
305 168
303 660
PSIG: Receive
305 165
PSIG: Receive
(signal)
[ 037 029 ]
*
MAIN: General starting
[ 036 000 ]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
PSIG: No.
telecom. ch.
PSx
[
*
]
3
1
3: 3 channels
1: 1 channel
*
1
2
3
4
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
PSIG: Operating
mode PSx
015 000
024 000
024 060
025 020
PSIG: No.
telecom. ch. PSx
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
PSIG: Oper. mode PSIG: Trip zone
trip PSx
1 PG PSx
015 107
011 050
015 108
011 051
015 113
011 052
015 114
011 053
DIST: Trip zone
1 PP PSx
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
47Z0295C_EN
3-164
Protective signaling trip and trip enable in operating mode 'Signal comparison release scheme'
(See note for P S I G : O p e r . m o d e t r i p P S x on page preceding figure 3-155)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-245
3 Operation
(continued)
Signal comparison blocking
scheme
Zone extension in zone 1 of distance protection is a function of the setting at
PSIG: Oper. mode send PSx.
'Direction-dependent'
The measuring range of zone 1 of distance protection is not extended.
'Distance-dependent'
In the idle state, the measuring range of zone 1 in both protection devices is extended
by the zone extension factor kze HSR (see figure 3-168). The distance protection trip
in extended zone 1 is enabled in both protection devices.
3-165
3-246
Zone reaches with signal comparison blocking scheme
(broken line: measuring range extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
The setting at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e s e n d P S x defines when the P437 sends a signal
to the remote station.
'Direction-dependent'
If distance protection detects a fault in the backward direction or – for a directional
change – for the duration of transient blocking (setting at P S I G : t B l o c k P S x ), a
signal is sent to the remote station.
'Distance-dependent'
If the distance protection function detects a fault within zone 6 and if the measured
impedance lies in zone 6 (signal D IS T : Im p e d a n c e i n z o n e 6 ), then the P437
sends a signal to the remote station. A signal is also sent to the remote station during
transient blocking.
Signals are transmitted through one or three channels, depending on the setting.
The response of the protection device in the remote station is determined by the setting
at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e t r i p P S x .
'Direction-dependent'
After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs in the phase(s)
in which there is no receive signal and distance protection has decided in favor of
'forward direction'. The receive signal is ignored during transient blocking.
'Distance-dependent'
After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs in the phase(s)
in which there is no receive signal and distance protection detects a fault within
extended zone 1. The receive signal is ignored during transient blocking.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-247
3 Operation
(continued)
3-166
3-248
Protective signaling transmission with operating mode 'Signal comparison blocking scheme'
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: Trip zone 1 PG
[
*
]
3: 3-pole
1: 1-pole
PSx
PSIG: Trip
channel 1
402 575
PSIG: Trip
channel 2
PSIG: Oper.
mode trip PSx
[
*
]
402 576
PSIG: Trip
channel 3
1
2
DIST: Trip zone 1
PP PSx
[
*
]
1: 1-pole leading phase
2: 1-pole trailing phase
3: 3-pole
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
1: A-B-C
2: A-C-B
PSIG: Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG: Operating mode PSx
[
*
]
5: Blocking scheme
PSIG: Timer stage elapsed
305 164
DIST: Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
PSIG: Receive EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG: Frequ. monit.trigg.
305 152
PSIG: Transient blocking
305 154
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze
402 577
PSIG: Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
1: Direct.dependent
2: Dist. dependent
PSIG: Trip
enable
305 157
303 595
DIST:
[ 038
PSIG:
[ 038
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, A
010 ]
Chann. 1 receive EXT
091 ]
Frequ. monit. ch. 1
305 169
Ch. 1 transient bl.
305 172
Trip zone 1,ze, A
DIST:
[ 038
PSIG:
[ 038
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, B
012 ]
Chann. 2 receive EXT
092 ]
Frequ. monit. ch. 2
305 170
Ch. 2 transient bl.
305 173
Trip zone 1,ze, B
DIST:
[ 038
PSIG:
[ 038
PSIG:
PSIG:
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, C
014 ]
Chann. 3 receive EXT
093 ]
Frequ. monit. ch. 3
305 171
Ch. 3 transient bl.
305 174
Trip zone 1,ze, C
PSIG: Trip
enable, ch. 1
305 166
303 658
PSIG: Trip
enable, ch. 2
305 167
303 659
PSIG: Trip
enable, ch. 3
305 168
303 660
PSIG: Receive
(signal)
[ 037 029 ]
*
MAIN: General starting
[ 036 000 ]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
PSIG: No.
telecom. ch.
PSx
[
*
]
3
1
3: 3 channels
1: 1 channel
*
1
2
3
4
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
PSIG: Operating
mode PSx
015 000
024 000
024 060
025 020
PSIG: No.
telecom. ch. PSx
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
PSIG: Oper. mode PSIG: Trip zone
trip PSx
1 PG PSx
015 107
011 050
015 108
011 051
015 113
011 052
015 114
011 053
DIST: Trip zone
1 PP PSx
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
47Z0297C_EN
3-167
Protective signaling trip and trip enable in operating mode 'Signal comparison blocking scheme'
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-249
3 Operation
(continued)
Measuring zone extension
of zone 1 of distance
protection
3-168
3-250
Zone extension by protective signaling
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Weak infeed logic
The weak infeed logic can be triggered by a binary signal input configured to
P S I G : W e a k i n f . t r i g g . E X T or binary signal inputs configured to either
P S I G : R e c e i v e ( A ) E X T or P S I G : R e c e i v e ( B ) E X T .
The weak infeed logic checks the phase-to-ground voltages to determine whether they
fall below the set threshold P S I G : V < w e a k i n f e e d P S x . If the voltage falls below
the set threshold in one phase, then a timer stage is started. If
P S I G : S t a r t c o n d . t V < P S x is set to “V< & WI start”, then the timer stage is only
started if both the undervoltage condition and the weak-infeed starting are present.
Once the set time has elapsed – provided that the appropriate setting has been
selected – a protective signaling trip is issued. The D IS T : T r i p z o n e 1 P G P S x
setting is taken into account.
If the device has not issued its own protective starting the receive signal
(P S I G : R e c e i v e E X T ) is reset after the set time delay (P S I G : t V < + 100 ms). This
will always ensure that weak-infeed logic trips independently of the reset time of the send
signal.
The weak-infeed logic function is blocked by a 3-pole open circuit breaker, when this
status is either signaled by the CB auxiliary contacts or when the newly implemented
monitoring function detects this state from a 3p undervoltage condition.
The phase selective starting signals are stored in RS flip-flops, which are only reset after
the received signal has ended. This excludes an over reaction during a reset of its own
starting when the received signal from the other end is still present.
3-ended line application
In general, the P S I G : R e c e i v e ( A ) E X T or P S I G : R e c e i v e ( B ) E X T signals are
simply used in an OR combination.
For applying the permissive scheme to 3-ended lines, however, it is mandatory to
receive the permissive signals from both remote end units, i.e. the signals must be used
in an AND combination.
To cope this scheme in the most common 1-channel transmission applications, the two
receive signals can be directly used with setting P S I G : 3 e n d e d l i n e p r o t P S x to
'Yes'.
These 2 signals are further processed as per figure 3-169 to create a new signal
PSIG: Receive that is used in the various PSIG operating modes. (This signal
replaces the PSIG: Receive EXT of previous versions.)
If 3-ended line protection is set, then both receive signals are linked in an AND gate,
otherwise in an OR gate. The latter allows to use on 2-ended lines either (A) or (B)
signal, or even both in case of redundant signalling channels.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-251
3 Operation
(continued)
PSIG: 3ended
line prot PSx
[
*
]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
PSIG: Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG: Receive (A)
EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG: Receive (B)
EXT
[ 006 037 ]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
3-169
1
2
3
4
PSIG: 3ended
line prot PSx
006 039
006 046
006 047
006 048
3-ended line operation
V < 0.35
Detection of dead line
by undervoltage criterion
(only with line side VT connection)
Vnom/√3
5s
0
VA-G
PSIG: Weak
inf. blocked
310 015
VB-G
VC-G
MAIN: CB open 3p
[ 031 040 ]
Detection of dead line
by CB status contact
3-170
Enable for the weak-infeed logic, part 1
3-171
Enable for the weak-infeed logic, part 2
3-252
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
PSIG: No.
telecom. ch. PSx
[
*
]
1
1: 1 channel
3: 3 channels
PSIG: Weak inf. trigg.
EXT
[043 062]
[ 043 062 ] is
assigned to a binary
input
PSIG: Ch. 1
receive weak inf.
310 011
PSIG: Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
PSIG: Ch. 2
receive weak inf.
305 152
310 012
PSIG: Chann. 1
receive EXT
[ 038 091 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. ch. 1
PSIG: Ch. 3
receive weak inf.
305 169
310 013
PSIG: Chann. 2
receive EXT
[ 038 092 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. ch. 2
305 170
PSIG: Chann. 3
receive EXT
[ 038 093 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. ch. 3
305 171
Parameter
set
set
set
set
3-172
1
2
3
4
PSIG: No.
telecom. ch. PSx
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
Phase selective receive signals of the weak-infeed logic
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-253
3 Operation
(continued)
ARC: HSR oper.
mode
PSx
[
*
]
= 3-pole
(only for 1p)
ARC 3p trip
for 1p fault
310 019
MAIN: Starting A
[ 036 001 ]
PSIG: Ch. 1
receive weak inf.
S 11
50ms
0
PSIG: Inhibit
Weak inf. A
310 016
R 1
310 011
MAIN: CB closed
A
[ 031 035 ]
MAIN: Starting B
[ 036 002 ]
PSIG: Ch.2
receive weak inf.
S 11
PSIG: Inhibit
Weak inf. B
310 017
R 1
50ms
0
310 012
MAIN: CB closed
B
[ 031 036 ]
MAIN: Starting C
[ 036 003 ]
PSIG: Ch. 3
receive weak inf.
S 11
50ms
0
PSIG: Inhibit
Weak inf. C
310 018
R 1
310 013
MAIN: CB closed
C
[ 031 037 ]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
3-173
1
2
3
4
ARC: HSR oper.
mode
PSx
015 051
024 025
024 085
025 045
Phase selective blocking of the weak-infeed logic.
If the ARC operating mode (A R C : H S R o p e r . M o d e P S x ) is set to '3-pole (only for
1p)' and ARC issues a 3-pole trip for this reason, then the weak infeed logic is blocked.
This refinement was necessary based on the following application:
Assuming a weak infeed condition and the P437 receives a signal from the remote end
device because of a ground fault short-circuit, it then issues a single-pole PSIG trip as
soon as weak infeed timer tV< has elapsed. According to the operating mode being set
to '3-pole (only for 1p)' the ARC now converts this single-pole trip into a 3-pole trip. As
soon as the CBs are open on both sides, the undervoltage condition becomes true for
the remaining 2 phases. Consequently the week-infeed trip condition becomes true for
the 2 healthy phases, and PSIG raised a 3-pole trip. This in turn leads to aborting the
HSR.
Note: In this example it is assumed that blocking of the weak infeed logic by CB auxiliary
contacts is not generally fast enough to prevent the 3-pole tripping.
3-254
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
PSIG: V< weak
C infeed PSx
[
*
]
PSIG: Weak inf.
ready
310 014
VA-G
PSIG: V< triggered
310 020
VB-G
VC-G
PSIG: tV<
PSx
[
*
]
PSIG: Start
cond. tV< PSx
[
*
]
t
0
1
2
1: V<
2: V< & WI start
PSIG: Trip
signal V< PSx
[
*
]
0
1
2
0: Always without
1: Always with
2: If no gen. starting
PSIG: Trip V<, A
[ 006 152 ]
PSIG: Ch. 1
receive weak inf.
310 011
PSIG: Inhibit
weak inf. A
310 016
PSIG: Trip V<, B
[ 006 153 ]
PSIG: Ch. 2
receive weak inf.
310 012
PSIG: Inhibit
weak inf. B
310 017
PSIG: Trip V<, C
[ 006 154 ]
PSIG: Ch. 3
receive weak inf.
310 013
PSIG: Inhibit
weak inf. C
310 018
PSIG: Trip V<
305 158
DIST: Trip zone 1
PG PSx
[
*
]
1: 1-pole
3p-trip in case of 2-/3-pole
faults or 3p-transfer trip
No 1p-trip
PSIG: Weak infeed
start.
[ 043 064 ]
Parameter
PSIG: V< weak
infeed PSx
PSIG: Start cond.
tV< PSx
PSIG:
PSx
set 1
015 020
set 2
set 3
024 006
006 148
006 149
024 066
025 026
006 150
006 151
set 4
3-174
tV<
PSIG: Trip signal
V< PSx
DIST: Trip zone 1
PG PSx
015 019
015 021
011 050
024 005
024 065
025 025
024 007
024 067
025 027
011 051
011 052
011 053
Tripping logic of the weak-infeed logic
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-255
3 Operation
(continued)
Echo function
If operation with the echo function is desired, then the user may specify whether the
receive signal alone is to be employed in activating the echo pulse or whether the
receive signal and the triggering signal of the weak infeed logic are to be used. The
conditions for activation of the echo pulse must persist for a period in excess of the set
operate delay, and distance protection starting must be absent for the echo pulse to be
activated. This operate delay is ineffective with an open circuit breaker (i.e. when the
signal MAIN : C B c l o s e d 3 p is not present).
The echo pulse is then transmitted to the remote station for the set pulse duration.
Thereafter, the transmission of the receive signal is blocked for the set pulse
duration + 1 s. This prevents a permanent signal from being transmitted. The echo
function may be disabled. If the P437 is operating with ground fault protective signaling
and if directional measurement of ground fault protection has been enabled, the echo
signal will be blocked if protective signaling and ground fault protective signaling are
utilizing a common transmission channel.
3-256
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
GSCSG: Ready
[ 043 057 ]
GSCSG: Channel
mode
[ 023 078 ]
2: Common channel
GFSC: Direct.
determ. enabl.
[ 043 061 ]
PSIG: Echo on
receive PSx
[
*
]
0: Without
1: On receive
PSIG: Op. delay
echo PSx
[
*
]
2: On receive & V<
PSIG: No.
telecom.ch. PSx
[
*
]
1
PSIG: Pulse
dur. echo PSx
[
*
]
3
1: 1 channel
3: 3 channels
PSIG: Send
PSIG: V<
triggered
[ 036 035 ]
305 162
PSIG: Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG: Channel 1,
send
[ 038 081 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
305 152
PSIG: Chann. 1
receive EXT
[ 038 091 ]
PSIG: Channel 2,
send
[ 038 082 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. ch. 1
305 169
PSIG: Channel 3,
send
[ 038 083 ]
PSIG: Chann. 2
receive EXT
[ 038 092 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. ch. 2
305 170
PSIG: Chann. 3
receive EXT
[ 038 093 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. ch. 3
305 171
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
MAIN: CB open 3p
[ 031 040 ]
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
3-175
1
2
3
4
PSIG: Echo on
receive PSx
015 003
024 002
024 062
025 022
PSIG: Op. delay
echo PSx
015 022
024 008
024 068
025 028
PSIG: Pulse dur. PSIG: No.
echo PSx
telecom.ch.
015 023
015 026
024 009
024 012
024 069
024 072
025 029
025 032
PSx
47Z1142B_EN
Echo function
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-257
3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the communication
channels
The communication link can be tested. For this purpose a 500 ms send signal is issued
through a binary signal input or from the integrated local control panel, if it has been set
in the Operating Program. It is extended by the set release time of the send signal.
The remote station receives this signal if the transmission link is OK.
3-176
3-258
Testing the communication channels
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27 Auto-Reclosure Control (Function Group ARC)
After certain faults, the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) brings about automatic
reclosing of the line section that was interrupted by a protection device.
ARC operating modes
The integral ARC function in the P437 offers the possibility of multiple reclosures. When
the ARC operating mode has been set accordingly, multiple reclosures first begin with a
high-speed reclosure (HSR). For a single-pole or three-pole trip, different dead times
may be selected.
If the fault is not cleared after reclosure by a HSR, then another attempt can be made to
clear the fault with a time-delay reclosure (TDR). Multiple reclosures using only TDRs
are also possible if the ARC operating mode is set accordingly.
3-177
Setting the operating mode of the ARC function.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-259
3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling and disabling the
ARC function
The activation of the function is enabled generally (independent of parameter subsets)
via A R C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset
via A R C : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, the Autoreclose control function can be disabled or enabled by setting parameters or through
appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The local control panel or operating
program and the binary signal inputs have equal status in this regard. If only the
parameter A R C : E n a b l e E X T is assigned to a binary signal input, then Auto-reclose
will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge.
If only the parameter A R C : D i s a b l e E X T has been assigned to a binary signal input,
then a signal at this input will have no effect.
3-260
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-178
Disabling and enabling auto-reclosing control
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-261
3 Operation
(continued)
ARC ready
ARC is ready when the following conditions are satisfied:
Protection is activated (on).
ARC is not blocked.
No ARC cycle is running.
The circuit breaker must be capable of opening and closing again (CB opening &
closing drive is ready).
The circuit breaker is in closed position. (Position scanning is optional.)
No automatic synchronism check cycle is running.
MAIN: CB closed 3p
[ 031 042 ]
47Z1060A_EN
3-179
3-262
ARC readiness
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
ARC blocked
The ARC will be blocked if:
A manual close is carried out.
A manual open command is issued.
A switch to backup overcurrent time protection (BUOC) is made, but due to the
setting no ARC is to be carried out.
A trip signal is issued by ground fault (short-circuit) protection.
A ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling trip occurs, but no auto-reclosing is
to occur.
A trip signal is issued by circuit breaker failure protection.
The binary signal input configured for A R C : B l o c k i n g E X T is being triggered.
The HSR mode selection is to be made by external control (setting at
A R C : C o n t r o l v i a U S E R = No) but no binary signal inputs have been configured.
After all blocking conditions have dropped out, the relevant blocking time is started, and
when this time has elapsed, the block is canceled.
ARC: Blocked
[ 004 069 ]
ARC: Enabled
[ 015 064 ]
SOTF: Blocking ARC
305 650
MAIN: Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ]
MAIN:
[ 034
MAIN:
[ 034
MAIN:
[ 034
ARC: Block. time
int. PSx
[
*
]
Manual trip signal A
047 ]
Manual trip signal B
048 ]
Manual trip signal C
049 ]
ARC: Block. time
running
[ 037 004 ]
SFMON: BUOC active w/o ARC
[ 098 003]
CBF: Trip signal
[ 040 026 ]
GFSC: Trip signal
[ 039 092 ]
GSCSG: Blocking ARC
ARC: Block. time
ext. PSx
[
*
]
304 008
ARC: Blocking EXT
[ 036 050 ]
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
3-180
1
2
3
4
ARC: Block.
time int. PSx
015 043
024 021
024 081
025 041
ARC: Block. time
ext. PSx
015 058
024 032
024 092
025 052
47Z11ADA_EN
ARC blocking
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-263
3 Operation
(continued)
ARC Tripping Times
If protective signaling is not ready, the HSR or TDR tripping times of the ARC function
are initiated by the general starting condition. If the HSR mode is set to '1-/3-pole', '3pole' and '3-pole (only for 1p)' then the tripping times replace the timer stage t1,ze of
distance protection. If the 1-pole operating mode has been set, a single-pole trip is
issued once the HSR tripping time has elapsed, or a multi-pole trip is issued after
distance protection grading time (depending on the zone) has elapsed or after the BUOC
timer stages have elapsed.
3-181
3-264
ARC Tripping Times
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Starting the ARC cycle
When the ARC is ready, an ARC cycle is started by one of the following functions:
The general starting state formed internally or the general starting signal of a parallel
protection device, provided that a binary signal input has been configured
accordingly.
A trip without general starting e.g.
– through the protective signaling direct transfer trip – or –
through the function M A IN : T r a n s fe r tr i p . E X T .
A backup overcurrent time protection trip (backup DTOC) trip, provided that the ARC
is to be activated by the backup DTOC.
The trip signal of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling, provided that the
ARC is to be activated by ground fault protection signaling.
The trip signal of an external protection device, provided that the parameters of this
device have been set accordingly (A R C : P a r a l l e l tr i p ).
A test HSR.
The ARC cycle is completed after the last reclaim time has elapsed.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-265
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.1 High-Speed Reclosure (HSR)
When the ARC cycle starts, operative times 1 and 2 are started. The starting conditions
for the ARC cycle must drop out while the operative times are elapsing. This means that
the circuit breaker must have opened so that the dead time is started. If both operative
times are set at ≤ 25 ms, then ARC will not be ready in the event of starting; in the event
of a trip, the reclaim time is started. After starting drops out without a subsequent trip,
ARC is immediately ready again. Operative time 1 has priority over operative time 2.
Selection of the HSR operating mode determines which dead time is started.
The following settings are possible:
HSR operating modes
1-pole
1-/3-pole
3-pole
3-pole (only for 1p)
With the operating mode 3-pole (only for 1p) only a three-pole HSR will result from
single-pole ground faults.
Selecting operating mode
via binary signal inputs
The operating mode can be selected via binary signal inputs, if this selection mode has
been enabled (A R C : C ontr ol v i a U S E R = no) and the required binary signal inputs
have been configured.
When using binary signal inputs the operating mode is set according to the following
terms:
Input signals
ARC:
1p-HSR enable EXT
HSR operating mode
ARC:
3p-HSR enable EXT
ARC:
3p-HSR(1p) enab. EXT
0
0
0
ARC is blocked
(RRC and TDR are also blocked)
1
0
0
Only single-pole HSR permitted under 1p trip
condition.
Three-pole tripping is always final.
0
1
1
1
0
0
Three-pole HSR for all types of fault.
Trip-dependent HSR:
single-pole HSR with single-pole trip decision,
three-pole HSR with three-pole trip decision
0 or 1
0
1
Three-pole HSR only with single-pole trip
decision.
0 or 1
1
1
Three-pole HSR for all types of fault.
Logic input signals may be fed from physical binary signal inputs, signal assignment
within the LOGIC or through the InterMiCOM communication interface. If not all the
available operating modes are required, it is not necessary to configure all 3 signals.
Signals that are not configured are internally used with their default value '0'.
3-266
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
HSR operating mode 2
The setting at A R C : H S R o p e r . m o d e 2 P S x determines whether starting
(of distance or backup overcurrent-time protection) or a trip will be used for a single- or
three-pole HSR. If the setting is Trip-dependent, then trip decisions will be used as the
criterion. If the setting is Start-dependent, then starting decisions will also be used.
4: 3-pole
(only for 1p)
47Z1067A_EN
3-182
Setting the HSR operating mode and HSR operating mode 2
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-267
3 Operation
(continued)
1-pole
If HSR operating mode 2 is set for Start-dependent, then the single-pole HSR is only
executed if there is a single-pole starting signal when the trip occurs. If there is a multipole starting signal when the trip occurs, then there is a three-pole final trip, and the
reclaim time is started. If the setting is Trip-dependent, then the HSR is only executed if
a single-pole trip decision is reached. In the event of a three-pole trip, no HSR is
executed, and instead a final trip occurs. In addition, the HSR is started by a single-pole
test HSR.
A single-pole trip can occur as the result of the following protective functions:
Distance protection in impedance zone 1 or extended zone 1.
Backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC)
Protective signaling.
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
The integrated phase selection logic (see function MAIN).
A parallel protective device
If the HSR is started by a parallel protective device, protective signaling, ground fault
(short-circuit) protection signaling, or the phase selection logic and if the P437 has not
started, then the trip is always used as the criterion for the HSR – irrespective of whether
the setting is 'Start-dependent' or 'Trip-dependent'.
The single-pole dead time (A R C : D e a d t i m e 1 p P S x ) is started if the starting
conditions drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing. After the dead time elapses, a
close request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function (ASC), and a close
command is issued immediately, without a check by the ASC.
If the starting conditions for the ARC cycle drop out after operative time 1 has elapsed
but during operative time 2, then the maximum dead time (A R C : D e a d t i m e m a x
P S x ) is started. When the dead time is started, a close request is sent to the ASC. The
ASC checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached
during the ASC operative time and while the dead time is elapsing, then there is a close
enable, and the close command is issued.
If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur (depending on the setting or
with ASC disabled or blocked), then the reclaim time is started and a three-pole trip
occurs (final trip).
Plausibility check on single-pole HSR:
If pole selective status signals have been configured (see “Monitoring and processing of
CB status signals”, function group MAIN)) then the device will check that just this CB
contact will be opened during a single-pole HSR. The single-pole HSR is terminated and
a three-pole trip command is issued when at least one further CB contact is opened.
This trip command is final when the discrimination time has elapsed (timer stage
A R C : tD i s c r i m . P S x ) or if this timer stage is set to 0 s.
The same procedure is carried out should the multiple signal M A IN : C B
c l o s e d 3 p E X T occur during the dead time of a single-pole HSR.
3-268
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Trip signal
1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
47Z1061A_EN
3-183
Signal flow for the '1-pole' operating mode
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-269
3 Operation
(continued)
1-/3-pole
If HSR operating mode 2 is set for Start-dependent, then a single-pole HSR is executed
if there is a single-pole starting signal when the trip occurs. If there is a multi-pole
starting signal when the trip occurs, then a three-pole HSR is executed. With the
Trip-dependent setting, the decision as to whether a single- or three-pole HSR will be
executed is contingent upon the trip decisions. In addition, a single- or three-pole HSR is
started by a corresponding test HSR. In addition, the HSR is started by a single-pole test
HSR.
A single-pole trip can occur as the result of the following protective functions:
Distance protection in impedance zone 1 or extended zone 1.
Backup overcurrent-time protection (backup DTOC).
Protective signaling.
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling.
The integrated phase selection logic (see function MAIN).
A parallel protective device.
If the HSR is started by a parallel protective device, protective signaling, ground fault
(short-circuit) protection signaling or the phase selection logic and if the P437 has not
started, then the trip is always used as the criterion for the HSR – irrespective of whether
the setting is 'Start-dependent' or 'Trip-dependent'.
If the conditions for a single-pole HSR are satisfied, then the single-pole dead time
(A R C : D e a d t i m e 1 p P S x ) is started if the starting conditions for an ARC cycle drop
out while operative time 1 is elapsing. After the dead time elapses, a close request is
sent to the automatic synchronism check function (ASC), and a close command is issued
immediately, without a check by the ASC.
If the conditions for a three-pole HSR are satisfied, then the three-pole dead time
(A R C : D e a d t i m e 3 p P S x ) is started if the starting conditions for an ARC cycle drop
out while operative time 1 is elapsing. After the dead time has elapsed, a close request
is sent to the ASC. If ARC is to be activated (A R C : A c ti v e fo r H S R ) it first checks to
determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached during the
ASC operative time, then there is a close enable, and the close command is issued.
If ARC is disabled or blocked a close command may be issued immediately
(A S C : C l o s . r e j . w . b l o c k P S x = 'No' i.e. close rejection when blocked).
If the starting conditions for an ARC cycle drop out after operative time 1 has elapsed but
during operative time 2, then the maximum dead time (A R C : D e a d t i m e m a x P S x ) is
started. This occurs with both single-pole and three-pole trips. When the dead time is
started, a close request is sent to the ASC. The ASC checks to determine whether
reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached during the ASC operative time and
while the maximum dead time is elapsing, then there is a close enable, and the close
command is issued.
If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur or if the ASC function is not
ready, then the reclaim time is started after the dead time has elapsed, and three-pole
tripping occurs (final trip).
3-270
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
1-/3-pole
(continued)
Plausibility check on single-pole HSR:
If pole selective status signals have been configured (see “Monitoring and processing of
CB status signals”, function group MAIN)) then the device will check that just this CB
contact will be opened during a single-pole HSR. The single-pole HSR is terminated and
a three-pole trip command is issued when at least one further CB contact is opened.
This trip command is final when the discrimination time has elapsed (timer stage
A R C : tD i s c r i m . P S x ) or if this timer stage is set to 0 s. The dead time for the threepole HSR is triggered when the discrimination timer stage is still running. The same
procedure is carried out should the multiple signal M A IN : C B c l o s e d 3 p E X T occur
during the dead time of a single-pole HSR.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-271
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Trip signal
1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
MAIN: Trip signal
1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
47Z1062A_EN
3-184
3-272
Signal flow with the ‘1-/3-pole’ operating mode, tripping during operative time 1
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN:
1, 1p
[ 037
MAIN:
1, 3p
[ 037
Trip signal
252 ]
Trip signal
253 ]
47Z1063A_EN
3-185
Signal flow with the ‘1-/3-pole’ operating mode, tripping during operative time 2, and close rejection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-273
3 Operation
(continued)
3-pole
The three-pole HSR is executed both with a single-pole trip and a three-pole trip –
irrespective of whether the setting is Starting-dependent or Trip-dependent. If the setting
is Trip-dependent, then there is a three-pole trip transfer in the event of a single-pole trip.
The three-pole dead time (A R C : D e a d t i m e 3 p P S x ) is started if the starting
conditions for an ARC cycle drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing. After the dead
time has elapsed, a close request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function
(ASC). If ARC is to be activated (A R C : A c ti v e fo r H S R ) it first checks to determine
whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached during the ASC operative
time, then there is a close enable, and the close command is issued.
If ARC is disabled or blocked a close command may be issued immediately
(A S C : C l o s . r e j . w . b l o c k P S x = 'No' i.e. close rejection when blocked).
If the starting conditions for an ARC cycle drop out after operative time 1 has elapsed but
during operative time 2, then the maximum dead time (A R C : D e a d t i m e m a x P S x ) is
started. When the dead time is started, a close request is sent to the ASC. The ASC
checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached
during the ASC operative time and while the maximum dead time is elapsing, then there
is a close enable, and the close command is issued.
If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur, then the reclaim time is
started and the 'final trip' signal is issued.
3-pole (only for 1p)
With this operating mode no further trip command is issued when a HSR cycle is
terminated (a 3-pole trip has already occurred); only the signal M A IN : F i n a l tr i p
= Yes is generated.
3-274
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Trip signal
1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
47Z1064A_EN
3-186
Signal flow for the '3-pole' operating mode
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-275
3 Operation
(continued)
All HSR operating modes
The following applies to all HSR operating modes:
Should the circuit breaker fail to clear the fault within the operative times, the reclaim
time will be started and a three-pole trip will occur (final trip). If the operative times
elapse without a trip decision, then the ARC is immediately ready again as soon as the
general starting condition has dropped out.
Test HSR
A single- or three-pole test HSR can be carried out from the integrated local control
panel or via binary signal inputs. If a single-pole test HSR is triggered in the 3-pole
operating mode, then a three-pole trip occurs.
3-276
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-187
Test HSR
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-277
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.2 Time-Delay Reclosure (TDR)
A TDR may occur after a HSR if reclosure has occurred as the result of the HSR or if the
operating mode set for the ARC allows only TDRs. This is only possible if the setting for
A R C : N o. of per m i t. T D R P S x (number of permitted TDRs) is not zero. The TDR
is always a three-pole process. This means that three-pole transfer tripping will occur in
the event of a single-pole trip.
The TDR is started if either a new general starting condition or the trip of an external
protection device (if configured accordingly) occurs while the reclaim time is elapsing.
Operative times 1 and 2 are started. If the starting conditions for the TDR drop out while
operative time 1 or 2 is elapsing, then the TDR dead time is started. After the dead time
has elapsed, a close request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function (ASC).
If ARC is to be activated (A R C : A c ti v e fo r T D R ) it first checks to determine whether
reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached during the ASC operative time,
then there is a close enable, and the close command is issued.
If ARC is disabled or blocked a close command may be issued immediately
(A S C : C l o s . r e j . w . b l o c k P S x = 'No' i.e. close rejection when blocked).
If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur, then a final trip occurs after
the ASC operative time has elapsed, and the ARC reclaim time is started.
If the fault is still present even after another reclosing, the TDR can be started again.
This process can be repeated as often as allowed by the set number of TDRs permitted.
If the fault is still present after that, then a final trip occurs.
3-278
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Trip signal
1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
47Z1065A_EN
3-188
Signal flow with time-delay reclosure (TDR)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-279
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.3 Rapid Reclosure (RRC)
Rapid reclosure (RRC) operates along with HSR or TDR. If the P437 carries out
appropriate measurements and concludes that the line is carrying voltage and that the
line voltages are healthy, then reclosing is carried out by RRC which in turn reduces the
dead times of HSR or TDR. For this, VTs must be connected on the line side.
If the setting at M A I N : N e u t r a l - p o i n t t r e a t . is Low-impedance grounding, then both
phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages are checked. If the setting is either
Isolated neutral/resonant-grounding or Short-duration grounding, then only the
phase-to-phase voltages are checked.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ARC: Enable RRC
PSx
[
]
*
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
c
ARC: V> RRC
PSx
[
*
]
&
VA-G
VA-G* √ 3
VB-G
VB-G* √ 3
VC-G
&
>1
-
ARC: V> for
RRC triggered
303 014
&
VC-G* √ 3
+
Σ
&
+
Σ
-
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
[
*
Σ
+
]
1: Low-imped.
grounding
*
Parameter
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
ARC: Enable RRC
PSx
ARC: V> RRC
PSx
set
set
set
set
010
001
001
001
015
024
025
025
015
024
025
025
1
2
3
4
048
076
077
078
085
044
004
064
087
046
006
066
47Z01AGA_EN
47Z11AGA_EN
3-189
3-280
Voltage monitoring for RRC
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
If the starting conditions for rapid reclosing drop out during operative time 1, the RRC
timer stage tRRC is started. After the timer stage has elapsed, the P437checks to
determine whether the voltages measured by distance protection were greater than or
equal to the set threshold value (A R C : V > R R C P S x ) during the last 100 ms. If this
was the case, then a close request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function
(ASC). The ASC response depends on whether the conditions for a single- or three-pole
HSR are satisfied.
If the conditions for a single-pole HSR are satisfied, then a close command is issued
immediately.
If the conditions for a three-pole HSR or TDR were satisfied, the ASC checks to
determine whether reclosing can occur. If the ASC decision is positive, a close enable
and then a close command are issued. If reclosing is not permitted, there is a final trip.
If the ASC is disabled or deactivated or if its decisions are to be ignored, then the close
request is immediately acknowledged and a close command is issued, even in the case
of a three-pole trip.
If it is determined after timer stage tRRC has elapsed that the voltages were not greater or
equal to the set threshold (A R C : V > R R C P S x ), then the ARC cycle is continued by
the HSR or TDR.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-281
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Trip signal
1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
MAIN: Trip signal
1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
47Z1066A_EN
3-190
3-282
Signal flow for rapid reclosure (RRC)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.4 Secondary Fault Treatment
If a repeat trip occurs in another phase during the dead time, then this is referred to as a
secondary fault and results in three-pole tripping. This is carried out as a three-pole trip.
The response of the ARC to a secondary fault is a function of whether the secondary
fault occurs during a high-speed reclosure (HSR), a time-delay reclosure (TDR) or a
rapid reclosure (RRC).
Secondary fault treatment
during HSR
If a secondary fault occurs during an HSR, then the response is a function of the HSR
operating mode that has been set.
ARC: HSR oper. mode 1-pole
If a trip starts during the single-pole dead time in a different phase than at the
beginning of the ARC cycle, then tripping is three-pole (final trip) and the reclaim time
is started. Reclosing does not occur.
If starting or a trip occurs again during the single-pole dead time in the same phase
as at the beginning of the ARC cycle, the ARC cycle is continued. The ARC cycle is
only terminated if the starting signal or the trip are still present immediately before the
close command is issued.
If a secondary fault occurs in the same phase while the maximum dead time is
elapsing, the ARC cycle is terminated normally. If a secondary fault occurs in a
different phase, there is a three-pole trip transfer and the reclaim time is started.
ARC: HSR oper. mode 1-/3-pole
If a starting signal or a trip occurs during the course of the single-pole dead time in
the same phase as at the beginning of the ARC cycle, the ARC cycle is continued.
The ARC cycle is only terminated if a starting signal or trip is still present immediately
before the close command is issued.
If a secondary fault occurs during the single-pole dead time, then operative time 1 is
started. The single-pole dead time continues. If the secondary fault's starting
condition and trip drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing, the P437 checks to
determine whether the fault change occurred during the course of the time set at
A R C : tD i s c r i m . P S x . P S x , which is started with the single-pole dead time. If this
is the case, a switch is made to the three-pole dead time, and the ARC cycle is
terminated as in the case of a three-pole trip. If the fault change occurred after the
tDiscrim. time had elapsed, then final tripping occurs and the reclaim time is started.
A secondary fault during the course of the three-pole dead time is ignored.
Termination of the ARC cycle only occurs if the starting signal or trip have not yet
dropped out immediately before the close command is issued.
If a secondary fault occurs while the maximum dead time is elapsing, then a threepole trip transfer occurs. The dead time and checking by the ASC function continue.
If the ASC decision is that reclosing is permissible, a close command is issued.
ARC: HSR oper. mode 3-pole
In this HSR operating mode, a secondary fault is ignored. The ARC cycle is only
terminated if a starting signal or a trip is still present immediately before the close
command is issued.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-283
3 Operation
(continued)
Secondary fault treatment
during TDR
A secondary fault is ignored. The ARC cycle is only terminated if a starting signal or trip
is still present immediately before the close command is issued.
Secondary fault treatment
during RRC
Rapid reclosing is blocked in the event of a secondary fault.
3.27.5 Parallel Blocking
If a second protection device is operating in parallel with the P437, then the trip from this
protection device can be integrated into the ARC functional sequence – provided that the
binary signal inputs have been configured appropriately. The effect exercised by the trip
of the parallel protection device is a function of whether it intervenes in a high-speed
reclosure (HSR), a time-delay reclosure (TDR), or a rapid reclosure (RRC). In addition,
the A R C : P a r a l l e l tr i p P S x setting is a determining factor (see Figure 3-195).
Parallel blocking with HSR
The trip of an external protection device may intervene in the HSR functional sequence
depending on the set HSR operating mode and the A R C : P a r a l l e l tr i p P S x setting.
ARC: HSR oper. mode PSx 1-pole
„
ARC: P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Without function
The trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the functional
sequence.
„
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Parallel blocking without initiation
If the P437 has not started, the trip of the external protection device is ignored. If
a trip decision has been reached in the P437, then while the operative times and
the single-pole or maximum dead time are elapsing the P437 checks to determine
whether the trip of the external protection device is in the same phase as the P437
trip. If this is the case, then the ARC cycle is continued. If a trip decision of the
external protection device has been reached in another phase, then the ARC cycle
is terminated and the reclaim time is started.
„
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Parallel blocking with initiation
If the setting at A R C : H S R o p e r . m o d e 2 P S x is Start-dependent, and if the
P437 has started, then the trip of the external protection device does not intervene
in the HSR functional sequence. If the P437 has not started, then the trips of the
external protection device are used as the criterion for a single-pole HSR,
irrespective of the Start-dependent setting. If the setting is Trip-dependent, the
ARC cycle is started by the trip of the external protection device and proceeds
normally in the event that the P437 does not reach a trip decision or not in the
same phase. However, if a trip decision has been reached by the P437 in a
different phase from that of the external protection device, then the reclaim time is
started and three-pole tripping occurs (final trip). Reclosing does not occur.
If the trip of an external protection device occurs while the dead time is elapsing,
the process is the same as was described for secondary fault treatment.
3-284
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
ARC: HSR oper. mode PSx 1-/3-pole
„
ARC: P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Without function
The trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the functional
sequence.
„
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Parallel blocking without initiation
If the P437 has not started, the trip of the external protection device is ignored.
If a single-pole trip decision has been reached in the P437, then while operative
time 1 and the time set at A W E : tD i s c r i m . P S x are elapsing the P437 checks
to determine whether the trip of the external protection device is in the same
phase as the P437 trip. If this is the case, then the single-pole ARC cycle is
continued. If a trip decision of the external protection device has been reached in
another phase while operative time 1 was elapsing, then the three-pole dead time
is started and the ARC cycle is terminated as is the case with a three-pole HSR. If
the trip of the external protection device occurs while time tDiscrim. is elapsing,
then a switch is made to the three-pole dead time, and the ARC cycle is continued
as with a three-pole trip. If the trip of the external protection device occurs after
the time set at A R C : tD i s c r i m . P S x has elapsed, then final three-pole tripping
occurs, the ARC cycle is terminated, and the reclaim time is started.
If a single-pole HSR with maximum dead time is carried out, then timer stage
tDiscrim. is started at the same time as the maximum dead time. The P437 checks
to determine whether, while operative time 2 or timer stage tDiscrim. was elapsing,
a trip of the external protection device has occurred in the same phase as in the
P437. If this is the case, then the ARC cycle is continued. If the external
protection device reaches a trip decision in a different phase, then there is a threepole trip transfer and the ARC cycle is continued. If the trip of the external
protection device occurs after time tDiscrim. has elapsed, then three-pole final
tripping occurs and the reclaim time is started.
„
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Parallel blocking with initiation
If the setting at A R C : H S R o p e r . m o d e 2 P S x is Start-dependent, and if the
P437 has started, then the trip of the external protection device does not intervene
in the HSR functional sequence. If the P437 has not started, then the trips of the
external protection device are used as the criterion for a single- or three-pole HSR,
irrespective of the Start-dependent setting. If the setting is Trip-dependent, the
ARC cycle is started by the trip of the external protection device and proceeds
normally if the P437 does not reach a trip decision or has reached a trip decision
in the same phase. However, if the P437 has reached a trip decision in a different
phase from that of the external protection device, then three-pole tripping occurs
(3-pole transfer). The ARC cycle is terminated as with a three-pole HSR.
If the trip of an external protection device occurs while the dead time is elapsing,
the process is the same as was described for secondary fault treatment.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-285
3 Operation
(continued)
ARC: HSR oper. mode PSx 3-pole
„
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Without function
The trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the functional
sequence.
„
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Parallel blocking without initiation
The trip of the parallel protection device does not intervene in the HSR functional
sequence.
„
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Parallel blocking with initiation
As a result of the trip of the external protection device, the ARC cycle is started
and proceeds normally.
Parallel blocking for TDR
or RRC
The trip of the external protection device may intervene in the TDR or RRC functional
sequence depending on the setting of the A R C : P a r a l l e l tr i p P S x parameter.
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Without function
The trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the functional
sequence.
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Parallel blocking without initiation
The trip of the parallel protection device does not intervene in the TDR or RRC
functional sequence.
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Parallel blocking with initiation
The trip of the external protection device starts a TDR or RRC. The sequence is the
same as with initiation by the P437.
3-286
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.6 Zone Extension
Zone extension (ZE) of impedance zone 1 of the distance protection function is only
initiated by the ARC if protective signaling is not ready.
HSR and TDR activate different zone extension factors.
Zone extension by kze HSR
Zone extension by the zone extension factor kze HSR is affected by the following
settings:
Setting for A R C : Z o n e e x t . f . H S R P S x = ‘Ye'
The measuring range is extended when the ARC is ready and while operative times 1
and 2 are elapsing.
Setting for A R C : Z o n e e x t . d u r . R C P S x
„
'Following HSR'
The measuring range is extended while the close command time is elapsing if the
close command is issued by a non-synchronism-checked HSR. There is no zone
extension with a rapid reclosure (RRC).
„
'Always'
The measuring range is extended while the close command time is elapsing..
How the close command is triggered is not important.
If the two parameters are set for No or Without, respectively, then there is no zone
extension.
Zone extension by kze TDR
The measuring range of impedance zone 1 is extended by the zone extension factor
kze HSR after a close command is issued by the TDR function, as long as another TDR is
permitted and the setting for A R C : Z o n e e x t . f . T D R P S x is 'Yes'. Zone extension
is canceled during the course of the TDR dead time. If the setting is No, there is no zone
extension.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-287
3 Operation
(continued)
3-191
3-288
Zone extension by ARC
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.7 Control Using External Auto-Reclosing Control (ARC)
If an external ARC is used in place of the ARC function implemented in the P437, the
operating mode of the external ARC is defined for the P437 by selecting the appropriate
setting at A R C : O p . m o d e e x t A R C P S x . Control of the zone extension factor kze
HSR and enabling of the distance protection trip in zone 1 with extended reach is
handled in the P437 in accordance with this setting.
The measuring range is only extended if protective signaling is not ready, internal ARC is
disabled, and the binary signal input configured for A R C : E n a b l e e x t . A R C E X T is
triggered. If the setting at A R C : Op . m o d e e x t A R C P S x is 1-pole, trip-depend.,
there must also be a single-pole starting signal, or in the case of a two-pole starting
signal the setting at D IS T : T r i p z o n e 1 P P P S x must be 1-pole leading phase or
1-pole trailing phase, so that the zone extension factor kze HSR is activated.
If the setting at A R C : O p . m o d e e x t A R C P S x is 1-pole, trip-depend., then the
distance protection trip with extended reach is only enabled if the trip is single-pole.
ARC: Enable
dist. trip Z1ze
3-192
Control with external ARC
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-289
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.8 General control functions
Monitoring the receive
signals of protective
signaling
The user can specify whether there will be intervention in the ARC sequence when a
signal is received by protective signaling. If this is desired, then the ARC cycle is
continued in different ways depending on the number of receive signals that are received
by the P437 while operative time 1 or the single- or three-pole dead times are elapsing.
At the end of the dead time, the P437 checks to determine whether protective signaling
has received one signal while the above-mentioned times are elapsing. If this is the
case, then the HSR is terminated normally. If protective signaling receives no signal or
more than one signal, the HSR is terminated as if the fault had been cleared during
operative time 2. This means that even with single-pole starting signals or trips reclosing
is preceded by a synchronism check by ASC.
3-193
3-290
Monitoring the receive signals of protective signaling
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Signal A R C : E x t. 1p
trip perm.
If ARC is ready or if one of the operative times is elapsing, the P437 will generate the
following signal: A R C : E x t. 1p tri p perm.
3-194
Signal A R C : E x t . 1 p t r i p p e r m .
Switch to maximum dead
time via binary signal input
If the binary signal input configured for A R C : 3 p tr i p tr a n s fe r E X T is triggered
while the single-pole or three-pole dead time is elapsing, the P437 switches to the
maximum dead time. The ARC cycle will then be terminated as if starting or trip signals
had dropped out during operative time 2.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-291
3 Operation
(continued)
3-195
3-292
ARC sequence control
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.9 Counters
The following ARC signals are counted:
Number of single-pole high-speed reclosures, pole-selectively.
Number of three-pole high-speed reclosures.
Number of time-delay reclosures.
The counters can be reset as a group (except at the address at which they are
displayed).
3-196
ARC counters
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-293
3 Operation
(continued)
3.28 Automatic Synchronism Check (Function Group ASC)
The automatic synchronism check (ASC) function allows the device to verify that before
a close or reclose command is issued synchronism exists between system sections that
are to be synchronized (paralleled) or whether one of the system sections is
de-energized. In order to check for synchronism, two voltages – generally the voltages
on the line and busbar sides – are compared for differences in frequency, angle, and
voltage. Connecting the reference voltage transformer will determine which of the
system sections will provide the reference voltage (e.g. the line side or the busbar side).
At the P437 the measurement loop must be set according to the connected reference
voltage (setting A S C : M e a s u r e m e n t l o o p P S x ) so that the correct measurement
loop voltage is selected for the comparison. In the connection example shown in the
section entitled 'Conditioning the Measured Variables', the busbar voltage VA-B is the
reference voltage.
The reference voltage Vref and the voltage from the corresponding measuring loop are
stored as event data.
ASC: Volt. sel.
meas.loop
[004 088]
Vref
ASC: Voltage Vref
[004 087]
47Z1084A_EN
47z0125A
3-197
3-294
Selecting the measurement loop
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling and enabling the
ASC function
The activation of the function is enabled generally (independently of parameter subsets)
via A S C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset
via ASC: E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, ASC can be
disabled or enabled via setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary
signal inputs. The local control panel or operating program and the binary signal inputs
have equal status in this regard. If only the A S C : E n a b l e E X T function is assigned
to a binary signal input, then ASC will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal
and disabled by a negative edge. If only the A S C : D i s a b l e E X T function has been
assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
If the ASC function is disabled an uncontrolled activation enable will always be issued.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-295
3 Operation
(continued)
3-198
3-296
Enable/disable the automatic synchronism check.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
ASC readiness and
blocking
The ASC function is ready if it is activated and enabled and if there is no blocking.
Blocking can for example be caused by a voltage transformer m.c.b. trip, via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The user can specify whether closing or
reclosing will always be enabled or not (reclosure with or without a check) when the ASC
function is blocked.
The user can also specify separately for high-speed reclosures (HSR) and time-delayed
reclosures (TDR) whether reclosure will be carried out with or without a check.
The single-pole high speed reclosure is always without a check
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-297
3 Operation
(continued)
3-199
3-298
ASC readiness and blocking
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Close request
The ASC function can be triggered by ARC from the integrated local control panel, the
operating program or an appropriately configured binary signal input
(A S C : C l o s e r e q u e s t E X T ). Close requests from the local control panel or the
binary signal input are only accepted if no ARC cycle is running.
3-200
Close request
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-299
3 Operation
(continued)
The ASC operative time is started with the close request. If the close enable is issued
before the ASC operative time has elapsing, the close command is issued. Otherwise
an A S C : C l o s e r e j e c ti o n signal is generated for 100 ms.
3-201
3-300
Signal flow for a close enable and a close rejection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
ASC operating modes
The criteria for a close enable are determined by the ASC operating mode setting.
The following operating mode settings are possible:
Voltage-checked
Synchronism-checked
Voltage/synchronism-checked
Continuous synchronism
check
Synchronism checks, e.g. monitoring of voltage and/or synchronism requirements, are
carried out continuously during the duration of the set ASC operative time. The following
signals are updated according to their current states:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
Close
Close
Close
Close
enable
enable,volt.ch
enable,sync.ch
rejection
The ASC maximum operative time setting is 6000s (100 minutes).
Extended settings for the
close enable conditions
The close enable conditions can be set for auto-reclose control and manual close
command. This makes it possible to select different operating modes as well as different
tolerance ranges.
Auto-reclose control
ASC: AR op. mode
ASC: AR with tCB
ASC: AR Op.mode v-chk.
ASC: AR V> volt.check
ASC: AR V< volt.check
ASC: AR tmin v-check
ASC: AR V> sync.check
ASC: AR delta Vmax
ASC: AR delta f max
ASC: AR delta phi max
ASC: AR tmin sync.chk
Close enable conditions for
Manual close command
PSx
ASC: MC op. mode
PSx
ASC: MC with tCB
PSx
ASC: MC op.mode v-chk.
PSx
ASC: MC V> volt.check
PSx
ASC: MC V< volt.check
PSx
ASC: MC tmin v-check
PSx
ASC: MC V> sync.check
PSx
ASC: MC delta Vmax
PSx
ASC: MC delta f max
PSx
ASC: MC delta phi max
PSx
ASC: MC tmin sync.chk
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
The automatic reclosure setting parameters become active when a close request is
issued by the integrated ARC (for a RRC, HSR or TDR) or by a close request from an
external ARC device sent to the binary signal input function
ASC: AR close request EXT.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-301
3 Operation
(continued)
Considering the
CB close time
In slightly asynchronous power systems the new setting A S C : A R w i th tC B P S x =
'Yes' or A S C : M C w i t h t C B P S x = 'Yes' makes it possible to consider the circuit
breaker close time with the issuing of a close command.
The condition for "slightly asynchronous power systems" is given if the difference in
frequencies lies within the range of 10 mHz < Δf < Δfmax. If this condition and the
voltage condition (ΔV < ΔVmax) are met then the next point in time is continuously
calculated at which the phasors for Vref and the corresponding voltage of the three-phase
system are in phase (e.g. difference in voltage phase angles approaches 0°). The close
command, allowing for the set CB close time M A IN : tC B ,c l os e, is then issued
sooner.
yes
Close with tCB
no
synchronous mode, close if:
ΔV < ΔVmax
Δf < Δfmax
Δϕ < Δϕmax
for tmin,synchr
within operative time
yes
Δf < 10 mHz
no
asynchronous mode,
close if:
ΔV < ΔVmax
Δf < Δfmax
Raise close command so that
closing takes place at Δϕ = 0
(taking CB close time and
internal delays into account)
within operative time
synchronous mode, close if:
ΔV < ΔVmax
Δϕ < Δϕmax
for tmin,synchr
within operative time
47Z1085B_EN
3-202
3-302
Functional sequence and close conditions for the Synchronism check
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage-checked
The synchronism-checked close enable can be bypassed using the voltage-checked
close enable without affecting the former. This allows closing if at least one side is
voltage-free/de-energized. To detect whether voltage is present or not on either side, the
three phase-to-ground voltages and the reference voltage Vref are monitored to
determine whether they exceed or fall below the set threshold values:
ASC: AR V> volt.check PSx
ASC: AR V< volt.check PSx
ASC: MC V> volt.check
ASC: MC V< volt.check
PSx
PSx
Depending on the operating mode selected for the voltage check, all three phase-toground voltages need to exceed or fall below the set value in order to meet the condition
for voltage-checked closing. If the conditions corresponding to the set operating mode
for the voltage-checked synchronism check are met for the duration of the set minimum
time (A S C : tm i n v o l t. c h e c k ) then the close enable is issued.
ASC: AR tmin v-check
PSx
ASC: MC tmin v-check
PSx
The following operating modes for voltage checking can be selected separately for each
parameter subset:
Vref but not V
V but not Vref
Not V and not Vref
Not V or not Vref
Not V and Vref and Z1
Not V and Vref or V and not Vref
The operating mode before last includes a further requirement, which specifies that the
close request is issued during an ARC cycle and the cause of the fault for the previous
protective trip lies inside the reach of impedance zone 1.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-303
3 Operation
(continued)
ASC: Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
ASC: Active
305 003
ASC: AR op. mode
PSx
[
*
]
1: Voltagechecked
ASC: AR V>
C volt.check PSx
[
*
]
3: Volt.&sync.checked
VA-G
VA-G*√3
VB-G
VB-G*√3
VC-G
VC-G*√3
ASC: AR V<
C volt.check PSx
[
*
]
VA-G*√3
VB-G*√3
VC-G*√3
ASC: Select.
meas.loop PG
ASC: AR tmin
v-check PSx
[
*
]
ASC: AR Op.mode
v-chk.PSx
[
*
]
1
305 008
2
Vref
VA-G*√3
t
0
1
1
2
2
1 ... 2
3
4
5
6
DIST: Dist.
Decis.Z1 stored
1: Vref but not V
2: V but not Vref
3: Not V and not
Vref
4: Not V or not
Vref
5: Vref & Z1 but
not V
6: N V&Vref or V&
n Vref
303 565
ASC: Close
enable,volt.ch
[ 037 085 ]
1
100ms
ARC: Cycle
running
[ 037 000 ]
ASC: Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
1
100ms
ARC: HSR A
303 008
ARC: HSR B
303 009
ARC: HSR C
303 010
ASC: Close
enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ]
3-203
3-304
Parameter ASC: AR op. mode ASC: AR V>
PSx
volt.check PSx
set 1
018 025
026 017
set 2
018 026
077 043
set 3
018 027
078 043
set 4
018 028
079 043
ASC: AR V<
volt.check PSx
018 017
077 040
078 040
079 040
ASC: AR op.mode
v-chk.PSx
018 029
018 030
018 031
018 032
ASC: AR tmin
v-check PSx
018 018
077 041
078 041
079 041
Voltage-checked close enable for autoreclose control
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-204
Voltage-checked close enable for manual close control
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-305
3 Operation
(continued)
Synchronism-checked
Before a close enable is issued, the ASC checks the voltages for synchronism.
Synchronism is recognized if the following conditions are met simultaneously:
The three phase voltages and the reference voltage must exceed the set threshold
value:
ASC: AR V> sync.check
PSx
ASC: MC V> sync.check PSx
When with a three-phase voltage the setting of M A IN : N e u tr a l - p o i n t tr e a t. is
'Low-imped. grounding' both the phase-to-ground and the phase-to-phase voltages
are checked. If the setting is 'Isol./res.w.start. (or w/o st.)PG' only the phase-to-phase
voltages are checked.
The difference in magnitude between measuring voltage and reference voltage must
not exceed the set threshold value:
ASC: AR delta Vmax
PSx
ASC: MC delta Vmax
PSx
The frequency difference between measuring voltage and reference voltage must not
exceed the set threshold value:
ASC: AR delta f max
PSx
ASC: MC delta f max
PSx
The angle difference between measuring voltage and reference voltage must not
exceed the set threshold value:
ASC: AR delta phi max
PSx
ASC: MC delta phi max
PSx
In these comparisons the set offset angle A S C : P h i o ffs e t is taken into account.
If these conditions are met for the set time A S C : tm i n s y n c . c h e c k , then a close
enable is issued. The ASC operating time for determination of differences in voltage,
angle, and frequency is approximately 100 ms.
The voltage magnitude difference, angle difference, and frequency difference are stored
as measured synchronism data at the time the close enable is issued. In the event of
another close request, they are automatically overwritten by the new data.
3-306
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
ASC: Active
305 003
*
ASC: AR op. mode
PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
[
*
]
1: Low-imped.
grounding
1: Voltagechecked
2: Sync.-checked
3: Volt./sync.checked
Parameter
set
set
set
set
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
010 048
001 076
001 077
001 078
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
ASC: AR delta
Vmax
PSx
018 012
077 036
078 036
079 036
ASC: AR op. mode ASC: Phi offset
PSx
PSx
018 025
018 034
018 026
077 042
018 027
078 042
018 028
079 042
ASC: AR delta
f max PSx
018 014
077 038
078 038
079 038
ASC: AR delta
phi max PSx
018 013
077 037
078 037
079 037
ASC: AR V>
sync.check PSx
018 011
077 035
078 035
079 035
ASC: AR tmin
sync.chk PSx
018 015
077 039
078 039
079 039
ASC: AR V>
sync.check PSx
[ * ]
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
ASC: Select
meas.loop PG
305 008
Vref
ASC: AR tmin
sync.chk PSx
[ * ]
Vref
ASC: Close
enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ]
ASC: Test
305 004
ASC: AR delta
Vmax
PSx
[ * ]
ASC: Volt. sel.
meas.loop
[ 004 088 ]
ASC: Phi offset
PSx
[ * ]
ASC: Volt. magn.
diff.
[ 004 091 ]
Vmax
ASC: Frequ.
difference
[ 004 090 ]
ASC: AR delta
f max PSx
[ * ]
ASC: Angle
difference
[ 004 089 ]
ASC: AR delta
phi max PSx
[ * ]
corr
47Z1112A_EN
3-205
Synchronism-checked close enable for autoreclose control
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-307
3 Operation
(continued)
ASC: Active
305 003
*
ASC: MC op. mode
PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
[
*
]
1: Low-imped.
grounding
1: Voltagechecked
2: Sync.-checked
3: Volt./sync.checked
Parameter
set
set
set
set
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
010 048
001 076
001 077
001 078
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
ASC: MC delta
Vmax
PSx
000 080
000 081
000 082
000 083
ASC: MC op. mode ASC: Phi offset
PS
PSx
000 056
018 034
000 057
077 042
000 058
078 042
000 059
079 042
ASC: MC delta
f max PSx
000 084
000 086
000 087
000 088
ASC: MC delta
phi max PSx
000 089
000 091
000 092
000 093
ASC: MC V>
sync.check PSx
000 052
000 053
000 054
000 055
ASC: MC tmin
sync.chk PSx
000 098
000 099
000 100
000 101
ASC: MC V>
sync.check PSx
[ * ]
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
ASC: Select
meas.loop PG
305 008
Vref
ASC: MC tmin
sync.chk PSx
[ * ]
Vref
ASC: Close
enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ]
ASC: Test
305 004
ASC: MC delta
Vmax
PSx
[ * ]
ASC: Volt. sel.
meas.loop
[ 004 088 ]
ASC: Phi offset
PSx
[ * ]
ASC: Volt. magn.
diff.
[ 004 091 ]
Vmax
ASC: Frequ.
difference
[ 004 090 ]
ASC: MC delta
f max PSx
[ * ]
ASC: Angle
difference
[ 004 089 ]
ASC: MC delta
phi max PSx
[ * ]
corr
47Z1113A_EN
3-206
3-308
Synchronism-checked close enable for manual close control
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage/synchronismchecked
If this setting has been selected, then the close enable is issued if the conditions for
voltage- or synchronism-checked closing are met.
3-207
ASC sequence control
Testing the ASC function
For test purposes a close request can be issued from the integrated local control panel,
the operating program or an appropriately configured binary signal input (see
Figure 3-200). The sequence is similar to the manual close request from the integrated
local control panel but there is no close command and it is not counted.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-309
3 Operation
(continued)
ASC counters
The following ASC signals are counted:
Number of reclosures after a close request from the integrated local control panel, the
operating program or a binary signal input.
Number of close requests
Number of close rejections
The counters can be reset individually (at the address at which they are displayed) or as
a group.
ASC: Manual
close request
305 000
MAIN: Close
command
[ 037 009 ]
ASC: Gen.
close request
S1 1
+
R1
R
+
306 012
ARC: No. RC aft.
man.clos
[ 004 009 ]
ARC: No. close
requests
[ 009 033 ]
R
ASC: Close
rejection
[ 037 086 ]
+
R
ARC: No. close
rejections
[ 009 034 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
ASC: Reset
counters EXT
[ 006 074 ]
ASC: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 089 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
3-208
3-310
ASC counters
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.29 Ground fault (short-circuit) protection (Function Group GFSC)
In the event of single-phase high-resistance faults, the measured fault data are often
insufficient for fault detection and selective clearing by the distance protection function.
To cover for this situation, ‘ground fault (short-circuit) protection’ is integrated into the
protection device as a highly sensitive backup protection function. Consequently, ground
fault (short-circuit) protection is operating in parallel with and independently of distance
protection.
Disabling or enabling
ground fault (short-circuit)
protection
The activation of the function is enabled generally (independently of parameter subsets)
via GFSC: G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset
via G F S C : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, the GFSC
protection can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters or through appropriately
configured binary signal inputs. The local control panel or operating program and the
binary signal inputs have equal status in this regard. If only the GF S C : E n a b l e E X T
function is assigned to a binary signal input, then the GFSC protection is enabled by a
positive edge of the input signal and it is disabled by a negative edge. If only the
GFSC: E n a b l e E X T function is assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this
input will have no effect.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-311
3 Operation
(continued)
GFSC: General
enable USER
[ 018 060 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
GFSC: Enable
PSx
[
*
]
0
1
GFSC: Enabled
[ 038 094 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP: Fct. assign.
U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
Ux1
Ux2
Ux3
Uxx
Address
Address
039 095
039 096
GFSC: Enable EXT
[ 039 095 ]
GFSC: Ext.
enabled
[ 039 097 ]
GFSC: Enable
USER
[ 003 138 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
GFSC: Disable
EXT
[ 039 096 ]
GFSC: Ausschalten BED
[ 003 137 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
GFSC: Protection
active
306 001
GFSC: Not ready
[ 039 094 ]
GFSC: Blocked
310 002
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
3-209
3-312
GFSC: Ready
[ 039 093 ]
1
2
3
4
GFSC: Enable
PSx
018 072
018 073
018 074
018 075
47Z1117A_EN
Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection
(for description of blocks: see next figure)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Measured variables for the
GFSC function
Depending on the setting the neutral-displacement voltage used is either the value
calculated by the P437 or the measured value of the neutral-point displacement voltage.
As a value for the calculated neutral-displacement voltage, ground fault (short-circuit)
protection uses measurements of the same phase-to-ground voltages measured by
distance protection. From these voltages the P437 calculates the neutral-displacement
voltage VNG.
With the second option (measured value), it is possible to establish ground fault (shortcircuit) protection (GFSC) and its associated ground fault (short-circuit) protection
signaling (GSCSG) irrespective of the installed system voltage transformers.
As the measured value for the neutral-point displacement voltage, ground fault (shortcircuit) protection (GFSC) uses the neutral-displacement voltage formed externally via
the fourth voltage measuring input, for example the neutral-displacement voltage from
the open delta winding of the voltage transformers (see section "Conditioning of
Measured Variables")
The residual current IN is drawn from a separate transformer in the P437 that is looped
into the phase current transformer neutral or connected to a Holmgreen group.
The connection example shown in the section entitled "Conditioning of Measured
Variables" shows the transformer looped into the current transformer neutral.
Blocking ground fault
(short-circuit) protection
If the calculated value for the neutral-displacement voltage is used then ground fault
(short-circuit) protection is blocked should the signal M C M ON : M eas . c i r c . V faul ty
= 'Yes' is present.
With the second option (measured value) GFSC is not blocked by this signal as an other
measuring circuit is used. The signal M A IN : M .c .b. tr i p V N G E X T is used instead.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-313
3 Operation
(continued)
GFSC: Blocking
EXT
[ 043 068 ]
GFSC: Blocked
310 002
MCMON: Meas.
circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
GFSC: Evaluation
VNG
[ 002 136 ]
1
2
1: calculated
2: measured
MAIN: M.c.b.
trip VNG EXT
[ 002 183 ]
300ms
0
SFMON: M.c.b.
trip VNG
[ 098 132 ]
DIST: Trip signal
[ 036 009 ]
GFSC: Fct.
assign. blocking
[ 006 020 ]
Address
031 039 MAIN: CB open >=1p
036 000
036 000 MAIN: General starting
036 009
036 009 DIST: Trip signal
037 066
037 066 ARC: Dead time 1p running
042 032
042 032 LOGIC: Output 1
.......
....... ..........
042 094
042 094 LOGIC: Output 32
ARC: Dead time 1p
running
[ 037 066 ]
3-210
Description
031 039
47Z1307A_EN
Blocking ground fault (short-circuit) protection
GFSC: Evaluation
VNG
[ 002 136 ]
VN-G
2
1
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
1 ... 2
GFSC: VNG
310 001
1: calculated
2: measured
0.7*Vnom/
GFSC: Voltage
showing
303 953
47Z1115A_EN
3-211
3-314
Selecting the measured variable
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Starting
The digitally filtered fundamental waves of current and voltage are measured.
They are monitored to determine whether they exceed set thresholds (GF S C : IN > and
GF S C : V N G> ). If both thresholds have been exceeded, a settable timer stage
(GF S C : S t a r t . o p e r . d e l a y ) is started. Once the trigger has dropped out, the starting
persists until the settable release delay ( GF S C : S tar t. r el eas . del ay ) has elapsed.
Directional measurement is enabled if the current reaches 70 % of the set threshold
(GF S C : IN > ) and the voltage exceeds the trigger threshold (GF S C : V N G> ).
GFSC: Ready
[ 039 093 ]
GFSC: IN>
[ 018 063 ]
GFSC: IN>
triggered
[ 039 088 ]
IN
GFSC: Direct.
determ.enabl.
[ 043 061 ]
IN / 0.7
GFSC: VNG>
[ 018 062 ]
GFSC: VNG
310 001
GFSC: Start.
oper. delay
[ 018 064 ]
GFSC: VNG>
triggered
[ 039 089 ]
GFSC: Start.
releas. delay
[ 018 065 ]
GFSC: Starting
[ 038 096 ]
GFSC: IN
filtered
303 951
GFSC: VNG
filtered
303 950
47Z1114A_EN
3-212
Starting
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-315
3 Operation
(continued)
Directional tripping
The P437 determines the angle between the residual current and the neutraldisplacement voltage for the direction determination. The measured angle is displayed.
The position of the straight line separating forward and backward directions is
determined with the setting GF S C : A ngl e phi G. A forward or backward-directional
decision results if the following angle conditions are met:
Forward direction:
(90° + ϕG ) ≥ ϕ > (270° + ϕG )
Backward (reverse) direction:
(90° + ϕG ) ≤ ϕ < (270° + ϕG )
where:
ϕ:
Measured angle between the residual current and the neutral-point
displacement voltage
ϕG:
Setting G F S C : A n g l e p h i G
The directional decisions (GF S C : F aul t for w ar d/LS and GF S C : F aul t
b a c k w a r d /B S ) are followed by timer stages GF S C : t1 ( fo r w a r d ) and GF S C : t2
( b a c k w a r d ) . Once the timer stages have elapsed, a trip signal is issued.
3-213
3-316
Directional characteristic Angle phiG corresponds to the setting G F S C : A n g l e p h i G
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Improved directional
measurement
for series-compensated
line applications
Ground fault protection is based on the assumption of inductive zero-sequence source
impedances. In case of series compensated lines with a high compensation degree this
condition may not be fulfilled.
The following figures show the measuring conditions of GFSC for forward and backward
(reverse) short-circuits. Problematic is the measurement of line side faults: Due to the
line side VT, the measured voltage results from the voltage drop caused by the zerosequence current across the (inductive) equivalent source impedance ZS0(fwd) and the
series-capacitance XC0. Depending on whether the source reactance is bigger or smaller
than the series capacitance the voltage is inductive or capacitive versus the zerosequence current. Problems will occur for a high compensation degree (big XC0) and for
strong sources (small XS0(fwd)). The fault location or distance to the fault does not matter
at all.
For backward (reverse) faults, this problem needs not to be considered, as the source
impedance then is always inductive.
Adding a current-proportional voltage to the measured voltage ("cross-polarization") as
follows solved this problem:
(
)
V ( GFSC ) = V meas + jX 0 ⋅I 0 = Z S 0( fwd ) − jX C 0 + jX 0 ⋅I 0
X0 is settable at GF S C : C o m p . R e a c ta n c e X 0 , the recommended setting is X0 =
XC0, so that the same condition as on a normal inductive line is obtained:
V (GFSC ) = Z S 0 ( fwd ) ⋅I 0
The ground fault starting condition VNG> remains using the directly measured neutral
displacement voltage. In order to secure that directional measurement is only done with
a reliably high absolute value of the line-to-line voltage V(GFSC), this value must always
exceed a minimum of 50 mV.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-317
3 Operation
(continued)
1pG faults forward (on the line)
-jXC0
To neg.-sequ.
system neutral
ZL0
Imeas = IN = 1/3 I0
Z S0(fwd)
Vmeas = VNG = - V0 = ( ZS0(fwd) - jXC0) * I0
Via RF
to pos.-sequ. system
Zero-sequence equivalent network and measurands
Backward
Vmeas (capacitive, if Im{ZS0(fwd)} < XC0)
Vmeas (inductive, if Im{ZS0(fwd)} > XC0)
Forward
Typical directional characteristic
(for inductive OHL application)
Imeas = IN = 1/3 I0
Phasor relations (resistances neglected)
47Z11X1A_EN
3-214
3-318
Zero-sequence fault measurands on series compensated lines – faults in forward direction
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
1pG faults backward
To neg.-sequ.
system neutral
-jXC0
ZL0
Imeas = - IN = - 1/3 I0
ZS0(bwd)
Vmeas = VNG = - V0 = ( ZL0 + ZS0(bwd) ) * I0
Via RF
to pos.-sequ. system
Zero-sequence equivalent network and measurands
Imeas
Backward
Vmeas (always inductive!)
Forward
Typical directional characteristic
(for inductive OHL application)
I N = 1 /3 I0
Phasor relations (resistances neglected)
47Z11X2A_EN
3-215
Zero-sequence fault measurands on series compensated lines – faults in backward (reverse) direction
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-319
3 Operation
(continued)
Improved phase selection
In cases with very high fault resistances the neutral displacement voltage is too small to
get a starting of P437 ground fault protection. Also the faulty phase selection based on
distance starting could not be secured in such cases, and so no 1pole trip of ground fault
signalling could be obtained.
To resolve these issues, the following is done:
Faulty phase selection
If neutral overcurrent starting (GFSC IN>) operates, then the relay checks whether the
faulty phase could be determined based on a delta- current measurement (where the
delta is calculated over a 5 cycle period). This delta measurement is only done at the IN>
starting. Its valid result is memorised until the IN> trigger resets.
The phase selection is further depending on the operation of the distance function:
If DIST has identified a multi-phase(-to-ground)fault, then the above phase-selection
is disabled.
If DIST has identified a single phase-to-ground fault, then this phase is used.
These signals are used to provide 1-pole tripping of ground fault signaling function
(GSCSG) if no phase selection by distance starting is available (initiating 1p HSR cycle,
as previously guided by distance starting) and to apply “virtual current polarisation”
technique (see below).
Directional measurement
If sufficient neutral displacement voltage is present (VNG> starting), then GFSC uses
this voltage for directional measurement.
Otherwise, “virtual current polarisation” is applied, i.e. based on the determination of the
faulty phase the relay calculates the polarising voltage as sum of the 2 healthy phase
voltages, e.g. for an AG fault:
Vpol = VBN + VCN
This Vpol is equal to the inverted faulty-phase voltage, so it is clearly high enough to
secure reliable measurement.
Ideally, for VNG = 0 this polarising voltage gets Vpol = VBN + VCN = -VAN where the “-“
sign is automatically taken into consideration in the direction determination.
To provide backwards compatible operation, this method needs to be enabled by user,
setting G F S C : V i r t u a l c u r r e n t p o l . to Yes.
3-320
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
PG
47Z1205A_EN
3-216
GFSC Phase selection and optional virtual current polarisation
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-321
3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage-dependent or
current-dependent tripping
By setting operating mode tS, the user can choose between voltage-dependent or
current-dependent tripping. After the voltage-dependent or current-dependent time has
elapsed, a trip signal is issued either independently of the directional decision or when
there is a directional decision for the forward direction – depending on the setting at
GFSC: Criteria tS active.
Voltage-dependent tripping
Starting of ground fault (short-circuit) protection enables determination of the voltagedependent tripping time. Tripping time tS is calculated as follows.
2s
tA =
1V N −G
10 ⋅
0.6364 ⋅ 1.1 ⋅
Vnom
− 0.2
3
Time-Voltage Characteristic (for Vnom = 100 V)
s
45
40
35
Tripping time
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 V
Voltage ⏐ VN-G⏐
47Z0129A
3-217
3-322
Voltage-time characteristic
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-218
Forming the voltage-dependent trip signal
Current-dependent tripping
Starting of ground fault (short-circuit) protection enables determination of the currentdependent tripping time. The user can select from a large number of characteristics
(see table below). If the current exceeds 1.05 times the set reference current, calculation
of the tripping time begins. A trip signal is issued as a function of the set characteristic.
The tripping characteristics available for selection are shown in figures 3-219 to 3-222.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-323
3 Operation
(continued)
No Tripping
.
Characteristic
Constants
Formula for the
Tripping
Characteristic
k = 0.01...10.00
0 Definite Time
Per IEC 255-3
A
C
t=k
t =k⋅
A
⎛ I
⎜⎜
⎝ Iref
B
⎞
⎟⎟ − 1
⎠
1 Standard Inverse
0.14
0.02
2 Very Inverse
13.50
1.00
3 Extremely Inverse
80.00
2.00
4 Long Time Inverse
120.00
1.00
0.0515
0.0200
0.1140
6 Very Inverse
19.6100
2.0000
0.4910
7 Extremely Inverse
28.2000
2.0000
0.1217
Per IEEE C37.112
⎞
⎛
⎟
⎜
⎟
⎜
A
⎟
t = k ⋅⎜
+
C
B
⎟
⎜⎛ I ⎞
⎟⎟ − 1
⎟⎟
⎜⎜ ⎜⎜
⎠
⎝ ⎝ Iref ⎠
5 Moderately Inverse
Per ANSI
⎞
⎛
⎟
⎜
⎟
⎜
A
⎟
t = k ⋅⎜
+
C
B
⎟
⎜⎛ I ⎞
⎟⎟ − 1
⎟⎟
⎜⎜ ⎜⎜
⎠
⎝ ⎝ Iref ⎠
8 Normally Inverse
8.9341
2.0938 0.17966
9 Short Time Inverse
0.2663
1.2969 0.03393
10 Long Time Inverse
5.6143
1.0000 2.18592
11 RI-Type Inverse
t =k⋅
1
0.339 −
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse
3-324
B
0.236
⎛ I ⎞
⎜
⎟
⎝ Iref ⎠
⎛
I
t = k ⋅ ⎜⎜ 5.8 − 1.35 ⋅ ln
I
ref
⎝
⎞
⎟⎟
⎠
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
IEC 255-3, Standard Inverse
IEC 255-3, Very Inverse
1000
1000
100
100
k=10
10
t/s
k=1
10
k=10
1
k=1
t/s
1
k=0.1
0.1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.01
0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50K1A
Characteristic No. 1
k=0.01
D5Z50K2A
Characteristic No. 2
IEC 255-3, Extremely Inverse
IEC 255-3, Long-Time Inverse
1000
1000
100
100
10
k=10
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
t/s
1
k=0.1
k=1
0.1
0.1
k=0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
Characteristic No. 3
3-219
k=0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
k=0.01
I/Iref
D5Z50K3A
D5Z50K4A
Characteristic No. 4
Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-325
3 Operation
(continued)
1000
IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse
IEEE C37.112, Moderately
Inverse
1000
100
100
10
10
k=10
k=10
t/s
t/s
1
k=1
0,1
0,01
k=0,1
k=0,01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50K5B
Characteristic No. 5
k=0.01
D5Z50K6B
Characteristic No. 6
IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse
1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
0.01
k=0.1
k=0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50K7B
Characteristic No. 7
3-220
3-326
Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
ANSI, Short-Time Inverse
ANSI, Normally Inverse
1000
1000
100
100
10
10
t/s
k=10
t/s
1
1
k=10
k=1
0.1
0.1
k=1
k=0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
k=0.01
0.01
k=0.1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50K8B
Characteristic No. 8
D5Z50K9B
Characteristic No. 9
ANSI, Long-Time Inverse
1000
100
k=10
10
t/s
k=1
1
k=0.1
0.1
k=0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50KAB
Characteristic No. 10
3-221
Tripping characteristics as per ANSI
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-327
3 Operation
(continued)
RI-Type Inverse
RXIDG-Type Inverse
1000
1000
100
100
k=10
k=10
10
10
t/s
k=1
1
t/s
k=1
1
k=0.1
0.1
k=0.1
0.1
k=0.01
0.01
I/Iref
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
3-328
I/Iref
D5Z50KBA
Characteristic No. 11
3-222
k=0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
D5Z50KCA
Characteristic No. 12
RI-type inverse and RXIDG-type inverse tripping characteristics
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-223
Forming the current-dependent trip signal
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-329
3 Operation
(continued)
Non-directional tripping
Starting of ground fault (short-circuit) protection starts settable timer stage t3. Once t3
and tS have elapsed, a trip signal is issued by ground fault (short-circuit) protection.
3-224
Forming the trip signal
Note: After timer stage t1 or t2 has elapsed, a trip signal is issued and remains present until the starting drops off – even if the direction
decision changes or is reset. This latching is not shown in the diagram.
3-330
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Counters
The trip signals issued by ground fault (short-circuit) protection are counted. The counter
can be reset either at the counter address or by a general reset action.
GFSC: Trip signal
[ 039 092 ]
+
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
3-225
GFSC: No. of trip
signals
[ 009 054 ]
Counting the trip signals
Monitoring the measured
variables
If only one of the two triggers has responded (IN> or VNG>), and if at least one of the
phase-to-ground voltages exceeds 0.7 Vnom/√3, a signal will be issued after 10 s.
3-226
Monitoring the measured variables
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-331
3 Operation
(continued)
3.30 Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection Signaling (Function Group GSCSG)
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is equipped with a ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling function so that selective instantaneous tripping will be possible.
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling operates in parallel with and
independently of the protective signaling function of distance protection. Only when a
common communication channel is used is it necessary to block the protective signaling
echo. Furthermore, measures for blocking the weak infeed logic of distance protection
protective signaling are implemented in the Signal comp. release operating mode.
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is coordinated with distance protection
protective signaling through appropriate time delays.
Disabling or enabling
ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling
The activation of the function is enabled generally (independently of parameter subsets)
via G S C S G : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter
subset via G S C S G : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated,
ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The local control
panel or operating program and the binary signal inputs have equal status in this regard.
If only the function G S C S G : E n a b l e E X T is assigned to a binary signal input, then
ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is enabled by a positive edge of the input
signal and it is disabled by a negative edge. If only the function
GSCSG: D i s a b l e E X T is assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input
will have no effect.
3-332
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-227
Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-333
3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling, enabling, and
readiness of ground fault
(short-circuit) protection
signaling
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is ready if the following conditions are
satisfied:
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is enabled.
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is ready.
There is no external blocking.
No fault has been detected in the communication channel.
None of the conditions selected with GS C S G: F c t.a s s i g n . b l o c k i n g has been
detected.
External blocking is carried out either via a binary signal input configured for
GS C S G: B l oc k i ng E X T or via a binary signal input configured for
P S I G : B l o c k i n g E X T , depending on the operating mode setting for the
communication channel.
The fault signal of the external signal transmission device can be either connected to a
binary signal input, configured for GS C S G: T e l e c o m . fa u l ty E X T or to a binary
signal input, configured for P S I G : T e l e c o m . f a u l t y E X T depending on the
operating mode setting for the communication channel.
The condition for blocking the ground fault protection scheme logic is user settable at
GS C S G: F c t.as s i gn. bl oc k i ng because of sometimes conflicting application
restraints. Some considerations about the various blocking conditions are given below:
Blocking with CB auxiliary contacts:
If distance starting resets, but the trip signal is still present (e.g. because of the presence
of parallel or transfer trip signals), then the start of the 1-pole dead time of internal
autoreclosing is delayed. In order to prevent a 3-pole trip decision from GSCSG now (as
phase selection is no longer possible), GSCSG needs to be blocked by using the CB’s
auxiliary contacts.
No instant blocking with 1-pole distance trip:
If one (strong infeed) end issues a fast zone 1 distance 1-pole trip, then previously
GSCSG was blocked almost immediately. At the remote (weak infeed) end only GFSC
senses the fault. In order to allow a fast tripping of GSCSG at the remote end under this
condition, the function must remain active at the strong infeed end as long as possible,
i.e. until a "CB open" condition is signaled.
Comm. link fault signal
The status signal GS C S G: T el ec om . faul ty is available in conjunction with the
implementation of the protective interface.
This signal is set by the logic binary function GS C S G: T el ec om . faul ty E X T as
well as by C OM M 3 : C o m m u n i c a ti o n s fa u l t if the parameter
C OM M 3 : S i g .a s g . c o m m .fa u l t has been set accordingly.
3-334
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
GSCSG: Not ready
MAIN: Protection
active
[ 043 058 ]
306 001
GSCSG: Enabled
[ 023 070 ]
GFSC: Not ready
[ 039 094 ]
GSCSG: Channel
mode
[ 023 078 ]
1
GSCSG: Ready
2
[ 043 057 ]
1: independent
channel
2: common channel
GSCSG: Blocking
EXT
[ 043 052 ]
PSIG: Blocking
EXT
[ 036 049 ]
SFMON: Telecom
faulty/GFSIG
[ 098 027 ]
GSCSG: Telecom
faulty EXT
[ 043 053 ]
PSIG: Telecom
faulty EXT
[ 004 064 ]
PSIG: Telecom.
faulty
[ 036 060 ]
COMM3: Communications fault
[ 120 043 ]
COMM3: Sig.asg.
comm.fault
[ 120 034 ]
0
1
2
3
0: None
1: Telecom.
faulty/PSIG
2: Telecom.
faulty/GSCSG
3: Both signals
DIST: Trip signal
[ 036 009 ]
GSCSG: Fct.
assign. blocking
[ 002 180 ]
Address
Description
031 039
031 039 MAIN: CB open >=1p
036 000
036 000 MAIN: General starting
036 009
036 009 DIST: Trip signal
037 066
037 066 ARC: Dead time 1p running
042 032
042 032 LOGIC: Output 1
.......
....... ..........
042 094
042 094 LOGIC: Output 32
ARC: Dead time 1p
running
[ 037 066 ]
3-228
Readiness of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-335
3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping time
If ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is ready, then the tripping time is started
by ground fault (short-circuit) with forward direction.
GSCSG: Tripping
time
[023 075]
GSCSG: Ready
&
[043 057]
GSCSG: Tripping
time elaps.
[043 063]
GFSC: Fault
forward / LS
[039 090]
47Z0134C_EN
3-229
3-336
Tripping time of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Frequency monitoring
Failure of frequency transmission can be signaled to the P437 via appropriately
configured binary signal inputs. Which inputs are activated is determined by the channel
operating mode setting (GS C S G: C h a n n e l m o d e ). If ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling uses a different communication channel than protective signaling,
then the following occurs, as long as frequency monitoring has been enabled: When the
binary signal input configured for GS C S G. F r e q u . m o n . t r i g d . E X T is triggered,
the P437 allows an operate delay of approximately 20 ms to elapse and then generates
a receive signal for 150 ms.
3-230
Frequency monitoring
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-337
3 Operation
(continued)
Transient blocking
If the “fault backward / BS” decision of the ground fault (short-circuit) protection drops
out, ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling will generate a blocking signal for the
set time period (GSCSG: tB l o c k ).
The device will issue the signal G S C S G : T r a n s i e n t b l o c k i n g .
GSCSC: tBlock
[ 023 077 ]
GFSC: Fault
backward / BS
[ 039 091 ]
GSCSC: Transient
blocking
[ 037 254 ]
GFSC: Direct.
determ.enabl.
[ 043 061 ]
3-231
Transient blocking
Operating modes of ground
fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling and
the communication channel
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling can be operated in two different modes:
Signal comparison release or Signal comparison blocking. For the communication
channel, the user can specify whether ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling will
use a different communication channel than distance protection protective signaling or
whether the same channel will be used. If the same communication channel is being
used, then the operating mode settings for protective signaling and ground fault
(short-circuit) protection signaling must be identical. Otherwise there will be a fault signal
(see section entitled 'Protective Signaling').
3-338
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Signal comparison release
scheme
If ground fault (short-circuit) protection detects a fault in the forward direction, a signal is
sent to the remote station without time delay. In the event of a directional change from
backward (reverse) to forward, the send signal is sent after the transient blocking has
elapsed.
The circuit breaker in the remote station is tripped if the following conditions are satisfied:
There is a receive signal.
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection has detected a fault in the forward direction.
The tripping time of the ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling function has
elapsed.
No transient blocking has been set.
If ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling and distance protection protective
signaling use a common communication channel, then blocking of the weak infeed logic
of distance protection protective signaling will be implemented if the following conditions
are satisfied:
The tripping time of the ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling function has
elapsed.
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection has detected a fault in the backward (reverse)
direction.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-339
3 Operation
(continued)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
GSCSG: Ready
[
043 057
]
GSCSG: Operating
mode
[
023 079 ]
1
&
2
1: Signal comp.
release
2: Signal comp.
block.
GSCSG: Channel
mode
[
023 078 ]
1
2
1: Independent
channel
2: Common channel
GSCSG: Release
time send
[ 023 076 ]
&
0
t
&
GSCSG: Send
signal
[
GFSC: Fault
forward / LS
[ 039 090 ]
&
043 059
]
GSCSG: Send
internal signal
304 002
GSCSG: Tripping
time elaps.
[
043 063
]
GSCSG: Transient
blocking
[
037 254
]
&
GSCSG: Trip
signal
[
&
GSCSG: Receive
EXT
[
043 055
]
043 060
]
>1
-
&
PSIG: Receive
305 165
GSCSG: Frequ.mon.
triggered
304 000
&
GFSC: Fault
backward / BS
[
039 091
GSCSG: Bl.
PSIG weak infeed
304 003
]
47Z0138A_EN
47Z1038A_EN
3-232
3-340
GSCSG send signal and trip signal in the 'Signal comp. release' mode and blocking of the weak infeed logic of distance protection
protective signaling
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Signal comparison blocking
scheme
If ground fault (short-circuit) protection detects a fault in the backward direction, a signal
is sent to the remote station. In the event of a directional change from backward to
forward, the send signal is extended for the set duration of transient blocking.
Depending on the setting at GS C S G: B l o c k . s i g . n o n d i r . , a send signal is already
generated if directional measurement of ground fault (short-circuit) protection has been
enabled and ground fault (short-circuit) protection has not decided in favor of the forward
direction.
The circuit breaker in the remote station is tripped if the following conditions are satisfied:
There is no receive signal.
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection has detected a fault in the forward direction.
The tripping time of the ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling function has
elapsed.
No transient blocking has been set.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-341
3 Operation
(continued)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
GSCSG: Ready
[
043 057
]
GSCSG: Operating
mode
[
023 079
]
1
2
&
1: Signal comp.
release
2: Signal comp.
block.
GSCSG: Channel
mode
[
023 078
]
1
2
1: Independent
channel
2: Common channel
GSCSG: Release
time send
[
GFSC: Fault
backward / BS
[
039 091
>1
-
0
&
037 254
]
t
&
GSCSG: Send
signal
&
GSCSG: Send
internal signal
]
[
GSCSG: Transient
blocking
[
023 076
]
043 059
]
304 002
GSCSG: Block.
sig. nondir.
[
023 089
]
0
1
&
0: No
1: Yes
GFSC: Direct.
determ.enabl.
[ 043 061 ]
GFSC: Fault
forward / LS
[ 039 090 ]
&
GSCSG: Trip
signal
[
GSCSG: Tripping
time elaps.
[ 043 063 ]
GSCSG: Receive
EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG: Receive
&
043 060
]
>1
-
&
305 165
GSCSG: Frequ.mon.
triggered
304 000
7
3-233
3-342
160
47Z1039A_EN
47Z0139A_EN
GSCSG send signal and trip signal in the 'Signal comp. blocking' mode'
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Weak infeed logic
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling P437 has a ‘weak infeed logic’ function
that makes tripping possible if ground fault (short-circuit) protection does not start. The
user has the option of choosing whether in this case the trip signal will be issued by
ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling when there is a directional decision by
ground fault (short-circuit) protection in the forward direction or when the
GF S C : V N G> trigger value is exceeded.
3-234
Weak infeed logic
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-343
3 Operation
(continued)
Trip mode
Depending on the GS C S G: T r i p m o d e setting, ground fault (short-circuit) protection
signaling can trigger a single-pole or three-pole trip that can activate the ARC function. If
the trip mode setting is 1/3-pole trip w. HSR, then when there is single-pole starting of
the distance protection function there will be a trip in the phase in which the starting
condition is present. When there is multi-pole starting of the distance protection function,
ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling will reach a three-pole trip decision. If one
of the other two operating modes has been set, then ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling always generates a three-pole trip. If the operating mode is 3p-pole
trip w/o. HSR, then the ARC will be blocked by a trip generated by ground fault (shortcircuit) protection signaling.
GSCSG: Trip mode
[ 023 080 ]
1
2
3
1: 1/3-pole trip
w.HSR
2: 3p-pole trip
w.HSR
2: 3p-pole trip
w/o.HSR
GSCSG: Trip
signal
[ 043 060 ]
GSCSG: Trip A
304 004
DIST: Starting
A
303 529
GSCSG: Trip B
304 005
DIST: Starting
B
303 530
GSCSG: Trip C
304 006
DIST: Starting
C
303 531
MAIN: Short
circuit AG
[ 006 011 ]
MAIN: Short
circuit BG
[ 006 012 ]
MAIN: Short
circuit CG
[ 006 013 ]
GSCSG: Blocking
ARC
304 008
47Z1323A_EN
3-235
3-344
Trip mode
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Echo function
When a signal is received, an echo pulse can be formed – depending on the setting – if
ground fault (short-circuit) protection has not detected a fault in the backward direction.
The receive signal must be present for a period longer than the set operate delay in
order for the echo pulse to be activated. If the circuit breaker is in the open position, then
the operate delay is not active. The echo pulse is transmitted to the remote station for
the set pulse duration. When the echo pulse is activated, a set blocking time is also
started, during the course of which a new echo pulse is prevented. This prevents a
permanent signal from being transmitted.
GSCSG: Echo
on receive
[ 023 080 ]
0
1
1: No
2: Yes
GSCSG: Channel
mode
[ 023 078 ]
1
2
1: independent
channel
2: common channel
GSCSG: Operate
delay echo
[ 023 081 ]
GSCSG: Pulse
duration echo
[ 023 082 ]
GSCSG: Send
signal
[ 043 059 ]
GFSC: IN>
triggered
[ 039 088 ]
S1 1
GSCSG: Send
internal signal
304 002
R1
GFCSG: Receive
EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG: Receive
305 165
GSCSG: Frequ.mon.
triggered
304 000
MAIN: CB closed 3p
[ 031 042 ]
GSCSG: tBlock
echo
[ 023 083 ]
47Z1324A_EN
3-236
Echo function
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-345
3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the communication
channel
The communication link can be tested. For this purpose a 500 ms send signal is issued
through a binary signal input or from the local control panel. It is extended by the set
release time of the send signal. The remote station receives this signal if the
transmission link is OK.
3-237
3-346
Testing the communication channel
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.31 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group DTOC)
A four-stage definite-time overcurrent protection function (DTOC) can be activated
concurrently with the distance protection. Three separate measuring systems are
available for this purpose for:
Maximum phase current
Negative-sequence current
Residual current
When the inrush stabilization function is triggered, the first stage of DTOC protection is
blocked.
Enabling or disabling
DTOC protection
DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled via a parameter setting. Moreover,
enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-238
Disabling or enabling DTOC protection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-347
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the maximum
phase current
The three phase currents are monitored to determine whether they exceed the set
thresholds. After the set operate delay periods have elapsed, a signal is issued. The
elapsing of the operate delays may be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal
inputs.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DTOC: Blocking
tI> EXT
[
041 060
]
MAIN: Inrush
stabil. trigg
&
306 014
MAIN: Protection
active
DTOC: Enabled
[
040 120
DTOC: tI>
PSx
&
c
306 001
c
DTOC: I>
PSx
[
]
[
*
*
]
]
IA
t
>1
-
0
DTOC: tI> elapsed
IB
[
IC
DTOC: Starting I>
[
DTOC: Blocking
tI>> EXT
[
041 061
c
]
c
[
*
]
035 020
]
DTOC: tI>>
PSx
DTOC: I>>
PSx
[
040 010
*
]
]
t
>1
-
0
DTOC: tI>>
elapsed
[
040 011
]
DTOC: Starting
I>>
[
DTOC: Blocking
tI>>>EXT
[
041 062
]
c
c
DTOC: I>>>
PSx
[
*
035 021
]
DTOC: tI>>>
PSx
[
*
]
]
t
>1
-
0
DTOC: tI>>>
elapsed
[
040 012
]
DTOC: Starting
I>>>
[
DTOC: Blocking
tI>>>> EXT
[
041 100
]
c
c
DTOC: I>>>>
PSx
[
*
035 022
]
DTOC: tI>>>>
PSx
[
*
]
]
t
>
-1
0
DTOC: tI>>>>
elapsed
[
035 032
]
DTOC: Starting
I>>>>
[
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
2
3-239
3-348
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
DTOC: I>
PSx
DTOC: I>>
PSx
DTOC: I>>>
PSx
DTOC: I>>>>
PSx
DTOC: tI>
PSx
DTOC: tI>>
PSx
DTOC: tI>>>
PSx
DTOC: tI>>>>
PSx
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
007
007
007
007
019
019
019
019
180
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
008
008
008
008
020
020
020
020
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
009
009
009
009
021
021
021
021
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
035 023
]
010
010
010
010
022
022
022
022
D5Z52ALA_EN
Monitoring the phase currents
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the negativesequence system
From the three phase currents, the P437 calculates the negative-sequence current
based on one of the following formulae, depending on the setting at M A IN : P h a s e
sequence:
Phase sequence A-B-C:
1
2
I neg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ I B + a ⋅ I C
3
(
)
Phase sequence A-C-B:
1
I neg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ I B + a 2 ⋅ I C
3
(
)
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°
The negative-sequence current is monitored to determine whether it exceeds the set
thresholds. After the set operate delay periods have elapsed, a signal is issued. The
operate delays may be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-349
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
D5Z52AMB_EN
3-240
3-350
Monitoring the negative-sequence current for the settings
D T O C : t I n e g > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x (002 160) to D T O C : t I N > > > > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x = 'Normal'.
(For setting 'Blocked' see figure 3-246)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the
residual current
Depending on the setting, the P437 monitors the fundamental wave of the residual
current, derived from the three phase currents or measured at the T4 transformer.
3-241
Selecting the measured variable
The residual current is monitored to determine whether it exceeds the set thresholds.
After the set operate delay periods have elapsed, a signal is issued. The operate delays
may be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-351
3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC: Blocking
tIN> EXT
[ 041 063 ]
MAIN: Inrush
stabil. trigg
306 014
MAIN:
Protection
active
DTOC: IN>
PSx
[
*
306 001
DTOC: Enabled
[ 040 120 ]
]
DTOC: tIN>
PSx
[
*
]
DTOC: tIN>
elapsed
[ 035 037 ]
DTOC: Starting
IN>
[ 035 028 ]
DTOC: IN
402 625
DTOC: Blocking
tIN>> EXT
[ 041 064 ]
DTOC: IN>>
PSx
[
*
]
DTOC: tIN>>
PSx
[
*
]
DTOC: tIN>>
elapsed
[ 035 038 ]
DTOC: Starting
IN>>
[ 035 029 ]
DTOC: Block.
tIN>>> EXT
[ 041 065 ]
DTOC: IN>>>
PSx
[
*
]
DTOC: tIN>>>
PSx
[
*
]
DTOC: tIN>>>
elapsed
[ 035 039 ]
DTOC: Starting
IN>>>
[ 035 030 ]
DTOC: Block.
tIN>>>> EXT
[ 041 101 ]
DTOC: IN>>>>
PSx
[
*
]
DTOC: tIN>>>>
PSx
[
*
]
DTOC: tIN>>>>
elapsed
[ 035 040 ]
DTOC: Starting
IN>>>>
[ 035 031 ]
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
3-242
3-352
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
DTOC: IN>
PSx
072 015
073 015
074 015
075 015
DTOC: IN>>
PSx
072 016
073 016
074 016
075 016
DTOC: IN>>>
PSx
072 017
073 017
074 017
075 017
DTOC: IN>>>>
PSx
072 018
073 018
074 018
075 018
DTOC: tIN>
PSx
072 027
073 027
074 027
075 027
DTOC: tIN>>
PSx
072 028
073 028
074 028
075 028
DTOC: tIN>>>
PSx
072 029
073 029
074 029
075 029
DTOC: tIN>>>>
PSx
072 030
073 030
074 030
075 030
47Z1170A_EN
Monitoring the residual current with the setting
D T O C : t I N t i m e r s t a r t P S x (002 138) = 'With starting' and
D T O C : tIN> (1pHSR) PSx (002 144) to D T O C : t I N > > > > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x = 'Normal'.
For other settings the expanded logic is valid as shown in figures 3-247 and 3-248.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Direction-dependent trip of
the residual current stages
The P432 determines the angle between the residual current and the neutraldisplacement voltage for the direction determination. The direction determination is
enabled when a current stage is started and the neutral-displacement voltage exceeds
the set threshold DTOC: V N G> P S x . The measured angle is displayed. The position
of the straight line separating forward and backward (reverse) directions is determined
with the setting D T OC : A ngl e phi G. A forward or backward-directional decision
results if the following angle conditions are met:
Forward direction:
(90° + ϕG ) ≥ ϕ > (270° + ϕG )
Backward (reverse) direction:
(90° + ϕG ) ≤ ϕ < (270° + ϕG )
where:
3-243
ϕ:
Measured angle between the residual current and the neutral-point displacement
voltage
ϕG:
Setting D T O C : A n g l e p h i G
Directional characteristic of the definite-time overcurrent protection (DTOC).
Angle phiG corresponds to the setting D T O C : A n g l e p h i G (004 092)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-353
3 Operation
(continued)
3-244
Direction measurement of the definite-time overcurrent protection (DTOC)
After the operate delay has elapsed, a trip signal of the respective residual current stage
is issued if the set direction matches the measured direction.
3-354
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-245
Trip signals of the DTOC residual current stages
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-355
3 Operation
(continued)
Settable timer start
condition of the residual
current system
The triggering of the timers for the residual current system can be set as directiondependent by setting the following parameter:
D T O C : t I N t i m e r s t a r t P S x = With direction
The timers only start if the relevant OC threshold is exceeded and the direction
measured corresponds to the set direction of the respective stage:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
Direction
Direction
Direction
Direction
tIN> PSx
tIN>> PSx
tIN>>> PSx
tIN>>>>PSx
The relevant settings are:
† Forward directional
† Backward directional
† Non-directional
This expanded logic is displayed in figure 3-248.
3-356
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Settable operation mode
during 1-pole dead time of
HSR
As of version P437 -610 the operation mode of each residual current system timer stage
and negative-sequence overcurrent timer stage during the 1-pole dead time of the highspeed reclosure (HSR) of an ARC cycle may now be set individually.
The following setting parameters are available for the neutral OC elements:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
tIN> (1pHSR)
PSx
tIN>> (1pHSR)
PSx
tIN>>> (1pHSR) PSx
tIN>>>> (1pHSR) PSx
The relevant settings are:
† Normal:
No change for the DTOC timer stage during a 1-pole dead time.
† Non-directional:
The directional decision is ignored during the 1-pole dead time;
the DTOC timer stage operates as if it where set to 'Non-directional'.
† Blocked:
During a 1-pole dead time the DTOC timer stage is automatically blocked. If a
starting was present it will be reset. The time delay stage is also reset.
The same is valid for the negative-sequence elements, but here there are only two
setting options available:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
tIneg> (1pHSR)
tIneg>> (1pHSR)
tIneg>> (1pHSR)
tIneg>> (1pHSR)
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
The relevant settings are:
† Normal
† Blocked
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-357
3 Operation
(continued)
Neutralizing directional
operation by binary signal
inputs
For each residual current system timer stage, a binary signal input is provided to disable
directional operation. While this binary input signal is TRUE, the stage operates nondirectional. If the stage is set to 'non-directional', then this input has no influence.
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
Block. dir. tIN> EXT
Blck. dir. tIN>> EXT
Blk. dir. tIN>>> EXT
Bl. dir. tIN>>>> EXT
Note: This input function may also be applied to block the directional operation should a
measuring circuit failure occur (by using the signal from the associated m.c.b.).
DTOC: tIneg>
(1pHSR) PSx
[
*
]
0
1
0: normal
1: blocked
ARC: Dead time 1p
running
[ 037 066 ]
& >1
c
DTOC: tIneg>
PSx
[
*
]
t
DTOC: tIneg>
elapsed
[ 035 033 ]
0
DTOC: Blocking
tIneg> EXT
[ 041 102 ]
DTOC: Starting
Ineg>
[ 035 024 ]
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
3-246
3-358
1
2
3
4
DTOC: tIneg>
(1pHSR) PSx
002 160
002 161
002 162
002 163
DTOC: tIneg>
PSx
072 023
073 023
074 023
075 023
47Z1119A_EN
DTOC operation of negative-sequence elements show for the stage Ineg> with the setting
D T O C : tIneg> (1pHSR) PSx (002 160) to D T O C : t I N > > > > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x = 'Blocked'.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC: tIN>
(1pHSR) PSx
[
*
*
]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
0
1
2
3
4
DTOC: tIN>
DTOC: Direction
(1pHSR)
PSx tIN> PSx
002 144
072 032
002 145
072 042
002 146
072 082
002 147
072 091
DTOC: tIN>
PSx
072 027
073 027
074 027
075 027
1
2
& >1
0: Normal
1: Non-directional
2: Blocked
ARC: Dead time 1p
running
[ 037 066 ]
DTOC: Blocking
tIN> EXT
[ 041 063 ]
& >1
DTOC: Fault N
forward
[ 035 047 ]
DTOC: Fault N
backward
[ 035 048 ]
&
DTOC: Trip signal
tIN>
[ 035 043 ]
&
&
DTOC: Block. dir.
tIN> EXT
[ 002 176 ]
DTOC: Direction
tIN> PSx
[
*
]
1
2
3
DTOC: Starting
IN>
[ 035 028 ]
1: Forward
directional
2: Backward
directional
3: Non-directional
c
DTOC: tIN>
PSx
[
*
t
]
0
DTOC: tIN>
elapsed
[ 035 037 ]
47Z1108A_EN
3-247
DTOC operation of neutral OC elements show for the stage IN> with the setting
D T O C : t I N t i m e r s t a r t P S x (002 138) = 'With starting' and
D T O C : tIN> (1pHSR) PSx (002 144) to D T O C : t I N > > > > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x set to 'Non-directional’ or 'Blocked'.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-359
3 Operation
(continued)
c
DTOC: tIN>
(1pHSR) PSx
[
*
*
]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
0
1
2
3
4
DTOC: tIN>
DTOC: Direction
(1pHSR)
PSx tIN> PSx
002 144
072 032
002 145
072 042
002 146
072 082
002 147
072 091
DTOC: tIN>
PSx
072 027
073 027
074 027
075 027
1
2
& >1
0: Normal
1: Non-directional
2: Blocked
ARC: Dead time 1p
running
[ 037 066 ]
DTOC: Blocking
tIN> EXT
[ 041 063 ]
& >1
DTOC: Fault N
forward
[ 035 047 ]
DTOC: Fault N
backward
[ 035 048 ]
&
&
DTOC: Block. dir.
tIN> EXT
[ 002 176 ]
c
DTOC: Direction
tIN> PSx
[
*
]
1
2
3
DTOC: Starting
IN>
[ 035 028 ]
1: Forward
directional
2: Backward
directional
3: Non-directional
c
DTOC: tIN>
PSx
[
*
t
&
]
DTOC: Trip signal
tIN>
[ 035 043 ]
0
DTOC: tIN>
elapsed
[ 035 037 ]
47Z1107A_EN
3-248
3-360
DTOC operation of neutral OC elements show for the stage IN> with the setting
D T O C : t I N t i m e r s t a r t P S x (002 138) = 'With direction' and
D T O C : tIN> (1pHSR) PSx (002 144) to D T O C : t I N > > > > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x set to 'Non-directional’ or 'Blocked'.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.32 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group IDMT)
The single-stage inverse-time overcurrent protection function operates with three
separate measuring systems:
Maximum phase current
Negative-sequence current
Residual current.
When the inrush stabilization function is triggered, the IDMT function is blocked.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-361
3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling or enabling
IDMT protection
IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled via a parameter setting. Moreover, enabling
can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-249
3-362
Disabling or enabling IDMT protection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Time-dependent
characteristics
All three measuring systems operate independently of each other and can be set
separately. The user can select from a large number of characteristics (see table
below). The IDMT protection function can be operated in a directional or a nondirectional mode. The user may use either the directional decision from the distance
measuring system or the directional decision formed from negative-sequence current
and voltage. The measured variable is the maximum phase current, the negativesequence current, or the residual current, depending on the measuring system.
The P437 calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase current values
according to this formula. The result depends on the phase sequence setting.
Phase sequence A-B-C:
1
2
I neg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ I B + a ⋅ I C
3
(
)
Phase sequence A-C-B:
1
I neg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ I B + a 2 ⋅ I C
3
(
)
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°
Depending on the setting, the residual current to be monitored is either derived by the
P437 from the three phase currents or measured at current transformer T 4.
The protection function is triggered if 1.5 times the reference current is exceeded and the
set directional condition is satisfied. A trip signal is issued as a function of the
characteristic curve, although this trip signal can be blocked via an appropriately
configured binary signal input. The tripping characteristics available for selection are
shown in figures 3-251 to 3-254.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-363
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
47Z1004A_EN
3-250
Forming the measured variables
Measured variable for the
residual current measuring
system
The user can select by setting ID M T : E v a l u a ti o n IN P S x whether the value for the
residual current is derived from the three phase current values or if it is measured by the
fourth CT.
Reference quantity for the
residual current measuring
system
There is a reference quantity available for the measured residual current
ID M T : Ir e f,N ( m e a s .) P S x with a setting range extended to small values. The
reference quantity ID M T : Ir e f,N ( c a l c .) P S x with the former setting range is
available for the calculated residual current value.
3-364
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
No Tripping
.
Characteristic
Constants
Formula for the
Tripping
Characteristic
k = 0,01 ... 10,00
0 Definite Time
Per IEC 255-3
A
Formula for the
Reset Characteristic
B
R
t=k
t =k⋅
a
⎛ I
⎜⎜
⎝ I ref
b
⎞
⎟⎟ − 1
⎠
1 Standard Inverse
0.14
0.02
2 Very Inverse
13.50
1.00
3 Extremely Inverse
80.00
2.00
4 Long Time Inverse
120.00
1.00
Per IEEE C37.112
C
⎛
⎞
⎜
⎟
⎜
⎟
a
⎟
+
t = k ⋅⎜
c
⎜ ⎛ I ⎞b
⎟
⎟⎟ − 1
⎜⎜ ⎜⎜
⎟⎟
⎝ ⎝ I ref ⎠
⎠
5 Moderately Inverse
tr = k ⋅
R
⎛ I
⎜⎜
⎝ I ref
2
⎞
⎟⎟ − 1
⎠
0.0515
0.0200
0.1140
4.85
6 Very Inverse
19.6100
2.0000
0.4910
21.60
7 Extremely Inverse
28.2000
2.0000
0.1217
29.10
Per ANSI
⎞
⎛
⎜
⎟
⎜
⎟
a
t = k ⋅⎜
+ c⎟
b
⎜⎛ I ⎞
⎟
⎟⎟ − 1
⎜⎜ ⎜⎜
⎟⎟
⎝ ⎝ I ref ⎠
⎠
tr = k ⋅
R
⎛ I
⎜⎜
⎝ I ref
2
⎞
⎟⎟ − 1
⎠
8 Normally Inverse
8.9341
2.0938 0.17966
9.00
9 Short Time Inverse
0.2663
1.2969 0.03393
0.50
10 Long Time Inverse
5.6143
1.0000 2.18592
15.75
11 RI-Type Inverse
t =k⋅
1
0.339 −
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse
0.236
⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜
⎟⎟
⎝ I ref ⎠
⎛
I
t = k ⋅ ⎜⎜ 5.8 − 1.35 ⋅ ln
I ref
⎝
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
⎞
⎟
⎟
⎠
3-365
3 Operation
(continued)
IEC 255-3, Standard Inverse
IEC 255-3, Very Inverse
1000
1000
100
100
k=10
10
t/s
k=1
10
k=10
1
k=1
t/s
1
k=0.1
0.1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.01
0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50K1A
Characteristic No. 1
k=0.01
D5Z50K2A
Characteristic No. 2
IEC 255-3, Extremely Inverse
IEC 255-3, Long-Time Inverse
1000
1000
100
100
10
k=10
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
t/s
1
k=0.1
k=1
0.1
0.1
k=0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
Characteristic No. 3
3-251
3-366
k=0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
k=0.01
I/Iref
D5Z50K3A
D5Z50K4A
Characteristic No. 4
Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
1000
IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse
IEEE C37.112, Moderately
Inverse
1000
100
100
10
10
k=10
k=10
t/s
t/s
1
k=1
0,1
0,01
k=0,1
k=0,01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50K5B
Characteristic No. 5
k=0.01
D5Z50K6B
Characteristic No. 6
IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse
1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
0.01
k=0.1
k=0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50K7B
Characteristic No. 7
3-252
Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-367
3 Operation
(continued)
ANSI, Short-Time Inverse
ANSI, Normally Inverse
1000
1000
100
100
10
10
t/s
k=10
t/s
1
1
k=10
k=1
0.1
0.1
k=1
k=0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
k=0.01
0.01
k=0.1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50K8B
Characteristic No. 8
D5Z50K9B
Characteristic No. 9
ANSI, Long-Time Inverse
1000
100
k=10
10
t/s
k=1
1
k=0.1
0.1
k=0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50KAB
Characteristic No. 10
3-253
3-368
Tripping characteristics as per ANSI
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
RI-Type Inverse
RXIDG-Type Inverse
1000
1000
100
100
k=10
k=10
10
10
t/s
k=1
1
t/s
k=1
1
k=0.1
0.1
k=0.1
0.1
k=0.01
0.01
I/Iref
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50KBA
Characteristic No. 11
3-254
k=0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
D5Z50KCA
Characteristic No. 12
RI-type inverse and RXIDG-type inverse tripping characteristics
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-369
3 Operation
(continued)
Minimum operate value for
the current in the residual
current measuring system
A minimum operate value (threshold) may be defined for the current in the residual
current measuring system. The set factor ID M T : F a c to r Ir e f,N is multiplied by the
reference quantity Iref,N in order to form the minimum operate value for the residual
current measuring system. The timer stage is triggered only when the residual current
exceeds this threshold.
Minimum trip time for the
residual current measuring
system
A minimum trip time ID M T : M i n . tr i p ti m e N may be defined for the current in the
residual current measuring system. This timer stage is started as soon as the minimum
operate value is exceeded. After the timer has elapsed, the trip signal is issued,
regardless of the value of the current.
KI,N * Iref,N
10
t /s
Min. trip time N
1
1
3-255
3-370
10
IN/Iref,N
I/Ir e f
100
47Z1003A_EN
Influence of the minimum operate value and the minimum trip time on the IDMT characteristics
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
IDMT: Iref,y PSx
[
*
]
blocked
(calc.)
IDMT: Iref,N
(calc.)
PSx
IDMT: Evaluation IN PSx = calculated
47Z1000A_EN
3-256
Trip signal for I D M T : E v a l u a t i o n I N P S x with setting 'Calculated'
The parameter I D M T : I r e f , N ( m e a s . ) P S x (001 169 / 001 170 / 001 171 / 001 172) is used
instead of I D M T : I r e f , N ( c a l c . ) P S x if setting is 'Measured' instead of 'Calculated'.
The 'Measured' parameter allows lower setting values.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-371
3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting the trip signal
When ANSI/IEEE characteristics with reset behavior according to characteristic are
selected, the trip signal now resets as soon as the internal memory value has been
reduced to 97% of the tripping value.
Current
(rms value)
Internally
cumulated
relative trip
time
IFault
Iref
100 %
ILoad
IFault
ILoad
97 %
0%
tTrip= f(IFault/Iref)
tReset = f(ILoad/Iref)
Trip signal
t
47Z1002A_EN
3-257
3-372
Reset behavior of the IDMT trip signal when the ANSI/IEEE characteristics with reset behavior according to characteristic is selected
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Directional measurement
The IDMT protection function determines the fault direction from the negative-sequence
voltage and current. The negative-sequence voltage and current are calculated by the
P437 based on the following formulae, depending on the phase sequence setting:
Phase sequence A-B-C:
1
2
V neg = ⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B −G + a ⋅ V C −G
3
(
I neg =
(
1
2
⋅ I A + a ⋅ I B + a ⋅ IC
3
)
Phase sequence A-C-B:
1
2
V neg = ⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B −G + a ⋅ V C −G
3
(
I neg =
(
1
2
⋅ I + a ⋅ I B + a ⋅ IC
3 A
)
)
)
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°
The voltage used for directional measurement is corrected for the voltage drop at the
fault impedance. The set impedance of the phase-to-ground loops of zone 1 of the
polygon characteristic is used for correction. For directional measurement to be
enabled, the corrected negative-sequence voltage needs to exceed a minimum threshold
of 0.05 Vnom/√3, and the negative-sequence current needs to exceed a threshold of
0.03 Inom + 0.02 Imax. The device’s decision is “Forward direction” if the angle lies in the
range of −105° ≤ ϕ ≤ 0° .
Improved directional
measurement for seriescompensated lines
As for the GFSC function group, an improved directional measurement for seriescompensated lines is now available for the IDMT function.
(It is described in the eponymous section of the GFSC function group.)
The following settable parameter is used to correct the measuring voltage for IDMT:
IDMT: Comp.react. Xneg PSx.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-373
3 Operation
(continued)
VBG
Backward direction
-Vneg,corr
(VAG)
-1050
Ineg
Forward direction
VCG
47Z1001A_EN
3-258
3-374
Directional characteristic
(includes example values for fault in A-N with voltage VAN completely short-circuited)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
>0.05 Vnom/
Vneg,corr
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
Vneg
DIST: X1,PG
(polygon) PSx
[
*
]
DIST: R1,PG
(polygon) PSx
[
*
]
Z1*Ineg
>0.03 Inom+0.02 Imax
IA
IB
IC
Ineg
IDMT:
syst.
[ 035
IDMT:
syst.
[ 035
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
3-259
1
2
3
4
DIST: X1,PG
(polygon) PSx
012 001
012 051
013 001
013 051
DIST: R1,PG
(polygon) PSx
012 005
012 055
013 005
013 055
Neg.seq.
forw.
041 ]
Neg.seq.
backw.
042 ]
47Z11ATA_EN
Directional measurement
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-375
3 Operation
(continued)
Directional setting
Each IDMT measuring system may be operated in directional or non-directional mode.
In directional mode, the directional decision that is used is either the one reached by
distance protection or the one formed by the IDMT function from the negative-sequence
current and voltage – depending on the setting. If the measuring voltage is faulty, the
measuring systems operate in non-directional mode or they are blocked – depending on
the setting.
3-376
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
2: Use Dist
flt.direct.
D5Z50ARB_EN
3-260
Directional setting and directional decision
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-377
3 Operation
(continued)
3.33 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM)
This function makes it possible to build up thermal overload protection for lines and
transformers.
Disabling or enabling
Thermal Overload
Protection
Thermal overload protection can be disabled or enabled via a parameter setting.
3-261
3-378
Disabling or enabling Thermal Overload Protection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping characteristics
The maximum value of the three phase currents is used to track a first-order thermal
image according to IEC 255-8. The tripping time is determined by the set thermal time
constant T H E R M : T i m e c o n s t . 1 ( > I m i n ) of the protected object and by the set
tripping limit T H E R M : R e l . O / T t r i p (Θtrip) and is a function of the accumulated
thermal load Θ P:
2
⎛ I ⎞
⎜
⎟
⎜ I ⎟ − ΘP
ref ⎠
⎝
t = τ ⋅ ln
2
⎛ I ⎞
⎜
⎟
⎜ I ⎟ − Θ trip
⎝ ref ⎠
3-262
Tripping characteristics of thermal overload protection (tripping characteristics apply to Θ P = 0 %)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-379
3 Operation
(continued)
Warning
A warning signal can be set in accordance with the set operate value
T H E R M : R e l . O / T w a r n i n g P S x If the current falls below the default threshold of
0.1 Iref, the buffer is discharged with the set time constant T H E R M : T i m e c o n s t . 2
( < I m i n ) . The thermal replica may be reset either via a setting parameter or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. Resetting is possible even when Thermal
Overload Protection is disabled. Thermal Overload Protection can be blocked via an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-380
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
THERM: Start.
factor OL_RC
THERM: Rel. O/T
warning
THERM: Rel. O/T
trip
THERM:
Hysteresis trip
47Z0149B_EN
3-263
Thermal overload protection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-381
3 Operation
(continued)
3.34 Under and overvoltage protection (Function group V<>)
The time-voltage protection function evaluates the fundamental wave of the phase
voltages and of the neutral displacement voltage as well as the positive-sequence
voltage and negative-sequence voltage obtained from the fundamental waves of the
three phase-to-ground voltages.
Disabling or enabling
V<> protection
V<> protection can be disabled or enabled via a parameter setting.
Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
V<> protection readiness
V<> protection is ready if it is enabled and no fault has been detected in the voltagemeasuring circuit by measuring-circuit monitoring.
3-264
3-382
Enabling, disabling and readiness of V<> protection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the phase
voltages
The P437 checks the voltages to determine whether they exceed or fall below set
thresholds. Depending on the set operating mode of V<> protection, either the phase-toground voltages (‘star’ operating mode) or the phase-to-phase voltages (‘delta’ operating
mode) are monitored. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If the decisions of undervoltage monitoring are to be included in the trip commands, then
it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would
always be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and thus it would not be
possible to close the circuit breaker again.
Minimum current
monitoring
There is an optional enabling threshold available with the V<> element: It is based on
minimum current monitoring for the undervoltage stages (V<, V<<, Vpos<, Vpos<<).
The operating mode for minimum current monitoring is activated by the following setting:
V < > : O p . m o d e V < m o n . P S x = With
This setting parameter is used to set the enabling threshold:
V<>: I enable V<
PSx
The undervoltage stages are blocked if during active monitoring the set threshold of at
least one phase is not exceeded by the phase currents.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-383
3 Operation
(continued)
3-265
3-384
Selection of Measured Variables
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-266
Overvoltage monitoring
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-385
3 Operation
(continued)
3-267
3-386
Undervoltage monitoring. Stages V< and V<< are blocked if the minimum current monitoring function is activated (V < > : O p . m o d e V <
m o n . P S x = With) and if the set current threshold V < > : I e n a b l e V < P S x of at least one phase is not exceeded by the phase
currents.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the positiveand negative-sequence
voltages
The P437 determines the positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltages from the
fundamental components of the phase-to-ground voltages according to the formulas
given below, based on the M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e setting.
Phase sequence A-B-C:
1
V pos = ⋅ V A−G + a ⋅V B −G + a 2 ⋅V C −G
Positive-sequence voltage:
3
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
V neg =
1
⋅ V A−G + a 2 ⋅V B −G + a ⋅V C −G
3
Positive-sequence voltage:
V pos =
1
⋅ V A−G + a 2 ⋅V B −G + a ⋅V C −G
3
Negative-sequence voltage:
V neg =
1
⋅ V A−G + a ⋅V B −G + a 2 ⋅V C −G
3
Negative-sequence voltage:
Phase sequence A-C-B:
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-387
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
D5Z50AYB_EN
3-268
Determining positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltages
The positive-sequence voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds or falls
below set thresholds, and the negative-sequence voltage is monitored to determine
whether it exceeds set thresholds. If the voltage exceeds or falls below the set
thresholds, then a signal is issued once the set operate delays have elapsed.
The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If the decisions of undervoltage monitoring are to be included in the trip commands, then
it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would
always be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and thus it would not be
possible to close the circuit breaker again.
3-388
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-269
Monitoring the positive-sequence voltage. The stages Vpos< and Vpos<< are blocked if the minimum current monitoring is activated
(V < > : O p . m o d e V < m o n . P S x = With) and if the set current threshold V < > : I e n a b l e V < P S x of at least one phase is not
exceeded by the phase currents.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-389
3 Operation
(continued)
3-270
3-390
Monitoring the negative-sequence voltage
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the neutral
displacement voltage
Depending on the setting, the V<> function monitors either the neutral-displacement
voltage calculated by the P437 from the three phase-to-ground voltages or the neutraldisplacement voltage formed externally via the fourth voltage measuring input
(the neutral-displacement voltage from the open delta winding of the voltage
transformers, for example – see section entitled 'Conditioning of Measured Variables').
The neutral displacement voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds set
thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
3-271
Selecting the measured variable
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-391
3 Operation
(continued)
3-272
3-392
Monitoring the neutral displacement voltage
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.35 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>)
The P437 monitors the voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set
frequencies. The frequency is determined from the difference in time between the zero
crossings of the voltage (voltage zeroes). The over-/underfrequency protection function
has four stages. The operation of over-/underfrequency protection will be explained
below using the first stage as an example.
Disabling or enabling
over-/underfrequency
protection
Over-/underfrequency protection can be disabled or enabled via a parameter setting.
Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-273
Enabling, disabling and readiness of f<> protection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-393
3 Operation
(continued)
Selecting the measuring
voltage
By selecting a measuring voltage setting, the user defines the voltage that is used by the
over-/underfrequency protection function for measurement purposes. This can be either
a phase-to-ground voltage or a phase-to-phase voltage.
3-274
3-394
Selecting the measuring voltage
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Undervoltage blocking and
evaluation time
Over-/underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of sufficient magnitude.
Over-/underfrequency protection will be blocked instantaneously if the measuring voltage
falls below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage.
In order to avoid frequency stage starting caused by brief frequency fluctuations or
interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate conditions must be
satisfied for at least the duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be
issued.
3-275
Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-395
3 Operation
(continued)
Operating modes of over-/
underfrequency protection
For each stage of the over-/underfrequency protection function, the user can choose
between the following operating modes:
Frequency monitoring
Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient monitoring (df/dt)
Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring (Δf/Δt)
Frequency monitoring
Depending on the setting, the P437 monitors the frequency to determine whether it
exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess of the set
nominal frequency is set, the P437 checks to determine whether the frequency exceeds
the operate threshold. If an operate threshold below the set nominal frequency is set,
the P437 checks to determine whether the frequency falls below the operate threshold.
If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage
can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
Frequency monitoring
combined with differential
frequency gradient
monitoring (df/dt)
In this operating mode of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the frequency is
also checked to determine whether the set frequency gradient is reached (in addition to
being monitored for exceeding or falling below the set threshold). Monitoring for
overfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency increase; monitoring for
underfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency decrease. If both operate
conditions are satisfied, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by
way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-396
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Frequency monitoring
combined with mean
frequency gradient
monitoring (Δf/Δt)
The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual substations and
may vary over time due to power swings. Therefore it makes sense to take the mean
value of the frequency gradient into account for load-shedding systems.
In this operating mode of over-/underfrequency protection, frequency monitoring must be
set for 'underfrequency monitoring'.
Monitoring the mean value of the frequency gradient is started with the starting of
frequency monitoring. If the frequency decreases by the set value Δf within the set
time Δt, then the Δt/Δf monitoring function operates instantaneously and generates a trip
signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate decision of the monitoring
function, then the Δt/Δf monitoring function will be blocked until the underfrequency
monitoring function drops out. The trip signal can be blocked by way of an appropriately
configured binary signal input.
3-276
Operation of frequency monitoring combined with Δf/Δt monitoring
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-397
3 Operation
(continued)
3-277
3-398
First stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
fmin/fmax measurement
For the acquisition of the minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition and for
the acquisition of the maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition, the two
following measured event values are available:
f<>: Max. frequ. for f>
f<>: Min. frequ. for f<
Both measured event values are reset automatically at the onset of a new overfrequency
or underfrequency situation. A reset is also possible via parameter
f< > : R e s e t m e a s .v a l . U S E R or binary signal f< > : R e s e t m e a s .v a l . E X T .
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-399
3 Operation
(continued)
3.36 Directional Power Protection (Function Group P<>)
The directional power protection function determines the active and reactive power from
the fundamental waves of current and voltage. The sign of the active or the reactive
power, respectively, is evaluated for direction determination
Disabling or enabling
P<> protection
The directional power protection function can be disabled or enabled from the local
control panel. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter
subset.
3-278
Enabling or disabling directional power protection
Power determination
The device determines the active and reactive power from the fundamental waves of the
three phase currents and the phase-to-ground voltages. If the measuring-circuit
monitoring function detects malfunctioning in the voltage measuring circuit, power
determination will be blocked.
Power monitoring
The device checks the determined power values to detect whether they exceed or fall
below set thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
Dynamic range dependent
setting parameters
The logic diagrams following below display signal processing with the dynamic range for
the phase current measurement set to MAIN: Dynamic range I = 'maximum range',
(addr. 031.082). When the sensitive range is selected, alternative parameters with a
setting range that will permit lower operate values will become effective (e.g.
3-400
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
P<>: P> sens. range PS1, addr. 017.120 instead of
P<>: P> high range PS1, addr. 017.203).
Transient signals
If the decisions of power monitoring are to be included in the trip commands when values
have fallen below set thresholds, then it is recommended that transient signals be used.
Otherwise the trip command would always be present when the system voltage was
disconnected, and thus it would not be possible to close the circuit breaker again.
3-279
Power determination
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-401
3 Operation
(continued)
Active power monitoring
when set thresholds are
exceeded
The device monitors the active power with two-stage functions to detect when it exceeds
the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set.
When the active power exceeds the set thresholds a starting results. The starting signal
is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
P<>: Operate
delay P> PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Release
delay P> PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Blocking
tP> EXT
[ 035 082 ]
P<>: P>
high range
[
*
P<>: Signal
P> delayed
[ 035 087 ]
PSx
]
P<>: Diseng.
ratio P> PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Starting
P>
[ 035 086 ]
P<>: P
402 631
P<>: Operate
delay P>>PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Blocking
tP>> EXT
[ 035 083 ]
P<>: P>>
high range
[
*
P<>: Release
delay P>>PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Signal
P>> delayed
[ 035 090 ]
PSx
]
P<>: Diseng.
ratio P>>PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Starting
P>>
[ 035 089 ]
3-280
3-402
Parameter- P<>: P>
high range
satz 1
017 203
satz 2
017 204
satz 3
017 205
satz 4
017 213
P<>: Diseng.
PSx ratio P> PSx
017 124
017 125
017 126
017 127
P<>: Operate
delay P> PSx
017 128
017 129
017 130
017 131
P<>: Release
delay P> PSx
017 132
017 133
017 134
017 135
Parameter- P<>: P>>
high range
satz 1
017 214
satz 2
017 215
satz 3
017 216
satz 4
017 217
P<>: Diseng.
PSx ratio P>>PSx
017 144
017 145
017 146
017 147
P<>: Operate
delay P>>PSx
017 148
017 149
017 150
017 151
P<>: Release
delay P>>PSx
017 152
017 153
017 154
017 155
40Z5271A_EN
Active power monitoring when set thresholds are exceeded
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Active power direction
when set thresholds are
exceeded
If the sign for the active power is positive, a forward-directional decision is issued; if it is
negative, a backward-directional decision results. A setting determines whether a trip
signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a backward-directional or a non-directional
decision.
3-281
The direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when set thresholds are exceeded
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-403
3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power monitoring
when set thresholds are
exceeded
The device monitors the reactive power with two-stage functions to detect when it
exceeds the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set.
When the reactive power exceeds the set thresholds a starting results. The starting
signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
P<>: Operate
delay Q> PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Release
delay Q> PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Blocking
tQ> EXT
[ 035 084 ]
P<>: Q>
high range
[
*
P<>: Signal
Q> delayed
[ 035 093 ]
PSx
]
P<>: Diseng.
ratio Q> PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Starting
Q>
[ 035 092 ]
P<>: Q
402 632
P<>: Operate
delay Q>>PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Blocking
tQ>> EXT
[ 035 085 ]
P<>: Q>>
high range
[
*
P<>: Release
delay Q>>PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Signal
Q>> delayed
[ 035 096 ]
PSx
]
P<>: Diseng.
ratio Q>>PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Starting
Q>>
[ 035 095 ]
3-282
3-404
Parameter- P<>: Q>
high range
satz 1
017 218
satz 2
017 219
satz 3
017 220
satz 4
017 221
P<>: Diseng.
PSx ratio Q> PSx
017 164
017 165
017 166
017 167
P<>: Operate
delay Q> PSx
017 168
017 169
017 170
017 171
P<>: Release
delay Q> PSx
017 172
017 173
017 174
017 175
Parameter- P<>: Q>>
high range
satz 1
017 222
satz 2
017 223
satz 3
017 224
satz 4
017 225
P<>: Diseng.
PSx ratio Q>>PSx
017 184
017 185
017 186
017 187
P<>: Operate
delay Q>>PSx
017 188
017 189
017 190
017 191
P<>: Release
delay Q>>PSx
017 192
017 193
017 194
017 195
40Z5270A_EN
Reactive power monitoring when set thresholds are exceeded
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power direction
when set thresholds are
exceeded
If the sign for the reactive power is positive, a forward-directional decision is issued; if it
is negative, a backward-directional decision results. A setting determines whether a trip
signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a backward-directional or a non-directional
decision.
3-283
The direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when set thresholds are exceeded
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-405
3 Operation
(continued)
Active power monitoring
when values fall below
set thresholds
The device monitors the active power with two-stage functions to detect when it falls
below the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set.
When the active power falls below the set thresholds a starting results. The starting
signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
P<>: Blocking
tP< EXT
[ 035 050 ]
P<>: P<
high range PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Diseng.
ratio P< PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Operate
delay P< PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Release
delay P< PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Signal
P< delayed
[ 035 055 ]
P<>: P
402 631
Settings block.
P<>: Starting
P<
[ 035 054 ]
P<>: Fault P<
[ 035 057 ]
P<>: Blocking
tP<< EXT
[ 035 051 ]
P<>: P<<
high range PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Diseng.
ratio P<< PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Operate
delay P<< PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Release
delay P<< PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Signal
P<< delayed
[ 035 061 ]
Settings block.
P<>: Starting
P<<
[ 035 060 ]
P<>: Fault P<<
[ 035 063 ]
P<>: tTransient
pulse PSx
[
*
]
P<>: tTransient
pulse PSx
[
*
]
P<>: tP<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 056 ]
3-284
3-406
Parametersatz 1
satz 2
satz 3
satz 4
P<>: P<
high range PSx
017 013
017 014
017 016
017 020
P<>: Diseng.
ratio P< PSx
017 034
017 035
017 036
017 037
P<>: Operate
delay P< PSx
017 060
017 061
017 062
017 063
P<>: Release
delay P< PSx
017 226
017 227
017 228
017 229
Parametersatz 1
satz 2
satz 3
satz 4
P<>: P<<
high range PSx
017 068
017 021
017 025
017 026
P<>: Diseng.
ratio P<< PSx
017 238
017 239
017 240
017 241
P<>: Operate
delay P<<PSx
017 242
017 243
017 244
017 245
P<>: Release
delay P<<PSx
017 246
017 247
017 248
017 249
P<>: tP<<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 062 ]
P<>: tP</tP<<
elaps.trans
[ 035 178 ]
P<>: tTransient
pulse PSx
018 246
018 247
018 248
018 249
40Z5272A_EN
Active power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Active power direction
when values fall below
set thresholds
If the sign for the active power is positive, a forward-directional decision is issued; if it is
negative, a backward-directional decision results. A setting determines whether a trip
signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a backward-directional or a non-directional
decision.
P<>: Starting
P<
[ 035 054 ]
Apparent
power S
> 0.010 Snom
P<>: Direction
P<
PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Signal
P< delayed
[ 035 055 ]
1: Forward
directional
2: Backward
directional
3: Nondirectional
&
&
&
P<>: Trip
signal P<
[ 035 058 ]
&
P<>: Trip
signal P< trans
[ 035 059 ]
&
P<>: Trip
signal P<<
[ 035 064 ]
&
P<>: Trip sig.
P<< trans.
[ 035 065 ]
>1
&
P<>: tP<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 056 ]
&
P<>: P+
&
402 633
P<>: P-
&
402 634
P<>: Starting
P<<
[ 035 060 ]
P<>: Signal
P<< delayed
[ 035 061 ]
>1
P<>: Direction
P<<
PSx
[
*
]
1: Forward
directional
2: Backward
directional
3: Nondirectional
&
&
>1
&
P<>: tP<<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 062 ]
Parameter- P<>: Direction
P<
PSx
satz 1
017 230
satz 2
017 231
satz 3
017 232
satz 4
017 233
3-285
&
P<>: Direction
P<<
PSx
017 250
017 251
017 252
017 253
&
>1
&
40Z5273B_EN
The direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when values fall below set thresholds
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-407
3 Operation
(continued)
1
P<>: Starting
P<
[ 035 054 ]
P<>: Operate
delay P< PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Release
delay P< PSx
[
*
]
2
P<>: Signal
P< delayed
[ 035 055 ]
P<>: tP<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 056 ]
3
P<>: Fault P<
[ 035 057 ]
1
2
3
Parameter- P<>: Operate
delay P< PSx
satz 1
017 060
satz 2
017 061
satz 3
017 062
satz 4
017 063
P<>: Release
delay P< PSx
017 226
017 227
017 228
017 229
P<>: Operate
delay P< PSx
P<>: Release
delay P< PSx
P<>: tTransient
pulse PSx
*
*
*
P<>: tTransient
pulse PSx
018 246
018 247
018 248
018 249
19Z5278A_EN
3-286
3-408
Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the active power monitoring
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power monitoring
when values fall below
set thresholds
The device monitors the reactive power with two-stage functions to detect when it falls
below the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set.
When the reactive power falls below the set thresholds a starting results. The starting
signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
P<>: Blocking
tQ< EXT
[ 035 052 ]
P<>: Q<
high range PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Diseng.
ratio Q< PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Operate
delay Q< PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Release
delay Q< PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Signal
Q< delayed
[ 035 067 ]
P<>: Q
402 632
Settings block.
P<>: Starting
Q<
[ 035 066 ]
P<>: Fault
Q<
[ 035 069 ]
P<>: Blocking
tQ<< EXT
[ 035 053 ]
P<>: Q<<
high range PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Diseng.
ratio Q<< PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Operate
delay Q<< PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Release
delay Q<< PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Signal
Q<< delayed
[ 035 011 ]
Settings block.
P<>: Starting
Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
P<>: Fault
Q<<
[ 035 049 ]
P<>: tTransient
pulse PSx
[
*
]
P<>: tTransient
pulse PSx
[
*
]
P<>: tQ<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 068 ]
P<>: tQ<<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 016 ]
3-287
Parametersatz 1
satz 2
satz 3
satz 4
P<>: Q<
high range PSx
017 069
017 038
017 039
017 045
P<>: Diseng.
ratio Q< PSx
018 044
018 045
018 046
018 047
P<>: Operate
delay Q< PSx
018 052
018 053
018 054
018 055
P<>: Release
delay Q< PSx
018 056
018 057
018 058
018 059
Parametersatz 1
satz 2
satz 3
satz 4
P<>: Q<<
high range PSx
017 079
017 046
017 049
017 051
P<>: Diseng.
ratio Q<< PSx
018 095
018 096
018 097
018 098
P<>: Operate
delay Q<<PSx
018 213
018 214
018 215
018 216
P<>: Release
delay Q<<PSx
018 236
018 237
018 238
018 239
P<>: tQ</tQ<<
elaps.trans
[ 035 179 ]
P<>: tTransient
pulse PSx
018 246
018 247
018 248
018 249
40Z5276A_EN
Reactive power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-409
3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power direction
when values fall below
set thresholds
If the sign for the reactive power is positive, a forward-directional decision is issued; if it
is negative, a backward-directional decision results. A setting determines whether a trip
signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a backward-directional or a non-directional
decision.
P<>: Starting
Q<
[ 035 066 ]
Apparent
power S
> 0.010 Snom
P<>: Direction Q<
PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Signal
Q< delayed
[ 035 067 ]
1: Forward
directional
2: Backward
directional
3: Nondirectional
&
&
&
P<>: Trip
signal Q<
[ 035 155 ]
&
P<>: Trip sig.
Q< trans.
[ 035 156 ]
&
P<>: Trip
signal Q<<
[ 035 176 ]
&
P<>: Trip sig.
Q<< trans.
[ 035 177 ]
>1
&
P<>: tQ<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 068 ]
&
P<>: Q+
&
402 635
P<>: Q-
>1
&
402 636
P<>: Starting
Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
P<>: Signal
Q<< delayed
[ 035 011 ]
P<>: Direction
Q<<
PSx
[
*
]
1: Forward
directional
2: Backward
directional
3: Nondirectional
&
&
>1
&
P<>: tQ<<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 016 ]
Parameter- P<>: Direction
Q<
PSx
satz 1
018 081
satz 2
018 082
satz 3
018 083
satz 4
018 084
3-288
3-410
&
P<>: Direction
Q<<
PSx
018 242
018 243
018 244
018 245
&
>1
&
40Z5277B_EN
The direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when values fall below set thresholds
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
1
P<>: Starting
Q<
[ 035 066 ]
P<>: Operate
delay Q< PSx
[
*
]
P<>: Release
delay Q< PSx
[
*
]
2
P<>: Signal
Q< delayed
[ 035 067 ]
P<>: tQ<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 068 ]
3
P<>: Fault Q<
[ 035 069 ]
1
2
3
Parameter- P<>: Operate
delay Q< PSx
satz 1
018 052
satz 2
018 053
satz 3
018 054
satz 4
018 055
P<>: Release
delay Q< PSx
018 056
018 057
018 058
018 059
P<>: Operate
delay Q< PSx
P<>: Release
delay Q< PSx
P<>: tTransient
pulse PSx
*
*
*
P<>: tTransient
pulse PSx
018 246
018 247
018 248
018 249
19Z5279A_EN
3-289
Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the reactive power monitoring
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-411
3 Operation
(continued)
Directional power signaling
The active or reactive power direction is signaled when one of the starting signals has
been issued.
Apparent
power S
> 0.010 Snom
P<>: Starting
P>
[ 035 086 ]
P<>: Starting
P>>
[ 035 089 ]
P<>: Starting
P<
[ 035 054 ]
>1
&
P<>: Direction
P forw.
[ 035 181 ]
&
P<>: Direction
P backw.
[ 035 191 ]
P<>: Starting
P<<
[ 035 060 ]
P<>: P+
402 633
P<>: P-
402 634
19Z5274A_EN
3-290
Directional starting signal issued by the active power monitoring
P<>: Q+
402 635
P<>: Q402 636
&
P<>: Direction
Q forw.
[ 035 193 ]
&
P<>: Direction
Q backw.
[ 035 194 ]
P<>: Starting
Q>
[ 035 092 ]
P<>: Starting
Q>>
[ 035 095 ]
P<>: Starting
Q<
[ 035 066 ]
>1
P<>: Starting
Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
Apparent
power S
> 0.010 Snom
19Z5275A_EN
3-291
3-412
Directional starting signal issued by the reactive power monitoring
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.37 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF)
The P437 features the CB failure protection function. After a trip command has been
issued the CBF function monitors that the circuit breaker has actually been triggered.
Disabling or enabling the
CBF function
The activation of the function is enabled at C B F : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . If this
enabling function has been activated, CBF can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The local control
panel and the binary signal inputs have equal status in this regard. If only the function
C B F : E n a b l e E X T is assigned to a binary signal input, then CBF will be enabled by a
positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If only the function
C B F : D i s a b l e E X T has been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this
input will have no effect.
CBF: General
enable USER
[ 022 080 ]
0
1
CBF: Enabled.
[ 040 055 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP: Fct.
assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U
U
U
U
x1
x2
x3
xx
Address 038 041
Address 038 042
CBF: Ext./user
enabled
[ 038 040 ]
CBF: Enable EXT
[ 038 041 ]
CBF: Enable
USER
[ 003 016 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
CBF: Disable EXT
[ 038 042 ]
CBF: Disable
USER
[ 003 015 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
47Z1138A_EN
3-269
Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-413
3 Operation
(continued)
Readiness of circuit
breaker protection
Circuit breaker failure protection will not be available under the following conditions:
The CBF function is not activated.
Circuit breaker protection is being blocked by an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
All CBF timer stages have been set to "blocked".
CBF: enabled
[ 040 055 ]
>1
CBF: Not ready
[ 040 025 ]
&
CBF: Blocking EXT
[ 038 058 ]
CBF: t1 1p
[ 022 164 ]
Blocked
>1
&
CBF: t1 3p
[ 022 165 ]
Blocked
CBF: t2
[ 022 166 ]
Blocked
CBF: Delay/
starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
Blocked
CBF: Delay/
fault beh. CB
[ 022 171 ]
Blocked
CBF: Delay/
CB sync.superv
[ 022 172 ]
Blocked
47Z1130A_EN
3-270
3-414
Signal C B F : N o t r e a d y
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Detecting a CB triggering
A break in current flow is the preferred criterion to detect a successful CB triggering.
Protection functions, that have triggering criteria not directly dependent on current flow
(e.g. V<>), may additionally be provided with status signals from CB auxiliary contacts
for evaluation.
Current flow monitoring
This function is used to detect a break in current flow, i.e. safely, immediately and pole
selectively. The CBF function continuously compares sampled current values with the
set threshold value C B F : I> .
As long as current flow criteria are met the phase-selective signals
C B F : C u r r e n t fl o w A , C B F : C u r r e n t fl o w B , C B F : C u r r e n t fl o w C and the
multiple signal C B F : C urrent fl ow P hx will be continuously issued.
CBF: I>
[ 022 160 ]
IA
IB
IC
>1
CBF: Current flow A
[ 038 230 ]
LSV: Current flow B
[ 038 231 ]
CBF: Current flow C
[ 038 232 ]
CBF: Current
flow Phx
[ 038 233 ]
47Z1139A_EN
3-271
Current flow monitoring
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-415
3 Operation
(continued)
Evaluation of CB status
signals
Trip signals included in the Gen. tri p c omm a n d 1 , which use CB status signals in
addition to current flow monitoring, can be selected with the parameter
CBF: Fct.assignm. CBAux.
Applying CB status signals depends on the type of auxiliary contacts available.
The P437 is capable of checking 3-pole or 1-pole CB status signals for plausibility and
to evaluate them.
The evaluation of the CB status signals is blocked if the configuration of the respective
binary signal inputs or the signal levels are not plausible. This will result in the issuing of
the signal C B F : C B p o s . i m p l a u s i b l e . Evaluation of current criteria are not affected
by this blocking.
CBF 1-pole operating
mode
Circuit breaker failure protection allows 1-pole monitoring and re-tripping of the CB.
For this purpose, setting C B F : T r i p 1 p must be 'Yes'. Then a 1-pole general trip
triggers the 1-pole startup of CBF. Any 3-pole general trip will always trigger the 3-pole
startup of CBF. This happens also, if for instance an initial 1-pole trip is converted to a 3pole trip because of an evolving fault situation.
If C B F : T r i p 1 p is set to 'No', then any general trip 1 (1- or 3-pole) immediately
triggers the 3pole startup of the CBF.
3-416
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Startup criteria
The startup of the circuit breaker failure protection function will occur when the CB is
recognized as closed during a start criterion. The following startup criteria are evaluated:
Internal startup criterion:
The issuing of M A I N : G e n . T r i p s i g n a l 1 is considered as a criterion for a
phase-selective startup of CBF. The startup is either 1-pole or 3-pole, depending on
the trip decision and setting of C B F : T r i p 1 p .
In addition it may be selected, by setting the parameter
C B F : S tar t w i th m an. tr i p, that a manual trip signal will be used as a start
criterion.
External startup criterion:
The trip signal from an external protection device, operating in parallel with the P437,
can be used as a phase-selective ( C B F : S ta r t A E X T , C B F : S ta r t B E X T ,
C B F : S ta r t C E X T ) or a 3-pole (C B F : S ta r t 3 p E X T ) startup criterion.
The startup is either 1-pole or 3-pole, depending on the trip decision and setting
CBF: Trip 1p.
To be on the safe side an additional two pole triggering may be implemented by
applying the signal C B F : S tar t e n a b l e E X T .
In any case, current flow monitoring is the preferred (primary) monitoring criterion. The
CB auxiliary contacts are evaluated when no current flow is registered and the respective
trip signal, included in the Gen. tr i p c om m a n d 1 , has been selected from the
protection function in parameter C B F : F c t.a s s i g n m . C B A u x for the evaluation of
the CB auxiliary contacts.
Timers and tripping logic
Associated timer stages are started when a startup criterion is met.
The signals C B F : T ri p s i g n a l t 1 , X (X = A, B or C) will be issued if the startup
criterion is still present when the time period, set at timer stage C B F : t1 1 p , has
elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip
coil.
The signal C B F : T ri p s i g n a l t 1 will be issued if the startup criterion is still present
when the time period, set at timer stage C B F : t1 3p, has elapsed. The output
command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip coil.
The signal C B F : T ri p s i g n a l t 2 will be issued if the startup criterion is still present
when the time period, set at timer stage C B F : t2, has elapsed. The output
command from this timer stage is intended for a backup circuit breaker or protection
system.
These trip signals will be issued as long as the startup criteria are met.
Should a loss of gas pressure occur in the explosion chambers of installed type SF-6
circuit breakers then all surrounding circuit breakers must be immediately tripped without
waiting for a reaction from the damaged switch. In case of an external CB fault the
elapse of timer stage t2 may be interrupted by a signal to the binary signal input
appropriately configured at C B F : C B fa u l ty E X T .
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-417
3 Operation
(continued)
CBF:Fct.
assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal n
m out of n
Selected signals
LSV: CB pos.
implausible
[ 038 210 ]
CBF: I>
[ 022 160 ]
&
>1
&
IA
&
S 1
1
R 1
MAIN: CB closed
>= 1p
[ 031 038 ]
CBF: Start with
man. trip
[ 022 154 ]
>1
0
1
MAIN: Trip cmd.
blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip
signal 1, A
[ 036 006 ]
MAIN: Manual trip
signal A
[ 034 047 ]
0: No
1: Yes
CBF: Startup A
[ 038 212 ]
>1
&
& >1
INP: Fct.assignm.
U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
x01
x02
x03
xnn
Address 038 209
&
& >1
&
CBF: Start A
>1
310 007
>2
CBF: Start B
&
&
U
U
U
U
CBF: Start
enable EXT
[ 038 209 ]
CBF: Start A
EXT
[ 038 206 ]
CBF: Startup 3p
[ 038 211 ]
& >1
CBF: Start >1p
310 010
310 008
CBF: Start C
310 009
47Z1131A_EN
3-272
3-418
CBF 1-pole startup
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
CBF: Fct.
assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal n
m out of n
Selected signals
CBF: CB pos.
implausible
[ 038 210 ]
CBF: I>
[ 022 160 ]
&
>1
&
IA
IB
>1
&
S 1
1
R 1
IC
MAIN: CB closed
>= 1p
[ 031 038 ]
CBF: Start with
man. trip
[ 022 154 ]
0
1
MAIN: Trip cmd.
blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip
signal 1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
MAIN: Manual trip
signal
[ 034 017 ]
0: No
1: Yes
& >1
>1
&
CBF: Startup 3p
[ 038 211 ]
&
& >1
INP: Fct.assignm.
U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
U
U
U
U
CBF: Start
enable EXT
[ 038 209 ]
CBF: Start 3p
EXT
[ 038 205 ]
CBF: Start >1p
>1
x01
x02
x03
xnn
Address 038 209
&
& >1
&
310 010
47Z1132A_EN
3-273
CBF 3-pole startup
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-419
3 Operation
(continued)
c
CBF: Trip 1p
[ 022 163 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
CBF: Not ready
[ 040 025 ]
CBF: Startup A
[ 038 212 ]
CBF: Startup B
[ 038 213 ]
CBF: Startup C
[ 038 214 ]
c
>1
CBF: t1 1p
[ 022 164 ]
t
0
CBF: Trip
signal t1, A
[ 038 216 ]
CBF: Trip
signal t1, B
[ 038 217 ]
CBF: Trip
signal t1, C
[ 038 218 ]
CBF: Trip
signal t1
[ 038 215 ]
&
&
&
>1
c
CBF: Startup 3p
[ 038 211 ]
t
c
>1
CBF: t1 3p
[ 022 165 ]
0
>1
CBF: CB failure
[ 036 017 ]
CBF: t2
[ 022 166 ]
t
0
t
0
>1
CBF: Trip
signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
>1
CBF: CB faulty
EXT
[ 038 234 ]
3-274
3-420
&
47Z1133A_EN
CBF timer stages
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Trip commands
While trip signals issued by the CB failure protection have no timer stages available the
user can set minimum time delay periods for trip commands.
By appropriate setting it can be selected that trip commands, issued by the CB failure
protection, will operate in latching mode. The respective trip command, set to latch
mode, will remain active until reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately
configured binary signal input.
CBF: Min.dur.
trip cmd. t1
[ 022 167 ]
CBF: Latching
trip cmd. t1
[ 022 169 ]
t
t
t
t
0
1
MAIN: Trip cmd.
blocked
[ 021 013 ]
CBF: Trip
signal t1, A
[ 038 216 ]
0: No
1: Yes
0
0
0
0
>1
CBF: Trip
command t1, A
[ 038 221 ]
>1
CBF: Trip
command t1, B
[ 038 222 ]
>1
CBF: Trip
command t1, C
[ 038 223 ]
>1
CBF: Trip
command t1
[ 038 220 ]
>1
CBF: Trip
command t2
[ 038 224 ]
&
>1
&
S
1 1
R
1
&
CBF: Trip
signal t1, B
[ 038 217 ]
>1
&
S
1 1
R
1
&
CBF: Trip
signal t1, C
[ 038 218 ]
>1
&
S
1 1
R
1
&
CBF: Trip
signal t1
[ 038 215 ]
>1
&
CBF: Latching
trip cmd. t2
[ 022 170 ]
S
1 1
R
1
CBF: Min.dur.
trip cmd. t2
[ 022 168 ]
0
1
t
0: No
1: Yes
CBF: Trip
signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
&
0
>1
&
S
1 1
R
1
MAIN: Rset.latch.
trip USER
[ 021 005 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
>1
1
MAIN: Reset
latch.trip EXT
[ 040 138 ]
3-275
MAIN: Latch.
trip c. reset
[ 040 139 ]
47Z1134A_EN
CBF trip commands
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-421
3 Operation
(continued)
Starting trigger
The signal C B F : S tarti ng will be issued when the signal C B F : S tarti ng tri g. E X T
is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input and a general starting is
present. The signal C B F : T r i p s i g n a l will be issued after timer stage
C B F : D e l a y /s ta r ti n g tr i g . has elapsed.
MAIN: General
starting
[ 036 000 ]
CBF: Starting
trig. EXT
[ 038 016 ]
CBF: Delay/
starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
&
t
0
CBF: Trip signal
[ 040 026 ]
CBF: Starting
[ 038 021 ]
47Z1135A_EN
3-276
3-422
Starting trigger
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault behind CB protection
A fault behind a CB (downstream) is a fault that may occur between a circuit breaker
already open and a CT which is fed from the remote end.
Fault behind CB protection recognizes such faults through the current criterion, if the
circuit breaker does not provide a signal from its auxiliary contacts that it is closed after
the time delay set at C B F : D e l a y / f a u l t b e h . C B has elapsed.
When such a fault behind CB is recognized the signal C B F : F aul t b e h . C B is
issued. In such a case the far end circuit breaker may be triggered by an InterMiCOM
protective interface. This may also prevent an unwanted triggering of the circuit breaker
failure function.
CBF: Delay/
fault beh. CB
[ 022 171 ]
CBF: I>
[ 022 160 ]
>1
IA
IB
IC
MAIN: CB open 3p
EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN: CB closed
3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MAIN: CB closed
A EXT
[ 031 029 ]
MAIN: CB closed
B EXT
[ 031 030 ]
MAIN: CB closed
C EXT
[ 031 031 ]
CBF: CB pos.
implausible
[ 038 210 ]
&
t
0
CBF: Fault
behind CB
[ 038 225 ]
>1
47Z1136A_EN
3-277
Fault behind CB protection
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-423
3 Operation
(continued)
CB synchronization
supervision
CB synchronization supervision recognizes states where not all circuit breaker contacts
are open or closed. This function uses both current flow monitoring and evaluation of CB
status signals to detect CB synchronization. In order to bridge CB operate times the time
delay C B F : D e l a y / C B s y n c h . s u p e r v can be used. When this time period has
elapsed the signal C B F : T r i pS i g C B s y nc h.s u p e r is issued. Poles that are
recognized as being "open" will still be signaled.
CBF: Delay/
CB sync.superv
[ 022 172 ]
CBF: CB pos.
implausible
[ 038 210 ]
MAIN: CB closed
A EXT
[ 031 029 ]
MAIN: CB closed
B EXT
[ 031 030 ]
MAIN: CB closed
C EXT
[ 031 031 ]
&
>1
t
CBF: TripSig
CBsync.super
[ 038 226 ]
0
>1
>1
&
MAIN: CB open 3p
EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN: CB closed
3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
>1
&
<3
&
&
CBF: I>
[ 022 160 ]
IA
IB
IC
CBF: CBsync.
superv A open
[ 038 227 ]
CBF: CBsync.
superv B open
[ 038 228 ]
CBF: CBsync.
superv C open
[ 038 229 ]
>1
47Z1137A_EN
3-278
3-424
CB synchronization supervision
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.38 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT)
Enable/disable the Limit
Value Monitoring function
Limit value monitoring can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter.
Monitoring phase currents
and phase voltages
With the P437 monitoring of the following measured values is possible in order to
determine if they exceed set upper limit values or fall below set lower limit values:
Maximum phase current
Minimum phase current
Maximum phase-to-phase voltage
Minimum phase-to-phase voltage
Maximum phase-to-ground voltage
Minimum phase-to-ground voltage
If any of the measured values exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or lower
limit values, then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-425
3 Operation
(continued)
3-302
3-426
Limit Value Monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-303
Limit Value Monitoring of maximum and minimum phase-to-phase voltage and maximum and minimum phase-to-ground voltage
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-427
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the neutral
displacement voltage
The neutral displacement voltage, calculated from the three phase-to-ground voltages, is
monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds set thresholds. If any of the
thresholds are exceeded, then a signal is issued after the associated time period has
elapsed.
3-304
3-428
Monitoring the neutral displacement voltage
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the linearized
measured DC values
The direct current, linearized by the analog measured data input, is monitored by two
stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of the measured
values exceed or fall below the corresponding upper or lower limit values then a signal is
issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
3-305
Monitoring the linearized measured DC values
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-429
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the measured
temperature value
The temperature that is measured by the P437 using a resistance thermometer is
monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of
the measured values exceed or fall below the corresponding upper or lower limit values
then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
3-306
3-430
Monitoring the measured temperature value
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3.39
Programmable Logic (Function Group LOGIC)
Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals within a
framework of Boolean equations.
Binary signals in the P437 may be linked by logical 'OR' or 'AND' operations with the
option of additional NOT operations by setting L O G I C : F c t . A s s i g n m . O u t p . n ,
where n = 1 to 32. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of
brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: ‘NOT’ before ‘AND’ before ‘OR’.
A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In addition to
the signals generated by the P437, initial conditions for governing the equations can be
set via setting parameters, through binary signal inputs, or through the serial interfaces.
Logical operations can be controlled through the binary signal inputs in different ways.
The binary input signals L O G I C : I n p u t n E X T (n = 1 to 16) have an updating
function, whereas the input signals L O G I C : S e t n E X T (n = 1 to 8) are latched.
The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs configured for
L O G I C : S e t n E X T if the corresponding reset input L O G I C : R e s e t n E X T ) has
been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two functions is
configured, then this is interpreted as ‘Logic externally set’. If the input signals of the two
binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they both have a logic value of ‘1’),
then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
!
When using the programmable logic, the user must carry out a functional type test to
conform with the requirements of the relevant protection/control application.
In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the implementation of logic
linking (by setting) as well as the time performance during device startup, during
operation and when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-431
3 Operation
(continued)
3-307
Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals
The L O G I C : T r i g g e r n signal is a ‘triggering function’ that causes a 100 ms pulse to
be issued.
3-432
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-308
Setting options for programmable logic (shown here for output 1)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-433
3 Operation
(continued)
The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher ordinal number
equation as an input signal thus leading to a set of interlinked Boolean equations. The
equations are processed according to the sequence of their ordinal numbers. It should
be noted that in the case of overlapping equations, the result is provided by the equation
with the highest ordinal number.
The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two timer
elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of assigning a
freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each Boolean equation. In
the Minimum Dwell operating mode, the setting of timer stage t2 has no effect. Figures
3-309 to 3-313 show the time characteristics for the various timer stage operating
modes.
Note:
3-309
3-434
If the device is switched to "offline" the equations are not processed and all
outputs are set to the '0' logic level.
Operating mode 1: Pickup/reset delay
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-310
Operating mode 2: Pulse, delayed pickup
3-311
Operating mode 3: Pickup/reset delay, retriggerable
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-435
3 Operation
(continued)
3-312
Operating mode 4: Pulse, delayed pickup, retriggerable
3-313
Operating mode 5: Minimum Dwell
Through appropriate configuration, it is possible to assign the function of a binary input
signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation then has the
same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has been assigned were
triggered.
3-436
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3 Operation
(continued)
3-314
Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
3-437
3 Operation
(continued)
3-438
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
4 Design
4
Design
The P437 is available in different types of cases and with different combinations of
modules.
The P437 – like all other device types in the MiCOM Px30 system – is equipped with the
standard local control panel (LOC). The local control panel is covered with a tough film
so that the specified degree of IP protection will be maintained. In addition to the
essential control and display elements, a parallel display consisting of a total of 17 LED
indicators is also incorporated. The meaning of the various LED indications is shown in
plain text on a label strip.
The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged cover at
the bottom of the local control panel.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
4-1
4 Design
(continued)
4.1
Design
The P437 is available in either a surface-mounted or a flush-mounted case in
84 TE width.
Electrical connections are made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The threaded
terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the front of the device
after unscrewing the crosshead screws on the sides (see Figure 4-1, |) and removing
the local control panel. The local control panel can then be secured by inserting the tabs
in the slots in the left side wall (see Figure 4-1, ~). The flush-mounted case is
connected at the back of the case.
!
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting
cable. Do not bend the connecting cable! Secure the local control panel by inserting it in
the slots provided on the left.
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the
secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages
will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting
block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening
the threaded terminals.
4-2
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
4 Design
(continued)
4-1
Surface-mounted case, removal of local control panel (example for a 40 T device)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
4-3
4 Design
(continued)
64Y6101B
4-2
4-4
Dimensional drawing of P437 in 84 TE surface-mounted case
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
4 Design
(continued)
49Y6204A
4-3
Dimensional drawing for flush-mounted case 84 T, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm).
The unit has enhanced mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame, see next figure) is used for
the flush-mounted case.
49Y6205A
4
Dimensional drawing for flush-mounted case 84 T, flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm).
The unit has enhanced mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame, as shown in this figure) is
used for the flush-mounted case.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
4-5
4 Design
(continued)
Angle brackets
M6
B6
6.4
Height 204 mm
M6 x 15
Frame
80 mm
Width 2
40 T
se
ca
r
fo
12Y6183A_EN
5
Dimensional drawing for the frame of flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 2
(illustrated here for a 40 T case as an example).
Frame width
for case 84 T: 502 mm
Frame height
for all cases: 204 mm
4-6
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
4 Design
(continued)
4.2
Modules
The P437 is constructed from standard hardware modules. The following table gives an
overview of the modules relevant for the P437
(*: modules that are not shown in the location diagrams, »: optional, ”: standard
equipment, ˚: depending on order).
Type
Item Index Description
number
Width
A 0336 426
J ff
Communication module 1 (For RS 485wire
connection)
4T
»
A 9650 107
A ff
Communication module 1
(For glass fibre, ST connector)
4T
»
A 0336 428
G ff
Communication module 1 (For plastic fibre)
4T
»
A 9650 356
A ff
Communication module 2 (For RS 485wire
connection)
4T
»
A 9650 354
A ff
Communication module 2 (For glass fiber, ST
connector)
4T
»
A 9650 355
A ff
Communication module 2 (For plastic fiber)
4T
»
A 9650 353
A ff
Communication module (IRIG-B only)
4T
»
A 9651 471
E ff
Ethernet module (For 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber,
ST connector and RJ45 wire)
4T
»
A 9651 427
E ff
Ethernet module (For 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber,
SC connector and RJ45 wire)
4T
»
A 9650 827
B ff
InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (RS 485)
4T
»
A 9650 828
B ff
InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (For glass fiber)
4T
»
A 9650 829
B ff
InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (For plastic fiber)
4T
»
A 9650 830
B ff
InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (RS 232)
4T
»
B 0336 188
C ff * Bus module (digital)
”
B 0336 421
B ff * Bus module (analog)
”
L 9651 473
C ff * Local control module (Western European)
”
L 9651 474
B ff * Local control module (Cyrillic)
˚
P 9650 135
C ff
Processor module, 33 MHz
4T
»
P 9651 428
B ff
Processor module, DSP
4T
”
T 9650 307
A ff
Transformer module 4 x I, 4 x V (pin connection)
8T
˚
T 9650 308
A ff
Transformer module 4 x I, 5 x V (pin connection)
8T
˚
T 9650 321
A ff
Transformer module 4 x I, 4 x V (ring connection)
8T
˚
T 9650 322
A ff
Transformer module 5 x I, 4 x V (ring connection)
8T
˚
T 9650 313
A ff
Transformer module 1 x I (pin connection)
8T
˚
T 9650 139
E ff
Transformer module 1 x 0.1A AC (pin connection)
8T
˚
T 9650 327
A ff
Transformer module 1 x I (ring connection)
8T
˚
T 9650 330
A ff
Transformer module 1 x 0.1A AC (ring connection)
8T
˚
V 0337 437
E ff
Power supply module 24 V DC
Standard variant (Switching threshold 18 V)
4T
˚
1 Required for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
2 Required for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS, or DNP 3.0 and Courier protocols
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
4-7
4 Design
(continued)
Type
Item Index Description
number
Width
V 9651 300
A ff
Power supply module 24 V DC,
Switching threshold 73 V
4T
V 9651 328
A ff
Power supply module 24 V DC,
Switching threshold 90 V
4T
V 9651 439
A ff
Power supply module 24 V DC,
Switching threshold 146 V
4T
V 9651 356
A ff
Power supply module 24 V DC,
Switching threshold 155 V
4T
V 0337 191
M ff
Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC /
100 to 230 V AC,
Standard variant (Switching threshold 18 V)
4T
V 9651 301
A ff
Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC /
100 to 230 V AC,
Switching threshold 73 V
4T
V 9651 329
A ff
Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC /
100 to 230 V AC,
Switching threshold 90 V
4T
V 9651 437
A ff
Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC /
100 to 230 V AC,
Switching threshold 146 V
4T
V 9651 357
A ff
Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC /
100 to 230 V AC,
Switching threshold 155 V
4T
X 0336 971
D ff
Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 8 output relays),
Standard variant (Switching threshold 18 V)
4T
{
X 9651 306
A ff
Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 8 output relays),
Switching threshold 73 V
4T
{
X 9651 334
A ff
Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 8 output relays),
Switching threshold 90 V
4T
{
X 9651 445
A ff
Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 8 output relays),
Switching threshold 146 V
4T
{
X 9651 362
A ff
Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 8 output relays),
Switching threshold 155 V
4T
{
X 0336 973
B ff
Binary module (6 output relays)
4T
{
X 9650 341
B ff
Binary module (6 output relays, 4 of these with Triac)
4T
{
Y 0337 406
D ff
Analog I/O module,
Standard variant (Switching threshold 18 V)
4T
{
Y 9651 307
A ff
Analog I/O module, Switching threshold 73 V
4T
{
Y 9651 335
A ff
Analog I/O module, Switching threshold 90 V
4T
{
Y 9651 446
A ff
Analog I/O module, Switching threshold 146 V
4T
{
Y 9651 363
A ff
Analog I/O module, Switching threshold 155 V
4T
{
The space available for the modules measures 4 H in height by 84 T in width
(H = 44.45 mm, T = 5.08 mm). The location of the individual modules and the position of
the threaded terminal blocks in the P437 are shown at the end of Chapter 5.
4-8
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5 Installation and connection
5
Installation and Connection
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this
manual, may work on or operate this device.
The instructions given in the “Protective and Operational Grounding” section should be
noted. In particular, check that the protective ground connection is secured with a tooth
lock washer, as per the diagram “Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal”.
If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it, then the protective
grounding should be checked again.
The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module must not be connected at the
same time. (The selection for IE C : E th e r n e t M e d i a should be noted.)
5.1
Unpacking and Packing
All P437 units are packaged separately in their own cartons and shipped inside outer
packaging. Use special care when opening cartons and unpacking devices, and do not
use force. In addition, make sure to remove supporting documents and the type
identification label supplied with each individual device from the inside carton.
The design revision level of each module included in the device when shipped can be
determined from the list of components (assembly list). This list of components should
be filed carefully.
After unpacking, each device should be inspected visually to confirm it is in proper
mechanical condition.
If the P437 needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used. If the
original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms to
DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height ≤ 0.8 m.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5-1
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
5.2
Checking Nominal Data and Design Type
The nominal data and design type of the P437 can be determined by checking the type
identification label (see figure 5-1). One type identification label is located under the
upper hinged cover on the front panel and a second label can be found on the inside of
the device. Another copy of the type identification label is fixed to the outside of the
P437 packaging.
P437
P437-XXXXXXX-3XX-4XX/4XX-61X
Unom / NE,nom = 50 ... 130 V
Inom = 1 / 5 A
Diagram
IE,nom = 1 / 5 A IEP,nom =
UH,nom =
UE,nom = 24
Specification
EN 60255-6 / IEC 255-6
5-1
P437.4XX
xx.yy
fnom = 50/60 Hz
A
... 250 V DC
CE
F 6.xxxxxx.y
P437 type identification label
The P437 design version can be determined from the order number. A breakdown of the
order number is given in Chapter 14 of this manual and in the supporting documents
supplied with the unit.
5.3
Location Requirements
The P437 has been designed to conform to DIN 57 435 part 303. Therefore it is
important when choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the
operating conditions as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.2 to 3.4. Several of
these important operating conditions are listed below.
Environmental Conditions
Ambient temperature: -5 °C to +55 °C [+23 °F to +131 °F]
Air pressure:
800 to 1100 hPa
Relative humidity:
The relative humidity must not result in the formation of
either condensed water or ice in the P437.
Ambient air:
The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust,
smoke, gases or vapors, or salt.
Solar Radiation:
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be
avoided to ensure that the LC-Display remains readable.
Vibration stress:
10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Mechanical conditions
2
Earthquake resistance:
5 ... 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 ... 35 Hz, 5 m/s ,
3 x 1 cycle
Operating range:
0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
Electrical conditions for
auxiliary voltage of the
power supply
Electromagnetic conditions
Substation secondary system design must follow the best of modern practices,
especially with respect to grounding and EMC.
5-2
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
5.4
Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given in
Chapter 4. When the P437 is surface-mounted on a panel, the wiring to the P437 is
normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the wiring is to be at the back,
an opening can be provided above or below the surface-mounted case. Figure 5-2
shows such an opening below the surface-mounted case.
5-2
Opening for running the wiring to the 84 T surface-mounted case
(dimensions in mm)
Flush-mounted cases are designed for control panels. The dimensions and mounting
dimensions are given in Chapter 4. When the P437 is mounted on a cabinet door,
special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree of protection required for
the cabinet (IP 51). Figures 5-3 to 5-4 show the required panel cutouts for both
mounting methods.
Instructions for selecting the flush-mount method:
As of May 2005, the P437 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surfacemounted case or – for the flush-mounted case –flush-mount method 2 (with angle
brackets and frame) is used. In this case, test severity class 2 of the vibration test, test
severity class of the shock resistance test on operability as well as test severity class 1
of the shock resistance test on permanent shock are applied additionally.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5-3
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
5-3
Panel cutout for the 84 T flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame)
The P437 has increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is used for
the flush-mounted cases.
5-4
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
5-4
Panel cutout for the 84 T flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm)
The P437 has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is used
for the flush-mounted cases.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5-5
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
For flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame), the procedure is as
follows:
Before the P437 can be installed into a control panel, the local control panel must be
removed. The local control panel is removed as described below:
Remove both top and bottom hinged flaps from the device. (Lift/lower both hinged
flaps 180°up/down. Hold them in the middle and bend them slightly. The side
mountings of both hinged flaps can then be disengaged.).
Remove the M3 screws (see figure 5-5).
Then remove the local control panel.
!
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting
cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable!
Then remove the lower M4 screws and loosen the upper M4 screws (see figure 5-5).
Now insert the P437 into the panel opening from the rear so that the upper M4 screws fit
into the corresponding holes. Then tighten all the M4 screws. After this, replace the
local control panel.
Note:
5-6
If the control panel thickness ≥ 2 mm, the longer M3 and M4 bolts must be
used. Longer screws are enclosed within the device packing.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
5-5
Installation of a case 84 T into a control panel, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame).
Example for a device in a 40 T case.
The P437 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or – for the flush-mounted case –flush-mount method 2
(with angle brackets and frame, see figure 5-7) is used.
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5-7
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
For flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame), the procedure is as
follows:
Remove the screws as shown in Figure 5-6, c and mount the enclosed angle
brackets using these same screws.
Then push the device into the control panel cutout from the front.
Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws (see
figure 5-7).
Assemble the cover frame and snap-fasten onto the fixing screws.
5-6
5-8
Mounting the angle brackets
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
5-7
Installation of a case 84 T into a control panel, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
Example for a device in a 40 T case.
The P437 has an increased mechanical robustness, if either the surface-mounted case or - for the flush-mounted case – if flush-mount
method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is used.
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5-9
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
The flush-mounted cases are also suitable for installation in enclosures or cubicles
equipped with a 19" mounting rack. Figure 5-8 shows this type of installation.
5-8
Installation of the P437 in a cabinet with a 19" mounting rack
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5
5-10
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
5.5
Protective and Operational Grounding
The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment grounding
requirements. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut,
appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be
grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-section
of the ground conductor must conform to applicable national standards. A minimum
cross section of 2.5 mm2 is required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply
module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is also
required for proper operation of the device. The cross-section of this ground conductor
must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of
1.5 mm2 is required.
The grounding connection at both locations must be low-inductance, i.e. it must be kept
as short as possible.
19Y5220A_EN
5-9
Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal
the bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5-11
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
5.6
Connection
The P437 must be connected in accordance with the terminal connection diagram
indicated on the type identification label. The terminal connection diagram is included in
the supporting documents supplied with the device. The terminal connection diagrams
that apply to the P437 are also to be found in the Appendix to this operating manual.
In general copper conductors with a cross section of 2.5 mm² are sufficient to connect a
system current transformer to a current input on the P437. To reduce CT knee-point
voltage requirements, it may be necessary to install shorter copper conductors with a
greater cross section between the system current transformers and the current inputs on
the P437. Copper conductors having a cross section of 1.5 mm2 are adequate to
connect the binary signal inputs, the signaling and tripping circuits and the power supply
input.
All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential. Connections
that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and
output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to
common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the
common potential of the grouped connections.
5.6.1
Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
Power supply
Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P437 power supply, it must be ensured
that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with the nominal value
of the auxiliary system voltage.
Current-measuring inputs
When connecting the system transformers, it must be ensured that the secondary
nominal currents of the system and the device correspond.
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the
secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages
will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting
block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening
the threaded terminals.
Connecting the measuring
circuits
The system current transformers must be connected in accordance with the standard
schematic diagram shown in Figure 5-10 . It is essential that the grounding configuration
shown in the diagram be followed. If the CT or VT connection is reversed, this can be
taken into account when making settings (see Chapter 7).
5-12
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
5-10
Standard schematic connection diagram for the P437
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5-13
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
Connecting a resistance
thermometer
A resistance thermometer can be connected if the device is fitted with analog module Y.
This analog I/O module input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer.
The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire method (see figure 5-11). No supply
conductor compensation is required in this case.
5-11
Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method
Connecting binary inputs
and output relays
The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable.
The polarity for connected binary inputs is to be found in the terminal connection
diagrams (see supporting documents supplied with the device or in the Appendix). This
is to be understood as a recommendation only. Connection to binary inputs can be
made as desired.
5-14
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
5.6.2
Connecting the IRIG-B interface.
An IRIG-B interface for time synchronization may be installed as an optional feature. It is
connected by a BNC connector. A coaxial cable having a characteristic impedance of
50 Ω must be used as the connecting cable.
5.6.3
Connecting the Serial Interfaces
PC interface
The PC interface is provided so that personnel can operate the device from a personal
computer (PC).
The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection. Consequently, the female
connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is
required per VDE 0106 Part 101.
Communication interface
The communication interface is provided as a permanent connection of the device to a
control system for substations or to a central substation unit. Depending on the type,
communication interface 1 on the device is connected either by a special fiber-optic
connector or a RS 485 interface with twisted pair copper wires. Communication
interface 2 is only available as a RS 485 interface.
The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable requires
special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this operating manual.
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply
voltage for the device is shut off.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5-15
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
An RS485 data transmission link between a master and several slave devices can be
established by using the optional communication interface. The communication master
could be, for instance, a central control station. Devices linked to the communication
master, e.g. P437, are set-up as slave devices.
The RS 485 interface available on the P437 was designed so that data transfer in a full
duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between devices. Data
transfer between devices using the RS 485 interface is set up only for a half duplex
transmission mode. To connect the RS485 communication interface the following must
be observed:
Only twisted pair shielded cables must be used, that are common in
telecommunication installations.
At least one symmetrical twisted pair of wires is necessary.
Strip cable cores and cable shield right at the connection point and connect properly
in accordance with specifications.
All shielding must be connected to an effective protective ground surface at both
ends.
Unused conductors must all be grounded at one end.
A 4-wire data link as an alternative to a 2-wire communications link is also possible. A
cable with two symmetrical twisted pair wires is required for a 4-wire data link. A 2-wire
data link is shown in Figure 5-12, and a 4-wire data link is shown in Figure 5-13 as an
example for channel 2 on the communication module. The same is valid if channel 1 on
the communication module is available as a RS 485 interface.
2-wire data link:
The transmitter must be bridged with the receiver on all devices equipped electrically
with a full duplex communication interface, e.g. the P437. The two devices situated at
either far end must have a 200 to 220 Ω resistor installed to terminate the data
transmission conductor. In most AREVA MiCOM Px3x devices, and also in the P437, a
220 Ω resistor is integrated into the RS485 interface hardware and can be connected
with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not necessary.
4-wire data link:
Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in the device situated on one far end of the
data transmission conductor. The receivers of slave devices, that have an electrically
full-duplex communication interface as part of their electrical system, e.g. the P437, are
connected to the transmitter of the communication master device, and the transmitters of
slave devices are connected to the receiver of the master device. Devices equipped
electrically with only a half duplex RS485 communication interface are connected to the
transmitter of the communication master device. The last device in line (master or slave
device) on the data transmission conductor must have the transmitter and receiver
terminated with a 200 to 220 Ω resistor each. In most AREVA MiCOM Px3x devices,
and also in the P437, a 220 Ω resistor is integrated into the RS485 interface hardware
and can be connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not
necessary. The second resistor must be connected externally to the device (resistor
order number see Chapter 13).
5-16
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
XXXX
Px3x
First participant
Last participant
connect. to the line
connect. to the line
(e.g. the master)
Px3x
XXXX
Device with halfDuplex interface
5-12
2-wire data link
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5-17
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
XXXX
Px3x
First participant
Last participant
connect. to the line
connect. to the line
(e.g. the master)
Px3x
XXXX
Device with halfduplex interface
5-13
5-18
4-wire data link
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
5.7
Location Diagrams
P437 in case 84 TE for pin-terminal connection, diagram P437-408
CH1
CH2
4J
4/5V
ETH
CH2
1J
4I
6I
8O
6I
8O
6I
8O
6I
8O
6O
4I
8O
CH3
P437 in case 84 TE for ring-terminal connection, diagram P437-409
CH1
CH2
ETH
CH2
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
CH3
5-19
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
5.8
Transformer
module
Ring
Pin
X031 X031
Type T
4J / 4/5V
Voltage measuring
inputs
13
1
VA
14
2
VB
15
3
VC
16
4
17
5
18
6
VNG
T5
T6
T7
T90
Option:
11
7
12
8
X032
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
5-20
VRef
Transformer
module
Ring
Pin
X051 X052
1
1
2
2
Terminal Connection Diagrams
Type T
1J
Current measuring
input
IN,par
T24
Ring
Pin
Ring
Pin
Ring
Pin
X_1
X_1
X_1
X_1
X_1
X_1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
T15
X_2
Current measuring
inputs
IA
T1
IB
IC
T2
X_2
10
1
10
1
11
2
11
2
10
1
12
3
12
3
11
2
13
4
13
4
12
3
14
5
14
5
13
4
15
6
15
6
14
5
16
7
16
7
15
6
17
8
17
8
16
7
17
8
18
9
T3
18
IN
X_2
9
T4
Vin
18
X_3
19
1
20
2
21
3
22
4
23
5
24
6
25
7
26
8
27
9
9
Vin
Vin
Vin
Vaux
1
20
2
21
3
22
4
23
5
24
6
25
7
26
8
27
9
1)
Vin
X_3
X_3
19
1)
Vin
Vin
Vin
Vin
19
1
20
2
21
3
22
4
23
5
24
6
25
7
26
8
27
9
1)
1)
Vin
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
Ring
Pin
X_1
X_1
1
1
X7
X7
2
2
1
RX
3
3
X8
X8
4
4
1
TX
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
valid
0..20 mA
X9
1
X13
2
RX
3
4
valid
X_2
TX
5
10
1
11
2
12
3
0..20 mA
X12
1
13
4
X10
14
5
1
15
6
2
16
7
3
17
8
18
9
Vin
Vin
Vin
4
5
X10
1
2
3
4
X11
Vin
X_3
5
1
19
1
20
2
21
3
22
4
23
5
24
6
0..20 mA
PT100
Notes:
‘_‘ is used as a wildcard for the location.
1)
Binary module X (6O) optional with 4 static outputs, in parallel with NO contact
K_02.2, K_03.1, K_04, K_05.
See also section 5.5 “Protective and Operational Grounding“.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
5-21
5 Installation and connection
(continued)
5-22
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6 Local Control Panel
6
Local Control Panel
Local control panel
All data required for operation of the protection device is entered from the local control
panel, and the data important for system management is read out there as well.
The following tasks can be handled from the local control panel:
Readout and modification of settings
Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic status signals
Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs
Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short circuits in the
power system
Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in testing and
commissioning
Control through the PC interface is also possible. This requires a suitable PC and
operating program (MiCOM S1).
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6-1
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
6.1
Display and Keypad
Control and display
elements
The local control panel consists of an LCD display containing 4 x 20 alphanumeric
characters, seven function keys positioned below the display, and 17 LED indicators.
6-1
6-2
View of the local control panel
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
Display levels
All data relevant for operation and all device settings is displayed on two levels. At the
Panel level, data such as measurements are displayed in Panels that provide a quick
overview of the current state of the bay. The menu tree level below the panel level
allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals, measured variables, etc.) and
to change them, if appropriate. To access a selected event recording from either the
panel level or from any other point in the menu tree, press the READ key
.
Measured Value
Panels
Recordings
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Operat. data record.
Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
+
Parameters
Operation
Events
Device ID
Cyclic measurements
Event counters
Configuration parameters
C
Function parameters
G
Global
General functions
Parameter subset 1
Control and testing
Operating data recording
Measured fault data
Event recordings
Measured operating data
Physical state signals
Logic state signals
Parameter subset ...
Menu tree
6-2
Display panels and menu tree
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6-3
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
Display panels
The P437 can display 'Measured Value Panels' which are selected automatically by the
device according to system conditions.
Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. The system
condition determines which Panel is called up (examples are the Operation Panel and
the Fault Panel). Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design
version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available.
The Operation Panel is always provided.
Menu tree and data points
All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using a menu
tree. When navigating through the menu tree, the first two lines of the LC-Display
always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected by the user.
The data points are found at the lowest level of a menu tree branch and they are
displayed either with their plain text description or in numerically encoded form, as
selected by the user. The value associated with the selected data point, its meaning,
and its unit of measurement are displayed in the line below.
List data points
List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data points
generally have more than one associated value element. This category includes tripping
matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When a list data point is
selected, the symbol ‘↓‘ is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD, indicating that a sublevel is situated below this displayed level. The individual value elements of a list data
point are found at this sub-level. In the case of a list parameter, the individual value
elements are linked by operators such as ‘OR’.
6-4
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
Short description of keys
G
‘Up’ and ‘Down’ Keys
/
Panel Level:
The ‘up’/‘down’ keys switch between the pages of the Measured Value Panel.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys to navigate up and down through the menu tree in a
vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys have a different
function.
Input mode:
Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys in this mode to change
the setting value.
(‘Up’ key:
the next higher value is selected.
‘Down’ key:
the next lower value is selected.)
With list settings, press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ key to change the logic operator of the
value element.
/
‘Left’ and ‘Right’ Keys
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys to navigate through the menu tree in a horizontal
direction. If the unit is in input mode, the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys have a different
function.
Input mode:
Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys are pressed, the cursor
positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled value moves one digit to the
right or left.
(‘Left’ key:
the cursor moves to the next digit on the left.
‘Right’ key:
the cursor moves to the next digit on the right.)
In the case of a list setting, press the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys to navigate through the list
of items available for selection.
G
ENTER Key
Panel Level:
Press the ENTER key at the Panel level to go to the menu tree.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. Press the ENTER key a second time
to accept the changes as entered and exit the input mode. The LED indicator labeled
EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is active.
CLEAR Key C
Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event data.
The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
Input mode:
When the CLEAR key is pressed all changes entered are rejected and the input mode
is exited.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6-5
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
READ Key
Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel level
or from any other point in the menu tree.
The following presentation of the individual control steps shows which displays can be
changed in each case by pressing keys. A small black square to the right of the enter
key indicates that the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is illuminated. The examples
used here are not necessarily valid for the device type described in this manual; they
merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved.
6.2
Changing between Display Levels
After start-up of the device, the menu tree level is displayed.
Control Step / Description
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
No (=off)
jump to the Panel Level from any position
within the menu tree.
1 First press the ‘up’ key and hold it down
+
while pressing the CLEAR key.
Note:
It is important to press the ‘up’ key first and
release it last in order to avoid unintentional
resetting of stored data.
0 Example of a Measured Value Panel.
1 Press the ENTER key to go from the Panel
C
Voltage C-A prim.
20.8 kV
Current A prim.
415 A
Voltage C-A prim.
20.8 kV
Current A prim.
415 A
G
Jumping from Panel Level to
Menu Tree Level
Display
0 From the Menu Tree Level, the user can
G
Jumping from Menu Tree
Level to Panel Level
Control
Action
XX YYY
Level to the Menu Tree Level.
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: 'Par/Conf/LOC'), the display
will automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has been
configured.
6-6
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
6.3
Display Illumination
If none of the control keys is pressed, the display illumination will switch off once the set
"hold" time has elapsed (‘Backlight time’ setting in the menu tree at ‘Par/Conf/LOC’).
Pressing any of the control keys will turn the display illumination on again. In this case
the control action that is normally triggered by that key will not be executed. Reactivation
of the display illumination is also possible by using a binary input.
If continuous display illumination is required, the function ‘return time illumination’ is set
to ‘blocked’.
6.4
Control at Panel Level
The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can first be
selected in the menu tree under Par/Conf/LOC. The user can select different sets of
measured values for the Operation Panel, the Overload Panel, the Ground Fault Panel,
and the Fault Panel. Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design
version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available.
The selected set of values for the Operation Panel is always available. Please see the
section entitled ‘Setting a List Parameter’ for instructions regarding selection. If the
M A I N : W i t h o u t f u n c t i o n setting has been selected for a given panel, then that
panel is disabled.
The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for
example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the corresponding
Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or ground fault situation
exists. If the device detects a fault, then the Fault Panel is displayed and remains active
until the measured fault values are reset, by pressing the CLEAR key, for example.
Control Step / Description
Control
Action
0 Up to six selected measured values can be
Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
displayed simultaneously on the Panel.
been selected, they can be viewed one page at
a time by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys. The
device will also show the next page of the
Measured Value Panel after the set Hold-time
for Panels (setting in menu tree:
"Par/Conf/LOC") has elapsed.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
G
1 If more than two measured values have
Display
or
Voltage C-A prim.
20.8 kV
Current A prim.
415 A
6-7
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
6.5
6.5.1
Control at the Menu Tree Level
Navigation in the Menu Tree
Folders and function
groups
All data points are organized in different folders based on practical control requirements.
At the root of the menu tree is the unit type; the tree branches into the three main folders
Parameters, Operation, and Events, which form the first folder level. Up to two further
folder levels follow so that the entire folder structure consists of three main branches and
a maximum of three folder levels.
At the end of each branch of folders are the various function groups in which the
individual data points (settings) are combined.
6-3
6-8
Unit
type
PX yyy
Folder
plane 1
PX yyy
Parameters
PX yyy
Operation
Folder
plane 2
Oper/
Cyclic measurements
Folder
plane 3
Oper/Cycl/
Meas. operating data
Function
groups
Oper/Cycl/Data/
MAIN
Data
points
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN
Date
01.01.99 dd.mm.yy
PX yyy
Events
Basic menu tree structure
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
6.5.2
Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode
The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode and plain
text mode. In the address mode the display shows settings, signals, and measured
values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain text mode the settings,
signals, and measured values are displayed in the form of plain text descriptions. In
either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The active branch of the menu tree is
displayed in plain text in both modes. In the following examples, the display is shown in
plain text mode only.
Control Step / Description
Control
Action
0 In this example, the user switches from plain
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
No (=off)
text mode to address mode.
1 To switch from address mode to plain text
C
+
mode or vice versa, press the CLEAR key and or
either the ‘left’ key or the ‘right’ key
simultaneously. This can be done at any point C +
in the menu tree.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Display
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
003.030
0
6-9
9
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
6.5.3
Change-Enabling Function
Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the associated
value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the input mode. This
safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings.
There are two ways to enter the input mode.
Global change-enabling
function
To activate the global change-enabling function, set the ‘Param. change enabl.’
parameter to ‘Yes’ (menu tree: ‘Oper/CtrlTest/LOC’).
The change can only be made after the password has been entered. Thereafter, all
further changes – with the exception of specially protected control actions (see the
section entitled ‘Password-Protected Control Actions’) – are enabled without entering
the password.
Selective change-enabling
function
Password input prior to any setting change.
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global
change-enabling function has been activated. The following example is based on the
factory-set password. If the password has been changed by the user (see the section
entitled 'Changing the Password'), the following description will apply accordingly.
Control Step / Description
Control
Action
0 In the menu tree ‘Oper/CtrlTest/LOC’, select
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
G
‘Right’
G
‘left’
G
2 Press the following keys in sequence:
G
Eight asterisks (*)
appear in the fourth line of the display.
G
the ‘Param. change enabl.’ parameter.
1 Press the ENTER key.
G
G
‘up’
6-10
G
G
‘down’ The
display will change as shown in the column on
the right.
Display
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
********
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
*
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
*
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
*
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
*
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
Control Step / Description
Control
Action
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This
indicates that the setting can now be changed
by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys.
Display
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
If an invalid password has been entered, the
display shown in Step 1 appears.
The LED
indicator will go out. The unit is enabled for
further setting changes.
G
G
4 Press the ENTER key again.
G
3 Change the setting to ‘Yes’.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
Yes
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
Yes
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global change-enabling
function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single setting change
only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global change-enabling function is
preferable. In the following examples, the global change-enabling function has been
activated.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6-11
11
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
Automatic return
The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from remaining
activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set return time (menu
tree ‘Par/Conf/LOC’) has elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically
deactivated, and the display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the
current system condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is
pressed.
Forced return
The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by first pressing
the ‘up’ key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key.
Note:
It is important to press the ‘up’ key first and release it last in order to avoid
unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be changed.
For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function (menu
tree: Par/Func/Glob/MAIN, 'Protection enabled'). Such settings include the configuration
settings, by means of which the device interfaces can be adapted to the system. The
following entries in the "Change" column of the address list (see appendix) indicate
whether values can be changed or not:
"on": The value can be changed even when the protective function is enabled.
"off": The value can only be changed when the protective function is disabled.
"-": The value can be read out but cannot be changed.
The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled.
6-12
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
6.5.4
Changing Parameters
If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied (see above), the desired setting can
be entered.
Control Step / Description
Control
Action
0 Example of a display.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
Yes
In this example, the change-enabling function
is activated and the protective function is
disabled, if necessary.
G
keys.
G
1 Select the desired setting by pressing the
2 Press the ENTER key.
The LED indicator
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The last digit
of the value is highlighted by a cursor
(underlined).
5 Press the ENTER key.
The LED indicator
labeled EDIT MODE will go out and the device
will now operate with the new value. Press the
keys to select another setting for a value
change.
6 If you wish to reject the new setting while
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled
EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The
LED indicator will go out and the device will
continue to operate with the old value. A
further setting can be selected for a value
change by pressing the keys.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
G
G
by pressing the ‘up’ and ’down’ keys. In the
meantime the device will continue to operate
with the old value.
G
4 Change the value highlighted by the cursor
G
cursor to the left or right.
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
G
3 Press the ‘left’ or ’right’ keys to move the
Display
C
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50010 s
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50010 s
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
6-13
13
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
6.5.5
Setting a List Parameter
Using list settings, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order to
perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measurements that will be
displayed on Measured Value Panels. The maximum possible number ’m’ that can be
selected out of the total number ’n’ of the set is given in the address list in the ’Remarks’
column. As a rule, the selected elements are linked by an ‘OR’ operator. Other
operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and NOT AND) are available in the LOGIC function
group for linking the selected list items. In this way binary signals and binary input
signals can be processed in a Boolean equation tailored to meet user requirements. For
the DNP 3.0 communication protocol, the user defines the class of a setting instead of
assigning operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used here as an
illustration.
Control Step / Description
Control
Action
0 Select a list setting (in this example, the
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
parameter 'Fct.assign.trip cmd.' at
‘Par/Func/Glob/ MAIN’ in the menu tree). The
down arrow (È) indicates that a list setting has
been selected.
by pressing the ‘right’ and ’left’ keys.
G
G
2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions
G
The first function and
the first selected signal will appear in the third
and fourth lines, respectively. The symbol
‘#01’ in the display indicates the first item of the
selection. If 'MAIN: Without function’ appears
for the first item, then this means that no
function assignment has been made yet.
G
1 Press the ‘down’ key.
Once the end of the list is reached, the display
shown on the right will appear.
6-14
G
G
G
‘up’ and ’down’ keys. In this particular case,
only the ‘OR’ operator can be selected. There
is no limitation on the selection of classes.
G
5 Select the operator or the class using the
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
OR
#02 DIST
Trip zone 2
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
#02 DIST
Trip zone 2
list. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE
will light up.
pressing the ‘right’ and ‘left’ keys in the input
mode.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
#01 DIST
Trip zone 1
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
#05 MAIN
?????
3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the
4 Scroll through the assignable functions by
Display
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
#02 DIST
Trip zone 4
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
OR
#02 DIST
Trip zone 4
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
6 Press the ENTER key.
The LED indicator
will go out. The assignment has been made.
The unit will now operate with the new settings.
Control
Action
G
Control Step / Description
Display
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
OR
#02 DIST
Trip zone 4
If no operator has been selected, the ‘OR’
operator is always assigned automatically
when the ENTER key is pressed. There is no
automatic assignment of classes.
8 If you wish to reject the new setting while
G
in the list.
G
7 Press the ‘up’ key to exit the list at any point
C
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled
EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
OR
#02 DIST
Trip zone 2
Deleting a list setting
If ‘MAIN: Without function’ is assigned to a given item, then all the following items are
deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted.
6.5.6
Memory Readout
Memories can be read out after going to the corresponding entry point. This does not
necessitate activating the change-enabling function or even disabling the protective
functions. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not possible.
The following memories are available:
In the menu tree ‘Oper/Rec/OP_RC’: Operating data memory
In the menu tree ‘Oper/Rec/MT_RC’: Monitoring signal memory
Event memories
„
In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/FT_RC’: Fault memories 1 to 8
„
In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/OL_RC’: Overload memories 1 to 8
„
In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/GF_RC’: Ground fault memories 1 to 8
Not all of these event memories are present in each unit.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6-15
15
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
Readout of the operating
data memory
The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during
operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of 100
entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten.
Control Step / Description
Control
Action
0 Select the entry point for the operating data
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Operat. data record.
memory.
4 Press the ‘up’ key at any point within the
operating data memory to return to the entry
point.
6-16
G
G
G
entry.
G
3 Press the ‘right’ key to display the previous
G
entries one after the other in chronological
order. Once the end of the operating data
memory has been reached, pressing the ‘left’
key again will have no effect.
G
2 Press the ‘left’ key repeatedly to display the
G
data memory. The latest entry is displayed.
G
1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the operating
Display
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 11:33 ARC
Enabled USER
No
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 10:01 PSIG
Enabled USER
Yes
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 11:33 ARC
Enabled USER
No
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Operat. data record.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
Readout of the monitoring
signal memory
If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring routines or if it
detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning of the unit, then an
entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum of 30 entries is possible.
After that an ‘overflow’ signal is issued.
Control Step / Description
Control
Action
0 Select the entry point for the monitoring
Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
signal memory.
3 Press the ‘left’ key to display the previous
entry.
G
G
G
the entries one after the other in chronological
order. If more than 30 monitoring signals have
been entered since the last reset, the ‘overflow’
signal is displayed as the last entry.
G
2 Press the ‘right’ key repeatedly to display
G
signal memory. The oldest entry is displayed.
G
1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the monitoring
4 If the ‘down’ key is held down while a
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
G
G
G
monitoring signal memory to return to the entry
point.
G
5 Press the ‘up’ key at any point within the
Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
Checksum error param
Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 10:01 SFMON
Exception oper. syst.
Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
Checksum error param
Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
Checksum error param
monitoring signal is being displayed, the
following additional information will be
displayed:
First:
Time when the signal first occurred
Currently: The fault is still being detected
(Yes) or is no
longer detected (No) by the selfmonitoring function.
Reset:
The fault was no longer detected by
the self-monitoring function and
has been reset (Yes).
Number: The signal occurred x times.
Display
First:
13:33:59.744
Active: Yes
Reset:
No
Number:
5
Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
6-17
17
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
Readout of the event
memories (records)
There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored in
event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth.
Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example.
Control Step / Description
Control
Action
0 Select the entry point for the first fault
Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
01.01.99 10:00:33
memory, for example. If the memory contains
entries, the third line of the display will show
the date and time the fault began. If the third
line is blank, then there are no entries in the
fault memory.
1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the fault
G
G
memory. First, the fault number is shown. In
this example it is the 22nd fault since the last
reset.
2 Press the ‘right’ key repeatedly to see first
G
G
the measured fault data and then the binary
signals in chronological order. The time shown
in the second line is the time, measured from
the onset of the fault, at which the value was
measured or the binary signal started or ended.
Once the end of the fault has been reached
(after the ‘right’ key has been pressed
repeatedly), pressing the ‘right’ key again will
have no effect.
G
G
G
G
3 Press the ‘left’ key to see the previous
G
G
measured value or the previous signal.
6-18
G
fault memory to return to the entry point.
G
4 Press the ‘up’ key at any point within the
Display
Fault recording 1
FT_RC
Event
22
Fault recording 1
200 ms
FT_DA
Running time
0.17 s
Fault recording 1
0 ms
FT_RC
Record. in progress
Start
Fault recording 1
241 ms
FT_RC
Record. in progress
End
Fault recording 1
0 ms
FT_RC
Record. in progress
Start
Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
01.01.99 10:00:33
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
6.5.7
Reset
All information memories – including the event memories and the monitoring signal
memory – as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition, the LED
indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new fault – provided
that the appropriate operating mode has been selected – so that they always indicate the
latest fault.
The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which is
always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED indicator
test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by this action, so that
inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset signal pattern is reliably
prevented.
Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight consecutive
events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should not be necessary, in
principle. If the event memories need to be cleared completely, however, as would be
the case after injection testing, this can be done after selecting the appropriate setting.
The resetting procedure will now be illustrated using the fault memory as an example.
In this example the global change-enabling function has already been activated.
Control Step / Description
Control
Action
0 Select the reset setting.
Line 3 of the
display shows the number of faults since the
last reset, 10 in this example.
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
1 Press the ENTER key.
The LED indicator
labeled EDIT MODE will light up.
3 Press the ENTER key.
The LED indicator
labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The value in
line 3 is reset to ‘0’.
4 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault
recordings after leaving the standard control
mode (the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE
is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED
indicator will go out, and the fault recordings
remain stored in the device unchanged. Any
setting can be selected again for a value
change by pressing the keys.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
G
G
setting to ‘Execute’.
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
Don't execute
G
2 Press the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys to change the
Display
C
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
Execute
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
0
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
6-19
19
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
6.5.8
Password-Protected Control Actions
Certain actions from the local control panel (such as a manual trip command for testing
purposes) can only be carried out by entering a password.
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global
change-enabling function has been activated. The password consists of a pre-defined
sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. If the password has
been changed by the user (see the section entitled 'Changing the Password'), the
following description will apply accordingly.
Control Step / Description
Control
Action
0 In the menu tree ‘Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN’,
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
G
‘Right’
G
‘left’
G
2 Press the following keys in sequence:
G
Eight asterisks (*)
appear in the fourth line of the display.
G
select the parameter ‘Man. trip cmd. USER’.
1 Press the ENTER key.
G
G
‘up’
G
G
‘down’.
The display will change as shown in the
column on the right.
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This
indicates that the setting can now be changed
by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys.
The LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The
unit will execute the command.
6-20
G
G
4 Press the ENTER key again.
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
********
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd USER
Don't execute
*
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
G
3 Change the setting to ‘Execute’.
Display
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Execute
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
Control Step / Description
Control
Action
5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT
C
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
MODE is on, the control action can be
terminated by pressing the CLEAR key. The
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out.
6.5.9
Display
Changing the Password
The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered sequentially within
a specific time interval. The ‘left’, ’right’, ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys may be used to define the
password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4, respectively:
3
G
G
1
2
4
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6-21
21
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this change is
described below. The starting point is the factory-set password.
Control Step / Description
Control
Action
0 In the menu tree ‘Par/Conf/LOC’, select the
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
to enter the valid password. The display will
change as shown in the column on the right.
G
2 Press the ‘left’, ’right’, ‘up’ and ’down’ keys
G
Eight asterisks (*)
appear in the fourth line of the display.
G
‘Password’ setting.
1 Press the ENTER key.
G
G
G
G
G
G
3 Now press the ENTER key.
The LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The
third line shows an underscore character ( _ )
as the prompt for entering a new password.
G
example is done by pressing the UP key
followed by the DOWN key.
G
G
5 Press the ENTER key again.
Asterisks
appear in the third line, and a cursor
(underscore) in the fourth line prompts the user
to enter the new password again.
6-22
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
********
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
_
G
4 Enter the new password, which in this
Display
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
_
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
G
6 Re-enter the password.
Control
Action
G
Control Step / Description
If the
password has been re-entered correctly, the
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE goes out
and the display appears as shown on the right.
The new password is now valid.
G
G
G
7a Press the ENTER key again.
7b If the password has been re-entered
any time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR
key. If this is done, the original password
continues to be valid.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
**
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
_
incorrectly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT
MODE remains on and the display shown on
the right appears. The password needs to be
re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the
change in password by pressing the CLEAR
key (see Step 8).
8 The change in password can be canceled at
Display
C
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also possible. To
select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in steps 4 and 6
without entering anything else. This will configure the local control panel without
password protection, and no control actions involving changes will be possible until the
global change-enabling function has been activated (see the section entitled ‘ChangeEnabling Function’).
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
6-23
23
6 Local Control Panel
(continued)
If the configured password has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD display as
described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and then on again.
Control Step / Description
Control
Action
Display
0 Turn off the device.
3 After the four keys are released, startup will
continue.
6-24
G
TEST
G
G
2 When this condition is detected during
startup, the password is displayed.
G
1 Turn the device on again. At the very
beginning of device startup, press the four
directional keys (‘left’, ‘right’, ‘up’ and ‘down’) at
the same time and hold them down.
Password
1234
TEST
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
7
Settings
7.1
Parameters
The P437 must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by appropriate
settings. This chapter gives instructions for determining the settings, which are located
in the folder titled ‘Parameters’ in the menu tree. The sequence in which the settings are
listed and described in this chapter corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree.
The 'Address List' in the Appendix lists all parameters, along with setting ranges and step
sizes or selection tables.
The units are supplied with a factory-set configuration of settings that in most cases
correspond to the default settings given in the Address List. If the factory settings differ
from the default settings, then this is indicated below at the appropriate points.
The default settings given in the Address List are activated after a cold restart.
The P437 is blocked in that case. All settings must be re-entered after a cold restart.
Note:
In the following tables (except for function group DVICE) an indication for the localization
of the corresponding function description is shown in the right hand side column.
"Figure: 3-xxx" refers to a logic diagram which displays the address, "Figure*: 3-xxx" to a
figure subtitle or figure report sheet, "Page: 3-xxx" to a page.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-1
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.1
Device
Device Identification
DVICE: Device type
000 000
The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered.
DVICE: Software version
002 120
Software version for the device. This display cannot be altered.
DVICE: SW date
002 122
Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered.
DVICE: SW version communic.
002 103
Software version for the device's communication software. This display
cannot be altered.
DVICE: DM IEC 61850 version
002 059
Software version of the communication software based on the device's
protocol per IEC 61850. This display cannot be altered.
DVICE: Language version
002 123
Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model. This display
cannot be altered.
DVICE: Text vers.data model
002 121
Using the ‘text replacement tool’ provided by the operating program, the
user can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and
load them into the device. These customized data models contain an
identifier defined by the user while preparing the data model. This identifier
is displayed at this point in the menu tree. Standard data models have the
identifier ‘0’ (factory-set default).
DVICE: F number
002 124
The F number is the serial number of the device. This display cannot be
altered.
DVICE: AFS Order No.
001 000
Order numbers (Cortec) per AFS standard.
DVICE: PCS Order No.
001 200
Order numbers (Cortec) per PCS standard.
DVICE: Order ext. No. 1
DVICE: Order ext. No. 2
DVICE: Order ext. No. 3
DVICE: Order ext. No. 4
DVICE: Order ext. No. 5
DVICE: Order ext. No. 6
DVICE: Order ext. No. 7
DVICE: Order ext. No. 8
DVICE: Order ext. No. 9
DVICE: Order ext. No. 10
DVICE: Order ext. No. 11
DVICE: Order ext. No. 12
DVICE: Order ext. No. 13
DVICE: Order ext. No. 14
DVICE: Order ext. No. 15
DVICE: Order ext. No. 16
DVICE: Order ext. No. 17
7-2
000 003
000 004
000 005
000 006
000 007
000 008
000 009
000 010
000 011
000 012
000 013
000 014
000 015
000 016
000 017
000 018
000 019
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Order ext. No. 18
DVICE: Order ext. No. 19
DVICE: Order ext. No. 20
DVICE: Order ext. No. 21
DVICE: Order ext. No. 22
DVICE: Order ext. No. 23
DVICE: Order ext. No. 24
DVICE: Order ext. No. 25
DVICE: Order ext. No. 26
DVICE: Order ext. No. 27
000 020
000 021
000 022
000 023
000 024
000 025
000 026
000 027
000 028
000 029
Order extension numbers for the device.
DVICE: Module var. slot 1
DVICE: Module var. slot 2
DVICE: Module var. slot 3
DVICE: Module var. slot 4
DVICE: Module var. slot 5
DVICE: Module var. slot 6
DVICE: Module var. slot 7
DVICE: Module var. slot 8
DVICE: Module var. slot 9
DVICE: Module var. slot 10
DVICE: Module var. slot 11
DVICE: Module var. slot 12
DVICE: Module var. slot 13
DVICE: Module var. slot 14
DVICE: Module var. slot 15
DVICE: Module var. slot 16
DVICE: Module var. slot 17
DVICE: Module var. slot 18
DVICE: Module var. slot 19
DVICE: Module var. slot 20
DVICE: Module var. slot 21
086 050
086 051
086 052
086 053
086 054
086 055
086 056
086 057
086 058
086 059
086 060
086 061
086 062
086 063
086 064
086 065
086 066
086 067
086 068
086 069
086 070
Item number of the module inserted in the respective slot 1 to 21.
The display always shows the actual component configuration at any given
time.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-3
7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 1
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 2
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 3
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 4
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 5
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 6
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 7
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 8
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 9
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 10
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 11
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 12
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 13
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 14
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 15
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 16
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 17
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 18
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 19
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 20
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 21
086 193
086 194
086 195
086 196
086 197
086 198
086 199
086 200
086 201
086 202
086 203
086 204
086 205
086 206
086 207
086 208
086 209
086 210
086 211
086 212
086 213
Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted in the respective slot.
DVICE: Variant of module A
086 047
Item number of module A in this design version.
DVICE: Version of module A
086 190
Index letter specifying the version of module A.
DVICE: MAC address module A
104 061
MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This
address is introduced during manufacture and can only be read.
DVICE: Variant of module L
086 048
Item number of module L in this design version.
DVICE: Version of module L
086 191
Index letter specifying the version of module L.
DVICE: Variant of module B
086 049
Item number of module B in this design version.
DVICE: Version of module B
086 192
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
DVICE: Variant module B (a)
086 046
Item number of analog bus module B.
DVICE: Version module B (a)
086 189
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
7-4
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Customer ID data 1
DVICE: Customer ID data 2
DVICE: Customer ID data 3
DVICE: Customer ID data 4
DVICE: Customer ID data 5
DVICE: Customer ID data 6
DVICE: Customer ID data 7
DVICE: Customer ID data 8
000 040
000 041
000 042
000 043
000 044
000 045
000 046
000 047
Set your numerically coded user data here for your records.
DVICE: Location
001 201
Reference input for the device’s location as selected by user.
DVICE: Device ID
000 035
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See
description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
DVICE: Substation ID
000 036
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See
description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
DVICE: Feeder ID
000 037
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See
description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
DVICE: Device password 1
DVICE: Device password 2
000 048
000 049
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See
description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
DVICE: SW version DHMI
DVICE: SW version DHMI DM
002 131
002 132
Internal software version numbers.
Local control panel
LOC: Local HMI exists
221 099
This is set to Yes, if the device is fitted with a local control panel.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-5
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.2
Local control panel
Configuration Parameters
LOC: Language
003 020
Language in which texts will be displayed on the local control panel.
LOC: Decimal delimiter
003 021
Character to be used as decimal separator on the local control panel.
LOC: Password
003 035
Chapter 6.5.3
The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel
can be defined here. Further information on changing the password is
given in Chapter 6.
LOC: Fct. reset key
005 251
Fig.: 3-69
Selection of the reset functions that will be invoked when the CLEAR key is
pressed.
LOC: Fct. read key
080 110
Chapter 6.1
Selection of the event log that will be displayed when the READ key is
pressed.
LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 1
LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 2
030 238
030 239
Selection of the functions that will be accessible in sequence by repeatedly
triggering the menu jump list.
LOC: Fct. Operation Panel
053 007
Fig.: 3-2
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also
referred to as the Operation Panel.
LOC: Fct. Overload Panel
053 005
Fig.: 3-4
053 003
Fig.: 3-3
031 075
Fig.: 3-2
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel.
LOC: Fct. Fault Panel
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel.
LOC: Hold-time for Panels
Setting for the time period during which a panel is displayed, before the unit
switches to the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are
selected than can be shown on the LC-Display.
LOC: Autom. return time
003 014
Fig.: 3-2
003 023
Chapter 6.3
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set
time period, the change-enabling function is deactivated.
LOC: Return time illumin.
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set
time period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off.
7-6
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
PC link
PC:
Name of manufacturer
003 183
Fig.: 3-5
003 068
Fig.: 3-5
003 069
Fig.: 3-5
Setting the name of the manufacturer.
Note:
PC:
PC:
This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
Bay address
Device address
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in
communication via the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
PC:
Baud rate
003 081
Fig.: 3-5
003 181
Fig.: 3-5
Baud rate of the PC interface.
PC:
Parity bit
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the
P437.
PC:
Spontan. sig. enable
003 187
Fig.: 3-5
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.
PC:
Select. spontan.sig.
003 189
Fig.: 3-5
003 084
Fig.: 3-5
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface.
PC:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
PC:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
003 185
Fig.: 3-5
003 055
Fig.: 3-5
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined
telegram via the PC interface.
PC:
Delta V
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by
the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC:
Delta I
003 056
Fig.: 3-5
A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by
the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC:
Delta P
003 059
Fig.: 3-5
The active power value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC:
Delta f
003 057
Fig.: 3-5
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs
by the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
PC:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel
003 155
Fig.: 3-5
003 058
Fig.: 3-5
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta
quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC:
Delta t
All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this
time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
PC:
Time-out
003 188
Fig.: 3-5
Setting for the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC
interface before activating the second communication channel of
communication module B.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-7
7 Settings
(continued)
Communication interface 1
COMM1: Function group COMM1
056 026
Canceling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
COMM1: General enable USER
003 170
Fig.: 3-12
003 215
Fig.: 3-6
003 216
Fig.: 3-6
003 217
Fig.: 3-6
003 220
Fig.: 3-6
003 231
Fig.: 3-6
103 040
Fig.: 3-6
003 167
Fig.: 3-6
Disabling or enabling communication interface 1.
COMM1: Basic IEC870-5 enabl
Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.
COMM1: Addit. -101 enable
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on
IEC 870-5-101.
COMM1: Addit. ILS enable
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
COMM1: MODBUS enable
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol.
COMM1: DNP3 enable
Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol.
COMM1: COURIER enable
Enabling settings relevant for the COURIER protocol.
COMM1: Communicat. protocol
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication
interface.
COMM1: MODBUS prot. variant
003 214
Fig.: 3-10
The user may select either the AREVA D or the VDEW variant of the
MODBUS protocol.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Line idle state
003 165
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
003 071
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
003 171
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
Setting for the line idle state indication.
COMM1: Baud rate
Baud rate of the communication interface.
COMM1: Parity bit
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P437.
7-8
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Dead time monitoring
003 176
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
The P437 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive
pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note:
This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
COMM1: Mon. time polling
003 202
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
COMM1: Octet comm. address
003 072
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be
selected for both addresses.
Note:
The former label for CO M M1 : O c t et c om m . ad dr es s was:
IL S A : B a y ad dr es s
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
COMM1: Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3
003 240
Fig.: 3-11
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16-bit address is used to identify devices. The
address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the address
set at CO MM 1 : O c te t c om m . a ddr es s is th e l o wer- or der oc t et
of t h e DN P a d dr es s .
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Test monitor on
003 166
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
003 161
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
003 073
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities.
COMM1: Name of manufacturer
Setting the name of the manufacturer.
Note:
This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Octet address ASDU
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be
selected for both addresses.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
The former designation for COMM1: O c t et ad dr es s A SD U:
ILSA: De v ic e a ddr es s .
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-9
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Spontan. sig. enable
003 177
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Select. spontan.sig.
003 179
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
003 074
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication
interface 1.
COMM1: Transm.enab.cycl.dat
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the
communication interface.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Cycl. data ILS tel.
003 175
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined
telegram via the communication interface.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta V
003 050
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta I
003 051
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta P
003 054
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta f
003 052
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication
interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta meas.v.ILS tel
003 150
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta
quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
Note:
7-10
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Delta t
003 053
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface
after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been
triggered by the other delta conditions.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta t (energy)
003 151
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
The measured values for active energy and reactive energy are transmitted
via the communication interface after this time has elapsed.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Contin. general scan
003 077
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
A continuous or background general scan means that the P437 transmits all
settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication
interface during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures
that there will be data consistency with a connected control system. The
time to be set defines the minimum time difference between two telegrams.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Comm. address length
003 201
Fig.: 3-8
003 200
Fig.: 3-8
003 192
Fig.: 3-8
003 193
Fig.: 3-8
003 194
Fig.: 3-8
Setting the communication address length.
Note:
enabled.
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
COMM1: Octet 2 comm. addr.
Setting the length of the higher-order communication address.
Note:
enabled.
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
COMM1: Cause transm. length
Setting the length of the cause of transmission.
Note:
enabled.
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
COMM1: Address length ASDU
Setting the length of the common address for identification of telegram
structures.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
COMM1: Octet 2 addr. ASDU
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification
of telegram structures.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-11
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Addr.length inf.obj.
003 196
Fig.: 3-8
003 197
Fig.: 3-8
003 195
Fig.: 3-8
Setting the length of the address for information objects.
Note:
enabled.
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
COMM1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj.
Setting the length of the higher-order address for information objects.
Note:
enabled.
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
COMM1: Inf.No.<->funct.type
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be
reversed in the object address.
Note:
enabled.
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
COMM1: Time tag length
003 198
Fig.: 3-8
003 190
Fig.: 3-8
Setting the time tag length.
Note:
enabled.
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
COMM1: ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv.
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as
a single signal or double signal.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
COMM1: ASDU2 conversion
003 191
Fig.: 3-8
003 199
Fig.: 3-8
003 226
Fig.: 3-8
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a
single signal or double signal.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
COMM1: Initializ. signal
Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.
Note:
enabled.
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
COMM1: Balanced operation
Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced
basis (full duplex operation).
Note:
enabled.
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
COMM1: Direction bit
003 227
Fig.: 3-8
Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at
the control center and to '0' at the substation.
Note:
enabled.
7-12
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Time-out interval
003 228
Fig.: 3-8
003 210
Fig.: 3-10
Setting the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the
acknowledgment command is issued.
Note:
enabled.
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. cmds
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the
selected commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first command is given to the register no. 00301, the second
to the register no. 00302, etc.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the Modbus protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. sig.
003 211
Fig.: 3-10
MODBUS registers in the range 10301 to 10400 are assigned to the
selected signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means
that the first signal is given to the register no. 10301, the second to the
register no. 10302, etc.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the Modbus protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. m.val.
003 212
Fig.: 3-10
MODBUS registers in the range 30301 to 30400 are assigned to the
selected measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection.
Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first
measured value is given to the register no. 30301, the second to the
register no. 30302, etc.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the Modbus protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. param.
003 213
Fig.: 3-10
MODBUS registers in the range 40301 to 40400 are assigned to the
selected parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first parameter is given to the register no. 40301, the second
to the register no. 40302, etc.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the Modbus protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta t (MODBUS)
003 152
Fig.: 3-10
All MODBUS registers are transmitted again via the communication
interface after this time has elapsed.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the Modbus protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Autom.event confirm.
003 249
Fig.: 3-10
Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master, in
order for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the Modbus protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Phys. Charact. Delay
003 241
Fig.: 3-11
Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the
start of sending the 'response'.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout
003 242
Fig.: 3-11
Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is
terminated.
Note:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
7-13
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Link Confirm. Mode
003 243
Fig.: 3-11
Setting the acknowledgment mode of the link layer.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Link Confirm.Timeout
003 244
Fig.: 3-11
Setting the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
link layer.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Link Max. Retries
003 245
Fig.: 3-11
Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have
occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Appl.Confirm.Timeout
003 246
Fig.: 3-11
Setting the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
application layer.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Appl. Need Time Del.
003 247
Fig.: 3-11
Time interval within which the slave cyclically requests time synchronization
from the master.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. inputs
003 232
Fig.: 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 – binary inputs.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin.outputs
003 233
Fig.: 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 – binary outputs.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. count.
003 234
Fig.: 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 20 – binary counters.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog inp.
003 235
Fig.: 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 – analog inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog outp
003 236
Fig.: 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 – analog outputs.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note:
7-14
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Delta meas.v. (DNP3)
003 250
Fig.: 3-11
Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values
in object 30. The threshold values can be changed separately by the master
for each measured value by writing to object 34, 'analog input reporting
deadband'.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta t (DNP3)
003 248
Fig.: 3-11
Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs).
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Command selection
103 042
Fig.: 3-12
103 043
Fig.: 3-12
103 044
Fig.: 3-12
103 045
Fig.: 3-12
103 046
Fig.: 3-12
Selection of commands to be issued via the Courier protocol.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Signal selection
Selection of signals to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Meas. val. selection
Selection of measured values to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Parameter selection
Selection of settings to be altered via the Courier protocol.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta t (COURIER)
Cycle time at the conclusion of which the selected measured values are
again transmitted.
Note:
Communication interface 2
This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
COMM2: Function group COMM2
056 057
Canceling function group COMM2 or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
COMM2: General enable USER
103 170
Fig.: 3-14
103 165
Fig.: 3-14
103 071
Fig.: 3-14
103 171
Fig.: 3-14
103 176
Fig.: 3-14
Disabling or enabling communication interface 2.
COMM2: Line idle state
Setting for the line idle state indication.
COMM2: Baud rate
Baud rate of the communication interface.
COMM2: Parity bit
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P437.
COMM2: Dead time monitoring
The P437 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive
pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
7-15
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM2: Mon. time polling
103 202
Fig.: 3-14
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
COMM2: Positive ackn. fault
103 203
Fig.: 3-14
As of software version 608 of the P437, it is possible to set here whether or
not faults can be acknowledged positively after transmission (and
consequently deleted from the fault overview at the COMM2/PC interface).
COMM2: Octet comm. address
103 072
Fig.: 3-14
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be
selected for both addresses.
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
COMM2: Name of manufacturer
103 161
Fig.: 3-14
103 073
Fig.: 3-14
Setting the name of the manufacturer.
Note:
This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
COMM2: Octet address ASDU
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be
selected for both addresses.
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
COMM2: Spontan. sig. enable
103 177
Fig.: 3-14
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
COMM2: Select. spontan.sig.
103 179
Fig.: 3-14
103 074
Fig.: 3-14
103 175
Fig.: 3-14
103 050
Fig.: 3-14
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication
interface 2.
COMM2: Transm.enab.cycl.dat
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the
communication interface.
COMM2: Cycl. data ILS tel.
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined
telegram via the communication interface.
COMM2: Delta V
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
COMM2: Delta I
103 051
Fig.: 3-14
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
COMM2: Delta P
103 054
Fig.: 3-14
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
COMM2: Delta f
103 052
Fig.: 3-14
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication
interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
7-16
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM2: Delta meas.v.ILS tel
103 150
Fig.: 3-14
103 053
Fig.: 3-14
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta
quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
COMM2: Delta t
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface
after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been
triggered by the other delta conditions.
Communication interface 3
COMM3: Function group COMM3
056 058
Canceling function group COMM3 or including it in the configuration.
This setting parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication
module is fitted.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
COMM3: General enable USER
120 030
Page: 3-21
120 038
Page: 3-21
Disabling or enabling communication interface 3.
COMM3: Baud rate
Adjustment of the baud rate for telegram transmission via the teleprotection
interface (InterMiCOM interface) so as to meet the requirements of the
transmission carrier.
COMM3: Source address
120 031
Page: 3-21
120 032
Page: 3-21
121 001
Page: 3-21
Address for send signals.
COMM3: Receiving address
Address for receive signals.
COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 1
COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 2
COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 3
COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 4
COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 5
COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 6
COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 7
COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 8
121 003
121 005
121 007
121 009
121 011
121 013
121 015
Assignment of functions for the 8 send signals.
COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 1
COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 2
COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 3
COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 4
COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 5
COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 6
COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 7
COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 8
120 001
Page: 3-21
120 004
120 007
120 010
120 013
120 016
120 019
120 022
Configuration (assignment of functions) for the 8 receive signals
COMM3: Oper. mode receive 1
COMM3: Oper. mode receive 2
COMM3: Oper. mode receive 3
COMM3: Oper. mode receive 4
120 002
Page: 3-22
120 005
120 008
120 011
Selection of Blocking or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive
signals 1 to 4 (single-bit transmission).
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-17
7 Settings
(continued)
120 014 Page: 3-22
COMM3: Oper. mode receive 5
120 017
COMM3: Oper. mode receive 6
120 020
COMM3: Oper. mode receive 7
120 023
COMM3: Oper. mode receive 8
Selection of Permissive or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive
signals 5 to 8 (bit-pair transmission).
COMM3: Default value rec. 1
COMM3: Default value rec. 2
COMM3: Default value rec. 3
COMM3: Default value rec. 4
COMM3: Default value rec. 5
COMM3: Default value rec. 6
COMM3: Default value rec. 7
COMM3: Default value rec. 8
120 060
Page: 3-23
120 061
120 062
120 063
120 064
120 065
120 066
120 067
Definition of the default value for the 8 receive signals.
COMM3: Time-out comm.fault
120 033
Fig.: 3-17
This timer triggers the alarm signals CO MM 3 : Com m unic at i ons f a u lt
and S F MO N: C om m uni c .f au l t CO MM 3 and sets the received signals
to their user-defined default values. Time-out occurs when the set time has
elapsed since the most recent 100% valid telegram was received.
COMM3: Sig.asg. comm.fault
120 034
Fig.: 3-150,
3-228
120 035
Fig.: 3-17
Using this setting, the alarm signal can be configured (assigned) to the
corresponding PSIG input signal.
COMM3: Time-out link fail.
Time indicating a persistent failure of the transmission channel. After this
timer stage has elapsed, alarm signals CO M M3 : Co m m . li nk f ai l ur e
and S F MO N: C om m .li n k f ail .C O M M 3 are raised. These can be
mapped to give the operator a warning LED or contact to indicate that
maintenance attention is required.
COMM3: Limit telegr. errors
120 036
Page: 3-25
Percentage of corrupted messages compared to total messages transmitted
before an alarm is raised (COMM3: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. and SFMON:
L im .ex c e e d., t e l. er r .) . When this threshold is exceeded, the receive
signals are set to their user-defined default values.
IEC 61850 Communication
IEC: Function group IEC
056 059
Canceling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
IEC: General enable USER
104 000
Enabling and disabling function group IEC.
IEC: Enable configuration
104 058
This parameter can only be sent individually. In order to maintain
consistency among all the parameters in function groups IEC, GSSE and
GOOSE, they are only enabled mutually by this parameter. After this
command is sent to the device, the actual status of the previously changed
parameter setting of the three function groups is enabled in the
communication data model of the connected device. This function is carried
out automatically with the off-line/on-line switching of the device.
7-18
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Ethernet media
104 056
Selecting the physical communication channel from either wired (RJ45) or
optical fiber (ST/SC connector depending on ordering option)
IEC: IED name
104 057
Name of the device (IED has server function). This device name serves as
device identification in the IEC 61850 system, it is included in the Logical
Device Name in the IEC data model and must therefore be unambiguous.
All devices logged-on to the network should have non-recurring IED names.
IEC: TCP keep-alive timer
104 062
This defines a "heart-beat" time interval used to actively monitor a
communication link to a logged-on client.
IEC:
IEC:
IEC:
IEC:
IP address
IP address 1
IP address 2
IP address 3
104 001
104 002
104 003
104 004
IP address for the device (IED has server function).
Note:
In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at
IE C: I P a d dr es s . The device’s front panel display only displays the IP
address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC:
IEC:
IEC:
IEC:
Subnet mask
Subnet mask 1
Subnet mask 2
Subnet mask 3
104 005
104 006
104 007
104 008
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the
sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Note:
In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at
IE C: S ub n et m as k . The device’s front panel display only displays the IP
address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC:
IEC:
IEC:
IEC:
Gateway address
Gateway address 1
Gateway address 2
Gateway address 3
104 011
104 012
104 013
104 014
This parameter defines the IPv4 address of the network gateway of a
communication link to a client outside of the local network.
Note:
In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at
IE C: G at e wa y a d dr es s . The device’s front panel display only displays
the IP address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC: SNTP operating mode
104 200
Operating mode for the time synchronization telegram. When set to
Broadcast synchronization occurs cyclically with the clock server
transmitting a broadcast signal and, when set to Request from Server each
device (IED has client function) individually requests a synchronization
signal after its own cycle time.
IEC: SNTP poll cycle time
104 201
Device (IED) poll cycle time for time synchronization when operating mode
is set to Request from Server.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-19
7 Settings
(continued)
IEC:
IEC:
IEC:
IEC:
SNTP server 1 IP
SNTP server 1 IP 1
SNTP server 1 IP 2
SNTP server 1 IP 3
104 202
104 203
104 204
104 205
IP address of synchronizing clock server 1.
Note:
In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at
IE C: SNT P s er ve r 1 I P . The device’s front panel display only displays
the IP address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC:
IEC:
IEC:
IEC:
SNTP server 2 IP
SNTP server 2 IP 1
SNTP server 2 IP 2
SNTP server 2 IP 3
104 210
104 211
104 212
104 213
IP address of synchronizing clock server 2.
Note:
In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at
IE C: SNT P s er ve r 2 I P . The device’s front panel display only displays
the IP address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC: Diff. local time
104 206
Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation
(IED).
IEC: Diff. dayl.sav. time
104 207
Time difference when changing to daylight saving time.
IEC: Switch.dayl.sav.time
104 219
This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time
is wanted.
IEC: Dayl.sav.time start
IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. d
IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. m
104 220
104 221
104 222
These three parameters define the date (e.g. at what day of the year) for
switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. Available for
I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t a r t are the values "first", "second", "third",
"fourth", and "last"; for I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . d the seven
weekdays are available so that for example a setting like "on the last
Sunday in March" may be used.
IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st.0:00 +
104 223
This defines the time difference and the time of day (on the specific
changeover day) when the clock is to be switched to daylight saving time.
The time is given in the number of minutes after midnight, e.g. when the
clock changeover to 3:00 AM always occurs at 2:00 AM, then the value to
be entered at
I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . s t . 0 : 0 0 + is 120 [minutes] and at
I E C : D i f f . d a y l . s a v . t i m e it is 60 [minutes].
IEC:
IEC:
IEC:
IEC:
Dayl.sav.time end
Dayl.sav.time end d
Dayl.sav.time end m
Dayl.sav.t.end 0:00+
104 225
104 226
104 227
104 228
This parameter defines the date and time of day for the clock changeover
from daylight saving time to standard time. The setting is similar to that for
the clock changeover to daylight saving time.
7-20
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Deadband value
104 051
Setting to calculate the filter value for all measured value Report Control
Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy. Should a change
occur in one of the measured values, which is greater than the filter value,
the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter
value is calculated according to this formula:
Step size measured value • setting I EC : D ea d ba n d v a lu e
IEC: Update Measurements
104 229
Time to send all measured value Report Control Blocks (RCB) except the
measured value for energy.
IEC: Dead band IP
104 230
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured IP Report Control
Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured IP values, which is
greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each
measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following
formula:
Step size measured value • setting I EC : D ea d ba n d I P
IEC: Dead band IN
104 231
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured IN Report Control
Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured IN values, which is
greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each
measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following
formula:
Step size measured value • setting I EC : D ea d ba n d IN
IEC: Dead band VPP
104 232
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured VPP Report Control
Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured VPP values, which
is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each
measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following
formula:
Step size measured value • setting I EC : D ea d ba n d V P P
IEC: Dead band VPG
104 233
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured VPG Report Control
Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured VPG values, which
is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each
measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following
formula:
Step size measured value • setting I EC : D ea d ba n d V PG
IEC: Dead band f
104 234
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured f Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in the measured f values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured
value the filter value is calculated according to the following formula:
Step size measured value • setting I EC : D ea d ba n d f
IEC: Dead band P
104 235
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured P Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in the measured P values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured
value the filter value is calculated according to the following formula:
Step size measured value • setting I EC : D ea d ba n d P
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-21
7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Dead band phi
104 236
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured phi Report Control
Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured phi values, which is
greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each
measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following
formula:
Step size measured value • setting I EC : D ea d ba n d p hi
IEC: Dead band Z
104 237
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured Z Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in the measured Z values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured
value the filter value is calculated according to the following formula:
Step size measured value • setting I EC : D ea d ba n d Z
IEC: Dead band min/max
104 238
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured min/max Report Control
Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured min/max values,
which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients.
For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to the
following formula:
Step size measured value • setting I EC : D ea d ba n d m in /m ax
IEC: Dead band ASC
104 239
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured ASC Report Control
Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured ASC values, which
is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each
measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following
formula:
Step size measured value • setting I EC : D ea d ba n d A S C
IEC: Dead band temp.
104 240
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured temp Report Control
Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured temp values, which
is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each
measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following
formula:
Step size measured value • setting I EC : D ea d ba n d tem p
IEC: Dead band 20mA
104 241
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured 20mA Report Control
Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured 20mA values, which
is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each
measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following
formula:
Step size measured value • setting I EC : D ea d ba n d 2 0m A
IEC: Update cycle energy
104 060
Cycle time to send energy value by Report Control Block (RCB).
No RCB transmission with setting to blocked!
IEC: DEV control model
221 081
This parameter defines which control model shall be used for the external
devices. For switching with highest security it is recommended to select
"SBO enh. security" (SBO = "select before operate").
7-22
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
IEC Generic Substation
Status Events
GSSE: Function group GSSE
056 060
Canceling function group GSSC or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden. The parameters of this function group are
only then active if function group IEC has been configured and is activated,
and if the parameters of this function group have been activated through the
parameter I EC : E na b l e c onf ig ur at i o n or by switching the device offline/on-line.
GSSE: General enable USER
104 049
Enabling and disabling function group GSSE.
GSSE: Min. cycle
104 052
Minimum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in ms. The repetition
cycle time for a GSSE message is calculated, according to a standard, with
this formula:
Repetition cycle time = Min. cycle + (1 + (increment/1000))
N-1
[ms]
The repetitions counter N will be restarted at count 1 after each state
change of a GSSE bit pair.
GSSE: Max. cycle
104 053
Maximum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in s. For the formula to
calculate the repetition cycle time see Min. cycle. Should the calculated
value for the repetition cycle time be equal to or greater than the set max.
value then the GSSE message will be sent repeatedly at the set max. value
time.
GSSE: Increment
104 054
Increment for the GSSE repetition cycle. For the formula to calculate the
repetition cycle time see Min. cycle.
GSSE: Operating mode
104 055
In the operating mode Broadcast all GSSE, independent of their MAC
address (network hardware characteristic), are always read and processed.
In the operating mode Promiscuous and after all GSSE sending devices
have logged-on, only messages with the MAC addresses of IEDs, that have
logged-on successfully, are read and processed.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-23
7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
Output 1 bit pair
Output 2 bit pair
Output 3 bit pair
Output 4 bit pair
Output 5 bit pair
Output 6 bit pair
Output 7 bit pair
Output 8 bit pair
Output 9 bit pair
Output 10 bit pair
Output 11 bit pair
Output 12 bit pair
Output 13 bit pair
Output 14 bit pair
Output 15 bit pair
Output 16 bit pair
Output 17 bit pair
Output 18 bit pair
Output 19 bit pair
Output 20 bit pair
Output 21 bit pair
Output 22 bit pair
Output 23 bit pair
Output 24 bit pair
Output 25 bit pair
Output 26 bit pair
Output 27 bit pair
Output 28 bit pair
Output 29 bit pair
Output 30 bit pair
Output 31 bit pair
Output 32 bit pair
104 101
104 104
104 107
104 110
104 113
104 116
104 119
104 122
104 125
104 128
104 131
104 134
104 137
104 140
104 143
104 146
104 149
104 152
104 155
104 158
104 161
104 164
104 167
104 170
104 173
104 176
104 179
104 182
104 185
104 188
104 191
104 194
Setting with which GSSE bit pair the configured binary signal of the virtual
GSSE outputs is to be transmitted. A GSSE is always transmitted
consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of which a maximum of 32 are
used by this device (IED) during a send operation.
7-24
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
Output 1 fct.assig.
Output 2 fct.assig.
Output 3 fct.assig.
Output 4 fct.assig.
Output 5 fct.assig.
Output 6 fct.assig.
Output 7 fct.assig.
Output 8 fct.assig.
Output 9 fct.assig.
Output 10 fct.assig.
Output 11 fct.assig.
Output 12 fct.assig.
Output 13 fct.assig.
Output 14 fct.assig.
Output 15 fct.assig.
Output 16 fct.assig.
Output 17 fct.assig.
Output 18 fct.assig.
Output 19 fct.assig.
Output 20 fct.assig.
Output 21 fct.assig.
Output 22 fct.assig.
Output 23 fct.assig.
Output 24 fct.assig.
Output 25 fct.assig.
Output 26 fct.assig.
Output 27 fct.assig.
Output 28 fct.assig.
Output 29 fct.assig.
Output 30 fct.assig.
Output 31 fct.assig.
Output 32 fct.assig.
104 102
104 105
104 108
104 111
104 114
104 117
104 120
104 123
104 126
104 129
104 132
104 135
104 138
104 141
104 144
104 147
104 150
104 153
104 156
104 159
104 162
104 165
104 168
104 171
104 174
104 177
104 180
104 183
104 186
104 189
104 192
104 195
Function assignment of a binary logical status signal to the virtual GSSE
outputs. The signal configured here is sent through the GSSE bit pair as
configured above.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-25
7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
Input 1 bit pair
Input 2 bit pair
Input 3 bit pair
Input 4 bit pair
Input 5 bit pair
Input 6 bit pair
Input 7 bit pair
Input 8 bit pair
Input 9 bit pair
Input 10 bit pair
Input 11 bit pair
Input 12 bit pair
Input 13 bit pair
Input 14 bit pair
Input 15 bit pair
Input 16 bit pair
Input 17 bit pair
Input 18 bit pair
Input 19 bit pair
Input 20 bit pair
Input 21 bit pair
Input 22 bit pair
Input 23 bit pair
Input 24 bit pair
Input 25 bit pair
Input 26 bit pair
Input 27 bit pair
Input 28 bit pair
Input 29 bit pair
Input 30 bit pair
Input 31 bit pair
Input 32 bit pair
105 001
105 006
105 011
105 016
105 021
105 026
105 031
105 036
105 041
105 046
105 051
105 056
105 061
105 066
105 071
105 076
105 081
105 086
105 091
105 096
105 101
105 106
105 111
105 116
105 121
105 126
105 131
105 136
105 141
105 146
105 151
105 156
Setting which GSSE bit pair is assigned to which virtual GSSE input. A
GSSE is always received consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of
which a maximum of 32 are processed by this device (IED).
7-26
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
Input 1 IED name
Input 2 IED name
Input 3 IED name
Input 4 IED name
Input 5 IED name
Input 6 IED name
Input 7 IED name
Input 8 IED name
Input 9 IED name
Input 10 IED name
Input 11 IED name
Input 12 IED name
Input 13 IED name
Input 14 IED name
Input 15 IED name
Input 16 IED name
Input 17 IED name
Input 18 IED name
Input 19 IED name
Input 20 IED name
Input 21 IED name
Input 22 IED name
Input 23 IED name
Input 24 IED name
Input 25 IED name
Input 26 IED name
Input 27 IED name
Input 28 IED name
Input 29 IED name
Input 30 IED name
Input 31 IED name
Input 32 IED name
105 002
105 007
105 012
105 017
105 022
105 027
105 032
105 037
105 042
105 047
105 052
105 057
105 062
105 067
105 072
105 077
105 082
105 087
105 092
105 097
105 102
105 107
105 112
105 117
105 122
105 127
105 132
105 137
105 142
105 147
105 152
105 157
IED name for the virtual GSSE input used to identify a GSSE received.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-27
7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
Input 1 default
Input 2 default
Input 3 default
Input 4 default
Input 5 default
Input 6 default
Input 7 default
Input 8 default
Input 9 default
Input 10 default
Input 11 default
Input 12 default
Input 13 default
Input 14 default
Input 15 default
Input 16 default
Input 17 default
Input 18 default
Input 19 default
Input 20 default
Input 21 default
Input 22 default
Input 23 default
Input 24 default
Input 25 default
Input 26 default
Input 27 default
Input 28 default
Input 29 default
Input 30 default
Input 31 default
Input 32 default
105 003
105 008
105 013
105 018
105 023
105 028
105 033
105 038
105 043
105 048
105 053
105 058
105 063
105 068
105 073
105 078
105 083
105 088
105 093
105 098
105 103
105 108
105 113
105 118
105 123
105 128
105 133
105 138
105 143
105 148
105 153
105 158
Default for the virtual binary GSSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole
GSSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite
side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
7-28
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
Input 1 fct.assig.
Input 2 fct.assig.
Input 3 fct.assig.
Input 4 fct.assig.
Input 5 fct.assig.
Input 6 fct.assig.
Input 7 fct.assig.
Input 8 fct.assig.
Input 9 fct.assig.
Input 10 fct.assig.
Input 11 fct.assig.
Input 12 fct.assig.
Input 13 fct.assig.
Input 14 fct.assig.
Input 15 fct.assig.
Input 16 fct.assig.
Input 17 fct.assig.
Input 18 fct.assig.
Input 19 fct.assig.
Input 20 fct.assig.
Input 21 fct.assig.
Input 22 fct.assig.
Input 23 fct.assig.
Input 24 fct.assig.
Input 25 fct.assig.
Input 26 fct.assig.
Input 27 fct.assig.
Input 28 fct.assig.
Input 29 fct.assig.
Input 30 fct.assig.
Input 31 fct.assig.
Input 32 fct.assig.
105 004
105 009
105 014
105 019
105 024
105 029
105 034
105 039
105 044
105 049
105 054
105 059
105 064
105 069
105 074
105 079
105 084
105 089
105 094
105 099
105 104
105 109
105 114
105 119
105 124
105 129
105 134
105 139
105 144
105 149
105 154
105 159
Function assignment of the virtual GSSE input to a binary logical state
signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the
protection or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will receive
the state of the bit pair, as configured above, and which was received with
GSSE
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-29
7 Settings
(continued)
Generic Object Orientated
Substation Events
GOOSE: Function group GOOSE
056 068
Canceling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden. The parameters of this function group are
only then active if function group IEC has been configured and is activated,
and if the parameters of this function group have been activated through the
parameter I EC : E na b l e c onf ig ur at i o n or by switching the device offline/on-line.
GOOSE: General enable USER
106 001
Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.
GOOSE: Multic. MAC address
106 003
Fig.: 3-18
Multicast MAC address to provide identification of GOOSE to the receiving
clients (IED). The default MAC address entered is suggested as a standard
according to IEC 61850. The multicast MAC address entered in GOOSE
may be modified so as to increase transmission security or to reduce the
number of "GOOSE Messages" to be read by receiving clients (IED).
GOOSE: Application ID
106 004
Fig.: 3-18
106 002
Fig.: 3-18
Application ID of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).
GOOSE: Goose ID
Goose ID being sent by this device (IED). GOOSE includes a Dataset with
32 binary and configurable virtual outputs and 10 two-pole states to the
maximum of 10 monitored external devices
GOOSE: VLAN Identifier
106 006
Fig.: 3-18
VLAN identifier of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). The VLAN
identifier makes it possible to have switches in the network filter messages,
if the switches support such a function. Because so-called multicast MAC
addresses are applied, switches are unable to filter messages in the
network if they do not include a VLAN identifier.
GOOSE: VLAN Priority
106 007
Fig.: 3-18
106 008
Fig.: 3-18
106 009
Fig.: 3-18
VLAN priority of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).
GOOSE: DataSet Reference
DataSet Reference of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).
GOOSE: DataSet Cfg.Revision
Display of the 'Dataset Configuration Revision' value of GOOSE, which is
sent from this device (IED).
7-30
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 3 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 4 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 5 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 6 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 7 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 8 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 9 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 10 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 11 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 12 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 13 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 14 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 15 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 16 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 17 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 18 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 19 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 20 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 21 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 22 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 23 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 24 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 25 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 26 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 27 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 28 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 29 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 30 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 31 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig.
106 011
Fig.: 3-18
106 013
Fig.: 3-18
106 015
Fig.: 3-18
106 017
106 019
106 021
106 023
106 025
106 027
106 029
106 031
106 033
106 035
106 037
106 039
106 041
106 043
106 045
106 047
106 049
106 051
106 053
106 055
106 057
106 059
106 061
106 063
106 065
106 067
106 069
106 071
106 073
Fig.: 3-18
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE
outputs. The signal configured here is sent with the permanently configured
Dataset of GOOSE.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-31
7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 Applic. ID
GOOSE: Input 2 Applic. ID
GOOSE: Input 3 Applic. ID
GOOSE: Input 4 Applic. ID
GOOSE: Input 5 Applic. ID
GOOSE: Input 6 Applic. ID
GOOSE: Input 7 Applic. ID
GOOSE: Input 8 Applic. ID
GOOSE: Input 9 Applic. ID
GOOSE: Input 10 Applic. ID
GOOSE: Input 11 Applic. ID
GOOSE: Input 12 Applic. ID
GOOSE: Input 13 Applic. ID
GOOSE: Input 14 Applic. ID
GOOSE: Input 15 Applic. ID
GOOSE: Input 16 Applic. ID
107 000
107 010
107 020
107 030
107 040
107 050
107 060
107 070
107 080
107 090
107 100
107 110
107 120
107 130
107 140
107 150
Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for
the virtual binary GOOSE input.
GOOSE: Input 1 Goose ID
GOOSE: Input 2 Goose ID
GOOSE: Input 3 Goose ID
GOOSE: Input 4 Goose ID
GOOSE: Input 5 Goose ID
GOOSE: Input 6 Goose ID
GOOSE: Input 7 Goose ID
GOOSE: Input 8 Goose ID
GOOSE: Input 9 Goose ID
GOOSE: Input 10 Goose ID
GOOSE: Input 11 Goose ID
GOOSE: Input 12 Goose ID
GOOSE: Input 13 Goose ID
GOOSE: Input 14 Goose ID
GOOSE: Input 15 Goose ID
GOOSE: Input 16 Goose ID
107 001
107 011
107 021
107 031
107 041
107 051
107 061
107 071
107 081
107 091
107 101
107 111
107 121
107 131
107 141
107 151
Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the
virtual binary GOOSE input.
7-32
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 DataSet Ref
GOOSE: Input 2 DataSet Ref
GOOSE: Input 3 DataSet Ref
GOOSE: Input 4 DataSet Ref
GOOSE: Input 5 DataSet Ref
GOOSE: Input 6 DataSet Ref
GOOSE: Input 7 DataSet Ref
GOOSE: Input 8 DataSet Ref
GOOSE: Input 9 DataSet Ref
GOOSE: Input 10 DataSet Ref
GOOSE: Input 11 DataSet Ref
GOOSE: Input 12 DataSet Ref
GOOSE: Input 13 DataSet Ref
GOOSE: Input 14 DataSet Ref
GOOSE: Input 15 DataSet Ref
GOOSE: Input 16 DataSet Ref
107 002
107 012
107 022
107 032
107 042
107 052
107 062
107 072
107 082
107 092
107 102
107 112
107 122
107 132
107 142
107 152
'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED)
for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of a
chain of characters including the full path of the state value from the device
(IED) situated on the opposite side with the logical device/logical node/data
object/data attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20 characters, then
only the first 20 characters are to be entered.
GOOSE: Input 1 DataObj Ind
GOOSE: Input 2 DataObj Ind
GOOSE: Input 3 DataObj Ind
GOOSE: Input 4 DataObj Ind
GOOSE: Input 5 DataObj Ind
GOOSE: Input 6 DataObj Ind
GOOSE: Input 7 DataObj Ind
GOOSE: Input 8 DataObj Ind
GOOSE: Input 9 DataObj Ind
GOOSE: Input 10 DataObj Ind
GOOSE: Input 11 DataObj Ind
GOOSE: Input 12 DataObj Ind
GOOSE: Input 13 DataObj Ind
GOOSE: Input 14 DataObj Ind
GOOSE: Input 15 DataObj Ind
GOOSE: Input 16 DataObj Ind
107 003
107 013
107 023
107 033
107 043
107 053
107 063
107 073
107 083
107 093
107 103
107 113
107 123
107 133
107 143
107 153
Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this
device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data object index
indicates which data object element in the Dataset is to be evaluated.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-33
7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 DatAttr Ind
GOOSE: Input 2 DatAttr Ind
GOOSE: Input 3 DatAttr Ind
GOOSE: Input 4 DatAttr Ind
GOOSE: Input 5 DatAttr Ind
GOOSE: Input 6 DatAttr Ind
GOOSE: Input 7 DatAttr Ind
GOOSE: Input 8 DatAttr Ind
GOOSE: Input 9 DatAttr Ind
GOOSE: Input 10 DatAttr Ind
GOOSE: Input 11 DatAttr Ind
GOOSE: Input 12 DatAttr Ind
GOOSE: Input 13 DatAttr Ind
GOOSE: Input 14 DatAttr Ind
GOOSE: Input 15 DatAttr Ind
GOOSE: Input 16 DatAttr Ind
107 004
107 014
107 024
107 034
107 044
107 054
107 064
107 074
107 084
107 094
107 104
107 114
107 124
107 134
107 144
107 154
Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this
device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data attribute index
indicates which data attribute element in the data object is to be evaluated.
GOOSE: Input 1 default
GOOSE: Input 2 default
GOOSE: Input 3 default
GOOSE: Input 4 default
GOOSE: Input 5 default
GOOSE: Input 6 default
GOOSE: Input 7 default
GOOSE: Input 8 default
GOOSE: Input 9 default
GOOSE: Input 10 default
GOOSE: Input 11 default
GOOSE: Input 12 default
GOOSE: Input 13 default
GOOSE: Input 14 default
GOOSE: Input 15 default
GOOSE: Input 16 default
107 005
107 015
107 025
107 035
107 045
107 055
107 065
107 075
107 085
107 095
107 105
107 115
107 125
107 135
107 145
107 155
Default for the virtual binary GOOSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole
GOOSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the
opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
7-34
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Input 2 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Input 3 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Input 4 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Input 5 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Input 6 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Input 7 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Input 8 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Input 9 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Input 10 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Input 11 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Input 12 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Input 13 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Input 14 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Input 15 fct.assig.
GOOSE: Input 16 fct.assig.
107 006
107 016
107 026
107 036
107 046
107 056
107 066
107 076
107 086
107 096
107 106
107 116
107 126
107 136
107 146
107 156
Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE input to a binary logical
state signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the
protection, control or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will
receive the state of the data attribute, as configured above, and which was
received with the Dataset of GOOSE
IRIG-B
IRIGB: Function group IRIGB
056 072
Canceling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
IRIGB: General enable USER
023 200
Fig.: 3-19
Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-35
7 Settings
(continued)
Function keys
F_KEY: Password funct.key 1
F_KEY: Password funct.key 2
F_KEY: Password funct.key 3
F_KEY: Password funct.key 4
F_KEY: Password funct.key 5
F_KEY: Password funct.key 6
003 036
030 242
030 243
030 244
030 245
030 246
These passwords enable the corresponding function keys. Further
information on changing the passwords is given in Chapter 6.
F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F1
F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F2
F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F3
F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F4
F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F5
F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F6
080 112
Fig.: 3-20
080 113
080 114
080 115
080 116
080 117
Assignment of functions to the function keys. Either a single function or a
menu jump list may be selected. The two menu jump lists are composed
via L O C : Fc t. m en u j m p l is t x (x: 1 or 2).
F_KEY: Operating mode F1
F_KEY: Operating mode F2
F_KEY: Operating mode F3
F_KEY: Operating mode F4
F_KEY: Operating mode F5
F_KEY: Operating mode F6
080 132
Fig.: 3-20
080 133
080 134
080 135
080 136
080 137
Choice between operation of the function key as a key or switch.
F_KEY: Return time fct.keys
003 037
Once the password has been entered, the function keys remain active for
no longer than this time. Thereafter, the function keys are disabled until the
password is entered again.
7-36
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
Binary input
The P437 has optical coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the system. The
number and connection schemes for the available binary inputs are shown in the
terminal connection diagrams. The Address List in the Appendix gives information about
the configuration options for all binary inputs.
The P437 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is
not installed or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum number possible at this
slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing binary signal inputs are
automatically hidden in the menu tree.
When configuring binary inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function can be
assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from several
control points having different signal voltages.
In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering signals
must persist for at least 30 ms.
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (active ‘high’ mode) or absence (active ‘low’ mode) of a voltage
shall be interpreted as the logic ‘1’ signal.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-37
7 Settings
(continued)
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
Fct. assignm. U 801
Fct. assignm. U 802
Fct. assignm. U 803
Fct. assignm. U 804
Fct. assignm. U 805
Fct. assignm. U 806
Fct. assignm. U 1001
Fct. assignm. U 1002
Fct. assignm. U 1003
Fct. assignm. U 1004
Fct. assignm. U 1005
Fct. assignm. U 1006
Fct. assignm. U 1201
Fct. assignm. U 1202
Fct. assignm. U 1203
Fct. assignm. U 1204
Fct. assignm. U 1205
Fct. assignm. U 1206
Fct. assignm. U 1401
Fct. assignm. U 1402
Fct. assignm. U 1403
Fct. assignm. U 1404
Fct. assignm. U 1405
Fct. assignm. U 1406
Fct. assignm. U 1601
Fct. assignm. U 1602
Fct. assignm. U 1603
Fct. assignm. U 1604
Fct. assignm. U 1605
Fct. assignm. U 1606
Fct. assignm. U 2001
Fct. assignm. U 2002
Fct. assignm. U 2003
Fct. assignm. U 2004
152 127
152 130
152 133
152 136
152 139
152 142
152 163
152 166
152 169
152 172
152 175
152 178
152 199
152 202
152 205
152 208
152 211
152 214
190 002
190 006
190 010
190 014
190 018
190 022
192 002
192 006
192 010
192 014
192 018
192 022
153 087
153 090
153 093
153 096
Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.
7-38
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
Oper. mode U 801
Oper. mode U 802
Oper. mode U 803
Oper. mode U 804
Oper. mode U 805
Oper. mode U 806
Oper. mode U 1001
Oper. mode U 1002
Oper. mode U 1003
Oper. mode U 1004
Oper. mode U 1005
Oper. mode U 1006
Oper. mode U 1201
Oper. mode U 1202
Oper. mode U 1203
Oper. mode U 1204
Oper. mode U 1205
Oper. mode U 1206
Oper. mode U 1401
Oper. mode U 1402
Oper. mode U 1403
Oper. mode U 1404
Oper. mode U 1405
Oper. mode U 1406
Oper. mode U 1601
Oper. mode U 1602
Oper. mode U 1603
Oper. mode U 1604
Oper. mode U 1605
Oper. mode U 1606
Oper. mode U 2001
Oper. mode U 2002
Oper. mode U 2003
Oper. mode U 2004
152 128
152 131
152 134
152 137
152 140
152 143
152 164
152 167
152 170
152 173
152 176
152 179
152 200
152 203
152 206
152 209
152 212
152 215
190 003
190 007
190 011
190 015
190 019
190 023
192 003
192 007
192 011
192 015
192 019
192 023
153 088
153 091
153 094
153 097
Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-39
7 Settings
(continued)
Measured data input
MEASI: Function group MEASI
056 030
Canceling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
MEASI: General enable USER
011 100
Fig.: 3-22
037 190
Fig.: 3-25
Disabling or enabling analog measured data input.
MEASI: Enable IDC p.u.
Setting the minimum current that must flow in order for the P437 to display a
measured value > 0 (zero suppression).
MEASI: IDC< open circuit
037 191
Fig.: 3-25
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P437 will issue an ‘open
circuit’ signal.
MEASI: IDC 1
MEASI: IDC 2
MEASI: IDC 3
MEASI: IDC 4
MEASI: IDC 5
MEASI: IDC 6
MEASI: IDC 7
MEASI: IDC 8
MEASI: IDC 9
MEASI: IDC 10
MEASI: IDC 11
MEASI: IDC 12
MEASI: IDC 13
MEASI: IDC 14
MEASI: IDC 15
MEASI: IDC 16
MEASI: IDC 17
MEASI: IDC 18
MEASI: IDC 19
MEASI: IDC 20
037 150
Fig.: 3-25
037 152
Fig.: 3-25
037 154
Fig.: 3-25
037 156
Fig.: 3-25
037 158
Fig.: 3-25
037 160
Fig.: 3-25
037 162
Fig.: 3-25
037 164
Fig.: 3-25
037 166
Fig.: 3-25
037 168
Fig.: 3-25
037 170
Fig.: 3-25
037 172
Fig.: 3-25
037 174
Fig.: 3-25
037 176
Fig.: 3-25
037 178
Fig.: 3-25
037 180
Fig.: 3-25
037 182
Fig.: 3-25
037 184
Fig.: 3-25
037 186
Fig.: 3-25
037 188
Fig.: 3-25
Setting for the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that
has been set accordingly.
7-40
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
MEASI: IDC,lin 1
MEASI: IDC,lin 2
MEASI: IDC,lin 3
MEASI: IDC,lin 4
MEASI: IDC,lin 5
MEASI: IDC,lin 6
MEASI: IDC,lin 7
MEASI: IDC,lin 8
MEASI: IDC,lin 9
MEASI: IDC,lin 10
MEASI: IDC,lin 11
MEASI: IDC,lin 12
MEASI: IDC,lin 13
MEASI: IDC,lin 14
MEASI: IDC,lin 15
MEASI: IDC,lin 16
MEASI: IDC,lin 17
MEASI: IDC,lin 18
MEASI: IDC,lin 19
MEASI: IDC,lin 20
037 151
Fig.: 3-25
037 153
Fig.: 3-25
037 155
Fig.: 3-25
037 157
Fig.: 3-25
037 159
Fig.: 3-25
037 161
Fig.: 3-25
037 163
Fig.: 3-25
037 165
Fig.: 3-25
037 167
Fig.: 3-25
037 169
Fig.: 3-25
037 171
Fig.: 3-25
037 173
Fig.: 3-25
037 175
Fig.: 3-25
037 177
Fig.: 3-25
037 179
Fig.: 3-25
037 181
Fig.: 3-25
037 183
Fig.: 3-25
037 185
Fig.: 3-25
037 187
Fig.: 3-25
037 189
Fig.: 3-25
Setting for the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that
has been set accordingly.
MEASI: Scaled val. IDC,lin1
037 192
Fig.: 3-26
037 193
Fig.: 3-26
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin1.
MEASI: Scaled val.IDC,lin20
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin20.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-41
7 Settings
(continued)
Binary outputs
The P437 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and connection
schemes for the available output relays are shown in the terminal connection diagrams.
The Address List in the Appendix gives information about the configuration options for all
binary outputs.
The P437 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is
not installed or has fewer output relays than the maximum number possible at that slot,
then the configuration addresses for the missing output relays are automatically hidden
in the menu tree.
The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as
command relays or as signal relays. One signal can also be assigned simultaneously to
several output relays for the purpose of contact multiplication.
An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the selected
operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-on-signal (ES) mode
or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or non-latching mode. For
output relays operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines
when latching will be canceled.
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
7-42
Fct. assignm. K 801
Fct. assignm. K 802
Fct. assignm. K 803
Fct. assignm. K 804
Fct. assignm. K 805
Fct. assignm. K 806
Fct. assignm. K 807
Fct. assignm. K 808
Fct. assignm. K 1001
Fct. assignm. K 1002
Fct. assignm. K 1003
Fct. assignm. K 1004
Fct. assignm. K 1005
Fct. assignm. K 1006
Fct. assignm. K 1007
Fct. assignm. K 1008
Fct. assignm. K 1201
Fct. assignm. K 1202
Fct. assignm. K 1203
Fct. assignm. K 1204
Fct. assignm. K 1205
Fct. assignm. K 1206
Fct. assignm. K 1207
Fct. assignm. K 1208
Fct. assignm. K 1401
Fct. assignm. K 1402
Fct. assignm. K 1403
Fct. assignm. K 1404
Fct. assignm. K 1405
Fct. assignm. K 1406
Fct. assignm. K 1407
150 169
150 172
150 175
150 178
150 181
150 184
150 187
150 190
150 217
150 220
150 223
150 226
150 229
150 232
150 235
150 238
151 009
151 012
151 015
151 018
151 021
151 024
151 027
151 030
169 002
169 006
169 010
169 014
169 018
169 022
169 026
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
Fct. assignm. K 1408
Fct. assignm. K 1601
Fct. assignm. K 1602
Fct. assignm. K 1603
Fct. assignm. K 1604
Fct. assignm. K 1605
Fct. assignm. K 1606
Fct. assignm. K 1607
Fct. assignm. K 1608
Fct. assignm. K 1801
Fct. assignm. K 1802
Fct. assignm. K 1803
Fct. assignm. K 1804
Fct. assignm. K 1805
Fct. assignm. K 1806
Fct. assignm. K 2001
Fct. assignm. K 2002
Fct. assignm. K 2003
Fct. assignm. K 2004
Fct. assignm. K 2005
Fct. assignm. K 2006
Fct. assignm. K 2007
Fct. assignm. K 2008
169 030
171 002
171 006
171 010
171 014
171 018
171 022
171 026
171 030
173 002
173 006
173 010
173 014
173 018
173 022
151 201
151 204
151 207
151 210
151 213
151 216
151 219
151 222
Assignment of functions to output relays.
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Oper. mode K 801
Oper. mode K 802
Oper. mode K 803
Oper. mode K 804
Oper. mode K 805
Oper. mode K 806
Oper. mode K 807
Oper. mode K 808
Oper. mode K 1001
Oper. mode K 1002
Oper. mode K 1003
Oper. mode K 1004
Oper. mode K 1005
Oper. mode K 1006
Oper. mode K 1007
Oper. mode K 1008
Oper. mode K 1201
Oper. mode K 1202
Oper. mode K 1203
Oper. mode K 1204
Oper. mode K 1205
Oper. mode K 1206
Oper. mode K 1207
Oper. mode K 1208
Oper. mode K 1401
Oper. mode K 1402
Oper. mode K 1403
Oper. mode K 1404
150 170
150 173
150 176
150 179
150 182
150 185
150 188
150 191
150 218
150 221
150 224
150 227
150 230
150 233
150 236
150 239
151 010
151 013
151 016
151 019
151 022
151 025
151 028
151 031
169 003
169 007
169 011
169 015
7-43
7 Settings
(continued)
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
Oper. mode K 1405
Oper. mode K 1406
Oper. mode K 1407
Oper. mode K 1408
Oper. mode K 1601
Oper. mode K 1602
Oper. mode K 1603
Oper. mode K 1604
Oper. mode K 1605
Oper. mode K 1606
Oper. mode K 1607
Oper. mode K 1608
Oper. mode K 1801
Oper. mode K 1802
Oper. mode K 1803
Oper. mode K 1804
Oper. mode K 1805
Oper. mode K 1806
Oper. mode K 2001
Oper. mode K 2002
Oper. mode K 2003
Oper. mode K 2004
Oper. mode K 2005
Oper. mode K 2006
Oper. mode K 2007
Oper. mode K 2008
169 019
169 023
169 027
169 031
171 003
171 007
171 011
171 015
171 019
171 023
171 027
171 031
173 003
173 007
173 011
173 015
173 019
173 023
151 202
151 205
151 208
151 211
151 214
151 217
151 220
151 223
Selection of operating mode for output relays.
7-44
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
Measured data input
MEASO: Function group MEASO
056 020
Canceling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden. If the function group is cancelled from the
configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
MEASO: General enable USER
031 074
Fig.: 3-30
053 002
Fig.: 3-34
010 010
Fig.: 3-34
Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.
MEASO: Fct. assignm. BCD
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.
MEASO: Hold time output BCD
Setting the time period for transmission of the selected measured value in
BCD form.
MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD
MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD
MEASO: BCD-Out min. value
MEASO: BCD-Out max. value
037 140
Fig.: 3-34
037 141
Fig.: 3-34
037 142
Fig.: 3-34
037 143
Fig.: 3-34
The variable Mx is to be issued in BCD form.
For measured values in the range "measured values to be issued" the output value
should change linearly with the measured value.
Measurands
Range
Measurands of the
variable Mx
Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measurands
0 ... 1
Measurands to be output
Range
Measurands to be output
Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measurands to be output
Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
Designation of the set values
in the data model
"Scaled min. val. BCD" ...
... "Scaled max. val. BCD"
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Display values
Range
BCD display values
for measured values in the range
"measured values to be issued"
"BCD-Out min. value" ...
... "BCD-Out max. value"
BCD display values
for measured values = Mx,min.
"BCD-Out min. value" ...
BCD display values
for measured values = Mx,max.
"BCD-Out max. value" ...
MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1
MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-2
053 000
Fig.: 3-36
053 001
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-45
7 Settings
(continued)
MEASO: Hold time output A-1
MEASO: Hold time output A-2
010 114
Fig.: 3-36
010 115
Setting the time period for output of the selected measured value.
MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1
MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-2
MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1
MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-2
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-2
037 104
Fig.: 3-36
037 110
037 105
Fig.: 3-36
037 111
037 106
Fig.: 3-36
037 112
After conversion via a characteristic the selected measured value Ax
(x=1, 2) is to be issued as an output current. For this purpose a range
"measured values to be issued" is defined. In this range the characteristic
has two linear sections, which are separated by a knee point.
Measurands
Range
Measurands of the
variable Mx
Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measurands
0 ... 1
Measurands to be output
Range
Measurands to be output
Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measurands to be output
Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
Designation of the set values
in the data model
"Scal. min. value Ax" ...
... "Scal. max. value Ax"
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Knee point for characteristic
Description
Value for knee point
Mx,knee
Scaled knee point value
Mx,scaled,knee
Designation of this set value
in the data model
"Scaled knee val. Ax" ...
with:
Mx,scaled,knee = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
7-46
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1
MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-2
MEASO: AnOut knee point A-1
MEASO: AnOut knee point A-2
MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1
MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-2
037 107
Fig.: 3-36
037 113
037 108
Fig.: 3-36
037 114
037 109
Fig.: 3-36
037 115
Output values
Designation in the data model
Output current range
for measured values in the range
"measured values to be issued"
"AnOut min. val. Ax" ...
... "AnOut max. val. Ax"
Output current to be set
for measured values = Mx,min.
"AnOut min. val. Ax"
Output current to be set
for measured values = Mx,max.
"AnOut max. val. Ax"
Output current to be set
for measured values = Mx,knee
"AnOut knee point Ax"
with:
Mx,min ... Mx,max : measured values to be issued
MEASO: Output value 1
MEASO: Output value 2
MEASO: Output value 3
037 120
Fig.: 3-36
037 121
Fig.: 3-36
037 122
Fig.: 3-36
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%,
can be issued.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-47
7 Settings
(continued)
LED indicators
The P437 has a total of 23 LED indicators for parallel display of binary signals.
The MiCOM IED support software MiCOM S1 gives an overview of configuration options
for all LED indicators. LED indicator H 1 is not configurable. It is labeled "HEALTHY"
and signals the operational readiness of the protection unit (supply voltage present).
LED indicators H 2 and H 3 are not configurable either. H 2 is labeled "OUT OF
SERVICE" and signals a blocking or malfunction; H 3 is labeled "ALARM" and signals a
warning alarm. LED indicator H 17 indicates that the user is in the "EDIT MODE".
The factory setting for LED indicator H 4 is shown in the terminal connection drawings
included in the documentation or the appendix.
The layout of the LED indicators is shown in the dimensional drawing in section 4.1.
At this point it is specifically emphasized that there is no permanent connection given
between the freely configurable function keys and the LED indicators H 18 to H 23
situated directly next to these function keys.
An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the set
operating mode, the LED indicator will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES) mode
('open-circuit principle') or normally-energized (NE) mode ('closed-circuit principle') and
in either latching or non-latching mode. For LED indicators operating in latching mode,
the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be canceled.
With the multi-color LED indicators (H 4 – H 16, H 18 – H 23) the colors red and green
can be independently assigned with functions. The third color amber results as a
mixture of red and green, i.e. when both functions assigned to the LED indicator are
simultaneously present.
LED: Fct.assig. H 1 green
085 184
Signal of the operational readiness of the protection unit.
The function M A I N : H e a l t h y is permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.assig. H 2 yell.
085 001
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2.
The function MAIN : Blo ck ed /fa ulty is permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.assig. H 3 yell.
085 004
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 3.
The function S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) is permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.assig. H17 red
085 185
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 17.
The function L O C : E d i t m o d e is permanently assigned.
7-48
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
Fct.assig. H 4 red
Fct.assig. H 4 green
Fct.assig. H 5 red
Fct.assig. H 5 green
Fct.assig. H 6 red
Fct.assig. H 6 green
Fct.assig. H 7 red
Fct.assig. H 7 green
Fct.assig. H 8 red
Fct.assig. H 8 green
Fct.assig. H 9 red
Fct.assig. H 9 green
Fct.assig. H10 red
Fct.assig. H10 green
Fct.assig. H11 red
Fct.assig. H11 green
Fct.assig. H12 rot
Fct.assig. H12 green
Fct.assig. H13 red
Fct.assig. H13 green
Fct.assig. H14 red
Fct.assig. H14 green
Fct.assig. H15 red
Fct.assig. H15 green
Fct.assig. H16 red
Fct.assig. H16 green
Fct.assig. H18 red
Fct.assig. H18 green
Fct.assig. H19 red
Fct.assig. H19 green
Fct.assig. H20 red
Fct.assig. H20 green
Fct.assig. H21 red
Fct.assig. H21 green
Fct.assig. H22 red
Fct.assig. H22 green
Fct.assig. H23 red
Fct.assig. H23 green
085 007
085 057
085 010
085 060
085 013
085 063
085 016
085 066
085 019
085 069
085 022
085 072
085 025
085 075
085 028
085 078
085 031
085 081
085 034
085 084
085 037
085 087
085 040
085 090
085 043
085 093
085 131
085 161
085 134
085 164
085 137
085 167
085 140
085 170
085 143
085 173
085 146
085 177
Assignment of functions to LED indicators.
LED: Operating mode H 1
085 182
The operating mode E S u p d a t i n g is permanently assigned.
LED: Operating mode H 2
085 002
The operating mode E S u p d a t i n g is permanently assigned.
LED: Operating mode H 3
085 005
The operating mode E S u p d a t i n g is permanently assigned.
LED: Operating mode H 17
085 183
The operating mode E S u p d a t i n g is permanently assigned.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-49
7 Settings
(continued)
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
Operating mode H 4
Operating mode H 5
Operating mode H 6
Operating mode H 7
Operating mode H 8
Operating mode H 9
Operating mode H 10
Operating mode H 11
Operating mode H 12
Operating mode H 13
Operating mode H 14
Operating mode H 15
Operating mode H 16
Operating mode H 18
Operating mode H 19
Operating mode H 20
Operating mode H 21
Operating mode H 22
Operating mode H 23
085 008
085 011
085 014
085 017
085 020
085 023
085 026
085 029
085 032
085 035
085 038
085 041
085 044
085 132
085 135
085 138
085 141
085 144
085 147
Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
Main function
MAIN: Chann.assign.COMM1/2
003 169
Fig.: 3-70
103 210
Page 3-106
Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication
channels.
MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync
Selection of the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available
are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync
103 211
Page 3-106
Selection of the backup source for date and time synchronization. Available
are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
The backup source is used when there is no synchronization generated by
the primary source after M AI N: T im e s yn c . t im e- ou t has elapsed.
MAIN: Time sync. time-out
103 212
Page 3-106
Time-out setting for the time synchronization generated by the primary
source.
7-50
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
Fault recording
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 1
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 2
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 3
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 4
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 5
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 6
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 7
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 8
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 9
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.10
035 160
Fig: 3-88
035 161
035 162
035 163
035 164
035 165
035 166
035 167
035 168
035 169
The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded.
The figure shown illustrates an overview of the assignment.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-51
7 Settings
(continued)
Canceling protection
functions
By means of a configuration procedure, the user can adapt the device functions flexibly
to the scope of protection functions required in each particular h.v. system.
The following conditions must be met before a protection function can be canceled:
The protection function in question must be disabled.
None of the elements of the protection function being cancelled may be assigned to a
binary input.
None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or
an LED indicator.
None of the signals of the protection function may be linked to other signals.
No functions of the device function to be canceled may be selected in a list parameter
setting.
The protection function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is
defined by the function group designation (example: “LIMIT:”).
Distance protection
DIST: Function group DIST
056 014
Canceling function group DIST or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Power swing blocking
PSB: Function group PSB
056 001
Canceling function group PSB or including it in the configuration. If any
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Measuring-circuit monitoring
MCMON: Function group MCMON
056 015
Canceling function group MCMON or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Backup overcurrent-time
protection (Backup DTOC)
BUOC: Function group BUOC
056 002
Canceling function group BUOC or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Switch on to fault protection
SOTF: Function group SOTF
056 003
Canceling function group SOTF or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Protective signaling
PSIG: Function group PSIG
056 004
Canceling function group PSIG or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
7-52
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
Auto-reclosing control
ARC: Function group ARC
056 005
Canceling function group ARC or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Automatic synchronism check ASC: Function group ASC
056 006
Canceling function group ASC or including it in the configuration. If any
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Ground fault (short-circuit)
protection
GFSC: Function group GFSC
056 011
Canceling function group GFSC or including it in the configuration. If any
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling
GSCSG: Function group GSCSG
056 028
Canceling function group GSCSG or including it in the configuration. If any
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Definite-time overcurrent
protection
DTOC: Function group DTOC
056 008
Canceling function group DTOC or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Inverse-time overcurrent
protection
IDMT: Function group IDMT
056 009
Canceling function group IDMTx or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Power directional protection
P<>: Function group P<>
056 045
Thermal overload protection
THERM: Function group THERM
056 023
Canceling function group THERM or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Time-voltage protection
V<>: Function group V<>
056 010
Canceling function group V<> or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-53
7 Settings
(continued)
Over-/underfrequency
protection
f<>: Function group f<>
056 033
Canceling function group f<> or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Circuit breaker failure
protection
CBF: Function group CBF
056 007
Canceling function group CBF or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Limit value monitoring
LIMIT: Function group LIMIT
056 025
Canceling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Logic
LOGIC: Function group LOGIC
056 017
Canceling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
7-54
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3
Function Parameters
7.1.3.1
PC link
PC:
Global
Command blocking
003 182
Fig.: 3-5
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected from the PC
interface.
PC:
Sig./meas.val.block.
003 086
Fig.: 3-5
003 172
Fig.: 3-6
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through the PC interface.
Communication interface 1
COMM1: Command block. USER
When command blocking user is activated, commands are rejected from
communication interface 1.
COMM1: Sig./meas.block.USER
003 076
Fig.: 3-7,
3-8,3-9
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM1.
Communication interface 2
COMM2: Command block. USER
103 172
Fig.: 3-14
When command blocking user is activated, commands are rejected from
communication interface 2.
COMM2: Sig./meas.block.USER
103 076
Fig.: 3-14
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM2.
Binary outputs
OUTP: Outp.rel.block USER
021 014
Fig.: 3-28
When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked.
Main function
003 030 Fig.: 3-53
MAIN: Protection enabled
Switching the device off-line or on-line. Parameters marked 'No (=off)' in the
Address List can only be changed when protection is disabled.
MAIN: Test mode USER
003 012
Fig.: 3-71
When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and
communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'.
MAIN: Nominal frequ. fnom
010 030
Fig.: 3-277
010 049
Fig.: 3-43
Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system.
MAIN: Phase sequence
Setting the phase sequence A-B-C or A-C-B.
(Alternative terminology: Setting the rotary field direction, either clockwise or
anticlockwise.)
MAIN: Inom C.T. prim.
010 001
Fig.: 3-39
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformers for
measurement of phase currents.
MAIN: IN,nom C.T. prim.
010 018
Fig.: 3-40
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for
measurement of residual current.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-55
7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: IN,nom,par C.T. prim
010 152
Fig.: 3-41
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for
measurement of the residual current of the parallel line.
MAIN: Vnom V.T. prim.
010 002
Fig.: 3-44
010 027
Fig.: 3-45
010 100
Fig.: 3-46
010 003
Fig.: 3-38
010 026
Fig.: 3-38
010 023
Fig.: 3-38
031 082
Fig.: 3-47,
3-49, 3-91
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
MAIN: VNG,nom V.T. prim.
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage.
MAIN: Vref,nom V.T. prim.
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
MAIN: Inom device
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of phase currents. This also corresponds to the nominal
device current.
MAIN: IN,nom device
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of residual current. This also corresponds to the nominal
device current.
MAIN: IN,nom,par device
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of the residual current of the parallel line. This also
corresponds to the nominal device current.
MAIN: Dynamic range I
Setting for the dynamic range of the phase current transformers as used by
the P437.
'Highest range' dynamic range: IP = 100 Inom
'Sensitive range' dynamic range: IP = 25 Inom
Note:
The lower the setting for dynamic range, the more accurately the
device will operate. However, make sure that the dynamic range is set no
lower than the maximum possible short-circuit current.
MAIN: Vnom V.T. sec.
010 009
Fig.: 3-38
010 028
Fig.: 3-38
031 052
Fig.: 3-38
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
MAIN: VNG,nom V.T. sec.
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage.
MAIN: Vref,nom V.T. sec.
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
7-56
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Conn. meas. circ. IP
010 004
Fig.: 3-38
Short-circuit direction determination depends on the connection of the
measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the
setting must be 'Standard', if the P437’s 'Forward' decision is to be in the
direction of the outgoing feeder. If the connection direction is reversed or –
given a connection scheme according to Chapter 5 – if the ‘forward’
decision is to be in the busbar direction, then the setting must be ‘Opposite’.
MAIN: Conn. meas. circ. IN
010 019
Fig.: 3-38
Direction determination of the ground fault measuring systems depends on
the connection of the measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in
Chapter 5, then the setting must be 'Standard', if the P437’s 'Forward'
decision is to be in the direction of the outgoing feeder. If the connection
direction is reversed or – given a connection scheme according to
Chapter 5 – if the ‘forward’ decision is to be in the busbar direction, then the
setting must be ‘Opposite’.
MAIN: Conn.meas.crc.IN,par
010 020
Fig.: 3-38
The directional measurement of the ground fault (short-circuit) measuring
systems depends on the connection of the measuring circuits. If the
connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the setting must be 'Standard', if
the P437’s 'Forward' decision is to be in the direction of the outgoing feeder.
If the connection direction is reversed or – given a connection scheme
according to Chapter 5 – if the ‘forward’ decision is to be in the busbar
direction, then the setting must be ‘Opposite’.
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IP
011 030
Fig.: 3-39
Setting the minimum current that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase currents and, if applicable, derived currents
are displayed.
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IN
011 031
Fig.: 3-40
Setting the minimum current that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the residual current is displayed.
MAIN: Meas.val.rel. IN,par
011 043
Fig.: 3-41
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the
measured operating value of the residual current of the parallel line to be
displayed.
MAIN: Meas. value rel. V
011 032
Fig.: 3-44
Setting the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-phase voltages,
and, if applicable, derived voltages are displayed.
MAIN: Meas. val. rel. VNG
011 033
Fig.: 3-45
Setting the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the neutral-point displacement voltage is displayed.
MAIN: Meas. val. rel. Vref
011 034
Fig.: 3-46
Setting the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the reference voltage for the automatic synchronism
check is displayed.
MAIN: Settl. t. IP,max,del
010 113
Fig.: 3-39
Setting for the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall
reach 95% of the maximum current IP,max.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-57
7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 1
005 248
Fig.: 3-69
005 249
Fig.: 3-69
021 021
Fig.: 3-55
Assignment of memories that will be reset simultaneously when
M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t 1 U S E R is activated.
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 2
Assignment of memories that will be reset simultaneously when
M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t 2 U S E R is activated.
MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 1
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking
input 1 (M AI N: B loc k i ng 1 EX T ) is activated.
MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 2
021 022
Fig.: 3-55
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking
input 2 (M AI N: B loc k i ng 2 EX T ) is activated.
MAIN: Trip cmd.block. USER
021 012
Fig.: 3-65
021 001
Fig.: 3-62
021 002
Fig.: 3-62
002 060
Fig.: 3-60
021 003
Fig.: 3-62
021 004
Fig.: 3-62
015 067
Fig.: 3-58
Blocking the trip commands from the local control panel.
MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.1
Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 1.
MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.2
Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 2.
MAIN: Fct.ass.1p trip cmd1
Selecting signals for the phase-selective trip logic. Available are these
signals:
All trip signals issued by functions DTOC, IDMT and GFSC
All output signals issued by function group LOGIC
MA IN : P ar . T r i p ( 1 p) EX T
MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 1
Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 1.
MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 2
Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 2.
MAIN: Close cmd.pulse time
Setting for the duration of the close command.
MAIN: tCB,close
000 032
This setting determines the CB close time. In slightly asynchronous power
systems, the CB close time is taken into account by the automatic
synchronism check (ASC) to issue of a close command. This is only
possible if setting AS C: A R wi t h tC B P Sx = 'yes’ or A SC : M C wi t h
tC B P Sx = 'yes’.
MAIN: RC inhib.by CB close
015 042
Fig.: 3-58
This setting determines whether the reclose command will be inhibited as
soon as the "Circuit breaker closed" signal starts.
MAIN: Fct. assign. fault
021 031
Selection of the signals to be signaled as Blocked/Faulty in addition to the
messages that always result in the message Blocked/Faulty. The device is
blocked in both cases.
7-58
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
Parameter subset selection
PSS: Control via USER
003 100
Fig.: 3-72
If parameter subset selection is to be handled from the integrated local
control panel rather than via binary signal inputs, choose the setting 'Yes'.
PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER
003 060
Fig.: 3-72
003 063
Fig.: 3-72
Selection of the parameter subset from the local control panel.
PSS: Keep time
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection
is carried out via binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may
occur during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no
binary signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected
from the local control panel shall apply.
Self-monitoring
SFMON: Fct. assign. warning
021 030
Fig.: 3-73
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals
'Warning (LED)' and 'Warning (relay)' and in the activation of the LED
indicator labeled 'ALARM'. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading
to a blocking of the device are not configurable. They always result in the
above signals and indication.
SFMON: Mon.sig. retention
021 018
This setting determines how long monitoring signals remain in the
monitoring signal memory before a reset occurs.
Fault recording
FT_RC: Fct. assig. trigger
003 085
Fig.: 3-86
This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording and fault data
acquisition.
FT_RC: Pre-fault time
003 078
Fig.: 3-88
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before a fault occurs
(pre-fault recording time).
FT_RC: Post-fault time
003 079
Fig.: 3-88
003 075
Fig.: 3-88
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a
fault (post-fault recording time).
FT_RC: Max. recording time
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault
and post-fault recording times.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-59
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.2
Distance protection
General Functions
DIST: General enable USER
031 073
Fig.: 3-89
010 031
Fig.: 3-103
Enable/disable the distance protection function.
DIST: CVT stabilization
This setting defines whether distance protection will operate with or without
stabilization against transient transformation errors of capacitive voltage
transformers.
DIST: Zone extens. for 1pG
011 049
Fig.: 3-109
This setting enables zone extension in the case of single-phase-to-ground
fault detection.
DIST: Zone timer start
001 236
Fig.: 3-120
If the mode 'with zone starting' has been selected, then only the timer
stage of the specific distance protection zone Zn is triggered for which the
measured loop impedance is inside the zone.
Power swing blocking
PSB: General enable USER
014 050
Disabling or enabling power swing blocking.
PSB:
PSB:
PSB:
PSB:
R
posX
negX
α
014 060
Fig.: 3-129
014 061
Fig.: 3-129
006 185
Fig.: 3-129
014 062
Fig.: 3-129
Settings for the power swing polygon.
PSB: Operating mode
014 091
This setting defines that power swing detection can be based on impedance
variation (Mode Delta Z) as an alternative to apparent power change (Mode
Delta S).
PSB: Oper. value Delta S
014 054
Fig.: 3-131
The threshold operate value setting for the blocking function is a
percentage. It reflects the change in apparent power over a sampling
interval as referred to the apparent power at the end of the sampling
interval.
PSB: Oper. value Delta T
014 090
Setting of the timer stage for operating mode P S B : O per a ti n g m od e =
Mode Delta Z.
PSB: Operate delay
014 052
Fig.: 3-131
014 053
Fig.: 3-131
014 059
Fig.: 3-138
014 063
Fig.: 3-138
Setting for the operate delay.
PSB: Release delay
Setting for the release delay.
PSB: Oper. value dS, trip
The threshold operate value setting for the power swing blocking is a
percentage. It reflects the change in apparent power over a sampling
interval as referred to the apparent power at the end of the sampling
interval.
PSB: Oper. delay dS, trip
Setting for the operate delay.
7-60
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
PSB: R (OOS)
PSB: posX (OOS)
PSB: negX (OOS)
006 184
Fig: *3-135
006 186
Fig: *3-137
006 187
Fig: *3-137
006 028
Fig: *3-137
006 189
Fig: *3-137
006 027
Fig: *3-137
012 017
Fig.: 3-131
014 055
Fig.: 3-131
014 058
Fig.: 3-131
Settings for the power swing polygon that is used for the enhanced
counting-based tripping.
PSB: Perm. No. OOS (a)
Counter threshold (a) for Out-of-Step Tripping.
PSB: Perm. No. OOS (b)
Counter threshold (b) for Out-of-Step Tripping.
PSB: Perm. No. stab. PS
Counter threshold for stable power swing trajectories.
PSB: Fct. assign. block.
Selection of the zones to be blocked if the blocking criterion is present.
PSB: Max. blocking time
Time limit of the blocking effect.
PSB: IP>
If the phase current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is canceled without
time delay.
PSB: Ineg>
014 057
Fig.: 3-131
014 056
Fig.: 3-131
014 001
Fig.: 3-140
014 006
Fig.: 3-140
014 002
Fig.: 3-140
If the negative-sequence current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is
canceled without time delay.
PSB: IN>
If the residual current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is canceled
without time delay.
Measuring-circuit monitoring
MCMON: General enable USER
Enable/disable the measuring-circuit monitoring function.
MCMON: Current monitoring
This setting defines whether the current-measuring circuits shall be
monitored.
MCMON: Ineg>
Setting for the operate value Ineg> (permissible unbalance threshold in the
current-measuring circuit).
MCMON: Op. mode volt. mon.
014 007
Fig.: 3-141
017 011
Fig.: 3-141
Selection of the monitoring mode in the voltage-measuring circuit.
MCMON: Operate delay
Setting for the operate delay after which the Meas. circ. (V/I) faulty signals
will be issued.
MCMON: FF, V enabled USER
014 009
Enable/disable the "Fuse Failure" monitoring function.
MCMON: Vpos<, FF
031 053
Fig.: 3-142
031 056
Fig.: 3-142
Setting for the Vpos< operate value of fuse failure monitoring.
MCMON: Vneg>, FF
Setting for the Vneg> operate value of fuse failure monitoring.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-61
7 Settings
(continued)
MCMON: Vneg<, FF
031 054
Fig.: 3-142
031 057
Fig.: 3-142
031 058
Fig.: 3-142
014 013
Fig.: 3-143
014 012
Fig.: 3-143
014 011
Fig.: 3-144
014 000
Fig.: 3-144
011 068
Fig.: 3-147
015 004
Fig.: 3-148
015 060
Fig.: 3-178
000 107
Page: 3-266
Setting for the Vneg< operate value of fuse failure monitoring.
MCMON: Ineg>, FF
Setting for the Ineg> operate value of fuse failure monitoring.
MCMON: Operate delay FF, V
Setting for the operate delay of fuse failure monitoring.
MCMON: FF,Vref enabled USER
Enable/disable the "Fuse Failure" monitoring function of the reference
voltage Vref.
MCMON: Oper. delay FF, Vref
Setting for the time delay for "Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference
voltage Vref.
Backup overcurrent-time
protection (Backup DTOC)
BUOC: General enable USER
Enabling or disabling BUOC protection
BUOC: Operating mode
Setting for the BUOC protection operating mode.
Switch on to fault protection
SOTF: General enable USER
Enable/disable the switch on to fault (short circuit) protection.
Protective signaling
PSIG: General enable USER
Enable/disable the protective signaling.
Auto-reclosing control
ARC: General enable USER
Enable/disable the auto-reclosing control.
ARC: Control via USER
Setting this parameter to no enables selection of ARC operating mode via
binary signal inputs. This is possible only if the required binary signal inputs
have been configured.
Automatic synchronism check ASC: General enable USER
018 000
Fig.: 3-198
018 060
Fig.: 3-209
006 009
Fig.: 3-217
Enable/disable the automatic synchronism check.
Ground fault (short-circuit)
protection
GFSC: General enable USER
Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection.
GFSC: Virtual current pol.
Set to “Yes” if you want the device to apply “virtual current polarisation”, i.e.
calculate the polarising voltage as sum of the 2 healthy phase voltages. The
default is “No” to provide backwards compatibility.
GFSC: Fct.assign. blocking
006 020
Fig.: 3-210
Select those binary signals that will – if present – block the GFSC
protection.
7-62
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
GFSC: Evaluation VNG
002 136
Fig.: 3-211
Setting that ground fault (short-circuit) protection will use either the neutralpoint displacement voltage value, internally calculated by the P437 or the
value of the neutral-point displacement voltage as measured by the P437
(see section "Measured variables for GFSC function").
GFSC: IN>
018 063
Fig.: 3-212
018 062
Fig.: 3-212
Setting for the operate value of the residual current.
GFSC: VNG>
Setting for the operate value of the neutral-point displacement voltage.
Note:
If an electronic zero-power directional protection relay (SUR) is
replaced by the ground fault (short-circuit) protection function, the operate
value VNG> is obtained by multiplying the V0 setting of the device by a
factor of 0.07.
GFSC: Angle phiG
018 061
Fig.: 3-224
Setting for the position of the straight line separating forward and backward
(reverse) directions.
GFSC: Start. oper. delay
018 064
Fig.: 3-212
018 065
Fig.: 3-212
Setting for the operate delay of starting.
Note:
This setting corresponds to setting t1 of the electronic zeropower directional protection relay (SUR).
GFSC: Start. releas. delay
Setting for the release delay of the starting.
GFSC: Comp. reactance X0
002 135
Setting of "cross-polarization" parameter X0 (see section GFSC, "Improved
directional measurement for series compensated line applications").
GFSC: t1 (forward)
018 066
Fig.: 3-224
018 067
Fig.: 3-224
Setting for the operate delay of the trip signal in the event of a 'forward'
decision.
GFSC: t2 (backward)
Setting for the operate delay of the trip signal in the event of a 'backward'
(reverse) decision.
GFSC: t3 (non-directional)
018 068
Fig.: 3-224
Setting for the operate delay of the non-directional trip signal.
Note:
This setting corresponds to setting t2-t1 of the electronic zeropower directional protection relay (SUR).
GFSC: Criteria tS active
018 071
Fig.: 3-224
018 080
Fig.: 3-218
This setting defines the direction of time-voltage protection tripping.
GFSC: Operating mode tS
This setting specifies whether the voltage-dependent or current-dependent
tripping time characteristic shall apply.
GFSC: Iref,N
018 076
Fig.: 3-223
Setting for the reference current.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-63
7 Settings
(continued)
GFSC: Characteristic N
018 078
Fig.: 3-223
018 077
Fig.: 3-223
023 069
Fig.: 3-227
002 180
Fig.: 3-228
023 079
Fig.: 3-232
023 078
Fig.: 3-228,
3-230,3-232,
3-234, 3-236
Setting for the tripping characteristic.
GFSC: Factor kt,N
Setting for the starting characteristic factor kP.
Ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling
GSCSG: General enable USER
Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling.
GSCSG: Fct.assign. blocking
Select those binary signals that will – if present – block the GFSC
protection.
GSCSG: Operating mode
Setting for the operating mode of ground fault (short-circuit) protection
signaling.
GSCSG: Channel mode
This setting specifies whether GSCSG and PSIG operate with independent
communication channels or with a common communication channel.
Note:
Operation with a common communication channel is only
possible, if the same operating mode is set for both PSIG and GSCSG. The
correct assignment of signals to the functions must be done by setting the
time delays appropriately.
GSCSG: Trip mode
023 088
Fig.: 3-235
This setting specifies whether there shall be a single-pole or three-pole trip
and whether an HSR shall be triggered.
GSCSG: Tripping time
023 075
Fig.: 3-229
Setting for the delay of the send signal (of the signal comparison release
scheme) and the trip signal. This delay shall be used for coordinating
GSCSG with the other protection functions.
GSCSG: Release time send
023 076
Fig.: 3-232,
3-233,3-237
This setting specifies extension of the send signal after starting of ground
fault (short-circuit) protection has dropped out.
GSCSG: tBlock
023 077
Fig.: 3-231
023 089
Fig.: 3-233
Setting for the transient blocking time of ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling in the event of a change in fault direction.
GSCSG: Block. sig. nondir.
This setting specifies whether the blocking signal will be transmitted only in
the event of a backward (reverse) decision by ground fault (short-circuit)
protection or whether it will be transmitted as long as there is no forward
decision.
GSCSG: Echo on receive
023 080
Fig.: 3-236
This setting determines whether ground fault (short-circuit) protection
signaling operates with or without echo.
Note:
Use of the echo only makes sense if the signal comparison
release scheme has been selected as the operating mode.
7-64
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
GSCSG: Operate delay echo
023 081
Fig.: 3-236
023 082
Fig.: 3-236
023 083
Fig.: 3-236
Setting for the operate delay of the echo pulse.
GSCSG: Pulse duration echo
Setting for echo pulse duration.
GSCSG: tBlock echo
Setting for the transient blocking time of the echo signal in the event of a
change in fault direction.
GSCSG: Weak infeed trip
023 084
Fig.: 3-234
This setting determines whether a trip signal will be issued when the weakinfeed logic is triggered.
Note:
Use of the weak-infeed logic only makes sense if the signal
comparison release scheme has been selected as the operating mode.
GSCSG: Op.delay weak infeed
023 087
Fig.: 3-234
023 085
Fig.: 3-230
031 068
Fig.: 3-238
017 096
Fig.: 3-249
014 220
Fig.: 3-278
022 050
Fig.: 3-261
022 052
Fig.: 3-263
017 099
Fig.: 3-263
022 051
Fig.: 3-263
Setting for the operate delay of weak-infeed logic.
GSCSG: Frequency monitoring
This setting defines whether failure of frequency transmission will be
monitored.
Definite-time overcurrent
protection
DTOC: General enable USER
Enable/disable the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
Inverse-time overcurrent
protection
IDMT: General enable USER
Enable/disable the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
Power directional protection
P<>: General enable USER
Disabling or enabling the power directional protection function.
Thermal overload protection
THERM: General enable USER
Enable/disable the thermal overload protection function.
THERM: Iref
Setting for the reference current.
THERM: Start. factor OL_RC
Setting for the starting characteristic factor kP.
THERM: Time const. 1 (>Ibl)
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current
flow (Ibl: base line current).
THERM: Time const. 2 (<Ibl)
022 085
Fig.: 3-263
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current
flow (Ibl: base line current).
Note:
This setting option is only relevant when machines are running.
In all other cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1.
THERM: Rel. O/T warning
022 078
Fig.: 3-263
Setting for the operate value of the warning stage.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-65
7 Settings
(continued)
THERM: Rel. O/T trip
022 079
Fig.: 3-263
022 068
Fig.: 3-263
023 030
Fig.: 3-264
023 031
Fig.: 3-273
018 202
Fig.: 3-274
018 201
Fig.: 3-275
018 200
Fig.: 3-275
Setting for the operate value of the trip stage.
THERM: Hysteresis trip
Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage.
Time-voltage protection
V<>: General enable USER
Enable/disable the time-voltage protection function.
Over-/underfrequency
protection
f<>: General enable USER
Enable/disable the over-/underfrequency protection function.
f<>: Selection meas. volt
Setting for the voltage that is used for frequency measurement.
f<>: Evaluation time
Setting the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for the
duration of the set evaluation time so that a signal is issued.
f<>: Undervolt. block. V<
Setting for the threshold of undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below
this threshold, the over-/underfrequency protection function will be blocked.
Circuit Breaker Failure
Protection
CBF: General enable USER
022 080
Fig.: 3-292
022 154
Fig.: 3-295,
3-296
022 159
Fig.: 3-295,
3-296
Enable/disable the circuit breaker failure protection function.
CBF: Start with man. trip
Setting that a manual trip signal will also be used as a start criterion.
CBF: Fct.assignm. CBAux.
Selection of trip signals - assigned to Gen. trip command 1 - for which, in
addition to current flow monitoring, status signals from CB auxiliary contacts
are evaluated.
CBF: tCBF
011 067
Setting for the operate delay at the conclusion of which the ‘Circuit breaker
failure’ signal is issued.
CBF: I>
022 160
Fig.: 3-294,
3-295,3-296
Setting the threshold to detect a break in current flow.
022 163 Fig.: 3-297
CBF: Trip 1p
Setting to 'Yes' allows 1-pole monitoring and re-tripping of the CB. Then a
1-pole general trip triggers the 1-pole startup of CBF (see section "CBF 1pole operating mode").
CBF: t1 1p
022 164
Fig.: 3-293,
3-297
022 165
Fig.: 3-293,
3-297
Setting 1st CBF timer stage to 1-pole operating mode.
CBF: t1 3p
Setting 1st CBF timer stage to 3-pole operating mode.
7-66
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
CBF: t2
022 166
Fig.: 3-293,
3-297
022 167
Fig.: 3-298
022 168
Fig.: 3-298
022 169
Fig.: 3-298
Setting 2nd CBF timer stage.
CBF: Min.dur. trip cmd.t1
Setting 1st timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.
CBF: Min.dur. trip cmd.t2
Setting 2nd timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.
CBF: Latching trip cmd.t1
The 1st timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
CBF: Latching trip cmd.t2
022 170
Fig.: 3-298
The 2nd timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
CBF: Delay/starting trig.
022 155
Fig.: 3-293
022 171
Fig.: 3-293,
3-300
The signal C B F : T r ip s i gn a l is issued when this timer stage’s time
duration has elapsed.
CBF: Delay/fault beh. CB
If during this delay time period the circuit breaker does not provide a signal
from its auxiliary contacts that it is closed, then faults behind the CB are
recognized through the current criterion (see section "Fault behind CB
protection").
CBF: Delay/CB sync.superv
022 172
Fig.: 3-293,
3-301
Setting the delay time period to bridge circuit breaker operate times during
CB synchronization supervision.
Limit value monitoring
LIMIT: General enable USER
014 010
Fig.: 3-302
014 004
Fig.: 3-302
014 020
Fig.: 3-302
Enable/disable the limit value monitoring function.
LIMIT: I>
Setting for the operate value of the first overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: I>>
Setting for the operate value of the second overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI>
014 031
Fig.: 3-302
014 032
Fig.: 3-302
Setting for the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI>>
Setting for the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: I<
014 021
Fig.: 3-302
Setting for the operate value of the first undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-67
7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: I<<
014 022
Fig.: 3-302
Setting for the operate value of the second undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI<
014 033
Fig.: 3-302
Setting for the operate delay of the first undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI<<
014 034
Fig.: 3-302
Setting for the operate delay of the second undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG>
014 023
Fig.: 3-303
014 024
Fig.: 3-303
014 035
Fig.: 3-303
014 036
Fig.: 3-303
014 025
Fig.: 3-303
014 026
Fig.: 3-303
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG>>
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG>
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG>>
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG<
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG<<
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG<
014 037
Fig.: 3-303
014 038
Fig.: 3-303
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG<<
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP>
014 027
Fig.: 3-303
014 028
Fig.: 3-303
014 039
Fig.: 3-303
014 040
Fig.: 3-303
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP>>
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP>
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP>>
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP>> for limit value
monitoring.
7-68
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: VPP<
014 029
Fig.: 3-303
014 030
Fig.: 3-303
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP<<
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP<
014 041
Fig.: 3-303
014 042
Fig.: 3-303
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP<<
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VNG>
014 043
Fig.: 3-304
014 044
Fig.: 3-304
014 045
Fig.: 3-304
014 046
Fig.: 3-304
014 110
Fig.: 3-305
014 111
Fig.: 3-305
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VNG>>
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVNG>
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVNG>>
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: IDC,lin>
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: IDC,lin>>
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>
014 112
Fig.: 3-305
014 113
Fig.: 3-305
014 114
Fig.: 3-305
014 115
Fig.: 3-305
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>>
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>>.
LIMIT: IDC,lin<
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: IDC,lin<<
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<
014 116
Fig.: 3-305
014 117
Fig.: 3-305
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<<
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<<.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-69
7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: T>
014 100
Fig.: 3-306
014 101
Fig.: 3-306
014 103
Fig.: 3-306
014 104
Fig.: 3-306
014 105
Fig.: 3-306
014 106
Fig.: 3-306
014 107
Fig.: 3-306
014 108
Fig.: 3-306
031 099
Fig.: 3-308
LOGIC: Set 1 USER
034 030
LOGIC: Set 2 USER
LOGIC: Set 3 USER
LOGIC: Set 4 USER
LOGIC: Set 5 USER
LOGIC: Set 6 USER
LOGIC: Set 7 USER
LOGIC: Set 8 USER
Fig.: 3-307,
3-308
034 031
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>.
LIMIT: T>>
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>.
LIMIT: tT>
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>.
LIMIT: tT>>
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>.
LIMIT: T<
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<.
LIMIT: T<<
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<.
LIMIT: tT<
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<.
LIMIT: tT<<
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.
Logic
LOGIC: General enable USER
Enable/disable the logic function.
034 032
034 033
034 034
034 035
034 036
034 037
Fig.: 3-308
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
7-70
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 1
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 2
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 3
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 4
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 5
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 6
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 7
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 8
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 9
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.10
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.11
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.12
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.13
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.14
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.15
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.16
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.17
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.18
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.19
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.20
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.21
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.22
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.23
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.24
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.25
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.26
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.27
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.28
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.29
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.30
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.31
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.32
030 000
Fig.: 3-308
030 004
030 008
030 012
030 016
030 020
030 024
030 028
030 032
030 036
030 040
030 044
030 048
030 052
030 056
030 060
030 064
030 068
030 072
030 076
030 080
030 084
030 088
030 092
030 096
031 000
031 004
031 008
031 012
031 016
031 020
031 024
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-71
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 1
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 2
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 3
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 4
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 5
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 6
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 7
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 8
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 9
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 10
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 11
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 12
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 13
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 14
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 15
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 16
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 17
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 18
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 19
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 20
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 21
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 22
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 23
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 24
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 25
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 26
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 27
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 28
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 29
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 30
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 31
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 32
030 001
Fig.: 3-308
030 005
030 009
030 013
030 017
030 021
030 025
030 029
030 033
030 037
030 041
030 045
030 049
030 053
030 057
030 061
030 065
030 069
030 073
030 077
030 081
030 085
030 089
030 093
030 097
031 001
031 005
031 009
031 013
031 017
031 021
031 025
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
7-72
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Time t1 output 1
030 002
LOGIC: Time t1 output 2
LOGIC: Time t1 output 3
LOGIC: Time t1 output 4
LOGIC: Time t1 output 5
LOGIC: Time t1 output 6
LOGIC: Time t1 output 7
LOGIC: Time t1 output 8
LOGIC: Time t1 output 9
LOGIC: Time t1 output 10
LOGIC: Time t1 output 11
LOGIC: Time t1 output 12
LOGIC: Time t1 output 13
LOGIC: Time t1 output 14
LOGIC: Time t1 output 15
LOGIC: Time t1 output 16
LOGIC: Time t1 output 17
LOGIC: Time t1 output 18
LOGIC: Time t1 output 19
LOGIC: Time t1 output 20
LOGIC: Time t1 output 21
LOGIC: Time t1 output 22
LOGIC: Time t1 output 23
LOGIC: Time t1 output 24
LOGIC: Time t1 output 25
LOGIC: Time t1 output 26
LOGIC: Time t1 output 27
LOGIC: Time t1 output 28
LOGIC: Time t1 output 29
LOGIC: Time t1 output 30
LOGIC: Time t1 output 31
LOGIC: Time t1 output 32
030 006
Fig.: 3-308
030 010
030 014
030 018
030 022
030 026
030 030
030 034
030 038
030 042
030 046
030 050
030 054
030 058
030 062
030 066
030 070
030 074
030 078
030 082
030 086
030 090
030 094
030 098
031 002
031 006
031 010
031 014
031 018
031 022
031 026
Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-73
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Time t2 output 1
LOGIC: Time t2 output 2
LOGIC: Time t2 output 3
LOGIC: Time t2 output 4
LOGIC: Time t2 output 5
LOGIC: Time t2 output 6
LOGIC: Time t2 output 7
LOGIC: Time t2 output 8
LOGIC: Time t2 output 9
LOGIC: Time t2 output 10
LOGIC: Time t2 output 11
LOGIC: Time t2 output 12
LOGIC: Time t2 output 13
LOGIC: Time t2 output 14
LOGIC: Time t2 output 15
LOGIC: Time t2 output 16
LOGIC: Time t2 output 17
LOGIC: Time t2 output 18
LOGIC: Time t2 output 19
LOGIC: Time t2 output 20
LOGIC: Time t2 output 21
LOGIC: Time t2 output 22
LOGIC: Time t2 output 23
LOGIC: Time t2 output 24
LOGIC: Time t2 output 25
LOGIC: Time t2 output 26
LOGIC: Time t2 output 27
LOGIC: Time t2 output 28
LOGIC: Time t2 output 29
LOGIC: Time t2 output 30
LOGIC: Time t2 output 31
LOGIC: Time t2 output 32
030 003
Fig.: 3-308
030 007
030 011
030 015
030 019
030 023
030 027
030 031
030 035
030 039
030 043
030 047
030 051
030 055
030 059
030 063
030 067
030 071
030 075
030 079
030 083
030 087
030 091
030 095
030 099
031 003
031 007
031 011
031 015
031 019
031 023
031 027
Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.
Note:
7-74
This setting has no effect in the ‘minimum time’ operating mode.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 1
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 2
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 3
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 4
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 5
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 6
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 7
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 8
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 9
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 10
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 11
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 12
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 13
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 14
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 15
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 16
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 17
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 18
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 19
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 20
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 21
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 22
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 23
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 24
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 25
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 26
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 27
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 28
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 29
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 30
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 31
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 32
044 000
Fig.: 3-314
044 002
044 004
044 006
044 008
044 010
044 012
044 014
044 016
044 018
044 020
044 022
044 024
044 026
044 028
044 030
044 032
044 034
044 036
044 038
044 040
044 042
044 044
044 046
044 048
044 050
044 052
044 054
044 056
044 058
044 060
044 062
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-75
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 1(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 2(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 3(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 4(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 5(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 6(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 7(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 8(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 9(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.10(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.11(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.12(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.13(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.14(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.15(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.16(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.17(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.18(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.19(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.20(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.21(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.22(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.23(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.24(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.25(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.26(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.27(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.28(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.29(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.30(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.31(t)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.32(t)
044 001
Fig.: 3-314
044 003
044 005
044 007
044 009
044 011
044 013
044 015
044 017
044 019
044 021
044 023
044 025
044 027
044 029
044 031
044 033
044 035
044 037
044 039
044 041
044 043
044 045
044 047
044 049
044 051
044 053
044 055
044 057
044 059
044 061
044 063
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
7-76
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.3
Main function
Parameter Subsets
MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
010 048 001 076 001 077 001 078
Fig.: 3-90,
3-91, 3-92,
3-93,3-144,
3-189, 3-205
The neutral-point treatment of the system must be set here.
MAIN: Transfer for 1p PSx
010 040 001 079 001 080 001 081
Fig.: 3-99
For single-phase overcurrent starting without ground starting, either ground
starting or another phase starting needs to be transfer-tripped. The user
may choose to always trip the ground starting function or - as a function of
current magnitude - to trip ground or phase starting. See the section
entitled Starting Logic in Chapter 3 for more information.
MAIN: Ground starting PSx
001 249 001 250 001 251 002 001
Setting whether a ground fault is determined by an 'OR'-linked or an 'AND'linked condition of the IN> and VNG> thresholds.
002 184 002 185 002 186 002 187
MAIN: 3p transf 1p trp PSx
Setting the time delay period for the 3-pole transfer trip feature. This is
issued if no phase starting takes place and therefore no phase-selection is
possible.
025 097 024 017 024 077 025 037
MAIN: kPar
PSx
Fig.: 3-60
Fig.: 3-102
Setting for a correction factor by which the different grounding conditions for
line and parallel line shall be equalized.
MAIN: Op. mode rush r. PSx
017 097 001 088 001 089 001 090
Fig.: 3-54
Setting for the operating mode of the inrush stabilization function.
MAIN: I> lift rush r. PSx
017 095 001 085 001 086 001 087
Fig.: 3-54
Setting for the current threshold for deactivation of inrush stabilization.
MAIN: Rush I(2fn)/I(fn)PSx
017 098 001 091 001 092 001 093
Fig.: 3-54
015 065 024 034 024 094 025 054
Fig.: 3-61
Setting for the operate value of inrush stabilization.
MAIN: 3p tr.if HSR off PSx
This setting defines whether single-pole trip commands shall be converted
to a three-pole trip command when ARC is disabled.
MAIN: Enable 1p trip PSx
002 061 002 062 002 063 002 064
Fig.: 3-60
Enabling the phase-selective trip logic.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-77
7 Settings
(continued)
Fault data acquisition
FT_DA: Line length
PSx
010 005 010 006 010 007 010 008
Fig.: 3-84
This setting defines the distance in km that the fault locator interprets as
100 % when calculating the line distance to a fault.
FT_DA: Line reactance PSx
010 012 010 013 010 014 010 015
Fig.: 3-84
This setting defines the reactance X that the fault locator interprets as
100 % when calculating the line distance to a fault.
FT_DA: Start data acqu. PSx
010 011 010 042 010 043 010 044
Fig.: 3-80
This setting determines at what point during a fault the acquisition of fault
data should take place.
FT_DA: Outp. flt.locat. PSx
010 032 010 033 010 034 010 035
Fig.: 3-80
Setting for the conditions under which a fault location output occurs.
FT_DA: Mutual comp.
PSx
025 096 024 016 024 076 025 036
Fig.: 3-81
Setting for the conditions under which the residual current of the parallel line
is used to calculate the fault location.
Distance protection
DIST: I>>
PSx
010 054 010 074 010 094 011 014
Fig.: 3-90
010 068 010 088 011 008 011 028
Fig.: 3-93
Setting for the operate value of overcurrent starting.
DIST: I> (Ibl) high r. PSx
Base current setting above which undervoltage and underimpedance
starting is enabled.
Note:
This setting is only effective when Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
DIST: I> (Ibl) sens. r.PSx
010 119 010 120 010 121 010 122
Fig.: 3-93
Base current setting above which undervoltage and underimpedance
starting is enabled.
Note:
This setting is only effective when Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
DIST: Operat. mode V< PSx
010 067 010 087 011 007 011 027
Fig.: 3-94
010 069 010 089 011 009 011 029
Fig.: 3-94
Operating mode setting for undervoltage starting.
DIST: V<
PSx
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage starting.
DIST: Operat. mode Z< PSx
010 066 010 086 011 006 011 026
Fig.: 3-95
Operating mode setting for underimpedance starting.
DIST: Xfw
PSx
010 050 010 070 010 090 011 010
Fig.: 3-98
Setting for the reactance limit of underimpedance starting.
DIST: Rfw,PG
PSx
010 051 010 071 010 091 011 011
Fig.: 3-98
Setting for the resistance limit of underimpedance starting for phase-toground loops.
DIST: Rfw,PP
PSx
010 052 010 072 010 092 011 012
Fig.: 3-98
Setting for the resistance limit of underimpedance starting for phase-tophase loops.
DIST: ß
PSx
010 063 010 083 011 003 011 023
Fig.: 3-98
Angle setting for load blinding during underimpedance starting.
7-78
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: Zfw,PG
PSx
010 101 010 102 010 103 010 104
Fig.: 3-98
Setting for the load-angle-independent limit of underimpedance starting for
phase-to-ground loops.
DIST: Zfw,PP
PSx
010 105 010 106 010 107 010 108
Fig.: 3-98
Setting for the load-angle-independent limit of underimpedance starting for
phase-to-phase loops.
DIST: Zbw/Zfw
PSx
010 053 010 073 010 093 011 013
Fig.: 3-98
Setting for the limit of underimpedance starting in the backward (reverse)
direction.
DIST: Z evaluation
PSx
025 093 024 013 024 073 025 033
Fig.: 3-98
This setting determines whether the P437 will carry out the impedance
calculation of the phase-to-ground loops using the phase current corrected
by the set ground factor or using twice the phase current.
Note:
Calculation with twice the phase current may be necessary in
low-impedance-grounded networks in order to avoid inadvertent starting in
healthy lines as the result of the high ground fault current. Impedance is
calculated by the distance measuring system using solely the phase current
corrected by the set ground factor.
DIST: IN> high range PSx
010 055 010 075 010 095 011 015
Fig.: 3-91
Operate value setting for the residual current stage of ground starting.
Note:
This setting is only effective when Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
DIST: IN> sens. range PSx
010 123 010 124 010 125 010 126
Fig.: 3-91
Operate value setting for the residual current stage of ground starting.
Note:
This setting is only effective when Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
DIST: tIN>
PSx
010 057 010 077 010 097 011 017
Fig.: 3-91
In isolated-neutral or resonant-grounded systems, the operate delay tIN>
should be set so as to avoid erroneous ground starting resulting from
residual current flow due to switching phenomena related to phase-toground capacitances.
Note:
For single-pole ungrounded faults, starting proceeds does not
occur until tIN> has elapsed. tIN> should be set to at least 20 ms so that
transferred starting does not anticipate starting in another phase.
DIST: VNG>
PSx
010 056 010 076 010 096 011 016
Fig.: 3-91
Operate value setting for the voltage trigger VNG> of ground starting.
DIST: VNG>>
PSx
010 062 010 082 011 002 011 022
Fig.: 3-91
Operate value setting for the voltage trigger VNG>> of ground starting.
DIST: tVNG>>
PSx
010 061 010 081 011 001 011 021
Fig.: 3-91
012 172 012 173 012 174 012 175
Fig.: 3-101
Setting for the operate delay of the VNG>> trigger.
DIST: Meas. start. 1pG PSx
This setting defines whether the distance measuring system shall process
single-pole phase-to-ground faults.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-79
7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: Meas. start. 2pG PSx
012 176 012 177 012 178 012 179
Fig.: 3-101
This setting defines whether, in the event of two-phase-to-ground faults, the
distance measuring system shall process either the phase-to-phase loops or
the phase-to-ground loops.
DIST: Meas. start. 3pG PSx
012 180 012 181 012 182 012 183
Fig.: 3-101
This setting defines whether, in the event of three-phase-to-ground faults,
the distance measuring system shall process either the phase-to-phase
loops or the phase-to-ground loops.
DIST: Block.Z1 (1pHSR) PSx
002 068 002 069 002 070 002 071
Fig.: 3-123
This setting may be used to selectively block zone 1 during the 1-pole HSR
dead time of an internal ARC.
DIST: Block.Z2 (1pHSR) PSx
002 072 002 073 002 074 002 075
Fig.: 3-124
This setting may be used to selectively block zone 2 during the 1-pole HSR
dead time of an internal ARC.
DIST: Characteristic PSx
012 040 073 097 074 097 075 097
Fig.: 3-108
Selection of the characteristic used in distance measurement.
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
X1,PG (polygon)
X1,PP (polygon)
X2,PG (polygon)
X2,PP (polygon)
X3,PG (polygon)
X3,PP (polygon)
X4,PG (polygon)
X4,PP (polygon)
X5,PG (polygon)
X5,PP (polygon)
X6,PG (polygon)
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
012 001 012 051 013 001 013 051
Fig.: 3-117
002 076 002 077 002 078 002 079
Fig.: 3-117
012 002 012 052 013 002 013 052
Fig.: 3-116
002 080 002 081 002 082 002 083
012 003 012 053 013 003 013 053
Fig.: 3-116
002 084 002 085 002 086 002 087
012 004 012 054 013 004 013 054
Fig.: 3-116
002 089 002 090 002 091 002 092
012 100 012 101 012 102 012 103
Fig.: 3-116
002 093 002 094 002 095 002 096
012 104 012 105 012 106 012 107
Fig.: 3-116
Setting for the reactance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon
characteristic for the phase-to-ground loops (in secondary values).
DIST: X6,PP (polygon) PSx
002 097 002 098 002 099 002 126
Setting for the reactance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon
characteristic for the phase-to-phase loops (in secondary values).
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
R1,PG (polygon)
R1,PP (polygon)
R2,PG (polygon)
R2,PP (polygon)
R3,PG (polygon)
R3,PP (polygon)
R4,PG (polygon)
R4,PP (polygon)
R5,PG (polygon)
R5,PP (polygon)
R6,PG (polygon)
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
012 005 012 055 013 005 013 055
Fig.: 3-117
012 006 012 056 013 006 013 056
Fig.: 3-117
012 007 012 057 013 007 013 057
Fig.: 3-116
012 008 012 058 013 008 013 058
Fig.: 3-116
012 009 012 059 013 009 013 059
Fig.: 3-116
012 010 012 060 013 010 013 060
Fig.: 3-116
012 011 012 061 013 011 013 061
Fig.: 3-116
012 012 012 062 013 012 013 062
Fig.: 3-116
012 108 012 109 012 110 012 111
Fig.: 3-116
012 112 012 113 012 114 012 115
Fig.: 3-116
012 116 012 117 012 118 012 119
Fig.: 3-116
Setting for the resistance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon
characteristic for the phase-to-ground loops (in secondary values).
DIST: R6,PP (polygon) PSx
012 120 012 121 012 122 012 123
Fig.: 3-116
Setting for the resistance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon
characteristic for the phase-to-phase loops (in secondary values).
7-80
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
α1 (polygon)
α2 (polygon)
α3 (polygon)
α4 (polygon)
α5 (polygon)
α6 (polygon)
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
012 013 012 063 013 013 013 063
Fig.: 3-117
012 014 012 064 013 014 013 064
Fig.: 3-116
012 015 012 065 013 015 013 065
Fig.: 3-116
012 016 012 066 013 016 013 066
Fig.: 3-116
012 124 012 125 012 126 012 127
Fig.: 3-116
012 128 012 129 012 130 012 131
Fig.: 3-116
This setting defines the inclination of the limiting line of the tripping polygon
of impedance zones 1 to 6 in the R direction (resistance line).
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
σ1 (polygon)
σ2 (polygon)
σ3 (polygon)
σ4 (polygon)
σ5 (polygon)
σ6 (polygon)
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
072 086 073 086 074 086 075 086
Fig.: 3-117
072 087 073 087 074 087 075 087
Fig.: 3-116
072 088 073 088 074 088 075 088
Fig.: 3-116
072 089 073 089 074 089 075 089
Fig.: 3-116
012 156 012 157 012 158 012 159
Fig.: 3-116
012 160 012 161 012 162 012 163
Fig.: 3-116
This setting defines the inclination of the limiting line of the tripping polygon
of impedance zones 1 to 4 in the X direction (reactance line).
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
Z1 (circle)
Z2 (circle)
Z3 (circle)
Z4 (circle)
Z5 (circle)
Z6 (circle)
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
012 042 073 091 074 091 075 091
Fig.: 3-113
012 043 073 092 074 092 075 092
Fig.: 3-112
012 044 073 093 074 093 075 093
Fig.: 3-112
012 045 073 094 074 094 075 094
Fig.: 3-112
012 148 012 149 012 150 012 151
Fig.: 3-112
012 152 012 153 012 154 012 155
Fig.: 3-112
Setting for the impedance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the circular
characteristic (in secondary values).
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
α1 (circle)
α2 (circle)
α3 (circle)
α4 (circle)
α5 (circle)
α6 (circle)
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
072 090 073 090 074 090 075 090
Fig.: 3-113
072 095 073 095 074 095 075 095
Fig.: 3-112
072 096 073 096 074 096 075 096
Fig.: 3-112
072 099 073 099 074 099 075 099
Fig.: 3-112
012 164 012 165 012 166 012 167
Fig.: 3-112
012 168 012 169 012 170 012 171
Fig.: 3-112
This setting is only important if the setting With arc compensation is active.
In this case, the setting at this address determines the angle where arc
compensation becomes active in zones 1 to 6.
DIST: Arc comp. circle PSx
012 038 012 090 012 091 012 092
Fig.: 3-110
Disabling or enabling arc compensation when the circular characteristic is
selected.
DIST: Directional char PSx
002 234 002 235 002 236 002 237
Fig: 3-118
Selection of the characteristic used in distance measurement.
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
Direction N1
Direction N2
Direction N3
Direction N4
Direction N5
Direction N6
Direction N7
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
012 023 012 073 013 023 013 073
Fig.: 3-121
012 024 012 074 013 024 013 074
Fig.: 3-121
012 025 012 075 013 025 013 075
Fig.: 3-121
012 026 012 076 013 026 013 076
Fig.: 3-121
012 027 012 077 013 027 013 077
Fig.: 3-121
012 132 012 133 012 134 012 135
Fig.: 3-121
012 136 012 137 012 138 012 139
Fig.: 3-121
This directional setting defines the direction in which impedance stages 1 to
6 or final timer stage 7 measure – relative to the basic measuring direction
determined by the connection of the measuring circuits and the setting at
M AI N: C o nn . m eas . c ir c . I P .
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-81
7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: Oper.val.Vmemory PSx
010 109 010 116 010 117 010 118
Fig.: 3-106
Setting for the voltage threshold that must be exceeded so that the
measured fault angle is used for the direction determination and the
impedance calculation.
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
t1
t2
t3
t4
t5
t6
t7
t8
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
012 028 012 078 013 028 013 078
Fig.: 3-119
012 029 012 079 013 029 013 079
Fig.: 3-120
012 030 012 080 013 030 013 080
Fig.: 3-120
012 031 012 081 013 031 013 081
Fig.: 3-120
012 032 012 082 013 032 013 082
Fig.: 3-120
012 033 012 083 013 033 013 083
Fig.: 3-120
012 140 012 141 012 142 012 143
Fig.: 3-120
012 144 012 145 012 146 012 147
Fig.: 3-120
Setting for the timer stages of impedance zones 1 to 6 and of directional
and non-directional backup timer stages 7 and 8.
DIST: Enable ZE f. 1pG PSx
012 039 012 089 013 039 013 089
Fig.: 3-109
This setting defines the conditions under which the zone extension occurs in
zone 1 in the event of single-phase-to-ground fault detection.
DIST: kze,PG HSR
PSx
012 034 012 084 013 034 013 084
Fig.: 3-117
Setting for the HSR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground loops. The
setting for the zone extension factor modifies the zone 1 reactance and
resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The following applies to the
measurement:
X1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR) ⋅ X1
R1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR )⋅ R1
X1,ze HSR : reactance modified by the zone extension factor
R1,ze HSR : resistance modified by the zone extension factor
The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic:
Z1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR ) ⋅ Z1
The zone extension HSR is controlled by
Protective signaling
Auto-reclosing control (ARC) before an HSR when protective
signaling is not ready
† A reclose command, whether or not protective signaling is ready
† Switch on to fault protection
†
†
†
7-82
An appropriately configured binary signal input.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: kze,PP HSR
PSx
012 035 012 085 013 035 013 085
Fig.: 3-117
Setting for the HSR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground or phase-tophase loops. The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the zone 1
reactance and resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The following
applies to the measurement:
X1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR) ⋅ X1
R1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR )⋅ R1
X1,ze HSR : reactance modified by the zone extension factor
R1,ze HSR : resistance modified by the zone extension factor
The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic:
Z1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR ) ⋅ Z1
Zone extension is controlled by
Protective signaling
Auto-reclosing control (ARC) before an HSR when protective
signaling is not ready
† A reclose command, whether or not protective signaling is ready
† Switch on to fault protection
†
†
†
An appropriately configured binary signal input.
DIST: kze,PG TDR
PSx
012 046 012 096 013 046 013 096
Fig.: 3-117
Setting for the TDR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground loops. The
setting for the zone extension factor modifies the zone 1 reactance and
resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The following applies to the
measurement:
X1,ze TDR = (k ze TDR ) ⋅ X1
R1,ze TDR = (k ze TDR )⋅ R1
X1,ze TDR : reactance modified by the zone extension factor
R1,ze TDR : resistance modified by the zone extension factor
The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic:
Z1,ze TDR = (k ze TDR ) ⋅ Z1
Z1,ze TDR : impedance modified by the zone extension factor
Zone extension takes place before a TDR (time-delay reclosure), as long as
another TDR is permitted.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-83
7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: kze,PP TDR
PSx
012 047 012 097 013 047 013 097
Fig.: 3-117
Setting for the TDR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground or phase-tophase loops. The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the zone 1
reactance and resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The following
applies to the measurement:
X1, ze TDR = (k ze TDR ) ⋅ X1
R1, ze TDR = (k ze TDR )⋅ R1
X1, ze TDR : reactance modified by the zone extension factor
R1, ze TDR : resistance modified by the zone extension factor
The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic:
Z1, ze TDR = (k ze TDR ) ⋅ Z1
Z1, ze TDR : impedance modified by the zone extension factor
Zone extension takes place before a TDR (time-delay reclosure), as long as
another TDR is permitted.
026 025 027 025 028 025 029 025
DIST: t1,ze
PSx
Setting for the timer stage of impedance zone 1 with extended reach.
Fig.: 3-119
012 037 012 087 013 037 013 087
DIST: Abs. value kG PSx
012 036 012 086 013 036 013 086
DIST: Angle kG
PSx
Setting for the absolute value and the angle of the complex ground factor, kG.
Fig.: 3-97
kG =
Fig.: 3-97
Z 0 − ZL
3 ⋅ ZL
Z 0 : zero-sequence impedance
ZL : positive-sequence impedance
kG =
(X0 − XL )2 + (R 0 − RL )2
2
3 ⋅ RL + XL
Angle k G = arctan
2
X 0 − XL
X
− arctan L
R 0 − RL
RL
R 0 : resistance component of zero-sequence impedance
RL : resistance component of positive-sequence impedance
X 0 : reactance component of zero-sequence impedance
XL : reactance component of positive-sequence impedance
If the calculated value cannot be set exactly, then a next smaller value
should be set.
7-84
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: kG,par abs.value PSx
DIST: kG,par angle PSx
012 049 012 099 013 049 013 099
Fig.: 3-102
012 048 012 098 013 048 013 098
Fig.: 3-102
Setting the absolute value and the angle of the complex ground factor kG,par
Z
k G,par = 00
3 ⋅ ZL
Z 00 :
coupling impedance in the zero-sequence system of the parallel line
ZL :
positive-sequence impedance
2
k G,par =
X 00 + R 00
2
2
2
3 ⋅ RL + XL
k G Angle par = arctan
R 00 :
RL :
X 00 :
XL :
X 00
X
− arctan L
R 00
RL
resistance component of coupling impedance in the zerosequence system of the double-circuit line
resistance component of positive-sequence impedance
reactance component of coupling impedance in the zerosequence system of the double-circuit line
reactance component of positive-sequence impedance
If the calculated value cannot be set exactly, then a next smaller value
should be set.
025 095 024 015 024 075 025 035
DIST: Mutual comp. PSx
Fig.: 3-102
This setting determines whether distance protection operates with or without
zero current compensation.
DIST: IN,par>
PSx
012 184 012 185 012 186 012 187
Fig.: 3-102
The residual current of the parallel line is monitored to determine whether it
exceeds the set threshold. This monitoring function is only used for
signaling purposes and has no functional effects on distance measurement.
DIST: Trip zone 1 PG PSx
011 050 011 051 011 052 011 053
Fig.: 3-127
For zone 1 the user can specify whether the distance trip in the event of
phase-to-ground faults shall be single-pole or three-pole.
Note:
When the P437 is being operated with ARC, which will carry out
a reclosure in the event of a single-pole or three-pole trip, then the setting
here should be 1-pole.
DIST: Trip zone 1 PP PSx
011 054 011 055 011 056 011 057
Fig.: 3-127
For zone 1 the user can specify whether the distance trip in the event of
phase-to-phase faults shall be single-pole or three-pole. Where a singlepole trip has been selected, there is a choice as to whether the trip in the
event of a two-pole starting should be for the leading or the trailing phase.
Note:
When the P437 is being operated with ARC, which will carry out
a reclosure in the event of a single-pole or three-pole trip, then the setting
here should be 1-pole.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-85
7 Settings
(continued)
Power swing blocking
PSB: Enable
PSx
015 090 015 091 015 092 015 093
Fig.: 3-128
This setting defines the setting group in which the power swing blocking
function is enabled. (Available as of software version -607)
Backup overcurrent-time
protection (Backup DTOC)
BUOC: I>
PSx
010 058 010 078 010 098 011 018
Fig.: 3-144
Operate value setting for the phase currents of the backup overcurrent-time
protection function.
BUOC: tI>
PSx
010 059 010 079 010 099 011 019
Fig.: 3-144
Operate delay for the backup overcurrent-time protection.
BUOC: IN>
PSx
010 064 010 084 011 004 011 024
Fig.: 3-144
Operate value setting for the residual current of the backup overcurrent-time
protection function.
Note:
This setting is only active if the setting at M A IN : Ne u tr a lpo i nt tr e atm . is low-impedance grounding.
BUOC: tIN>
PSx
010 065 010 085 011 005 011 025
Fig.: 3-144
Operate delay for the backup overcurrent-time protection.
Switch on to fault protection
SOTF: Enable
PSx
001 203 001 204 001 205 001 206
Fig.: 3-147
This setting defines the parameter subset in which function group SOTF is
enabled.
SOTF: Operating mode PSx
011 061 001 184 001 185 001 186
Fig.: 3-147
The setting of the operating mode defines whether a general start shall
cause a trip while a timer stage is running ("trip with starting") or if the
measuring range of the impedance zone 1 is extended by the set zone
extension factor D I ST : k ze H SR PSx ("trip with extension").
SOTF: Man. close timer PSx
011 060 001 181 001 182 001 183
Fig.: 3-147
Setting for the timer stage that will be started by a manual close.
SOTF: Activation mode PSx
006 142 006 143 006 144 006 145
Fig.: 3-147
Select the SOTF activation mode (either Trigger or Line Dead State).
SOTF: With V< enable PSx
SOTF: Operate delay PSx
SOTF: Release delay PSx
006 005 006 006 006 007 006 008
Fig.: 3-145
006 138 006 139 006 140 006 141
Fig.: 3-145
002 128 002 129 002 133 002 134
Fig.: 3-145
If ‘With V< enable’ is set to Yes, then a settable timer stage (defined as
Operate Delay and Release Delay) will have to elapse before an
undervoltage condition will lead to the decision 'Line dead'.
SOTF: Evaluation IN
PSx
001 191 001 192 001 193 001 194
Fig.: 3-146
This setting defines which residual current will be monitored: the residual
current derived from the three phase currents or the residual current
measured at the T 4 transformer.
SOTF: IN> (meas.)
SOTF: IN> (calc.)
PSx
PSx
001 189 001 195 001 196 001 197
Fig.: 3-146
001 190 001 198 001 199 001 202
Fig.: 3-146
Settings for operate values IN> (meas.) and IN> (calc.).
SOTF: tIN>
PSx
001 177 001 178 001 179 001 180
Fig.: 3-146
Setting for the operate delay of stages IN> (meas.) or IN> (calc.).
7-86
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
SOTF: I>
PSx
006 130 006 131 006 132 006 133
Fig.: 3-146
006 134 006 135 006 136 006 137
Fig.: 3-146
015 014 015 015 015 016 015 017
Fig.: 3-148
Setting for operate value I>.
SOTF: tI>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of stages I>.
Protective signaling
PSIG: Enable
PSx
This setting defines the parameter subset in which protective signaling is
enabled.
PSIG: No. telecom. ch. PSx
015 026 024 012 024 072 025 032
Fig.: 3-151,
3-155, 3-156,
3-157, 3-158,
3-160, 3-161,
3-163, 3-164,
3-166, 3-167,
3-172, 3-175,
3-176, 3-193
Setting for the number of communication channels for protective signaling.
PSIG: Operating mode PSx
015 000 024 000 024 060 025 020
Fig.: 3-153
Setting for the operating mode of protective signaling.
PSIG: Oper. mode send PSx
015 036 015 037 015 040 015 041
Fig.: 3-163,
3-166, 3-168
This setting defines whether protective signaling generates the send signal
as a function of direction or distance.
PSIG: Oper. mode trip PSx
015 107 015 108 015 113 015 114
Fig.: 3-161,
3-164, 3-167,
3-168
This setting defines whether a trip triggered by protective signaling will be a
function of direction or distance.
PSIG: Tripping time
PSx
015 011 024 003 024 063 025 023
Fig.: 3-149
The tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection when
protective signaling is ready.
PSIG: Release t. send PSx
015 002 024 001 024 061 025 021
Fig.: 3-155,
3-157, 3-160,
3-163, 3-166,
3-176
This setting determines the duration of the send signal.
PSIG: Echo on receive PSx
015 003 024 002 024 062 025 022
Fig.: 3-175
This setting determines whether protective signaling operates with or
without echo.
PSIG: Op. delay echo PSx
015 022 024 008 024 068 025 028
Fig.: 3-175
015 023 024 009 024 069 025 029
Fig.: 3-175
Setting for the operate delay of the echo pulse.
PSIG: Pulse dur. echo PSx
Setting for echo pulse duration.
PSIG: Trip signal V< PSx
015 021 024 007 024 067 025 027
This setting determines whether a trip signal will be issued when the weakinfeed logic is triggered.
PSIG: V< weak infeed PSx
015 020 024 006 024 066 025 026
Setting for the threshold of the weak infeed logic.
PSIG: tV<
PSx
015 019 024 005 024 065 025 025
Setting for the operate delay of weak-infeed logic.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-87
7 Settings
(continued)
PSIG: Start cond. tV< PSx
006 148 006 149 006 150 006 151
Fig.: 3-174
Select whether the undervoltage timer stage is started if the undervoltage
condition is present (V<), or if both the undervoltage condition and the
weak-infeed starting are present (V< & W1 start).
PSIG: tBlock
PSx
015 024 024 010 024 070 025 030
Fig.: 3-152
Setting for the transient blocking time of protective signaling.
PSIG: 3ended line prot PSx
006 039 006 046 006 047 006 048
Fig.: 3-169
Select whether the P S IG : Rec e i ve ( A) EX T or
P SIG : R ec e i v e ( B) EX T signals shall be used in an OR combination
(setting: No) or in an AND combination (setting: Yes).
PSIG: Frequency monit. PSx
015 025 024 011 024 071 025 031
Fig.: 3-151
This setting defines whether failure of frequency transmission will be
monitored.
Auto-reclosing control
ARC: Enable
PSx
015 046 015 047 015 048 015 049
Fig.: 3-178
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ARC is enabled.
ARC: CB clos.pos.sig. PSx
015 050 024 024 024 084 025 044
Fig.: 3-179
This setting defines whether the CB closed position will be scanned or not.
If the setting is 'With', a binary signal input must be configured accordingly.
ARC: Operating mode PSx
015 100 015 101 015 102 015 103
Fig.: 3-177
This setting defines whether the ARC will carry out HSR and TDR, only
TDR, or only a test HSR.
ARC: Operative time 1 PSx
015 066 024 035 024 095 025 055
Fig.: 3-195
015 083 024 042 025 002 025 062
Fig.: 3-195
015 051 024 025 024 085 025 045
Fig.: 3-182
Setting for the operative time 1.
ARC: Operative time 2 PSx
Setting for operative time 2.
ARC: HSR oper. mode PSx
The operating mode setting defines which of the following reclosure types is
permitted.
† TDR only
† HSR or TDR
† Test HSR only
Note:
If a single-pole HSR is to be carried out, then the user must
select the 1-pole setting at either
DI ST : T r i p zo n e 1 PG or D I ST : T r i p zo n e 1 P P.
ARC: Trip time HSR
PSx
015 072 024 040 025 000 025 060
Fig.: 3-181
The HSR tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection or
the operate delay of backup overcurrent-time protection – provided that the
BUOC operating mode is set accordingly – if a HSR is permitted and
protective signaling is not ready.
ARC: HSR oper. mode 2 PSx
015 044 024 022 024 082 025 042
Fig.: 3-182
This setting defines whether ARC will be controlled by the starting decisions
(Start-dependent) or the trip decisions (Trip-dependent).
ARC: Dead time 1p
PSx
015 055 024 029 024 089 025 049
Fig.: 3-195
015 056 024 030 024 090 025 050
Fig.: 3-195
Dead time setting for a single-pole HSR.
ARC: Dead time 3p
PSx
Dead time setting for a three-pole HSR.
7-88
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
ARC: Dead time max
PSx
015 084 024 043 025 003 025 063
Fig.: 3-195
018 051 024 049 025 009 025 069
Fig.: 3-195
Setting for the maximum dead time.
ARC: tDiscrim.
PSx
Setting for the discrimination time during which there will be a switch from a
single-pole HSR to a three-pole HSR when a secondary fault occurs.
ARC: Mon. PSIG recv. PSx
015 082 024 050 025 010 025 070
Fig.: 3-193
This setting determines whether the number of PSIG receive signals is
monitored during the dead time.
ARC: Zone ext. f. HSR PSx
015 059 024 033 024 093 025 053
Fig.: 3-191
This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended by
the zone extension factor kze HSR during normal system operation and
while the operative times are elapsing.
Note:
This setting is only active if protective signaling is not ready.
ARC: No. permit. TDR PSx
015 068 024 037 024 097 025 057
Fig.: 3-195
Setting for the number of time-delayed reclosures permitted. With the ‘0’
setting, only one HSR is carried out.
ARC: Trip time TDR
PSx
015 073 024 041 025 001 025 061
Fig.: 3-181
The TDR tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection or
the operate delay of backup overcurrent-time protection – provided that the
BUOC operating mode is set accordingly – if a TDR is permitted and
protective signaling is not ready.
ARC: TDR dead time
PSx
015 057 024 031 024 091 025 051
Fig.: 3-195
015 071 024 039 024 099 025 059
Fig.: 3-191
Setting for the TDR dead time.
ARC: Zone ext. f. TDR PSx
This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended
prior to a TDR.
ARC: Enable RRC
PSx
015 085 024 044 025 004 025 064
Fig.: 3-189
015 086 024 045 025 005 025 065
Fig.: 3-195
015 087 024 046 025 006 025 066
Fig.: 3-189
Enabling the rapid reclosure (RRC) function.
ARC: tRRC
PSx
Setting for the timer stage of rapid reclosure (RRC).
ARC: V> RRC
PSx
Setting for the voltage threshold that must be exceeded in order for an RRC
to be carried out.
ARC: Reclaim time
PSx
015 054 024 028 024 088 025 048
Fig.: 3-195
015 043 024 021 024 081 025 041
Fig.: 3-180
Setting for the reclaim time.
ARC: Block. time int. PSx
Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after
cancellation of the blocks set by the P437.
ARC: Block. time ext. PSx
015 058 024 032 024 092 025 052
Fig.: 3-180
Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after
blocking by a binary signal input.
ARC: Op. mode ext ARC PSx
015 045 024 023 024 083 025 043
Fig.: 3-192
This setting defines the operating mode for an external ARC working
together with the P437.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-89
7 Settings
(continued)
ARC: Zone ext.dur. RC PSx
015 088 024 047 025 007 025 067
Fig.: 3-191
This setting defines whether the following takes place:
A zone extension will be carried out during a close command by a HSR
that is not synchronism-checked.
† Zone extension will occur with each reclosure command.
†
ARC: Parallel trip
PSx
015 053 024 027 024 087 025 047
Fig.: 3-195
This setting defines whether the trip commands of a protection device
operating together with the P437 will affect operation of the ARC function.
For further details see the section entitled ‘Parallel Blocking’ in Chapter 3.
Automatic synchronism check ASC: Enable
PSx
018 020 018 021 018 022 018 023
Fig.: 3-198
This setting defines the parameter subset in which automatic synchronism
check (ASC) is enabled.
ASC: Active for HSR PSx
018 001 077 030 078 030 079 030
Fig.: 3-199
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole HSR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
ASC: Active for TDR PSx
018 002 077 031 078 031 079 031
Fig.: 3-199
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole TDR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
ASC: Active for RRC PSx
018 006 077 033 078 033 079 033
Fig.: 3-199
This setting specifies whether enabling by the ASC function is required
before reclosing after a rapid reclosure can occur.
ASC: Clos.rej.w.block PSx
018 003 077 032 078 032 079 032
Fig.: 3-199
This setting defines whether reclosing is rejected after being blocked by
ASC.
ASC: Operative time PSx
018 010 077 034 078 034 079 034
Fig.: 3-207
031 060 077 044 078 044 079 044
Fig.: 3-197
Setting for the operative time for ASC.
ASC: Measurement loop PSx
The voltage measurement loop, corresponding to the reference voltage,
must be selected so that determination of differential values is correct.
Example: Connect transformer T 15 to measure the reference voltage to
phases A & B The measurement loop should be set to 'Loop A-B'.
ASC: Phi offset
PSx
018 034 077 042 078 042 079 042
Fig.: 3-205
Setting a Phi offset that may be necessary so that determination of the
differential angle is correct.
ASC: AR op. mode
PSx
018 025 018 026 018 027 018 028
Fig.: 3-205
Auto-reclosing control:
Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the operating mode.
ASC: AR with tCB
PSx
000 038 000 039 000 050 000 051
Auto-reclosing control:
In slightly asynchronous power systems, setting this parameter to yes
ensures that the circuit breaker closing time is taken into account by the
automatic synchronism check (ASC) to issue of a close command.
ASC: AR Op.mode v-chk.PSx
018 029 018 030 018 031 018 032
Fig.: 3-203
Auto-reclosing control:
This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions for a voltage
controlled close enable.
7-90
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
ASC: AR V> volt.check PSx
026 017 077 043 078 043 079 043
Fig.: 3-203
Auto-reclosing control:
Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the
reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as "Voltage
showing".
Note:
The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting A S C:
AR O p.m od e v- c hk . P S x .
ASC: AR V< volt.check PSx
018 017 077 040 078 040 079 040
Fig.: 3-203
Auto-reclosing control:
Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the
reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized as "Voltage
showing".
Note:
The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting A S C:
AR O p.m od e v- c hk . P S x .
ASC: AR tmin v-check PSx
018 018 077 041 078 041 079 041
Fig.: 3-203
Auto-reclosing control:
Setting for the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during
which voltage conditions must be met so that the close enable of the ASC is
effected.
ASC: AR V> sync.check PSx
018 011 077 035 078 035 079 035
Fig.: 3-205
Auto-reclosing control:
Setting for the threshold of the minimum voltage to obtain a synchronism
checked close enable.
ASC: AR delta Vmax
PSx
018 012 077 036 078 036 079 036
Fig.: 3-205
Auto-reclosing control:
Setting the maximum differential voltage between measured and reference
voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: AR delta f max PSx
018 014 077 038 078 038 079 038
Fig.: 3-205
Auto-reclosing control:
Setting the maximum differential frequency between measured and
reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: AR delta phi max PSx
018 013 077 037 078 037 079 037
Fig.: 3-205
Auto-reclosing control:
Setting the maximum differential angle between measured and reference
voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: AR tmin sync.chk PSx
018 015 077 039 078 039 079 039
Fig.: 3-205
Auto-reclosing control:
Setting for the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during
which synchronism conditions must be met so that the close enable of the
ASC is effected.
ASC: MC op. mode
PSx
000 056 000 057 000 058 000 059
Fig.: 3-206
Manual close command:
Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the operating mode.
ASC: MC with tCB
PSx
000 102 000 103 000 104 000 105
Manual close command:
In slightly asynchronous power systems, setting this parameter to yes
ensures that the circuit breaker closing time is taken into account by the
automatic synchronism check (ASC) to issue of a close command.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-91
7 Settings
(continued)
ASC: MC op.mode v-chk.PSx
000 060 000 061 000 062 000 063
Fig.: 3-204
Manual close command:
This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions for a voltage
controlled close enable.
ASC: MC V> volt.check PSx
000 064 000 065 000 066 000 067
Fig.: 3-204
Manual close command:
Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the
reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as "Voltage
showing".
Note:
The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting A S C:
MC O p.m od e v- c hk . P S x .
ASC: MC V< volt.check PSx
000 068 000 069 000 070 000 071
Fig.: 3-204
Manual close command:
Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the
reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized as "Voltage
showing".
Note:
The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting A S C:
MC O p.m od e v- c hk . P S x .
ASC: MC tmin v-check PSx
000 072 000 073 000 074 000 075
Fig.: 3-204
Manual close command:
Setting for the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during
which voltage conditions must be met so that the close enable of the ASC is
effected.
ASC: MC V> sync.check PSx
000 052 000 053 000 054 000 055
Fig.: 3-206
Manual close command:
Setting for the threshold of the minimum voltage to obtain a synchronism
checked close enable.
ASC: MC delta Vmax
PSx
000 080 000 081 000 082 000 083
Fig.: 3-206
Manual close command:
Setting the maximum differential voltage between measured and reference
voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: MC delta f max PSx
000 084 000 086 000 087 000 088
Fig.: 3-206
Manual close command:
Setting the maximum differential frequency between measured and
reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: MC delta phi max PSx
000 089 000 091 000 092 000 093
Fig.: 3-206
Manual close command:
Setting the maximum differential angle between measured and reference
voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: MC tmin sync.chk PSx
000 098 000 099 000 100 000 101
Fig.: 3-206
Manual close command:
Setting for the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during
which synchronism conditions must be met so that the close enable of the
ASC is effected.
7-92
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
Ground fault (short-circuit)
protection
GFSC: Enable
PSx
018 072 018 073 018 074 018 075
Fig.: 3-209
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ground fault (shortcircuit) protection is enabled.
Ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling
GSCSG: Enable
PSx
023 071 023 072 023 073 023 074
Fig.: 3-227
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ground fault (shortcircuit) protection signaling is enabled.
Definite-time overcurrent
protection
DTOC: Enable
PSx
072 098 073 098 074 098 075 098
Fig.: 3-238
This setting defines the parameter subset in which definite-time overcurrent
protection is enabled.
DTOC: I>
PSx
072 007 073 007 074 007 075 007
Setting for operate value I>.
DTOC: I>>
PSx
072 008 073 008 074 008 075 008
Setting for operate value I>>.
DTOC: I>>>
PSx
072 009 073 009 074 009 075 009
Setting for operate value I>>>.
DTOC: I>>>>
PSx
072 010 073 010 074 010 075 010
Setting for operate value I>>>>.
DTOC: tI>
PSx
072 019 073 019 074 019 075 019
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>.
DTOC: tI>>
PSx
072 020 073 020 074 020 075 020
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>>.
DTOC: tI>>>
PSx
072 021 073 021 074 021 075 021
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>>>.
DTOC: tI>>>>
PSx
072 022 073 022 074 022 075 022
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>>>>.
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
Direction tIN> PSx
Direction tIN>> PSx
Direction tIN>>> PSx
Direction tIN>>>>PSx
072 032 072 042 072 082 072 091
Fig.: 3-245
072 033 072 043 072 083 072 092
Fig.: 3-245
072 034 072 044 072 084 072 093
Fig.: 3-245
072 035 072 045 072 085 072 094
Fig.: 3-245
The setting for the measurement direction determines the measurement
direction of the residual current stages.
DTOC: Ineg>
PSx
072 011 073 011 074 011 075 011
Fig.: 3-240
Setting for the operate value Ineg> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).
DTOC: Ineg>>
PSx
072 012 073 012 074 012 075 012
Fig.: 3-240
Setting for the operate value Ineg>> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).
DTOC: Ineg>>>
PSx
072 013 073 013 074 013 075 013
Fig.: 3-240
Setting for the operate value Ineg>>> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).
DTOC: Ineg>>>>
PSx
072 014 073 014 074 014 075 014
Fig.: 3-240
Setting for operate value Ineg>>>>.
(Ineg = negative-sequence current).
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-93
7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC: tIneg>
PSx
072 023 073 023 074 023 075 023
Fig.: 3-240
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg> (Ineg = negativesequence current).
DTOC: tIneg>>
PSx
072 024 073 024 074 024 075 024
Fig.: 3-240
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg>>
(Ineg = negative-sequence current).
DTOC: tIneg>>>
PSx
072 025 073 025 074 025 075 025
Fig.: 3-240
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg>>>
(Ineg = negative-sequence current).
DTOC: tIneg>>>>
PSx
072 026 073 026 074 026 075 026
Fig.: 3-240
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg>>>>
(Ineg = negative-sequence current).
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
tIneg> (1pHSR) PSx
tIneg>> (1pHSR) PSx
tIneg>>> (1pHSR) PSx
tIneg>>>>(1pHSR) PSx
002 160 002 161 002 162 002 163
Fig.: 3-246
002 164 002 165 002 166 002 167
002 168 002 169 002 170 002 171
002 172 002 173 002 174 002 175
Setting for the operating mode of the DTOC timer stages for the negativesequence system during the 1-pole dead time of the high-speed reclosure
(HSR) of an ARC cycle. (See: "Settable operation mode during 1-pole dead
time of HSR".)
073 189 073 190 073 202 073 219
Fig.: 3-241
DTOC: Evaluation IN PSx
This setting defines which residual current will be monitored by the residual
current stages: the residual current calculated from the three phase currents
or the residual current measured at the T 4 transformer.
DTOC: IN>
PSx
072 015 073 015 074 015 075 015
Setting for operate value IN> (IN = residual current).
DTOC: IN>>
PSx
072 016 073 016 074 016 075 016
Setting for operate value IN>> (IN = residual current).
DTOC: IN>>>
PSx
072 017 073 017 074 017 075 017
Setting for operate value IN>>> (IN = residual current).
DTOC: IN>>>>
PSx
072 018 073 018 074 018 075 018
Setting the operate value of the fourth overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
Caution! The range of setting values includes operate values that are not
permitted as continuous current values (see ‘Technical Data’).
DTOC: tIN timer start PSx
002 138 002 139 002 142 002 143
With this setting the triggering of the timers for the residual current system
can now be set as direction-dependent.
DTOC: tIN>
PSx
072 027 073 027 074 027 075 027
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>.
DTOC: tIN>>
PSx
072 028 073 028 074 028 075 028
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>.
DTOC: tIN>>>
PSx
072 029 073 029 074 029 075 029
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>>.
7-94
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC: tIN>>>>
PSx
072 030 073 030 074 030 075 030
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>>>.
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
tIN> (1pHSR) PSx
tIN>> (1pHSR) PSx
tIN>>> (1pHSR) PSx
tIN>>>> (1pHSR) PSx
002 144 002 145 002 146 002 147
Fig.: 3-247
002 148 002 149 002 150 002 151
002 152 002 153 002 154 002 155
002 156 002 157 002 158 002 159
Setting for the operating mode of the DTOC timer stages for the residual
current system during the 1-pole dead time of the high-speed reclosure
(HSR) of an ARC cycle. (See: "Settable operation mode during 1-pole dead
time of HSR".)
DTOC: VNG>
PSx
010 045 010 060 010 080 010 139
Fig.: 3-244
This setting defines the threshold value that the neutral-point displacement
voltage must exceed so that the direction determination is enabled.
DTOC: Angle phiG
PSx
004 092 004 247 004 248 004 249
Fig.: 3-244
Setting for the position of the straight line separating forward and backward
(reverse) directions.
Inverse-time overcurrent
protection
IDMT: Enable
PSx
072 000 073 000 074 000 075 000
Fig.: 3-249
This setting defines the parameter subset in which inverse-time overcurrent
protection is enabled (phase current system).
IDMT: Iref,P
PSx
072 050 073 050 074 050 075 050
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the reference current (phase current system).
IDMT: Characterist. P PSx
072 056 073 056 074 056 075 056
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the tripping characteristic (phase current system).
IDMT: Ch. factor kt,P PSx
072 053 073 053 074 053 075 053
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (phase current
system).
IDMT: Release P
PSx
072 059 073 059 074 059 075 059
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the release or reset characteristic (phase current system).
IDMT: Direction P
PSx
072 062 073 062 074 062 075 062
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the IDMT
protection function (phase current system).
IDMT: Direct. meas. P PSx
072 065 073 065 074 065 075 065
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines whether the directional decision of the distance
protection function will be used or the directional decision formed from the
negative-sequence current and voltage (phase current system).
IDMT: Op. w/o volt. P PSx
072 068 073 068 074 068 075 068
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines the operating mode of IDMT protection in the event
of measuring voltage failure (phase current system).
IDMT: Iref,neg
PSx
072 051 073 051 074 051 075 051
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system).
IDMT: Character. neg. PSx
072 057 073 057 074 057 075 057
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the tripping characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
IDMT: Factor kt,neg
PSx
072 054 073 054 074 054 075 054
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the factor kt,neg of the starting characteristic (negative-sequence
current system).
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-95
7 Settings
(continued)
IDMT: Release neg.
PSx
072 060 073 060 074 060 075 060
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the release or reset characteristic (negative-sequence current
system).
IDMT: Direction neg. PSx
072 063 073 063 074 063 075 063
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the IDMT
protection function (negative-sequence current system).
IDMT: Dir. meas. neg PSx
072 066 073 066 074 066 075 066
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines whether the directional decision of the distance
protection function will be used or the directional decision formed from the
negative-sequence current and voltage (negative-sequence current
system).
IDMT: Op. w/o volt.neg PSx
072 069 073 069 074 069 075 069
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines the operating mode of IDMT protection in the event
of measuring voltage failure (negative-sequence current system).
IDMT: Evaluation IN
PSx
073 222 073 239 073 245 073 255
Fig.: 3-250
This setting defines which residual current will be monitored by the residual
current stages: the residual current calculated from the three phase currents
or the residual current measured at the T 4 transformer.
IDMT: Iref,N (meas.) PSx
IDMT: Iref,N (calc.) PSx
001 169 001 170 001 171 001 172
072 052 073 052 074 052 075 052
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the reference current (residual current system).
Depending on the setting at ID MT : E v a lu a ti o n IN P Sx , either
ID MT : I r ef , N (c a lc .) P Sx or I DMT : Ir ef ,N (m eas .) P Sx is used.
The measured base current allows lower settings.
IDMT: Factor KI,N
PSx
001 173 001 174 001 175 001 176
Fig.: 3-255
The set factor ID MT : F ac tor Ir ef ,I N is multiplied by the reference
quantity Iref,N in order to constitute the minimum operate value for the
current in the residual current measuring system. (Available as of software
version -609)
IDMT: Characterist. N PSx
072 058 073 058 074 058 075 058
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the tripping characteristic (residual current system).
IDMT: Min. trip time N PSx
072 079 073 079 074 079 075 079
Setting for the minimum trip time for the residual current measuring system
(as of software version –609 of the P437). This timer stage is started as
soon as the minimum operate value is exceeded. After the timer has
elapsed, the trip signal is issued, regardless of the value of the current.
IDMT: Factor kt,N
PSx
072 055 073 055 074 055 075 055
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the factor kt,N of the starting characteristic (residual current
system).
IDMT: Release N
PSx
072 061 073 061 074 061 075 061
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the release characteristic (residual current system).
IDMT: Direction N
PSx
072 064 073 064 074 064 075 064
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the IDMT
protection function (residual current system).
IDMT: Direct. meas. N PSx
072 067 073 067 074 067 075 067
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines whether the directional decision of the distance
protection function will be used or the direction decision formed from the
negative-sequence current and voltage (residual current system).
7-96
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
IDMT: Op. w/o volt. N PSx
072 076 073 076 074 076 075 076
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines the operating mode of IDMT protection in the event
of measuring voltage failure (residual current system).
IDMT: Comp.react. Xneg PSx
002 193 002 194 002 195 002 196
Setting of parameter Xneg to correct the measuring voltage (see sections
IDMT, GFSC, "Improved directional measurement for series compensated
line applications").
Power directional protection
P<>: Enabled
PSx
014 252 014 253 014 254 014 255
Fig.: 3-278
This setting defines the parameter subset in which power directional
protection is enabled.
P<>: P> high range
PSx
017 203 017 204 017 205 017 213
Setting for operate value P> of active power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: P> sens. range PSx
017 120 017 200 017 201 017 202
Setting for operate value P> of active power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Operate delay P> PSx
017 128 017 129 017 130 017 131
Setting for the operate delay of stage P>.
P<>: Release delay P> PSx
017 132 017 133 017 134 017 135
Setting for the release delay of stage P>.
017 136 017 137 017 138 017 139
P<>: Direction P> PSx
The direction setting defines the direction decision – forward, backward, or
non-directional – for which a P> trip signal occurs.
P<>: Diseng. ratio P> PSx
Fig.: 3-281
017 124 017 125 017 126 017 127
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P> of active power.
P<>: P>> high range PSx
017 214 017 215 017 216 017 217
Setting for operate value P>> of active power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: P>> sens. range PSx
017 140 017 141 017 142 017 143
Setting for operate value P>> of active power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Operate delay P>>PSx
017 148 017 149 017 150 017 151
Setting for the operate delay of stage P>>.
P<>: Release delay P>>PSx
017 152 017 153 017 154 017 155
Setting for the release delay of stage P>>.
017 156 017 157 017 158 017 159
P<>: Direction P>> PSx
The direction setting defines the direction decision – forward, backward, or
non-directional – for which a P>> trip signal occurs.
P<>: Diseng. ratio P>>PSx
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Fig.: 3-281
017 144 017 145 017 146 017 147
7-97
7 Settings
(continued)
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P>> of active power.
P<>: Q> high range
PSx
017 218 017 219 017 220 017 221
Setting for operate value Q> of reactive power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Q> sens. range PSx
017 160 017 161 017 162 017 163
Setting for operate value Q> of reactive power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Operate delay Q> PSx
017 168 017 169 017 170 017 171
Setting for the operate delay of stage Q>.
P<>: Release delay Q> PSx
017 172 017 173 017 174 017 175
Setting for the release delay of stage Q>.
017 176 017 177 017 178 017 179
P<>: Direction Q> PSx
The direction setting defines the direction decision – forward, backward, or
non-directional – for which a Q> trip signal occurs.
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q> PSx
Fig.: 3-283
017 164 017 165 017 166 017 167
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q> of reactive power.
P<>: Q>> high range PSx
017 222 017 223 017 224 017 225
Setting for operate value Q>> of reactive power.
Note: This setting is only active if Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Q>> sens. range PSx
017 180 017 181 017 182 017 183
Setting for operate value Q>> of reactive power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Operate delay Q>>PSx
017 188 017 189 017 190 017 191
Setting for the operate delay of stage Q>>.
P<>: Release delay Q>>PSx
017 192 017 193 017 194 017 195
Setting for the release delay of stage Q>>.
017 196 017 197 017 198 017 199
P<>: Direction Q>> PSx
The direction setting defines the direction decision – forward, backward, or
non-directional – for which a Q>> trip signal occurs.
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q>>PSx
Fig.: 3-283
017 184 017 185 017 186 017 187
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q>> of reactive power.
P<>: P< high range
PSx
017 013 017 014 017 016 017 020
Setting the operate value P< for the active power.
Note:
7-98
This setting is only active if Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
P<>: P< sens. range PSx
017 030 017 031 017 032 017 033
Setting the operate value P< for the active power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Operate delay P< PSx
017 060 017 061 017 062 017 063
Setting the operate delay of stage P<.
P<>: Release delay P< PSx
017 226 017 227 017 228 017 229
Setting the release delay of stage P<.
P<>: Direction P<
PSx
017 230 017 231 017 232 017 233
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P< trip signal
will be issued for forward, backward or non-directional fault decisions.
P<>: Diseng. ratio P< PSx
017 034 017 035 017 036 017 037
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value P< for the active power.
P<>: P<< high range PSx
017 068 017 021 017 025 017 026
Setting the operate value P<< for the active power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: P<< sens. range PSx
017 234 017 235 017 236 017 237
Setting the operate value P<< for the active power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Operate delay P<<PSx
017 242 017 243 017 244 017 245
Setting the operate delay of stage P<<.
P<>: Release delay P<<PSx
017 246 017 247 017 248 017 249
Setting the release delay of stage P<<.
P<>: Direction P<<
PSx
017 250 017 251 017 252 017 253
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P<< trip signal
will be issued for forward, backward or non-directional fault decisions.
P<>: Diseng.ratio P<< PSx
017 238 017 239 017 240 017 241
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value P<< for the active power.
P<>: Q< high range
PSx
017 069 017 038 017 039 017 045
Setting the operate value Q< of the reactive power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Q<< high range PSx
017 079 017 046 017 049 017 051
Setting the operate value Q<< of the reactive power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Q< sens. range PSx
018 035 018 036 018 037 018 038
Setting the operate value Q< of the reactive power.
Note:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
This setting is only active if Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
7-99
7 Settings
(continued)
P<>: Operate delay Q< PSx
018 052 018 053 018 054 018 055
Setting the operate delay of stage Q<.
P<>: Release delay Q< PSx
018 056 018 057 018 058 018 059
Setting the release delay of stage Q<.
P<>: Direction Q<
PSx
018 081 018 082 018 083 018 084
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q< trip signal
will be issued for forward, backward or non-directional fault decisions.
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q< PSx
018 044 018 045 018 046 018 047
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value Q< of the reactive power.
P<>: Q<< sens. range PSx
018 085 018 086 018 087 018 088
Setting the operate value Q<< of the reactive power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Operate delay Q<<PSx
018 213 018 214 018 215 018 216
Setting the operate delay of stage Q<<.
P<>: Release delay Q<<PSx
018 236 018 237 018 238 018 239
Setting the release delay of stage Q<<.
P<>: Direction Q<<
PSx
018 242 018 243 018 244 018 245
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q<< trip signal
will be issued for forward, backward or non-directional fault decisions.
P<>: Diseng.ratio Q<< PSx
018 095 018 096 018 097 018 098
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value Q<< of the reactive
power.
P<>: tTransient pulse PSx
018 246 018 247 018 248 018 249
Setting the time limit of the signals generated by the stages P<, P<<, Q<
and Q<< after the respective operate delay has elapsed.
7-100
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
Time-voltage protection
V<>: Enable
PSx
076 000 077 000 078 000 079 000
Fig.: 3-264
This setting defines the parameter subset in which V<> protection is
enabled.
076 001 077 001 078 001 079 001
Fig.: 3-265
V<>: Operating mode PSx
This setting specifies whether the phase-to-ground voltages (Star operating
mode) or the phase-to-phase voltages (Delta operating mode) will be
monitored.
Note:
In the settings for the operate values of the time-voltage protection function,
the reference quantity is Vnom in the Delta operating mode, but Vnom/√3 in the
Star operating mode.
To work out the settings for the over/undervoltage stages, consider the
following example for Vnom = 100 V:
Setting in the Delta operating mode for an operate value of
80 V (phase-to-phase):
Setting value =
Operate value
80V
=
= 0.80
Vnom
100V
Setting in the Star operating mode for an operate value of
46.2 V (phase-to-phase):
Operate value
46.2V
46.2V ⋅ 3
Setting value =
=
=
= 0,80
Vnom
100V
100V
3
3
V<>: I enable V<
PSx
001 155 001 159 001 160 001 161
Setting the enable threshold for the minimum current monitor.
V<>: Op. mode V< mon. PSx
001 162 001 163 001 164 001 165
Activating the minimum current monitoring operating mode.
V<>: Evaluation VNG PSx
076 002 077 002 078 002 079 002
Fig.: 3-271
This setting determines which neutral-point displacement voltage will be
monitored: The displacement voltage calculated by the P437 or the
displacement voltage measured at the T 90 voltage transformer.
V<>: V>
PSx
076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003
Fig.: 3-266
076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004
Fig.: 3-266
076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005
Fig.: 3-266
Setting for the operate value V>.
V<>: V>>
PSx
Setting for the operate value V>>.
V<>: tV>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.
V<>: tV> 3-pole
PSx
076 027 077 027 078 027 079 027
Fig.: 3-266
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V> when all three trigger
stages are activated.
V<>: tV>>
PSx
076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006
Fig.: 3-266
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.
V<>: V<
PSx
076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007
Fig.: 3-267
Setting for the operate value V<.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-101
7 Settings
(continued)
V<>: V<<
PSx
076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008
Fig.: 3-267
076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009
Fig.: 3-267
Setting for the operate value V<<.
V<>: tV<
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.
V<>: tV< 3-pole
PSx
076 028 077 028 078 028 079 028
Fig.: 3-267
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V< when all three trigger
stages are activated.
V<>: tV<<
PSx
076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010
Fig.: 3-267
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.
V<>: Vpos>
PSx
076 015 077 015 078 015 079 015
Fig.: 3-269
076 016 077 016 078 016 079 016
Fig.: 3-269
076 017 077 017 078 017 079 017
Fig.: 3-269
Setting for the operate value Vpos>.
V<>: Vpos>>
PSx
Setting for the operate value Vpos>>.
V<>: tVpos>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vpos>.
V<>: tVpos>>
PSx
076 018 077 018 078 018 079 018
Fig.: 3-269
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vpos>>.
V<>: Vpos<
PSx
076 019 077 019 078 019 079 019
Fig.: 3-269
076 020 077 020 078 020 079 020
Fig.: 3-269
076 021 077 021 078 021 079 021
Fig.: 3-269
Setting for the operate value Vpos<.
V<>: Vpos<<
PSx
Setting for the operate value Vpos<<.
V<>: tVpos<
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vpos<.
V<>: tVpos<<
PSx
076 022 077 022 078 022 079 022
Fig.: 3-269
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vpos<<.
V<>: Vneg>
PSx
076 023 077 023 078 023 079 023
Fig.: 3-270
076 024 077 024 078 024 079 024
Fig.: 3-270
076 025 077 025 078 025 079 025
Fig.: 3-270
Setting for the operate value Vneg>.
V<>: Vneg>>
PSx
Setting for the operate value Vneg>>.
V<>: tVneg>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vneg>.
V<>: tVneg>>
PSx
076 026 077 026 078 026 079 026
Fig.: 3-270
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vneg>>.
V<>: VNG>
PSx
076 011 077 011 078 011 079 011
Fig.: 3-272
076 012 077 012 078 012 079 012
Fig.: 3-272
076 013 077 013 078 013 079 013
Fig.: 3-272
Setting for the operate value VNG>.
V<>: VNG>>
PSx
Setting for the operate value VNG>>.
V<>: tVNG>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>.
V<>: tVNG>>
PSx
076 014 077 014 078 014 079 014
Fig.: 3-272
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>>.
7-102
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
V<>: tTransient
PSx
076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029
Fig.: 3-267
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage
stages.
V<>: Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048
Fig.: 3-266
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured
voltages.
V<>: Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
076 049 077 049 078 049 079 049
Fig.: 3-269
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring derived
voltages such as Vneg and VNG.
Over-/underfrequency
protection
f<>: Enable
PSx
018 196 018 197 018 198 018 199
Fig.: 3-273
This setting defines the parameter subset in which over-/underfrequency
protection is enabled.
f<>: Oper. mode f1
PSx
018 120 018 121 018 122 018 123
Fig.: 3-277
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency
protection.
f<>: f1
PSx
018 100 018 101 018 102 018 103
Fig.: 3-277
Setting the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection
function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The
threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency
exceeds this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal
frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the
selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further monitoring
or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered.
f<>: tf1
PSx
018 104 018 105 018 106 018 107
Fig.: 3-277
Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.
f<>: df1/dt
PSx
018 108 018 109 018 110 018 111
Fig.: 3-277
Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored
Note:
This setting is ineffective unless operating mode
"f with df/dt" has been selected.
f<>: Delta f1
PSx
018 112 018 113 018 114 018 115
Fig.: 3-277
Setting for Delta f.
Note:
This setting is ineffective unless operating mode
"f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected.
f<>: Delta t1
PSx
018 116 018 117 018 118 018 119
Fig.: 3-277
Setting for Delta t.
Note:
This setting is ineffective unless operating mode
"f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected.
f<>: Oper. mode f2
PSx
018 144 018 145 018 146 018 147
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency
protection.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-103
7 Settings
(continued)
f<>: f2
PSx
018 124 018 125 018 126 018 127
Setting the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection
function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The
threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency
exceeds this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal
frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the
selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further monitoring
or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered.
f<>: tf2
PSx
018 128 018 129 018 130 018 131
Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.
f<>: df2/dt
PSx
018 132 018 133 018 134 018 135
Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored
Note:
This setting is ineffective unless operating mode
"f with df/dt" has been selected.
f<>: Delta f2
PSx
018 136 018 137 018 138 018 139
Setting for Delta f.
Note:
This setting is ineffective unless operating mode
"f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected.
f<>: Delta t2
PSx
018 140 018 141 018 142 018 143
Setting for Delta t.
Note:
This setting is ineffective unless operating mode
"f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected.
f<>: Oper. mode f3
PSx
018 168 018 169 018 170 018 171
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency
protection.
f<>: f3
PSx
018 148 018 149 018 150 018 151
Setting the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection
function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The
threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency
exceeds this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal
frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the
selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further monitoring
or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered.
f<>: tf3
PSx
018 152 018 153 018 154 018 155
Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.
f<>: df3/dt
PSx
018 156 018 157 018 158 018 159
Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored
Note:
This setting is ineffective unless operating mode
"f with df/dt" has been selected.
f<>: Delta f3
PSx
018 160 018 161 018 162 018 163
Setting for Delta f.
Note:
This setting is ineffective unless operating mode
"f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected.
f<>: Delta t3
PSx
018 164 018 165 018 166 018 167
Setting for Delta t.
Note:
This setting is ineffective unless operating mode
"f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected.
7-104
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7 Settings
(continued)
f<>: Oper. mode f4
PSx
018 192 018 193 018 194 018 195
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency
protection.
f<>: f4
PSx
018 172 018 173 018 174 018 175
Setting the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection
function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The
threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency
exceeds this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal
frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the
selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further monitoring
or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered.
f<>: tf4
PSx
018 176 018 177 018 178 018 179
Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.
f<>: df4/dt
PSx
018 180 018 181 018 182 018 183
Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored
Note:
This setting is ineffective unless operating mode
"f with df/dt" has been selected.
f<>: Delta f4
PSx
018 184 018 185 018 186 018 187
Setting for Delta f.
Note:
This setting is ineffective unless operating mode
"f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected.
f<>: Delta t4
PSx
018 188 018 189 018 190 018 191
Setting for Delta t.
Note:
This setting is ineffective unless operating mode
"f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
7-105
7 Settings
(continued)
7-106
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
8
Information and Control Functions
The P437 generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals, and
acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object as well as
fault-related data. A number of counters are available for statistical purposes. This
information can be read out from the integrated local control panel.
All this information can be found in the ‘Operation’ and ‘Events’ folders in the menu tree.
Note:
In the following tables the localization of the corresponding function description is
indicated in the right hand side column. "Figure: 3-xxx" refers to a logic diagram which
displays the address, "Figure*: 3-xxx" to a figure subtitle or figure report sheet, "Page: 3xxx" to a page.
8.1
Operation
8.1.1
8.1.1.1
Device
Cyclic Values
Measured Operating Data
DVICE: Processor frequency
104 099
Display of the clock frequency of the processor on processor module P.
Communication interface 3
COMM3: No. tel. errors p.u.
120 040
Display of the updated measured operating value for the number of
corrupted messages within the last 1000 received messages.
COMM3: No.t.err.,max,stored
120 041
Display of the maximum value for the proportion of corrupted messages
within the last 1000 received messages.
COMM3: Loop back result
COMM3: Loop back receive
120 057
120 056
While the hold time is running, the loop back test results can be checked by
reading out these values.
Measured data input
MEASI: Current IDC
004 134
Fig.: 3-25
004 135
Fig.: 3-25
004 136
Fig.: 3-25
004 180
Fig.: 3-26
004 133
Fig.: 3-27
Display of the input current.
MEASI: Current IDC p.u.
Display of the input current referred to IDC,nom.
MEASI: Curr. IDC,lin p.u.
Display of the linearized input current referred to IDC,nom.
MEASI: Scaled value IDC,lin
Display of the scaled linearized value.
MEASI: Temperature
Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8-1
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Measured data output
MEASO: Current A-1
MEASO: Current A-2
005 100
Fig.: 3-36
005 099
Display of the current on the analog measured data output
(A1: channel 1; A2: channel 2)
Main function
MAIN: Date
003 090
Fig.: 3-67
003 091
Fig.: 3-67
003 095
Fig.: 3-67
Date display.
Note:
The date can also be set here.
MAIN: Time of day
Display of the time of day.
Note:
The time can also be set here.
MAIN: Time switching
Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.
This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times
assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or
communication interfaces.
Note:
The time can be set here for standard time or daylight saving time.
In the case of clock synchronization via the clock synchronization telegram
from a central control system or a central device, this setting will be
overwritten each time a new clock synchronization telegram is received.
With a free-running clock or synchronization by minute pulse through a
binary input, the time of day setting and the time switching setting in the
device must be plausible. The two settings do not affect each other.
MAIN: Frequency f
004 040
Fig.: 3-50
005 050
Fig.: 3-39
005 036
Fig.: 3-39
005 034
Fig.: 3-39
Display of system frequency.
MAIN: Curr. IP,max prim.
Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity.
MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay
Display of the delayed maximum phase current as a primary quantity.
MAIN: IP,max prim.,stored
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Curr. IP,min prim.
005 055
Fig.: 3-39
005 040
Fig.: 3-39
006 040
Fig.: 3-39
007 040
Fig.: 3-39
005 010
Fig.: 3-39
004 043
Fig.: 3-40
Display of the minimum phase current as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Current A prim.
Display of phase current A as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Current B prim.
Display of phase current B as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Current C prim.
Display of phase current C as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Current Σ(IP) prim.
Display of the calculated resultant current as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Current IN prim.
Display of the updated value for the residual current as a primary quantity.
8-2
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
MAIN: Current IN,par prim.
008 000
Fig.: 3-41
008 042
Fig.: 3-44
009 042
Fig.: 3-44
005 042
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the measured residual current of the parallel line as a primary
quantity.
MAIN: Volt. VPG,max prim.
Display of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Volt. VPG,min prim.
Display of the minimum phase-to-ground voltage as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Voltage A-G prim.
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G as a primary
quantity.
MAIN: Voltage B-G prim.
006 042
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G as a primary
quantity.
MAIN: Voltage C-G prim.
007 042
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G as a primary
quantity.
MAIN: Volt. Σ(VPG)/3 prim.
005 012
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage as a primary
quantity.
MAIN: Voltage VNG prim.
004 041
Fig.: 3-45
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage measured at transformer
T 90 as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Voltage Vref prim.
005 046
Fig.: 3-46
Display of the reference voltage measured at transformer T 15 as a primary
quantity.
MAIN: Volt. VPP,max prim.
008 044
Fig.: 3-44
009 044
Fig.: 3-44
005 044
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Volt. VPP,min prim.
Display of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Voltage A-B prim.
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B as a primary
quantity.
MAIN: Voltage B-C prim.
006 044
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage B-C as a primary
quantity.
MAIN: Voltage C-A prim.
007 044
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A as a primary
quantity.
MAIN: Active power P prim.
004 050
Fig.: 3-47
004 052
Fig.: 3-47
005 061
Fig.: 3-51
Display of the updated active power value as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Reac. power Q prim.
Display of the updated reactive power value as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Act.energy outp.prim
Display of the updated active energy output as a primary quantity.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8-3
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
MAIN: Act.energy inp. prim
005 062
Fig.: 3-51
005 063
Fig.: 3-51
005 064
Fig.: 3-51
005 051
Fig.: 3-39
005 037
Fig.: 3-39
005 035
Fig.: 3-39
005 056
Fig.: 3-39
005 041
Fig.: 3-39
006 041
Fig.: 3-39
007 041
Fig.: 3-39
009 016
Fig.: 3-39
009 015
Fig.: 3-39
005 011
Fig.: 3-39
004 044
Fig.: 3-40
008 001
Fig.: 3-41
Display of the updated active energy input as a primary quantity.
MAIN: React.en. outp. prim
Display of the updated reactive energy output as a primary quantity.
MAIN: React. en. inp. prim
Display of the updated reactive energy input as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Current IP,max p.u.
Display of the maximum phase current referred to Inom.
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay
Display of the delayed maximum phase current referred to Inom.
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current referred to Inom.
MAIN: Current IP,min p.u.
Display of the minimum phase current referred to Inom.
MAIN: Current A p.u.
Display of phase current A referred to Inom.
MAIN: Current B p.u.
Display of phase current B referred to Inom.
MAIN: Current C p.u.
Display of phase current C referred to Inom.
MAIN: Current Ipos p.u.
Display of the positive sequence current referred to Inom.
MAIN: Current Ineg p.u.
Display of the negative-sequence current referred to Inom.
MAIN: Current Σ(IP) p.u.
Display of the calculated residual current referred to Inom.
MAIN: Current IN p.u.
Display of the updated residual current value referred to Inom.
MAIN: Current IN par p.u.
Display of the measured residual current of the parallel line referred to Inom.
MAIN: Voltage VPG,max p.u.
008 043
Fig.: 3-44
009 043
Fig.: 3-44
005 043
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage VPG,min p.u.
Display of the minimum phase-to-ground voltage referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage A-G p.u.
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G referred to
Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage B-G p.u.
006 043
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G referred to
Vnom.
8-4
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
MAIN: Voltage C-G p.u.
007 043
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G referred to
Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage Vpos p.u.
009 018
Fig.: 3-44
009 017
Fig.: 3-44
005 013
Fig.: 3-44
004 042
Fig.: 3-45
Display of the positive-sequence voltage referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage Vneg p.u.
Display of the negative-sequence voltage referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Volt. Σ(VPG)/©3 p.u.
Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage referred to
Vnom .
MAIN: Voltage VNG p.u.
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage measured at transformer
T 90 referred to Vnom .
MAIN: Voltage Vref p.u.
005 047
Fig.: 3-46
Display of the reference voltage measured at transformer T 15 referred to
Vnom .
MAIN: Voltage VPP,max p.u.
008 045
Fig.: 3-44
009 045
Fig.: 3-44
005 045
Fig.: 3-44
006 045
Fig.: 3-44
007 045
Fig.: 3-44
004 051
Fig.: 3-47
004 053
Fig.: 3-47
004 054
Fig.: 3-47
004 055
Fig.: 3-47
004 056
Fig.: 3-47
Display of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage VPP,min p.u.
Display of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage A-B p.u.
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B referred to
Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage B-C p.u.
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage B-C referred to
Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage C-A p.u.
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A referred to
Vnom.
MAIN: Active power P p.u.
Display of the updated active power value referred to nominal apparent
power Snom.
MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u.
Display of the updated value for reactive power referred to nominal
apparent power Snom.
MAIN: Active power factor
Display of the updated active power factor.
MAIN: Load angle phi A
Display of the updated load angle value in phase A.
MAIN: Load angle phi B
Display of the updated load angle value in phase B.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8-5
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
MAIN: Load angle phi C
004 057
Fig.: 3-47
004 072
Fig.: 3-47
004 073
Fig.: 3-48
008 004
Fig.: 3-49
008 003
Fig.: 3-49
Display of the updated load angle value in phase C.
MAIN: Angle phi N
Display of the angle between the measured residual current system
quantities IN and VNG.
MAIN: Phase rel. IN vs ΣIP
The phase relations of measured and calculated residual current are
compared.
MAIN: Angle VAG, IN
MAIN: Angle VAG, IN,par
Display of the angle between VAG and the two residual currents for the
purpose of checking correct connection of the transformer for measuring
IN,par.
MAIN: Current ΣI unfilt.
004 074
Display of calculated unfiltered resultant current.
Thermal overload protection
THERM: Status THERM replica
004 016
Fig.: 3-263
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.
8.1.1.2
Communication interface 3
Physical State Signals
COMM3: State receive 1
COMM3: State receive 2
COMM3: State receive 3
COMM3: State receive 4
COMM3: State receive 5
COMM3: State receive 6
COMM3: State receive 7
COMM3: State receive 8
120 000
120 003
120 006
120 009
120 012
120 015
120 018
120 021
Display of the relevant receive signal.
COMM3: State send 1
COMM3: State send 2
COMM3: State send 3
COMM3: State send 4
COMM3: State send 5
COMM3: State send 6
COMM3: State send 7
COMM3: State send 8
121 000
121 002
121 004
121 006
121 008
121 010
121 012
121 014
Display of the updated value for the relevant send signal.
8-6
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
IEC Generic Substation
Status Events
GSSE: Output 1 state
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
Output 2 state
Output 3 state
Output 4 state
Output 5 state
Output 6 state
Output 7 state
Output 8 state
Output 9 state
Output 10 state
Output 11 state
Output 12 state
Output 13 state
Output 14 state
Output 15 state
Output 16 state
Output 17 state
Output 18 state
Output 19 state
Output 20 state
Output 21 state
Output 22 state
Output 23 state
Output 24 state
Output 25 state
Output 26 state
Output 27 state
Output 28 state
Output 29 state
Output 30 state
Output 31 state
Output 32 state
104 100
104 103
104 106
104 109
104 112
104 115
104 118
104 121
104 124
104 127
104 130
104 133
104 136
104 139
104 142
104 145
104 148
104 151
104 154
104 157
104 160
104 163
104 166
104 169
104 172
104 175
104 178
104 181
104 184
104 187
104 190
104 193
Display of the virtual binary GSSE output state.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8-7
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
GSSE:
Input 1 state
Input 2 state
Input 3 state
Input 4 state
Input 5 state
Input 6 state
Input 7 state
Input 8 state
Input 9 state
Input 10 state
Input 11 state
Input 12 state
Input 13 state
Input 14 state
Input 15 state
Input 16 state
Input 17 state
Input 18 state
Input 19 state
Input 20 state
Input 21 state
Input 22 state
Input 23 state
Input 24 state
Input 25 state
Input 26 state
Input 27 state
Input 28 state
Input 29 state
Input 30 state
Input 31 state
Input 32 state
105 000
105 005
105 010
105 015
105 020
105 025
105 030
105 035
105 040
105 045
105 050
105 055
105 060
105 065
105 070
105 075
105 080
105 085
105 090
105 095
105 100
105 105
105 110
105 115
105 120
105 125
105 130
105 135
105 140
105 145
105 150
105 155
Display of the virtual binary GSSE input state.
8-8
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Generic Object Orientated
Substation Events
GOOSE: Output 1 state
GOOSE: Output 2 state
GOOSE: Output 3 state
GOOSE: Output 4 state
GOOSE: Output 5 state
GOOSE: Output 6 state
GOOSE: Output 7 state
GOOSE: Output 8 state
GOOSE: Output 9 state
GOOSE: Output 10 state
GOOSE: Output 11 state
GOOSE: Output 12 state
GOOSE: Output 13 state
GOOSE: Output 14 state
GOOSE: Output 15 state
GOOSE: Output 16 state
GOOSE: Output 17 state
GOOSE: Output 18 state
GOOSE: Output 19 state
GOOSE: Output 20 state
GOOSE: Output 21 state
GOOSE: Output 22 state
GOOSE: Output 23 state
GOOSE: Output 24 state
GOOSE: Output 25 state
GOOSE: Output 26 state
GOOSE: Output 27 state
GOOSE: Output 28 state
GOOSE: Output 29 state
GOOSE: Output 30 state
GOOSE: Output 31 state
GOOSE: Output 32 state
106 010
106 012
106 014
106 016
106 018
106 020
106 022
106 024
106 026
106 028
106 030
106 032
106 034
106 036
106 038
106 040
106 042
106 044
106 046
106 048
106 050
106 052
106 054
106 056
106 058
106 060
106 062
106 064
106 066
106 068
106 070
106 072
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.
GOOSE: Input 1 state
GOOSE: Input 2 state
GOOSE: Input 3 state
GOOSE: Input 4 state
GOOSE: Input 5 state
GOOSE: Input 6 state
GOOSE: Input 7 state
GOOSE: Input 8 state
GOOSE: Input 9 state
GOOSE: Input 10 state
GOOSE: Input 11 state
GOOSE: Input 12 state
GOOSE: Input 13 state
GOOSE: Input 14 state
GOOSE: Input 15 state
GOOSE: Input 16 state
106 200
106 201
106 202
106 203
106 204
106 205
106 206
106 207
106 208
106 209
106 210
106 211
106 212
106 213
106 214
106 215
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8-9
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Function keys
F_KEY: State F1
F_KEY: State F2
F_KEY: State F3
F_KEY: State F4
F_KEY: State F5
F_KEY: State F6
080 122
Fig.: 3-20
080 123
080 124
080 125
080 126
080 127
The state of the function keys is displayed as follows:
8-10
"Without function":
No functions are assigned to the function key.
"Off":
The function key is in the "Off" position.
"On":
The function key is in the "On" position.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Binary input
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
INP:
State U 801
State U 802
State U 803
State U 804
State U 805
State U 806
State U 1001
State U 1002
State U 1003
State U 1004
State U 1005
State U 1006
State U 1201
State U 1202
State U 1203
State U 1204
State U 1205
State U 1206
State U 1401
State U 1402
State U 1403
State U 1404
State U 1405
State U 1406
State U 1601
State U 1602
State U 1603
State U 1604
State U 1605
State U 1606
State U 2001
State U 2002
State U 2003
State U 2004
152 126
152 129
152 132
152 135
152 138
152 141
152 162
152 165
152 168
152 171
152 174
152 177
152 198
152 201
152 204
152 207
152 210
152 213
190 001
190 005
190 009
190 013
190 017
190 021
192 001
192 005
192 009
192 013
192 017
192 021
153 086
153 089
153 092
153 095
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:
“Without function”:
No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
“Low”:
Not energized.
“High”:
Energized.
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input
mode.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8-11
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Binary outputs
8-12
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
State K 801
State K 802
State K 803
State K 804
State K 805
State K 806
State K 807
State K 808
State K 1001
State K 1002
State K 1003
State K 1004
State K 1005
State K 1006
State K 1007
State K 1008
State K 1201
State K 1202
State K 1203
State K 1204
State K 1205
State K 1206
State K 1207
State K 1208
State K 1401
State K 1402
State K 1403
State K 1404
State K 1405
State K 1406
State K 1407
State K 1408
State K 1601
State K 1602
State K 1603
State K 1604
State K 1605
State K 1606
State K 1607
State K 1608
State K 1801
State K 1802
State K 1803
State K 1804
State K 1805
State K 1806
State K 2001
State K 2002
State K 2003
State K 2004
State K 2005
State K 2006
150 168
150 171
150 174
150 177
150 180
150 183
150 186
150 189
150 216
150 219
150 222
150 225
150 228
150 231
150 234
150 237
151 008
151 011
151 014
151 017
151 020
151 023
151 026
151 029
169 001
169 005
169 009
169 013
169 017
169 021
169 025
169 029
171 001
171 005
171 009
171 013
171 017
171 021
171 025
171 029
173 001
173 005
173 009
173 013
173 017
173 021
151 200
151 203
151 206
151 209
151 212
151 215
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
OUTP: State K 2007
OUTP: State K 2008
151 218
151 221
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:
“Without function”:
No functions are assigned to the output relay.
“Low”:
The output relay is not energized.
“High”:
The output relay is energized.
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output
relay.
LED indicators
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
LED:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
State H 1 green
State H 2 yell.
State H 3 yell.
State H 4 red
State H 5 red
State H 6 red
State H 7 red
State H 8 red
State H 9 red
State H10 red
State H11 red
State H12 red
State H13 red
State H14 red
State H15 red
State H16 red
State H17 red
State H18 red
State H19 red
State H20 red
State H21 red
State H22 red
State H23 red
State H 4 green
State H 5 green
State H 6 green
State H 7 green
State H 8 green
State H 9 green
State H10 green
State H11 green
State H12 green
State H13 green
State H14 green
State H15 green
State H16 green
State H18 green
State H19 green
State H20 green
085 180
085 000
085 003
085 006
Fig.: 3-37
085 009
Fig.: 3-37
085 012
Fig.: 3-37
085 015
Fig.: 3-37
085 018
Fig.: 3-37
085 021
Fig.: 3-37
085 024
Fig.: 3-37
085 027
Fig.: 3-37
085 030
Fig.: 3-37
085 033
Fig.: 3-37
085 036
Fig.: 3-37
085 039
Fig.: 3-37
085 042
Fig.: 3-37
085 181
Fig.: 3-37
085 130
Fig.: 3-37
085 133
Fig.: 3-37
085 136
Fig.: 3-37
085 139
Fig.: 3-37
085 142
Fig.: 3-37
085 145
Fig.: 3-37
085 056
Fig.: 3-37
085 059
Fig.: 3-37
085 062
Fig.: 3-37
085 065
Fig.: 3-37
085 068
Fig.: 3-37
085 071
Fig.: 3-37
085 074
Fig.: 3-37
085 077
Fig.: 3-37
085 080
Fig.: 3-37
085 083
Fig.: 3-37
085 086
Fig.: 3-37
085 089
Fig.: 3-37
085 092
Fig.: 3-37
085 160
Fig.: 3-37
085 163
Fig.: 3-37
085 166
Fig.: 3-37
8-13
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
LED: State H21 green
LED: State H22 green
LED: State H23 green
085 169
Fig.: 3-37
085 172
Fig.: 3-37
085 176
Fig.: 3-37
The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:
"Inactive":
The LED indicator is not energized.
"Active":
The LED indicator is energized.
8.1.1.3
Local control panel
Logic State Signals
LOC: Edit mode
080 111
Signal that the protection unit is in edit mode. As a standard this signal is
linked to L E D : F c t . a s s i g . H 1 7 r e d .
LOC: Trig. menu jmp 1 EXT
030 230
Signal that menu jump list 1 is being triggered. (See the corresponding
setting at V O B : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t 1 .)
LOC: Trig. menu jmp 2 EXT
030 231
Signal that menu jump list 2 is being triggered. (See the corresponding
setting at V O B : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t 2 .)
LOC: Illumination on EXT
037 101
Chapter 6.3
003 173
Fig.: 3-6
037 074
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8,
3-9
Fig.: 3-6
Signal that the display illumination is switched on.
Communication interface 1
COMM1: Command block. EXT
COMM1: Sig./meas. Block EXT
COMM1: Command blocking
COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block.
COMM1: IEC 870-5-103
COMM1: IEC 870-5-101
COMM1: IEC 870-5, ILS
COMM1: MODBUS
COMM1: DNP3
COMM1: COURIER
Communication interface 3
IEC 61850 Communication
COMM3: Reset No.tlg.err.EXT
COMM3: Communications fault
COMM3: Comm. Link failure
COMM3: Lim.exceed.,tel.err.
IEC: Comm. link faulty
003 174
003 219
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8,
3-9
Fig.: 3-7
003 218
Fig.: 3-8
003 221
Fig.: 3-9
003 223
Fig.: 3-10
003 230
Fig.: 3-11
103 041
Fig.: 3-12
006 054
Fig.* 3-69
120 043
Fig.: 3-17
120 044
Fig.: 3-17
037 075
120 045
105 180
Display when an Ethernet module has not initiated properly, i.e. if the MAC
address is missing or there is a non-plausible parameter setting!
8-14
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
IEC Generic Substation
Status Events
GSSE: IED link faulty
105 181
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GSSE
sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether. The GSSE sending device will attach a validity
stamp to each GSSE. Up to that time a repetition of GSSE will be carried
out independently of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time
period at which the next state signal must be received.
Generic Object Orientated
Substation Events
GOOSE: IED link faulty
107 250
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE
sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will
attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried
out independently of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time
period at which the next state signal must be received.
IRIG-B
Measured data input
Binary outputs
Measured data output
IRIGB: Enabled
IRIGB: Synchron. Ready
MEASI: Enabled
MEASI: PT100 faulty
MEASI: Overload 20mA input
MEASI: Open circ. 20mA inp.
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
OUTP:
Block outp.rel. EXT
Reset latch. EXT
Outp. Relays blocked
Latching reset
MEASO: Enabled
MEASO: Outp. Enabled EXT
MEASO: Reset output EXT
MEASO: Output reset
MEASO: Valid BCD value
MEASO: 1-digit bit 0 (BCD)
MEASO: 1-digit bit 1 (BCD)
MEASO: 1-digit bit 2 (BCD)
MEASO: 1-digit bit 3 (BCD)
MEASO: 10-digit bit 0 (BCD)
MEASO: 10-digit bit 1 (BCD)
MEASO: 10-digit bit 2 (BCD)
MEASO: 10-digit bit 3 (BCD)
MEASO: 100-dig. Bit 0 (BCD)
MEASO: 100-dig. Bit 1 (BCD)
MEASO: Value A-1 valid
MEASO: Value A-1 output
MEASO: Value A-2 valid
MEASO: Value A-2 output
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
023 201
Fig.: 3-19
023 202
Fig.: 3-19
035 008
Fig.: 3-22
040 190
Fig.: 3-27
040 191
Fig.: 3-25
040 192
Fig.: 3-25
040 014
Fig.: 3-28
040 015
Fig.: 3-28
021 015
Fig.: 3-28
040 088
Fig.: 3-28
037 102
Fig.: 3-30
036 085
Fig.: 3-31
036 087
Fig.: 3-32
037 117
Fig.: 3-32
037 050
Fig.: 3-34
037 051
Fig.: 3-34
037 052
Fig.: 3-34
037 053
Fig.: 3-34
037 054
Fig.: 3-34
037 055
Fig.: 3-34
037 056
Fig.: 3-34
037 057
Fig.: 3-34
037 058
Fig.: 3-34
037 059
Fig.: 3-34
037 060
Fig.: 3-34
069 014
Fig.: 3-36
037 118
Fig.: 3-36
069 015
037 119
8-15
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Main function
MAIN: Healthy
060 001
Signal that the protection unit is operational. As a standard this signal is
linked to L E D : F c t . a s s i g . H 1 g r e e n .
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
Enable protect. EXT
Group reset 1 EXT
Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT
Reset IP,max,st. EXT
Reset meas.v.en. EXT
Group reset 2 EXT
General reset EXT
Disable protect. EXT
Blocking 1 EXT
Blocking 2 EXT
Reset latch.trip EXT
Trip cmd. Block. EXT
M.c.b. trip V EXT
MAIN: M.c.b. trip VNG EXT
MAIN: M.c.b. trip Vref EXT
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
8-16
Man.cl.cmd.enabl.EXT
CB open 3p EXT
CB closed 3p EXT
CB closed A EXT
CB closed B EXT
CB closed C EXT
Man. Trip cmd. EXT
Man def. trip A EXT
Man def. trip B EXT
Man def. trip C EXT
Parallel trip EXT
003 027
Fig.: 3-53
005 209
Fig.: 3-69
005 210
Fig.* 3-69
005 211
Fig.: 3-42
005 212
Fig.* 3-69
005 252
Fig.: 3-69
005 255
Fig.* 3-69
003 026
Fig.: 3-53
040 060
Fig.: 3-55
040 061
Fig.: 3-55
040 138
Fig.* 3-69
036 045
Fig.: 3-65
004 061
Fig.: 3-139,
3-199
Fig.: 3-210
002 183
036 086
041 023
031 028
036 051
031 030
031 031
037 018
Fig.: 3-64
038 030
Fig.: 3-64
038 031
Fig.: 3-64
038 032
Fig.: 3-64
037 019
002 066
Fig.: 3-58,
3-195
Fig.: 3-58,
3-195
Fig.: 3-58,
3-195
Fig.: 3-58,
3-195
Fig.: 3-60
120 046
Fig.: 3-63
036 052
MAIN: Parallel trip B EXT
036 053
MAIN: Parallel trip C EXT
036 054
Par. Trip (1p) EXT
Transfer trip EXT
Transfer trip A EXT
Transfer trip B EXT
Transfer trip C EXT
Blocking 1p trip EXT
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
Man. Close cmd. EXT
Manual close EXT
Test mode EXT
Reset indicat. EXT
Time switching EXT
Min-pulse clock EXT
Prot. Ext. Enabled
Prot. Ext. Disabled
Short circuit AG
Short circuit BG
Fig.: 3-143
031 029
MAIN: Parallel trip A EXT
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
Fig.: 3-139,
3-199
Fig.: 3-58
120 047
120 048
120 049
041 022
Fig.: 3-127,
3-144
Fig.: 3-58
036 047
Fig.: 3-147
037 070
Fig.: 3-71
065 001
Fig.* 3-69
003 096
Fig.: 3-67
060 060
Fig.: 3-67
003 028
Fig.: 3-53
038 046
Fig.: 3-53
041 078
006 011
006 012
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
Short circuit CG
CB open 3p
CB open >=1p
CB open A
CB open B
CB open C
CB closed 3p
CB closed >= 1p
CB closed A
CB closed B
CB closed C
CB pos.sig. unplaus.
Protect. Not ready
Test mode
Blocked/faulty
Trip cmd. Blocked
Latch. Trip c. reset
Manual trip signal
Manual trip signal A
Manual trip signal B
Manual trip signal C
Man. Close command
Gen. Trip command
Gen. Trip signal 1
Trip signal 1, A
Trip signal 1, B
Trip signal 1, C
Trip signal 1, 1p
MAIN: Trip signal 1, 3p
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
Gen. Trip signal 2
Gen. Trip command 1
Trip command 1, A
Trip command 1, B
Trip command 1, C
Gen. Trip command 2
Final trip
Close command
General starting
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
MAIN:
Starting A
Starting B
Starting C
Starting GF
Rush restr. A trig.
Rush restr. B trig.
Rush restr. C trig.
Send transfer trip
Send transfer trip A
Send transfer trip B
Send transfer trip C
Without function
Without function
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
006 013
031 040
031 039
Fig.: 3-210
031 032
031 033
031 034
031 042
Fig.: 3-58
031 038
031 035
Fig.: 3-173
031 036
Fig.: 3-173
031 037
Fig.: 3-173
031 041
004 060
037 071
Fig.: 3-71
004 065
021 013
Fig.: 3-65
040 139
Fig.: 3-298
034 017
Fig.: 3-64
034 047
Fig.: 3-64
034 048
Fig.: 3-64
034 049
Fig.: 3-64
037 068
Fig.: 3-58
035 071
Fig.: 3-62
036 005
Fig.: 3-62
036 006
Fig.: 3-62
036 007
Fig.: 3-62
036 008
Fig.: 3-62
037 252
036 023
Fig.: 3-61,
3-119
Fig.: 3-61,
3-190
Fig.: 3-62
036 071
Fig.: 3-62
036 072
Fig.: 3-62
036 073
Fig.: 3-62
036 074
Fig.: 3-62
036 022
Fig.: 3-62
038 103
Fig.: 3-66
037 009
Fig.: 3-58
036 000
036 001
Fig.: 3-59,
3-210, 3-228
Fig.: 3-59
036 002
Fig.: 3-59
036 003
Fig.: 3-59
036 004
Fig.: 3-59
041 027
Fig.: 3-54
041 028
Fig.: 3-54
041 029
Fig.: 3-54
001 207
Fig.: 3-63
037 253
001 208
001 209
001 210
060 000
061 000
8-17
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Parameter subset selection
Self-monitoring
(see also Chapter 10)
8-18
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
Control via user EXT
Activate PS 1 EXT
Activate PS 2 EXT
Activate PS 3 EXT
Activate PS 4 EXT
Control via user
Ext.sel.param.subset
PS 1 activated ext.
PS 2 activated ext.
PS 3 activated ext.
PS 4 activated ext.
Actual param. Subset
PS 1 active
PS 2 active
PS 3 active
PS 4 active
SFMON: Warning (LED)
SFMON: Warning (relay)
SFMON: Warm restart exec.
SFMON: Cold restart exec.
SFMON: Cold rest. Checksum
SFMON: Cold rest. SW update
SFMON: Blocking HW failure
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty
SFMON: Hardware clock fail.
SFMON: Faulty DSP
SFMON: Battery failure
SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded
SFMON: +15V supply faulty
SFMON: +24V supply faulty
SFMON: -15V supply faulty
SFMON: Wrong module slot 1
SFMON: Wrong module slot 2
SFMON: Wrong module slot 3
SFMON: Wrong module slot 4
SFMON: Wrong module slot 5
SFMON: Wrong module slot 6
SFMON: Wrong module slot 7
SFMON: Wrong module slot 8
SFMON: Wrong module slot 9
SFMON: Wrong module slot 10
SFMON: Wrong module slot 11
SFMON: Wrong module slot 12
SFMON: Wrong module slot 13
SFMON: Wrong module slot 14
SFMON: Wrong module slot 15
SFMON: Wrong module slot 16
SFMON: Wrong module slot 17
SFMON: Wrong module slot 18
036 101
Fig.: 3-72
065 002
Fig.: 3-72
065 003
Fig.: 3-72
065 004
Fig.: 3-72
065 005
Fig.: 3-72
036 102
Fig.: 3-72
003 061
Fig.: 3-72
036 094
Fig.: 3-72
036 095
Fig.: 3-72
036 096
Fig.: 3-72
036 097
Fig.: 3-72
003 062
Fig.: 3-72
036 090
Fig.: 3-72
036 091
Fig.: 3-72
036 092
Fig.: 3-72
036 093
Fig.: 3-72
036 070
Fig.: 3-73
036 100
Fig.: 3-73
041 202
041 201
093 024
093 025
090 019
041 200
093 040
093 127
090 010
096 121
093 081
093 082
093 080
096 100
096 101
096 102
096 103
096 104
096 105
096 106
096 107
096 108
096 109
096 110
096 111
096 112
096 113
096 114
096 115
096 116
096 117
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
SFMON: Wrong module slot 19
SFMON: Wrong module slot 20
SFMON: Wrong module slot 21
SFMON: Defect.module slot 1
SFMON: Defect.module slot 2
SFMON: Defect.module slot 3
SFMON: Defect.module slot 4
SFMON: Defect.module slot 5
SFMON: Defect.module slot 6
SFMON: Defect.module slot 7
SFMON: Defect.module slot 8
SFMON: Defect.module slot 9
SFMON: Defect.module slot10
SFMON: Defect.module slot11
SFMON: Defect.module slot12
SFMON: Defect.module slot13
SFMON: Defect.module slot14
SFMON: Defect.module slot15
SFMON: Defect.module slot16
SFMON: Defect.module slot17
SFMON: Defect.module slot18
SFMON: Defect.module slot19
SFMON: Defect.module slot20
SFMON: Defect.module slot21
SFMON: Module A DPR faulty
SFMON: Module A RAM faulty
SFMON : Module Y DPR faulty
SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty
SFMON: Error K 801
SFMON: Error K 802
SFMON: Error K 803
SFMON: Error K 804
SFMON: Error K 805
SFMON: Error K 806
SFMON: Error K 807
SFMON: Error K 808
SFMON: Error K 1001
SFMON: Error K 1002
SFMON: Error K 1003
SFMON: Error K 1004
SFMON: Error K 1005
SFMON: Error K 1006
SFMON: Error K 1007
SFMON: Error K 1008
SFMON: Error K 1201
SFMON: Error K 1202
SFMON: Error K 1203
SFMON: Error K 1204
SFMON: Error K 1205
SFMON: Error K 1206
SFMON: Error K 1207
SFMON: Error K 1208
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
096 118
096 119
096 120
097 000
097 001
097 002
097 003
097 004
097 005
097 006
097 007
097 008
097 009
097 010
097 011
097 012
097 013
097 014
097 015
097 016
097 017
097 018
097 019
097 020
093 070
093 071
093 110
093 111
097 086
097 087
097 088
097 089
097 090
097 091
097 092
097 093
097 102
097 103
097 104
097 105
097 106
097 107
097 108
097 109
097 118
097 119
097 120
097 121
097 122
097 123
097 124
097 125
8-19
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
SFMON: Error K 1401
SFMON: Error K 1402
SFMON: Error K 1403
SFMON: Error K 1404
SFMON: Error K 1405
SFMON: Error K 1406
SFMON: Error K 1407
SFMON: Error K 1408
SFMON: Error K 1601
SFMON: Error K 1602
SFMON: Error K 1603
SFMON: Error K 1604
SFMON: Error K 1605
SFMON: Error K 1606
SFMON: Error K 1607
SFMON: Error K 1608
SFMON: Error K 1801
SFMON: Error K 1802
SFMON: Error K 1803
SFMON: Error K 1804
SFMON: Error K 1805
SFMON: Error K 1806
SFMON: Error K 2001
SFMON: Error K 2002
SFMON: Error K 2003
SFMON: Error K 2004
SFMON: Error K 2005
SFMON: Error K 2006
SFMON: Error K 2007
SFMON: Error K 2008
SFMON: Undef. Operat. Code
SFMON: Invalid arithm. Op.
SFMON: Undefined interrupt
SFMON: Exception oper.syst.
SFMON: Protection failure
SFMON: Checksum error param
SFMON: Clock sync. Error
SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM
SFMON: Overflow MT_RC
SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block.
SFMON: Inval. SW vers.COMM1
SFMON : Invalid SW vers. Y
SFMON: Time-out module Y
SFMON: Inom not adjustable
SFMON: M.c.b. trip Vref
SFMON: M.c.b. trip VNG
SFMON: M.c.b. trip V
SFMON: Phase sequ. V faulty
SFMON: Vneg> triggered
SFMON: Undervoltage
SFMON: FF, V triggered
SFMON: FF, Vref triggered
8-20
097 134
097 135
097 136
097 137
097 138
097 139
097 140
097 141
097 150
097 151
097 152
097 153
097 154
097 155
097 156
097 157
097 166
097 167
097 168
097 169
097 170
097 171
097 182
097 183
097 184
097 185
097 186
097 187
097 188
097 189
093 010
093 011
093 012
093 013
090 021
090 003
093 041
093 026
090 012
Fig.: 3-75
093 015
093 075
093 113
093 112
093 118
098 011
Fig.: 3-139
098 132
Fig.: 3-210
098 000
Fig.: 3-139
098 001
Fig.: 3-141
098 014
Fig.: 3-141
098 009
Fig.: 3-141
098 021
Fig.: 3-142
098 022
Fig.: 3-143
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
SFMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty.
SFMON: Meas. Circ. V faulty
SFMON: BUOC not active
SFMON: BUOC active w/o ARC
SFMON: BUOC active with ARC
SFMON: Meas. Circ. I faulty
SFMON: Zero-sequ. Starting
SFMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty
SFMON: Meas. Circuits GFSC
SFMON: Communic.fault COMM3
SFMON: Hardware error COMM3
SFMON : Invalid SW vers DHMI
SFMON: Comm.link fail.COMM3
SFMON: Lim.exceed.,tel.err.
SFMON: Telecom. Faulty/PSIG
SFMON: Op.mode PSIG inval.
SFMON: Telecom.faulty/GSCSG
SFMON: Not perm. F. Mod. T
SFMON: Peripheral fault
SFMON: Invalid scaling BCD
SFMON: Invalid scaling A-1
SFMON: Invalid scaling A-2
SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC
SFMON: PT100 open circuit
SFMON: Overload 20 mA input
SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp.
SFMON: Setting error f<>
SFMON: Setting error PSB
SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync
SFMON: Output 30
SFMON: Output 30 (t)
SFMON: Output 31
SFMON: Output 31 (t)
SFMON: Output 32
SFMON: Output 32 (t)
SFMON: CB pos.sig. implaus.
098 023
Fig.: 3-139
098 017
Fig.: 3-139
098 002
Fig.: 3-144
098 003
Fig.: 3-144
098 004
Fig.: 3-144
098 005
Fig.: 3-140
098 015
Fig.: 3-139
098 016
Fig.: 3-139
098 013
Fig.: 3-226
093 140
093 143
093 145
093 142
093 141
098 006
Fig.: 3-150
098 019
Fig.: 3-154
098 027
Fig.: 3-228
093 122
098 018
Fig.: 3-139
093 124
093 114
Fig.: 3-36
093 115
093 116
Fig.: 3-25
098 024
Fig.: 3-27
098 025
Fig.: 3-25
098 026
Fig.: 3-25
098 028
Fig.: 3-277
098 128
093 120
098 053
098 054
098 055
098 056
098 057
098 058
098 124
Operating data recording
OP_RC: Reset record. EXT
005 213
Fig.: 3-69
Monitoring signal recording
MT_RC: Reset record. EXT
005 240
Fig.* 3-69
Overload recording
OL_RC: Reset record. EXT
OL_RC: Record. in progress
OL_RC: Overl. mem. overflow
005 241
Fig.* 3-69
035 003
Fig.: 3-77
035 007
Fig.: 3-78
Ground fault recording
GF_RC: Reset record. EXT
005 242
Fig.* 3-69
Fault data acquisition
Fault recording
FT_DA: Trigger EXT
036 088
Fig.: 3-80
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8-21
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
FT_RC: Record. Trig. Active
Fault recording
Distance protection
FT_RC: Reset record. EXT
FT_RC: Trigger EXT
FT_RC: Trigger
FT_RC: Record. In progress
FT_RC: System disturb. Runn
FT_RC: Fault mem. Overflow
FT_RC: Faulty time tag
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
Blocking Z1 EXT
Blocking Z1,ze EXT
Blocking Z2 EXT
Blocking Z3 EXT
Blocking Z4 EXT
Blocking Z5 EXT
Blocking Z6 EXT
Blocking Z7 EXT
Blocking Z8 EXT
Zone extension EXT
DIST: Enable ZE f. 1pG EXT
DIST: Enabled
DIST: General starting
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
8-22
Starting I>> A
Starting I>> B
Starting I>> C
Starting V< A
Starting V< B
Starting V< C
Starting Z<
Starting Z< A
Starting Z< B
Starting Z< C
Start. switch. to PG
tIN> running
VNG>> triggered
tVNG>> elapsed
Zero-sequ. starting
Fault forward / LS
Fault forwd. / LS, A
Fault forwd. / LS, B
Fault forwd. / LS, C
Fault backward / BS
002 002
Fig.: 3-86
005 243
Fig.* 3-69
036 089
Fig.: 3-86
037 076
Fig.: 3-86
035 000
Fig.: 3-86
035 004
Fig.: 3-86
035 001
Fig.: 3-87
035 002
036 034
Fig.: 3-123
036 036
Fig.: 3-123
036 037
Fig.: 3-124
036 039
Fig.: 3-124
036 041
Fig.: 3-124
036 044
Fig.: 3-124
036 061
Fig.: 3-124
036 067
Fig.: 3-124
036 068
Fig.: 3-124
036 046
038 025
Fig.: 3-113,
3-117, 3-119,
3-127, 3-149
Fig.: 3-109
036 104
Fig.: 3-89
036 240
040 064
Fig.: 3-59,
3-82, 3-83,
3-85, 3-99,
3-100, 3-104,
3-106, 3-107,
3-119, 3-120,
3-123, 3-124,
3-127, 3-139,
3-141, 3-142,
3-149, 3-152,
3-171, 3-175,
3-210
Fig.: 3-100
040 065
Fig.: 3-100
040 097
Fig.: 3-100
040 067
Fig.: 3-100
040 075
Fig.: 3-100
040 096
Fig.: 3-100
036 241
Fig.: 3-100
040 070
Fig.: 3-100
040 071
Fig.: 3-100
040 072
Fig.: 3-100
040 052
Fig.: 3-92
036 105
Fig.: 3-91
036 015
Fig.: 3-91
036 016
Fig.: 3-91
036 021
Fig.: 3-99
036 018
Fig.: 3-106
038 010
Fig.: 3-106
038 012
Fig.: 3-106
038 014
Fig.: 3-106
036 019
Fig.: 3-106
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, A
Fault backwd / BS, B
Fault backwd / BS, C
Dir.using Vmeas Sys1
Dir.using Vmeas Sys2
Dir.using Vmeas Sys3
Dir.using Vmem Sys1
Dir.using Vmem Sys2
Dir.using Vmem Sys3
Forw. w/o meas. Sys1
Forw. w/o meas. Sys2
Forw. w/o meas. Sys3
tVmemory running
Zone extension
DIST: Zone extension HSR
DIST: Zone ext. HSR 1pG
DIST: Zone extension TDR
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
Zone ext. 1pG active
Zone 1 starting
Zone 1,ze starting
Zone 2 starting
Zone 3 starting
Zone 4 starting
Zone 5 starting
Zone 6 starting
Zone 7 starting
Zone 8 starting
Impedance in zone 6
t1 elapsed
t1,ze elapsed
t2 elapsed
t3 elapsed
t4 elapsed
t5 elapsed
t6 elapsed
t7 elapsed
t8 elapsed
Trip signal
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
DIST:
Trip signal zone 1
Trip signal Z1,ze
Trip sig. zone 2-8
Trip signal zone 2
Trip signal zone 3
Trip signal zone 4
Trip signal zone 5
Trip signal zone 6
Trip signal zone 7
Trip signal zone 8
With mutual comp.
IN,par> triggered
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
038 011
Fig.: 3-106
038 013
Fig.: 3-106
038 015
Fig.: 3-106
038 045
Fig.: 3-106
038 105
Fig.: 3-106
038 108
Fig.: 3-106
038 047
Fig.: 3-106
038 106
Fig.: 3-106
038 109
Fig.: 3-106
038 044
Fig.: 3-106
038 104
Fig.: 3-106
038 107
Fig.: 3-106
040 034
Fig.: 3-104
036 065
Fig.: 3-113,
3-117
Fig.: 3-113,
3-117
Fig.: 3-109
036 103
039 029
039 028
Fig.: 3-113,
3-117
Fig.: 3-109
001 094
Fig.: 3-119
002 067
Fig.: 3-119
001 095
Fig.: 3-120
001 096
Fig.: 3-120
001 097
Fig.: 3-120
001 098
Fig.: 3-120
001 099
Fig.: 3-120
001 100
Fig.: 3-120
001 101
Fig.: 3-120
037 200
Fig.: 3-126
036 026
Fig.: 3-119
035 079
Fig.: 3-119
036 027
Fig.: 3-120
036 028
Fig.: 3-120
036 029
Fig.: 3-120
036 030
Fig.: 3-120
036 031
Fig.: 3-120
037 127
Fig.: 3-120
037 128
Fig.: 3-120
036 009
035 072
Fig.: 3-124,
3-210
Fig.: 3-123
035 074
Fig.: 3-123
035 073
Fig.: 3-124
041 084
Fig.: 3-124
040 056
Fig.: 3-124
040 057
Fig.: 3-124
040 058
Fig.: 3-124
040 059
Fig.: 3-124
037 129
Fig.: 3-124
037 130
Fig.: 3-124
038 039
Fig.: 3-102
037 210
Fig.: 3-102
038 022
8-23
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Power swing blocking
Measuring-circuit monitoring
Backup overcurrent-time
protection (Backup DTOC)
Switch on to fault protection
8-24
PSB:
PSB:
PSB:
PSB:
PSB:
PSB:
PSB:
PSB:
PSB:
PSB:
PSB:
PSB:
Blocking init. EXT
Enabled
Z within polygon
Operate delay runn.
Blocking initiated
Trip signal
Trip signal OOS (a)
Trip signal OOS (b)
Trip signal stab. PS
IP> triggered
Ineg> triggered
IN> triggered
MCMON: Blocking FF,V EXT
MCMON: Enabled
MCMON: Meas. Circ. I faulty
MCMON: Undervoltage
MCMON: Phase sequ. V faulty
MCMON: Vneg> triggered
MCMON: FF, V triggered
MCMON: FF, Vref triggered
MCMON: Meas. Circ. V faulty
MCMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty.
MCMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty
MCMON: Zero-sequ. Starting
MCMON: Peripheral fault
MCMON: Meas. Voltage o.k.
BUOC: Enabled
BUOC: Active
BUOC: Starting
BUOC: Trip signal
SOTF:
SOTF:
SOTF:
SOTF:
Trigger EXT
Par. ARC running EXT
Enabled
tManual-close runn.
SOTF:
SOTF:
SOTF:
SOTF:
SOTF:
SOTF:
SOTF:
SOTF:
Z1 extended
Starting IN>
Starting I>
tIN> elapsed
tI> elapsed
Active
Line dead
Trip signal
036 069
Fig.: 3-131
040 095
036 024
Fig.: 3-129
036 058
Fig.: 3-131
036 032
Fig.: 3-131
036 025
Fig.: 3-138
006 035
006 192
006 030
036 012
Fig.: 3-131
036 011
Fig.: 3-131
036 010
Fig.: 3-131
002 182
Fig.: 3-142
040 094
Fig.: 3-140
040 087
Fig.: 3-140
038 038
Fig.: 3-141
038 049
Fig.: 3-141
041 079
Fig.: 3-141
035 081
Fig.: 3-142
038 100
Fig.: 3-143
038 023
Fig.: 3-139
040 078
Fig.: 3-139
037 020
Fig.: 3-139
041 080
Fig.: 3-139
038 024
Fig.: 3-139
038 048
Fig.: 3-141
040 093
Fig.: 3-144
037 021
Fig.: 3-144
036 013
Fig.: 3-144
036 014
Fig.: 3-144
002 127
Fig.: 3-147
039 063
Fig.: 3-147
040 069
Fig.: 3-147
036 063
035 076
Fig.: 3-146,
3-147
Fig.: 3-147
001 187
Fig.: 3-146
006 128
001 188
Fig.: 3-146
006 129
006 146
006 147
036 064
Fig.: 3-147
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Protective signaling
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
Enable EXT
Disable EXT
Test telecom. EXT
Test telecom. 1 EXT
Test telecom. 2 EXT
Test telecom. 3 EXT
Telecom. faulty EXT
Blocking EXT
PSIG: Block. weak inf. EXT
PSIG: Receive (B) EXT
PSIG: Receive (A) EXT
037 025
Fig.: 3-148
037 026
Fig.: 3-148
036 038
Fig.: 3-176
038 085
Fig.: 3-176
038 086
Fig.: 3-176
038 087
Fig.: 3-176
004 064
Fig.: 3-150
036 049
Fig.: 3-148,
3-228
036 255
006 037
Fig.: 3-169
036 048
Fig.: 3-151,
3-156, 3-158,
3-161, 3-164,
3-167, 3-168,
3-169, 3-175,
3-193
Fig.: 3-151,
3-156, 3-158,
3-161, 3-164,
3-167, 3-168,
3-175
Fig.: 3-151,
3-156, 3-158,
3-161, 3-164,
3-167, 3-168,
3-175
Fig.: 3-151,
3-156, 3-158,
3-161, 3-164,
3-167, 3-168,
3-175
PSIG: Chann. 1 receive EXT
038 091
PSIG: Chann. 2 receive EXT
038 092
PSIG: Chann. 3 receive EXT
038 093
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
Weak inf. trigg. EXT
Freq. mon. trig. EXT
Ext. enabled
Enabled
Ready
Not ready
Transient blocking
Test telecom. chann.
Test telecom. ch. 1
Test telecom. ch. 2
Test telecom. ch. 3
Telecom. faulty
Op.mode invalid
Send
PSIG: Receive
PSIG: Channel 1, send
PSIG: Channel 2, send
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
043 062
038 080
Fig.: 3-151
037 023
Fig.: 3-148
015 008
Fig.: 3-148
037 027
Fig.: 3-148
037 028
Fig.: 3-148
037 255
Fig.: 3-152
034 016
Fig.: 3-176
034 026
Fig.: 3-176
034 027
Fig.: 3-176
034 028
Fig.: 3-176
036 060
Fig.: 3-150
043 065
Fig.: 3-154
036 035
Fig.: 3-155,
3-157, 3-160,
3-163, 3-166,
3-175, 3-176
Fig.: 3-169
006 036
038 081
038 082
Fig.: 3-155,
3-157, 3-160,
3-163, 3-166,
3-175, 3-176
Fig.: 3-155,
3-157, 3-160,
3-163, 3-166,
3-175, 3-176
8-25
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Auto-reclosing control
8-26
PSIG: Channel 3, send
038 083
PSIG: Receive (signal)
037 029
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
PSIG:
Z1 extended
Weak infeed start.
Trip V<, A
Trip V<, B
Trip V<, C
Trip signal
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
Reset counters EXT
Enable EXT
Disable EXT
Test HSR A EXT
Test HSR B EXT
Test HSR C EXT
Test HSR A-B-C EXT
General starting EXT
Blocking EXT
CB drive ready EXT
1p-HSR enable EXT
3p-HSR enable EXT
3p-HSR(1p) enab. EXT
Enable ext. ARC EXT
3p transfer trip EXT
Ext. enabled
Enabled
Test HSR A
Test HSR B
Test HSR C
Test HSR A-B-C
Blocked
Ready
Not ready
Reject test HSR
Block. time running
Cycle running
Oper. time 1 running
Oper. time 2 running
Dead time running
Dead time 1p running
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
Dead time 3p running
Max. dead time runn.
tDiscrim running
Dead time TDR runn.
Reclaim time running
(Re)close request
(Re)close signal HSR
035 075
Fig.: 3-155,
3-157, 3-160,
3-163, 3-166,
3-175, 3-176
Fig.: 3-156,
3-158, 3-161,
3-164, 3-167
Fig.: 3-168
043 064
Fig.: 3-174
006 152
Fig.: 3-174
006 153
Fig.: 3-174
006 154
Fig.: 3-174
038 007
Fig.: 3-156,
3-158, 3-161,
3-164, 3-167
005 244
Fig.* 3-69
037 010
Fig.: 3-178
037 011
Fig.: 3-178
037 014
Fig.: 3-187
037 015
Fig.: 3-187
037 016
Fig.: 3-187
037 017
Fig.: 3-187
037 096
Fig.: 3-195
036 050
Fig.: 3-180
004 066
Fig.: 3-179
000 108
000 109
000 110
038 003
Fig.: 3-192
038 043
Fig.: 3-195
037 013
Fig.: 3-178
015 064
Fig.: 3-178
034 020
Fig.: 3-187
034 021
Fig.: 3-187
034 022
Fig.: 3-187
034 023
Fig.: 3-187
004 069
Fig.: 3-180
004 068
Fig.: 3-179
037 008
Fig.: 3-179
036 055
Fig.: 3-187
037 004
Fig.: 3-180
037 000
Fig.: 3-195
037 005
Fig.: 3-195
037 065
Fig.: 3-195
037 002
Fig.: 3-195
037 066
037 067
Fig.: 3-195,
3-210
Fig.: 3-195
037 069
Fig.: 3-195
039 087
Fig.: 3-195
037 003
Fig.: 3-195
036 042
Fig.: 3-195
037 077
Fig.: 3-195
037 007
Fig.: 3-195
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
ARC:
(Re)close signal TDR
Reclosure successful
Sig.interr. CB trip
Ext. 1p trip perm.
3p final trip
Automatic synchronism check ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
ASC:
Reset counters EXT
Enable EXT
Disable EXT
AR close request EXT
Blocking EXT
Test close requ. EXT
Enabl.close requ.EXT
Close request EXT
Ext. enabled
Enabled
Blocked
Ready
Not ready
Test close request
Close request
Cycle running
Operat.time running
Close enable
Ground fault (short-circuit)
protection
037 006
Fig.: 3-195
036 062
Fig.: 3-195
036 040
Fig.: 3-195
039 086
Fig.: 3-194
036 043
Fig.: 3-195
006 074
Fig.* 3-69
037 049
Fig.: 3-198
037 061
Fig.: 3-198
000 106
037 048
Fig.: 3-199
037 064
Fig.: 3-200
037 063
Fig.: 3-200
037 062
Fig.: 3-200
037 092
Fig.: 3-198
018 024
Fig.: 3-198
038 018
Fig.: 3-199
037 079
Fig.: 3-199
037 082
Fig.: 3-199
034 019
Fig.: 3-200
034 018
Fig.: 3-200
038 019
Fig.: 3-207
037 093
Fig.: 3-207
037 083
ASC: Close enable,volt.ch
037 085
ASC: Close enable,sync.ch
037 084
ASC: Close rejection
037 086
Fig.: 3-203,
3-204
Fig.: 3-203,
3-204
Fig.: 3-205,
3-206
Fig.: 3-207
GFSC: Enable EXT
039 095
Fig.: 3-209
039 096
Fig.: 3-209
043 068
Fig.: 3-210
039 097
Fig.: 3-209
038 094
Fig.: 3-209
039 093
Fig.: 3-209
039 094
Fig.: 3-209
038 095
Fig.: 3-226
039 088
038 096
Fig.: 3-212,
3-217
Fig.: 3-212,
3-217
Fig.: 3-212
043 061
Fig.: 3-212
039 090
Fig.: 3-224
039 091
Fig.: 3-224
038 097
Fig.: 3-224
038 098
Fig.: 3-224
038 099
Fig.: 3-224
039 092
Fig.: 3-224
GFSC:
GFSC:
GFSC:
GFSC:
GFSC:
GFSC:
GFSC:
GFSC:
Disable EXT
Blocking EXT
Ext. Enabled
Enabled
Ready
Not ready
Monitor. Triggered
IN> triggered
GFSC: VNG> triggered
GFSC:
GFSC:
GFSC:
GFSC:
GFSC:
GFSC:
GFSC:
GFSC:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Starting
Direct.determ.enabl.
Fault forward / LS
Fault backward / BS
t1 elapsed
t2 elapsed
t3 elapsed
Trip signal
039 089
8-27
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling
GSCSG: Enable EXT
GSCSG: Disable EXT
GSCSG: Test telecom. EXT
GSCSG: Telecom. Faulty EXT
GSCSG: Blocking EXT
GSCSG: Receive EXT
GSCSG: Frequ.mon.trigd. EXT
GSCSG: Ext. Enabled
GSCSG: Enabled
GSCSG: Ready
GSCSG: Not ready
GSCSG: Test telecom. Chann.
GSCSG: Transient blocking
GSCSG: Send signal
GSCSG: Tripping time elaps.
GSCSG: Telecom. Faulty
GSCSG: Trip signal
Definite-time overcurrent
protection
8-28
DTOC: Block. dir. tIN> EXT
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
Blck. dir. tIN>> EXT
Blk. dir. tIN>>> EXT
Bl. dir. tIN>>>> EXT
Blocking tI> EXT
Blocking tI>> EXT
Blocking tI>>>EXT
Blocking tI>>>> EXT
Blocking tIneg> EXT
Blocking tIneg>> EXT
Block. tIneg>>> EXT
Block. tIneg>>>> EXT
Blocking tIN> EXT
Blocking tIN>> EXT
Blocking tIN>>> EXT
Blocking tIN>>>> EXT
Enabled
Starting I>
Starting I>>
Starting I>>>
Starting I>>>>
tI> elapsed
tI>> elapsed
tI>>> elapsed
tI>>>> elapsed
Starting Ineg>
Starting Ineg>>
Starting Ineg>>>
Starting Ineg>>>>
043 050
Fig.: 3-227
043 051
Fig.: 3-227
043 056
Fig.: 3-237
043 053
Fig.: 3-228
043 052
Fig.: 3-228
043 055
043 054
Fig.: 3-230,
3-232, 3-233,
3-234, 3-236
Fig.: 3-230
043 066
Fig.: 3-227
023 070
Fig.: 3-227
043 057
Fig.: 3-228
043 058
Fig.: 3-228
034 029
Fig.: 3-237
037 254
Fig.: 3-231
043 059
043 063
Fig.: 3-232,
3-233, 3-236,
3-237
Fig.: 3-229
046 060
Fig.: 3-228
043 060
Fig.: 3-232,
3-233, 3-234
002 176
Fig.: 3-247
002 177
002 178
002 179
041 060
041 061
041 062
041 100
041 102
Fig.: 3-240
041 103
Fig.: 3-240
041 104
Fig.: 3-240
041 105
Fig.: 3-240
041 063
041 064
041 065
041 101
040 120
Fig.: 3-238
035 020
035 021
035 022
035 023
040 010
040 011
040 012
035 032
035 024
Fig.: 3-240
035 025
Fig.: 3-240
035 026
Fig.: 3-240
035 027
Fig.: 3-240
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
DTOC: tIneg> elapsed
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
tIneg>> elapsed
tIneg>>> elapsed
tIneg>>>> elapsed
Starting IN>
Starting IN>>
Starting IN>>>
Starting IN>>>>
Fault N forward
Fault N backward
tIN> elapsed
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
DTOC:
tIN>> elapsed
tIN>>> elapsed
tIN>>>> elapsed
Trip signal tIN>
DTOC: Trip signal tIN>>
DTOC: Trip signal tIN>>>
DTOC: Trip sign. tIN>>>>
Inverse-time overcurrent
protection
Directional power protection
IDMT: Block. tIref,P> EXT
IDMT:
IDMT:
IDMT:
IDMT:
IDMT:
IDMT:
IDMT:
IDMT:
IDMT:
IDMT:
IDMT:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Block. tIref,neg>EXT
Block. tIref,N> EXT
Enabled
Starting Iref,P>
Trip signal tIref,P>
Starting Iref,neg>
Trip sig. tIref,neg>
Starting Iref,N>
Trip signal tIref,N>
Neg.seq.syst. forw.
Neg.seq.syst. backw.
Blocking P> EXT
Blocking P>> EXT
Blocking Q> EXT
Blocking Q>> EXT
Blocking tP< EXT
Blocking tP<< EXT
Blocking tQ< EXT
Blocking tQ<< EXT
Enabled
Starting P>
Starting P>>
Signal P> delayed
Signal P>> delayed
Trip signal P>
Trip signal P>>
Starting Q>
Starting Q>>
Signal Q> delayed
035 034
Fig.: 3-240,
3-246
Fig.: 3-240
035 035
Fig.: 3-240
035 036
Fig.: 3-240
035 033
035 028
035 029
035 030
035 031
035 047
Fig.: 3-244
035 048
Fig.: 3-244
035 037
035 038
Fig.: 3-150,
3-247, 3-248
Fig.: 3-150
035 039
Fig.: 3-150
035 040
Fig.: 3-150
035 043
035 044
Fig.: 3-245,
3-247, 3-248
Fig.: 3-245
035 045
Fig.: 3-245
035 046
Fig.: 3-245
040 101
Fig.: 3-256
040 102
Fig.: 3-256
040 103
Fig.: 3-256
040 100
Fig.: 3-249
040 080
Fig.: 3-256
040 084
Fig.: 3-256
040 107
Fig.: 3-256
040 108
Fig.: 3-256
040 081
Fig.: 3-256
040 085
Fig.: 3-256
035 041
Fig.: 3-259
035 042
Fig.: 3-259
035 082
035 083
035 084
035 085
035 050
035 051
035 052
035 053
036 250
Fig.: 3-278
035 086
035 089
035 087
035 090
035 088
Fig.: 3-281
035 091
Fig.: 3-281
035 092
035 095
035 093
8-29
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
P<>:
Thermal overload protection
Time-voltage protection
8-30
Signal Q>> delayed
Trip signal Q>
Trip signal Q>>
Starting P<
Starting P<<
Signal P< delayed
Signal P<< delayed
tP< elapsed trans.
tP<< elapsed trans.
tP</tP<< elaps.trans
Fault P<
Fault P<<
Trip signal P<
Trip signal P<<
Trip signal P< trans
Trip sig. P<< trans.
Starting Q<
Starting Q<<
Signal Q< delayed
Signal Q<< delayed
tQ< elapsed trans.
tQ<< elapsed trans.
tQ</tQ<< elaps.trans
Fault Q<
Fault Q<<
Trip signal Q<
Trip signal Q<<
Trip sig. Q< trans.
Trip sig. Q<< trans.
Direction P forw.
Direction P backw.
Direction Q forw.
Direction Q backw.
THERM: Replica block EXT
THERM: Reset replica EXT
THERM: Enabled
THERM: Reset replica
THERM: Starting k*Iref>
THERM: Warning
THERM: Trip signal
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
Blocking tV> EXT
Blocking tV>> EXT
Blocking tV< EXT
Blocking tV<< EXT
Blocking tVpos> EXT
Blocking tVpos>> EXT
Blocking tVpos< EXT
Blocking tVpos<< EXT
Blocking tVneg> EXT
Blocking tVneg>> EXT
035 096
035 094
Fig.: 3-283
035 097
Fig.: 3-283
035 054
035 060
035 055
035 061
035 056
035 062
035 178
035 057
035 063
035 058
035 064
035 059
035 065
035 066
035 010
035 067
035 011
035 068
035 016
035 179
035 069
035 049
035 155
035 176
035 156
035 177
035 181
Fig.: 3-290
035 191
Fig.: 3-290
035 193
Fig.: 3-291
035 194
Fig.: 3-291
041 074
Fig.: 3-263
038 061
Fig.: 3-263
040 068
Fig.: 3-261
039 061
Fig.: 3-263
041 108
Fig.: 3-263
039 025
Fig.: 3-263
039 020
Fig.: 3-263
041 068
Fig.: 3-266
041 069
Fig.: 3-266
041 070
Fig.: 3-267
041 071
Fig.: 3-267
041 090
Fig.: 3-269
041 091
Fig.: 3-269
041 092
Fig.: 3-269
041 093
Fig.: 3-269
041 094
Fig.: 3-270
041 095
Fig.: 3-270
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
V<>:
Blocking tVNG> EXT
Blocking tVNG>> EXT
Enabled
Ready
Not ready
Starting V>/>> A(-B)
Starting V>/>> B(-C)
Starting V>/>> C(-A)
Starting V>
Starting V> 3-pole
Starting V>>
tV> elapsed
tV> 3-pole elapsed
tV>> elapsed
Starting V</<< A(-B)
Starting V</<< B(-C)
Starting V</<< C(-A)
Starting V<
Starting V< 3-pole
Starting V<<
tV< elapsed
tV< elaps. Transient
Fault V<
tV< 3-pole elapsed
tV< 3p elaps. Trans.
Fault V< 3-pole
tV<< elapsed
tV<< elapsed trans.
tV</<< elaps. Trans.
Fault V<<
Starting Vpos>
Starting Vpos>>
tVpos> elapsed
tVpos>> elapsed
Starting Vpos<
Starting Vpos<<
tVpos< elapsed
tVpos< elaps. Trans.
Fault Vpos<
tVpos<< elapsed
tVpos<< elaps.trans.
Fault Vpos<<
tVpos</<< elap.trans
Starting Vneg>
Starting Vneg>>
tVneg> elapsed
tVneg>> elapsed
Starting VNG>
Starting VNG>>
tVNG> elapsed
tVNG>> elapsed
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
041 072
Fig.: 3-272
041 073
Fig.: 3-272
040 066
Fig.: 3-264
042 003
Fig.: 3-264
042 004
Fig.: 3-264
041 031
Fig.: 3-266
041 032
Fig.: 3-266
041 033
Fig.: 3-266
041 030
Fig.: 3-266
041 097
Fig.: 3-266
041 096
Fig.: 3-266
041 034
Fig.: 3-266
041 098
Fig.: 3-266
041 035
Fig.: 3-266
041 038
Fig.: 3-267
041 039
Fig.: 3-267
041 040
Fig.: 3-267
041 037
Fig.: 3-267
042 005
Fig.: 3-267
041 099
Fig.: 3-267
041 041
Fig.: 3-267
042 023
Fig.: 3-267
041 110
Fig.: 3-267
042 006
Fig.: 3-267
042 024
Fig.: 3-267
041 111
Fig.: 3-267
041 042
Fig.: 3-267
042 025
Fig.: 3-267
042 007
Fig.: 3-267
041 112
Fig.: 3-267
042 010
Fig.: 3-269
042 011
Fig.: 3-269
042 012
Fig.: 3-269
042 013
Fig.: 3-269
042 014
Fig.: 3-269
042 015
Fig.: 3-269
042 016
Fig.: 3-269
042 026
Fig.: 3-269
041 113
Fig.: 3-269
042 017
Fig.: 3-269
042 027
Fig.: 3-269
041 114
Fig.: 3-269
042 018
Fig.: 3-269
042 019
Fig.: 3-270
042 020
Fig.: 3-270
042 021
Fig.: 3-270
042 022
Fig.: 3-270
041 044
Fig.: 3-272
042 008
Fig.: 3-272
041 045
Fig.: 3-272
041 046
Fig.: 3-272
8-31
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Over-/underfrequency
protection
8-32
f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
f<>:
Blocking f1 EXT
Blocking f2 EXT
Blocking f3 EXT
Blocking f4 EXT
Enabled
Ready
Not ready
Blocked by V<
Starting f1
Starting f1/df1
Delta f1 triggered
Delta t1 elapsed
Trip signal f1
Starting f2
Starting f2/df2
Delta f2 triggered
Delta t2 elapsed
Trip signal f2
Starting f3
Starting f3/df3
Delta f3 triggered
Delta t3 elapsed
Trip signal f3
Starting f4
Starting f4/df4
Delta f4 triggered
Delta t4 elapsed
Trip signal f4
006 075
Fig.* 3-69
042 103
Fig.: 3-277
042 104
042 105
042 106
042 100
Fig.: 3-273
042 101
Fig.: 3-273
042 140
Fig.: 3-273
042 102
Fig.: 3-275
042 107
Fig.: 3-277
042 108
Fig.: 3-277
042 109
Fig.: 3-277
042 110
Fig.: 3-277
042 111
Fig.: 3-277
042 115
042 116
042 117
042 118
042 119
042 123
042 124
042 125
042 126
042 127
042 131
042 132
042 133
042 134
042 135
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Circuit Breaker Failure
Protection
CBF: Ready
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
Startup 3p
Blocking EXT
Starting trig. EXT
Enable EXT
Disable EXT
Enabled
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
Not ready
Trip signal
Starting
Ext./user enabled
CB failure
Start 3p EXT
Start A EXT
Start B EXT
Start C EXT
Start enable EXT
CB pos. implausible
Startup A
Startup B
Startup C
Trip signal t1
Trip signal t1, A
Trip signal t1, B
Trip signal t1, C
Trip signal t2
Trip command t1
Trip command t1, A
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
CBF:
Trip command t1, B
Trip command t1, C
Trip command t2
Fault behind CB
TripSig CBsync.super
CBsync.superv A open
CBsync.superv B open
CBsync.superv C open
Current flow A
Current flow B
Current flow C
Current flow Phx
CB faulty EXT
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
038 009
038 211
Fig.: 3-296
038 058
Fig.: 3-293
038 016
Fig.: 3-299
038 041
Fig.: 3-292
038 042
Fig.: 3-292
040 055
040 025
Fig.: 3-292,
3-293
Fig.: 3-293
040 026
Fig.: 3-299
038 021
Fig.: 3-299
038 040
Fig.: 3-292
036 017
Fig.: 3-297
038 205
Fig.: 3-296
038 206
Fig.: 3-295
038 207
038 208
038 209
Fig.: 3-296
038 210
Fig.: 3-296
038 212
Fig.: 3-295
038 213
Fig.: 3-297
038 214
Fig.: 3-297
038 215
Fig.: 3-297
038 216
Fig.: 3-297
038 217
Fig.: 3-297
038 218
Fig.: 3-297
038 219
Fig.: 3-297
038 220
Fig.: 3-298
038 221
038 222
Fig.: 3-298,
3-299
Fig.: 3-298
038 223
Fig.: 3-298
038 224
Fig.: 3-298
038 225
Fig.: 3-300
038 226
Fig.: 3-301
038 227
Fig.: 3-301
038 228
Fig.: 3-301
038 229
Fig.: 3-301
038 230
Fig.: 3-294
038 231
Fig.: 3-294
038 232
Fig.: 3-294
038 233
Fig.: 3-294
038 234
Fig.: 3-297
8-33
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Limit value monitoring
8-34
LIMIT: Enabled
LIMIT: tI> elapsed
LIMIT: tI>> elapsed
LIMIT: tI< elapsed
LIMIT: tI<< elapsed
LIMIT: tVPG> elapsed
LIMIT: tVPG>> elapsed
LIMIT: tVPG< elapsed
LIMIT: tVPG<< elapsed
LIMIT: tVPP> elapsed
LIMIT: tVPP>> elapsed
LIMIT: tVPP< elapsed
LIMIT: tVPP<< elapsed
LIMIT: tVNG> elapsed
LIMIT: tVNG>> elapsed
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>>
LIMIT: tIDC,lin> elapsed
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> elapsed
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<<
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< elapsed
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< elapsed
LIMIT: Starting T>
LIMIT: Starting T>>
LIMIT: tT> elapsed
LIMIT: tT>> elapsed
LIMIT: Starting T<
LIMIT: Starting T<<
LIMIT: tT< elapsed
LIMIT: tT<< elapsed
040 074
Fig.: 3-302
040 220
Fig.: 3-302
040 221
Fig.: 3-302
040 222
Fig.: 3-302
040 223
Fig.: 3-302
040 224
Fig.: 3-303
040 225
Fig.: 3-303
040 226
Fig.: 3-303
040 227
Fig.: 3-303
040 228
Fig.: 3-303
040 229
Fig.: 3-303
040 230
Fig.: 3-303
040 231
Fig.: 3-303
040 168
Fig.: 3-304
040 169
Fig.: 3-304
040 180
Fig.: 3-305
040 181
Fig.: 3-305
040 182
Fig.: 3-305
040 183
Fig.: 3-305
040 184
Fig.: 3-305
040 185
Fig.: 3-305
040 186
Fig.: 3-305
040 187
Fig.: 3-305
040 170
Fig.: 3-306
040 171
Fig.: 3-306
040 172
Fig.: 3-306
040 173
Fig.: 3-306
040 174
Fig.: 3-306
040 175
Fig.: 3-306
040 176
Fig.: 3-306
040 177
Fig.: 3-306
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Logic
LOGIC: Input 1 EXT
LOGIC: Input 2 EXT
LOGIC: Input 3 EXT
LOGIC: Input 4 EXT
LOGIC: Input 5 EXT
LOGIC: Input 6 EXT
LOGIC: Input 7 EXT
LOGIC: Input 8 EXT
LOGIC: Input 9 EXT
LOGIC: Input 10 EXT
LOGIC: Input 11 EXT
LOGIC: Input 12 EXT
LOGIC: Input 13 EXT
LOGIC: Input 14 EXT
LOGIC: Input 15 EXT
LOGIC: Input 16 EXT
LOGIC: Set 1 EXT
LOGIC: Set 2 EXT
LOGIC: Set 3 EXT
LOGIC: Set 4 EXT
LOGIC: Set 5 EXT
LOGIC: Set 6 EXT
LOGIC: Set 7 EXT
LOGIC: Set 8 EXT
LOGIC: Reset 1 EXT
LOGIC: Reset 2 EXT
LOGIC: Reset 3 EXT
LOGIC: Reset 4 EXT
LOGIC: Reset 5 EXT
LOGIC: Reset 6 EXT
LOGIC: Reset 7 EXT
LOGIC: Reset 8 EXT
LOGIC: 1 has been set
LOGIC: 2 has been set
LOGIC: 3 has been set
LOGIC: 4 has been set
LOGIC: 5 has been set
LOGIC: 6 has been set
LOGIC: 7 has been set
LOGIC: 8 has been set
LOGIC: 1 set externally
LOGIC: 2 set externally
LOGIC: 3 set externally
LOGIC: 4 set externally
LOGIC: 5 set externally
LOGIC: 6 set externally
LOGIC: 7 set externally
LOGIC: 8 set externally
LOGIC: Enabled
LOGIC: Output 1
LOGIC: Output 2
LOGIC: Output 3
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
034 000
Fig.: 3-308
034 001
034 002
034 003
034 004
034 005
034 006
034 007
034 008
034 009
034 010
034 011
034 012
034 013
034 014
034 015
Fig.: 3-308
034 051
Fig.: 3-307
034 052
034 053
034 054
034 055
034 056
034 057
034 058
034 059
Fig.: 3-307
034 060
034 061
034 062
034 063
034 064
034 065
034 066
034 067
Fig.: 3-307
034 068
034 069
034 070
034 071
034 072
034 073
034 074
034 075
Fig.: 3-307
034 076
034 077
034 078
034 079
034 080
034 081
034 082
034 046
Fig.: 3-308
042 032
Fig.: 3-210,
3-308
042 034
042 036
8-35
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
LOGIC: Output 4
LOGIC: Output 5
LOGIC: Output 6
LOGIC: Output 7
LOGIC: Output 8
LOGIC: Output 9
LOGIC: Output 10
LOGIC: Output 11
LOGIC: Output 12
LOGIC: Output 13
LOGIC: Output 14
LOGIC: Output 15
LOGIC: Output 16
LOGIC: Output 17
LOGIC: Output 18
LOGIC: Output 19
LOGIC: Output 20
LOGIC: Output 21
LOGIC: Output 22
LOGIC: Output 23
LOGIC: Output 24
LOGIC: Output 25
LOGIC: Output 26
LOGIC: Output 27
LOGIC: Output 28
LOGIC: Output 29
LOGIC: Output 30
LOGIC: Output 31
LOGIC: Output 32
LOGIC: Output 1 (t)
LOGIC: Output 2 (t)
LOGIC: Output 3 (t)
LOGIC: Output 4 (t)
LOGIC: Output 5 (t)
LOGIC: Output 6 (t)
LOGIC: Output 7 (t)
LOGIC: Output 8 (t)
LOGIC: Output 9 (t)
LOGIC: Output 10 (t)
LOGIC: Output 11 (t)
LOGIC: Output 12 (t)
LOGIC: Output 13 (t)
LOGIC: Output 14 (t)
LOGIC: Output 15 (t)
LOGIC: Output 16 (t)
LOGIC: Output 17 (t)
LOGIC: Output 18 (t)
LOGIC: Output 19 (t)
LOGIC: Output 20 (t)
LOGIC: Output 21 (t)
LOGIC: Output 22 (t)
LOGIC: Output 23 (t)
8-36
042 038
042 040
042 042
042 044
042 046
042 048
042 050
042 052
042 054
042 056
042 058
042 060
042 062
042 064
042 066
042 068
042 070
042 072
042 074
042 076
042 078
042 080
042 082
042 084
042 086
042 088
042 090
042 092
042 094
042 033
Fig.: 3-210,
3-228
Fig.: 3-308
042 035
042 037
042 039
042 041
042 043
042 045
042 047
042 049
042 051
042 053
042 055
042 057
042 059
042 061
042 063
042 065
042 067
042 069
042 071
042 073
042 075
042 077
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
LOGIC: Output 24 (t)
LOGIC: Output 25 (t)
LOGIC: Output 26 (t)
LOGIC: Output 27 (t)
LOGIC: Output 28 (t)
LOGIC: Output 29 (t)
LOGIC: Output 30 (t)
LOGIC: Output 31 (t)
LOGIC: Output 32 (t)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
042 079
042 081
042 083
042 085
042 087
042 089
042 091
042 093
042 095
8-37
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
8.1.2
Control and Testing
Device
DVICE: Service info 031 080
031 080
Local control panel
LOC: Param. change enabl.
003 010
Setting the enable for changing values from the local control panel.
Communication interface 1
COMM1: Sel.spontan.sig.test
003 180
Fig.: 3-13
003 184
Fig.: 3-13
003 186
Fig.: 3-13
103 180
Fig.: 3-15
103 184
Fig.: 3-15
103 186
Fig.: 3-15
120 037
Page: 3-25
120 050
Page: 3-25
120 051
Page: 3-25
120 053
Page: 3-25
120 055
Page: 3-25
120 054
Page: 3-25
120 052
Page: 3-25
Signal selection for testing purposes.
COMM1: Test spont.sig.start
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as “starting”.
COMM1: Test spont.sig. end
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as “ending”.
Communication interface 2
COMM2: Sel.spontan.sig.test
Signal selection for testing purposes.
COMM2: Test spont.sig.start
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as “starting”.
COMM2: Test spont.sig. end
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as “ending”.
Communication interface 3
IEC Generic Substation
Status Events
COMM3: Rset.No.tlg.err.USER
COMM3: Send signal for test
COMM3: Log. State for test
COMM3: Send signal, test
COMM3: Loop back send
COMM3: Loop back test
COMM3: Hold time for test
GSSE: Reset statistics
105 171
Command to reset monitoring counters as listed below.
GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags L
105 160
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE
sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 1 to 16).
GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags H
105 161
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE
sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 17 to
32).
GSSE: Tx message counter
105 162
Shows the number of GSSE messages sent. This counter is reset by
GSSE: Reset counters.
GSSE: Rx message counter
105 163
Shows the number of GSSE messages received. This counter is reset by
GSSE: Reset counters.
8-38
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
GSSE: No. bin.state chang.
105 164
Number of state changes included in a GSSE sent. This counter is reset by
GSSE: Reset counters.
GSSE: Tx last sequence
105 165
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter sent
with each GSSE.
GSSE: Tx last message
105 166
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes sent with each
GSSE.
GSSE: No. Reject. Messages
105 167
Number of telegram rejections having occurred because of non-plausible
message content. This counter is reset by GSSE : Res e t c ou n te rs.
GSSE: IED view selection
105 170
Setting for which GSSE sending device the following statistics information is
to be displayed.
GSSE: IED receiv. Messages
105 172
Counter of the received GSSE telegrams.
GSSE: IED Rx last sequence
105 173
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter received
with each GSSE.
GSSE: IED Rx last message
105 174
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes received with
each GSSE.
GSSE: IED missed messages
105 175
Number of missing GSSE messages (gaps in the continuous sequence
numbering). This counter is reset by G SSE: Reset counters.
GSSE: IED missed changes
105 176
Number of missing state changes (gaps in the continuous sequence
numbering). This counter is reset by G SSE: Reset counters.
GSSE: IED time-outs
105 177
Number of GSSE received after the validity time period has elapsed. This
counter is reset by GSSE : Res e t c ou n te rs.
Binary outputs
OUTP: Reset latch. USER
021 009
Fig.: 3-28
003 042
Fig.: 3-29
003 043
Fig.: 3-29
Reset of latched output relays from the local control panel.
OUTP: Relay assign. F.test
Selection of an output relay to be tested.
OUTP: Relay test
The relay selected for testing is triggered for the set time
(OUTP: Hold-time for test).
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled ‘PasswordProtected Control Operations’ in Chapter 6).
The test can only be carried out when protection is disabled.
OUTP: Hold-time for test
003 044
Fig.: 3-29
Setting the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered
during functional testing.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8-39
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Measured data output
MEASO: Reset output USER
037 116
Fig.: 3-32
003 002
Fig.: 3-68
Resetting the measured data output function.
Main function
MAIN: General reset USER
Reset of the following memories:
All counters
LED indicators
Operating data memory
All event memories
Event counters
Fault data
Measured Ground Fault Data
Measured overload data
Recorded fault values
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'PasswordProtected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
MAIN: Reset indicat. USER
021 010
Fig.: 3-68
Reset of the following displays:
LED indicators
Fault data
MAIN: Rset.latch.trip USER
021 005
Reset of latched trip commands from the local control panel.
MAIN: Reset IP,max,st.USER
003 033
Fig.: 3-39
003 032
Fig.: 3-51
003 007
Fig.: 3-58,
3-66
005 253
Fig.: 3-69
005 254
Fig.: 3-69
003 040
Fig.: 3-64
The display of the stored maximum phase current is reset.
MAIN: Reset meas.v.en.USER
The display of active and reactive energy output and input is reset.
MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER
The counters for counting close and trip commands are reset.
MAIN: Group reset 1 USER
MAIN: Group reset 2 USER
Group resetting commands.
MAIN: Man.trip cmd.Lx USER
A 100 ms trip command is issued from the local control panel. This setting
is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected Control
Operations' in Chapter 6).
Note:
The command is only executed if the manual trip command has been
configured as trip command 1 or 2.
8-40
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
MAIN: Man.trip cmd.L1 USER
MAIN: Man.trip cmd.L2 USER
MAIN: Man.trip cmd.L3 USER
003 017
Fig.: 3-64
003 018
Fig.: 3-64
003 019
Fig.: 3-64
A phase-selective trip command is issued from the local control panel for
100 ms. This setting is password-protected (see section entitled 'PasswordProtected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
MAIN: Man. close cmd. USER
018 033
Fig.: 3-58
A close command is issued from the local control panel for the set reclose
command time. This setting is password-protected (see section entitled
'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
MAIN: Warm restart
003 039
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the
power supply is turned on.
MAIN: Cold restart
000 085
A cold restart is carried out. This setting is password-protected (see section
entitled 'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). A cold
restart means that all settings and recordings are cleared. The values with
which the device operates after a cold restart are the underlined default
settings given in the ‘Range of Values’ column in the Address List. They
are selected so as to block the device after a cold restart.
Operating data recording
OP_RC: Reset record. USER
100 001
Fig.: 3-74
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
Monitoring signal recording
MT_RC: Reset record. USER
003 008
Fig.: 3-75
100 003
Fig.: 3-78
003 041
Fig.: 3-86
003 006
Fig.: 3-87
006 029
Page: 3-211
Reset of the monitoring signal memory.
Overload recording
OL_RC: Reset record. USER
Reset of the overload memory.
Fault recording
FT_RC: Trigger USER
Fault recording is enabled from the local control panel for 500 ms.
FT_RC: Reset record. USER
Reset of the following memories:
LED indicators
Fault memory
Fault counter
Fault data
Recorded fault values
Power Swing Blocking
PSB: Reset counters
Reset of the counters that are used for the enhanced counting-based
tripping.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8-41
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Protective signaling
PSIG: Enable USER
003 132
Fig.: 3-148
003 131
Fig.: 3-148
015 009
Fig.: 3-176
015 027
Fig.: 3-176
015 028
Fig.: 3-176
015 029
Fig.: 3-176
003 134
Fig.: 3-178
Protective signaling is enabled from the local control panel.
PSIG: Disable USER
Protective signaling is disabled from the local control panel.
PSIG: Test telecom. USER
A send signal is issued for 500 ms.
PSIG: Test telecom. 1 USER
PSIG: Test telecom. 2 USER
PSIG: Test telecom. 3 USER
A channel-selective send signal is issued for 500 ms.
Auto-reclosing control
ARC: Enable USER
The auto-reclosing control function is enabled from the local control panel.
ARC: Disable USER
003 133
Fig.: 3-178
The auto-reclosing control function is disabled from the local control panel.
ARC: Test HSR A-B-C USER
011 066
Fig.: 3-187
011 063
Fig.: 3-187
011 064
Fig.: 3-187
003 005
Fig.: 3-196
011 065
Fig.: 3-187
003 136
Fig.: 3-198
003 135
Fig.: 3-198
018 004
Fig.: 3-200
A three-pole test HSR is triggered.
ARC: Test-HSR A USER
A test HSR is triggered in phase A.
ARC: Test-HSR B USER
A test HSR is triggered in phase B.
ARC: Reset counters USER
The ARC counters are reset.
ARC: Test-HSR C USER
A single pole test HSR is triggered with phase selectivity.
Automatic synchronism check ASC: Enable USER
Automatic synchronism check is enabled from the local control panel.
ASC: Disable USER
Automatic synchronism check is disabled from the local control panel.
ASC: Close request USER
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will
trigger the ASC functional operation. A close command is transmitted to the
CB if the check of the ASC is positive.
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled ‘PasswordProtected Control Operations’ in Chapter 6).
ASC: Reset counters USER
003 089
Fig.: 3-208
018 005
Fig.: 3-200
The ASC counters are reset.
ASC: Test close requ USER
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will
trigger the ASC functional operation. No close command is transmitted to
the CB if the check of the ASC is positive. Only a signal is issued.
8-42
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Ground fault (short-circuit)
protection
GFSC: Enable USER
003 138
Fig.: 3-209
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is enabled from the local control panel.
GFSC: Disable USER
003 137
Fig.: 3-209
003 140
Fig.: 3-227
003 139
Fig.: 3-227
023 086
Fig.: 3-237
022 061
Fig.: 3-263
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is disabled from the local control
panel.
Ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling
GSCSG: Enable USER
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is enabled from the local
control panel.
GSCSG: Disable USER
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is disabled from the local
control panel.
GSCSG: Test telecom. USER
A send signal is issued for 500 ms.
Thermal overload protection
THERM: Reset replica USER
Resetting the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection function.
Over-/underfrequency
protection
f<>: Reset meas.val. USER
003 080
Resetting the measured event values f<>: ma x . fre qu . Fo r f> and
f<>: min. frequ. For f<.
Circuit Breaker Failure
Protection
CBF: Enable USER
003 016
Fig.: 3-292
003 015
Fig.: 3-292
034 038
Fig.: 3-308
Circuit breaker failure protection is enabled from the local control panel.
CBF: Disable USER
Circuit breaker failure protection is disabled from the local control panel.
Logic
LOGIC: Trigger 1
LOGIC: Trigger 2
LOGIC: Trigger 3
LOGIC: Trigger 4
LOGIC: Trigger 5
LOGIC: Trigger 6
LOGIC: Trigger 7
LOGIC: Trigger 8
034 039
034 040
034 041
034 042
034 043
034 044
034 045
Fig.: 3-308
Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point of a 100 ms pulse.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8-43
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
8.1.3
Operating data recording
Operating Data Recording
OP_RC: Operat. data record.
003 024
Fig.: 3-74
003 001
Fig.: 3-75
Point of entry into the operating data log.
Monitoring signal recording
MT_RC: Mon. signal record.
Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
8-44
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
8.2
Events
8.2.1
Event Counters
Communication interface 3
COMM3: No. telegram errors
120 042
Page: 3-25
Main function
MAIN: No. General start.
004 000
Fig.: 3-59
004 006
Fig.: 3-66
005 006
Fig.: 3-66
005 007
Fig.: 3-66
005 008
Fig.: 3-66
009 050
Fig.: 3-66
004 005
Fig.: 3-66
009 055
Fig.: 3-58
009 090
Fig.: 3-51
Number of general starting signals.
MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 1
Number of general trip commands 1.
MAIN: No. trip cmds. 1, A
MAIN: No. trip cmds. 1, B
MAIN: No. trip cmds. 1, C
Number of general trip commands 1 per phase.
MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 2
Number of general trip commands 2.
MAIN: No. final trip cmds.
Number of final trip commands.
MAIN: No. Close commands
Number of close commands.
MAIN: No.overfl.act.en.out
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy
output was exceeded.
MAIN: No.overfl.act.en.inp
009 091
Fig.: 3-51
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy
input was exceeded.
MAIN: No.ov/fl.reac.en.out
009 092
Fig.: 3-51
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
output was exceeded.
MAIN: No.ov/fl.reac.en.inp
009 093
Fig.: 3-51
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
input was exceeded.
Operating data recording
OP_RC: No. oper. Data sig.
100 002
Fig.: 3-74
004 019
Fig.: 3-75
004 101
Fig.: 3-77
004 020
Fig.: 3-86
004 010
Fig.: 3-86
Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.
Monitoring signal recording
MT_RC: No. monit. Signals
Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.
Overload recording
OL_RC: No. Overload
Number of overload events.
Fault recording
FT_RC: No. of faults
Number of faults.
FT_RC: No. System disturb.
Number of system disturbances.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8-45
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
Power Swing Blocking
PSB: No. stab. PSwing
006 025
Page 3-208
Number of stable power swing trajectories.
PSB: No. OOS-Swing
006 026
Page 3-208
004 001
Fig.: 3-196
004 002
Fig.: 3-196
004 003
Fig.: 3-196
004 004
Fig.: 3-196
004 008
Fig.: 3-196
004 009
Fig.: 3-208
009 033
Fig.: 3-208
009 034
Fig.: 3-208
009 054
Fig.: 3-225
Number of instable power swing trajectories.
Auto-reclosing control
ARC: No. of HSR A
Number of high-speed reclosures in phase A.
ARC: No. of HSR B
Number of high-speed reclosures in phase B.
ARC: No. of HSR C
Number of high-speed reclosures in phase C.
ARC: No. of HSR A-B-C
Number of three-pole high-speed reclosures.
ARC: Number TDR
Number of time-delay reclosures.
Automatic synchronism check ASC: No. RC aft. Man.clos
Number of reclosures after a manual close request.
ASC: No. Close requests
Number of close requests.
ASC: No. Close rejections
Number of close rejections.
Ground fault (short-circuit)
protection
GFSC: No. of trip signals
Number of trip signals.
8-46
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
8.2.2
Overload data acquisition
Measured Event Data
OL_DA: Overload duration
004 102
Fig.: 3-76
008 010
Fig.: 3-79
004 021
Fig.: 3-79
004 079
Fig.: 3-83
004 025
Fig.: 3-83
004 026
Fig.: 3-83
004 024
Fig.: 3-83
004 049
Fig.: 3-83
004 059
Fig.: 3-83
Duration of the overload event.
Fault data acquisition
FT_DA: Fault duration
Display of the fault duration.
FT_DA: Running time
Display of the running time.
FT_DA: Meas. Loop selected
Display of the measuring loop selected for determination of fault data.
FT_DA: Fault current P p.u.
Display of phase current A referred to Inom.
FT_DA: Flt.volt. PG/PP p.u.
Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage referred to
Vnom .
FT_DA: Fault loop angle P
Display of the fault angle.
FT_DA: Fault curr. N p.u.
Display of the ground fault current referred to IN,nom.
FT_DA : Fault curr.N,par p.u
Display of the ground fault current of the parallel line referred to IN,par,nom.
FT_DA: Fault loop angle N
004 048
Fig.: 3-83
004 029
Fig.: 3-83
004 028
Fig.: 3-83
004 023
Fig.: 3-83
004 027
Fig.: 3-84
004 022
Fig.: 3-84
004 037
Fig.: 3-85
Display of the ground fault angle.
FT_DA: Fault react., prim.
Display of the fault reactance as a primary quantity.
FT_DA: Fault reactance,sec.
Display of the fault reactance as a secondary quantity.
FT_DA: Fault impedance, sec
Display of the fault impedance as a secondary quantity.
FT_DA : Fault locat. Percent
Display of the fault location of the last fault (in %) referred to the setting
FT_DA: Line reactance PSx.
FT_DA: Fault location
Display of the fault location of the last fault in km.
FT_DA: Load imped.post-flt.
Display of the load impedance (in Ω) after the general starting condition of
distance protection has ended. The display only appears if the fault has
been detected by the fault data acquisition function of the P437.
FT_DA: Load angle post-flt.
004 038
Fig.: 3-85
Display of the load angle (in degrees) after the general starting condition of
time-overcurrent protection has ended. The display only appears if the fault
has been detected by the fault data acquisition function of the P437.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8-47
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
FT_DA: Resid.curr. post-flt
004 039
Fig.: 3-85
Display of the residual current of the last fault referred to Inom. The display
only appears if the fault has been detected by the fault data acquisition
function of the P437.
Automatic synchronism check ASC: Voltage Vref
ASC: Volt. sel. meas.loop
ASC: Volt. magn. diff.
004 087
Fig.: 3-197
004 088
Fig.: 3-197
004 091
Fig.: 3-205,
3-206
Display of the difference between amplitudes of the measurement loop
voltage and the reference voltage during a close request, referred to Vnom.
The display only appears if ASC is operating.
ASC: Angle difference
004 089
Fig.: 3-205,
3-206
Display of the difference between angles (in degrees) of the measurement
loop voltage and the reference voltage during a close request.
The display only appears if ASC is operating.
ASC: Frequ. difference
004 090
Fig.: 3-205,
3-206
Display of the difference between frequencies (in Hz) of the measurement
loop voltage and the reference voltage during a close request.
The display only appears if ASC is operating.
Ground fault (short-circuit)
protection
GFSC: Angle VNG/IN
009 098
Fig.: 3-224
Angle between residual current and neutral-displacement voltage when
triggers IN> and VNG> are both operating.
This display only appears when the ground fault (short-circuit) protection
function is active.
Definite-time overcurrent
protection
DTOC: Angle VNG/IN
009 004
Fig.: 3-244
005 002
Page: 3-399
005 001
Page: 3-399
Angle between the residual current and the neutral-point displacement
voltage
Over-/underfrequency
protection
f<>: Max. frequ. for f>
Maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition.
f<>: Min. frequ. for f<
Minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition.
8-48
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
8.2.3
Overload recording
Event Recording
OL_RC: Overload recording 1
OL_RC: Overload recording 2
OL_RC: Overload recording 3
OL_RC: Overload recording 4
OL_RC: Overload recording 5
OL_RC: Overload recording 6
OL_RC: Overload recording 7
OL_RC: Overload recording 8
033 020
Fig.: 3-78
033 021
Fig.: 3-78
033 022
Fig.: 3-78
033 023
Fig.: 3-78
033 024
Fig.: 3-78
033 025
Fig.: 3-78
033 026
Fig.: 3-78
033 027
Fig.: 3-78
003 000
Fig.: 3-87
033 001
Fig.: 3-87
033 002
Fig.: 3-87
033 003
Fig.: 3-87
033 004
Fig.: 3-87
033 005
Fig.: 3-87
033 006
Fig.: 3-87
033 007
Fig.: 3-87
Point of entry into the overload log.
Fault recording
FT_RC: Fault recording 1
FT_RC: Fault recording 2
FT_RC: Fault recording 3
FT_RC: Fault recording 4
FT_RC: Fault recording 5
FT_RC: Fault recording 6
FT_RC: Fault recording 7
FT_RC: Fault recording 8
Point of entry into the fault log.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
8-49
8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)
8-50
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9 Commissioning
9
9.1
Commissioning
Safety Instructions
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this
manual, may work on or operate this device.
The device must be reliably grounded before auxiliary voltage is turned on.
The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut, appropriately marked, as
the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be grounded in the area of the
rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-section of the ground conductor
must conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm2 is
required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply
module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is also
required for proper operation of the device. The cross-section of this ground conductor
must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of
1.5 mm2 is required.
Before working on the device itself or in the space where the device is connected,
always disconnect the device from the supply.
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the
secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages
will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
In units with pin terminal connection, the threaded terminal block for connection to the
current transformers is not a shorting block. Therefore always short-circuit current
transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is
removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9-1
9 Commissioning
(continued)
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply
voltage for the device is shut off.
The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module cannot be connected at the
same time. (The selection for U C A 2 : E th e r n e t M e d i a should be noted.)
The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently, the female
connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is
required per VDE 0106 Part 101. Therefore, when connecting the prescribed connecting
cable be careful not to touch the socket contacts.
Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in compliance with the
maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see chapter entitled 'Technical
Data')
When using the programmable logic (function group LOGIC), the user must carry out a
functional type test to conform with the requirements of the relevant protection/control
application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the
implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time performance during device
startup, during operation and when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
9-2
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9 Commissioning
(continued)
9.2
Commissioning Tests
Preparation
After the P437 has been installed and connected as described in Chapter 5, the
commissioning procedure can begin.
Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked again:
˚
Is the protection device connected to the protective ground at the specified location?
˚
Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary voltage of the
protection device?
˚
Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly isolated.
The conditions given in VDE 0100 must be satisfied.
Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on. After
voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various startup tests are
carried out (see section entitled ‘Self-Monitoring’ in Chapter 3). The LED indicators for
‘Operation’ (H1) and ‘Blocked/Faulty’ (H2) will light up. After approximately 15 s, the
P437 is ready for operation. By default (factory setting) or after a cold restart, the device
type “P437 ” and the time are displayed on the first line of the LCD after the device has
started up.
Once the change enabling command has been issued (see section entitled ‘ChangeEnabling Function’ in Chapter 6), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering
settings from the integrated local control panel is described in Chapter 6.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9-3
9 Commissioning
(continued)
If either the PC interface or the communication interface will be used for setting the P437
and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be made from the
integrated local control panel.
˚
˚
˚
9-4
‘Par/DvID/’ folder:
̈
DVICE: Device password 1
̈
DVICE: Device password 2
‘Par/Conf/’ folder:
̈
PC: Name of manufacturer
̈
PC: Bay address
̈
PC: Device address
̈
PC: Baud rate
̈
PC: Parity bit
̈
COMM1: Function group COMM1
̈
COMM1: General enable USER
̈
COMM1: Name of manufacturer
̈
COMM1: Line idle state
̈
COMM1: Baud rate
̈
COMM1: Parity bit
̈
COMM1: Communicat. protocol
̈
COMM1: Octet comm. address
̈
COMM1: Octet address ASDU
̈
COMM2: Function group COMM2
̈
COMM2: General enable USER
̈
COMM2: Name of manufacturer
̈
COMM2: Line idle state
̈
COMM2: Baud rate
̈
COMM2: Parity bit
̈
COMM2: Octet comm. address
̈
COMM2: Octet address ASDU
̈
COMM3: Function group COMM3
̈
COMM3: General enable USER
̈
COMM3: Baud rate
‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder:
̈
PC: Command blocking
̈
PC: Sig./meas.val.block.
̈
COMM1: Command block. USER
̈
COMM1: Sig./meas.block.USER
̈
COMM2: Command block. USER
̈
COMM2: Sig./meas.block.USER
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Further instructions on these settings and control functions are given in Chapters 7 and
8.
Note:
The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication
protocol. If another protocol is being used for the communication interface,
additional settings may be necessary. See Chapter 7 for further details.
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out again
before the blocking is canceled:
˚
Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the terminal
connection diagram?
˚
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs?
˚
Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal connection
diagram?
˚
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays?
˚
Have all settings been made correctly?
Now blocking can be cleared as follows (‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder):
˚
MAIN: Protection enabled
"yes (on)"
Tests
By using the signals and displays generated by the P437, it is possible to determine
whether the P437 is correctly set and properly interconnected with the station. Signals
are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into the event memory. In
addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the appropriate signal in the menu tree.
If the user does not wish the circuit breaker to operate during testing, the trip commands
can be blocked through M A IN : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R (‘Par/Func/Glob’ folder) or
an appropriately configured binary signal input. If circuit breaker testing is desired, it is
possible to issue a three-pole trip command for 100 ms through M A IN : M a n . tr i p
c m d. U S E R (‘Oper/CtrlTest’ folder) or an appropriately configured binary signal input.
Moreover it is possible to issue phase-selective trip commands via the local control panel
or appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Selection of the trip command from the
integrated local control panel is password-protected (see section entitled ‘PasswordProtected Control Operations’ in Chapter 6).
Note:
The three-pole manual trip command is only executed if it has been
configured for trip command 1 or 2.
If the P437 is connected at substation control level, the user is advised to activate the
test mode via M A IN : T e s t mo d e U S E R (folder ‘Par/Func/Glob’) or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. The telegrams are then identified accordingly (reason for
transmission: test mode).
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9-5
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the binary
signal inputs
By selecting the corresponding state signal (‘Oper/Cycl/Phys’ folder), it is possible to
determine whether the signal that is present is recognized correctly by the protection
device. The values displayed have the following meanings:
˚
"Low": Not energized.
˚
"High": Energized.
˚
"Without function": No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected.
Checking the output relays
It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test purposes (time
setting at OU T P : H o l d - ti m e fo r te s t in ‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder). First select the
output relay to be tested (OU T P : R e l a y a s s i g n . f. te s t, ‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder).
Test triggering then occurs via OU T P : R e l a y te s t (‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder). It is
password-protected (see section entitled ‘Password-Protected Control Operations’ in
Chapter 6).
Note:
Checking the output relays is possible only if the has been switched to "no (=
off)" beforehand via M A IN : P r o te c ti o n e n a b l e d (‘Par/Func/Glob/’
folder).
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no
inadvertent switching operations will take place.
Checking the
communications interfaces
signals
When using the IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101 or ILS-C interface protocols, each
signal generated in the P437 can be transmitted to the connected control station for test
purposes. First select the signal to be tested (C OM M x : S e l .s p o n t a n . s i g . t e s t ,
‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder). The respective signal is transmitted according to
C O M M x : T e s t s p o n t . s i g . s t a r t or C O M M x : T e s t s p o n t . s i g . e n d
(‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder). Signal generation is password-protected (see section entitled
'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
Checking the protection
function
Four parameter subsets are stored in the P437, one of which is activated. Before
checking the protective function, the user should determine which parameter subset is
activated. The active parameter subset is displayed at P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m . s u b s e t
(‘Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder).
9-6
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking distance
protection
Before checking the distance protection function using a single-phase testing device,
deactivate the measuring circuit monitoring function (M C M O N : E n a b l e d U S E R ,
‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder) and the fuse failure monitoring function (M C M O N : F F ,V
e n a b l e d U S E R , ‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder) since they would otherwise always operate
and block distance protection after the set operate delay had elapsed. Furthermore, the
signal at the binary signal input configured for M AIN : M .c .b . tr i p V EXT must have
a logic value of 0.
Checking starting
The starting settings can be illustrated in a V-I diagram (see Figure 9-1 Example of the
starting settings in a V-I diagram). The slope of the impedance line plotted in the V-I
diagram is a function of the settings for underimpedance starting and the phase
displacement between the measured variables (see Figure 9-2 Characteristic of
underimpedance starting).
9-1
Example of the starting settings in a V-I diagram
Checking I> (Imin), V< and I>>:
The phase displacement between the measured variables V and I should be selected so
as to be smaller than the angle set at D IST : β PSx.
Checking Z<:
The phase displacement between the measured variables V and I should be selected so
as to be greater than the angle set at D IST : β PSx.
Note:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
The measured variables should be selected in accordance with the selected
operate values such that only one starting measuring system operates.
Operation of the checked starting threshold is possible by checking the
phase-selective and starting-selective state signals ('Oper/Cycl/Log' folder).
9-7
9 Commissioning
(continued)
9-2
Characteristic of underimpedance starting
When checking underimpedance starting using single-phase test current, we obtain the
following relation for the operate condition for phase-to-phase starting:
V test
= 2 ⋅ Z<
I test
V test ⋅ e jϕtest
I test ⋅ e j0 °
= 2 ⋅ Z < ⋅ e jϕZ
For absolute value and angle this means:
V test
= 2 ⋅ Z<
I test
ϕtest = ϕ Z
9-8
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9 Commissioning
(continued)
where:
Z<:
Starting Impedance
ϕZ :
Impedance Angle
Vtest:
Test Voltage
I test :
Test Current
ϕtest:
Phase angle between test voltage and test current
In the range of the reactance limit, that is, for impedance angle ϕ Z in the range
L < z < 110°, the starting impedance is calculated as follows:
Z< =
Xv
sin ϕ Z
Xfw:
D I S T : X f w P S x setting
The limit angle L is defined by the point of intersection of reactance and resistance
limits and is calculated as follows:
ϕ L = arc tan
Rfw :
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
X fw
Rfw
D I S T : R f w , P G P S x or D I S T : R f w , P P P S x setting
9-9
9 Commissioning
(continued)
If underimpedance starting is to be checked under all angle conditions, then the starting
impedances for the individual angle ranges are calculated according to the following
formulas:
Angle Range
Starting Impedance
β ≤ϕ Z ≤ϕ L
(180° + β )≤ϕ Z ≤(180° + ϕ L )
(180° + ϕ L ) < ϕ Z ≤ 290°
β:
D I S T : β P S x setting
Zbw
:
Zfw
D IS T : Z b w /Z fw P S x setting
Z< =
Rfw
cos ϕ Z
Z< =
Rfw
Z
⋅ bw
cos ϕ Z Z fw
Z< =
X fw Z bw
⋅
sin ϕ Z Z fw
When phase-to-ground starting conditions are checked, the D IS T : Z ev al uati on
P S x setting must be taken into account. If ZPG=VPG / 2*/P is set, then the equations
given for phase-to-phase starting apply. If, on the other hand, ZPG=VPG /(/P + kG*IN) is
set, then the set complex ground factor kG must be taken into account if the setting for
D IS T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x is not equal to one and/or the setting for D IS T : A n g l e
k G P S x is not equal to 0°. When the test is carried out using single-phase test current,
the following relation for the operate condition is obtained:
V test
I test
= (1 + k G ) ⋅ Z <
V test ⋅ e jϕ test
I test ⋅ e j 0 °
(
)
= 1 + k G ⋅ e jϕ G ⋅ Z < ⋅ e jϕ Z
For absolute value and angle this means:
V test
2
= ⎛⎜1 + k G + 2 ⋅ k G ⋅ cos ϕ G ⎞⎟ ⋅ Z <
⎠
⎝
I test
ϕ test = arc tan
sinϕ Z + k G ⋅ sin(ϕ Z + ϕ G )
cos ϕ Z + k G ⋅ cos (ϕ Z + ϕ G )
or
ϕ Z = arc tan
9-10
sinϕ test + k G ⋅ sin(ϕ test − ϕ G )
cos ϕ test + k G ⋅ cos (ϕ test − ϕ G )
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9 Commissioning
(continued)
where:
Z<:
Starting Impedance
ϕZ :
Impedance Angle
kG :
D I S T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x setting
ϕG :
D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x setting
Vtest:
Test Voltage
I test :
Test Current
ϕ test :
Phase angle between test voltage and test current
From the input measured variables, the P437 calculates the residual current IN and the
neutral-displacement voltage VNG, which are used for zero-sequence starting. They are
calculated according to the following formulas:
I N = I A + I B + IC
V NG =
1
⋅ V A −G + V B −G + V C −G
3
For a single-phase test where |VB-G| = |VC-G| = 0, the result of the calculation formula for
VNG given above is that the D IS T : V N G> P S x or D IS T : V N G> > P S x triggers
operate if the test voltage exceeds the following value:
V
V test = 3 ⋅ VNG > ⋅ nom
3
VNG>:
D I S T : V N G > P S x or D I S T : V N G > > P S x setting
For a single-phase test where |IB| = |IC| = 0, the following applies to currents:
I test = IN > ⋅Inom
IN>:
D I S T : I N > P S x setting
Operation of ground starting is only signaled by the LED indicator if starting also
operates in a phase. The operation of ground starting can be observed, independently
of the operation of phase starting, at D IS T : Z e r o - s e q u . s t a r t i n g (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’
folder).
The values determined by the for the residual current IN and the neutral-point
displacement voltage VNG are displayed by the operating data display (current:
M A IN : C u r r e n t IN p .u . and voltage: M A IN : V o l t a g e V N G p . u . in the
‘Oper/Cycl/Meas/’ folder).
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9-11
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking distance and
directional measurement
When checking the impedance zones using single-phase test current we obtain the
following relation for the operate condition for a phase-to-phase loop:
V test
I test
= 2 ⋅ Z<
V test ⋅ e jϕ test
I test ⋅ e
j 0°
= 2 ⋅ Z < ⋅ e jϕ Z
For absolute value and angle this means:
V test
I test
= 2 ⋅ Z<
ϕ test = ϕ Z
where:
Z<:
Tripping impedance
ϕZ :
Impedance Angle
Vtest:
Test Voltage
I test :
Test Current
ϕ test :
Phase angle between test voltage and test current
Characteristics
With the P437, the user may choose between a polygonal and a circular tripping
characteristic. This selection of the tripping characteristic will then govern calculation of
the tripping impedances.
Circle characteristic
If the circle characteristic has been selected, the tripping impedance is set in the P437.
If the setting Arc compensation: yes has also been selected, then the characteristic
shown in Figure 9-3
Impedance characteristic for distance and directional
determination for the ‘Circle’ setting is obtained when measuring with sinusoidal
quantities.
9-12
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9 Commissioning
(continued)
9-3 Impedance characteristic for distance and directional determination for the ‘Circle’ setting
The actual tripping impedance in the ranges −45 ° < ϕ Z < α and 135 ° < ϕ Z < ( α + 180 ° ) is
then calculated as follows:
Z trip = Z ⋅ (1 + sin δ )
The following relation applies in the range −45 ° < ϕ Z < α :
δ = α − ϕZ
The following relation applies in the range 135 ° < ϕ Z < ( α + 180 ° ) :
δ = α − ϕ Z + 180 °
where:
Z trip :
Actual tripping impedance
Z:
settings D IST : Z 1 ( c i r c l e ) PSx to D IST : Z 4 ( c i r c l e ) P S x
ϕZ :
Impedance Angle
α:
settings D IST : α 1 ( c i r c l e ) P S x to D IST : α 4 ( c i r c l e ) P S x
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9-13
9 Commissioning
(continued)
When phase-to-ground loops are checked, the set complex ground factor kG must be
taken into account if the setting for D IS T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x is not equal to one
and/or the setting for D IS T : A n g l e k G P S x is not equal to 0°. When the test is
carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation for the operate condition
is obtained:
V test
I test
(
)
= 1 + kG ⋅ Z<
V test ⋅ e jϕ test
(
)
= 1 + k G ⋅ e jϕ G ⋅ Z < ⋅ e jϕ Z
I test ⋅ e j 0°
For absolute value and angle this means:
V test
I test
⎛
= ⎜1 + k G
⎝
ϕ test = arctan
2
⎞
+ 2 ⋅ k G ⋅ cosϕG ⎟ ⋅ Z <
⎠
sinϕ Z + k G ⋅ sin (ϕ Z + ϕ G )
cos ϕ Z + k G ⋅ cos (ϕ Z + ϕ G )
or
ϕ Z = arc tan
sinϕ test + k G ⋅ sin(ϕ test − ϕ G )
cos ϕ test + k G ⋅ cos (ϕ test − ϕ G )
where:
9-14
Z<:
Tripping impedance
ϕZ :
Impedance Angle
kG :
D I S T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x setting
ϕG:
D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x setting
Vtest:
Test Voltage
I test :
Test Current
ϕ test :
Phase angle between test voltage and test current
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9 Commissioning
(continued)
In impedance zone 1, the set zone extension factors kze enter into the tripping
impedance in all fault cases.
Ztrip = kze ⋅ Z1
where:
Ztrip:
Actual tripping impedance
kze:
Setting
or
D I S T : k z e , P G H S R P S x or D I S T : k z e , P P H S R P S x
D I S T : k z e , P G T D R P S x or D I S T : k z e , P P T D R P S x
Z1:
Setting
DIST: Z1 (circle)
PSx
Whether zone extension factors kze HSR are active or not is controlled by the following
protective functions:
˚
Switch on to fault protection
˚
An appropriately configured signal input.
˚
Protective signaling.
If protective signaling is not ready, then control and switching to zone extension factor kze
TDR, if applicable, is handled by the internal auto-reclosing function. Regardless of the
readiness of protective signaling, zone extension factor kze HSR may be activated during
the reclose command – if set accordingly.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9-15
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Polygon (quadrilateral)
characteristic
The tripping impedance is calculated in the range of the reactance limits (for impedance
angle φZ this means in the range φL < φZ < 90°) as follows:
Z< =
X:
X
sin ϕ Z
Setting
to
DIST: X1 (polygon)
DIST: X6 (polygon)
PSx
PSx
The limit angle φL is defined by the point of intersection of reactance and resistance
limits and is calculated as follows:
X
ϕ L = arc tan
R+
R:
α:
9-4
9-16
X
tan α
Setting
to
DIST: R1,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST: R6,PG (polygon) PSx
or
to
DIST: R1,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST: R6,PP (polygon) PSx
Setting
to
D IST : α 1 ( p o l y g o n )
D IST : α 6 ( p o l y g o n )
PSx
PSx
Impedance characteristic for distance and directional determination for the ‘Polygon’ setting
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9 Commissioning
(continued)
In the range of the resistance limits (for impedance angles this means in the range of
0° < Z < L), the tripping impedance is calculated according to the following formula:
R
Z< =
cos ϕ Z −
sin ϕ Z
tan α
When phase-to-ground loops are checked, the set complex ground factor kG must be
taken into account if the setting for D IS T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x is not equal to one
and/or the setting for D IS T : A n g l e k G P S x is not equal to 0°. When the test is
carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation for the operate condition
is obtained:
V test
I test
(
)
= 1 + kG ⋅ Z<
V test ⋅ e jϕ test
I test ⋅ e
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
j 0°
(
)
= 1 + k G ⋅ e jϕ G ⋅ Z < ⋅ e jϕ Z
9-17
9 Commissioning
(continued)
For absolute value and angle this means:
V test
I test
⎛
= ⎜1 + k G
⎝
ϕ test = arctan
2
⎞
+ 2 ⋅ k G ⋅ cosϕG ⎟ ⋅ Z <
⎠
sinϕ Z + k G ⋅ sin (ϕ Z + ϕ G )
cos ϕ Z + k G ⋅ cos (ϕ Z + ϕ G )
or
ϕ Z = arc tan
sinϕ test + k G ⋅ sin (ϕ test − ϕ G )
cos ϕ test + k G ⋅ cos (ϕ test − ϕ G )
where:
Z<:
Tripping impedance
ϕZ :
Impedance Angle
kG :
D I S T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x setting
ϕG:
D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x setting
Vtest:
Test Voltage
I test :
Test Current
ϕ test :
Phase angle between test voltage and test current
In impedance zone 1, the set zone extension factors kze enter into the tripping
impedance in all fault cases.
Rtrip = kze ⋅ R1
Xtrip = kze ⋅ X1
where:
9-18
Rtrip:
Actual tripping resistance
Xtrip:
Actual tripping reactance
kze:
Setting
or
D I S T : k z e , P G H S R P S x or D I S T : k z e , P G H S R P S x
D I S T : k z e , P G T D R P S x or D I S T : k z e , P P T D R P S x
R 1:
Setting
DIST: R1,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST: R1,PP (polygon) PSx
X1:
Setting
DIST: X1 (polygon)
or
PSx
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Whether the zone extension factors kze HSR are active or not is controlled by the
following protective functions:
˚
Switch on to fault protection
˚
An appropriately configured binary signal input.
˚
Protective signaling.
If protective signaling is not ready, then control and switching to the zone extension
factor kze TDR, if applicable, is handled by the internal auto-reclosing function.
Regardless of the readiness of protective signaling, the zone extension factor kze HSR
may be activated during the reclose command – if set accordingly.
Checking the voltage
memory
The voltage stored by the voltage memory is used in certain cases for direction
determination. The voltage stored by the voltage memory is used in certain cases for
direction determination.
If the voltage memory is to be tested using a single-phase test device, checking should
only be done for an A-B fault.
˚
Voltage is greater than the threshold set at
DIST: Oper.val.Vmemory PSx.
˚
The frequency is in the range 0.95 ⋅ f nom < f < 105
. ⋅ f nom .
With the starting signal, the voltage memory is decoupled from the synchronizing voltage
(VA-B), and the stored voltage can be used for directional measurement for 2 s maximum.
The determines, on the basis of the magnitude of the fault voltage, whether the direction
will be determined using the fault voltage, the stored voltage, or the set angle
(D IS T : n ( p o l y g o n ) P S x , n: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6). The following possibilities exist:
Angle for Direction Determination with:
0.002 Vnom < Vmeas
< DIST: Oper.val.Vmemory PSx
Vmeas < 0.002 Vnom
Enabled
ϕX
ϕX
Not enabled
ϕF
α
V memory
ϕX:
Angle determined using the stored voltage
ϕF:
Angle determined using the selected measured variables
V meas : Selected measuring voltage
The method for determining ϕX is described in the section entitled ‘Distance and
Directional Measurement’ in Chapter 3.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9-19
9 Commissioning
(continued)
The user can check to make sure connection to the system’s current and voltage
transformers involves the correct phase by consulting the operating data displays for
load angle (M A IN : L o a d a n g l e p h i A , M A I N : L o a d a n g l e p h i B , and
M A I N : L o a d a n g l e p h i C in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Meas/’ folder). The load angles for all
three phases must be approximately equal. The load angles are only determined if at
least 5% of the nominal device current is flowing.
Checking measuring-circuit
monitoring
Both the current- and voltage-measuring circuits are monitored. Operation of the
monitoring functions can be observed by selecting the logic state signals
M C M ON : M e a s . c i r c . V ,I fa u l ty (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder ) or M C M ON : M . c i r c .
V ,V r ef fl ty . (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder). The monitoring signals can also be entered into
the monitoring signal memory and identified by reading out the monitoring signal
memory.
Current-measuring circuits
Monitoring of current-measuring circuits functions only if 0.125 Inom flows in at least one
phase. The P437 determines the absolute value of the negative-sequence component,
from the three phase currents; the negative-sequence component is calculated
according to the following formula:
Phase sequence A-B-C:
1
I neg =
I A + a2 ⋅ I B + a ⋅ IC
3
(
a = e j 120
)
I neg
Phase sequence A-C-B:
1
=
I A + a ⋅ I B + a 2 ⋅ IC
3
(
)
0
a 2 = e j 240
0
The operate condition for the current measuring circuits is:
I neg ≥ (Ineg > ) ⋅ I P,max
with
Ineg >: M C M O N : I n e g > setting
With a single-phase test current we obtain:
I neg =
1
⋅I
3 test
I P,max = I test
For the operate condition that means:
1
⋅I
≥ ( I neg > ) ⋅ I test
3 test
0.333 ≥ (Ineg >)
Therefore operation of the monitoring function for current-measuring circuits with singlephase test current is only possible if the threshold operate value is set at less than 0.333.
9-20
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9 Commissioning
(continued)
For two-phase test current in phase opposition we obtain:
I neg =
1
1
⋅I
+ a2 ⋅ ( − I test ) =
⋅ I test
3 test
3
IP,max = Itest
For the operate condition that means:
1
3
⋅ I test ≥ (Ineg >) ⋅ I test
0.577 ≥ (Ineg> )
Therefore operation of the monitoring function for current-measuring circuits with a twophase test current in phase opposition is only possible if the threshold operate value is
set at less than 0.577.
If the threshold operate value satisfies the respective condition, then the monitoring
function for current-measuring circuits operates with a test current greater than 0.125 Inom
after the set operate delay of + 300 s has elapsed.
Voltage-measuring circuits
Negative-sequence monitoring of the voltage-measuring circuits is enabled if at least one
phase-to-ground voltage exceeds the value 0.7 Vnom/√3. Other enabling criteria that can
be activated if desired are the following (selection of enabling criteria at M C M ON : Op.
m o d e v o l t . m o n . in the ‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder):
˚
One of the phase currents must exceed 0.05 Inom.
˚
The signal at the binary signal input configured for M A IN : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T
must have a logic value of ‘1’.
If negative-sequence monitoring has been enabled, the P437 determines the absolute
value of negative-sequence voltage according to the following formula:
Phase sequence A-B-C:
V neg =
(
1
⋅ 1V A − G + a 2 ⋅ 1V B − G + a ⋅ 1V C − G
3
)
Phase sequence A-C-B:
V neg =
(
1
⋅ 1V A − G + a ⋅ 1V B − G + a 2 ⋅ 1V C − G
3
)
0
a = e j 120
0
a 2 = e j 240
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9-21
9 Commissioning
(continued)
The trigger threshold of Vneg is set permanently at 0.2 Vnom/√3. The result of a singlephase test using |VB-G| = |VC-G| = 0 and also of the calculation formula for Vneg given
above is that the trigger operates when the test voltage exceeds the following value:
V test ≥ 3 ⋅ 0.2 ⋅
Vnom
3
A trip signal is issued once the set operate delay has elapsed.
Checking backup
overcurrent-time protection
The switch to backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) – provided it has been
appropriately set – is brought about by the measuring-circuit monitoring function or the
tripping of the voltage transformer miniature circuit breaker on the line side.
If the current exceeds the set operate value (B U OC : I> P S x ), then starting occurs in
the corresponding phase(s). After the set time delay (B U OC : tI> P S x ) has elapsed,
the P437 trips. If M A IN : N e u tr a l p o i n t tr e a t is set to Low-impedance-grounding,
then SN starting occurs if the residual current IN calculated by the exceeds the operate
value set at B U OC : IN > P S x . After the set time delay has elapsed (B U OC : tIN >
P S x ) , the trips.
When the inrush stabilization function is triggered, the BUOC function is blocked.
If the BUOC is set to activate the ARC, then timer stages B U OC : tI> P S x and
B U OC : tIN > P S x are blocked when the ARC is ready. The trip signal is then issued
instantaneously for phase starting or with an 80 s delay for zero-sequence starting.
Timer stage tIN> is also blocked by phase starting or while the ARC hold time is
elapsing.
The P437 calculates the resultant current IN according to the following formula:
I N = I A + I B + IC
In the case of a single-phase test (for example, IB = IC = 0), the following test current is
obtained:
I test = IN > ⋅Inom
at which the operate value (BUOC: IN > P S x ) is reached.
9-22
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking protective
signaling
The protective signaling function can only be checked if protective signaling is ready.
This can be determined by checking logic state signal P S I G : R e a d y (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’
folder).
If protective signaling is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:
˚
Protective signaling is not enabled.
(This can be determined by checking P S I G : E n a b l e d in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’
folder.)
This may be due to the following reasons:
̈
P S I G : E n a b l e d U S E R (‘Par/Func/Log/’ folder) is set to ‘No’.
̈
P S I G : E n a b l e P S x ( i n one of the ‘Par/Func/PSx/’ folders, depending on the
parameter subset) is set to ‘No’.
̈
Protective signaling has been disabled via an appropriately configured signal input
(P S I G : D i s a b l e E X T ). (This can be determined by checking logic state signal
P S I G : E x t . e n a b l e d in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder.)
˚
Protective signaling is being blocked by triggering a correspondingly configured
binary signal input (P S I G : B l o c k i n g E X T ).
˚
A fault has been detected in the communications channel. (This can be determined
by checking logic state signal P S I G : T e l e c o m . f a u l t y in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’
folder.)
If the conditions for testing are satisfied, it is possible to generate a send signal for test
purposes from the integrated local control panel (P S I G : T e s t t e l e c o m . U S E R in the
‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder) or by triggering an appropriately configured binary signal input.
This pulse will be present for 500 ms and is extended for the set reset time. If the ‘with
echo’ setting has been selected in the protection device at the remote station, then the
received signal will be returned.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9-23
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the autoreclosing function
The auto-reclosing function (ARC) can only be checked if it is ready. This may be
determined by checking logic state signal ARC: R e a d y (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’).
If the ARC function is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:
˚
The ARC function is not enabled.
(This can be determined by checking logic state signal A R C : E n a b l e d ,
( ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder)). This can have the following causes:
̈
A R C : E n a b l e d U S E R ('Par/Func/Log' folder) is set to ‘No’.
̈
A R C : E n a b l e P S x ( i n one of the ‘Par/Func/PSx/’ folders, depending on the
parameter subset) is set to ‘No’.
̈
The ARC function has been disabled via an appropriately configured binary signal
input A R C : D i s a b l e E X T .
(This can be determined by checking logic state signal A R C : E x t. e n a b l e d ,
‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder)
˚
The ARC function is blocked by Switch On To Fault protection, backup DTOC
protection, Ground Fault protection, Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection Signaling,
a manual trip command or via an appropriately configured signal input
(ARC: B l oc k i ng E X T ). (This can be determined by checking logic state signal
A R C : E n a b l e d , ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder).
˚
There is no signal with a logic value of ‘1’ at the binary signal input configured for
ARC: CB drive ready EXT.
˚
There is no signal with a logic value of ‘1’ at the binary signal input configured for
M A IN : C B c l os ed s i g. E X T . The circuit breaker position signal is only necessary
if the setting at A R C : C B c l o s . p o s . s i g . P S x is 'Yes'.
˚
An ARC cycle is in progress. (This can be determined by checking logic state signal
ARC: C y c l e r u n n i n g in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder.)
˚
An ASC cycle is in progress. (This can be determined by checking logic state signal
A S C : C y c l e r u n n i n g , ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder).
A test HSR can be executed for testing purposes from the integrated local control panel
or by triggering binary signal inputs. The test HSR function first issues a trip command
and then issues a reclose command after the set dead time has elapsed.
9-24
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the automatic
synchronism check
The automatic synchronism check can only take place if it is ready. This can be
determined by checking logic state signal A S C : R e a d y .
The possible reasons for the ASC function not being ready are as follows:
˚
The ASC function is not enabled. (This can be determined by checking logic state
signal A S C : E n a b l e d , ( ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder)). This can have the following
causes:
̈
A S C : E n a b l e d U S E R (‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder) has been set to ‘No’.
̈
A S C : E n a b l e P S x (‘Par/Oper/PSx/’ folder, depending on the parameter
subset) has been set to ‘No’.
̈
The ASC function has been disabled via an appropriately configured binary signal
input (A S C : D i s a b l e E X T ).
(This can be determined by checking logic state signal A S C : E x t. e n a b l e d ,
‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder.)
˚
A logic ‘1’ signal is present at the binary signal inputs configured for M A IN : M .c .b.
t r i p V E X T or M A I N : M . c . b . t r i p V r e f E X T .
˚
The ASC function will be blocked by triggering the binary signal input configured for
ASC: Blocking EXT.
The setting determines whether a close enable may be carried out in case of blocking.
For test purposes, a close request can be generated for 500 ms via the integrated local
control panel A S C : T es t c l os e r e q u U S E R (‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder) or by triggering
an appropriately configured binary signal input (A S C : T es t c l os e r e q u . E X T ). The
check can only be carried out if there is no ARC cycle running. The P437 checks
whether enabling is permitted or not according to the set conditions. If a positive
decision is reached, then there is an A S C : C l o s e e n a b l e signal. No (re-)close
command takes place! If the check determines that enabling is not permitted, the signal
A S C : C l os e r ej ec ti on is issued.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9-25
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the ground fault
(short-circuit) protection
function
The automatic synchronism check function (ASC) can only be checked if it is ready.
It can be interrogated via the logic state signal GF S C : R e a d y ( ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’
folder).
If the ground fault short-circuit protection is not ready, this may be due to the following
reasons:
˚
˚
The ASC function is not activated. (This can be determined by checking logic state
signal GF S C : E n a b l e d , ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder). This may be due to the following
reasons:
̈
G F S C : E n a b l e d U S E R (‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder) has been set to ‘No’.
̈
G F S C : E n a b l e P S x (‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder, depending on the parameter
subset) has been set to ‘No’.
̈
The ground fault short-circuit protection has been disabled via an appropriately
configured binary signal input (GF S C : D i s a b l e E X T ).
(This can be determined by checking logic state signal GF S C : E x t. e n a b l e d ,
‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder).
On the binary signal input configured to M A IN : M .c .b. tr i p V E X T a logic ‘1’
signal is present.
The ground fault short-circuit protection calculates the neutral displacement voltage VN-G
via the three phase-to-ground voltages according to the following formula:
V NG =
1
⋅ V A −G + V B −G + V C −G
3
In the case of a single-phase test using |VB-G| = |VC-G| = 0, the result of the calculation
formula for VNG given above is that trigger GF S C : V N G> operates when the test
voltage exceeds the following value:
V test = 3 ⋅ VNG > ⋅
VNG > :
Vnom
3
Setting G F S C : V N G >
The operation of the trigger can be determined by checking logic state signal GF S C :
V N G > t r i g g e r e d (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder)
9-26
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking ground fault
(short-circuit) protection
signaling
Ground fault short-circuit protection signaling can be checked via the integrated local
control panel (GS C S G: T es t tel ec om . U S E R ) or by triggering an appropriately
configured binary signal input (GS C S G: T e x t te l e c o m . E X T ). The P437 then
generates a send signal for 500 ms.
Completion of
commissioning
Before the protection device is released for operation, the user should make sure that
the following steps have been taken:
˚
˚
˚
˚
All memories have been reset.
(Reset at M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t (password-protected) and M T _ R C : R e s e t
r e c o r d i n g , both in ‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder.)
Blocking of output relays has been canceled.
(OU T P : Ou tp .r e l .b l o c k U S E R , ‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder, setting ‘No’.)
Blocking of the trip command has been canceled.
(M A IN : T r i p c m d. bl oc k . U S E R , ‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder, setting ‘No’.)
Protection has been activated (‘on’).
(M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n e n a b l e d , ‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder, setting ‘Yes’ (on).)
After completion of commissioning, only the green LED indicator signaling ‘Operation’
(H1) should be on.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
9-27
9-28
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
10 Troubleshooting
10 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and possible
methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation only, and in cases
of doubt it is better to return the P437 to the manufacturer. Please follow the packaging
instructions in the section entitled ‘Unpacking and Packing’ in Chapter 5 when returning
equipment to the manufacturer.
Problem:
Lines of text are not displayed on the local control panel.
„ Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection points.
„ Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct.
The P437 is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal.
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this
manual, may work on or operate this device.
Before checking further, disconnect the P437 from the power supply.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting
cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable!
„ Check to make sure that fuse F1 on power supply module V is not fused.
If the fuse is defective, it should not be replaced without determining the cause of
failure. If a fuse is replaced without eliminating the problem, there is the danger
that the damage will spread.
Required fuses:
VA,nom = 24 V DC:
VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Type M3.5-250V
Type M2-250V
10-1
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
The P437 issues an ‘Alarm’ signal on LED H3.
Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal memory (see the
section entitled ‘Monitoring Signal Memory Readout’ in Chapter 6). The table below
lists possible monitoring or warning indications (provided that a configuration setting
has been entered at SF M O N : F c t. a s s i g n . w a r n i n g ) , the faulty area, the P437
response, and the mode of the output relay configured for 'Warning' and
'Blocked/faulty'.
SFMON: Warning (LED)
036 070
Warning configured for LED H3.
SFMON: Warning (relay)
036 100
Warning configured for an output relay.
Key:
-:
No reaction and/or no output relay triggered.
Yes:
The corresponding output relay is triggered.
Updating:
The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the monitoring
signal is still present.
1)
:
The 'Blocked/faulty' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at M AIN : F c t. a s s i g n . fa u l t .
2)
:
The 'Warning' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at SF M O N : F c t. a s s i g n m . w a r n i n g .
SFMON: Cold rest. checksum
093 024
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the
memory (NOVRAM).
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Warm restart / Device blocking
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: Cold rest. SW update
093 025
A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Warm restart / Device blocking
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: Blocking HW failure
090 019
Supplementary warning that this device is blocked.
'Warning' output relay:
10-2
Updating / Updating
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty
041 200
Multiple signal: Output relay defective.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Updating / Updating
Yes / Yes 1)
SFMON: Hardware clock fail.
093 040
The hardware clock has failed.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Yes / Yes
-/-
SFMON: Faulty DSP
093 127
The DSP Coprocessor has detected an error.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Warm restart / Device blocking
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: Battery failure
090 010
Battery voltage too low. Replace battery.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Updating / Updating
-/-
SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded
096 121
Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Warm restart / Device blocking
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: +15V supply faulty
093 081
The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Warm restart / Device blocking
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: +24V supply faulty
093 082
The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Warm restart / Device blocking
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: -15V supply faulty
093 080
The -15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Warm restart / Device blocking
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
10-3
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Wrong module slot 1
SFMON: Wrong module slot 2
SFMON: Wrong module slot 3
SFMON: Wrong module slot 4
SFMON: Wrong module slot 5
SFMON: Wrong module slot 6
SFMON: Wrong module slot 7
SFMON: Wrong module slot 8
SFMON: Wrong module slot 9
SFMON: Wrong module slot 10
SFMON: Wrong module slot 11
SFMON: Wrong module slot 12
SFMON: Wrong module slot 13
SFMON: Wrong module slot 14
SFMON: Wrong module slot 15
SFMON: Wrong module slot 16
SFMON: Wrong module slot 17
SFMON: Wrong module slot 18
SFMON: Wrong module slot 19
SFMON: Wrong module slot 20
SFMON: Wrong module slot 21
Module in wrong slot.
10-4
096 100
096 101
096 102
096 103
096 104
096 105
096 106
096 107
096 108
096 109
096 110
096 111
096 112
096 113
096 114
096 115
096 116
096 117
096 118
096 119
096 120
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
SFMON: Defect.module slot 1
SFMON: Defect.module slot 2
SFMON: Defect.module slot 3
SFMON: Defect.module slot 4
SFMON: Defect.module slot 5
SFMON: Defect.module slot 6
SFMON: Defect.module slot 7
SFMON: Defect.module slot 8
SFMON: Defect.module slot 9
SFMON: Defect.module slot 10
SFMON: Defect.module slot11
SFMON: Defect.module slot12
SFMON: Defect.module slot13
SFMON: Defect.module slot14
SFMON: Defect.module slot15
SFMON: Defect.module slot16
SFMON: Defect.module slot 17
SFMON: Defect.module slot 18
SFMON: Defect.module slot19
SFMON: Defect.module slot20
SFMON: Defect.module slot21
Defective module in slot x.
Warm restart / Device blocking
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Updating / Updating
Yes / Yes 1)
097 000
097 001
097 002
097 003
097 004
097 005
097 006
097 007
097 008
097 009
097 010
097 011
097 012
097 013
097 014
097 015
097 016
097 017
097 018
097 019
097 020
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Module A DPR faulty
093 070
Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only
detected during device startup.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Yes / Yes
-/-
SFMON: Module A RAM faulty
093 071
RAM fault on communication module A.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Yes / Yes
-/-
SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty
093 110
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the
data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Yes / Yes
-/-
SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty
093 111
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog module.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
SFMON: Error K 801
SFMON: Error K 802
SFMON: Error K 803
SFMON: Error K 804
SFMON: Error K 805
SFMON: Error K 806
SFMON: Error K 807
SFMON: Error K 808
SFMON: Error K 1001
SFMON: Error K 1002
SFMON: Error K 1003
SFMON: Error K 1004
SFMON: Error K 1005
SFMON: Error K 1006
SFMON: Error K 1007
SFMON: Error K 1008
SFMON: Error K 1201
SFMON: Error K 1202
SFMON: Error K 1203
SFMON: Error K 1204
SFMON: Error K 1205
SFMON: Error K 1206
SFMON: Error K 1207
SFMON: Error K 1208
SFMON: Error K 1401
SFMON: Error K 1402
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
-/Yes / Yes
-/097 086
097 087
097 088
097 089
097 090
097 091
097 092
097 093
097 102
097 103
097 104
097 105
097 106
097 107
097 108
097 109
097 118
097 119
097 120
097 121
097 122
097 123
097 124
097 125
097 134
097 135
10-5
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Error K 1403
SFMON: Error K 1404
SFMON: Error K 1405
SFMON: Error K 1406
SFMON: Error K 1407
SFMON: Error K 1408
SFMON: Error K 1601
SFMON: Error K 1602
SFMON: Error K 1603
SFMON: Error K 1604
SFMON: Error K 1605
SFMON: Error K 1606
SFMON: Error K 1607
SFMON: Error K 1608
SFMON: Error K 1801
SFMON: Error K 1802
SFMON: Error K 1803
SFMON: Error K 1804
SFMON: Error K 1805
SFMON: Error K 1806
SFMON: Error K 2001
SFMON: Error K 2002
SFMON: Error K 2003
SFMON: Error K 2004
SFMON: Error K 2005
SFMON: Error K 2006
SFMON: Error K 2007
SFMON: Error K 2008
097 136
097 137
097 138
097 139
097 140
097 141
097 150
097 151
097 152
097 153
097 154
097 155
097 156
097 157
097 166
097 167
097 168
097 169
097 170
097 171
097 182
097 183
097 184
097 185
097 186
097 187
097 188
097 189
Output relay K xxx defective.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
SFMON: Undef. operat. code
-/Updating / Updating
Yes / Yes 1)
093 010
Undefined operation code.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
SFMON: Invalid arithm. op.
Warm restart / Device blocking
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
093 011
Invalid arithmetic operation.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
SFMON: Undefined interrupt
Warm restart / Device blocking
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
093 012
Undefined interrupt.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
10-6
Warm restart / Device blocking
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Exception oper.syst.
093 013
Interrupt of the operating system.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Warm restart / Device blocking
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: Protection failure
090 021
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has
detected an error.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Warm restart / Device blocking
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: Checksum error param
090 003
A checksum error involving the settings in the memory (NOVRAM) has
been detected.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Warm restart / Device blocking
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: Clock sync. error
093 041
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between
the time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is
greater than 10 ms.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Yes / Yes
-/-
SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM
093 026
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the
processor module or the power supply module is removed from the bus
module (digital). This fault is only detected during device startup. After the
fault is detected, the software initializes the RAM. This means that all
records are deleted.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/
Yes / Yes
-/-
SFMON: Overflow MT_RC
090 012
Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Yes / Yes
-/-
SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block.
093 015
Software overloaded.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
-/Yes / Yes
-/-
10-7
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Inval. SW vers.COMM1
093 075
Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y
-/Yes / Yes
-/093 113
Incorrect or invalid software for analog module has been downloaded.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
SFMON: Time-out module Y
-/Yes / Yes
-/093 112
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the analog I/O module.
It has detected an error.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
SFMON: Inom not adjustable
-/Yes / Yes
-/093 118
Transformer module T is not suitable for setting Inom.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
SFMON: M.c.b. trip Vref
-/Yes / Yes
-/098 011
The m.c.b. monitoring the reference voltage transformer has tripped.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
SFMON: M.c.b. trip VNG
Blocking of automatic
synchronism check (ASC)
Yes / Yes 2)
-/098 132
The m.c.b. monitoring the neutral-displacement voltage has tripped.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
SFMON: M.c.b. trip V
Blocking of Ground fault
protection (GFSC and GSCSG)
(if operated with measured
neutral-displacement voltage)
Yes / Yes 2)
Yes / Yes 1)
098 000
The voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
10-8
Blocking of distance protection,
direction measurement of
inverse-time overcurrent
protection and time-voltage
protection, and switching to
backup overcurrent-time
protection, if applicable
Yes / Yes 2)
-/P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Phase sequ. V faulty
098 001
Measuring-circuit monitoring has detected a fault in the phase sequence of
the phase-to-ground voltages.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
-/Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
10-9
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Vneg> triggered
098 014
The negative-sequence monitoring function of measuring-circuit monitoring
has been triggered.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Undervoltage
098 009
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected an undervoltage.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: FF, V triggered
098 021
The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the voltagemeasuring circuit.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: FF, Vref triggered
098 022
The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the reference
voltage-measuring circuit.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty.
098 023
Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits for phase-to-ground voltages or
the reference voltage faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Depends on type of fault.
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Meas. circ. V faulty
098 017
Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Depends on type of fault.
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: BUOC not active
098 002
Due to a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection has been
blocked, but the unit has not switched to backup overcurrent-time
protection.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
10-10
Depends on type of fault.
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: BUOC active w/o ARC
098 003
Due to a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection has been
blocked, and the unit has switched to backup overcurrent-time protection.
ARC is not activated by the backup overcurrent-time protection function.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Depends on type of fault.
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: BUOC active with ARC
098 004
Due to a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection has been
blocked, and the unit has switched to backup overcurrent-time protection.
ARC is activated by the backup overcurrent-time protection function.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Depends on type of fault.
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty
098 005
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected a fault in the
current-measuring circuits.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Zero-sequ. starting
098 015
The zero-sequence starting of distance protection has been triggered
without phase starting.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty
098 016
Multiple signal: Multiple signaling: Current- or voltage-measuring circuits
faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Depends on type of fault.
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Meas. circuits GFSC
098 013
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection monitoring has been triggered.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Depends on type of fault.
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Communic.fault COMM3
093 140
The device has detected a hardware fault in the InterMiCOM interface
(Communication Interface 3).
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
-/Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
10-11
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Hardware error COMM3
093 143
The has detected a hardware error in the effective connection InterMiCOM
(communication interface 3).
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Yes / Yes
-/-
SFMON: Comm.link fail.COMM3
093 142
Timer stage C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t l i n k fa i l . has elapsed indicating a
persistent failure of the transmission channel. The receive signals are set to
their user-defined default values.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Lim.exceed.,tel.err.
093 141
The threshold set for timer stage C O M M 3 : L i m i t te l e g r . e r r o r s was
exceeded and the receive signals are set to their user-defined default
values.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
-/Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Telecom. faulty/PSIG
098 006
The transmission channel of protective signaling is faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Blocking of protective signaling
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Op.mode PSIG inval.
098 019
The operating mode settings for protective signaling and ground fault (shortcircuit) protection signaling are not identical.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
SFMON: Telecom.faulty/GSCSG
-/Yes / Yes 2)
-/098 027
The transmission channel of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
is faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
10-12
Blocking of ground fault (shortcircuit) protection signaling
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Peripheral fault
098 018
Multiple signal.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Depends on type of fault.
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Invalid scaling BCD
093 124
An invalid characteristic has been set for the BCD output channel of the
analog module.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Depends on type of fault.
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Invalid scaling A-1
SFMON: Invalid scaling A-2
093 114
093 115
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels
of analog I/O module Y.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Depends on type of fault.
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC
093 116
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog
I/O module Y.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Depends on type of fault.
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: PT100 open circuit
098 024
The P437 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance
thermometer.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Depends on type of fault.
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Overload 20mA input
098 025
The 20 mA input of analog module Y is overloaded.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Depends on type of fault.
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
10-13
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp.
098 026
The P437 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Depends on type of fault.
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Setting error f<>
098 028
The over-/underfrequency protection function has been set for
'overfrequency' monitoring (based on the settings for operate value and
nominal frequency). This setting is not valid in the f w. Delta f / Delta t
operating mode.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Blocking of the over-/under
frequency protection function
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Setting error PSP
098 128
The settings that have been made for the Power Swing Blocking protection
function are not valid.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
The settings are limited to valid
values.
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync
093 120
The M AIN : M i n - p u l s e c l o c k EXT function has been configured for a
binary input of analog I/O module Y.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
SFMON: Output 30
SFMON: Output 30 (t)
SFMON: Output 31
SFMON: Output 31 (t)
SFMON: Output 32
SFMON: Output 32 (t)
The time of day is not
synchronized.
Yes / Yes 2)
-/098 053
098 054
098 055
098 056
098 057
098 058
These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of warning signals by
selection at SF M O N : F c t. a s s i g n . w a r n i n g . The warning signals are
also recorded in the monitoring signal memory.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
10-14
-/Yes / Yes
-/-
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: CB pos.sig. unplaus.
098 124
The plausibility logic was triggered during the acquisition of the circuit
breaker's (CB) status signals. (See chapter 3, "Main Functions of the P437
(Function Group MAIN)", section "Acquisition and processing of CB status
signals”).
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay:
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
-/Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
10-15
10-16
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
11 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this
manual, may work on or operate this device.
The P437 is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are selected
to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary.
Maintenance procedures in
the power supply area
Electrolytic capacitors are installed in the power supply area because of dimensioning
requirements. The useful life of these capacitors is significant from a maintenance
standpoint. When the equipment is operated continuously at the upper limit of the
recommended temperature range (+55°C or 131°F), the useful life of these components
is 80,000 hours, or more than 9 years. Under these conditions, replacement of the
electrolytic capacitors is recommended after a period of 8 to 10 years. Component drift
follows the '10-degree rule'. This means that the useful life is doubled for each 10°C
reduction in temperature. When the operating temperatures inside the devices are
lower, the required maintenance intervals are increased accordingly.
The P437 is equipped with a lithium battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for
keeping the internal clock running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply.
Loss of capacity due to module-internal self-discharging amounts to less than 1% per
year over a period of availability of 10 years. Since the terminal voltage remains virtually
constant until capacity is exhausted, usefulness is maintained until a very low residual
capacity is reached. With a nominal capacity of 850 mAh and discharge currents of only
a few µA during device storage or in the range of the self-discharge current during device
operation, the result is a correspondingly long service life. It is therefore recommended
that the lithium battery only be replaced after the maintenance interval cited above.
Replacement of the maintenance-related components named above is not possible
without soldering. Maintenance work must be carried out by trained personnel, and the
auxiliary voltage must be turned off while the work is being performed.
Always turn off the power (supply voltage) before removing a hardware module.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is
removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
11-1
11 Maintenance
(continued)
The relevant components are located on the following modules:
˚
Electrolytic capacitor:
on power supply module V.
˚
Lithium battery:
on power supply module V.
Note:
Only AREVA-approved components may be used (see Chapter 13).
Capacitor capacitance must be checked before installation.
11-1
11-2
Component drawing for power supply module V.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
11 Maintenance
(continued)
There is a danger of explosion if the electrolytic capacitor and battery are not properly
replaced. Always check to make sure that the polarity of the electrolytic capacitor and the
battery is correct.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
!
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting
cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable!
Note:
The replaced components (electrolytic capacitor and battery) must be
disposed of in compliance with applicable national regulations.
After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new
commissioning tests as described in Chapter 9 must be carried out.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
11-3
11 Maintenance
(continued)
Routine functional testing
The P437 is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely injection tested for
proper operation. The first functional tests should be carried out approximately 6 to
12 months after commissioning. Functional tests should be performed at intervals of 2 to
3 years – 4 years at the maximum.
The P437 incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for
hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that
communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing basis.
Nonetheless, there are a number of subfunctions that cannot be checked by the selfmonitoring feature without injection testing from the device terminals. The respective
device-specific properties and settings must be observed in such cases.
In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device from the
outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.
Analog input circuits
The analog inputs are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-aliasing
filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In conjunction with the self-monitoring
function, the CT/VT supervision function that is available for the device’s general
functions can detect deviations in many cases. However, it is still necessary to test from
the device terminals in order to make sure that the analog measuring circuits are
functioning correctly.
The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the primary
measured operating data using the operating data measurement function or to use a
suitable testing instrument. A "small" measured value (such as the nominal current in
the current path) and a "large" measured value (such as the nominal voltage in the
voltage path) should be used to check the measuring range of the A/D converter. This
makes it possible to check the entire dynamic range.
The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1 %. An important factor in evaluating
device performance is long-term performance based on comparison with previous
measurements.
In addition, a dynamic test can be used to check transmission performance and the
phase relation of the current transformers and the anti-aliasing filter. This can best be
done by measuring the trigger point of the first zone when there is a two-phase
ungrounded fault. For this test, the short-circuit current should be dimensioned so that a
loop voltage of approximately 2 V is obtained at the device terminals with the set
impedance. Furthermore, a suitable testing instrument that correctly replicates the twophase ungrounded fault should be used for this purpose.
This dynamic test is not absolutely necessary, since it only checks the stability of a few
less passive components. Based on reliability analysis, the statistical expectation is that
only one component in 10 years in 1000 devices will be outside the tolerance range.
11-4
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
11 Maintenance
(continued)
Additional analog testing of such factors as the impedance characteristic or the starting
characteristic is not necessary, in our opinion, since information processing is completely
digital and is based on the measured analog current and voltage values. Proper
operation was checked in conjunction with type testing.
Binary opto inputs
The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a testing
function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each input can be read
out (‘Oper/Cycl/Phys’ folder). This check should be performed for each input being used
and can be done, if necessary, without disconnecting any device wiring.
Binary outputs
With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes even twophase triggering of the relay coils of all the relays. There is no monitoring function for the
external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing relays must be triggered by way
of device functions or integrated test functions. For these testing purposes, triggering of
the output circuits is integrated into the software through a special control function
(‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder).
!
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no
inadvertent switching operations will take place.
Serial Interfaces
The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface also
includes the communication module. The complete communication system, including
connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally monitored as long
as a link is established through the control program or the communication protocol.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
11-5
11-6
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
12 Storage
12 Storage
Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of
-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) must be maintained during storage
(see chapter entitled 'Technical Data').
The relative humidity must be controlled so that neither condensation nor ice formation
will result.
If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the electrolytic
capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every 4 years.
Recharge the capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P437 for approximately
10 minutes.
If the units are stored during a longer time, the battery of the power supply module is
used for the continuous buffering of the event data in the working memory of the
processor module. Therefore the battery is permanently required and discharges
rapidly. In order to avoid this continuous discharge, it is recommended to remove the
power supply module from the mounting rack during long storage periods.
The contents of the event memory should be previously read out and stored separately!
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
12-1
12-2
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
The P437 is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. LED indicators that
are not already configured and labeled can be labeled using the label strips supplied.
Affix the label strips to the front of the unit at the appropriate location.
The label strips can be filled in using a Stabilo brand pen containing water-resistant ink
(Type OH Pen 196 PS).
Description
Order No.
Cable bushings
88512-4-0337414-301
Lithium battery, Type 1/2 AA 3.6 V
Electrolytic capacitor 100 µF, 385 V DC
Only the following brands of capacitor are
permitted:
Philips Type PUL-SI/159/222215946101
Panasonic Type TS-HA/ECOS 2GA 101
Nichicon Type LGQ 2G 101 MHSZ
Nichicon Type LGU 2G 101 MHLZ
Fuse for VA,nom = 24 V DC: M3.5-250V
Fuse for VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC
and 100 to 230 V AC: M2-250V
Resistor 200 Ω
255.002.696
84 TE frame
88512-4-9650723-301
Operating program for Windows
On request (MiCOM S1)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
13-1
13-2
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
14 Order Information
Order Information P437
MiCOM P437
6
7
8
AN3N N N
N
N N N N
1234
PCS Cell No.
P437 Distance Protection Device
5
P437-
9 10 11
9
-308
12, 13
14
15
16
17
18
AA
0
A
A
A
A
-4xx
-612
-46x -9x x -9x x
-8xx
Basic device:
Basic device 84TE, pin-terminal connection,
7
-408
Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection,
8
-409
basic complement with 4 binary inputs, 8 output relays
and 6 function keys
Mounting option and display:
Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display
3
Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display
4
Current transformer:
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14)
2)
9
Parallel Line Mutual Compensation CT:
Without
0
Inom = 0,1 A (T24)
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T24)
1
2)
9
Voltage transformer:
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (4-pole)
4
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (5-pole)
5
Additional binary I/O options:
Without
0
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays)
1
With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 16 output relays)
2
With 3 binary modules (add. 18 binary inputs and 24 output relays)
With 4 binary modules (add. 24 binary inputs and 32 output relays)
3
3)
4
Power supply and additional outputs:
VA,nom = 24 VDC
3
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC
4
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor
6
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC
7
and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays
8
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays
9
Further add. options:
Without
0
With analogue module
2
Switching threshold on binary inputs:
>18 V (standard variant)
Without order extension no.
>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V)
8)
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
-461
8)
-462
8)
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V)
-463
8)
-464
With communication / information interface:
Only IRIG-B input For clock synchronization
-90 0
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 only
-91
Protocol can be switched between:
-92
IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated
1
For connection to plastic fibre, FSMA connector
2
For connection to glass fibre, ST connector
4
Protocol IEC61850
-94
For connection to 100 MHz Ethernet, glass fibre SC and wire RJ45
6
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
For connection to 100 MHz Ethernet, glass fibre ST and wire RJ45
7
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
With guidance / protection interface:
Protocol InterMiCOM
-95
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated
1
For connection to plastic fibre, FSMA connector
2
For connection to glass fibre, ST connector
4
For connection to wire, RS232, isolated
5
Language:
English (German)
4)
Px40 English (English)
German (English)
French (English)
4)
Spanish (English)
Polish (English)
Without order extension no.
4)
4)
4)
Russian (English)
Not yet available - on request
4)
4) 7)
-800
-801
Not yet available - on request
-802
Not yet available - on request
-803
Not yet available - on request
-804
Not yet available - on request
-805
2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!
3) This option is excluded if the InterMiCOM (-95x) is ordered
4) Second included language in brackets
7) Hardwareoption, supports cyrillic letters instead of special West. Europe characters
8) Standard variant recommended, if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required by the application
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
14-1
14 Order Information
(continued)
Information about ordering options
Language version
In order to display the Russian data model, the corresponding order extension number
(-805) must be added upon ordering so that the hardware option supporting Cyrillic
characters is integrated. With this ordering option, reference menu texts (English) will be
available for display. However, other Western European languages containing extra
characters will not be fully supported. Consequently, selecting the "Russian / English"
ordering option means that it will not be possible to download Western European data
models into the device.
Binary inputs' switching threshold
The standard version of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in most
applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 18V. Special versions with
higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds (see also "Technical Data" chapter) are provided for
applications where a higher switching threshold is expressly required.
14-2
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix
A Glossary
B Signal List
C Overview of Changes
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
AN-1
Appendix
(continued)
A
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
Glossary
Function Groups
Modules
Symbols
Examples of Signal Names
Symbols used
B
B1
B2
List of Signals
Internal Signal Names
Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or
IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)
Interoperability
Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters)
Physical Layer (Network-Specific Parameters)
Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters)
Application Layer
Basic Application Functions
B 2.1
B 2.1.1
B 2.1.2
B 2.1.3
B 2.1.4
B 2.1.5
B3
B 3.1
B 3.1.1
B 3.1.1.1
B 3.1.1.2
B 3.1.1.3
B 3.1.2
B 3.1.3
B 3.1.3.1
B 3.1.3.2
B 3.1.3.3
B 3.1.3.3.1
B 3.1.3.3.2
B 3.1.3.3.3
B 3.1.3.3.4
B 3.1.3.3.5
B 3.1.3.3.6
B 3.1.3.3.7
B 3.1.3.3.8
B 3.1.3.4
B 3.1.3.4.1
B 3.1.3.4.2
B 3.1.3.4.3
B 3.1.3.5
B 3.1.3.6
AN-2
A-1
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-10
A-11
Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103
Interoperability
Physical Layer
Electrical Interface
Optical Interface
Transmission Rate
Link Layer
Application Layer
Transmission Mode for Application Data
Common Address of ASDU
Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor
Direction
System Functions in Monitor Direction
Status Indications in Monitor Direction
Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor
Direction
Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction
Fault Indications in Monitor Direction
Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction
Measurands in Monitor Direction
Generic Functions in Monitor Direction
Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control
Direction
System Functions in Control Direction
General Commands in Control Direction
Generic Functions in Control Direction
Basic Application Functions
Miscellaneous
B-1
B-1
B-8
B-8
B-8
B-9
B-10
B-11
B-17
B-20
B-20
B-20
B-20
B-20
B-20
B-21
B-21
B-21
B-21
B-21
B-21
B-22
B-23
B-24
B-25
B-27
B-27
B-28
B-29
B-29
B-29
B-30
B-31
B-31
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix
(continued)
C
Overview of Changes
P437-301-401-601
P437-301-401-601-701
P437-302-402-602
P437-302-402-602-702
P437-302-402-602-703
P437-303-402/403-603
P437-302-402-603-704
P437-302-402-603-705
P437-303-402/403-604
P437-304-404/405-605
P437-304-404/405-605-706
P437-304-404/405-605-707
P437-304-404/405-605-708
P437-304-404/405-605-709
P437-304-404/405-605-710
P437-304-404/405-606
P437-304-404/405-607
P437-304-404/405-608
P437-304-404/405-608-711
P437-306-406/407-609
P437-306-406/407-609-712
P437-306-406/407-609-713
P437-307-408/409-610
P437-307-408/409-610-714
P437-307-408/409-610-715
P437-307-408/409-611
P437-308-408/409-612
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-2
C-2
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-4
C-4
C-4
C-5
C-5
C-5
C-6
C-7
C-7
C-9
C-9
C-9
C-12
C-12
C-12
C-14
AN-3
AN-4
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix A - Glossary
A1
Function Groups
ARC:
ASC:
BUOC:
CBF:
COMM1:
COMM2:
COMM3:
DIST:
DTOC:
DVICE:
f<>:
FT_DA:
F_KEY:
FT_RC:
GFSC:
GOOSE:
GSCSG:
GSSE:
IDMT:
IEC:
INP:
IRIGB:
LED:
LIMIT:
LOC:
LOGIC:
MAIN:
MCMON:
MEASI:
MEASO:
MT_RC:
OL_DA:
OL_RC:
OP_RC:
OUTP:
P<>:
PC:
PSB:
PSIG:
PSS:
SFMON:
SOTF:
THERM:
V<>:
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Auto-reclosing control
Automatic synchronism check
Backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC)
Circuit breaker failure protection
Communication interface 1
Communication interface 2
Communication interface 3
Distance protection
Definite-time overcurrent protection
Device
Over-/underfrequency protection
Fault data acquisition
Function keys
Fault recording
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection
Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
Generic Substation State Event
Inverse-time overcurrent protection
Communication interface IEC 61850
Binary input
IRIG-B interface
LED indicators
Limit value monitoring
Local control panel
Logic
Main function
Measuring-circuit monitoring
Measured data input
Measured data output
Monitoring signal recording
Overload data acquisition
Overload recording
Operating data recording
Binary and analog output
Directional Power Protection
PC link
Power swing blocking
Protective signaling
Parameter subset selection
Self-monitoring
Switch on to fault protection
Thermal overload protection
Time-voltage protection
A-1
Appendix A - Glossary
(continued)
A2
A:
B:
L:
P:
T:
V:
X:
Y:
A-2
Modules
Communication module
Bus module
Local control module
Processor module
Transformer module
Power supply module
Binary I/O module
Analog I/O module
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix A - Glossary
(continued)
A3
Symbols
Graphic symbols for block diagrams
Binary elements in compliance with DIN 40900 part 12, September 1992, IEC 617-12:
modified 1991
Analogue information processing in compliance with DIN 40900 part 13, January 1981
To document the linking of analogue and binary signals, additional symbols have been
used, taken from several DIN documents.
As a rule, direction of the signal flow is from left to right and from top to bottom. Other
flow directions are marked by an arrow. Input signals are listed on the left side of the
signal flow, output signals on the right side.
Symbol
Description
To obtain more space for representing a group of
related elements, contours of the elements may be
joined or cascaded if the following rules are met:
=
There is no functional linkage between elements whose
common contour line is oriented in the signal flow
direction.
Note:
This rule does not necessarily apply to configurations
with two or more signal flow directions, such as for
symbols with a control block and an output block.
There exists at least one logical link between elements
whose common contour line runs perpendicularly to the
signal flow direction.
Components of a symbol
A symbol consists of a contour or contour combination
and one or more qualifiers.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
A-3
Appendix A - Glossary
(continued)
Symbol
Description
Control block
A control block contains an input function common to
several symbols. It is used for the collective setting of
several trigger elements, for example.
Output block
An output block contains an output function common
to several symbols.
Settable control block
The six digits represent the address under which the
function shown in the text after the colon may be set.
Settable control block with function blocks
The digits in the function block show the settings that
are possible at this address.
The text below the symbol shows the setting and the
corresponding unit or meaning.
A-4
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix A - Glossary
(continued)
Symbol
Description
State input
Only the state of the binary input variable is read.
Rising edge-triggered input
Only the transition from value 0 to value 1 causes
operation.
Negation of an output
The value up to the boundary line is negated at the
output.
Negation of an input
The input value is negated before the boundary line.
Falling edge-triggered input with negation
Only the transition from value 1 to value 0 causes
operation.
AND element
The output variable will be 1 only if all input variables
are 1.
OR element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least one input
variable is 1.
Threshold element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least two input
variables are 1. The number in the symbol may be
replaced by any other number.
(m out of n) element
The output variable will be 1 only if the variable is 1 at
only one input.
The number in the symbol may be replaced by any
other number if the number of inputs is increased or
decreased accordingly.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
A-5
Appendix A - Glossary
(continued)
Symbol
Description
Delay element
The transition from value 0 to 1 at the output occurs
after a time delay of t1 relative to the corresponding
transition at the input.
The transition from value 1 to 0 at the output occurs
after a time delay of t2 relative to the corresponding
transition at the input.
t1 and t2 may be replaced by the actual delay values
(in seconds or strobe ticks).
Monostable flip-flop
The output variable will be 1 if the input variable
changes to 1. The output variable will remain 1 for
100 ms, regardless of the duration of the input value
1 (non-retriggerable).
Without a 1 in the function block, the monostable flipflop is retriggerable.
The time is 100 ms in this example, but it may be
changed to any other dwell time duration.
Analog-digital converter
An analog input signal is converted to a binary
signal.
Subtractor
The output variable is the difference between the
two input variables.
A summing element is obtained by changing the
minus sign to a plus sign at the symbol input.
Schmitt Trigger with binary output signal
The binary output variable will be 1 if the input signal
exceeds a specific threshold. The output variable
remains 1 until the input signal drops below the
threshold again.
Memory, general
Storage of a binary or analog signal.
A-6
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix A - Glossary
(continued)
Symbol
Description
Non-stable flip-flop
When the input variable changes to 1, a pulse
sequence is generated at the output.
The ! to the left of the G indicates that the pulse
sequence starts with the input variable transition
(synchronized start).
If there is a ! to the right of the G, the pulse
sequence ends with the ending of the 1 signal at the
input (synchronized stop).
Amplifier
The output variable is 1 only if the input variable is
also 1.
Band pass filter
The output only transmits the 50 Hz component of
the input signals. All other frequencies (above and
below 50 Hz) are attenuated.
Counter
At the + input the input variable transitions from 0 to
1 are counted and stored in the function block.
At the R(eset) input a transition of the input variable
from 0 to 1 resets the counter to 0.
Electromechanical drive
in general, here a relay, for example.
Signal level converter
with electrical isolation between input and output.
L+ = pos. voltage input
L- = neg. voltage input
U1 = device identifier
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
A-7
Appendix A - Glossary
(continued)
Symbol
Description
Input transducer
with conductor and device identifiers
(according to DIN EN 60445)
Conductor identifiers for current inputs:
for A: A1 and A2
for B: B1 and B2
for C: C1 and C2
for N: N1 and N2
Conductor identifiers for voltage inputs
via transformer 1:
for A: 1U
for B: 1V
for C: 1W
for N: 1N
via transformer 2:
for A: 2U
for B: 2V
Device identifiers for current transformers:
for A: T1
for B: T2
for C: T3
for N: T4
for voltage transformer 1:
for A: T5
for B: T6
for C: T7
for N: T8
for VG-N transformer: T90
for voltage transformer 2:
for A: T15
Change-over contact
with device identifier
Special symbol
Output relay in normally-energized arrangement
(‘closed-circuit operation’).
A-8
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix A - Glossary
(continued)
Symbol
Description
PC interface
with pin connections
Multiplier
The output variable is the result of the multiplication
of the two input variables.
Divider
The output variable is the result of the division of the
two input variables.
Comparator
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input
variable(s) are equal to the function in the function
block.
Formula block
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input
variable(s) satisfy the equation in the function block
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
A-9
Appendix A - Glossary
(continued)
A4
Examples of Signal Names
All settings and signals relevant for protection are shown in the block diagrams of
Chapter 3 as follows:
Signal Name
Description
‹ FT_RC: Fault recording n
Internal signal names are not coded by a data model
address. In the block diagrams they are marked with a
diamond. The small figure underneath the signal
name represents a code that is irrelevant to the user.
The internal signal names used and their origins are
listed in Appendix B.
305 100
A-10
DIST: VNG>> triggered
[ 036 015 ]
Signal names coded by a data model address are
represented by their address (shown in square
brackets). Their origin is given in Chapters 7 and 8.
MAIN: General reset
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute
A specific setting to be used later on is shown with its
signal name, address, and the setting preceded by the
setting arrow.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix A - Glossary
(continued)
A5
Symbols used
Symbol
Meaning
t
Time duration
V
Voltage, potential difference
V
Complex voltage
I
Electrical current
I
Complex current
Z
Complex impedance
Z
Modulus of complex impedance
f
Frequency
δ
Temperature in °C
Σ
Sum, result
Ω
Unit of electrical resistance
α
Angle
ϕ
Phase angle. With subscripts: specific angle between a
defined current and a defined voltage.
τ
Time constant
ΔT
Temperature difference in K (°C)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
A-11
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
A-12
Appendix B - Signal List
B 1 Internal Signal Names
Internal signal names are not coded by an external address.
In the block diagrams they are marked with a diamond.
Internal Signal
Figure
ARC: 3p trip for 1p fault
3-165
ARC: 3-pole RRC
3-187
ARC: 3-pole transfer int.
3-187
ARC: CB closed
3-171
ARC: Close command
3-187
ARC: Enable dist. trip Z1ze
3-184
ARC: External trip A
3-187
ARC: External trip B
3-187
ARC: External trip C
3-187
ARC: HSR A
3-187
ARC: HSR A-B-C
3-187
ARC: HSR B
3-187
ARC: HSR C
3-187
ARC: Meas.r. extd. ext.ARC
3-184
ARC: Switch to tPmax
3-185
ARC: TDR
3-187
ARC: TDR permitted
3-187
ARC: Test HSR A, internal
3-179
ARC: Test HSR B, internal
3-179
ARC: Test HSR C, internal
3-179
ARC: Trip time elapsed
3-173
ARC: tRRC running
3-187
ARC: V> for RRC triggered
3-181
ARC: Zone extension HSR
3-183
ARC: Zone extension RC
3-183
ARC: Zone extension TDR
3-183
ASC: Active
3-191
ASC: Close enable w.block
3-191
ASC: Close reject.w.block
3-191
ASC: Gen. close request
3-192
ASC: Manual close request
3-192
ASC: Select.meas.loop P-G
3-189
ASC: Test
3-192
BUOC: IA> triggered
3-136
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
B-1
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B-2
BUOC: IB> triggered
3-136
BUOC: IC> triggered
3-136
BUOC: IN> triggered
3-136
BUOC: SN
3-136
BUOC: Trip A
3-136
BUOC: Trip B
3-136
BUOC: Trip C
3-136
CBF: Start >1p
3-272 , 3-273
CBF: Start A
3-272
CBF: Start B
3-272
CBF: Start C
3-272
COMM1: Selected protocol
3-6
DIST: |¾meas|
3-109
DIST: φcorr
3-104
DIST: φF
3-104
DIST: φX
3-104
DIST: φZ
3-106
DIST: 1-pole starting
3-98
DIST: 1VA-B (stored)
3-103
DIST: Dist. decision zone n
3-111
DIST: Dist.decis. Z1ze, A
3-120
DIST: Dist.decis. Z1ze, B
3-120
DIST: Dist.decis. Z1ze, C
3-120
DIST: Dist.decis. Z1ze, x
3-112, 3-116
DIST: Dist.decis.Z1 stored
3-112, 3-116
DIST: Dist.decision Z1, A
3-120
DIST: Dist.decision Z1, B
3-120
DIST: Dist.decision Z1, C
3-120
DIST: Dist.decision Z1, x
3-112, 3-116
DIST: Enable V<, Z<, A
3-92
DIST: Enable V<, Z<, B
3-92
DIST: Enable V<, Z<, C
3-92
DIST: Enable ZA-B starting
3-94
DIST: Enable ZA-G starting
3-94
DIST: Enable ZB-C starting
3-94
DIST: Enable ZB-G starting
3-94
DIST: Enable ZC-A starting
3-94
DIST: Enable ZC-G starting
3-94
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
DIST: Enable ZP-G
3-94
DIST: I>> triggered
3-89
DIST: I>>> triggered
3-89
DIST: IA>(Ibl) trigg.
3-89
DIST: IA>(Ibl) trigg.
3-92
DIST: IA>> triggered
3-89
DIST: IB>(Ibl) trigg.
3-92
DIST: IB>> triggered
3-89
DIST: IC>(Ibl) trigg.
3-92
DIST: IC>> triggered
3-89
DIST: Multipole starting
3-98
DIST: N1,bw
3-119
DIST: N1,bw, A
3-119
DIST: N1,bw, B
3-119
DIST: N1,bw, C
3-119
DIST: N1,fw
3-119
DIST: N1,fw, A
3-119
DIST: N1,fw, B
3-119
DIST: N1,fw, C
3-119
DIST: N2,bw
3-119
DIST: N2,fw
3-119
DIST: N3,bw
3-119
DIST: N3,fw
3-119
DIST: N4,bw
3-119
DIST: N4,fw
3-119
DIST: N5,bw
3-119
DIST: N5,fw
3-119
DIST: N6,bw
3-119
DIST: N6,fw
3-119
DIST: N7,bw
3-119
DIST: N7,fw
3-119
DIST: ºA,corr.
3-101
DIST: ºA-kG
3-96
DIST: ºB,corr.
3-101
DIST: ºB-kG
3-96
DIST: ºC,corr.
3-101
DIST: ºC-kG
3-96
DIST: ºkG
3-96
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
B-3
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B-4
DIST: ºkG,par
3-101
DIST: ºmeas
3-102
DIST: RF
3-113
DIST: Select.meas.loop A-B
3-100
DIST: Select.meas.loop A-G
3-100
DIST: Select.meas.loop B-C
3-100
DIST: Select.meas.loop B-G
3-100
DIST: Select.meas.loop C-A
3-100
DIST: Select.meas.loop C-G
3-100
DIST: Select.meas.loop P-G
3-100
DIST: Select.meas.loop P-P
3-100
DIST: Signal block start.G
3-125
DIST: Start. IN> triggered
3-90
DIST: Start. VNG> triggered
3-90
DIST: Start. ZPP< triggered
3-97
DIST: Starting A
3-98
DIST: Starting B
3-98
DIST: Starting blocked
3-88
DIST: Starting C
3-98
DIST: Starting G
3-91
DIST: Starting N1
3-98
DIST: Timer st. 1 elapsed
3-117
DIST: tIN> elapsed
3-90
DIST: Trip signal Z1, A
3-125
DIST: Trip signal Z1, B
3-125
DIST: Trip signal Z1, C
3-125
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze
3-121
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, A
3-121
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, B
3-121
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, C
3-121
DIST: Trip zone 1
3-121
DIST: Trip zone 1, A
3-121
DIST: Trip zone 1, B
3-121
DIST: Trip zone 1, C
3-121
DIST: Trip zone 2
3-122
DIST: Trip zone 3
3-122
DIST: Trip zone 4
3-122
DIST: Trip zone 5
3-122
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
DIST: Trip zone 6
3-122
DIST: Trip zone 7
3-122
DIST: Trip zone 8
3-122
DIST: tVNG>> elapsed
3-90
DIST: VA< triggered
3-93
DIST: VB< triggered
3-93
DIST: VC< triggered
3-93
DIST: Vmeas
3-102
DIST: VNG>> exceeded
3-90
DIST: Voltage mem. enabled
3-103
DIST: VPP< triggered
3-93
DIST: XF
3-113
DIST: ZA< start. triggered
3-97
DIST: ZB< start. triggered
3-97
DIST: ZC< start. triggered
3-97
f<>: fMeas
3-266
f<>: No. periods reached
3-266
f<>: Vmeas
3-265
FT_DA: ºA,corr.
3-80
FT_DA: ºB,corr.
3-80
FT_DA: ºC,corr.
3-80
FT_DA: ºmeas
3-81
FT_DA: Outp. fault location
3-79
FT_DA: Output meas. values
3-79
FT_DA: Select. meas.loop PG
3-81
FT_DA: Select.meas.loop A-B
3-81
FT_DA: Select.meas.loop A-G
3-81
FT_DA: Select.meas.loop B-C
3-81
FT_DA: Select.meas.loop B-G
3-81
FT_DA: Select.meas.loop C-A
3-81
FT_DA: Select.meas.loop C-G
3-81
FT_DA: Vmeas
3-81
GFSC: ¼NG filtered
3-204
GFSC: Blocked
3-201, 3-202
GFSC: Curr.-dep. trip sig.
3-214
GFSC: ºN filtered
3-204
GFSC: VNG
3-203, 3-204
GFSC: Volt.-dep trip sig.
3-209
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
B-5
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B-6
GFSC: Voltage showing
3-203
GSCSG: Bl. PSIG weak infeed
3-223 3-163
GSCSG: Blocking ARC
3-226
GSCSG: Frequ.mon. triggered
3-221
GSCSG: Send internal signal
3-223, 3-224, 3-227, 3-228
GSCSG: Trip A
3-226
GSCSG: Trip A
3-226
GSCSG: Trip C
3-226
IDMT: Direct. decision y
3-251
IDMT: ºmeas
3-241
MAIN: Σ(VPG)/3
3-43
MAIN: Blck.1 sel.functions
3-55
MAIN: Blck.2 sel.functions
3-55
MAIN: Inrush stabil. trigg
3-54
MAIN: Protection active
3-53
MAIN: Reset LED
3-68
MAIN: Time tag
3-67
MAIN: Trip 1,A
3-61
MAIN: Trip 1,B
3-61
MAIN: Trip 1,C
3-61
MAIN: Trip A
3-61
MAIN: Trip B
3-61
MAIN: Trip C
3-61
MAIN: Trip signal 1
3-62
MCMON: Set FF, V
3-134
MCMON: Vneg>, FF trigg.
3-134
MEASO: Enable
3-30
MEASO: Reset meas.val.outp.
3-31
PSB: Asyn. power swing
3-126
PSB: Block. sel. zone
3-129
PSB: Ready
3-126
PSB: Spos
3-126
PSIG: Ch. 1 receive weak inf.
3-164, 3-165, 3-166
PSIG: Ch. 1 transient bl.
3-144
PSIG: Ch. 2 receive weak inf.
3-164, 3-165, 3-166
PSIG: Ch. 2 transient bl.
3-144
PSIG: Ch. 3 receive weak inf.
3-164, 3-165, 3-166
PSIG: Ch. 3 transient bl.
3-144
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
PSIG: Frequ. monit. ch. 1
3-143 , 3-164
PSIG: Frequ. monit. ch. 2
3-143 , 3-164
PSIG: Frequ. monit. ch. 3
3-143, 3-164
PSIG: Frequ. monit. trigg.
3-143 , 3-164
PSIG: Inhibit weak inf. A
3-165, 3-166
PSIG: Inhibit weak inf. B
3-165, 3-166
PSIG: Inhibit weak inf. C
3-165, 3-166
PSIG: Receive
3-156
PSIG: Timer stage elapsed
3-141
PSIG: Trip channel 1
3-148, 3-150, 3-153, 3-156, 3-159
PSIG: Trip channel 2
3-148, 3-150, 3-153, 3-156, 3-159
PSIG: Trip channel 3
3-148, 3-150, 3-153, 3-156, 3-159
PSIG: Trip enable
3-153, 3-156, 3-159
PSIG: Trip enable, ch. 1
3-153, 3-156, 3-159
PSIG: Trip enable, ch. 2
3-153, 3-156, 3-159
PSIG: Trip enable, ch. 3
3-153, 3-156, 3-159
PSIG: Trip time elapsed
3-141
PSIG: Trip V<
3-161, 3-166
PSIG: Trip V<, A
3-161, 3-166
PSIG: Trip V<, B
3-161, 3-166
PSIG: Trip V<, C
3-161, 3-166
PSIG: V< triggered
3-161, 3-166
PSIG: V< triggered
3-166
PSIG: Weak inf. blocked
3-162
PSIG: Weak inf. ready
3-163, 3-166
SOTF: ARC blocked
3-137
SOTF: Line dead
3-139
V<>: Vneg
3-259
V<>: VNG
3-262
V<>: Vpos
3-259
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
B-7
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 2 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)
This section incorporates Section 8 of EN 60870-5-101 (1996), which includes a general definition of the telecontrol
interface for substation control systems.
B 2.1
Interoperability
This application-based standard (companion standard) specifies parameter sets and other options from which subsets
are to be selected in order to implement specific telecontrol systems. Certain parameters such as the number of bytes
(octets) in the COMMON ADDRESS of the ASDU are mutually exclusive. This means that only one value of the defined
parameter is allowed per system. Other parameters, such as the listed set of different process information in the
command and monitor direction, permit definition of the total number or of subsets that are suitable for the given
application. This section combines the parameters given in the previous sections in order to facilitate an appropriate
selection for a specific application. If a system is made up of several system components supplied by different
manufacturers, then it is necessary for all partners to agree on the selected parameters.
The boxes for the selected parameters should be checked.
Note:
The overall definition of a system may also require individual selection of certain parameters for specific
parts of a system such as individual selection of scaling factors for individually addressable measured
values.
B 2.1.1
1
1
Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters)
x
Point-to-point configuration
x
Multiple point-to-point configuration
x
Multipoint-party line configuration
Multipoint-star configuration
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.
B-8
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 2.1.2
2
Physical Layer (Network-Specific Parameters)
Transmission Rate (Control Direction)
3
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Balanced interface X.24/X.27
interface V.24/V.28
interface V.24/V.28
Standardized
Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s
100 bit/s
x
2,400 bit/s
2,400 bit/s
56,000 bit/s
200 bit/s
x
4,800 bit/s
4,800 bit/s
64,000 bit/s
300 bit/s
x
9,600 bit/s
9,600 bit/s
x
600 bit/s
19,200 bit/s
x
1,200 bit/s
38,400 bit/s
Transmission Rate (Monitor Direction) 2
2
3
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Balanced interface X.24/X.27
interface V.24/V.28
interface V.24/V.28
Standardized
Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s
100 bit/s
x
2,400 bit/s
2,400 bit/s
56,000 bit/s
200 bit/s
x
4,800 bit/s
4,800 bit/s
64,000 bit/s
300 bit/s
x
9,600 bit/s
9,600 bit/s
x
600 bit/s
19,200 bit/s
x
1,200 bit/s
38 400 bit/s
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.
The transmission rates for control direction and monitor direction must be identical.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
B-9
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 2.1.3
4
Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters)
Frame format FT 1.2, single character 1, and the fixed time-out interval are used exclusively in this companion
standard.
Link Transmission Procedure
x Balanced transmission
Address Field of the Link
x Not present
(balanced transmission only)
x Unbalanced transmission
x One octet
x Two octets
4
5
5
Frame Length
x Structured
240
x Unstructured
Maximum length L (number of octets)
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.
Balanced only.
B-10
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 2.1.4
Application Layer
6
Transmission mode for application data
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion
standard.
Common Address of ASDU (System-Specific Parameter)
x One octet
x Two octets
1
Information Object Address (System-Specific Parameter)
x One octet
x Structured
x Two octets
x Unstructured
x Three octets
Cause of Transmission (System-Specific Parameter)
x One octet
6
x Two octets (with originator address)
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
B-11
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
Selection of Standard ASDUs
Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
x
<1>
=
Single-point information
M_SP_NA_1
x
<2>
=
Single-point information with time tag
M_SP_TA_1
x
<3>
=
Double-point information
M_DP_NA_1
x
<4>
=
Double-point information with time tag
M_DP_TA_1
x
<5>
=
Step position information
M_ST_NA_1
x
<6>
=
Step position information with time tag
M_ST_TA_1
x
<7>
=
Bit string of 32 bit
M_BO_NA_1
x
<8>
=
Bit string of 32 bit with time tag
M_BO_TA_1
x
<9>
=
Measured value, normalized value
M_ME_NA_1
x
<10>
=
Measured value, normalized value with time tag
M_ME_TA_1
x
<11>
=
Measured value, scaled value
M_ME_NB_1
x
<12>
=
Measured value, scaled value with time tag
M_ME_TB_1
<13>
=
Measured value, short floating point value
M_ME_NC_1
<14>
=
Measured value, short floating point value with time tag
M_ME_TC_1
x
<15>
=
Integrated totals
M_IT_NA_1
x
<16>
=
Integrated totals with time tag
M_IT_TA_1
B-12
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
x
<17>
=
Event of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TA_1
x
<18>
=
Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag
ME_EP_TB_1
x
<19>
=
Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TC_1
<20>
=
Packed single-point information with status change detection
M_PS_NA_1
<21>
=
Measured value, normalized value without quality descriptor
M_ME_ND_1
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
B-13
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
7
Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
x
<45>
=
Single command
C_SC_NA_1
x
<46>
=
Double command
C_DC_NA_1
x
<47>
=
Regulating step command
C_IT_NA_1
<48>
=
Set point command, normalized value
C_RC_NA_1
<49>
=
Set point command, scaled value
C_SE_NB_1
<50>
=
Set point command, short floating point value
C_SE_NC_1
<51>
=
Bit string of 32 bit
C_BO_NA_1
System Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
x
7
<70>
=
End of initialization
ME_EI_NA_1
Incorrectly identified with control direction in IEC 870-5-101.
B-14
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
System Information in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
8
9
x
<100>
=
Interrogation command
C_IC_NA_1
x
<101>
=
Counter interrogation command
C_CI_NA_1
x
<102>
=
Read command
C_RD_NA_1
x
<103>
=
Clock synchronization command
x
<104>
=
Test command
C_TS_NB_1
<105>
=
Reset process command
C_RP_NC_1
<106>
=
Delay acquisition command 9
C_CD_NA_1
8
C_CS_NA_1
The command procedure is formally processed, but there is no change in the local time in the station.
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
B-15
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
Parameter in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
x
<110>
=
Parameter of measured value, normalized value
P_ME_NA_1
x
<111>
=
Parameter of measured value, scaled value
P_ME_NB_1
<112>
=
Parameter of measured value, short floating point value
P_ME_NC_1
<113>
=
Parameter activation
P_AC_NA_1
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)
B-16
<120>
=
File ready
F_FR_NA_1
<121>
=
Section ready
F_SR_NA_1
<122>
=
Call directory, select file, call file, call section
F_SC_NA_1
<123>
=
Last section, last segment
F_LS_NA_1
<124>
=
Ack file, ack section
F_AF_NA_1
<125>
=
Segment
F_SG_NA_1
<126>
=
Directory
F_DR_TA_1
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 2.1.5
Basic Application Functions
10
Station Initialization (Station-Specific Parameter)
x
Remote initialization
General Interrogation (System- or Station-Specific Parameter)
x
Global
x
Group 1
x
Group 7
x
Group 13
x
Group 2
x
Group 8
x
Group 14
x
Group 3
x
Group 9
x
Group 15
x
Group 4
x
Group 10
x
Group 16
x
Group 5
x
Group 11
x
Group 6
x
Group 12
Addresses per group have to be defined.
Clock Synchronization (Station-Specific Parameter)
x
10
Clock synchronization
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
B-17
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
Command Transmission (Object-Specific Parameter)
x
Direct command transmission
Select and execute command
Direct set point command transmission
Select and execute set point command
C_SE ACTTERM used
x
No additional definition
Short pulse duration
(Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Long pulse duration
(Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Persistent output
Transmission of Integrated Totals (Station- or Object-Specific Parameter)
x
Counter request
x
General request counter
Counter freeze without reset
x
Request counter group 1
Counter freeze with reset
x
Request counter group 2
Counter reset
x
Request counter group 3
x
Request counter group 4
Addresses per group have to be specified
B-18
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
Parameter Loading (Object-Specific Parameter)
x
Threshold value
Smoothing value
Low limit for transmission of measured value
High limit for transmission of measured value
Parameter Activation (Object-Specific Parameter)
Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)
File transfer in monitor direction
F_FR_NA_1
File transfer in control direction
F_FR_NA_1
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
B-19
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 3 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103
This section incorporates Section 8 of IEC 60870-5-103, including definitions applicable to the P437.
B 3.1
Interoperability
B 3.1.1
Physical Layer
B 3.1.1.1
Electrical Interface
x
EIA RS 485
x
No. of loads
32 for one device
Note: EIA RS 485 defines the loads in such a way that 32 of such loads can be operated on one line. For detailed
information see EIA RS 485, Section 3.
B 3.1.1.2
Optical Interface
x
Glass fiber
x
Plastic fiber
x
F-SMA connector
BFOC/2.5 connector
B 3.1.1.3
Transmission Rate
x
9,600 bit/s
x
19,200 bit/s
B-20
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 3.1.2
Link Layer
There are no selection options for the link layer.
B 3.1.3
Application Layer
B 3.1.3.1
Transmission Mode for Application Data
Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4 is used exclusively in this companion
standard.
B 3.1.3.2
x
Common Address of ASDU
One COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU (identical to the station address)
More than one COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
B 3.1.3.3
B 3.1.3.3.1
Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
System Functions in Monitor Direction
INF
Description
x
<0>
End of general interrogation
x
<0>
Time synchronization
x
<2>
Reset FCB
x
<3>
Reset CU
x
<4>
Start / restart
<5>
Power on
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
B-21
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.2
Status Indications in Monitor Direction
INF
Description
AREVA Designations
Address Description
x
<16>
Auto-recloser active
015 064
ARC: Enabled
x
<17>
Teleprotection active
015 008
PSIG: Enabled
x
<18>
Protection active
003 030
MAIN: Protection enabled
x
<19>
LED reset
021 010
MAIN: Reset indicat. USER
x
<20>
Blocking of monitor direction
037 075
COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block.
x
<21>
Test mode
037 071
MAIN: Test mode
<22>
Local parameter setting
x
<23>
Characteristic 1
036 090
PSS: Group 1 Enabled
x
<24>
Characteristic 2
036 091
PSS: Group 2 Enabled
x
<25>
Characteristic 3
036 092
PSS: Group 3 Enabled
x
<26>
Characteristic 4
036 093
PSS: Group 4 Enabled
x
<27>
Auxiliary input 1
034 000
LOGIC: Input 1 EXT
x
<28>
Auxiliary input 2
034 001
LOGIC: Input 2 EXT
x
<29>
Auxiliary input 3
034 002
LOGIC: Input 3 EXT
x
<30>
Auxiliary input 4
034 003
LOGIC: Input 4 EXT
B-22
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.3
Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor Direction
INF
Description
AREVA Designations
Address Description
x
<32>
Measurand supervision I
040 087
MCMON: Meas. circ. I faulty
x
<33>
Measurand supervision V
038 023
MCMON: Meas. circ. V faulty
x
<35>
Phase sequence supervision
038 049
MCMON: Phase sequ. V faulty
x
<36> 11
Trip circuit supervision
041 200
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty
<37>
I>> back-up operation
037 021
BUOC: Active
x
<38>
VT fuse failure
004 061
MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT
x
<39>
Teleprotection disturbed
036 060
PSIG: Telecom. faulty
x
<46>
Group warning
036 100
SFMON: Warning (relay)
x
<47>
Group alarm
004 065
MAIN: Blocked/faulty
11
The message content is formed from the OR operation of the individual signals.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
B-23
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.4
B-24
Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction
INF
Description
<48>
Ground fault A
<49>
Ground fault B
<50>
Ground fault C
<51>
Earth fault forward, i.e. line
<52>
Earth fault reverse, i.e. busbar
AREVA Designations
Address Description
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.5
Fault Indications in Monitor Direction
INF
Description
AREVA Designations
Address Device Description
x
<64>
Start /pick-up L1
036 001
MAIN: Starting A
x
<65>
Starting C
036 002
MAIN: Starting B
x
<66>
Starting C
036 003
MAIN: Starting C
x
<67>
Starting GF
036 004
MAIN: Starting GF
x
<68>
General trip
036 071
MAIN: Gen. trip command 1
x
<69>
Trip L1
036 072
MAIN: Trip command 1, A
x
<70>
Trip L2
036 073
MAIN: Trip command 1, B
x
<71>
Trip L3
036 074
MAIN: Trip command 1, C
x
<72>
Trip I>> (back-up operation)
036 014
BUOC: Trip signal
x
<73>
Fault location X in ohms
004 029
FT_DA: Fault react., prim.
x
<74>
Fault forward/line
036 018
DIST: Fault forward / LS
x
<75>
Fault reverse/busbar
036 019
DIST: Fault backward / BS
x
<76>
Teleprotection signal transmitted
036 035
PSIG: Send
x
<77>
Teleprotection signal received
037 029
PSIG: Receive (signal)
x
<78>
Zone 1
036 026
DIST: t1 elapsed
x
<79>
Zone 2
036 027
DIST: t2 elapsed
x
<80>
Zone 3
036 028
DIST: t3 elapsed
x
<81>
Zone 4
036 029
DIST: t4 elapsed
x
<82>
Zone 5
036 030
DIST: t5 elapsed
x
<83>
Zone 6
036 031
DIST: t6 elapsed
x
<84>
General starting
036 000
MAIN: General starting
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
B-25
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
x
B-26
INF
Description
AREVA Designations
Address Device Description
<85>
Breaker failure
036 017
<86>
Trip measuring system L1
<87>
Trip measuring system L2
<88>
Trip measuring system L3
<89>
Trip measuring system E
<90>
Trip I>
<91>
Trip I>>
<92>
Trip IN>
<93>
Trip IN>>
CBF: CB failure
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.6
Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction
INF
Description
AREVA Designations
Address Description
x
<128>
CB ‘on’ by AR
037 007
ARC: (Re)close signal HSR
x
<129>
CB ‘on’ by long-time AR
037 006
ARC: (Re)close signal TDR
x
<130>
AR blocked
037 008
ARC: Not ready
B 3.1.3.3.7
Measurands in Monitor Direction
INF
Description
AREVA Designations
Address Description
x
<144> 12
Measurand I
006 041
MAIN: Current B p.u.
x
<145> 13
Measurands I, V
006 041
005 045
MAIN: Current B p.u.
MAIN: Voltage A-B p.u.
x
<146> 14
Measurands I, V, P, Q
006 041
005 045
004 051
004 053
MAIN: Current B p.u.
MAIN: Voltage A-B p.u.
MAIN: Active power P p.u.
MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u.
x
<147> 15
Measurands IN, VEN
005 011
005 013
MAIN: Current Σ(IP) p.u.
MAIN: Volt.Σ(VPG)/√3 p.u.
x
<148> 16
Measurands IA,B,C, VA,B,C, P, Q, f
005 041
006 041
007 041
005 043
006 043
007 043
004 051
004 053
004 040
MAIN: Current A p.u.
MAIN: Current B p.u.
MAIN: Current C p.u.
MAIN: Voltage A-G p.u.
MAIN: Voltage B-G p.u.
MAIN: Voltage C-G p.u.
MAIN: Active power P p.u.
MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u.
MAIN: Frequency f
12
only with setting
only with setting
14
only with setting
15
only with setting
16
only with setting
13
COMM1:
COMM1:
COMM1:
COMM1:
COMM1:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
to "ASDU 3.1 p. IEC"
to "ASDU 3.2 p. IEC"
to "ASDU 3.3 p. IEC"
to "ASDU 3.4 p. IEC"
to "ASDU 9 p. IEC"
B-27
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.8
B-28
Generic Functions in Monitor Direction
INF
Description
<240>
Read headings of all defined groups
<241>
Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
<243>
Read directory of a single entry
<244>
Read value or attribute of a single entry
<245>
General interrogation of generic data
<249>
Write entry with confirmation
<250>
Write entry with execution
<251>
Write entry abort
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 3.1.3.4
Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control Direction
B 3.1.3.4.1
System Functions in Control Direction
INF
Description
x
<0>
Initiation of general interrogation
x
<0>
Time synchronization
B 3.1.3.4.2
General Commands in Control Direction
INF
Description
AREVA Designations
Address Description
x
<16>
Auto-recloser on/off
015 060
ARC: General enable USER
x
<17>
Teleprotection on/off
015 004
PSIG: General enable USER
x
<18>
Protection on/off
003 030
MAIN: Protection enabled
x
<19>
LED reset
021 010
MAIN: Reset indicat. USER
x
<23> 17
Activate characteristic 1
003 060
PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER
x
<24> 18
Activate characteristic 2
003 060
PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER
x
<25> 19
Activate characteristic 3
003 060
PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER
x
<26> 20
Activate characteristic 4
003 060
PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER
17
Switches
Switches
19
Switches
20
Switches
18
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
Param.subs.sel.USER
Param.subs.sel.USER
Param.subs.sel.USER
Param.subs.sel.USER
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
to "Parameter set 1"
to "Parameter set 2"
to "Parameter set 3"
to "Parameter set 4"
B-29
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 3.1.3.4.3
B-30
Generic Functions in Control Direction
INF
Description
<240>
Read headings of all defined groups
<241>
Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
<243>
Read directory of a single entry
<244>
Read value or attribute of a single entry
<245>
General interrogation of generic data
<248>
Write entry
<249>
Write entry with confirmation
<250>
Write entry with execution
<251>
Write entry abort
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 3.1.3.5
Basic Application Functions
x
Test mode
x
Blocking of monitor direction
x
Disturbance data
Generic services
x
Private data
B 3.1.3.6
Miscellaneous
Measured values are transmitted both with ASDU 3 and ASDU 9. As defined in Sec. 7.2.6.8, the maximum MVAL can
be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value. In ASDU 3 and ASDU 9, different ratings may not be used; in other words,
there is only one choice for each measurand.
Measured value
Max. MVAL =
nom. value multiplied by
1,2
or
2,4
Current A
x
Current B
x
Current C
x
Voltage A-G
x
Voltage B-G
x
Voltage C-G
x
Enabled power P
x
Reactive power Q
x
Frequency f
x
Voltage A-B
x
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
B-31
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B-32
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
P437 Overview of Changes
Version
Changes
P437-301-401-601
Initial product release
Release: 09.06.2000
P437-301-401-601-701
Hardware
No modifications
Release: 28.08.2000
Diagram
No modifications
Software
P437-302-402-602
Release: 20.11.2000
COMM1
Bug fixing in MODBUS protocol
Hardware
As an alternative there is now an optional communication module
available providing an IRIG-B input for clock time synchronization.
Diagram
The updated diagram –402 now includes the new IRIG-B interface.
Software
IRIG-B
New function used for clock time synchronization as per IRIG-B
standard.
P437-302-402-602-702
Hardware
No modifications
Release: 20.02.2001
Diagram
No modifications
Software
COMM1
Various modifications of protocols to be consistent with MiCOM
standards.
P437-302-402-602-703
Hardware
No modifications
Release: 27.07.2001
Diagram
No modifications
Software
P437-303-402/403-603
MAIN
Realization of a single-pole enabling/disabling of the protection via the
binary input function 003 026
MAIN: Disable protect. EXT.
Hardware
An additional variant with ring terminal connection is now available.
As an alternative there is now an optional communication module
available, providing two serial interfaces and an IRIG-B input for time
synchronization.
Release: 28.01.2002
The optional binary (I/O) module X(6O)T is now available with rapidresponse output by 4 thyristors. This new module is fitted to slot 18 as
an alternative to the binary (I/O) module X(6O).
Installing the devices into a panel is now possible in two variants: with
and without angle brackets. The dimensional drawings for the cases and
the required panel cutouts are included in the supporting documents
supplied with the devices. Also included in the supporting documents
are assembly diagrams and terminal connection diagrams.
Diagram
The updated diagram –402 now includes the additional COMM2
interface.
Diagram –403 describes the variant with ring terminal connection.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
C-1
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
(continued)
Version
Changes
Software
COMM2
Additional communication interface for remote access, protocol as per
IEC 60870-5-103.
FT_DA
Extended setting range for fault location output
SFMON
Correction in the range of peripheral fault signals
SFMON: Meas. circ. V faulty
DIST
Minimum starting time is now reduced to less than 10 ms.
Distance zones may now be blocked individually via binary input signals,
e.g. D I S T : B l o c k i n g Z 1 E X T .
PSB
The Power Swing Blocking function has been revised completely.
An Out of Step tripping has also been added.
PSIG
The permissive signaling scheme logic is further accelerated by
processing the send and trip decisions within the distance task.
Improved weak-infeed logic.
P437-302-402-603-704
Release: 13.02.2002
P437-302-402-603-705
Release: 09.08.2002
P437-303-402/403-604
Release: 29.10.2002
C-2
PSIG
ARC
ASC
GFSC
GSCSG
New functionality with equal-priority enabling or disabling of a function via
any device interface.
Hardware
No modifications
Diagram
No modifications
Software
f<>
Bug fixing
Hardware
No modifications
Diagram
No modifications
Software
LOC
Russian character set was corrected
Hardware
No modifications
Diagram
No modifications
Software
MAIN
The acquisition of pole-selective CB status signals has been added,
and the application of these status signals adapted to and enhanced in
functions ARC, PSIG, GSCSG and MCMON.
PSIG
ARC
ASC
GFSC
GSCSG
The new functionality of equal-priority enabling or disabling of a function
via any device interface, first introduced with version –603, now is
modified in such a way, that the functions are enabled by default.
MEASO
Scaling of the BCD output of measurands now allows the setting of an
output values range. This feature is required if signed event measurands
are assigned to the BCD output (such as fault location or short-circuit
reactance, etc.).
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
(continued)
Version
P437-304-404/405-605
Changes
Hardware
Communication module A, with communication interface COMM3
(InterMiCOM), may be fitted to slot 16 as an alternative to module
X 6I8O. The order information section has been extended.
Diagram
The upgraded connection diagrams P437.404 (for pin terminal
connection) and P437.405 (for ring terminal connection) now include the
connection scheme for communication interface COMM3.
Release: 19.11.2002
Software
MAIN
The value range of primary power measured values has been extended.
New input signals allow direct transfer tripping without use of 'protective
signaling scheme logic' (function group PSIG).
COMM1(2)
Bug fixing concerning the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol:
For autoreclose, high-speed and time-delayed reclosing commands
(function type 80h, information nos. 80h and 81h) were transmitted as
part of the response to a general interrogation.
The trip signal of back-up overcurrent (BUOC) was transmitted with
ASDU 1 (instead of ASDU 2).
COMM3
New function group: COMM3 (InterMiCOM protection signaling interface)
allows the configuration of end-end channel-aided schemes, without
requiring discrete carrier equipment.
PSIG
The blocking signaling scheme logic is further accelerated by processing
the send and trip decisions within the distance task. In case of DIST
general starting instantaneously the blocking is send.
GSCSG
The status signal GS C S G: T el ec om . faul ty was made available in
conjunction with the implementation of the protective interface.
DTOC
Residual current measuring system: it is now possible to select whether
the residual current value calculated from the three phase currents or the
current value measured by the fourth CT is to be applied.
DTOC ground fault protection is now able to operate in directional mode.
IDMT
Residual current measuring system: it is now possible to select whether
the residual current value calculated from the three phase currents or the
current value measured by the fourth CT is to be applied.
The enable logic within the parameter subsets has been enhanced to the
same state that the other devices in the MiCOM Px3x range provide.
Accuracy of tripping time is improved. In particular, the 'IEC extremely
inverse' characteristic is now within the claimed tolerance range.
f<>
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Measurements of minimum frequency during an underfrequency situation
and maximum frequency during an overfrequency situation have been
added.
C-3
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
(continued)
Version
Changes
P437-304-404/405-605-706
Hardware
No modifications
Release: 30.01.2003
Diagram
No modifications
Software
IDMT
The direction characteristic for short circuit direction measurement based
on negative-sequence current and voltage is now corrected.
When ANSI/IEEE characteristics with reset behavior according to
characteristic are selected, the trip signal now resets as soon as 3% of
the reset time has been exceeded. In previous versions the trip signal
was only reset when the reset time had elapsed completely.
DTOC
DTOC ground fault protection stages set with no time delay (e.g.
D T OC : tIN > = 0 s, etc.) are processed with a higher priority so as to
ensure tripping times of < 30 ms.
GFSC
Accuracy of tripping time is improved. In particular, the 'IEC extremely
inverse' characteristic is now within the claimed tolerance range.
Bug notice: With this version only non-directional timer stage t3 will not
operate when timer stage t2 is set to blocked!
P437-304-404/405-605-707
Hardware
No modifications
Release: 12.02.2003
Diagram
No modifications
Software
P437-304-404/405-605-708
COMM3
Minor modifications so that telegram errors on communication channels
with heavy noise interference are better identified.
Hardware
Binary signal inputs with a higher switching threshold are now available.
Installation is only recommended if the application specifically requires
such binary signal inputs.
Diagram
No modifications
Release: 28.07.2003
Software
P437-304-404/405-605-709
COMM1(2)
Advanced communications software was designed to cope with
communication problems with ESC field units.
DIST
Bug fixing:
The distance protection function could fail to operate when angle settings
σ ≠ 0° and zone extension factors kze > 2 were combined.
MCMON
Bug fixing:
Voltage-measuring circuit monitoring was incorrectly blocked by the
general starting (instead of the distance protection starting).
This bug does not apply to the processing of the m.c.b. trip signal input
and the fuse failure monitoring function.
ARC
Bug fixing:
If configured into the trip command 1 the signal (120 046)
M A IN : T r a n s fe r tr i p . E X T did not lead to a start of ARC.
This version has no release!
Release: ---
C-4
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
(continued)
Version
Changes
P437-304-404/405-605-710
This version has no release!
Release: --P437-304-404/405-606
Release: 11.11.2003
This version is project-specific and only available on request!
Hardware
The Ethernet communication module is now available.
Diagram
The upgraded terminal connection diagrams include the Ethernet
communication module interfaces:
P437.406 (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection)
P437.406 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
Software
UCA2
Initial implementation of the UCA2 communication protocol.
P437-304-404/405-607
Hardware
No modifications
Release: 03.05.2004
Diagram
No modifications
Software
UCA2
The UCA2 communication protocol was enhanced by GOOSE signals,
event signals and fault transmission.
SFMON
A number of device bugs previously lead to a blocking with the second
entry to the monitoring signal memory (i.e. if the recurring fault was
already stored in the monitoring signal memory – see Chapter 10 in the
Technical Manual). This reaction was changed in such a manner that
device blocking will only occur if a renewed appearance of the same
device fault lies within a set "memory retention time" (021.018)
S F M O N : M o n . s i g . r e t e n t i o n . This makes it possible to tolerate
sporadic faults, resulting from control actions, without having to clear the
monitoring signal memory in the interim. This makes it possible to
tolerate sporadic faults, resulting from control actions, without having to
clear the monitoring signal memory in the interim.
The significance of the time stamp was modified to accommodate this
new feature. The time stamp now represents the last appearance of the
fault.
DIST
The transient blocking has been extended to block any distance zone trip
decisions for 2 cycles after the global direction decision changed from
backwards to forwards (only).
Bug fixing:
A transient undervoltage starting could occur with the switching on of a
feeder, which led to an overreaction when the function SOTF was
applied, with the operating mode set to Trip with starting.
PSB
Operating mode ΔZ was added to the power swing detection function.
The alteration speed of the resistance component of positive-sequence
impedance, when entering the power swing detection polygon, is
interpreted.
DTOC
In order to better control transient effects with the protection of seriescompensated lines the direction determination of the DTOC ground fault
protection now operates with a 2-cycle Fourier filter.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
C-5
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
(continued)
Version
Changes
P437-304-404/405-608
Hardware
No modifications
Release: 23.07.2004
Diagram
No modifications
Software
COMM1
Bug fixing:
DNP3: Double transmission of spontaneous signals is now reliably
prevented.
MODBUS: Status signals of LED indicators are now supported.
IEC870-5-101: Conversion from the 3-byte time tag (only for time of day)
to the 7-byte time tag (time of day and date) at
C O M M 1 : T i m e t a g l e n g t h is now supported.
COMM2
It is possible to set whether or not faults can be acknowledged positively
after transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault overview at
the COMM2/PC interface).
(addr. 103 203 C OM M 2 : P o s i ti v e a c k n . fa u l t)
FT_RC
The signal 036 050 A R C : B l o c k i n g E X T is now stored in the fault
record (previously only the resulting signal 004 069 A R C : B l oc k ed
was recorded).
MAIN
The CB close time (e.g. time from close command to closing of CB
contacts) can now be set at addr. 000 032 M A IN : tC B ,c l o s e . This
time duration may be applied in the function ASC for the new
functionality "switch on at point of synchronism".
New signals:
037 252 M A I N : T r i p s i g n a l 1 , 1 p
037 253 M A I N : T r i p s i g n a l 1 , 3 p
These signals (figure 3-61 in the P437 -610 Technical Manual)
correspond to the previous signals M A IN : 1 - p o l e tr i p and
M A IN : 3- pol e tr i p as shown in figure 3-50 in the P437 -602 Technical
Manual.
PSIG
New signal:
037 255 PSIG: Transient blocking
This signal (figure 3-144 in the P437 -610 Technical Manual)
corresponds to the previous signal P S I G : t r a n s i e n t b l o c k e d as
shown in figure 3-126 in the P437 -602 Technical Manual.
ARC
HSR was extended by the 3-pole (only for 1p) operating mode.
With this setting there is a three-pole HSR only with single-pole ground
faults.
The operating mode may now be set via binary signal inputs.
The setting range of the discrimination time has been extended to
0.00 ... 600.00 s.
C-6
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
(continued)
Version
Changes
ASC
New functionality "Switch on at point of synchronism": In slightly
asynchronous networks the reclose command can be controlled in such
a way that it will be issued at the exact point of synchronism.
The close command conditions can now be set individually for ARC and
manual closing.
The reference voltage Vref and the voltage from the corresponding
measuring loop are stored as event data.
GSCSG
New signal:
037 254 GS C S G: Transient blocking
This signal (figure 3-222 in the P437 -610 Technical Manual)
corresponds to the previous internal signal GS C S G: tr a n s i e n t
bl oc k ed as shown in figure 3-191 in the P437 -602 Technical Manual.
P437-304-404/405-608-711
Hardware
No modifications
Release: 10.2004
Diagram
No modifications
Software
COMM1
COMM2
PC
The fault location X in Ohms (F T _ D A : F a u l t r e a c t . , p r i m .
addr. 004 029, function type 80h, information no. 49h) is now suppressed
at the interface (i.e. the telegram is not sent), if its value is 'Not
measured‘.
FT_DA
Bug fixing:
Fault locations of numerical values > 655.35 % were falsely displayed as
small values.
The output of the primary short-circuit reactance
F T _ D A : F a u l t r e a c t . , p r i m . (addr. 004 029) is now made in the
same way as the fault location.
The measuring window for fault data acquisition is determined by the
distance element only if the fault duration is shorter than 55 ms.
PSIG
The blocking logic for the weak-infeed logic was extended.
With the occurrence of a general starting no longer an immediate output
of the send signal is done (as introduced with version -605) when the
operating mode was set to Blocking scheme. It is now only possible to
send the blocking signal within the distance protection task after the
distance directional decision ‘backward’ or 'zone 6' decision is
determined (depending on the operating mode set for sending).
P437-306-406/407-609
ARC
Function change:
There is no longer a zone extension with a rapid reclosure (RRC) when
the parameter at A R C : Z o n e e x t . d u r . R C P S x ( addr. 015 088) is
set to Following HSR.
Hardware
The new hardware variant now offers, per ordering option, two additional
operating thresholds for the binary signal inputs:
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V) (Order ext. No. -463)
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V) (Order ext. No. -464)
Release: 25.02.2005
Installation of the standard variant is still generally recommended if the
application does not specifically require such binary signal inputs with
higher operating thresholds.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
C-7
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
(continued)
Version
Changes
Diagram
No modifications
Software
COMM1
Bug fixing:
Where the Courier protocol was selected a device warm restart occurred
when individual communication parameters were changed (e.g. baud
rate, address, etc.).
FT_RC
The recording duration for binary signals is now limited to 1 minute in
order to prevent recording of endless events.
MAIN
The direct transfer trip function has now been extended by dedicated
send signals so as to avoid latching, which could occur when the trip
signal was used as a send signal.
DIST
Bug fixing:
An erroneous loop selection could occur with a two-phase short circuit
fault between phases C and A, which then led to incorrect distance and
directional decisions, when only the overcurrent starting for phase A was
triggered and phase C starting was only activated because of a current
plausibility check [setting 010 040 M A IN : T r ans fer for 1p
to P or G = f(Imed,Imax)]
MCMON
Bug fixing:
In one case an unwanted overreaction of the fuse failure monitoring
function was observed, which led to distance protection blocking when a
short circuit in the power system had occurred. In the new version the
functional sequence has been enhanced and the default value for the
negative voltage threshold was set to a higher value (addr. 031 056
M C M O N : V n e g > , FF = 0.16 Vnom).
SOTF
The function parameters are now available in the parameter subsets so
as to provide adjustment to changed operating conditions.
An additional sensitive ground overcurrent threshold is now available.
Bug notice:
Unfortunately this current threshold is permanently active (not limited to
the duration of the 'manual close' time) and can therefore not be applied
as intended. This is corrected with version -610.
PSIG
The tripping logic in the Zone extension operating mode has been
accelerated by additionally processing this logic within the distance
protection task. Now typical tripping times of 20 … 30 ms can be
obtained (without delay from signal transmission).
The weak-infeed logic has been extended by an external blocking option
(addr. 036 255 P S I G : B l o c k . w e a k i n f . E X T ).
ARC
Bug fixing:
The change of operating mode via binary inputs previously was only
accepted if the relay was switched from off-line mode back to on-line
mode.
IDMT
The residual current stage has been enhanced with a minimum trip time
and a minimum trip current threshold.
Bug notice:
In this version the directional dependence of the residual current stage is
not operational. This is corrected with version -610.
C-8
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
(continued)
Version
Changes
P437-306-406/407-609-712
Hardware
No modifications
Release: project-specific
Diagram
No modifications
Software
PSIG
Bug fixing:
When P S I G : O p e r a t i n g m o d e P S x = Release scheme and
P S I G : O p e r . m o d e s e n d P S x = Direction-dependent are combined,
a send signal with interruptions may occur.
P437-306-406/407-609-713
Hardware
No modifications
Release: 30.10.2005
Diagram
No modifications
Software
ASC
Bug fixing:
In version –608 the internal timer clock was corrupted during the ASC
operative time. This led to implausible time tags added to binary signals,
which in turn made fault records difficult to interpret. Protection functions
were in no way affected.
Bug fixing:
In version –608 the offset angle A S C : P h i o ffs e t P S x was
considered too small by a factor of 10 (for instance when set to 90° an
internal value of only 9° was considered).
P437-307-408/409-610
Hardware
A processor board with a DSP coprocessor is now available. This
coprocessor provides a better overall performance of the supplementary
functions of the device.
Diagram
The descriptions of the binary signal inputs and output relays have now
been aligned to Px3x standard, i.e. they are generally identified by the
slot number (1 or 2 digits) and consecutive number (2 digits).
Example: K2001 instead of K201 (= first output on slot 20).
Software
Note:
IEC
GOOSE
GSSE
The new communication protocol per IEC 61850 is implemented.
UCA2
This firmware does not support the UCA2 communication protocol.
OUTP
LED
COMM3
Bug fixing:
The signal L O G I C : O u t p u t 3 2 ( t ) 042 095 was missing in the
selection tables for the function assignment to output relays, LED
indicators and the InterMiCOM communication interface.
INP
The mean acquisition time for binary input signals has been reduced:
with DSP:
mean value is 2.1 ms (range 0...6 ms)
without DSP: mean value is 6.5 ms (range 0...12 ms).
Release: 26.02.2006
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Software version –610 is compatible with all previous hardware
releases.
Function groups GOOSE and GSSE:
Implementation of communication procedures for the exchange of binary
information in an Ethernet network section.
Function group GSSE is compatible to previous UCA2-GOOSE.
Function group GOOSE is acc. to IEC 61850-GOOSE.
C-9
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
(continued)
Version
Changes
MAIN
In view of the '3-pole (only for 1p)' ARC operating mode the phaseselective direct transfer trip logic has been modified so that no 3-pole
transfer trip will occur with single-pole faults.
A distance-based phase selection logic has been implemented, which
allows phase selective 1-pole tripping of ground faults by integrated
supplementary functions (e.g. GFSC or DTOC ground fault protection) or
from external parallel protection devices operating in 3-pole mode
(e.g. phase comparison protection).
Priority control of clock synchronization is now settable.
Bug fixing:
Signal L O G I C : O u t p u t 3 2 ( t ) was missing in the function
assignment selection list of the trip commands.
SFMON
In the course of platform harmonization the configuration table of the user
defined alarm condition has been supplemented by the instantaneous
outputs 30…32 and the timed outputs 30…32 (t) of the programmable
LOGIC:
098 053
098 054
098 055
098 056
098 057
098 058
SFMON:
SFMON:
SFMON:
SFMON:
SFMON:
SFMON:
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
30
30 (t)
31
31 (t)
32
32 (t)
~
~
~
~
~
~
042 090 L O G I C :
042 091 L O G I C :
042 092 L O G I C :
042 093 L O G I C :
042 094 L O G I C :
042 095 L O G I C :
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
30
30 (t)
31
31 (t)
32
32 (t)
These logic outputs are included in the warning signals by setting
S F M ON : F c t. a s s i g n . w a r n i n g and they are also recorded in the
monitoring signal memory.
These signals can be used to create an alarm signal under complex
application conditions. This signaling has no influence on the device's
operation (i.e. no warm restart or blocking).
FT_RC
Bug fixing:
The logging of the following signals was done in the next processing
cycle, typically 10 ms later than when the actual state changed:
037 254 GS C S G: T r a n s i e n t b l o c k i n g
035 047 D T OC :
F a u l t N fo r w a r d
035 048 D T OC :
Fault N backward
DIST
It can be selected whether grading timers are triggered from the general
starting condition or with the respective zone starting signal.
Zone 1 and 2 now can be blocked during 1-pole HSR dead time.
The reactance reach of the zones can now be set separately for phaseground and phase-phase measuring loops.
The max. settable reach value has been extended to 400 Ω.
The ground fault starting condition has been made settable by an
'OR'-linked or an 'AND'-linked condition of the IN> and VNG> thresholds,
if the system star point is low-impedance grounded.
MCMON
C-10
Fuse failure detection is now blocked during CB open conditions.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
(continued)
Version
Changes
SOTF
The function has been supplemented by a 'Line dead' detector e.g. SOTF
will only be active if the line has been de-energized for at least a set
minimum time period.
Bug fixing:
The residual current stage introduced in SOTF with version P437 -609 is
now active only during the manual close time.
PSIG
In view of the '3-pole (only for 1p)' ARC operating mode the weak-infeed
logic has been modified so that no 3-pole trip will occur with single-pole
faults.
ARC
The function is now also available when DIST is blocked by a fault in the
voltage-measuring circuit (MCMON) and BUOC is not configured
(external backup protection), but it is without rapid reclosure (RRC).
GFSC
By setting a parameter, either the internally calculated value or the
measured value for the neutral-point displacement voltage can now be
used.
The directional measurement has been enhanced by a settable
compensation reactance (zero-sequence current compensation method)
to allow correct operation on series-compensated lines irrespective of the
power system's supply conditions.
GSCSG
The user-settable blocking conditions have been expanded so as to deal
safely with time-critical applications in conjunction with the ARC function.
DTOC
Triggering of the residual current timer stages can now occur either when
the current threshold is exceeded or, additionally when a directional
decision is made (settable).
Negative-sequence and residual current stages may now be set so that
they are blocked during the 1-pole dead time of the high-speed reclosure
(HSR) of an ARC cycle.
The directional dependence of the ground fault stages may now be
blocked by a binary signal input function; when blocked the respective
stage operates as non-directional.
IDMT
Directional measurement, based on the negative-sequence current has
been adapted to the new method as implemented in GFSC, and the
previously fixed compensation impedance has been replaced by a
settable compensation reactance.
Bug fixing:
With version P437 –609 the ground fault stage operated always as nondirectional, regardless of the setting.
CBF
The complete revision of the circuit breaker failure protection function
now includes a current flow break criterion.
LOGIC
Bug fixing:
Signal L O G I C : O u t p u t 3 2 ( t ) 042 095 was missing in the function
assignment selection list of the 32 equations.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
C-11
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
(continued)
Version
Changes
P437-307-408/409-610-714
Hardware
No changes
Release: 20.09.2006
Diagram
No changes
Software
MCMON
Bug fixing:
From version – 610 the Ineg monitoring was without function.
The signal M C M ON M eas . c i r c . I faul ty (0 4 0 0 8 7 ) could not
become active.
BUOC
Bug fixing:
Correct BUOC tripping times were re-established.
With version -610 a change was implemented to allow that ARC remains
ready in case of a voltage measurement circuit failure, even if no BUOC
protection is configured. Unfortunately, due this change, the BUOC then
tripped instantaneously, if ARC was ready. Also a HSR cycle was
initiated from the BUOC trip, even if the BUOC operating mode is set to
"without ARC".
P437-307-408/409-610-715
Hardware
No changes
Release: 09.10.2006
Diagram
No changes
Software
IEC
Bug fixings:
The inactivity timer is removed, which caused a disconnection of the
device (server) after approx. 49 days (with no messages received from
the client).
After unintentional disconnection or interruption of the communication
between a remote PC (setting software MiCOM S1) and the relay via
tunneling feature, the communication unit of the relay remained in an
open status for the tunnel and no further connection from remote PC to
this relay was possible. Only after a warm restart of the device (e.g.
power-down-up-cycle) the relay is again available for a new remote
connection.
This problem is now solved by introducing a connection monitoring timer.
COMM1
Minor corrections in Modbus and IEC 60870-5-101 protocols
(new communication firmware module 3.18).
P437-307-408/409-611
Hardware
No changes
Release: 28.02.2007
Diagram
No changes
Software
IEC
GOOSE
GSSE
Enhancements of protocol implementation:
2nd SNTP server
VLAN priority
COMM1
C-12
Bug fixing:
The following spontaneous messages were missing:
034.047 MAIN Manual trip signal A
034.048 MAIN Manual trip signal B
034.049 MAIN Manual trip signal C
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
(continued)
Version
Changes
DIST
Improved measuring logic to provide fast 3-pole tripping in case of
phase-phase-ground faults, with one phase-ground loop impedance
getting significantly slower into zone 1.
The underimpedance starting logic has been improved to pick up faster
in case of faults with almost no change in current magnitude.
The directional characteristic is now settable.
PSB
Separate counters for number of stable swings as well as number of pole
slips have been implemented. These counters are accomplished by
settable levels at which binary signals are raised that could be used for
tripping purposes.
Bug fixing:
The ΔZ detection did not operate in all cases, if the apparent
impedance moved “from the left to the right” into the power swing
detection zone.
The maximum blocking timer was not correctly re-triggered each time
when entering the power swing detection zone. Thus it could by
chance time out during a consecutive power swing cycle.
SOTF
The SOTF dead line detection logic could now be enabled or disabled.
PSIG
Transient blocking timer is now always started upon reset of DIST
backward direction decision.
Weak-Infeed Logic blocking feature has been modified to provide poleselective blocking by CB auxiliary contact information (52a inputs).
The scheme logic has been enhanced to cope 3-ended line applications.
The binary signal P S I G : R e c e i v e E X T was renamed to
P S I G : R e c e i v e ( A ) E X T (036 048) and a new signal
P S I G : R e c e i v e ( B ) E X T (006 037) was added. For a 3-ended line
application, the setting P S I G : 3 e n d e d l i n e p r o t P S x can now be set
to ‘Yes’, which has the effect of an (internally calculated) logical ‘and’ of
these two binary signals. After all, the result is made available in
P S I G : R e c e i v e (006 036), which takes the place of the previous
P S I G : R e c e i v e E X T (036 048).
PSIG
The distance dependent send logic has been modified for improved
operation in case of 2pG faults: If fault direction signals forward and
backward are present at the same time, the send signal is based on the
selective Z1 decision only (not on Z1e).
Bug fixing:
In distance-dependent blocking scheme, the PSIG tripping time was not
started, if the zone timing setting was
001.236 DIST Zone timer start = ‘With zone starting’.
ARC
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Zone 1 extension tripping during reclosing is now executed from ARC,
even if PSIG is in operation.
The duration of the zone extension is as long as the set reclose
command (015.067 MAIN Close cmd.pulse time), efen if the reclose
command is stopped because of the close-signal from the CB (015.042
MAIN RC inhib.by CB close = ‘Yes’).
C-13
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
(continued)
Version
Changes
ASC
The selection of voltage control conditions (operating modes) has been
enlarged by an exclusive-OR condition, i.e. (re-)closing is enabled, if
exactly one side is “dead” while the other side must be “live”
(setting abbreviated “N V&Vref or V&n Vref”
means “(NOT V AND Vref) OR (V AND NOT Vref)”).
In operating mode “Vref & Z1 but not V” the meaning of Z1 has been
changed to “DIST zone Z1 trip OR protective signaling Z1e trip”, so
reclosure is possible if the primary fault is on the line.
GFSC
The user settable blocking condition of the function has been changed to
an m-out-of-n selection, using the same enlarged list as for GSCSG.
Consequentially, the previous setting 002.137 GFSC: Block. w. DIST
start is removed.
For ground faults with small neutral displacement voltage an optional
‘virtual current polarisation’ has been implemented. This feature uses a
faulty phase selector, which is based on the measured change of phase
currents.
Along with the signaling scheme (GSCSG) the priority of the function has
been changed to provide faster 1-pole trips.
GSCSG
The selection list for user defined blocking conditions (002.180 GSCSG:
Fct.assign. blocking) has been further expanded by internal trip decisions
as well as parallel and transfer trip signals.
The tripping timer is now started from 039.088 GFSC IN> triggered signal
only.
Transient blocking timer is now always started upon reset of a GSCSG
backward direction decision.
P437-308-408/409-612
P<>
Directional power protection function is now available.
Hardware
The device is now equipped with a new HMI, which provides 6 additional
keys and LED indicators.
The freely configurable LED indicators (H 4 – H 16, H 18 – H 23) are
provided as multi-color LEDs and, depending on the trigger signal, will
show red, green or amber (mixture of red and green) light.
Diagram
No changes.
Release: 31.12.2007
Software
LOC
Two menu jump lists can be defined independently for any of the function
keys.
The L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e a d k e y setting was renamed to
L O C : F c t . R e a d k e y (080 110).
C-14
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
(continued)
Version
Changes
IEC
Implementation of active monitoring of the communications data links to
logged-on clients with the parameter
I E C : T C P k e e p - a l i v e t i m e r (104 062).
(This active monitoring now replaces previous passive monitoring by
parameter IE C : In a c ti v i ty ti m e r (104 050).)
Implementation of an automatic switchover to daylight saving time,
activated by parameter IE C : S w i tc h .d a y l .s a v .ti m e (104 219).
Switchover times for the automatic switch to daylight saving time are
governed by the following settings:
IE C : D a y l .s a v .ti m e s ta r t
(104 220)
IE C : D a y l .s a v .ti m e s t. d
(104 221)
IE C : D a y l .s a v .ti m e s t. m
(104 222)
I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . s t . 0 : 0 0 + (104 223)
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end
(104 225)
I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e e n d d (104 226)
I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e e n d m (104 227)
I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . e n d 0 : 0 0 + (104 228)
Instead of setting a router address and target network, so as to establish
a communication link to a client situated exterior to the local network,
now only the setting of the gateway address is required via
I E C : G a t e w a y a d d r e s s (104 011).
Now 'unbuffered reports' are available for all logical nodes.
The previous I E C : D e a d b a n d ^ v a l u e (104 051) was split into various
measurement-specific values:
IEC: Dead band IP
(104 230)
IEC: Dead band IN
(104 231)
IEC: Dead band VPP
(104 232)
IEC: Dead band VPG
(104 233)
IEC: Dead band f
(104 234)
IEC: Dead band P
(104 235)
IEC: Dead band phi
(104 236)
IEC: Dead band Z
(104 237)
I E C : D e a d b a n d m i n / m a x (104 238)
IEC: Dead band ASC
(104 239)
IEC: Dead band temp.
(104 240)
IEC: Dead band 20mA
(104 241)
F_KEY
The new function group F_KEY has been introduced to do all the settings
related to the function keys.
LED
The function group LED was enhanced to do the color-specific settings
related to the multi-colored LEDs.
SFMON
The following signals have been added to the selection lists for the
warning (Alarm) signaling:
SFMON M.c.b. trip VNG (098 132)
SFMON Setting error PSB (098 128)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
C-15
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
(continued)
Version
Changes
MAIN
The reset functions have been extended:
Now there are two group reset parameters available, each of which will
"simultaneously" reset several memories. The assignment of eligible
memories to the two group reset parameters is configurable. The group
reset is now issued by a manual reset from the local control panel, and
may also be created by linking it to a binary signal input or a function key.
In similar fashion a selection of memories to be reset may be assigned to
the CLEAR key situated on the local control panel. Now each time the
CLEAR key is pressed not only the LED indicators and the display are
reset but the selected memory is also reset immediately.
The signal S F MON M.c .b. tri p V N G ( 0 9 8 1 3 2 ) has been added
to the selection lists for a relay fault (Blocked/faulty) signaling.
DIST
Bug fixing:
In the unlikely case that mutual compensation is used and the ground
factor angle kG of the line was set > 0°, the impedance measurement of
phase-ground loops was using a wrong neutral current compensation.
This error affects only standard processor hardware without DSP
coprocessor (up to -306). It results in false directional decisions, which
would have been identified during normal commissioning tests.
The following parameters are now set in units of Vnom/√3 (instead of Vnom):
D IS T : V N G> P S x (010 056) (010 076) (010 096) (011 016)
D IS T : V N G> > PSx (010 062) (010 082) (011 002) (011 022)
PSB
The Out of Step tripping feature is enhanced by a new “Counting-based
Tripping” features and settable OOS detection zones, which allow
different operation, depending on whether the electrical center of the
power swing is on the protected line or outside.
SOTF
A new option S O T F : A c t i v a t i o n m o d e P S x allows for switching the
function permanently active during dead line condition.
The undervoltage threshold of the dead line detector is changed to the
new value 0.7 Vnom/√3. Furthermore, the dead line detector is
accomplished by an undercurrent detector and an operate-delay timer.
The overcurrent protection is enhanced by an additional phase
overcurrent detection.
C-16
PSIG
A new option P S I G : S t a r t c o n d . t V < P S x (006 148) allows for
having the weak-infeed timer triggered only if the undervoltage condition
and the weak-infeed starting are both present.
GFSC
The signal D IS T G e n e r a l s t a r t i n g ( 0 3 6 2 4 0 ) has been added to
the selection lists for user-defined GFSC blocking conditions.
GSCSG
The current reversal condition has been changed so that transient
blocking gets established each time the GF S C F aul t bac k w ar d / B S
0 3 9 0 9 1 ) decision resets (whether or not a forward decision comes up
is of no relevance any more).
The GSCSG Trip timer is now triggered by GF S C F aul t for w ar d /
L S (0 3 9 0 9 0 ) decision instead of starting condition only.
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
(continued)
Version
Changes
GSCSG
The blocking of the function in case of a voltage measuring circuit failure
is now changed in the same way as done with GFSC since version -610:
If GFSC operates on measured VNG, then the functions get only
blocked, if this VNG measuring circuit is defect, otherwise, if GFSC
operates on VNG calculated from the 3 phase voltages, then the
functions get blocked, if the 3phase voltage measuring circuit is defect.
The signal D IS T G e n e r a l s t a r t i n g ( 0 3 6 2 4 0 ) has been added to
the selection lists for user-defined GSCSG blocking conditions.
Send logic has been modified to prevent Echo after current reversal
conditions or if the receive signal is still present, while local GFSC
already resets.
DTOC
The following parameters are now set in units of Vnom/√3 (instead of Vnom):
D T OC : V N G> P S x (010 045) (010 060) (010 080) (011 139)
CBF
The signal C B F fai l ure ( 0 3 6 0 1 7 ) is now available as compatible
IEC-60870-5-103 spontaneous message.
LIMIT
The following parameters are now set in units of Vnom/√3 (instead of Vnom):
L IM IT : V N G> (014 043)
L IM IT : V N G> > (014 044)
P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 D /// P437-308-408/409-612
C-17
Publication: P437/EN M/Ac8 // AFSV.12.10100 EN /// P437-308-408/409-612
AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com
T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/